Full text of "The Annals and magazine of natural history; zoology, botany, and geology"

See other formats

Sa cneaap

CEs See Ttaglh Pe

ah RAR My KES he Rela Tha
5A At Ds WAT Ce,

Mec behok AE WR Rate A

pig ate
Site Serna i
Ete a a

- Ce rie
ia Hi Gin Se Bate An fee . .
oes 3 eset

: Sena

eT RMSE

Rete Reh:

Bae Re tet Meee

Sie ett se hoRe hoe agi aaintairen ene ey aise
3 Wee S
ee

os
be Mal teh he Mice

fs) waa he Bar > . uP ve oO As 75 — — GY ae ff? ~~ <4 y 4

MS = NO" 5 UY = NY = NER

ASKS m SS > Wash m (Noss 2 m {NOSE
iy ~ = #4 z ye

ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3Iluvus

iY,
“lj?
NVINOSHLIWS
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS

SMITHSONIAN

ILILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S31YVYd!IT LIBRARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTI

a ul Z tu y, 2
4 - 4 z Uy,
=, . = < iy famen
= = is Y fe: a
Oo : is ro) is ro)
ee pe | =z pet) =
ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31YVY!
rad Fd Fe ,
S) ie S) \ °
- x0 - n=
2. > =) =
5 y = [as
el “a a i
Zz Zz Z

OLILSNI NVINOSHLINS SStYVUaII_LIBRARIES

SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT

NVINOSHLINS S3I1¥Vvaal]

SMITHSONIAN

SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN

RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILMLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31YVY

LIBRARIES

LIBRARIES
Ws

INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI

NLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1YVua!l1 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT

INSTITUTION NOILOLILSNI
S3INVYUGIT LIBRARIES

S3I1YVvudlt
ear:
Pe,
ip
S3ItYVvVuyudl

2ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS SAI1YvV

NVINOSHLINWS
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
NVINOSH.LIWS

NLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31YaYVYad!1 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT

Vln

IBRAR 1ES SMITHSONIAN

JOILALILSNI

IBRARIES
JOILALILSNI

SS
JOILALILSNI

5 ee SQW NG RRR KA SN BO
CHAK” om SS Z Rarss 4 mr ne ah m Nts
2) : = ” pad a)

RARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI 2 AWINOSHIS oe LuV
| = < i = OP . pos = VY;
4 Zz 4 Ly, = 4 ‘Yo,
as oO ale a © BE Mt
As Ae a : O mn O ,
Wor Z & 2, = 2 SF /
=~ CS = A = = a
INLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS SJIYVUdIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITU
z a Z 4 Z
7) ea a) a)
= oc = = Jo
+ . o x i; af
S e ce g
2 WS : : :
Jj
SRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IuY
= i t z
2) vee fe) = A )
5 a = 2 \S So E
ry a - > Ce =
e = - - ee
z z a ae
LAN LISA S jSaleVe al I_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTIT
= x re @®s = <
, S a on \ Nae 8 Se
Vie = : eZ :
“ie 2 a ;
7) : ”
BRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNIILSNI
a = ws Z nt
un a ”
ay re’ A Ay | jeer tS
Oe a : : :
= Uyjey S : : :
oO Gy — a — fan)
= ye je) — fe) =
= ae a) ae s, pee |
ILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTIT
ane z is = ‘ Pa
ow = w. = wo
2 i = Hi = a
> YS ra >" ra >
2 XS = 2 = “2
m sy ot m ae m
2) — ap) = wn
BRAR | ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOLENLILSN NVINOSHLIWS |S 3 lay
= pe ‘s Po *. = =
z 2 \o i @%3 z
n” D ~~ WY G@ hi Uy ” 7)
oO As P WY Oo Yi Ul 7, < oO
= 7) ae Zz no Pa
TINLILSNI_NWINOSHLIWS | Sa lYVdaIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTIT!
a ul z . Yy, Zz
2 ‘ 2 = Ui *
= es 2 < fl:
= = ea, a raid ca a
oO = = =a fe)
ad ess | a at’ —->

Wl _y¥
Ori
aT
i
an '
'
:
t
‘ - a
v
7 2
vee

.
-
‘
7 '
-
i)
| i
if!
: yi
i.
2
oo
a) :
yi
t eet
oa : 1
p ; is
; uy i fer Bhi
on
i 7
i
i
on)
mre
in iy?
as
1
)

Bayt
wl i

bu ye
? a R a) Leven °
in

A AM CARD |
a Be q

ay ic On y
pt oleae

p
ot

Praca
‘ul

:
: ‘ 4
: 1 a uf
aati, ( p x De ey
d iy wD gia Y 4 aa ;
os mera Ai uy! uP:
.

i
Bian ;

wage
ius TM

i} 4 o
oon

i Ge
AUNT) payee
Ln ely
i t

‘ Wy
y
i
j
i

To : nv : Va, ia - ye le
? x

1 ae mu
1
Te ae

rig?

wy Gy
ee
he oe

Uae) pea

A acisy Ves pee

rae, »

Ha
e

x
1 i ee
Pomona)

nae

a f, '

Eye a)

; AD er 7 7 ; ,
; Uy : i - : i,
: ” | : i o a UL
oy 4 i ( ee
1 7” e320 a
i ivy wy aii 7 7}
a i] an ‘ 1: :
: ar De ae
- ron i _ : oe 7 : ;
if fy 7 if vi
y . ff a if ‘ ae Gy,
; 7 ae , th i ; ; i mitt . :
ra ve i - > A - : A i :
tea! a we in hae
mu , i i ; : af t; t via
Te fi |i are 1 an ri ity vi
Te ET RL
7 I i a is a} a ie - a 1 eee
0 j or. iy Iigs ati , mh iY hs . mY
Tio - any i a An 7 ,) ae os ’ mi i
} a a), in i pe A 7 ire J ma '
i ; . a a ; is A a "ah ri he ae é ue iL a
7 a 7 nay ait Hh 4 a I hod Mi roe vy: of ir. a
ite : : ii
' a : on ioe o j | Ga i vie iy yt me 7 ” i y per’ . 5 :
,. ya eary yy va te 7 iy ie a
iy AT aN i Ps fi «iD Pi Ai it : a a : Ve i i” Ls
me Lee, A lf ey
5 ' if 7 ae 7 hb - 7 fl Le wae ? § a
an rat i) t A 1 p 7 7 vin ' myn -
: Ti ; ; iy - an : Ait a a of Bia
’ " a : ie Ws pe oP . 7 1 iy : ] a)
rs 7) ai : uN ; iy y unt wi ' } 7
an ff : aT Ol : oa
| ME . i et i : i i Ot Ya
; 1 oe j UP Pay ;
; mi id beers ae Ph PD
! if ni i Deuce *? S i 7 :
7 a oa) 1 Or mn vy i pes if ie
, : ! ; ve BY. we 1th Miah ; 7 rr i ;
i" 7 : o i) uy - oy ¢t{ a) ’
if +] oy. : i oy + rea my a
a ha 7 mon - By Didy Blk On ai} i, } mu i
A) ; Ae

yt! iad male i 1 ST i iW i a fl } ’ J ‘| s
x * f Le 7 i aw " ; th ‘i -_ ;

7 an Ta ta

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

INCLUDING

ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY.

(BEING A CONTINUATION OF THE ‘ANNALS’ COMBINED WITH LOUDON AND
CHARLESWORTH ’S ‘ MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.’)

CONDUCTED BY

ALBERT C. L. G. GUNTHER, M.A., M_D., Ph.D., F.B.S.,
WILLIAM S. DALLAS, F.LS.,
WILLIAM CARRUTHERS, F.R.S., P.L.S., F.G.S.,

AND

WILLIAM FRANCIS, Ph.D., F.LS.

eee

A
VOL. V.—SIXTH SERIES. = Kapaa

NO i

Ve
\ 242\05

i ON. D. ON:
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS.

SOLD BY SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, HAMILTON, KENT, AND CO., LD. ;
WHITTAKER AND CO.: BAILLIERE, PARIS:
MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH :
HODGES, FIGGIS, AND CO., DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN.

1890.

“Omnes res creatse sunt divine sapientiz et potentix testes, divitiz felicitatis
humane :—ex harum usu /ovitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapientia Domini;
ex ceconomiad in conservatione, proportione, renovatione, potentia majestatis
elucet. Farum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibi relictis semper estimata ;
a veré eruditis et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper
inimica fuit.”—Linnxvs.

“Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour
voir qu'elle est le chef-d’ceuvre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rappor-
tent toutes ses opérations.”—Bruckner, Théorie du Systeme Animal, Leyden,

1767.

a0 60000000 0 0 Aine eydkein joo
Obey our summons; from their deepest dells
The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild
And odorous branches at our feet; the Nymphs
That press with nimble step the mountain-thyme
And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed,
But scatter round ten thousand forms minute
Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock
Or rifted oak or cavern deep: the Naiads too
Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face
They crop the lily, and each sedge and rush
That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles,
Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread,
The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne,
All, all to us unlock their secret stores
And pay their cheerful tribute.

J. Taytor, Norwich, 1818.

CONTENTS OF “VOL. V.

[SIXTH SERIES.]

NUMBER XXvV.
Page
I. Some Remarks on the Anatomy of Stephanoceros Evchhornit.
By UPR E VALGENTIN. (Plates Mga il)) f50 scssccccene ss. «
II. Report upon the Hydrozoa and Polyzoa collected by P. W.
Bassett-Smith, Esq., Surgeon R.N., during the Survey of the Tizard
and Macclesfield Banks, in the China Sea, by H.M.S. ¢ Rambler,’
Commander W. U. Moore. By R. Kirkpatrick. (Plate IIl-V.) 11
III. Descriptions of twelve new Species of Lycenide from West
Africa and one from the Solomon Islands, in the Collection of Herbert

(race. By, Haminron, Els Dermer; PSs. oe) i.icciry claisates sehen) ims 24
IV. Description of a new Species of Crocidura from the Amur
Remiona sy 1G. i; DOBSON AN, VERS 20 ost cng ehge ce pale i> 2.4) 31

V. Descriptions of new Pectinicorn Coleoptera. By CHARLEs O.
DUPACETSESEL OM SIGE er cat t Pate eran ysis) auc cia c aleve coin sie Fist ce & aS suctineceue, a otete

VI. Notes from the St. Andrews Marine Laboratory (under the
Fishery Board for Scotland).—No. X. By Prof. M‘Inrosu, M.D.,
BE eaeabe See Oce he mC Acer VAD )ra.0. erate ales die e sitters scale ore siary wire 40

VII. Descriptions of new Species of Longicornia from India and
Ceylon. By CHar.es J.GAHAN, M.A., Assistant, Zoological Depart-

ment isnimshy Viuseum. (Plater) oy. sctsrn oar eye ety wen © io sleteeue 48
VIII. Note on Tealia tuberculata and 7’. crassicornis. By G. Y.

ayer) Ee TBS JDTOONS SG cc's Beye Sine BIC On ENICOIIC OCrLCIeCIne aioe OG COTO 66
IX. Tenth Contribution to the Knowledge of the Fauna of Mada-

pescar, By Dr. AO GunraEr, WR S., (Plate VI). 2. .5.--.. 000. 69

X. Report upon the Crustacea collected by P. W. Bassett-Smith,
Esq., Surgeon R.N., during the Survey of the Macclesfield and Tizard
Banks, in the China Sea, by H.M.S. ‘ Rambler, Commander W. U.

iNtooress day: vale OCOCK 2 ie «Mdia oie olson olercisie s+ stein aichctons Mlle (ole 72
XI. On the Species Ztallus pusillus of Pallas and its Allies. By

\Wig Ike Ctenieyaar iC anyirc wae aie 6 oO oaeoodias oudeeore oducc come aber 80
XII. Critical Notes on the Polyzoa. By the Rev. THomas Hincxs,

NEW AS pol GLC Sora seis hc¥ fala grogeccees fe Shores) sft aie) a Pte ts Oe elezele ch stars teeta ale 83
XITI. On a new Species of Tit. By E.G. MrapE-WaLpo...... 103
XIV. How does the Ugimyia-Larva imbed itself in the Silkworm ?

By Dr. Fr. A VEuNRIe ERI oe eit, tr, ener ok le, Sea ata 1b.

XV. Description of a new Species of Dragon-fly. By W. F.
Kirpy, F.E.S., Assistant in the Zoological Department, British
IRRUSCHII cle asinine W.a Gd Sdn vv oh ve vb FT NR EAD wim Valerie. ys stoi em

iv CONTENTS.

New Books :—Notes on Sport and Ornithology. By His Imperial and
Royal Highness the late Crown Prince Rupotr of Austria.
Translated, with the Author’s permission, by C. G, DANFoRD.—
The Fauna of British India, including Ceylon and Burma.

. Edited by W. T. Bianrorp. Fishes, by Francis Day.—
\Bergens Museums Aarsberetning for 1888.—Proceedings of the
Bristol Naturalists’ Society. New Series, vol. vi. part i. for
1888-89

Proceedings of the Geological Society

Ona new Entoniscian (Pinnotherion vermiforme) parasitic on the
Pinnotheres of Modiola. By MM. A. Giard and J. Bonnier ;
Deep-sea Trawling off the S.W. Coast of Ireland.—Additional
Foraminifera, by Joseph Wright

NUMBER XXVI.

XVI. On the Structure of Coccosteus decipiens, Agassiz. By R.
H. Traquare, MD; RS. (Plate X:) 23.05.00" «seme eee
XVII. A List of the Reptiles and Batrachians of Amoorland, By
G. A. BouLENGER. (Plate IX.)

oe.0 je-e Bie (0) oe) ue yee «|e: 10) [¢, (sake eee lessens

XVIII. Notes on some Heliozoa. By M. Eve. PenarD

XIX. Description of a new Species of Sorex from Saghalien
Island. - By G: E. Dowson, M.A., FBS. 2.0... 6.00 ieee ee ee eee

XX. Divergent Evolution and the Darwinian Theory. By Rev.
Joun T. Guxicr, Ph.D

XXI. Description of a new Genus of Oriental Cicadide. By W.
L. Distant

S @ 0.6; ee ya 1-8 (e).0 016.0 8) 8). 0! 0; @ 0 (8) 0 ‘u, O18 6: \6)@ (8/00, 0) 0708 (0 (re) a Rene nere eens

Soc eee ence Foe nese see e ee eestor reeset earniee

XXII. Descriptions of two new Species of Acr@a from Mombasa.
By H. Gros SMITH ...

Cre et ee ee ee

XXIII. Observations on some Coleoptera from the Bonin Islands.
By Cuartes O. WaterHovse and C. J. GAHAN

XXIV. Descriptions of three new Species of Butterflies from New
Treland, captured by the Rev. R. H. Rickard, in the Collection of H.
Grose-‘Smith: By H. Grose SMITH ......222.% 050) osimtiren ate

XXV. Synoptical Revision of the Family Halacaride. By Dr.
E. L. TRovEssaRT

s 8 0 ee 0) @) 8 0 6 © 0 4 0 eeu ele e # 66 8/10 Sle cle) ws \0/ 6) \0) le (0 *)etemnieta

XXVI. The right Generic Names of some Amphipoda. By the
Rey. Tuomas R. R. STEBBING, M.A

eee e rere een eee ee eee eee ee eee

New Books:—The Flora of Suffolk. By W. M. Hinp, LL.D., assisted
by the late Cuurcuitt Baxnrneron, D.D., F.L.8.—The Fauna
of British India, including Ceylon and Burma, Published under
the Authority of the Secretary of State for India in Council.
Edited by W. T. Branrorp. Birds.—Vol.I. By Evernr
W. OaTEs

Mimicry of the Environment in Pterophryne histrio, by My. J. E.

Ives; On Seasonal Dimorphism in Japanese Butterflies, by Dr.
UNG (0) 19) Oh. ee cn Iroc wyscior foram. Do oc

Page

Spe nT nM rr nee rr 113—119
Meroe a . 120, 121

122—124

125

sige. 4/8 mae itpenckaia/e im eRe Mera Rennie aye) eens 194—197

198—200

CONTENTS,
NUMBER XXVII.

XXVITI. On Abdominal Appendages in Hexapoda. By E. Haase.

XXVIII. On the Nomenclature of the Oral Folds in the Shells of
Clausilia. By Evear A. Smita, F.Z.S., and B. B. Woopwarp,
eG See Cente, Ala AR Hes. 1 AL). 52 ae. poise choir civis ein ee oes ees

XXIX. Descriptions of new Species of Lepidoptera from Central
America. By HERBERT Deuce, F.LS., F.R.G.S., F.Z.S8.........

XXX. Descriptions of two new Central-American Buprestide.
Piya CHAE EB Os VW ATER OUSH «510. ree. sc/cie a's" Tele rine aso ornopieinis

XXXI. On the Muscular Impressions of some Species of Carbon-
iferous and Jurassic Nautiloids compared with those of the recent
Nautilus. By Artuvr H. Foorp, F.G.S8., and G. C. Crick, Assoc.
R.S.M., F.G.8., of the British Museum (Natural History)

XXXII. Description of a new Papilio from the West Coast of
PMTRVCH eee Eye el mCROSE IO BILLH ic cieials <5 She Sroacls cence ee rien a
XXXIIT. Description of new Species of Crocidura from Africa.
yer. JE DOBSON MEAS HORS. jai: clare spa Slamaiiesrale lysis oa's2

XXXIV. On the Constitution of the Body in the Blattide. By
1D) IRA SR ee ac orn OO ee enn Gnear Oba on KOU Oem

XXXYV. Description of a new Genus of the Homopterous Family
Cicadide. By W.L. Distant

a) (ehig (e(ese 10 e)(e,8 (6; 0 @ 6) 6, O75: v8), 0) @) she! vo) ° 18'/e) oy eel ste

XXXVI. Diagnosis of a new Cynopterus from Borneo. By OLp-
FIELD THOMAS

XXXVII. Report upon a small Collection of Scorpions and Centi-
edes sent from Madras by Mr. Edgar Thurston, of the Government
Central Museum. By R.1I. Pocock, of the British Museum (Natural
ebetrtes crits Jom Ee che Nl De ego creator ch era. 9 ate isNGi a5 acces cotta Ser Ae TEs

XXXVIII. Description of a new Genus and Species of Scorpion
belonging to the Group Jurint. By R. I. Pocock, of the British
Museum (Natural History). (Plate XI. B, figs. l-le.) ..........

New Books.—A Moncegraph of Oriental Cicadide. By W. L. Dis-
TANT. Part 1.—A Catalogue of the Mantodea, with Descriptions
of new Genera and Species, and an Enumeration of the Speci-
mens in the Collection of the Indian Museum, Calcutta. By J.
Woop-Mason. No. 1

ale ce’) via) (<9) 0; 6) 6) e! oF @ie,4) ee) m, ee) s\/eli@ wile) ele! 6) fet 91.0

Proceedings of the Geological Society

@; S'\0) 101 0). A160) oe |8)-0) 06) wer 0.01.0 el oF 610) 6) eee

Note on a Young Specimen of Zources viviparus, by Ernest W. L.
Holt, Marine Laboratory, St. Andrews ; On the Relationship of
the Annelida and Mollusca, by M. A. Giard; On the Fauna of
Mountain-lakes. By Dr. F. Zschokke ; On the Actinian Genera
Avgir and Fenja, by Prof. F. E. Schulze and Dr. D. C. Daniels-
sen; On the Anatomy and Developmental History of Petromy-
zon Planert, by M. K. Nestler; The Amphipoda of the Boulon-
nais.—I. Unciola crenatipalmata, Spence Bate, by M. Jules
Bonnier

Page
201

209

218

224

236

250

253

Mei e ae ath ais ae tes, =. Sea aie eres tena adie 256—263

vi CONTENTS.

NUMBER XXVIII.
Page
XXXIX. Descriptions of new and imperfectly-defined Species of

Jurasic Nautili contained in the British Museum (Natural History).
By Artrsur H. Foorp, F.G.S., and G. C. Crick, Assoc.R.S.M.,

E.G.S., of the Geological Department, British Museum .......... 265
XL. On the Dentition of Plewroplax (Pleurodus), A. S. Woodw.

By James W. Davis PS, (late Sait) Ts... - «re ee 291
XLI. Evidence of a Fossil Tunny from the Coralline Crag. By A.

SMITH WOODWARD, H.Gest | BZ Siasies cients 6 <6 x. ave CORE 294

XLII. Notes from the St. Andrews Marine Laboratory (under the
Fishery Board for Scotland).—No. XI. By Prof. M‘Inrosn, M.D.,
DD RS, OCC. ise ehers micieco aft el clacjarote eieealeisiopio’s utc peo enema 296

XLUI. British Fossil Crinoids. — I. Historical Introduction.

II. The Classification of the Inadunata Fistulata. By F. A. Barner,
B.A., F.G.S., Assistant in the British Museum (Natural History).

(UME OO NG) Wot ocheagoae boeo uaa ncoomoonedgumU Tasca a 0d anc - 506
XLIV. Descriptions of new Species of Kast-African Butterflies.
By My NARYISHARPE 23h... toegie > le tie eu os oe erate 039

New Books :—A Catalogue of British Fossil Vertebrata. By ArtHuRr
SmirH Woopwarp, F.G.S8., and CHARLES DAVIES SHERBORN,
F.G.S.—North-American Geology and Paleontology for the use
of Amateurs, Students, and Scientists. By 8S. A. Mirner.—A

| Catalogue of North-American Paleozoic Crustacea, confined to
the non-Trilobitic Genera and Species. By AnTHony W.
WEG Se; bdasdo sup pebooriens ooudineo Crea ado esos. 4 387—340

Proceedings 0 the Geological Society .......2..-.0+» «emesis 341

On Bucephalus Haimeanus, by M. L. Huet ; On the Formation of the
Antherozoids in Ludorina elegans, by M. P. A. Dangeard 341—343

NUMBER XXIX.
XLV. The “British Area” in Marine Zoology. By the Rev.

Canon Norman, M.A., DiGi, PLS. Ge... os. aie oe oo eerie 346
XLVI. New Species of Indian Butterflies. By Colonel C.

SwitHony PiL.S., Z59., Gel avn te aes ctes sc ers ote tn eee 353
XLVII. New Scarabeide in the British Museum. By CHARLES

©; WATERBOUSHY « ¢.00).o6 sie ote oem ae aif «scale i ata) dear 365

XLVIII. British Fossil Crinoids—II. The Classification of the
Inadunata Fistulata (continued). By F. A. Barurr, M.A,, B.G.S.
(CBlate KV aa be ib oe tas Oe oatinge Wits «6.0 «ole ln enema 373

CONTENTS. Vil

Page
XLIX. On some new and imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic,
Cretaceous, and Tertiary Nautili contained in the British Museum
(Natural History). By ArtHur H. Foorp, F.G.S., and G. C.
Crick, Assoc.R.S.M., F.G.S., Assistant in the Geological Depart-
TATED CEOS a VU SEUTING Geter. ares a) ose tiojsiers, Siti e aie eseusiisisyseres) &:a\'alelinvet ste. 388

L. Further Descriptions of new Coleoptera of the Family Scara-
beide in the British Museum. By CuHaries O. WATERHOUSE .... 409

New Book :—Memoir on the Anatomy of the Humpback ‘Whale
(Megaptera longimana, Rudolphi). By Joun SrrurHers, M.D. 415

On Excavations made in Rocks by Sea-Urchins, by J. Walter
LAGRIEES 6 olic init NRGIE EE tao cc cca onc) Din DES nertr cao anOgCS Ov Urc 416

NUMBER XXX.

LI. On the Morphology and Phylogeny of the Organization of
tron CSCOC Hamm Es ya Os TAU Siviei ches cov yer vveveler tl cleo: sys'(eieqe sors) oe) oles shot on 417

LIT. Notes on some Ganoid Fishes from the English Lower Lias.
By A. Smiru Woopwarp, F.G.S., F.Z.S., of the British Museum
Natanalescinstory, inCreate: 66 VLG iyo wisepsicrsle-asislendhes saya vie er ot eielieters 430

LIII. Description of a new Genus and Species (Parymenopus
Davisoni) of Mantodea from the Oriental Region. By J. Woop-
Mason, Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of
Comparative Anatomy in the Medical College of Bengal, Calcutta.
irsrnbeee NAVAN SINUS) che cnctee te ate, tool veda ty eicrs Sisko) 9 elena win’s.0) aco/ausiie'e dea s 437

LIV. Description of Trienocorypha Dohertii, the type of a new
Genus and Species of Mantodea. By J. Woop-Mason, Superin-
tendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of Comparative
Anatomy in the Medical College of Bengal, Calcutta. (Plate
DA NVIL TS IB) Sic pitges oi I etiSIG a Oe PROTO CC ee ee eee Or ener eta aks 439

LV. Further Descriptions of Butterflies and Moths collected by
Mr. F. J. Jackson in Eastern Africa. By Emmny Mary SHarpr .. 440

LVI. On the Varieties of Chaleides ocellatus, Forsk. By G. A.
Sta MENG CHIGED es ce eec arate siet <veishs'e/aie: yells onal osioids 5 icin Arms oe) aWee ovorap OITA eye 444

LVII. On a new American Species of the remarkable animal
Phoronis. By E. A. ANpREws, Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University,
RlGMOre, USA ois su cic cevn sees ee ' ahs aerate 445

- LVIII. Descriptions of three new Species of Lycenide. By
Colonel C, Swimen AWS. Y.ZS., Sea iin. owed ay die doe eons 449

LIX. Revision of British Mollusca, By the Rey. Canon A. M.
INRA AN ee OD) Os Ee Sav RCs eds We ities oie. Hate vac stelec-aratene 452

Vill CONTENTS.

Page
LX. On a new Sparrow-Hawk from Madeira. By R. Bowpier
EVAUIP Hs Peas, WUC alate ways syne io latela siakeee eee hie o ols omipIee «vin ae OER
British Fossil Crinoids, by F. A. Bather, M.A., F.G.S.; On a few
Californian Meduse, by J. Walter Fewkes ; Chemical Re-
searches on the Fossil Tests of Foraminifera, Mollusca, and
Crustacea, by M. Stanislas Meunier ..............+.- 485—487
WNGOX Seri, po aro sie Hero enee i Siejagco tne ae arekeiea\e a0 eine oes 8S

PLATES IN VOL. V.

Puate I.)
it)
Ill.
nV x New Hydrozoa and Polyzoa.
a Chameleon Willsii.
VII. New Longicorns.
VILL. Abnormal Hydromeduse.—Atlanta from St. Andrews.
IX, Rana amurensis.—Bombinator orientalis.
X. Structure of Coccosteus decipiens.
XI. Oral Folds of Clausilia——Uromachus pictus.
XI. New Scorpions and Centipedes.
XII. Dentition of Pleuroplax.
XIV. British Fossil Crinoids.
XV. |
XVI. Centrolepis asper.—Coccolepis liassicus.—Undina barroviensis.
XVII, Parymenopus Davisoni.—Triznocorypha Dohertii.

Anatomy of Stephanoceros Eichhornii.

SPE esAN NALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SIXTH SERIES. ]

Ge tdccetbeeanee per litora spargite muscum,
Naiades, et circiim vitreos considite fontes:
Pollice virgineo teneros hic carpite flores:
Floribus et pictum, divee, replete canistrum.
At vos, o Nymphe Craterides, ite sub undas ;
Ite, recurvato variata corallia trunco
Vellite muscosis e rupibus, et mihi conchas
Ferte, Dee pelagi, et pingui cenchylia succo."’
N. Parthenii Giannettasii Kol, 1,

No. 25. JANUARY 1890.

I.—Some Remarks on the Anatomy of Stephanoceros
Kichhornii. By Rupert VALLENTIN.

[Plates I. & II.]

NoTWITHSTANDING the fact that this Rotifer has been known
to exist for nearly one hundred and thirty years, forming as
it unquestionably does one of the most interesting objects for
microscopical exhibition, still much remains to be learnt
concerning its anatomy.

Having recently secured some very large specimens, I
naturally consulted the last monograph (1) * with which I am
acquainted, and was astonished to find how great were the
differences of opinion concerning the most fundamental points
of its anatomy. It then occurred to me to try if some of
these points could not be determined by means of serial sec-
tions, since all other means had failed; and my results,
although good, still leave considerable room for improvement.

I assume on the part of the reader a slight acquaintance
with the anatomy of the animal, such as may be obtained
from any text-book, and so will proceed to discuss those
results which my work has so far yielded.

* The numbers refer to Bibliographical List at end.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. it

2 Mr. R. Vallentin on the

The Tube.—The tube or case in which the animal usually
dwells consists of a jelly-like material, extending from the
collar to the extremity of the foot. Into this, when the
necessity arises, the animal can retire. It is formed by the
young Rotifer soon after its exit from the parent’s tube;
but whence it originates has hitherto escaped observation.
Mr. Jackson (2) says “Some few Rotifera develop round
themselves a gelatinous case, which they inhabit perma-
nently (Floscularia) or temporarily (Philodina), the origin of
which is unknown.” Dr. Hudson (loc. cit.) says, “ Neither
salivary, gastric, nor foot-glands have been observed in
Stephanoceros; but, as the animal secretes a large and com-
paratively solid tube, it is clear it must have some organ for
this purpose or that the substance of which the tube is con-
structed oozes from the surface of the body.” The most
important observer is Mr. Gosse (loc. cit.). He says, “ A
specimen, which was hatched under my eye, swam for ten
minutes, and then became permanently attached to the upper
glass of the box, so that it was vertical in position, with the
foot next the eye, a favourable aspect for observing the
development of the case. It presently began to dilate its
body, and, in about five minutes from its attachment, I per-
ceived a distinct filmy ring round it, perfectly circular, whose
diameter was about twice that of the body. The little animal
now began to lean over to one side, and the ring soon had
another segment additional, leaning in the same direction.
The case, for such it was, looked like two broad hoops of
glass, each swollen in the middle and set one on the other,
but not quite concentrically, at least to the eye of the observer.
It was manifest that it was produced from an excretion from
the body, owing its form and size to the animal’s moving
round on the foot as on a pivot.”

It has been a fact familiar for many years to zoologists
that many of the migratory Rotifera possess in the foot
glandular bodies, the secretion from which enabled them to
fix themselves for a long or short period to any substance.

Dr. Zacharias (3), in his paper on Rotifer vulgaris, says,
“We know that they [pedal glands] are the seat of a secre-
tory activity, and secrete a sticky product which serves to
attach the animal to smooth surfaces.”

Eckstein (4) gives a description of glands in the foot of
Floscularia, and says, ‘ Der Fuss, welcher von einer faltigen
Haut bekleidet ist, endigt in zwei sehrkleinen Spitzen, zwischen
denen eine etwas liingere Roéhre hervorragt.” He gives a
figure of the glands as seen in optical longitudinal section.

With regard to Stephanoceros: it seems on the face of

Anatomy of Stephanoceros Eichhornii. 3

Mr. Gosse’s careful observations that the source whence this
secretion arises is not from a single spot, but from a consi-
derable area. In a transverse section (PI. I. figs. 7-9) the four
pairs of muscles in the foot will be seen, each interspace being
occupied by a cell possessing a nucleus and nucleolus, it being
by these that the tube is secreted. The cuticle throughout
the entire animal is very thin. Mr. Jackson (loc. cit.) says,
“The body is protected by a cuticle secreted by an under-
lying layer of ectodermic protoplasm with scattered nuclei.”
It seems to me probable that these glandular cells belong to
the epidermis, which in other parts of the animal is so indis-
tinct that it is difficult to make it out even with high powers.
The “leaning over’ and “ the moving round on the foot as
a pivot ” noticed by Mr. Gosse would be for two purposes—
the former to solidify the case, and by pressing it down cause
it to adhere to any foreign substance; the latter to keep a
central space clear, so as to allow the animal sufficient room
for its body when contracted. While these processes were in
progress the animal would be pouring out a fresh supply, and
so we should soon find it possessed of a tube of sufticient
strength to afford shelter for the occupant.

Thinking it possible that the above conclusions might be
verified by comparison with other species, I cut some serial
sections of Melicerta ringens. It is well known that the
young first secrete a fine tube, and afterwards build a tube
of pellets round it externally. Prof. Williamson (5) says,
“The animal [Melicerta| attaches itself by the tail to some
fixed support, and develops from the skin of the posterior
portion of its body a thin hyaline cylinder, the dilated extre-
mity of which is attached to the supporting object.’ On
examining sections through the foot 1 was gratified to find
the mucous cells occupying the same position, though reduced
one fourth in size, but resembling in every feature those in
Stephanoceros. 1 think therefore one may safely assume that
the tube in both instances originates from these cells.

Muscles—This was the first point to which I directed my
attention. Dr. Hudson (loc. cit.) says, ‘‘ There are consider-
able differences of opinion about the muscular system. Dr.
Leydig (loc. cit.) says that there are four muscles which rise
in the foot and each of which divides into a pair as it crosses
the trunk, and then subdivides into smaller branches as it
passes over the coronal cup to the base of the lobes. Mr.
Gosse makes them to be five pairs, and says that usually each
pair runs up the trunk from the foot in a line with one of
the arms, and then, before reaching it, divides into diverging
branches which, at remote points, are united to 2 muscular

4 Mr. R. Vallentin on the

collar close to the base of the arms. He notices, however,
that he has seen cases where the muscles run down direct
from the depressions between the lobes without uniting to
form pairs. My own opinion, after prolonged observation of
many specimens, is that there are really six pairs of muscles,
and that they are arranged in the following fashion. Hach
pair runs up the foot, looking like a single muscle, and the
reason why never more than four (pairs) are visible in the
foot from any point of view is that there is always a pair on
each side of the animal (however viewed) which is there lost
to sight. At the junction of the foot and trunk each pair
begins to open a little, and by the time they have reached
the bottom of the coronal cup the constituents of each pair
diverge obviously from each other, and terminate usually at
the base of some one of the depressions between the lobes,
but in such a fashion that the constituents of the same pair
never end in the same depression.”

According to my observations their arrangement is as fol-
lows :—On reference to figs. 7-11 (Pl. I.) four pairs of muscles
will be seen placed at equal distances from one another almost
immediately under the cuticle, the interspaces being occupied
by the mucous cells previously mentioned. Owing to the
tapering shape of the foot these muscles tend naturally to
converge towards the fixed extremity ; and so we find that in
this latter region they come into contact, the mucous cells
disappearing, the apex containing muscles only. At the junc-
tion of the foot with the body the muscles of each pair separate
a little, and as they run forwards keep close under the cuticle,
and never leave their own portion of the body. Anteriorly
they terminate in a sphincter-muscle placed in the collar at
the bases of the arms. So far as I have been able to gather
from previous writers it appears to me that sufficient import-
ance has not been attached to this muscle, styled by Mr. Gosse
“circular.” On examining a living specimen in a healthy
condition, we find that when it retracts into the tube the
bases of the arms are brought together by the contraction of
this “ circular’ muscle, and the longitudinal muscles being
almost simultaneously brought into play, a rapid retreat of
the animal into its tube is the result. ‘lhe presence of this
muscle is also evident when the animal issues forth again,
the arms being protruded as a bundle and then opened out,
the sete clothing them being immediately brought into play.

Nervous System.— Dr. Hudson (doc. cit.) is the only writer
who has hitherto seriously raised the question whether or not
that part of the Rotiferon which usually passes as the brain
is really a nervous structure. He says, ‘“ What is probably

Anatomy of Stephanoceros Kichhornii. 5

the nervous ganglion is a peculiar organ consisting of large
clear cells lying at the back of the vestibule near ‘the dorsal
surface. Above it and well under the dorsal surface is a
three-lobed, granular, semiopaque body with which the
nervous ganglion is possibly connected. ‘The nervous gan-
glion in many of the Rotifera, especially among the Notom-
matadex, shows a marked cellular structure at “the lower end
which loses itself in a granular, semiopaque, upper portion ;

but it must be admitted that if these peculiar bodies constitute
the nervous ganglion of Stephanoceros, it is rather their position
than their shape and structure that would lead us thus to
interpret them.” Mr. Cubitt (6) says, ‘It [the brain] is seated
in the anterior region in a dorsal aspect; it is pear-shaped,
constricted in the middle, where it supports certain small
processes which traverse its substance as well as project be-
yond. In active individuals the brain is large and prominent,
but less conspicuous in others, whose sluggish movements
indicate disease or age ; its structure is not granular, except
at its internal attachment, and is in no way related to the
granular layers that occur on each side of it. It presents
more the appearance of a cellular structure, but differs essen-
tially from the character of such a structure .. . the divisions
incline to a pentagonal arrangement, and each junction or
union of the fibres is distinguished by a definite nucleated
swelling, faintly resembling Gratiolet’s figures of the nerve-
cells of the spinal cord.” My own observations show the
“ brain’? to be a somewhat cylindrical organ, and the walls to
be composed of irregularly-shaped oval cells, each possessing a
nucleus and nucleolus. Hach cell is wholly or partially filled
with granular protoplasm, and as the secretion present in the
central space is also granular, one may fairly assume that the
granules originated from the cells and that the cells were in
an active state at the time of the death of the animal (véde
Pl. Il. figs. 13 and 14). The function of this organ will, I
think, be easily demonstrated if we examine the living animal,
Dr. Hudson (/oc. cit.) says, “‘ From the spot where it [the brain]
adheres to the wall of the vestibule a sort of protrusile tongue
or taster rises, which can be pushed forward so as nearly to
fill up the interval between the knobbed ciliated ends of the
ciliary wreath. ‘This tongue may be seen incessantly pressing
backwards and forwards as the food passes into the vestibule,
as if discriminating between the passing atoms, just as the
two tasters do in MM. ringens.” Hxamination of transverse
and longitudinal sections shows that the cylindrical orgau
previously described is open at the upper end, where it com-
municates with a definite single tube enclosed by thin mem-

6 Mr. R. Vallentin on the

branous walls and narrowing towards its distal extremity,
where it apparently opens into the retracted vestibule. This
tube corresponds in its relations with the so-called ‘ taster ” of
Dr. Hudson, and is, in my opinion, identical with it. On
reference to Pl. II. fig. 14 the opening of this duct into the
vestibule can be seen. Fig. 13 shows the proximal extremity
of the duct with the secretion therein and its connexion with the
apex of the so-called “ brain.” The suggestion I yan is this : :
the organ is of a salivary nature, the we fongue ” r “taster ’
being a duct, its use being that as each SOE. of food is
passed into the vestibule a minute portion of this secretion
passes with it. This view seems all the more probable when
we consider that salivary glands, which are present in the

majority of the Rotifera, are absent in this species. As-
suming this to be the case, is there any other structure to
which one can point as being nervous? This, I think, can
be answered in the affirmative. No observer can have failed
to notice in the living animal the large, oval, nucleated cells
placed close to the cuticle on either side of the collar. Dr.
Hudson ((oc. cit.) says, “‘ oval nucleated cells are also easily
seen in the wall of the coronal cup when the animal is viewed
from either side.” Sections taken in a plane parallel to
the long axis of the animal show these to resemble in a
marked degree unipolar ganglion-cells; the single process
given off from each cell running anter iorly and ter minating in
the plumes or arms (PI. II. fig. 1). This appears to receive
further confirmation on the examination of Melicerta ringens.
When this Rotiferon is protruding from its tube, the two paired
antenne placed ventrally, the paired recurved hooks and the
rudimentary third antenna placed between them protect it
dorsally, and so it is guarded on all sides. Sections show
each of these to be furnished with a nerve-fibre, clearly showing
their sensory nature. In Stephanoceros, however, we find
the plumes or arms performing two functions: they -act as
tactile organs, and, being furnished with sete, as food-collectors
for the animal.

Hyes.—The remarks I have to make regarding these struc-
tures do not agree with those made by previous investigators.
Dr. Hudson (loc. cit.) says, ‘The eyes lie on either side of
the nervous ganglion; they may be seen by a dark field
illumination.” Mr, Cubitt (doc. cit.) gives the most exhaustive
account. He says, “ ‘Their true character is difficult to deter-
mine ; they resemble in a marked degree the eyes of Verte-
brates, consisting of a globe, sending off posteriorly a fibre to
the brain, and possessing anteriorly a pigment-spot, which,
while favouring the form of a compound type, contains within

Anatomy of Stephanoceros Hichhornii. 7

itself a central refracting medium.” He is uncertain
‘“‘ whether they incline to the simple or compound type ; they
are eminently calculated to fulfil the purposes they are required
to serve, in simply conveying light, though not the perception
of objects to the brain, for they possess no choroid.”

I must confess that on the strength of the foregoing remarks
my curiosity was considerably aroused. [| examined my
sections taken through the region where, in the living animal,
I had seen these red bodies without finding any structure at
all agreeing with a visual organ. All that I could find were
two spherical bodies, one being placed more superficially than
the other, of a chitinous nature, and which, when examined
with a dark-ground illumination, resembled in every way the
so-called eye. The firmer and more external one is imbedded
in a homogeneous structureless mass, which presents at some
points certain lines of no definite outline (véde Pl. II. fig. 6).
The organ appears to be composed of two parts, an outer ring
of a highly refractive nature, enclosing a central opaque mass.
The second eye is placed deeper in the tissues of the animal,
and the homogeneous mass in which it is placed does not
appear to possess the firmness noticed in its fellow. The
organ is composed of a less dense material, splinters readily
under the knife, and shows in consequence its structure
admirably. These organs are not present in all my sections.
As to their use to the animal I am unable to offer at present
any suggestion ; but I think one may safely assume they are
not visual organs.

Ovary and Development.—The remarks I have to make
under this heading are few, but still of considerable interest.
The earliest writer, so far as I can find, who has touched upon
the origin of the envelope surrounding the ovum is Prof.
Huxley. He says (7), “ The ova are developed thus :—One
of the vesicles increases in size, and reddish elementary
granules appear in the homogeneous substance round it. ‘This
accumulation increases until the ovum stands out from the sur-
face of the ovary; but invested by its membrane which, as
the ovum becomes pinched off as it were, takes the place of a
vitellary membrane.”

Dr. Zacharias (oc. cit.) says, ‘‘'The process of separation
is so effected that a portion of the enveloping membrane of
the ovary is separated with it and transferred to the ovum, so
that the embryo in its development lies in a completely closed
hyaline vesicle, which, from its origin and function, is to be
regarded as a real uterus.” With these remarks my investi-
gations entirely agree; but, as both the above-mentioned
authors obtained their views by means of optical sections, I

8 Mr. R. Vallentin on the

have thought it desirable to give a figure of it in section, so
have placed fig. 18 among my illustrations.

Dr. Hudson (loc. cit.) says, “In Stepkanoceros (as in a few
other Rotifera) the young (as Ehrenberg conjectured) is
occasionally born alive.” In all my serial sections of this
Rotifer embryos are found in section in the body-cavity in
various stages of development. In the case of some they are
in a most advanced condition ; the trophi are to all appear-
ance fully formed and in a fit state to allow the Rotiferon to
lead a separate existence. They do not appear to occupy any
definite space in the body-cavity, being, as stated by Dr.
Zacharias (oe. cit.), “ thrust hither and thither by the move-
ments of the animal.” At the same time, however, the fact
must not be passed over in silence that the Rotiferon, besides
possessing embryos in the body-cavity, also possesses ova
within the tube. Unfortunately I have not been successful
enough to obtain these latter in section, owing to the tube
invariably dissolving during the various treatments the animal
has to pass through before it is ready for the microtome. ‘The
ovum being simply placed within the cavity of the tube, and
not attached to anything, is easily lost.

1 have not as yet been fortunate enough to witness the
birth of the embryos; bearing in mind their large size and
the comparative smallness of the cloacal opening, it seems to
me most probable that the parents die, and by their death
liberate the enclosed embryos. Quite recently 1 have on two
occasions found in my small aquarium partially decayed
specimens, with two, and in some instances three, embryos
within the tube, and swimming therein apparently ina healthy
conditicn. ‘These embryos may, however, have been hatched
from those eggs within the tube ; but in one instance there
were within the tube two unhatched eggs which also con-
tained free embryos.

In one series of sections I found an ovum that had formed a
gastrula by epibole (PI. I]. fig.17). Dr. Zacharias has viewed
this in Rotifer vulgaris, but has given no figure of it. The
figure I have given was obtained in section of a specimen, so
will confirm his remarks. Unfortunately I have been unable
to secure any more specimens containing embryos exhibiting
the early segmenting stages; but from those 1 possess more
advanced I am inclined to imagine that after segmentation
eee sets in and rapidly obliterates the previously existing
cells.

Body-cavity.—Mr. Jackson (loc. cit.) says, “the ccelome
does not extend into it” [the foot]. On reference to figs. 7
and 8 it will be noticed that, owing to the mucous cells failing

Anatomy of Stephanoceros Eichhornii. 9

to meet in the centre, a considerable space exists in this region
of the foot. As to whether or not this space is caused by the
reagents used I am unable definitely to determine ; anyhow,
it is present in all my sections, and is also plainly visible in
the same region in Melicerta ringens. Owing to the tapering
shape of the foot this space gradually decreases in size as one
passes to the attached extremity ; it terminates at the junction
of the four pairs of muscles. Anteriorly it continues into
the trunk, and thence into the arms, there being, so far as |
can discover, no septum dividing them. At first 1 was in-
clined to imagine that the reagent used as a stam had failed
to affect the protoplasm of the arms; but, on further exami-
nation, I found that the arms simply consisted of a delicate
cuticle, a continuation from the foot and trunk. Lining this
integument is a denser substance, not exhibiting any definite
cell-structure. From its greater density I should infer this
substance to be a skeletal tissue.

Zoologists seem fairly agreed that there is a fluid within
the body of the animal ; but as to whether or not the “ vibratile
tags”? with their canals are of the nature of a vascular or
excretory system opufions seem fairly divided. When com-
mencing my study of this Rotifer I hoped to obtain some
interesting results with regard to these structures; but so
far | have failed to find any trace of them in sections. Owing
to the hollow nature of the arms one can easily imagine that
the animal protrudes from its case by the fluid occupying the
body-cavity being forced forward.

Parasites.—In one of my earliest series of sections of this
Rotifer I met with a structure in the region of the posterior
third of the body which for a considerable time I was unable
to explain. It consists of an ovoid body placed directly under
the cuticle and sharply divided from the rest of the Rotiferon
by a well-defined membrane. Scattered irregularly within
this body are numerous cells, varying considerably in size, and
placed excentrically is a large ovoid capsule, bounded by a
wall of apparently a chitinous nature, a small opening being
visible at the point nearest the cuticle. [Lining the interior of
this capsule is a thin layer of homogeneous protoplasm, from
which extends a delicate fringe of cilia which completely fill
the cavity (Pl. II. fig. 16). Shortly after I met with Dr.
Zacharias’s paper, and at once recognized my specimen as a
species of Zrypanococcus, discovered by Prof. von Stein many
years ago. Ina footnote Dr. Zacharias (/oc. cit.) says, “On
careful examination of fig. 1 (Stephanoceros Hichhornit) on the
first of the four plates which Prof. Leydig has appended to
his fine memoir on the structure and systematic position of

10 On the Anatomy of Stephanoceros Hichhornii.

the Rotatoria, I see a structure, marked with the letter h (on
the right at the fore part of the animal), of which the distin-
guished histologist confesses that its significance was unknown
to him. He describes it as ‘a group of limpid vesicles which
open on the cuticle by a duct, which, although short, is dis-
tinct in a suitable position.’ Have we not here a similar
observation to that which I have frequently made in Rotifer?”

There are two points in which this specimen does not agree
with the above description. ‘There is no visible duct to the
exterior. It is a single vesicle only. I may also remark
that I have cut many serial sections of this Rotifer and have
only found the parasite present in one instance.

I am now engaged in examining Melicerta ringens by
means of serial sections, and I hope before long to offer some
remarks on that species.

Literature referred to.

(1) Hupson, C. T., and Gossz, P. H. The Rotifera or Wheel-
animalcules. 1886.

(2) Rolleston’s Forms of Animal Life. By, W. H. Jackson. (Roti-
fera.) 2nd edition. 1888.

(3) Zacuartas, O. “On the Reproduction and Development of
Rotifer vulgaris,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. xv. no. 86, 1885.

(4) Ecxsrrin, K. “ Die Rotatorien der Umgegend yon Giefsten,”
Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie, vol. xxxix. 1883.

(5) Wituiamson, W.C. “On the Anatomy of Melcerta ringens,”
Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. vol. i. 1853.

(6) Cunirt, C. “ Observations on some Points in the Economy of
Stephanoceros,’ Monthly Micr. Journ, vol. iii. 1870.

(7) Huxury, T.H. “ Lacinularia socialis: a Contribution to the
Anatomy and Physiology of the Rotifera,” Trans. Micr. Soc. Lond.
vol.i. 1853.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
PLATE I,

Fig. 1. Section parallel to the long axis of Stephanoceros. a, unipolar
ganglion-cell placed at the base of an arm with single nerve-
fibre; B, space in arm (body-cavity) ; ¢, cuticle ; pe, sete; m,
muscles. Zeiss F, oc. 3.

Fig. 2. A group of unipolar ganglion-cells, showing each ganglion-cell
with its single nerve-fibre. Zeiss F, oc. 3.

Fig. 3. Transverse section of Rotiferon. m, vestibule; ec, taster or tongue ;
b, “brain ;” e, embryos in section; D, calcareous granules; f,
cuticle. Zeiss C, oc. 3.

Fig. 4. Transverse section of Rotiferon. a, external eye; 6, the deeper
eye; ¢, calcareous concretions; D, commencement of mastax ;

e, cuticle. Zeiss C, oc, 3.

On Hydrozoa and Polyzoa from the China Sea. Lal

Fig. 5. Portion of fig. 3. a, deeper eye in median transverse section ; ),
portion splintered off; c, external eye; f, cuticle. Zeiss F,
0c. 0.

Fig. 6. Portion of fig. 4. a, fragments of deeper eye; }, external eye ;
cu, cuticle. Zeiss F, oc. 3.

Fig. 7. Transverse section of foot immediately beneath the junction with
the body. m, the four pairs of longitudinal muscles; m.c.,
mucous cells; cu, cuticle. Zeiss F, oe. 3.

Fig. 8. Transverse section of foot three sections lower, showing consider-
able decrease in size. The lettering a3 in previous figure. Zeiss
F, oc. 3.

Fig. 9. Fifth section of foot. Theanimal invariably dies with this region
of the foot twisted. Zeiss F’, oc. 3.

Fig. 10. Seventh section of foot. Zeiss F, oc. 5.

Fig. 11. Extremity of foot. a, the cup-like extremity; 6, union of
muscles. Zeiss F, oc. 3.

Fig. 12. Portion of cuticle under high power. a, cellular layer; } and c,
granular, Zeiss K, oc, 3.

PuatE [I].

Fig. 13. Almost vertical section of Rotiferon. 0, “ brain;” s, secretion ;
m, vestibule; e, embryo; ov, ovary; cu, cuticle. Zeiss E,
0c. 8.

Fig. 14. Three sections later, showing the connexion between the lumen
in the “brain” and the vestibule. Lettering as in previous
figure. Zeiss E, oc. 3.

Fig. 15. Median transverse section of “brain.” cw, cuticle. The secre-
tion in central lumen is not figured. Zeiss F, oc. 3.

Fig. 16. Median transverse section of Trypanococeus. cu, cuticle of Ro-
tiferon; a, cyst containing cilia; 6, its opening. Zeiss F, oc. 3.

Fig. 17. Formation of gastrula by epibole. Zeiss F, oc. 3.

Fig. 18. Transverse section of ovary. ov, ovary; a, an ovum; 6, ment
brane of ovary being detached with ovum and forming the vitel-
line membrane. Zeiss F, oc. 3.

I1.—Report upon the Hydrozoa and Polyzoa collected by P. W.
Bassett-Smith, Esq., Surgeon R.N., during the Survey of
the Tizard and Macclesfield Banks, in the China Sea,
by H.M.S. ‘ Rambler,’ Commander W. U. Moore. By R.
KIRKPATRICK.

[Plates H1I.-V.]

CoLLECTIONS of the marine faunas of Tizard and Macclesfield
Banks were made by Mr. P. W. Bassett-Smith, and were
presented to the British Museum (Natural History) by the
Lords of the Admiralty. A list of the Hydrozoa and Polyzoa
obtained, with descriptions of new species, is given below.

HY DROZOA.

The collection of Hydrozoa from the Tizard and Maccles-

12 Mr. R. Kirkpatrick on

field Banks is a small one, but includes one specimen of great

interest, viz. a new species of Stephanoscyphus, Allman.
With the exception of a specimen of JMillepora verrucosa,

the Hydrocoralline are represented merely by small fragments.

SIPHONOPHORA.
Physalia utriculus, Eschscholtz. Off Macclesfield Bank.
Velella, sp. Young forms in the “ Rataria”’ stage.
Porpita, sp. No specimens were preserved, but sketches
were taken from life.

HyYDROCORALLINAE.

Stylaster flabelliformis, M.-Edwards & Haime. Garvan Reef,
2 fath.

—— pulcher, Quelch. Garvan Reef, 2 fath.

Distichopora violacea, M.-Edwards & Haime. Garvan Reef,
2 fath.

trregularis, Moseley. Garvan Reef, 2 fath.

Millepora ramosa, Pallas. Tizard Reef, 10 fath.

verrucosa, M.-Edwards & Haime. ‘Tizard, 4 fath.

HyYDROIDA.
Sertularia distans, Lamouroux. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.
Aglaophenia MacGillivray?, Busk. ‘Tizard, 5 and 27 fath.
The specimens of Ag/aophenia are loaded with corbule.
They vary slightly from the descriptions of Busk and Allman,
but not to the extent of being specifically distinct. In the
Tizard specimens the branches are shorter and more rigid, and

the ridges of the corbule more prominent and interdigitating
than in the ‘ Challenger’ one.

Genus ZYGOPHYLAX, Quelch.
Zygophylax tizardensis, n. sp. (Pl. III. fig. 3.)

Trophosome: colony about 1$ inch in height, the main
stem bearing pinnately-disposed alternate ramuli and pinnate
branches in one plane. Main stem polysiphonic, branches
gradually becoming monosiphonic towards the periphery.

Hydrothece half-immersed on main stem, free and sub-
stipitate on branches; coral end bent outwards and constricted
at the bend; one or two annuli concentric with margin of
orifice ; with a knobbed chitinous ring internally at the base
and a half-ring at the upper dorsal part, for muscular attach-

Hydrozoa and Polyzoa from the China Sea. 15

ments. Length of hydrothece ‘4 to ‘5 millim., breadth *1
millim.

Sarcothece: numerous, cylindrical, varying in length from
‘1 to °4 millim., on the tubes composing the main stem and
larger branches ; a pair at the base of each hydrotheca.

Gonosome unknown.

Hab. Tizard Reef, 35 fath.

The type of the genus Zygophylaz is Z. profunda, Quelch*,
from Cape-Verde Islands, 500 fath.

The nearest ally to Zygophylax is the genus Pertsiphoniat
of Allman; in the latter the colony is polysiphonie through-
out. The genus Cryptolaria includes forms in which the
colony is entirely polysiphonic (as in Cryptolaria prima,
Busk) and others in which it becomes monosiphonic towards
the periphery. It would appear, then, that Perisiphonia is
synonymous with Zygophylax.

The knobbed ring at the base of the hydrotheca in Z, tizard-
ensis gives attachment to muscular fasciculi which unite to
form a sheath (retractor muscle) surrounding the offset of the
coenosare as it enters the hydrotheca; the protractor muscle
is attached to the chitinous halt-ring on the upper dorsal part
of the hydrotheca.

Genus STEPHANOSCYPHUS, Allman.

Stephanoscyphus, Allman, Trans. Linn. Soc., 2nd ser. Zoology, vol. i.
1875, p. 61.

Stephanoscyphus Allmani, n.sp. (Pl. III. fig. 1.)

Perisare consisting of a monosiphonic, stout, irregularly-
branched stem, straggling, flexible, partly decumbent, partly
free ; about ‘9 millim, in diameter, marked with circular ruge
and longitudinal strie.

Hydrothecz sessile, arranged in half-verticils on decumbent
part, and in verticils of from three to five in free portions
of stem; expanding gradually from base upwards, from 3-6
millim. in height, with strongly marked circular ruge, con-
nected by parallel longitudinal striw. Inside the hydrothecee
a vertical chitinous lamella expanding into a funnel or basin,
with thick, free, fimbriated edge closing in about three fourths
of the lumen of the tube ; sometimes a second chitinous process
higher up in the tube.

flab. ‘Tizard Reef, 27 fath.

In consideration of the interest taken by Prof. Allman in

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) xvi. 1885, p. 4, pl. i. fig. 4,
} ‘ Challenger’ Report on Hydroida, pt. il. p. 43.

14 Mr. R. Kirkpatrick on

the affinities of Stephanoscyphus, the specimen was sent to him
for inspection. He replied that the material was not suffi-
ciently well preserved for the exposition of anatomical details.

The specimen consists of four pieces from 2 to 6 inches in
length, the colour varying from dark to pale brown.

Many of the hydrothece: are empty, and where the polypites
are present they are fully retracted, with the tentacles intro-
verted.

The four longitudinal markings in the gastric cavity of the
polypite are in some cases plainly visible; but whether these
are solid projections of the mesoderm lined by endoderm, or
canals lined by endoderm, owing to the state of preservation
of the soft tissues it is not possible definitely to decide.

The main distinction between Stephanoscyphus and the
closely allied genus Spongicola of F. EK. Schulze* consists in
the presence of a hypostome in the latter. So far as can be
made out from preparations of Stephanoscyphus Allmant, the
tentacles arise from the edge of the orifice of the invaginated
polypite, and consequently there is no hypostome.

The internal chitinous projections of the perisare have a
remarkable shape in the new species, and are single on one
plane. In the Mediterranean species usually four processes
project inwards in the same plane, and two or three such par-
titions may be present in one hydrotheca. ‘The presence of
the chitinous processes probably arises from the necessity for
support of the soft tissues, which otherwise could not have well
maintained their position in the wide funnel-shaped tubes
characteristic of the Spongicolidee.

The specimens of Stephanoscyphus > simplex t, Allman
(sp. MS. ?) (PI. III. fig. 2), dredged by H.M.S. ‘ Valorous ? in
1450 fath., North Atlantic, lat. 56° 11! N., 37° 41! W., consist
of single funnel-shaped tubes attached to pebbles by a slightly
expanded base.

The internal chitinous processes 1n this species form hemi-
spherical swellings, four being formed on the same plane.
These isolated hydrothecee may be the initial stage of colonial
forms, since solitary hydrothece of S. A//mant were found on
shells from the Tizard Bank.

Claus § places Stephanoscyphus mirabilis, Allman, and
Spongicola jistularis, Schulze, in the family Spongicolide.

* F. E. Schulze, “ Spengicola jfistularts, em in Spongien wohnendes
Hydrozoon,” Archiv mikr. Anat. Bd. xiii. 1877, p. 795, ‘Taf. xlv.—xlvii.

+ Proc. Rey. Soc. Lond. 1876, vol. xxv. p. 223. vr

{ The specific name “ s’mplex” is on the bottle containing the speci-
men; but I have not seen a published description of that species,

§ Claus, ‘ Grundziige der Zoologie ’ (1880), p. 262.

Hydrozoa and Polyzoa from the China Sea. 15

The choice of this name is somewhat unfortunate, since,
although the Mediterranean forms are commensal with
sponges, the specimen from the China Sea has not formed an
alliance of this nature. Claus ranks the Spongicolide under
the order Tubulariz, and brackets the latter with the Gymno-
blastea of Allman. But Allman defines the Gymnoblastea as
Hydroida destitute of a hydrotheca, whereas in the Spongi-
colidee the hydrotheca is a most conspicuous object. ‘The mis-
interpretation probably arose from confusing the hydrotheca
with the hydrophyton. ‘The sessile tubes (hydrothece) of
Stephanoscyphus can scarcely be considered homologous with
the tubes of Tubularia.

In its general appearance Stephanoscyphus Allmani
resembles a Calyptoblastic Hydroid of the Lafoéatype. Prof.
Allman is of opinion that whether the ridges in the gastric
cavity have a lumen or not, the Spongicolide should be
separated from the Gymnoblastea and Calyptoblastea. Prof.
Schulze concludes the paper embodying his researches on
Spongicola fistularis with the following observations * : —

““ It seems we can speak from abundant evidence that Spon-
gicola fistularis is the Scyphistoma form of an Acraspedote
Medusa ; nevertheless I repeat that we must first investigate
the whole generation-cycle before the true position of this
form can be determined.”

The specimen of Stephanoscyphus Allmani does not furnish
us with any further data which would help to satisfactorily
solve the problem of the systematic position of the Spongi-
colide. Since there are objections to classing this family
under the Gymnoblastea and Calyptoblastea, it will be advis-
able to retain the order Thecomeduse (Allman), though this
has been objected to by Claus.

Order THECOMEDUS A, Allman.
Family Spongicolide, Claus.
Genus STEPHANOSCYPHUS, Allman.
Stephanoscyphus mirabilis, Allman.

Stephanoscyphus simplex, Allman.
Stephanoscyphus Allmant, n. sp.

Genus SPONGICOLA, F. E. Schulze.
Spongicola fistularis, F. EK. Schulze.

* Arch. mikr, Anat. Bd. xiii. p. 816,

16 Mr. R. Kirkpatrick on

POLYZOA.
CHILOSTOMATA.

Aitea truncata, Landsborough. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Eucratea chelata, Linneus. Tizard, 2 fath.

Catenicella elegans, Busk. Tizard, 6 fath.

Catenarta otophora, n. sp. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Farcimia cereus, Pourtales. Tizard, 6 fath.

Scrupocellaria cyclostoma, Busk. Tizard, 27 fath.

securtfera, Busk. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Caberea lata, Busk. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Bugula scaphoides, n. sp. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Didymia simplex, Busk. Tizard, 27 fath.

Membranipora crassimarginata, Hincks, ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

hastilis, n. sp. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Cribrilina radiata, Moll. ‘Tizard and Macclesfield, 5-30
fath.

annulata, Fabricius, var. setosa (nov.). Tizard, 27 fath.

Steganoporella magnilabris, Busk. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Thalamoporella Roziert, Audouin. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Smittipora antiqua, Busk. Tizard, 27 fath.; Macclesfield,
36 fath.

Microporella ciliata, Pallas. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Malusti, Audouin. Tizard, 27 fath.

violacea, Johnston, var. plagiopora, Busk. Tizard, 27

fath.

coscinophora, Reuss. ‘Tizard, 35 fath.

Chorizopora Brongniartiz, Audouin. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Tubucellaria cereotdes, Ellis & Solander. Tizard, 27 fath.

Lepralia foraminigera, Hincks, var. ‘Tizard, 35 fath.

lonchea, Busk. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.; Macclesfield, 36

fath.

—— qguadrata, Busk. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

—— Poissonit, Audouin. Tizard, 27 fath.

turrita, Smitt. Tizard, 27 fath.

onucha, n. sp. Macclesfield, 36 fath.

clecdostoma, Smitt. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Phylactella geometrica, n. sp. Macclesfield, 36 fath.

Mucronella Thenardii, Audouin. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Smittia rostriformis, Kirkpatrick (var.). Tizard, 27 fath.

reticulata, J. MacGillivray. Tizard, 27 fath.

Porella malleolus, Hincks. Tizard, 27 fath.

Schizoporella Cecilii, Audouin (var.). Tizard, 27 fath.

unicornis, Johnston. Tizard, 27 fath.

Hydrozoa and Polyzoa from the China Sea. 17

Schizoporella venusta, Norman. Tizard, 27 fath.

lyncoides, Ridley. Tizard, 27 fath.

Mastigophora Dutertrei, Audouin. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.
Retepora monilifera, P. MacGillivray. Macclesfield, 27 fath.
phenicea, Busk. ‘Tizard, 35 fath.

pectinata, n. sp. Macclesfield, 27 fath.

Cellepora Costazii, Audouin. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

CYCLOSTOMATA.

Crista setosa, P. MacGillivray. Tizard, 27 fath.
elongata, M.-Edwards. Tizard, 27 fath.
Stomatopora granulata, M.-Edwards. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.
Idmonea pulcherrima, n. sp. ‘Tizard, 6 fath.
Diastopora surniensis, Norman. Tizard, 27 fath.
Lichenopora simplex, Busk. Tizard, 2 fath.

capillata, n. sp. Garvan, 6 fath.

CTENOSTOMATA.

Valkeria uva, Linneus. Tizard, 27 fath.

Flustrella flabellaris, n. sp. ‘Tizard, 32 tath.
Cylindrecium dilatatum, Hincks (var.). Tizard, 27 fath.
Buskia setigera, Hincks. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Pedicellinide.

Barentsta gracilis, Sars. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.
discreta, Busk. ‘Tizard, 27 fath.

Loxosomide.
Loxosoma crassicauda, Salensky (?sp.). Tizard, 27 fath.

Catenicella elegans, Busk.

The specimen consists only of a small fragment. The ceils
are very minute and transparent ; but, apart from the differ-
ence in size of the cells, the specimen possesses all the cha-
racters of C, elegans.

Hab. 'Tizard Reef, 6 fath.

Catenaria otophora, n. sp. (Pl. V. figs. 1-1 c.)

Zoarium slender. Zocecia in single series, not geminate,
with horny joints; long, ovate, produced bclow into a
hyaline tube forming an obtuse angle with the body ; front

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 2

18 Mr. R. Kirkpatrick on

surface flat and punctured, dorsal surface smooth, ven-
tricose ; lateral surfaces with three large round pores ; orifice
subquadrate, with a concave lower border,

A small vertically-placed avicularium with pointed mandible
on each side of the oral end of the cell.

Hab. Growing on Alge, Tizard Reef, 27 fath.

Bugula scaphotdes, n. sp. (Pl. iV. fig. 1.)

Zoarium reddish brown; branches slender, spreading hori-
zontally ; about eight to ten cells to each internode ; zocecia
alternate, boat-shaped, broad at the oral end, much contracted
below, the area occupying almost the whole front of the cell ;
small stalked avicularia very convex dorsally, and with curved
beaks, rising from the narrow produced portion of the cell.

Ocecium ? Stout branching chitinous tubes given off from
the dorsum of each cell.

Dimensions of zocecium: length ‘9 mm., breadth 2 mm.

5 » avicularia: length -(08mm., breadth 04 mm.,
height (including stalk) ‘(08 mm.
Hab. Tizard Reef, 27 fath.

Membranipora hastilis, n. sp. (Pl. V. fig. 3.)

Zoarium incrusting. Zocecia large, oval; front entirely
membranous ; operculum without a hinge ; placed transversely
at the head of each zocecium an ear-shaped vibracular cell,
toothed on one margin, with a vibraculum shaped like a
double-edged spear.

Hab. Incrusting coral; Macclesfield, 36 fath.

In the position and shape of the vibraculum this species
resembles certain forms of Cupularia. ‘The present form is
simply incrusting, the zoarium not presenting any definite
shape.

Oribrilina annulata, Fabricius, var. setosa, n. var.

(Pl. V. fig. 4.)

The zocecia are large, with from 6-8 rows of pores on each
side of a slightly marked central ridge. The proximal border
of the orifice is pectinate. At the head of each zocecium a
small square avicularian cell, with an acute vibraculoid
mandible.

Hab. Incrusting shell ; Tizard, 27 fath.

Microporella coscinophora, Reuss, var. (Pl. IV. figs. 5, 5a.)

Eschara coscinophora, Reuss, Foss. W. Tertiarb. p. 67, pl. viii. fig. 20;
Stoliczka, Sitzungsb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Bd. xiv. Abth. 1, 1862,
pl. ii. fig. 11, pl. ui. figs. 1, 2.

Zoarium forming slender, flat, bilaminate branches, from 1

Hydrozoa and Polyzoa from the China Sea. 19

to 1:5 mm. in diameter; front surface of young marginal
zocecia with from 4~—8 circular stellate pores; orifice semi-
circular with straight lower border, at each end of which is a
small avicularium with a small pointed mandible; in older
cells the surface of the zocecium is sunk at the bottom of an
oval depression, and one of the lateral avicularia rises on a
calcareous stalk to a level with the general surface ; a row of
small avicularia present along the margins of the branches,
aud occasionally at the bases of the zocecia.

Hab. Tizard Reef, 35 fath.

The Tizard-Reef specimen closely resembles Stoliczka’s
figure in Sitz. Ak. Wiss. Wien, Bd. xiv. pl. iii. fig. 1. Here
there is a knob rising from the centre of a dark depression.

Lepralia lonchea, Busk.
Lepralia lonchea, Busk, Chall. Rep. p. 146.
aed vestita, Hincks, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) 1885, xv. p. 256,
pi. Ix.

Mr. Waters, in his Supplementary Report on the ‘ Chal-
lenger’ Polyzoa (p. 28), remarks that, without a more
complete examination, he is unable to decide whether or not
these two forms are identical. A plentiful supply of
material enables me to state that the two species are syno-
nymous. ‘The opercula vary slightly in appeararce, according
to the mode of preparation; but the same variations (in
appearance only) were obtained both in specimens from the
Tizard Bank and from the ‘ Challenger’ collection. Further,
Mr. Hincks’s description applies in every detail to the
specimens from the China Sea.

Hab. Tizard Reef, 27 fath.

Lepralia foraminigera, Hincks, var.
Lepralia foraminigera, Hincks, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) 1883, xi.
p. 200, pl. vii. fig. 1.

Hab. Incrusting coral, Tizard Reef, 35 fath.

The variation consists in the presence of a_peristome
laterally and behind the mouth, and of an avicularium shaped
like the spout of a jug, with a long narrow acute mandible,
on the front wall of the cell.

Lepralia quadrata, Busk. (Pl. V. figs. 2, 2 6.)
Mucronella quadrata, Busk, Chall. Rep. p. 156, pl. xvii.

This species is removed from the genus Mucronella because
2%

20 Mr. R. Kirkpatrick on

it does not possess the feature characteristic of that genus,
viz. a mucro. The process present on the proximal border of
the orifice is a prolongation of the front wall of the zocecium,
which fits into a concavity in the operculum. The operculum
possesses a peculiar framework. The ovicells are of immense
size in comparison with the zocecia, and the orifices and
opercula of fertile zocecia are enlarged and modified.

Hab. Tizard Reef, 27 fath.

Lepralia onucha, n. sp. (PI. V. figs. 5, 5 a.)

Zoarium incrusting. Zocecia dull brown, *8 mm. long by
*5 broad; surface flattened, rising at the oral end; walls
thick, opaque, smooth, glistening ; orifice rectangular, ‘2 mm.
in length by ‘14 mm. in breadth, with slightly concave lower
border, surrounded at the sides and back by a low peristome.
Avicularia 0. Ocecium forming an ill-defined swelling at the
back of the peristome.

Operculum rectangular, °2 mm. in length by *14 mm. in
breadth ; with a thick rim surrounding the proximal half,
with knobs for muscle attachment; giving off from about the
middle of the upper surface a chitinous claw, which fits
posteriorly into a groove in the peristome.

Hab. Incrusting coral ; Macclesfield, 36 fath.

Phylactella geometrica, n. sp. (Pl. V. figs. 7-7 c.)

Zoarium incrusting. Zocecia ovate-elongate, slightly ven-
tricose ; front wall smooth, hyaline, bounded by an areolated
margin; zocecia rising anteriorly to a tall cylindrical peri-
stome; primary orifice quadrangular, with three denticles ;
by the side of the peristome a shallow rudimentary avi-
cularium (in many cases aborted or absent), with broad
pyritorm mandible.

Ocecium globose, punctured, hyaline.

Hab. Incrusting coral; Tizard Reef, 35 fath.

Mucronella Thenardit, Audouin. (PI. IV. figs. 2-2 6.)

Flustra Thenardii, Audouin; Savigny, Descr. de l’Egypte, pl. x.

figs. 38, 5a.

Zoarium incrusting. Zocecia large, ventricose, with thick
glassy walls, perforated by large round pores ; from the middle
of the lower border of the orifice a stout tridentate or cross-
shaped process arises.

Orifice quadrate, with a central hammer-shaped and two

Hydrozoa and Polyzoa from the China Sea. 21

lateral sharp incurved denticles ; gigantic avicularia, projecting
obliquely forwards, with large spatulate mandibles.

Ocecium subglobose, prominent, slightly flattened in front ;
perforated by numerous pores, giving it a frosted appearance.

Hab. Vizard Reef, 6 fath.

Smittia rostriformis, Kirkpatrick.

Hab. Tizard Reef, 27 fath.

The specimen from the Tizard Reef varies slightly from
the type specimen from Mauritius. The avicularium in the
former does not project vertically upwards from the front of
ocecium, but is situated obliquely along the border.

Schizoporella Cecilit, Audouin, var. (PI. V. fig. 8.)

The specimen illustrates in a striking manner the transition
from the zocecial to the avicularian cell. The avicularia
differ externally from the zocecia in the prolongation of the
operculum into a broad spatulate mandible and in the
presence of from four to six short spines round the upper
margin of the cell. The notch in the orifice and the separ-
able opercular shaft which fits into it are present both in the
zocecial and avicularian cells.

Hab. Incrusting coral, Tizard Reef, 6 fath.

Retepora pectinata, n. sp. (PI. V. figs. 6-6 c.)

Zoarium slender, branching freely without forming fenestra ;
zocecia flat, smooth, rhomboidal, rising anteriorly to a tall
tubular hyaline peristome, equal in height to the length of the
cell: summit of peristome denticulate, within the margin a
circle of horizontal denticles. On the front of the body of the
cell a small avicularium with a short broad spatulate mandible.
Dorsal surface vibicate, showing areas of the individual
zocecia ; small avicularia scattered about.

Ocecium very small, globular, hyaline, with a faintly marked
vertical ridge, from each side of which radiate concentric striae.
Chitinous appendages. Operculum quadrangular ; length
°08 mm., breadth -06 mm.

Hab. Growing on Retepora monilifera; Macclesfield, 27
fath.

The single specimen of this beautiful species is about half
an inch in height.

In the mode of branching, and in the presence of a high
tubular peristome, the specimen resembles Turritigera stellata,

22 Mr. R. Kirkpatrick on

Busk. The remarkable position of the ovicells in the latter
species, as elucidated by Mr. Waters (Suppl. Rep. ‘Challenger’
Polyzoa, p. 22, pl.i. figs. 22, 25), separates Turritigera from
Retepora. Retepora pectinata, though branching freely, and
with the tubular peristome, is not classed under Turritigera,
because its ocecium is in the usual position.

Idmonea pulcherrima, n. sp. (PI. IV. figs. 6-6 0.)

Zoarium decumbent, dichotomously branched ; the branches
occasionally united by cross bars. Zocecia rather large, in
alternate series of two or three, increasing in height from
within outward, hyaline, punctured.

Dorsal surface punctured, marked with longitudinal lines
and faint concentric striw, with calcareous radical processes.

Ocecium forming a flattened punctured inflation, whence
arises a curved tube expanded at the orifice, and with the
margins rolled out.

Hab. Tizard Reef, 6 fath.

In this species the ocecial orifice has become greatly modified.
In the specimen all the orifices are turned in one direction,
towards the periphery of the colony.

Dastopora sarniensis, Norman.
Diastopora sarniensis, Norman, Ann. Nat. Hist. (8) xiii. p. 89, pl. xi.
fies. 4-6; Hincks, Brit. Mar. Pol. p. 463, pl. Ixvi. figs. 7-9.

Hab. Growing on coralline; Macclesfield, 36 fath.

The tubules do not project from the summit of operculate
zocecia, as they generally do in British specimens, but are
within the zocecial tubes and concentric with them. If these
tubes are vasa deferentia, the specimen is moncecious, since
ovicells are also present on the zoarium.

Lichenopora capiilata, n. sp. (PI. IV. figs. 4, 4a.)

Zoarium composed of confluent disks (meandrine), concave
in the centre, with a somewhat thick laminar margin.

Zocecia in uniserial radiating series, with two or three rows
of cancelli between. Zocecial orifices oval, much produced on
the central side, with from 6-12 fine setose processes on the
margin ; numerous calcareous bristles growing from the body~
wall. Cancelli rounded, about half the diameter of the zocecia.

Ocecia scattered, each forming a conical swelling, produced
into a wide tubular orifice.

Hab, Garvan Reef, 6 fath.

Hydrozoa and Polyzoa from the China Sea. 23

Flustrella flabellaris, n. sp. (PI. IV. figs. 3, 3 a.)

Zoarium brown, forming a flat soft flexible expansion,
loosely adnate to the surface on which it grows, extending by
narrow ligulate anastomosing processes. Zocecia large, long,
hexagonal, 1:2 mm. by °6 mm., flattened, rising at the oral
end to a tall tube (‘6 mm. in height in retracted state), with
flat sides. Nospines. Ctenostome? ‘Tentacles of polypide 20.

Hab. Growing over a sponge (Axinella) ; Tizard, 32 fath.

Loxosoma crassicauda, Salensky, ? sp.

Loxosoma crassicauda, Salensky, Ann. Sci. Nat. 6 série, vol. v. p. 2,
pl. xii. figs. 1, 2; Etudes sur les Bryozaires Entoproctes,

The specimens have the tentacles retracted, so that it is
difficult to accurately determine the number of them. In
general appearance, in the relation of the stalks to the polypides,
in the arrangement of the buds, and in the absence of a basal
peduncular gland, the specimens answer to the description of
L. crassicauda. The material is scarcely sufficient for the
purpose of making a satisfactory diagnosis.

Hab, Growing on alge ; Tizard Reef, 27 fath.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Pratre IIT.

Fig. 1. Stephanoscyphus Allmani, n. sp., natural size. 1a. Hydrotheca,
showing the polyp with gastral ridges and introverted tentacles,
x 60 diam. 16. Section of hydrotheca, showing internal
chitinous processes, X 60 diam.

Fig. 2. Stephanoscyphus simplex, Allman, natural size. 2a. Section of
hydrotheca, x 60 dian.

Fig. 3. Zygophylax tizardensis, n. sp., natural size. 38a. Branch, x 40.
3b. Showing paired basal sarcothecee. 5c. Portion of a main
branch, showing bundles of tubes from which arise sarcothecz.
3d. Hydrotheca, x 100 diam,

PLATE LV.

Fig. 1. Bugula scaphoides, n. sp., X 60 diam. '

Fiy. 2. Mucronella Thenardii, Audouin, 24a, Tridentate orifice, 26.
Mandible. \

Fig. 3. Flustrella flabellaris, natural size. 3a. Ditto, x 60 diam.

Fig. 4, Lichenopora capillata, X 4 diam, 4a, Zocecium, X 60. 40.
Ocecium, X 30.

Figs. 5, 5a. Microporella coscinophora, Keuss. :

1g. 6, Idmonea pulcherrima, natural size. 6a, Ocecium, 66, Ocecial

orifice.

24 Mr. H. H. Druce on new Species of Lycenide.

PLATE VY.

Figs. 1, 1 a, 16. Catenaria otophora, n. sp. 1¢. Operculum.

Fig. 2. Lepralia quadrata, Busk. 2a, Operculum, 26. Operculum of
fertile cells.

Fig. 3. Membranipora hastilis, n. sp.

Fig. 4. Cribrilina annulata, Fabricius, var. setosa,

Fig. 5. Lepralia onucha, nv. sp. 5a, Operculum.

ig. 6. Retepora pectinata, n. sp., natural size. 6a, 6b. Anterior and

dorsal surfaces, X 60 diam. 6c. Operculum.

Fig. 7. Phylactella geometrica, n. sp. 7 a, Tridentate orifice. 7 6. Oper-
culum. 7c. Mandible.

Fig. 8. Schizoporella Cecilit, Audouin, var.

Il1.—Descriptions of twelve new Species of Lycenide from
West Africa and one from the Solomon Islands, in the Col-
lection of Herbert Druce. By Hamiuron H. Druce, F.E.S.

1. Epiiola pinodes, sp. n.

dg. Upperside dull black. Fore wing with a patch of
scarcely perceptible dull bluish scales in and below the cell.
Hind wing more or less covered with dull bluish scales,
excepting the margins.

Underside dull light reddish brown. Fore wing with the
lower half black, extending from the base to near the outer
margin. Hind wing with no markings.

Head, thorax, and abdomen black ; legs black, with white
spots; antennz black above, alternately spotted with black and
white below.

Expanse 12 inch.

Hab. W. Africa, Lagos.

This species is not nearly allied to any other, but in form
and size approaches L, dunia, Kirby.

2. Lycenesthes lithas, sp. n.

&. Upperside—Fore wing dull glossy brown, darker on
the costal and outer margins; bright violaceous from the base
along the inner margin, extending upwards into the cell and
bordered by the lower median nervule. Hind wing bright
violaceous, apex tipped with brown; the margin very nar-
rowly black from the apex to the anal angle; the inner mar-
gin covered with whitish hairs.

Underside brownish white, with light brown lunular

Mr. H. H. Druce on new Species of Lycenide. 25

markings, bordered outwardly with white, viz. a mark at the
end of the cell, beyond that an irregular band reaching from
the costa, where it is narrowest, and gradually widening
towards the inner margin; beyond this a marginal row of
lunules. Hind wing: a mark at the end of the cell and an
irregular rather broad band beyond, darker towards the anal
margin; a dark,spot near the base just below the subcostal
nervure and a smaller one near the base close to the anal
margin ; two small orange spots with silvery blue scales at
the anal angle.

Expanse 12 inch.

Hab. W. Africa, Addah.

This species is allied to Z. thyrsis, Kirby, but is violet in
place of blue above, and on the underside the markings are
much larger.

3. Pithecops stevrema, sp. n.

3 ¢. Upperside dull black, with a broad white oval band
extending from the subcostal nervure in the fore wing to
about the second subcostal nervule in the hind wing.

Underside.—F ore wing white, with the costal margin very
narrowly, the apex and outer margin rather broadly, black ;
several small black spots on the costal margin. Hind wing
white, with a large black spot near the centre of the inner
margin; the outer margin rather broadly black.

A row of black lunules common to the outer margins of
both wings bordered inwardly and outwardly with white.
Head, thorax, and abdomen black above, white below ; legs
white ; antenne black, spotted with white below.

Expanse 14 inch.

flab. Solomon Islands,

4. Larinopoda aspidos, sp. n.

3. Upperside.—Fore wing white, the costal margin nar-
rowly, the apex and outer margin rather broadly, bordered
with dull blackish brown. Hind wing white, bordered with
blackish brown from the apex to the anal angle.

Underside.—F ore wing as above, with a brownish spot at
the end of the cell adjoining the costal border. Hind wing
bordered as above, with the dark patch near the apex (which
is so conspicuous in L. /ércea, Hew.) included in the marginal
border ; a large black spot between the cell and the inner
margin, but no spot in the cell.

9. Upperside.—Fore wing as in male, but rather more nar-

26 Mr. H. H. Druce on new Species of Lycenidex.

rowly bordered, the border scarcely reaching to the anal angle.
Hind wings pure white, with the fringe only brownish.

Underside.—Fore wings as above. Hind wings bordered
with blackish brown from the apex to the anal angle, but less
broadly than in the male, so that the apical patch is left
almost free. There is also the black spot between the cell
and the inner margin.

Head black ; thorax and abdomen whitish ; legs and palpi
yellowish red; antenne black, annulate with white.

Expanse 14-13 inch.

Hab. W. Africa, Lagos.

This species, although allied to ZL. varipes, Kirby, can be
readily distinguished by its much broader borders and by the
absence of any spot in the cell of the hind wing below, in that
respect approaching JL. lircea, Hew., from Old Calabar. I
may also add that in the eight specimens I have examined
(five males, three females) there is no appreciable difference
in the width of the border, and the spots below are identical
in all cases.

5. Spalgis lemolea, sp. n.

&. Upperside.—Fore wing white, the base, costa, apex, and
anterior margin rather broadly brown. Hind wing white,
with a well-marked minute black line running along the mar-
gin from the apex to the anal angle, thickening slightly at
each nervule.

Underside white, with rows of thin, irregular, brown lines,
much as in S, eptus, Westw., but less thickly covered. The
marginal black line present on hind wing as on upperside,
also on fore wing from the apex to the anal angle.

2. Upperside.—F ore wing as in male. Hind wing bordered
with brown from apex to the anal angle.

Underside as in male, except that the marginal line is
replaced by a small black dot at the extremity of each nervule.

Head, thorax, and abdomen brown; antenne brown ; legs
white, with black spots.

Expanse, ¢ 14, 2 1,4) inch.

Hab. W. Africa, Lagos.

This species, although somewhat allied to S. eptws, Westw.,
on the underside, is distinguished, apart from its larger size,
by the pure white wings. On the upperside the female of
this species bears a close resemblance to Larinopoda muhata,
Dewitz, as figured in ‘ Lepidoptera Exotica’ by Mr. H. G.
Smith,

Mr. H. H. Druce on new Species of Lycenide. 27

6. Spalgis pilos, sp. n.

9. Allied to S. lemolea, but the internal areas of both
wings light straw-colour and the costal margin of the hind
wing broadly bordered with brown from the base to the apex,
where it joins the outer marginal border.

Expanse 1+ inch.

Hab. W. Africa, Gambia.

This species can be at once distinguished from the pre-
ceding by the broad border to the costal margin, as described
above.

I have no hesitation in placing these two species in the
genus Spalgis, as they agree well in all generic characters
with S. epius, Westw., notably the extremely short antenne
and the pointed fore wing in the male.

7. Hypolycena liara, sp. n.

3. Upperside.—Fore wing black, with the basal third suf-
fused with light blue; an oval patch of thick, shining, light
brown scales at the end of the cell. Hind wing black, suffused
with light blue from the third median nervule to the inner
margin: tails white, with black lines down the centres: a
dark red spot bordered with black at the anal angle.

Underside whitish, with a transverse brown band common
to both wings and a black marginal line. On hind wing a
large black spot bordered inwardly with yellow between the
first and second median nervules and a large crimson patch
at the anal angle with a small black spot.

Head white; thorax and abdomen covered with bluish-
white hairs; palpi black above, white below; antenne and
legs white, annulated with black.

When held at an angle this species exhibits the brilliant
purple gloss common to the group, but more especially towards
the anal angle of the hind wings.

Eixpanse 12 inch.

Hab, W. Africa, Addah, Lagos.

This species is distinguished by the light colour of the blue
above. On the underside the markings are arranged as in
H. antifaunus, Hew., but the tails appear much shorter and
thinner. It has also the patch of scales on the fore wing
above as in H/. naara, Hew.

8. Hypolycena hadiskos, sp. n.
¢. Upperside dull brownish purple. Hind wing with

28 Mr. H. H. Druce on new Species of Lycenide.

three indistinct black marginal spots, bordered inwardly with
white, towards the anal angle; the inner margin brownish,
clothed with white hairs.

Underside brownish white, with a brown band and markings
arranged as in /7. hatita, Hew.; but, in addition to these, a
short distinct brown line at the end of the cell in the fore
wing and a small brown spot on the costal margin near the
base on hind wing; fringe white; tails considerably shorter
than in /, hatita.

Head, thorax, and abdomen brownish ; legs and antenne
whitish, annulated with black.

Exxpanse 1? inch.

Hab, W. Africa, Lagos.

This species, which somewhat resembles H/. Buxton? on
the upperside, would appear to be intermediate between H.
hatita, Hew., and H. philippus, Fabr., on the underside.

9. Deudorix cerulea, sp. n.

6. Upperside.—Fore wing glossy blue, with a darker patch
at the end of the cell; the apical third and the costal margin
blackish brown. THHind wing glossy blue, with the costal
margin blackish brown and the inner margin greyish,

Underside light brown, with indistinct markings arranged
as in D. diyllus, Hew., and a jet-black mark on the fore
wing just above the centre of the submedian nervure. On
the hind wing a black spot, bordered inwardly with yellow,
between the first and second median nervules ; lobe black,
with yellow above; the tuft of hairs attached to the inner
margin of the fore wing below is black.

?. Upperside.—Fore wing dull light violaceous blue, the
costa, apex, and outer margin broadly brown. Hind wing
blue; costal margin and apex broadly, and outer margin nar-
rowly, brown ; lobe black, bordered above with yellow.

Underside as in male. |

Head whitish ; antennee black, annulated with white; legs
white, spotted in front with black.

Expanse, ¢ ? 1,% inch.

Hab. W. Africa, Lagos.

On the underside this species is allied to D. diyllus, Hew.,
which also has the black mark as described above. Hewit-
son’s figure (71) on pl. v. 6 of the Supplement to his Lyceenidee
is almost unrecognizable. On the upperside it is distin-
guished by the much larger areas of blue, the blue of D.
diyllus being of a greenish hue. The hairy tuft on the inner
margin of the fore wing below is yellow in D. diyllus.

Mr. H. H. Druce on new Species of Lycenide. 29

10. folaus menas, sp. n.

3. Upperside.— Fore wing brilliant light blue, near J.
dasis, Hew., in colour; apex and outer margin black, ex-
tending to the lower median nervule ; costal margin narrowly
black except at the base. Hind wing blue as above, the outer
margin from the apex to the anal angle very narrowly bor-
dered with black; a large triangular patch of thick black
scales commencing just above the subcostal nervure and
extending outwards along about one third of the first subcostal
nervule and downwards to the blue; the costal margin
shining greyish.

Underside.—F ore wings pure white. Hind wings much as
in J. culus, Hew.

?. Upperside.—Fore wings pure white, with the costal
margin, the apical third, and the outer margin blackish brown,
which extends to the posterior angle; the base suffused with
light blue, extending well into the wing. Hind wing pure
white, with the apex blackish brown and a well-marked dark
line extending from the apex to the inner margin just above
the lobe; beyond this and close to the margin a row of
blackish markings reaching from the apex to the second
median nervule ; the lobe brick-red, with a black spot and a
few metallic blue scales; a large bright orange spot, bordered
inwardly and outwardly with brown between the first and
second median nervules, and another smaller orange spot
between the submedian nervure and the first median nervule ;
suffused with blue at the base, but not to the extent of the
fore wing.

Underside pure white, in some specimens a slight indi-
cation of an outer-marginal line to fore wing. Hind wing
asin male, but the red spot between the first and second
median lighter in colour.

Head white ; thorax bluish ; abdomen white ; legs white ;
palpi white, tipped with black.

Expanse, ¢ 14, ¢ 2 inches.

Hab. W. Africa, Gambia.

The orange spot between the submedian nervure and the
first median nervule on the hind wing of female above appears
somewhat variable, as in some examples it is very smail and
in others replaced by a blackish mark. The female of this
species bears a close resemblance to the female of L. ‘smenias,
Klug (which is exactly like the male with the exception of
the scaly patch on the hind wing at the base of the median
nervules), from which it is distinguished by the well-marked

. . . ~) .
inner line on the hind wing above, by the greater suffusion

30 Mr. H. H. Druce on new Species of Lyceenide.

of blue at the base, and by the orange spot on the hind wing
above being invariably bordered on the inner side with brown.
In J. vsmendas this spot is closer to the margin than in J.
menas.

In a male of this species from the same place the black
lines on the hind wing below have entirely disappeared and
likewise the yellow spots on the hind wing of a female above.

11. Jolaus lukabas, sp. n.

3g. Allied to Z. culus, Hew., but without the greenish
gloss.

Upperside.—Fore wing brilliant blue, with the costal mar-
gin and apical third black. Hind wing blue as above, with
four distinct marginal spots of black placed between the
nervules, commencing between the submedian nervure and
the first median nervule and continuing upwards.

Underside pure white, with a trace of a short black line
above the lobe only ; a very minute brick-red spot between
the first and second median nervules ; lobe brick-red, with a
large black spot on the outer edge; the tuft of hair which is
attached to the margin of the fore wing below is yellow.

Expanse 1,%5 inch.

Hab. W. Atrica, Gambia.

This species is distinguished from JZ. culus by the black-
bordered costal margin and by being without the greenish
gloss above, and by the absence of all lines on the underside.

1 YE Lolaus paneperata, sp. n.

3. Upperside: allied to Z. dukabas, but smaller; the costal
margin bordered with black, as in that species.

Underside.—Fore wing white, with two almost invisible
greyish lines running parallel with the outer margin. Hind
wing as in J. culus, Hew. ; the tuft of hair on the inner mar-
gin below is black.

Expanse 12 inch.

Hab. W. Atrica, Lagos.

This species can be distinguished from the preceding by its
smaller size and by the difference in the colour of the tuft of
hair attached to the margin of the underside of the fore wing.

13. Lolaus taspis, sp. n.
3. Allied to 7. dasis, Hew. Upperside rather darker blue,

Mr. G. E. Dobson on a new Species of Crocidura. 31

with a brilliant greenish gloss; the shaped inner margin
of the fore wing (which in J. casts is edged with white) blue;
the shining patch near the base on the hind wing black in
place of greyish, smaller, and not margined with white; the
anal angle black.

Underside.—F ore wings as in I. dass. Hind wings with
the space, which is contained between the black line over the
lobe and the inner margin, orange-red, with an irregular line
of silvery blue through the centre. In J. dass the margin
only is bordered from the lobe to the end of the black line.

Head pure white.

Expanse 1}—12 inch.

Hab. W. Africa, Addah.

Distinguished by the darker blue and the greenish gloss
above and by the large patch of red at the anal angle below.

We have specimens of J, ¢as¢s also from Addah.

IV.—Description of a new Species of Crocidura from the

Amur Region. By G. K. Doxsson, M.A., F.R.S.

THE species of Crocidura are generally as characteristic of
the tropical and subtropical parts of the Eastern Hemisphere
as those of the genus Sores are of the temperate and subarctic
regions. It is therefore interesting to record the discovery of
a species of the first-named genus at so high a latitude as
that through which the River Ussuri flows. The type of
this species, which proves to have been hitherto undescribed,
was found by me in the collection of the Zoological Museum
of the Imperial Academy of Sciences at St. Petersburg.

Crocidura lastura.

Larger than C. araneus and differing from that species
conspicuously in the much longer, denser, and darker coloured
fur, which is almost the same on both surfaces, in the hairiness
of the tail, which is well covered with short hairs from which
long ones project, in the much larger size of the pes and
manus, and in the remarkable elevation of the premaxillary
bones. Whereas in C. araneus the anterior maxillary tooth
exceeds the third incisor in cross section at the base, in this
species the third incisor considerably exceeds that tooth in

32 Mr. G. E. Dobson on a new Species of Crocidura.

cross section viewed from without; and while in this species
the anterior maxillary tooth is close to and slightly internal
to the last premolar, in C.
araneus it is separated by a
narrow space. ‘The anterior
incisor has a well-developed
posterior basal cusp, the tip
of which is received into a
well-marked depression in the
anterior mandibular — tooth.
These are the characters of the
teeth in the type, a still imma-
ture female. In astill younger
female specimen, from Corea, x
inwhich the front upper incisor

has not quite descended, the anterior mandibular tooth has
the notch well defined, the tip of the anterior maxillary
tooth is about equal in vertical extent to that of the anterior
basal cusp of the Jast premolar, while the third incisor does
not equal the anterior maxillary tooth in vertical extent.

The ears are comparatively smaller than in C. araneus and
the upper internal fold of the conch is very shallow.

Fur, as far as can be known from the examination of the
specimen in alcohol, dark reddish brown on the upper surface,
the extreme tips of the hairs beneath very faintly ashy. The
tail is as densely covered with short fur, which forms a pencil
at the extremity, as in average examples of Sorex vulgaris,
of a dark brown colour, from which long, fine, greyish hairs
project. The manus and pes are well covered with short
brown hairs, some of which project beyond the claws. | Kars
more densely clothed with short hairs than in C. araneus.

No trace of a lateral gland, as, indeed, might be expected
in a female specimen, especially in one not yet full-grown.

Length, head and body 65 millim., tail 32, eye from end of
muzzle 124; ear, length 8; elbow to end of middle digit
without claw 194; manus 83, pes 133; distance between tips
of first upper incisor and last premolar 5.

The skull shows that the type is immature, for the basi-
occipital suture is still open, and as it exceeds the largest
specimens of C. araneus in the length of the forearm, manus,
and pes, full-grown specimens must be considerably larger.

Hab. Manchuria (Ussuri River, a tributary of the Amur),
Corea (Fusan).

The above description of this, the most northerly species
of the genus as yet known, is taken from the type, which is

—___

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Pectinicorn Coleoptera. 33

preserved in the collection of the Zoological Museum of the
Imperial Academy of Sciences at St. Petersburg, and from a
specimen in the collection of the Royal Zoological Museum

at Florence *.

V.—Descriptions of new Pectinicorn Coleoptera.
By CHARLES O. WATERHOUSE.

Havine recently been engaged in incorporating numerous
accessions to the Pectinicorn Coleoptera in the British
Museum, I have found several species which do not appear
to be described and which I have made the subject of
this paper, adding to them a most interesting species of the
genus Lucanus, kindly lent to me for description by Mr. A.
Fry.

Lucanide.

LUCANINA»

Lucanus laminifer.

3 var. max. Piceo-niger, eenescens, griseo-pubescens, nitidus. Man-
dibulis capite cum thorace duplo longioribus, antice fortiter de-
flexis, intus dentibus parvis numerosis, basi supra dente acuto
introrsum directo armatis, apice incurvatis bifidis. Capite antice
concayo, supra laminis tribus erectis ornato; clypeo acuminato,
supra lamina transyersa instructo. ‘horace convexo, crebre sub-
tiliter punctulato, lateribus medio leviter sinuatis. Elytris thorace
latioribus, crebre subtiliter punctulatis. Femoribus rufo-macu-
latis. Tibiis anticis quinque-spinosis, apice bifurcatis; inter-
medils 3- vel 4-spinosis ; posticis bispinosis.

Long. corp. 23 lin., mandib. 17 lin.

3 var. minor. Mandibulis capite dimidio longioribus, arcuatis, ante
apicem dentibus duobus armatis, apice furcatis. Capite antice
lamina parum elevata instructo; clypeo lamina nulla; ceteris ut
in LZ. Westermanni. Pedibus minus acute spinosis; femoribus
obsolete maculatis.

Long. corp. 17 lin., mandib. 5 lin.

@. Sat elongatus, angustus. Capite crebre rugoso. Thorace disco
subtiliter parce punctulato, lateribus crebre sat fortiter punctatis,
ante basin oblique excisis. Femoribus immaculatis ; tibiis anticis
obtuse dentatis.

Long. 15, lat. 6 lin.

* See Giglioli and Salvadori, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1887, p. 581.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist, Ser. 6. Vol. v. 3

34 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Pectinicorn Coleoptera.

Hab. Assam, Munipur, 6000 feet (Wm. Doherty, Esq.).
Coll A. Fry:

This species 1s nearest to L. maculifemoratus. The largest
form is quite unlike any other species, and the long deflexed
mandibles somewhat resemble those of Cladognathus inclina-
tus, having on the inner side about eighteen or twenty small
teeth, with a rather larger one at the middle. On the top of
the head are three large erect lamine, one in front, as in L.
maculifemoratus, but larger and arched at the top, and two
others (representing the usual posterior crest), wider than the
anterior one, slightly oblique, arched at the top, with the
outer angle produced.

The smaller male closely resembles L. Westermanni, but is
distinguished by the mandibles having two teeth in front of
the middle (instead of one) before the apical fork.

The female resembles that of L. maculifemoratus in its
elongate narrow form, but is not quite so long, has the thorax
more parallel at the middle of the sides, more strongly sinuate
before the posterior angles, and with the disk almost smooth.
The anterior tibiz are nearly as in L. maculifemoratus, with
three or four teeth besides the terminal one, and with the apex
not very much produced.

I am indebted to Mr. Fry for the opportunity of describing
this very interesting species.

Prosopocelus Hanningtoni.

3. Niger, subsurdus, thoracis disco elytrorumque sutura nitidis.
Mandibulis capite paulo longioribus, intus tuberculis tribus dis-
tantibus instructis. Capite longitudine duplo latiore, antice
lunato, pone oculos tuberculo parvo obtuso instructo ; clypeo pro-
ducto. ‘horace transverso, subtiliter dense granuloso, lateribus
fere parallelis, ante basin oblique fere recte truncatis. Elytris
creberrime evidenter punctulatis.

Long. (mand. incl.) 18 lin., g var. med.

2. Niger, nitidus. Capite fortiter punctato. Thorace subtiliter
punctulato, ad latera fortius punctato, lateribus antice et postice
rotundatis. Elytrisnitidis, subtiliter punctulatis, lateribus surdis,
crebrius punctatis, punctis majoribus,

Long. 12 lin.

Hab. Kast Africa, Forests of Tiveta (Bishop Hanning-
ton).

This species is very near to P. senegalensis, but is broader
and less convex; the head has the sides more parallel, the
tubercle behind the eyes being more prominent ; the surface
behind the eye is more distinctly punctured. ‘The epistome

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Pectinicorn Coleoptera, 35

is produced into a tooth which is more prominent than in
allied species. ‘he mandibles are less flat than in P. sene-
galensis, with a small tubercle on the inner margin near the
base; a larger one in the middle, and a third near the apex ;
and between this and the apex may be seen two very small
tubercles. The thorax has the oblique part at the posterior
angles almost straight, and not sinuate as in P. senegalensis.
The elytra are very similar, but flatter and less narrowed at
the base, moderately closely and distinctly punctured, but
towards the sides the punctures are inconspicuous, on account
of the very dull surface. The mentum is broader, more con-
cave, and less punctured than in P. senegalensis.

Three specimens of this interesting species were received
from the late lamented Bishop Hannington.

Metopodontus asteriscus, Th.

This species is considered in Parry’s Catalogues of Luca-
nide as synonymous with M. occipitalis. In the British-
Museum collection there are several female examples from
Borneo which agree with M.'Thomson’s description of J,
asteriscus, and they all differ from the female examples of
M. oceipitalis from the Philippine Islands in being less
shining, and much more strongly punctured, and in having
the black at the suture of the elytra narrower. If I am cor-
rect in identifying these Bornean specimens with M. asteriscus,
there can be little doubt that it should be considered a distinct
species from J. occtpitalis.

Metopodontus Repstorffi.

Piceo-flayus, nitidus. Capitis lateribus, mandibulis plus minusve,
thorace maculis tribus, elytrorumque sutura nigris. Corpore sub-
tus pedibusque nigro ornatis.

3 var. min, Long. (mand. incl.) 13 lin,

2. Long. 113 lin.

Hab. Andaman Islands (Repstorf’).

This is very close to M. occzpitalis, but I think may well
receive a distinctive name. ‘The mandibles of the male are
as long as the head, pluridentate. The head is rather narrow,
semicircularly emarginate in front, rather straight at the sides,
with a small tubercle behind the eye. ‘Two oblique brown
marks above indicate the ridges of the larger varieties. The
thorax is densely granular and sparingly punctured, gently
arcuate at the sides. ‘The elytra are moderately closely and
very distinctly punctured ; the black at the ae is lanceo-

36 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Pectinicorn Coleoptera.

late in outline, very narrow towards the scutellum and at the
extreme apex.

?. This resembles the female of JL. occipitalis, but is more
strongly punctured throughout, the punctuation at the sides
of the thorax (and especially at the anterior angles) being
coarse and crowded together, whereas in Jf. occipitalis the
punctures are separated from each other. ‘The spot on the
disk is large, and in one specimen extends from the base to
the anterior margin. ‘The elytra have the black at the suture
very broad at the middle (about 2 lines in width), gradually
narrowed to the scutellum and apex.

Dorcivz.
Lligus Repstorffi.

44. acuminato affinis et similis. Piceo-niger.

3 var, max. Sat nitidus. Mandibulis capite longioribus, arcuatis,
depressiusculis, basi dente valido, medio dente parvo instructis.
Capite thoraceque minus nitidis. Elytris fortiter punctato-
striatis, interstitiis parce subtilissime punctulatis, marginibus
rugoso-punctatis.

Long. (mand. incl.) 143 lin.

¢ var, minor. Mandibulis medio dente nullo. Capite thoraceque
fortiter punctatis. LElytris interstitiis crebre sat fortiter punc-
tatis.

Long. (mand. incl.) 8 lin.

©. Capite thoraceque crebre fortiter rugoso-punctatis, hoc lateribus
arcuatis, ante basin oblique sinuatis. lytris striatis, interstitiis
crebre fortiter seriatim punctatis ; lateribus leviter arcuatis.

Long. 7-9 lin.

Hab. Andaman Islands (Rapstorf’).

This species is very similar to 4. acuminatus. The large
males may at once be distinguished by the position of the
tooth at the middle of the inner margin of the mandibles.
The punctures on the thorax are rather larger. The elytra
have the striz more strongly punctured, but the margin has
only a narrow border of very strong punctuation. ‘The
smaller males with simple mandibles have the head and thorax
more strongly punctured than the females of 4. acuminatus.

Aigus Curtisi.

3g. Nigro-fuscus, parum nitidus, subtus rufo-piceus. Mandibulis
capite paulo longioribus, ad apicem arcuatis, basi dente sat valido
acuminato, medio supra dente minore instructis. Capite sat
opaco, antice trisinuato, subtiliter sat crebre punctulato, genis

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Pectinicorn Coleoptera. 37

pone oculos productis. Thorace brevi, sat opaco, subtiliter sat
crebre punctulato, lateribus leviter bisinuatis, fulvo fimbriatis,
angulis posticis late rotundatis. Elytris sat fortiter striatis, sat
crebre subtiliter punctatis, striis obsolete punctatis, marginibus
ferrugineo-tinctis, fulvo fimbriatis. Pedibus fulvo-testaceo-
hirsutis.

Long. (mand. incl.) 104 lin.

Hab. Sumatra (C. Curtis).

This species might at first sight be supposed to be allied
to 41. levicollis or Ai. Eschscholtzi, but in reality is nearest
to 4. amictus. The head and thorax have the punctuation
very fine and uniform. The thorax has the sides at the
anterior angles impressed. ‘The punctuation of the elytra is
fine, but not so fine as on the thorax ; at the sides the punc-
tures are rather stronger and crowded.

igus Parryt.

Piceus, nitidus.

3 var. max, Capite magno, opaco; mandibulis capitis longitudine
perpaulo brevioribus, intus prope basin dente valido angulato
armatis. Thorace postice perpaulo angustato, discrete punctato,
lateribus fulvo fimbriatis, angulis posticis oblique truncatis.
Elytris striatis, striis obsolete punctatis, interstitiis 1°-8™ leevibus,
marginalibus paree punctulatis. Pedibus hirsutis.

Long. (mand. incl.) 8 lin. r

3 var. min, Capite minore, ad latera sat fortiter punctato. Man-
dibulis basi dente acuto armatis. horace sat fortiter punctato,
lateribus medio fere parallelis.

Long. (mand. incl.) 4—44 lin.

@. Capite thoraceque sat fortiter punctatis, hoc lateribus arcuatis.

Long. 5 lin.

Hab. Borneo, Sarawak.

This species is very near 4. glaber, but is distinguished
from that and allied species by the sparse punctuation and
smooth elytra, these latter being impunctate even in the
female, except the two lateral interstices. ‘The large males
are remarkable for the size of the head. The largest male
has the strong tooth at the base of the mandible angulated
anteriorly, with a deep narrow incision in front of it. A rather
smaller example has this tooth acuminate, with an emargina-
tion on the inner margin of the mandible in front of the
tooth, and between this emargination and the apex the man-
dible is somewhat dilated.

38 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Pectinicorn Coleoptera.

igus Woodford.
Fusco-niger, sat nitidus.
3d var. minor? Capite crebre fortiter punctato. Mandibulis sat
depressis, capite vix longioribus, acuminatis, perpaulo arcuatis,
basi intus dente brevi bilobo, medio tuberculo obtuso vix con-
spicuo armatis. Thorace capite paulo latiore, leviter convexo,
crebre fortiter punctato (disco in medio levi) antice parum angus-
tato, angulis posticis oblique late rotundatis. Elytris leviter con-
vexis, striatis, interstitiis sat crebre evidenter punctatis, basi
lateribusque creberrime fortiter punctatis.
Long. (mand. incl.) 9 lin,

9. Capite confertim fortiter punctato. horace antice paulo
angustato, crebre fortiter punctato, lateribus vix arcuatis, serru-
latis, confertim punctatis, angulis posticis oblique truncatis.
Elytris basi thorace angustioribus, postice paulo ampliatis, con-
vexis, tenuiter striatis, creberrime sat fortiter punctatis.

Long. 74 lin.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Alu (C. /. Woodford, Esq.).

This species is quite unlike any with which I am acquain-
ted. The comparatively straight acuminate mandibles have
a double short tooth at the base, with a trace ef another at
the middle. The elytra are striated, with the third and fifth
interstices very narrow, distinctly and moderately closely
punctured, more strongly punctured beyond the seventh
stria, the base and the margins rugose. ‘The margins are
beset with very short hairs, which are slightly separated from
each other.

Frevrin as.
Nigidius divergens.

Niger, nitidus. Capite antice leviter concavo, confertim punctato,
oculorum canthis retrorsum directis, divergentibus, acutis. Tho-
race bene convexo, supra parce subtiliter punctato, ad latera sat
fortiter punctato; margine antico fortiter impresso, creberrime
rugoso punctato, linea brevi mediana elevata instructo; disco
medio linea fortiter punctata impresso, ante medium utrinque
fovea impresso; lateribus subparallelis, pone angulos anticos
incisura parva, Elytris sulcatis, sulcis fortiter punctatis, inter-
stitiis costiformibus leyvibus.

Long. (mand. excl.) 103 lin,

Hab. Lake Nyassa (Thelwall).

Very near N. bubalus. The mandibles as in that species ;
very closely and coarsely punctured on the inner side of the
erect horn, which has the tip turned in nearly at right angles

» Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Pectinicorn Coleoptera. 39

and obtuse. The head is closely punctured with large punc-
tures, with a smooth spot behind each mandible, and a dull
bare patch on the vertex. The ocular canthus is large, acu-
minate, directed outwards and backwards; between the
canthus and the base of the mandible are two nearly equal
swellings in the margin. ‘The thorax has the anterior border
coarsely punctured, as in N. bubalus, but this border is much
broader. The stronger punctuation at the sides does not
extend on to the disk, so that it is not visible from above.
There is a distinct small triangular emargination just behind
the anterior angles. The sulci of the elytra have a series of
rather large punctures, with a line of fine punctures on each
side on the sides of the intervening coste.

Nigidius Welwitschit.

Niger, nitidus. Capite creberrime punctato, lateribus antice paral-
lelis, oculorum canthis arcuatis, postice acutis. Thorace transverso,
disco antice subtrilobato, subtiliter parce punctulato, margine
antico et impressione discoidali fortiter punctatis; lateribus
fere parallelis, fortiter punctatis. Elytris sulcatis, sulcis for-
titer punctatis, interstitiis lateralibus costiformibus.

Long. 53 lin.

flab. Angola (Welwitsch).

The mandibles are rather small, closely punctured, with
the horn short and curved. The head is coarsely and closely
punctured, the sides in front nearly straight, with a slight
dentiform projection just before the anterior angle ; the canthus
is arcuate, acute posteriorly. The thorax has the anterior
part of the disk trilobate, the border strongly punctured ; the
sides straight, strongly angular before the posterior oblique
truncature ; rather strongly punctured, the punctures rather
near together, crowded together near the front angles at a
spot a little removed from the margin. The elytra are sul-
cate, the sulci strongly punctured, but the punctures in the
first and second sulci are smaller; on each side of the median
line of punctures there is a line of fine punctures. ‘The first
and second interstices are not much raised, the others are
costiform.

This species is very near NV. nitidus, Th., but has the head
of a different form.

40 Prof. M‘Intosh’s Notes from the

VI.—Notes from the St. Andrews Marine Laboratory (under the
Fishery Board for Scotland) —No. X. By Prof. M‘INTOSH,
NAD LD. ERS. ace.

[Plate VIII.)

1, On Abnormal Hydromeduse.
2. On the Occurrence of the Ctenophores throughout the Year.
3. On a Heteropod (Atlanta) in British Waters.

1. On Abnormal Hydromeduse,

Two examples of abnormal Hydromeduse having precisely
similar structure were procured by the midwater-net in
August 1886 in St. Andrews Bay. They occurred amidst
swarms of Thaumantias, Bougainvillia, Oceania, Stomo-
brachium, Cyanea, Aurelia, Pleurobrachia, Beroé, and other
forms. <A brief description of these was communicated to
the Birmingham Meeting of the British Association the same
year *, it being pointed out that so far as specific characters
were present they seemed to be abnormal forms of Forbes’s
Thaumantias melanops. he latter, however, was only half
an inch in diameter, whereas both of the specimens described
were about 5 inches in diameter.

These large examples (Plate VIII. fig. 1) were readily
distinguished by the presence of a simple pale cross of the
reproductive bands along the radial canals, the bands, more-
over, meeting in the centre of the disk, which was devoid of
amanubrium. ‘The disk had the ordinary shape, viz. mode-
rately convex dorsally, somewhat flattened ventrally, and
presented no novelty in the microscopic structure of its
hyaline tissue. The margin is surrounded by a closely
arranged series of tentacles of considerable length, each taper-
ing from base to apex, and furnished with a single small
black pigment-speck at the base. The pigment-granules
show no special differentiation. Within the bases of the
tentacles is the velum.

The reproductive bands, g, begin a short distance within
the margin, and extend along the radial canals right across
the disk in each case, thus forming a conspicuous cross. More-
over, the uniformity of their diameter is one of the most cha-
racteristic features, no ordinary Thawmantias resembling them
in this respect, the nearest perhaps being Thawmantias pilosella.

* Report Brit. Assoc. 1886, pp. 710, 711.

St. Andrews Marine Laboratory. 41

These bands are somewhat regularly folded or lobulated

the margin, and have a pale grey or dull whitish colour.
The elements (probably male) were not much developed, the
minute constituent cells being finely granular. The bands
met in the centre of the disk, so that there was little room
for doubt in regard to the absence of manubrium and mouth.

A similar condition to the foregoing was observed in Tima
Bairdiz, Johnst., one of those characteristic forms found long
ago by Bidward Forbes on the West Sands at St. Andrews,
a locality which the pen and pencil of this genial naturalist
would alone have made classic ground to the marine
zoologist.

In the midwater-net of the 28th Beptember a small example
ot Tima Bairdit measuring about 2 inch across (Pl. VIII.
fig. 2) presented an unusually flattened shape, from the absence
of the large manubrium. Moreover, the radial canals,
re, with the reproductive bands, which had a minutely
granular structure, closely approached each other in the centre
of the disk, so that a small circular area only intervened.
Careful investigation of the latter area showed that the hyaline
ectoderm of the Medusa was continuous in this region, so that
no trace of an aperture existed. The radial canals ceased at
the margin of the area, one or two, indeed, having a slight
expansion before terminating. This area, although solid,
corresponded with the gastric region in connexion with the
radial canals, and therefore in this respect differed from the
preceding examples of Thaumantias.

In the case just narrated (Tima Bairdiz) the specimen had
by no means reached the average size of the period; but this
need not be held as indicating that it was stunted from the
abnormality of its alimentary apparatus. In the large Thau-
mantias first mentioned it is apparent that without a trace of
manubrium or mouth the species had not only attained the
ordinary limit of growth, but had largely exceeded it. So far
as our experience goes, no other Yhaumantias in British
waters attains such dimensions, though the digestive appa-
ratus exists in full perfection. The instance of the Thau-
mantias therefore is more remarkable than Mereschkowsky’s,
for in his small species (Bougainvellia) the abnormal speci-
mens were “only a little exceeded in size by the normal adult
individuals,” that is to say, those without manubrium and
mouth were somewhat less.

In his “ Remarks on a J Mode of Nutrition among the Hydro-
meduse of the Russian seas” C, Mereschkowsky * gives an

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. iit. pp. 177-181, pl. xx. (1879).

42 Prof. M‘Intosh’s Notes from the

account of certain forms of Bougainvillia paradoxa from the
White Sea which were totally devoid of a manubrium, and
this was the more readily noticed from the absence of the
dark red coloration usually characterizing it. Careful search
for the manubrium revealed no trace, the whole gastro-vas-
cular system consisting of a circular and four radial canals,
without stomachal dilatation or communication with the exte-
rior. ‘The endodermic cells of the canals showed active ciliary
motion, but no food could reach them. These specimens,
which had attained about half a centimetre, had therefore
reached nearly (but not quite) full size without being
nourished in the ordinary way. Another species belonging
to the same genus was occasionally found in a similar con-
dition, the four radial canals meeting without forming a
stomachal cavity and the mouth being entirely absent.

Mereschkowsky considers it is clear that such Medusa live,
and increase in size from a minute embryo without digestive
organs, and even apparently without nourishment. Yet the
latter notion cannot be accepted, and after searching through
all the possible means he comes to the conclusion that “ the
Medusa can nourish itself by means of its ectoderm by
absorbing the organic material dissolved in the sea-water.”
He cites the case of certain sponges which nourish themselves
upon organic matter dissolved in sea-water, and also by means
of their ectoderm, and thinks it possible that the Medusa can
dispense with its entoderm and yet live and attain nearly
its normal size. The ectoderm therefore in such cases fulfils
the function of the entoderm, ¢. e. extracts and assimilates
the organic matter dissolved in sea-water. He never found
solid particles on the surface of the Medusa, and he is of
opinion we have really to do only with organic matter dis-
solved in sea-water.

The theory broached by Mereschkowsky is not altogether
new, but has formerly been brought forward to explain the
nourishment of marine animals. ‘Thus the naturalists of the
‘Porcupine’ Expeditions of 1869 and 1870 held that the
marine Rhizopoda, like the Entozoa, had the power of absorb-
ing organic matter or “ diffused protoplasm”’ in sea-water.
Moreover there is this feature in common with the abnormal
Meduse, viz. that both are devoid of a mouth. The same
views therefore would equally apply to both. As formerly
shown*, the question indeed is a wide one, and the remarkable
tenacity of life exhibited by certain marine animals confined
in pure sea-water lends some countenance to the notion.

* Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. 1x. p. 1 (1872).

St. Andrews Marine Laboratory. 43

However, as a rule mouthless marine animals are provided
with certain definite modes of sustenance other than the
mere imbibition of sea-water. Thus larval fishes devoid of
a mouth have a yolk-sac, and protoplasmic animals either
surround the food-particles with their bodies or place them-
selves in actual contact with them. The Hydromeduse are
generally somewhat voracious forms, even the smallest
attacking animals much larger and higher in the scale than
themselves. It is possible therefore that such mouthless
Meduse may, by contracting the disk, fold themselves over
prey of various kinds, and thus directly absorb nourishment
through the ectoderm. They certainly show remarkable
eagerness and mobility in feeding. No species is more con-
spicuous in this respect than Lizzea octopunctata, which will
permit itself to be dragged behind a Sagztta with the umbrella
everted rather than loosen its hold. Again, L. Agassiz has
seen half an Jdyia (Beroé) close over a sun Belina and
digest it, the cut edges overlapping its prey*. He seemed
to think, indeed, that mutilated Discophora fared better in
confinement than entire specimens.

The foregoing condition (in which the Medusw are deprived
of mouth and stomach) is the opposite of that described by
Arnold Lang in Gasiroblasta Raffaeli t, in which there are
several stomachs and a variable number of apparently
irregular tentacles and radial canals. None showed a truly
radial arrangement. Many presented undulations in the out-
line and were ellipsoidal, indicating that they were in a state

of division. They had sprung from others by the same
method, the division commencing in each: case at the margin,
and it is probable that from very small parts an entire Medusa
may be developed. If these Medusze possess radial larvee
like Hucope, and propagate themselves by successive right
angular divisions, we necessarily get a series of apparently
regular stages such as those described.

2. On the Occurrence of the Ctenophores throughout
the Year.

Louis Agassiz considered the Ctenophores in general as
annual animals, laying their eggs in the water in the autumn
and then dying, the young brood making its appearance in
the spring. He watched them on the shores of Massachu-

* Contrib. Nat. Hist. United States, vol. ili. p. 175.
19 Jenaische Zeitschr. vol. xix. (1866). For this reference I am im-
debted to Dr, Scharff, of the Museum of Science and Art, Dublin,

44 Prof. M‘Intosh’s Notes from the

setts for twelve successive years, and invariably found that
in the earlier part of the summer the majority were small and
not yet filled with eggs, as they are later in the season. The
largest specimens, he adds, are always seen during the last
summer months, and all disappear after the autumnal gales.

On the eastern coast of Scotland the most abundant Cteno-
phore at the beginning of the year, that is in January, is
Pleurobrachia, which frequents the lower parts of the water,
as demonstrated by the use of surface-, midwater-, and bottom-
nets. ‘This to acertain extent had long been known, for it
is more than thirty years since the late Prof. G. HK. Day exhi-
bited to his class at St. Andrews in December living speci-
mens gathered on the West Sands by Miss Otté. Moreover,
the presence of small as well as large examples in the nets
indicates that the ranks are being gradually recruited as well
as by-and-by supplanted by the younger forms. There is
little evidence of a general destruction of the adult forms at
a given period.

The irregularity in size of those procured in January in all
probability arises from the length of time during which
spawning is carried on. ‘lhe species continues in great pro-
fusion in February, and free (pelagic) ova were not uncom-
mon—similar features characterizing the southern waters, as
at Sheerness-on-Sea*, at this time. In March it was as
plentiful both in the midwater- and bottom-nets, though the
majority of the examples were small, a few, however, reaching
2 inch in long diameter. Many minute young abounded in
the trawl-like bottom-net towards the end of the month.

Like the other pelagic Ceelenterates, Pleurobrachia became
very prominent in the midwater-net in April; but the speci-
mens were chiefly small. At the beginning of May the size
of the hordes of small Pleurobrachie ranged from } to } inch
in long diameter; but they were accompanied by many larger
forms, the number of the latter showing an increase on the
previous month, a condition in St. Andrews Bay that may,
however, have been due to immigration from the offing.
The larger forms were mature. ‘The majority were captured
by the midwater-net, so that they had frequented the deeper
regions of the water.

In July ova, larve, and young of Pleurobrachia were
common near the bottom of the water, and towards the middle
of the month ova and larve appeared in the midwater-net and
by-and-by at the surface, the diameter of the latter varying
from 1 to 15 millim. In every haul of the midwater- and

* From observations kindly furnished by Mr, Shrubsole.

St. Andrews Marine Laboratory. 4D

bottom-nets the species occurred, the larger being most plen-
tiful in the former. Many (? inch in diameter) seem to have
shed their ova. Throughout August small examples from ¢
to + inch were most abundant in the surface- and midwater-
nets, while the free ova were in various stages, and many of the
larvee had only recently escaped. The very young forms
presented the trumpet-like projection of the mouth, and with
the ova were most plentiful in the bottom-nets. During
September they swarmed in the surface- and midwater-nets,
ranging from ¢ to 4 inch in polar diameter, and they were
accompanied by ova and larve. Only a few of the same size
and some larvee were captured at the bottom. ‘he collections
made in the midwater-net afforded a contrast with those ob-
tained e.g. in midwinter, the great size and beauty of the
species at the latter season being noteworthy. ‘They became
rare in the surface-net in October, but myriads, ranging from 4
to 3% inch, still frequented the eter thls a a accom-
panied by. ova and larvee appeared in the bottom-nets. Only
a very few Pleurobrachie were captured in the surface- and
bottom-nets in November, but many of large size appeared
in the midwater-net. In December they were found at the
surface in considerable numbers from 2 inch downwards along
with ova; indeed, at no period of the year were finer examples
obtained. ‘They ranged from § to 3 inch. A few also
occurred in the bottom-net. As the cold season advanced
they had a tendency to seek the deeper parts ot the water.

It is thus apparent that many of these Ctenophores (Plewro-
brachia) spawn in summer and attain their maximum size
the following year, the adults gradually disappearing after
shedding their ova. At no period, however, is the water
devoid of them, and throughout the greater part of the year
small forms are mingled with the larger. In Pleurobrachia,
therefore, as in certain fishes, the spawning-period is evidently
extended, that is, some are early mature, others considerably
later, so that great irregularity in size is found at any given
period.

Large specimens (34 inches) of SBeroé ovata, Esch.,
occurred in midwater at the commencement of the year along
with young, the Honea only being obtained in F ebruary,
Very young forms, ;°5 inch again, appeared i in April, showing
that some ova were probably shed late in autumn*. Ex-
amples of moderate size were occasionally captured in May, and,
like Pleurobrachia, sometimes injured the postlarval fishes in the
midwater-net. In June and July Beroé became more abundant

* At Naples the deposition of ova is given as from November till
June (Mittheilungen Zool, Stat. Bd. viii. p. 390).

46 Prof. M‘Intosh’s Notes from the

and reached the surface of the water towards the end of the
latter month; but in this neighbourhood it seldom is seen in the
enormous numbers characteristic of July in the Zetlandic area.
Both young (4 inch) and adults in full maturity (4 inches)
were procured in considerable numbers throughout August.
The larger forms became less conspicuous in September and
October, a distinct increase in size occurring during the latter
month in the younger forms, which range from 14 to 24
inches. Large examples were observed in November in the
deeper parts of the water, and some of moderate size in
December. The species appears to spawn in July and
August, and most of the adults would seem to perish in the
autumn. Serod is thus seldom absent from the neighbouring
seas.

In a former number of this Journal* the occurrence of a third
Ctenophore, Lesueuria vitrea, M.- Edwards, in great numbers in
British waters was pointed out. Very little has been heard of
it in European waters since Milne-Edwards first described it
from the Mediterranean in 1841. ‘This to some extent, how-
ever, appears to have arisen from confusion with other species.
Thus that patient and keen observer, Sir John Graham
Dalyell, whose merits can scarcely be too highly estimated,
described and figured in 1848 f a form called Beroé bilobata,
which he associated with the Eucharis Tiedmanni of Esch-
scholtz, thus correctly appreciating the relationship of a species
apparently identical with the present (Lesueuria vitrea).
He procured eight small specimens in August and two larger,
14 inch, in the same month and in February, probably in the
Firth of Forth. Michael Sars, again, found it somewhat
later (1856) off the Norwegian coast.

Young Lesueurtw, 3 inch in long diameter, appeared in
April, while in May they occurred in great numbers, indeed
forming the most conspicuous feature in the pelagic fauna.
In June they were almost as numerous, ranging from 4%5 inch
or less upwards, and mainly frequenting midwater. Lesueuria
was not quite so frequent in July, but occasionally occurred in
multitudes, both large and small examples being present in the
midwater-net, the latter specimens being a little over 2 inches,
Many at this time showed ova measuring *016 to *0083 inch.
In August the average size is larger than in the previous
months, though the numbers are less. ew were procured in
September and October, but in November and December they
were occasionally captured from 3 to 14 imch in diameter.
The older fofms appear to spawn in July and gradually die

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., December 1888.
+ ‘Rare and Remarkable Animals,’ ii. p. 254, pl. liv. figs. 4, 5, 6.

St. Andrews Marine Laboratory. 47

off, leaving the young to develop during the winter. Young
and adult forms, however, occur throughout the summer and
autumn, so that the spawning-period is probably extended,
The great development of the lateral lobes of the oral region
causes a near approach to the Mnemia (Bolina) norvegica of
M. Sars.

All the Ctenophores are thus found in greater or less abun-
dance throughout the year,and do not appearsuddenly as young
specimens and disappear as suddenly as adults.

3. On a Heteropod (Atlanta) in British Waters.

Two years ago (May 1887) the capture of Clone in con-
siderable numbers in St. Andrews Bay formed a feature of
the season, and one which has not been repeated since, though
last year the water was persistently examined from January
to December. ‘The frequent investigations of the Bay, how-
ever, in 1888 brought to light, amongst other things, a small
transparent univalve, like a finely fashioned shell of glass,
containing its inhabitant. It occurred in the midwater-net
opposite the Maiden Rock on the 5th September, along with
a very rich and varied fauna, including Acét¢notrocha and
Appendicularia. ‘The specimen measured about 7; of an inch,
and the aperture of the shell rather more than half this length.
It was not detected until immersion in spirit had taken place.

In outline (Plate VIII. fig. 8) the form agrees generally
with that of Atlanta, such as figured by Souleyet in his fine
atlas *, in having a glassy, compressed, nautiloid shell, with
a narrow aperture and a prominent lip, which projects con-
siderably beyond the posterior coil. In a lateral view, indeed,
the aperture has a prominent and somewhat hooked prow (on
the left in the figure), from which a double curve proceeds to
the inner border. ‘I'wo volutions and an incomplete third
seem to be present.

When examined on edge (Plate VIII. fig. 4) the peculiarly
compressed condition of the shell is evident, the widest part
being at the posterior border of the lip, where it bends down
to joi the spire. So far as can be judged from the outline
in this position, the posterior or whorled region of the shell is
flatter than the anterior. Moreover the free edge of the shell
is not keeled, as in so many of the foreign species, a flattened
margin being present all round. It must be borne in mind,
however, that this is probably a young example and that
considerable changes may ensue during growth.

* Voyage autour du monde &e. sur la corvette ‘La Bonite,’

48 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Species of Longicornia

The contracted and opaque condition in spirit prevents a
satisfactory examination of the soft parts, but, as indicated in
the outline (Plate VIII. fig. 3), three regions occur anteriorly.
These probably correspond to the head, the fin, and the pos-
terior division of the foot.

The occurrence apparently of an example of a group of
mollusks formerly unknown in British seas is noteworthy.
Hitherto they have been considered characteristic of the
pelagic fauna of the more genial oceans, such as the Medi-
terranean and the warmer parts of the Atlantic and Pacifie.
All recent investigations however, tend to enlarge the area of
truly pelagic types, and to raise the question whether tem-
perature alone is the cause of the appearance and disappear-
ance of such forms in our seas. It is true temperature
appears to have a marked effect on the vertical distribution
of certain types and the pelagic ova of fishes ; but in the case
under consideration the influence of currents is probably of
greater 1mportance.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII.

Fg. 1, Abnormal Thaumantias, devoid of manubrium and mouth. The
reproductive bands meet in the centre. About natural size.

tg. 2. Mouthless example of Zima Bairdii, the central region being
imperforate,

Fvg.3. Lateral view of Atlanta from St. Andrews. xX 31.

Fig. 4. View of the same on edge. The opaque central region is the mass
formed by the contracted body of the mollusk. Similarly en-
larged.

VII.— Descriptions of new Species of Longicornia from India
and Ceylon. By CHARLES J. GAHAN, M.A., Assistant,
Zoological Department, British Museum.

[Plate VIL.]

THE present paper is in great part the result of my work upon
a small collection of Longicornia made by G. F. Hampson,
Esq., in the Nilghiri Hills, 8S. India, and kindly placed by
that gentleman at the disposal of the British Museum. In
the descriptions, however, I have not confined myself to
species from the Nilghiris, but have included also species
from other parts of India and Ceylon which had already
existed unnamed in the British Museum collection.

Prionide.

Rhaphipodus subopacus, n. sp.
Capite prothoraceque nigro-fuscis ; elytris fusco-brunneis, subopacis,

Jrom India and Ceylon. AQ

minutissime et densissime granulatis, circum scutellum levioribus,
subnitidis; antennis dimidium elytrorum paullo excedentibus,
scapo crasso, valde et subscabroso punctato, quam articulus
tertius fere duplo longiore.

Long. 37, lat. 14 mm., 9.

Hab. Nilghiri Hills (Hampson).

Head and prothorax nearly black ; elytra and underside of
body dark brown. Prothorax finely and very closely punc-
tulate, with three nearly impunctate shining spaces on the
surface of the pronotum (one on each side near the middle of
the disk, the third narrow, transverse, basal) and with a small
nitid spot on each side external to the discal spaces; with the
lateral borders subparallel, not rounded anteriorly, and each
provided with a row of small spines, of which that at the pos-
terior angle is strongest and recurved ; the obliquity of the
margin from this spine to the base also with two or three small
spines. Scutellum densely punctulate, with its posterior border
smooth and subnitid. Elytra somewhat smooth and shining
around the scutellum and on the anterior sutural region, with
the rest of their surface dull, owing to its extremely fine and
close granulation. Abdomen and sides of breast very finely
and closely punctulate, with the posterior borders of the first
four abdominal segments impunctate and very glossy, and
with a triangular space of the metasternum subnitid and very
sparsely punctulate. Legs blackish, with the tarsi reddish
castaneous. Antenne with the scape much stouter than and
nearly twice as long as the third joint.

This species somewhat resembles 2. manilla, Newm., but
is to be easily distinguished by the opacity of the elytra as
well as by the greater relative thickness of the scape of the
antenne.

A single female specimen in the collection.

The following fine new species from Ceylon has up to now
remained undescribed. There are three specimens in the
Museum collection.

Rhaphipodus taprobanicus, n. sp.

3. Fuscus; elytris castaneis, subopacis; prothorace minutissime
et creberrime punctulato, cum plagis et maculis disco nitidis et
sparsim punctatis, marginibus lateralibus crenulatis, antice rottin-
datis ; elytris minutissime et densissime granulosis, basi prope

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 4

50 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Species of Longicornia

suturam lvioribus, subnitidis, sparsim punctulatis; antennis
dimidium elytrorum excedentibus.

©. Pronoto in medio nitido, tenuissime et sparsissime punctulato,
versus latera valde et dense punctato; antennis dimidium elytro-
rum nec attingentibus,

Long. 60 mm.

Of the same general form as 2. manille, Newm., but much
larger, lighter in colour, with well-defined shining spaces on
the surface of the pronotum, of which two, trigonous in form,
are placed near the middle; the third, shaped somewhat like a
bracket (thus —+4), is placed transversely at the base ; with
the elytra dull, owing to the extremely small and close granu-
lations, which cover all their surface except a space around
the scutellum and along the suture; this space somewhat
glossy and sparsely punctulate.

The female differs from the male not only by the different
punctuation of its pronotum and the length of its antenne,
but by the sparse punctulation of its prosternum and by the
metasternum exhibiting no marked limitation of a triangular
smooth space. The Jast segment of the abdomen in the female
is narrower and truncate at the apex; in the male this seg-
ment is broader and rounded at the apex.

The third specimen, a small male of about 48 millim. in
length, is much lighter in colour than the other two and has
fewer spines on the sides of the prothorax.

Prinobius cenetipennis, Waterh.

BLS) eneipennis, Waterh. (Macrotoma), Trans. Ent. Soc. 1881,
p. 428.

This well-marked species was described by Mr. Water-
house from a single male specimen. Mr. Hampson has
captured a female, of which the characters compared with
the male are :—

Size much greater (length 57 millim., width 18 millim.) ;
antenne smooth, sparsely punctured, not surpassing the middle
of the elytra ; pronotum nitid, sparsely and feebly punctured
on the middle of the disk, strongly though sparingly punc-
tured towards the sides, its lateral margins provided each
with a row of small spines, of which that at the posterior
angle is recurved and much longer than the rest; prosternum
nitid, feebly and very sparsely punctured ; sides of breast
sparingly and feebly punctured and with a very sparse fulvous
pubescence; legs less scabrous.

The genus Prinobius, Muls., put as a synonym of Maero-

Srom India and Ceylon. 51

toma by Thomson and Lacordaire, has been restored and
recharacterized by Van Lansberge (Notes Leyden Mus.
vol. vi.).

Cerambycide.

Plocederus obesus, n. sp.

Hammaticherus vbesus, Dup. De}. Cat. p. 347.
Cerambyx obesus, Cat, Gemm. and Harold, p, 2802.

I do not find that this species has yet been described. It
is wrongly placed in the Munich Catalogue, and should be
putin the genus Plocederus. Closely allied to P. ferrugineus,
Linn., it differs by the following characters :—

With a pale castaneous derm, closely covered by a short
fulvous-grey pubescence, which more or less hides the colour
beneath ; with the joints of the antenne narrowly tipped with
black at their apices, and with a narrow line along the suture
and the extreme margins of the elytra also black.

The specimens in the Museum collection are from N. India
(Darjeeling and Siwalik Hills), Siam, and the Andaman
Islands.

Plocederus ferrugineus, Linn.
Cerambyx ferrugineus, Linn. Syst. Nat. 12th edit. p. 626; Oliv. Ent.
iv. a 67, p. 9, pl. xvi. fig. 184, a and 6; Fabr. Ent. Syst. i. pt. ii.
. 200.

er aniye gigas, Fabr. Mant. Insect. i. p. 182.

This Linnean species, whose name seems to have been
altogether omitted from the Munich Catalogue, has for a
synonym P. nitidus, White (Hammaticherus). The following
manuscript note by Mr. White occurs in a copy of his ‘ Ca-
talogue of B. M. Longicornia’ :—“ Hammaticherus ferru-
gineus, Linn., Oliv. . . . Near nitidus, larger, but may be
the same.” I have no doubt, having consulted Olivier’s
figure and description, that the two names refer to the same
species.

Plocederus versutus, Pasc. (Cerambyx), the type of which
is in the British Museum collection, is very closely allied to,
and is probably only a small variety of, P. ferrugineus.

The specimens of ferrugineus in the Museum collection are
nearly all ticketed “‘ Ceylon,” two are ticketed vaguely “ Ind.
orient.,” while one is ticketed (doubtless by mistake) “ China.”

A variety of P. ferrugineus, differing only in the colour of
the elytra, which is almost black, occurs in N. India (Bengal).

4®

52 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Species of Lonyicornia

This variety bears the manuscript name Plocederus niger,

Chevr.

Pachydissus similis, n. sp.

Hab. India and Ceylon.

This species is formed for the reception of individuals
having so close a resemblance to P. ¢ndutus, Newm., that it
would be impossible to distinguish them by merely examining
them from above. On looking at the underside of the head
a transverse groove is seen to cross it from cheek to cheek ;
in P. similis this groove is either perfectly straight, or, if at
all curved, has the curvature directed slightly forwards ; in
P. indutus the groove is somewhat deeper and is strongly
enough bowed backwards. I can find no other character of
any value for distinguishing the two species, and should not
have attributed so much importance to the character of the
intergenal groove had I found both forms occurring indis-
criminately in specimens from the same locality. But
having picked out all the specimens, seventeen in number,
with a straight intergenal groove, I found that they were with-
out exception either from India or Ceylon ; those specimens,
on the other hand, with a backwardly bowed groove were
from some one of the following localities :—Philippine Islands,
Siam, Sumatra, Java, Borneo, or other island of the Malay

Archipelago. One specimen was ticketed Ceylon and one
Hong Kong.

Xoanodera regularis, n. sp.

Nigro-fusca ; flavo-cinereo-pubescens ; prothorace supra subnudo ;
disco longitudinaliter et regulariter costato; elytris pube flavo-
cinerea dense obtectis, singulisque plaga laterali nuda, nigro-fusca,
valde punctata.

Long. 21, lat. 6 mm.

Hab. N. India and Burmah.

Head with a somewhat sparse tawny pubescence. Pro-
thorax rather sparsely pubescent above, thickly enough pubes-
cent at the sides; the disk with four or more straight and
well-marked longitudinal ridges. Scutellum and elytra with
a close yellowish-grey pubescence; with a dark brown,

strongly and reticulately punctured, nude space at the side of
each elytron between the base and the middle, and with a
small nude spot less strongly punctured on each side of the
scutellum. The apices of the elytra obliquely truncate, with
the angles shortly dentate. Legs and underside of the body

Jrom India and Ceylon. 53

with a uniform yellowish-grey pubescence. Antenne in the
female not quite so long as the bedy, blackish brown, with a
greyish pubescence.

This species presents the preapical carina of the elytra and
the carination of the femora which are characteristic of the
genus. It may be distinguished from XY. amena, Pasc.,
which it most nearly resembles, by the darker colour of its
derm and by the regular and very distinct longitudinal ridges
on the disk of the prothorax. In one specimen, from Tavoy,
Burmah, belonging to the collection of Alexander Fry, Esq.,
there are only four perfectly straight longitudinal ridges on
the prothorax, those external to them being more or less
wavy ; in the specimen from N. India which [ have selected
as the type there are six perfectly straight ridges, while
external to these there are on each side two others which are
nearly straight. In X. amena (the type of which, through
Mr. Pascoe’s kindness, I have been enabled to see) the ridges
of the prothorax are not so strong and are all more or less
irregular, ‘Two specimens from the Nilghiris agree with
Mr. Pascoe’s type in this respect.

Gnatholea simplex, n. sp.
Omnino brunneo-griseo-pubescens, absque maculis eburneis.

Hab. N. India (Darjeeling).

With a rather close brownish-grey pubescence. Legs and
antenne with a similarly coloured but fainter pubescence.
EKlytra with a few scattered somewhat asperate punctures.
Prothorax with two rather feeble tubercles see a little in
front of the middle of the disk.

This species has the characteristic mandibles of the genus
and agrees generally with G. stigmatipennis, White, and G.
eburifera, Thoms. It wants the ivory spots of the elytra met
with in other species, and the elytra present fewer and smaller
punctures than in the two species just mentioned.

Nyphasia fuscipennis, n. sp.

Rufo-fulvescens ; antennis pedibusque (femorum petiolis exceptis)
piceo-fuscis ; elytris violaceo-fuscis, opacis, sat dense punctulatis.

Hab. Bombay.

Head, prothorax, scutellum, body underneath, and stalks
of the femora reddish fulvous. Prothorax rounded or some-
what obtusely tubercled on the sides, closely punctured
above and somewhat flattened on the disk, Elytra densely

54 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Species of Longicornia

enough and finely punctured, dark brown, tinted with violet,
the colour changing slightly in different lights; prolonged
somewhat at the base on each side of the scutellum, and each
provided with a small tubercle at the extreme margin of the
base. Intercoxal process of the abdomen somewhat obtusely
pointed in front.

This species fits into Lacordaire’s second section of the
genus; and had that author not described the elytra as
‘saturate prasinis ”? I should have been inclined to regard it
as his Nyphasta Pascoet. His description leads me to believe
that the elytra are more closely punctured in his species,
which, moreover, is from a different locality, viz. Siam, and
no mention is made by him of tubercles at the basal margin
of the elytra.

Xylotrechus Hampsoni, n. sp. (Pl. VII. fig. 1.)

Rufo-testacens ; capite longitudinaliter suleato, obsolete carinato ;
prothorace faseiis tribus sulphureis, fasciis anticis mediisque
interruptis; elytris fasciis quatuor sulphureis—fascia antica lineata
obliqua, fascia secunda triangulari, fasciis duabus posticis trans-
versis—apicibus truncatis, angulis externis dentatis ; corpore sub-
tus sulphureo-fasciato; antennis dimidio basali rufo, dimidio
apicali fusco.

Long. 15, lat. 43 mm.

Hab. Nilghiri Hills.

Head with a median longitudinal groove extending from
the clypeus to near the occiput, with the sides of the groove
scarcely raised ; with a short carina on each side of the front
just over the insertion of the antenna. Prothorax with three
sulphur-yellow transverse bands, the first a little behind the
anterior border and slightly interrupted in the middle, the
second just behind the middle and made up of four spots, the
third on the basal border and at the sides united with a short
longitudinal spot ; with the space between the intermediate
and basal yellow bands dull black and sparsely and minutely
granulate. EKlytra with an oblique black band on each side
near the base, these bands meeting at the suture and thence
produced forwards and spreading out a little on each side of
the scutellum ; with a narrow sulphur-yellow fascia occupying
the middle of each of the black fasciz and stopping short
before reaching the suture; with a broad sulphur-yellow
fascia somewhat in the form of a triangle a little in front of
the middle of the elytra; with two transverse yellow fascie
behind the middle, of which the posterior is less distinct than
the anterior. Legs reddish ferruginous, with the intermediate

from India and Ceylon. 5d

and posterior femora somewhat infuscate at the middle ; with
the first joint of the posterior tarsus not quite twice as lone
as the two succeeding joints combined. Antenne with the
first five joints reddish, the remaining joints brownish black.

I have named this pretty insect after Mr. Hampson, to
whose liberality the British Museum is indebted for it.

Lamiide.
Pharsalia proxima, n. sp.

Griseo-fulvo et fusco varia; prothorace supra leviter inequali nec
tuberculato, fulvo-griseo cum maculis duabus nigris; elytris prope
basin valde tuberculatis, singulis lateraliter cum plaga obliqua
alba.

Long. 21, lat. 74 mm.

Hab. Ceylon.

With a somewhat mixed pubescence of tawny grey and
dark brown, with the former predominating on the upperside
of the head and prothorax, with two velvety black spots on
the middleof the diskof the prothorax. Elytra with an oblique
white patch near the middle of each side, and each, at a short
distance from the base, with a large obtuse tubercle which
passes behind into a feebly raised line extending to near the
apex. On the basal part the elytra are granulose and strongly
punctured, the punctures posteriorly becoming much smaller,
Prosternal process laterally and rather strongly dilated near
the middle of its length. Mesosternal process produced in
front into an acute conical tubercle.

This species rather closely resembles P. gibbifera, Guér.,
and in structural characters is more nearly allied to it than is
any other described species of the genus. It is at once dis-
tinguished from it, however, by the absence of tubercles
from the disk of the prothorax and by the much more acute

tuberculation of the mesosternal process.

Batocera Polli,n. sp. (Pl. VII. fig. 2.)

®. Nigra; cinereo-griseo-pubescens ; prothorace antice et postice
distincte bisuleato, supra trituberculato, disco maculis duabus
luteis ornato; elytris basi dense et valde granulatis, deinde
sparsim punctatis, maculis duodecim majoribus et tribus vel
quatuor minoribus albo-tomentosis ornatis, apice sinuato-truncatis,
angulis suturalibus dentatis ; antennis fere muticis.

Long. 45, lat. 16 mm.

Hab, Ceylon.

56 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Species of Longicornia

Black; with a thin ashy grey pubescence above and a
denser and somewhat darker “pubescence underneath. Pro-
thorax with four distinct transverse grooves—two anteriorly
and two posteriorly ; with two large tomentose luteous spots,
which, united anteriorly, are separated behind by a smooth,
elossy, rounded, and little raised tubercle occupying the
middle of the disk: ; with a smaller, somewhat flattened, dull
black tubercle at the antero-lateral angle of each spot. ’ Seu-
tellum with a white tomentum. Elytra each with six large
and one or two very small tomentose white spots; the base
covered with large and closely crowded granulations, which
extend along the middle of the disk to less than a fourth of
the length of the elytra and along the sides to nearly half
their length; the shoulders each armed with a small and
rather blunt tooth ; the apices of the elytra somewhat sinu-
ately truncate, rounded externally, dentate at the suture.
Pubescence of the elytra denser along a broad sutural and
marginal band. Body underneath with a broad white band
on each side, which extends uninterruptedly from behind the
eye up to the middle of the last abdominal segment. An-
tennee black, with the first four joints smooth, glossy, and
having traces of a faint greyish pubescence; with the re-
maining joints dull brownish black.

This very distinct species I have pleasure in naming after
Mr. Neervoort van de Poll, to whom I am indebted not only
for aid derived from his published contributions to the subject
of the genus Batocera, but also for personal help in deter-
aie the species of this genus in the British Museum col-
ection.

Cacia signata, n. sp.

Cinereo-pubescens ; prothorace supra utrinque nigro-bivittato ; ely-
tris nigro-maculatis et pone medium nigro-subfasciatis.
Long. 14 mm.

Hab. Ceylon.

With an ashy pubescence. Prothorax above with two dull
black vittee on each side, with these vitte slightly irregular
in outline and for part of their extent united. Hlytra with a
small black spot on each side of the scutellum, a spot on each
a little behind the middle of the base, a large plagiate spot on
each side below the shoulder, with a common sutural spot
just in front of the middle, this spot connected behind with a
kind of zigzag black fascia, formed by a couple of irregular
spots on each elytron; with two black spots on each near the
apex. Body underneath ashy pubescent, with glabrous glossy

From India and Ceylon. ah

spots along the middle; with an opaque black spot at each of
the antero-lateral angles of the last four abdominal segments.
Legs ashy pubescent, with the third and fourth joints of all
the tarsi black, with the apices of the tibiz infuscate, and with
a rounded black spot on the anterior side of each of the pos-
terior femora. Antennee with the scape, second joint, and
basal halves of the third and fourth joints ashy, the remaining
joints dark brown, very narrowly ringed with grey ; all ciliate
underneath, with the ciliations denser below the dark and
slightly thickened apical halves of the third and fourth joints.
Pro- and mesosterna with their opposed faces vertical.

Two specimens in the Museum collection agree in the cha-
racters just given; a third specimen presents differences
which may perhaps be regarded as varietal. In this specimen
the two vittz on each side of the prothorax are very regular
in form and are separated throughout their whole length ; on
the elytra the antero-lateral spot is smaller and the common
sutural spot is altogether wanting.

Coptops quadrimaculata, n. sp. (Pl. VIL. fig. 3.)

Brunneo, griseo fulyoque variegata ; elytris utrinque maculis duabus
nigro-velutinis—altera ante, altera pone medium,
Long. 11-15 mm.

Hab. Nilghiri Hills (ZZampson).

Head almost impunctate ; prothorax and elytra with a few
scattered punctures; prothorax with a single small dentiform
tubercle on each side close to the anterior border. Elytra each
with two velvety black spots, of which one, larger and trans-
verse, is placed in front of the middle and nearly reaches the
external margin, the other, smaller and rounded or irregular
in form, is behind the middle and occupies a position nearly
midway between the suture and external margin ; all the spots
have a more or less distinct narrow border of fulvous. On
each elytron between the spots is a greyish patch. On the
legs and underside of the body a fulvous-grey colour pre-
dominates, the brown being mostly confined to minute rounded
spots. The scape of the antenne is fulvous grey, speckled
with brown; the joints trom the third are fuscous, ringed
with grey at the base.

This species has much the appearance of a Mesosa; but as
the head is scarcely concave between the antennal tubercles
and the prothorax is provided with a small antero-lateral
tubercle, it seems to fit better into the genus Coptops. ‘The
prosternal process is truncate and vertical behind; and in

58 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Species of Longicornia

this respect the species differs slightly from the more typical
species of both Coptops and Mesosa. Its nearest ally seems
to be an undescribed species from Java (Anancylus binotatus,

Chevr., MS.).

Thylactus simulans, n. sp.

f
Xylorrhize aduste simillimus, sed differt prothoracis lateribus spi-
nosis ; antennarum articulis a quarto ad decimum apicibus intus
acute angulatis.

Hab. N. India (Darjeeling).

Clothed with a thick silky pubescence of a dark brown
colour varied with’ pale fulvous yellow. On the elytra the
brown is predominant at the base, the pale yellow at the sides,
while posteriorly the colours are so mixed as to present a
streaked appearance. Head with prominent antennal
tubercles, with the brow between them broadly enough and
strongly concave. Prothorax with a strong and rather obtuse
spine on the middle of each side, with a paler yellowish line
along the middle of the disk, on each side of which some
strong punctures are visible. Hlytra strongly and sparsely
punctured near the base, with the punctures almost concealed
by the pubescence ; rounded externally at the apex, with each
at the suture prolonged into a broad blunt process. Legs
short and stout, with the tarsi about equal in length to the
tibie. Antenne (9?) reaching to about two thirds the
length of the elytra, with the scape and third joint somewhat
thickened at their apices; with each joint from the fourth
distinctly angular on the inner side at its apex.

In its size, colour, and style of marking this species bears
a remarkable resemblance to Xylorrhiza adusta, Wied., but
its characters show it to be generically distinct. Unless a
special genus is to be formed for its reception, I do not see
that it can be better placed than in the genus Thylactus of
Pascoe. The form of its elytra at the apex is unusual for
this genus and agrees closely enough with that of X. adusta.
_ There is but one specimen in the British Museum collec-
tion.

The following species, also from N. India, agrees better
with the characters of Thylactus, and has the general form
of 7. longipennis, Pasc.

Thylactus dorsalis, n. sp. (PI. VII. fig. 4.)

Albo-flavescente dense pubescens; capitis fronte nigra, sparsim

from India and Ceylon. 59

pubescente et valde punctata; prothorace supra plagis duabus
nigris vix pubescentibus et valde rugoso-punctatis ; elytris dorso
juxta suturam late nigrescentibus, apicibus lateraliter dilatatis,
postice valde emarginatis.

Long. 28-30, lat. 8 mm.

Hab. Nepal (General Hardwicke).

Front of the head black, sparsely pubescent and strongly
punctured ; vertex and antennal tubercles with a thick yel-
lowish-white pubescence, with the pubescence so arranged on
the latter as to make them appear very prominent and pointed.
Prothorax strongly spined at tbe sides, with a yellowish-white
pubescence, with, on the disk, two scarcely pubescent blackish
spaces, which are seen to be strongly and rugosely punctured.
Hlytra with a yellowish-white pubescence; with a broad,
somewhat irregular, blackish space along the suture, not con-
tinued to the apex ; witha broad and rather faint longitudinal
depression on each side below the disk, and near the posterior
extremity of each of these depressions with two or three feeble
cariniform tubercles, which are covered over by the pubes-
cence; each elytron deeply emarginated at the apex, so as
to leave a narrow blunt process on the sutural side of the
emargination and an obtuse, externally rounded, dilatation on
the outer side. Underside of the body and the legs with a
yellowish-white pubescence mixed on parts with brown ; the
abdomen with some scattered, small, shining black spots.
Antenne with the joints from the third dark brown, ringed
with grey at their bases.

Rhodopis piperata, n. sp.
R. pubere similis, differt prothoracis lateribus distincte et valde
spinosis ; elyiris utrinque ad medium basis tuberculatis.
Long. 14-16, lat. 5 mm.

flab. Nilghiri Hills (Hampson).

Head somewhat narrowly and triangularly coneave between
the antennal tubercles, front and vertex sparsely punctured
and clothed with a pubescence which is partly greyish and
partly fulvous. Prothorax strongly and rather sparsely
punctured above, with a faint greyish pubescence and with
three narrow, longitudinal, tawny vitte ; with a distinct and
rather strong spine on each side, which is directed very
shghtly upwards. Elytra with a rather mottled pubescence
of grey, tawny, and dark brown; witha tubercle, surmounted
by a few small shiny granules, on each side of the scutellum ;
basal half of elytra sparsely punctured, the punctures disap-
pearing or becoming concealed beyond the middle; apices of

60 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Species of Longicornia

elytra truncate. Body underneath with a greyish pubes-
cence, with some spots at the sides of the thorax and the pos-
terior borders of the abdominal segments fulvous ; sides of
the metasternum and of a few of the abdominal segments
with some small, rounded, denuded black spots. Legs grey,
with the tarsi and apices of the tibie black. Antenne with
the scape gradually and slightly thickened towards the apex,
with the joints from the third ashy towards their bases, and
for the rest of their length black ; third joint in the male
strongly and abruptly clavate towards its apex.

Rhodopis aiboplagiata, n.sp. (Pl. VII. fig. 5.)

Griseo-pubescens ; antennis scapo et articulo tertio ad apicem ( ¢)
clavatis ; prothorace lateribus valde spinosis, dorso fulvo-trivittato ;
scutello fulvo; elytris brunnescenti-pubescentibus, ad basin et
juxta suturam griseis, singulisque plagis duabus dilaceratis albis
—altera ante, altera pone medium, apicibus subtruncatis vel
rotundatis ; corpore subtus pedibusque subtiliter griseo-pubescen-
tibus.

Long. 153, lat. 53 mm.

Hab. N. India (Darjeeling).

Head, prothorax, and base of the elytra sparsely punc-
tured. Prothorax strongly enough spined at the sides, with
the spines directed somewhat obliquely upwards. With the
scape of the antenne clavate, with the third jot in the male
abruptly clavate at the apex, with the antenne themselves
rather widely separated at the base. With the first joint of
the posterior tarsus as long as or slightly longer than the two
succeeding joints combined.

Rhodopis albomaculata, n. sp.

Antennis scapo et articulo tertio ad apicem ( ¢ ) clavatis; prothorace
lateribus valde spinosis, dorso fulvo-trivittato; scutello fulvo ;
elytris fulvo-griseo-pubescentibus fusco mixtis, cum maculis non-
nullis parvis, albo-tomentosis ; corpore subtus pedibusque fulvo-
griseo-pubescentibus.

Long. 16-19, lat. 53-63 mm.

Hab. N. India (Darjeeling, Nepal).

Head, prothorax, and basal third of the elytra sparsely
punctured. Antenne with the scape clavate and the third
joint in the male abruptly clavate at the apex. Prothorax
with a greyish pubescence above and with three fulvous lines
along the disk; acutely spined on each side, with the spines
directed obliquely upwards. Elytra with some small whitish

Srom India and Ceylon. 61

spots, which are not very regular in number or position, but
with usually a group of three on the disk of each in front of
the middle, and two more distinct and close together behind
the middle. Apices of the elytra somewhat obliquely trun-
cate. Posterior tarsi with the first joint as long as the two
succeeding joints combined.

This and the preceding species, while not differing suffi-
ciently to be formed into a genus apart, will form a section in
the genus, characterized by the clavate scape of the antenne
and the longer first joint of the posterior tarsus.

Cylindrepomus virgatus (Melly, MS.), n. sp.

Supra niger, longitudinaliter cinereo-vittatus ; capitis vertice vittis
duabus antice conjunctis postice divergentibus ; prothoracis dorso
vittis tribus; elytris singulis vittis tribus, vitta mediana ad
medium interrupta; apicibus elytrorum suboblique truncatis ;
corpore subtus cinereo-pubescente cum linea pectoris et maculis ad
latera abdominis nigris ; antennis pedibusque nigrescentibus, scapo
antice scabroso.

Long. 15, lat. 33 mm.

Hab. Wimalayas.

With deep black and ashy, alternating, very distinctly
vittate ; with two ashy and three black vittee on the upperside
of the head; with three ashy and four black vitte on the
upperside of the prothorax, and a broad ashy vitta on each
side low down. LElytra each with three ashy and four black
vittee, including the black sutural line and the narrow black
border externally ; with the ashy vitte all united at the apex,
and with the two intermediate black vitte connected by a
transverse bar at the middle of their length. The elytra
along the black vittes seen to be thickly enough and rather
strongly punctured. LElytra somewhat abruptly narrowed
posteriorly, with a subsinuate and slightly oblique truncature
at the apex.

Sthenias albicollis, n. sp. (Pl. VIL. fig. 6.)

Parvus in hoe genere, griseo-brunneo-pubescens cum prothorace
lateraliter et plaga postica singuli elytri albescentibus.
Long. 10-13, lat. 3-4 mm. (¢ 2).

Hab. Nilghiri Hills, 8S. India (Hampson).

Rather small and narrow for this genus. Prothorax
whitish at the sides and greyish white along the middle of
the disk ; with a few very small black spots, of which one at
the middle of the base and two near the middle of the disk

62 Mr. C.J. Gahan on new Species of Longicornia

are more distinct. Scutellum fulvous, and, in the middle,
grey. Elytra greyish brown, with an oblique whitish plaga
on each side behind the middle; with two very feeble
tubercles (one in front of the other) on each at the base, and
with the pubescence raised in two or three feeble tufts on each
posteriorly, these tufts being partly black, partly fulvous ;
with also some small black dots, especially along the suture ;
with the apices somewhat obliquely truncate, prolonged more
on the outer side, and without any sharp angles. Body under-
neath with a mixed pubescence of whitish, greyish, and ful-
vous. Antenne brownish, speckled with grey and tawny,
and with the scape at the apex, the second joint, and the base
of the third more distinctly white.

The mandibles in the only male of the species which I
have seen do not possess the upward processes so charac-
teristic of the males of S. grisator, Fab.

Sthenias maculiceps, n. sp.
’
Apomecyna maculifrons, Chevr. MS.

Capitis fronte griseo-pubescente, genis albescentibus, fulvo-macu-
latis; capitis vertice maculis duabus parvis nigris; prothorace
griseo-brunneo, lateribus subrotundatis ; elytris brunneis nigro
fulvoque minute maculatis, singulis ad latus plaga maxima griseo-
albescente.

Hab. Ceylon.

Head with the pubescence in front greyish, at the sides
whitish, with fulvous spots. Prothorax greyish brown.
Elytra brownish, with a very large greyish-white patch on
each side, this patch abruptly narrowed behind the middle, so
that its posterior part is much narrower than its anterior,
and with a black spot in the angle above which is thus
formed. Breast greyish white, abdomen brownish.

This and the preceding species agree in size and general
form, and differ from S. grisator, Fabr., in their relatively
shorter prothorax, which is at the same time a little more
rounded at the sides.

Mispila obscura, n. sp.

Obscure brunneo-griseo-pubescens, fusco et albo vage maculata;
prothoracis disco tuberculis tribus parvis; elytris in medio obso-
lete transverse fasciatis, sparsim punctatis, punctis ad basin
asperatis.

Long. 9-138 mm,

Hab. Nilghini Hills (Hampson).

Srom India and Ceylon. 63

With an obscure brownish or fulvous-grey pubescence,
with an irregular transverse band of a scarcely perceptibly
darker shade on the middle of the elytra; this band some-
what fuscous on its anterior and posterior borders, where also
may be seen a few minute white spots; with a few fuscous
and one or two linear white spots on the posterior part of the
elytra. Head and prothorax with small and sparse setigerous
punctures ; prothorax with three small tubercles on the disk
and with one or two small fuscous spots towards the sides in
addition to the minute brown specks which mark the position
of the punctures. EKlytra sparsely setigerously punctured,
with the punctures somewhat asperate towards the base and
becoming very feeble posteriorly. Body underneath and legs
(a subnitid spot on the middle of each of the femora excepted)
dull grey, with the posterior border of the first abdominal
segment narrowly fulvous.

Enispia? cleroides,n. sp. (Pl. VII. fig. 7.)

Capite prothoraceque nigris, dense punctatis ; elytris dense fortiter-
que punctatis, basi rufo-ferrugineis, nudis, deinde transversim
fasciatis cum fasciis griseis (vel albis) et nigris alternatis; pro-
thorace subtus nigro ; pectore et segmento primo abdominis rufo-
ferrugineis, segmentis ceteris nigris.

Long. 8, lat. 2? mm.

Hab. N. India.

Head and prothorax black, densely punctured. Elytra
densely and rather strongly punctured on the basal two thirds,
very sparsely and feebly on the apical third; reddish ferru-
ginous and impubescent on the basal third; followed by
transverse bands of white and black, of which the first is
rather narrow, whitish towards the sides and greyish towards
the suture ; the second is a broad, opaque, black band, areu-
ate posteriorly, and with its front margin produced into three
angles—one median sutural and one towards each side ; this
band is followed by a narrow white band, bowed forwards
and placed just before the beginning of the apical third; the
latter is black and subnitid, with a large pubescent and some-
what triangular white spot occupying the middle of it just
before the apex. ‘The underside of the meso- and metathorax
and the basal segment of the abdomen are reddish ferrugi-
nous and sparsely punctured ; the latter is bordered poste-
riorly with white, the rest of the abdomen behind it is black
and shiny. From nearly all parts of the body as well as
from the legs and antenne long fine hairs are given off.
Antenne with the scape subcylindrical and shorter than the

64 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Species of Longicornia

third joint, the fourth shorter than the third, the remaining
joints gradually decreasing in length. Femora thickened in
the middle ; anterior tibiz strongly enough bowed, the inter-
mediate and posterior tibiee feebly bowed.

This pretty and interesting little species I place with
doubt in Hnispia, as the form and relative proportions of the
joints of the antennee do not quite agree with those described
for that genus.

Eunidia simplex, n. sp.

Supra fulvo-griseo-pubescens, subtus griseo-pubescens ; lobis inferi-
oribus oculorum longissimis ; antennis fuscis, corpore plus sesqui-
longioribus.

foxy Waller

Long. 53-73, lat. 14-23 mm.

Hab. Nilghiri Hills (Hampson).

Clothed with a dense fulvous-grey pubescence above and
with a less dense greyish pubescence underneath. Front of
head broad and nearly flat; lower lobes of eyes oblong,
nearly twice as long as broad. Legs blackish brown, with a
faint greyish pubescence. Antenne with the basal joints
nearly black, the remaining joints of a very dark ferrugimous
brown colour.

M. Lacordaire suspected that the species described from
outside of Africa did not belong to this genus. The present
species has all the characteristics of the genus.

PEMPTOLASIUS, n. g.

Head retracted in repose, with the front trapeziform, with
the antennal tubercles subvertical and narrowly and triangu-
larly separated from each other above. Antenne a little
longer than the body (¢), with the scape rather short and
subeylindrical ; with the third joint much longer than the
scape, the fourth a little shorter than the third, the fifth and
following joints subequal and each much shorter than the
fourth; with the fifth joimt and the apex of the fourth
thickly fringed with black hairs underneath.

Prothorax cylindrical, unarmed at the sides, longer above
than below, with the sternum surpassing the coxal cavities
but little in front.

Elytra convex above, somewhat vertical at the sides, pos-
teriorly declivous, and each with a short obtuse carina com-
mencing at the shoulder and disappearing before the middle.
Apices truncate.

Legs subequal, with the femora somewhat cylindrical, with

Strom India and Ceylon. 65

the intermediate tibie grooved, and with the claws of the
tarsi rather broadly divergent, but not divaricate.
With the intermediate cotyloid cavities open on the outside.
This genus may be placed provisionally near Eetatosta; it
does not seem to fit well into any of Lacordaire’s groups.

Pemptolasius humeralis, n. sp. (Pl. VII. fig. 8.)

Cinereo-pubescens ; prothorace sparsim fortiterque punctato, supra
lineis tribus longitudinalibus albis; elytris supra fortiter et dense
punctatis, lateraliter minus dense punctatis; humeris glabris,
nitidis, nigris.

Long. 13, lat. 4 mm.

Hab. Darjeeling.

With an ashy-grey pubescence. Head with the front
sparsely punctured, the vertex more thickly punctured. Pro-
thorax a little longer than broad, with its sides parallel ;
strongly and deeply punctured above and at the sides, the
disk with three rather faint white lines—one median and one
towards each side. Elytra broader at the base than the pro-
thorax, rather closely and strongly punctured above, less
densely punctured at the sides, each of the latter with two or
three feebly raised lines; with a row of small white points
along the disk of each elytron, and with one or two small
white spots placed towards the side behind the middle of each ;
with the shoulders black and very glossy ; with the apices of
the elytra obliquely truncate. Legs with a greyish pubes-
cence; femora with some scattered minute black points.
Antenne with the scape greyish, the remaining joints (the
fifth excepted) pale brown, with a faint greyish pubescence
and sparsely ciliate underneath; with the fifth joint and the
apex of the fourth black, and thickly fringed with black hairs
underneath,

Stibara suturalis, n. sp.

Fulvo-testacea, fulvo-pubescens ; prothorace lateribus obsolete nigro-
vittatis, leviter tumidis nec tuberculatis; elytris lateribus dis-
tincte carinatis, disco obtuse minus distincte carinato, fulvis, cum
sutura, vitta longitudinali utrinque et marginibus externis (prope
basin exceptis) nigrescentibus ; antennis omnino nigris.

Long. 18, lat. 52? mm.

Hab. 8. India (Nilghiris, Belgaum).

Allied to S. négricornis, Fabry. Klytra with the suture and
the external margins (except near the base), as well as a lon-
gitudinal vitta on each, black ; with three carine on each, of

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 5

66 Messrs. G. Y. and A. F. Dixon on

which one is lateral and, beginning close under the humeral
prominence, extends in a nearly straight line to the external
apical angle ; the second, just above this, is very feeble, soon
disappears, and seems to be a continuation of the humeral
prominence ; the third is placed about a millimetre higher up
than the first and almost on the edge of the disk; along the
inner side of this carina is a row of punctures, between it and
the middle carina is a second row of larger and more distant
punctures, while just beneath the first or lateral carina, near
the middle of its length, is a short row of very small punc-
tures. In S. nigricornis the arrangement of the carine and
punctures is somewhat the same, but the lowermost or lateral
carina of each side is less prominent, especially anteriorly ;
the median carina is much more distinct and is plainly seen
to be a continuation of the humeral prominence; while the
third or discal carina is much feebler. The punctures too are
much fewer in number and placed more widely apart; but in
this respect S. ntgricornis is subject to vary. In the type
specimen of Fabricius there are only four or five punctures in
each row, while in other specimens twice this number is
reached. In S. négricornis the legs and underside of the body
are generally greyish ; in the present species they are dis-
tinctly fulvous, with the tarsi on their upperside and the abdo-
men and breast partly black.

From Mr. Thomson’s too short diagnosis of 8. lateralis I
am quite unable to determine his species. It is from N.
India. The species just described may possibly be the same
or a variety of it.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VII.

Fig. 1. Xylotrechus Hampsont.
Fig. 2. Batocera Poll.

Fig. 3. Coptops quadrimaculata.
Fig. 4. Thylactus dorsalis.

Fig, 5. Rhodopis alboplagiata.
Fig. 6. Sthenias albicollis.

Fig. 7. Enispia cleroides.

Fig. 8. Pemptolasius humeralis.

VIII.—WNote on Tealia tuberculata and T. crassicornis.
By G. Y. and A. F. Drxon.

In a paper published in the ‘ Journal of the Marine Biological
Association’ (vol. i. p. 205) Mr. J. T. Cunningham endea-
vours to set up Tealva tuberculata (Cocks) as a species distinet
from Tealia crassicornés (Miiller). Perhaps we may be

Tealia tuberculata and T. crassicornis. 67

allowed to point out some matters that have occurred to us
and which prevent our accepting his conclusions. There
would appear to be no doubt whatever that Mr. Cunningham
has obtained specimens identical with that on which Cocks
based the description of his species 7. tuberculata; but it
seems to us that the accurate and detailed description which
he gives of them leaves almost no room for question that
these specimens belong to Gosse’s species 7’. crassicornis.
The points on which Mr. Cunningham separates 7 tubercu-
lata from T. crassicornis are :— (1) the occurrence of irregu-
larly branched or bifureated tentacles, which, so far as he is
aware, have been observed only in 7. tuberculata, though he
admits that this is not a constant character of the species ; (2)
the slight irregularities in the number and arrangement of
the tentacles which were exhibited by all the specimens of
T. tuberculata which he examined, the conjectured normal
arrangement being 5, 5, 10, 20, 40,80; (3) he also states
that J’. crasstcornis may be provisionally distinguished by
the number of the tentacles, which are always arranged 5, 5,
10, 20, 40, while 7. tuberculata possesses the ideal number
given above; (4) he points out that in 7. tuberculata the
tubercles on the column are arranged in vertical series, while
Gosse states that those of 7’. crasstcornis are irregularly
scattered.

These distinctions seem to us insufficient to separate the
species in question. In the first place the occurrence of
branched or bifurcated tentacles is not limited to any one
species of Actinia. We have observed this phenomenon
oceurring occasionally in Actinoloba dianthus, Sagartia
miniata, Actinia equina, Anthea cereus, Bunodes gemmacea,
Peachia hastata, and more frequently in Oylista undata ; but
the most conspicuous instance of this peculiarity we have
ever met with was in a large specimen of T. crassicornis
adhering to an oyster-shell, and obtained from deep water in
Dublin Bay in January last. In this specimen several of
the tentacles were abnormally developed with warts or
branches. Gosse considered the tendency of the tentacles to
a monstrous fission the most marked peculiarity of Cocks’s
specimen ; Mr. Cunningham admits that this tendency is not
exhibited by some individuals otherwise similar to Cocks’s
specimen, and we see that it may be present in 7. crassi-
cornis, the very species from which it 1s desired to separate
some individuals on the ground that they possess this pecu-
liarity. Secondly, as to the irregularity in the tentacles
observed by Mr. Cunningham, we should not be inclined to

lay much stress on this point in the case of individuals so
5*

68 On TYealia tuberculata and 'T. crassicornis.

large as those which he describes. He himself shows that
the normal arrangement corresponds with that in 7. crassi-
cornis so far as the latter goes, and that the irregularity in
T. tuberculata is due to deficiencies in the outer cycle of the
tentacles. Further, it is not uncommon to find in adult
individuals of other species of Actiniz possessing numerous
tentacles similar departures from the regular type. Even in
Bunodes verrucosa, in which, as a rule, the regular arrange-
ment is singularly conspicuous, we have observed a somewhat
similar numerical deficiency (Proc. Roy. Dubl. Soc. vol. vi.
p- 821). Indeed, in large specimens, one could hardly expect
to find the full number of tentacles always present in the
outer and, therefore, newer cycles; for to preserve such
regularity in growth the tentacles in each cycle should be
simultaneously developed, and it should be remembered that
such an absolutely symmetrical development of mesenteries
as this would suggest is not usually met with among Actiniz
with numerous mesenteries. Mr. Cunningham himself can
hardly consider the irregularity in the tentacles to be of
specific importance ; for were he to do so, to be logical, he
should exclude the individuals which he has described as
well from the genus Tealia, as defined by himself, as from the
species 7’. crassicornis. Thirdly, as to the greater number of
tentacles observed by Mr. Cunningham in 7’. tuberculata com-
pared with the number assigned by Gosse to 7. crassicornis, we
do not see why this should not be compatible with the identity
of the twospecies. The individuals referred to 7. tuberculata
are evidently larger than those found along the shore between
tide-marks, which formed the material on which Gosse based
his description of 7. crassicornis ; and it seems reasonable to
suppose that the number of tentacles increases with the
growth of the animal. Fourthly, as to the tubercles being
arranged in vertical rows in 7. tuberculata, we have shown
that the same is the case with 1. crassicornis (1. c. pp. 319,
320). We do not think that the fact that Cocks’s and Mr.
Cunningham’s specimens were attached to the valves of
Lamellibranchs, instead of being found in the clefts of rocks,
is anything more than a different habit necessarily assumed
by the animals in the different regions from which they were
obtained. We may add that we have never seen a 7’. crassv-
cornis brought from deep water except on a shell or stone.
Mr. Cunningham points out that the surface of the column
is almost always bare of pebbles and sand, though furnished
with suckers ; we have invariably found this to be the case
with specimens of 7’. crassicornis dredged in deep water.
From what we have already said it is apparent that we

Dr. A. Giinther on the Hauna of Madagascar. 69
cannot follow Professor Haddon (Trans. Roy. Dubl. Soe.

ser. 2, vol. iv. p. 321) in regarding Tealia tuberculata as a
possible synonym of Actinauge Richard’. Owing to Prof.
Haddon’s kindness we have had an opportunity, of seeing
Cocks’s original drawing, and we can only state that it is
quite possible it was made from a merely overgrown specimen
of 7. crassicornis. While, therefore, as Gosse says, J’. tuber-
culata may be a true species (Actin. Brit. p. 217), we must
state our belief that as yet its distinctive specific charac-
teristics have not been diagnosed.

Mr. Cunningham arrives at the conclusion that Bolocera
eques, Gosse, is the same as Tealia tuberculata. But it
appears a rather high-handed course to ignore totally the non-
retractility of the margin, which Gosse made one of the
distinguishing features of the genus Bolocera, and, in addition,
to assume that Gosse is mistaken in the number he assigns
to the tentacles. We do not think that such an accurate
observer as Gosse can have gone so far astray in a matter of
external form.

We cannot conclude without expressing our surprise that
Mr. Cunningham has included in the genus Tealia, detined
by himself as possessing a decimal arrangement of parts, such
a form as 7. bunodiformis, Hertwig, which has been de-
scribed in the ‘ Challenger’ Report (p. 35) as possessing parts
certainly not conforming in number or disposition to this
definition. We have elsewhere urged the probable identity
of L. bunodiformis and Bunodes thullia, Gosse (l.c. p. 319) ;
but, in any case, it must be widely separate from such a well-
defined genus as Teulia.

1X.— Tenth Contribution to the Knowledge of the Fauna of
Madagascar *. By Dr. A. GinTueR, F.R.S.

(Plate VL]
A SMALL collection made by the Rev. James Wills in the
torest-disirict east of Imerina contained a few new or inter-
esting species.

Among the Mammalia there is a specimen of a very pecu-

liarly coloured species of Hemicentetes.

Hemicentetes nigrofuscus.
This species agrees with Hemicentetes semispinosus in size,

* 9, “Ninth Contribution to the Knowledge of the Fauna of Madagas-
ar,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1882, vol. ix. p. 262.

70 Dr. A. Giinther on the Fauna of Madagascar.

the proportions of the body, and the distribution of the orna-
mental markings; but what is yellow or whitish in //. sema-
spinosus is of a bright light chestnut-colour in this species,
and the middle of the chest and abdomen is black.

In the only specimen available at present the fur is very
thin and consists on the side of the abdomen of thin woolly
hairs, sparsely mixed with very slender bristles. The crest
across the nape is formed by less numerous spines, which,
like all the spines on the back, are of a deep orange colour.
Thinner black bristles are mixed with the hair as in the allied
species *,

The dentition is that of an adult animal and formed by the
permanent teeth. On comparing it with a specimen of //.
semispinosus of the same size, no great difference can be
observed as to the general shape and relative position of the
teeth. But the molars are of conspicuously larger size and
are less broad transversely, with the exception of the hind-
most (fourth) molar, which is rudimentary. The distance of
the canine from the front incisor is 4 millim., that between
the canine and second premolar 7 millim.

Only one specimen was obtained ; the skin is 140 millim.
long, and the head measures 40 millim. to the front margin
of the ear.

The Reptiles consist of specimens of Sepsina gastrosticta,
O’Sh.; Chameleon lateralis, Gray ; Chameleon brevicornis,
Gthr.; Chameleon globifer, Gthr.; Chameleon nasutus,
Gray; and Chameleon Willsti, sp. n. Among the Snakes
specimens of Ptyas infrasignatus, Gthr. (1882), are of special
interest, inasmuch as they prove that Dromicus Stumpffi, |
Bottg. (1881), and Dromicus Baroni, Blgr. (1887), are indi-
vidual variations or modifications of age of the same species f.
Dipsas colubrina is represented in this collection and seems
to be generally distributed.

A species of Ldophis I believe to be undescribed, and,
finally, Mimophis madagascariensis, Gthr., occurs also in
this district.

* I may here mention that Hemuicentetes nigriceps, Ginth. (Ann. &
Mag. Nat. Hist., Aug. i875), has since been renamed by Jentink Hemz-
centetes variegatus, var. Buffont (‘Notes from the Leyden Museum,’
1879, p. 150). Iam afraid that Dr. Jentink will be still less inclined to
acknowledge the form now described as a distinct species.

+ Dromicus madagascariensis, Gthr., proves to be very distinct, although
it has a similar coloration. Its head is much shorter and broader, the
eye smaller, and in all specimens known the abdcmen is unspotted, as in
some of Ptyas infrasignatus,

Dr. A. Giinther on the Fauna of Madagascar. 71

Chameleon Willsit. (Pl. VI.)

This species is closely allied to Chameleon minor (Ann. &
Mag. Nat. Hist. 1879, vol. iv. p. 246), but differs by its
broader head, which is quite flat between the orbits in the
female, and very slightly concave in the male, whilst in Cha-
meleon minor the upperside of the head is deeply concave in
both sexes. Snout of the adult male produced into two flat
compressed horns, divergent in front and covered with large
scutes, of which one in the middle of the upper edge projects
like a prong; the horns are much less approximate at the
base than in Chameleon minor ; they are, as usual, absent in
the female. Occipital region with a rounded margin behind,
without any prominent parietal crest, which in Chameleon
minor is rather conspicuous. No lateral occipital flaps. A
dorsal crest is present in the male only, and consists of a
few conical tubercles which occupy the nape of the neck. No
gular or ventral median series of tubercles. Head covered
with small, flat, irregular scutes ; scutes of the body uniform,
flat, scarcely smaller than those of the head, but much larger
than in Chameleon minor. Heel without spur or promi-
nence.

Dark greenish or yellowish, with a white streak along the
median line of the throat and abdomen ; a narrow yellow ring
round the middle of the foot; a similar marking is indicated
by one or two small spots on the hand ; female with an inter-
rupted yellow line along the hinder side of the hind limb and
continued for a short distance on each side of the tail.

Four specimens were collected, two adult males and two
females. ‘The larger of the males is 63 inches long, the tail
measuring 33 inches. ‘The fully adult female is smaller,
measuring only 44 inches, of which the tail takes one half.

Liophis Imerine.

Scales in nineteen series. Head short, snout rather pointed ;
eye small, with round pupil. Rostral shield protruding,
extending on to the upper surface ot the head ; frontals small,
the anterior scarcely one half the size of the posterior; ver-
tical longer than broad; occipitals as long as vertical and
posttrontals together. Loreal short; one preeocular, not
reaching to the upper surface of the head; two postoculars.
Eight upper labials, the fourth and fifth entering the orbit.
Temporais 1+2+45%, the foremost in contact with the lower
postocular only. ‘Three lower labials in contact with the
anteior chin-shields,

72 Mr. R. I. Pocock on

Ventrals 146; anal divided; subcaudals 28+, possibly
40. Posterior maxillary tooth strong and separated from the
preceding by an interspace.

Upper parts brown, with four rather indistinct blackish
lines, the outer along the fourth and the inner along the
seventh series of scales; upper labials yellowish, marbled
with blackish like the throat; lower parts greyish, nearly
black.

The length of the single specimen is 18 inches, of which
the somewhat mutilated tail measures two.

This species seems to be allied to Liophis quinquelineatus
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1881, vol. vii. p. 359), of which
the type has been lost. It differs, however, by its somewhat
larger eye, fewer series of scales, and different coloration
of the head.

X.—R:port upon the Crustacea collected by P. W. Bassett-
Smitn, Esgq., Surgeon R.N., during the Survey of the
Maeclesfield and Tizard Banks, in the China Sea, by
HM.S. ‘ Rambler,’ Commander W. U. Moore. By R. I.
Pocock.

THis collection of Crustacea is composed principally of
Brachyurous forms of small size. Seventeen species have
been identified, and of these three are now described for the
first time. ‘This percentage of new species from seas so well
known is distinctly good. The chief interest centres im the
Maioid forms, two of them being new to science and the rest
noticeable in other respects.

In addition to the species here enumerated several small
specimens of a species of Alpheus were taken ; but the iden-
tification of these has not been attempted, on account of their
immaturity and imperfect condition.

1. Gonodactylus chiragra (Fabr.).

One small specimen in 3 feet of water at the north-east
extremity of the reef,

2. Galathea australiensis, Stimpson.

Galathea australiensis, Stimpson, Proc, Ac. Sci. Philad. p. 89 (1858) ;
Henderson, Anomura of ‘ Challenger’ Kxped. p. 118, pl. xii. fig. 5.

‘wo specimens without chelipedes in 32 fathoms of water
on Macelesticld Bank.

Crustacea from the China Sea. 73

3. ? Dynomene hispida, Desmarest.

Dynomene hispida, Desmarest, Consid., gén, Crust. p. 183, pl. xvii.
fig. 2.

A single specimen, perhaps not referable to this species, on

Macclesfield Bank, 32 fath.

4, Nursilia dentata, Bell.
Nursilia dentata, Bell, Trans. Linn. Soc. xxi. p. 309, pl. xxxiv. fig. 6,

A single female specimen at a depth of 40 fath.

5. Caphyra levis, A. Milne-Edwards.

Caphyra levis, A. Milne-Edwards, Nouv. Arch. Mus. v. p. 152, and ix.
p- 178, pl. iv. fig. 2.

One specimen in 3 feet of water on Extreme Reef.

6. Tetralia cavimanus, Heller.

Tetralia cavimanus, Beitrige zur Crustaceen-Fauna des rothen Meeres,
p. 353, pl. ii. figs. 24, 25.

Three specimens from Mace Island at a depth of 205 fath.

7. Trapezia cerulea, Riippell.
Trapexia cerulea, Riippell, Miers, Brachyura of ‘Challenger,’ p. 165,
A single specimen on Extreme Reef in 3 feet of water.

The lateral spines of the carapace are almost obsolete; the
manus is rounded above and not hairy externally.

8. Trapezia cymodoce (Herbst), Miers.
Trapezxia cymodoce (Herbst), Miers, Ann. Nat. Hist. (5) ii. p. 408.
‘Taken with the above was a single specimen of Trapeziva
which is referable to 7. cymodoce as restricted by Miers. It
may be distinguished trom those that I have named 7. guttata
by the absence of spots from the legs and by the presence of

a cluster of very short hairs on the outer surface of the manus
of the chelipede.

9. Trapezia guttata, Ruppell.

Trapezia guttata, Rippell, Beschreib. Krabben des rothen Meeres,
p. 27.

Half a dozen small specimens in 6 fathoms off Tizard Bank.

74 Mr. R. I. Pocock on

Our knowledge of the species of the genus Trapezia is
in a very unsatisfactory state. I refer these specimens to
guttata of Riippell on the strength of the following cha-
racters :—a uniformly coloured thorax with a spine on each
side of it, and legs bearing more or less faint indications of
spots.

10. Actumnus setifer, de Haan.

Actumnus setifer, de Haan, Crustacea in Siebold’s ‘ Fauna Japonica,’
p- 50, pl. ili. fig. 3.
A small specimen on Macclesfield Bank at a depth of 32
fathoms.

11. Daira perlata (Herbst).
Daira perlata (Herbst), Milne-Edwards, Crust. i. p. 387.

A single specimen taken in 3 feet of water at the north-
eastern extremity of the reef.

12. Actca tessellata, sp. n.

Carapace wide, about as wide in proportion to its length as
in A. rufopunctata, but more rounded at the sides ; furnished in
every part with distinctly defined lobes which exactly resemble
the similar lobes in A. rufopunctata in being covered with
rounded close-set granules; the depressions which separate
these lobes are clothed with short hairs; at the edge of the
carapace the lobes are not distinct, as in rufopunctata, but
merely represented by clusters of sharper granules, which
give to the carapace the appearance of being laterally spinu-
lose ; the frontal region furnished with four lobes, as in rufo-
punctata; margins of the orbits granular, but less dis-
tinctly lobate than in rufopunctata; the anterior halt of the
carapace, behind the orbits and the posterior frontal lobes, is
furnished as in rufopunctata with eight lobes arranged in
a transverse series; of this series the two wnich are close to
the middle line are almost continuous in front with the poste-
rior frontal lobes, while behind they are separated from each
other by a very conspicuous elongate median lobe; at the
posterior extremity of this and on each side of it there is a
single small rounded lobe, and behind these three a single
transverse lobe. This arrangement of granular lobes in this
region of the carapace does not occur in any specimen of
rufopunctata that 1 have seen; the arrangement of lobes on
the rest of the carapace is much the same in the two species.

Crustacea from the China Sea. 75

Chelipedes nearly smooth on the inner surface, granular
externally, the granules on the carpus arranged more or less
in clusters, on the manus in transverse series; the dactyli
compressed and blade-like, the movable one slender and
arched, granulate above, but on the inner surface feebly den-
tate only at the base; the immovable one obscurely dentate
and thick from above downwards.

Legs very hairy and granular, as in rufopunctata, but not,
as in that species, lobate.

Two specimens (¢ and 2) on Extreme Reef in half a
fathom of water.

The colour (in alcohol) of these specimens is a kind of pale
reddish grey; the smooth parts of the limbs darker slate-
grey, dactyli dark brown. In one specimen (the male) the
lower half of the manus is black both on the inner and on the
outer side. Whether this colouring is sexual or only “ acci-
dental’ cannot of course be determined.

This species is more nearly allied to rufopunctata than to
any other known to me, but may be separated from it by
many well-marked characters. In addition to those already
referred to in the description mention may be made of the
form of the fingers and the absence of the red colouring-
matter.

Width of carapace 14, length 94 millim,

13. Actea rufopunctata, M.-Kdw.

Actea rufopunctata, A. M.-Edw. Nouv. Arch. Mus. i. p. 268, pl. xviii.
fig. 1 (1865).

A single specimen in 38 feet of water on Extreme Reef.

14. Parthenolambrus calappoides, Adams & White.

Parthenolambrus calappoides, Adams & White, Crust. in Voyage of
‘Samarang,’ p. 34, pl. v. fig. 5.

A single individual of large size at a depth of 27 fath. on
the edge of the reef off Nam-yit.

The carapace gives the following measurements :—Length
223, width 83 millim.

This, the largest specimen that I have seen of the genus,
I was at first inclined to look upon as the type of a new species
mainly on the strength of the great erosion that the upper
surface of the carapace presents. But an inspection of the
series of P. calappotdes in the Museum soon showed that this
character is exceedingly lable to variation—in fact that no
two individuals have the carapace similarly eroded.

76 Mr. R. I. Pocock on

15. HHyastenus (Chorilia) tenuicornis, sp. n.

Carapace pyriform, with well-defined regions ; the rostral
spines hairy, exceedingly long and diverging, @. e. each spine
is considerably longer than the carapace and the distance be-
tween their apices 1s about equal to their length; the super-
numerary rostral tooth, which is said to be characteristic of
the genus Nawia, is absent; the antennal and orbital spines
are very strong; from the base of each there runs backwards
towards the margin of the posterior half of the orbit a tooth
which in the case of the orbital spine partially bridges over
the upper orbital hiatus; the orbital hiatus very large and
the posterior portion of the orbit in consequence small and
pillar-shaped ; from its upper surface it sends forward a pro-
jection in the direction of, but not reaching, the backwardly
prolonged tooth from the upper orbital spine ; ; these two pro-
jections almost fill up the aperture of the upper orbital
hiatus ; the superior interorbital area furnished with two sub-
parallel longitudinal series of tubercles; the gastric region of
the carapace furnished with larger and smaller, not close-set
tubercles, of which three in the middle line and one on each
side are the largest; the cardiac region armed with two
enormous tooth-like tubercles set in longitudinal series ; the
branchial region armed with three large teeth, of which the
hindmost is the largest.

Chelipedes long, | projecting slightly beyond the apex of the
rostral spines ; merus cylindrical, furnished at its distal end
with a spine above and an articular tubercle on each side ;
manus long and slender, with an articular tubercle above
and below at its proximal end and a longitudinally grooved
external surface.

Legs almost alike, differmg principally in length and in
the tact that the merus of the first pair is furnished at its
distal end with an enormous spine, which is scarcely repre-
sented on the other legs.

Measurements in millimetres. —Length of carapace 10,
width 7, width outside orbits 43 ; length of rostral spine 124
distance between apices of spines 123 ; length of cheligeae
174, of first leg 274, of last 13.

‘Lhe colour ‘(in spirit) of this specimen is very beautiful ;
the bases of the legs and of the rostral spines, the interorbital
area, and the antero-lateral portions of the carapace are car-
mine, the upper portions of the branchial region are bluish
grey, the rest yellowish white.

Vne specimen at a depth of 32 fath., another at a depth of
25 fath., on Macclesfield Bank.

Crustacea from the China Sea. 77

This species is very distinct from all known to me, and is
to be at once recognized by its enormously long and diver-
gent rostral spines and by the long and slender spinule which
is situated at the distal extremity of the merus of the first
pair of legs. It somewhat resembles Hyastenus oryx of A.
Milne-Edwards *, but differs in the armature of the cephalo-
thorax and in its long and diverging rostra. In possessing
two median, large, erect spines on “the cardiac lobes of the
carapace it appears to beallied to Naxia hystrix and to Naxia
elegans.

16. Nawia taurus, sp. n.

Carapace pyriform, with gastric, cardiac, and branchial
regions well defined by conspicuous smooth sulci; the whole
surface covered with distinct though close-set minute tufts of
hair, amongst which, especially in the gastric and branchial
regions, project a few longer and coarser hairs; the rostral
spines long and diverging, ve. each spine is considerably
longer than half the length of the carapace, and the distance
between the tips of the spines is a little more than three
quarters the length of each, coarsely and sparsely hairy in
the proximal half of the inner surface, the additional spine
is large and situated far from the apex near the middle, but
in the distal half of the upper surface ; antennal spine long
and strong, but less strong than the superior orbital spine ;
the external half of the orbital margin is bidentate above and
hairy on the inner surface ; the superior interorbital area is
furnished with two subparallel longitudinal series of tubercles,
which extend, increasing in size from before backwards, almost
from the hase of the rostrum to the gastric region; gastric
region armed with many symmetrically- disposed tubercles ;
three of these are very large and situated in the middle line,
on each side of the anterior and posterior of these are two
transversely disposed smaller tubercles, and in addition there
are several still smaller tubercles scattered about; the ante-
rior half of the cardiac region furnished with a cluster of
small tubercles and the posterior half with three larger
tubercles arranged in the form of a triangle ; the hepatic and
lateral portions of the branchial region covered with many
small tubercles, the upper portions of the branchial region
armed with fewer tubercles—on the epibranchial portion there
is cone large tooth and on the inner side of this a few smaller
close-set tubercles, and on the metabranchial portion two or
three widely separated small tubercles and a larger external
tooth.

* Nouv. Arch. Mus. viil. p. 260, pl. xiv. fig. 1.

78 Migs TsBocdek on

Chelipedes when extended reaching slightly beyond the
apex of the rostral spines; merus cylindrical and armed above
with a single sharp spine situated at its distal extremity ;
manus cylindrical, furnished with an articular tubercle above
and below at its proximal end; fingers slightly separated
basally when closed.

Legs almost alike, differing principally in length, the first
pair being much the longest ; the segments are all simple and
cylindrical, the merus alone being armed distally with a sharp
spine; this spine, very large on the first pair, becomes
eradually smaller from before backwards on the others, and
finally disappears on the fourth.

Measurements in millimetres.—Leneth of carapac (without
rostrum) 204, width 14, width behind orbits 7; length of
rostral spine 12, of tooth from base 64; distance between apices
of spines 9}; length of chelipede 25, of first pair of legs 574,
of last pair 26.

A single specimen on Macclesfield Bank at a depth of 32
fathoms.

Provisionally following Mr. Miers I refer to the genus
Naxia those species allied to Pisa and Hyastenus which are
characterized by the presence of an accessory spine or spinule
on each of the rostral projections. Thus restricted the genus
contains the species mentioned by Mr. Miers on p. 60 of his
Report on the Brachyura of the ‘ Challenger,’ and, in addi-
tion, two that are here added. Of these one is the species
described above, the other is N. elegans, a species referred by
Mr. Miers (loc. ctt. p. 58) to the genus Hyastenus. Whether
this species is more nearly allied to the typical Hyastenus
than to the typical Nazia it is difficult to say; but at all
events it unquestionably possesses the rostral spinules by
which alone, according to Mr. Miers, the genus Narita may
be separated from Pisa and fTyastenus. Curiously enough
these spines, which, although small, are very distinct, appear
to have been overlooked by both author and artist; for no
mention is made of them in the description, and in the figure
that accompanies it no sign of them is to be detected. It is
very questionable whether a genus should be retained on so
slender a basis, and there appears to be but little doubt that
a revision of Pisa, Hyastenus, and Naxia will show that the
three can scarcely be regarded as distinct genera. It is for
convenience’ sake alone that Nawia has been here restricted to
those few forms presenting an accessory rostral spine. The
following table will perhaps serve to show how these may be
separated from each other :—

Crustacea from the China Sea. 79

a. Carapace armed wholly or principally with
large spines and spiniform prominences ;
meral seements of appendages armed dis-
tally with a single spinule.

a. Rostral spines less than a third the

length of the carapace and widely diver-

pines legstvery LOM. cs. oats ns oes hystrix, Miers *.
6. Rostral spines considerably more than

half the length of the carapace ; legs

shorter.

a”, Rostral spines subparallel, diverging

only near apex ; intestinal region of

carapace armed with three spiniform

WOLOTCCLIONS <grctapeeter iene rica Se cat . Robillardi, Miers t.
b?. Rostral spines diverging gradually

from the base; intestinal region of

carapace armed with only one large

spiniform projection .......+ ayaa seehs elegans (Miers) tf.

6. Carapace armed principally with more or
less close-set, blunt, tuberculiform teeth,
amongst which, especially on the branchial
region, a few spines may project.

a*, Rostral spines more than half the

length of the carapace and diverging

strongly from the base; meral

segments of the appendages dis-

Galliyaspinedshys., smetele speae's 2c %otn ya taurus, sp. 1.
6°. Rostral spines less than one third

the length of the carapace and

subparallel ; meral sezments armed

distally with a tubercle.

a‘, Orbital spine not large; rostral

tooth situated some distance from

the apex of rostrum .......... hirta, A. Milne-Edw.§
b*, Orbital spine conspicuous; ros-

tral spine situated close to the

Spex Of TOStTUM. «dessin ows. : serpulifera, Milne-Edw.||

17. Huenta proteus, de Haan.

Huenia proteus, de Haan, Siebold’s ‘ Fauna Japonica,’ Crustacea, p. 95,
pl: xxiii.

A single specimen in 3 feet of water on Hldad Reef.

This specimen, although a male, is furnished with those

* Brachyura of ‘ Challenger,’ p. 60, pl. vi. fig. 4.

+ Proe. Zool. Soe. p. 339, pl. xx. fig. 1 (1882).

{ Brachyura of ‘Challenger,’ p. 58, pl. vi. fig. 3 (sub Hyastenus).
§ Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. (4) v. p. 148, pl. iv. fig. 1.

|| Hist. nat. Crust. i. p. 313.

80 Mr. W. R. O. Grant on Rallus pusillus

antero-lateral laminar processes which are usually confined to
the female.

On each side of the rostrum and attached to the hairs which
adorn this portion of the cephalothorax there is a single
branching piece of the Alga, Galaxaura fragilis, in a cluster
of which this crab was taken.

XI.—On the Species Rallus pusillus of Pallas and tts
Allies. By W. R. OGILvie GRANT.

WuILE recently engaged in arranging the Rails in the
National Collection I was struck by the difference in appear-
ance between the Pigmy Rails from the Indo-Chinese
countries and those from Europe, Africa, and Madagascar,
which have always been regarded as belonging to one species
and known as Porzana Baillont. A more careful examina-
tion of our large series at once convinced me that this is a
mistake, and that the Indo-Chinese bird, of which Mr. Hume’s
collection contains a very fine series, is in reality very distinct
from the true P. Bailloni, which is the Western form, both
in plumage and geographical distribution. There can be no
doubt whatever that the Eastern bird is the one described by
Pallas in his ‘ Reise Russ. Reichs,’ 11. Anhang, p. 700, under
the name of Rallus pustllus, a name which was doubtfully
referred by Mr. Dresser to the synonymy of P. Batlloni and
added to the synonyms of that species by Mr. Seebohm in
his ‘ British Birds,’ although he preferred to retain the name
Bailloni used by the majority of authors. Pallas obtained
his specimens in Dauria, and gives an excellent description,
which I shall quote, as it clearly gives the characters which
distinguish pusil/us from Baallont. ‘The Hastern species must
stand in future as :—

Porzana pusilla (Pall.).

“Colore et forma perquam similis Rallo aquatico ; sed magnitudo
Alaude vulgaris. Facies, collum subtus et pectus medium longi-
tudinaliter ceerulescenti-cana, media gula candicat. Litura per
oculos longitudinalis obsolete ferruginea. Vertew, cervix, dorsum
ferrugineo nigroque liturata; dorsum lineolis longitudinalibus
vagis albis. Abdomen crissumque nigra, teeniolis albis trans-
versis. Cauda inter alas compressa, arrigua. Pedes virescentes.”

As compared with Porzana Bailloni it may be briefly cha-

of Pallas and its Allies, 81

racterized as very similar to the Western species both in size
and general appearance, but differing in the following parti-
culars :—

The adult male has a brown stripe of the same colour as
the back, which traverses the slate-grey side of the face from
the base of the upper mandible to the neck, passing through
the eye and across the ear-coverts. (In P. Badlloni the side
of the face is uniform dark slate.) The upper surface is
lighter brown and not so heavily splashed with white, while
the under surface is greyish white instead of dark slate-grey.
It will be noted that Pallas particularly mentions the stripe
on the side of the face passing through the eye, which is the
most striking of the differences, which are in no way due to
season.

The adult females of both the Eastern and the Western
species resemble their adult males, but are not quite so richly
coloured, and the breast is less pure and mixed with buff.

The young of both species are very similar, but the young
of P. Baillont appear to have the sides of the face nearly
white. In P. pusclla they are brownish buff.

Mr. Seebohm, in his ‘ British Birds,’ ii. p. 546, in describing
P. Bailloni, has based his descriptions on both species, for the
male only is true P. Bailloni, while the female belongs to
P. pusilla, He has kindly allowed me to examine his collec-
tion of Porzana, and having also reexamined the material, is
quite of the same opinion as myself. He mentions on p. 543
that “‘ the geographical distribution of Baillon’s Crake is either
imperfectly known or is a very singular one;” but owing to
his believing the sexes to be different, as already mentioned,
and having only a few sexed specimens in his collection, he
tailed to recognize the distinctness of the Eastern and the
Western forms.

Although the plate of Baillon’s Crake given in Messrs.
Hume and Marshall’s ‘Game Birds of India, Burmah, and
Ceylon’ is the identical one used in Dresser’s ‘ Birds of
Europe,’ it is curious to observe that it has been altered in
the former work, and the cheek-stripe already mentioned in
my description of P. puszl/ia has been added, so that in that
respect the Indian bird is fairly represented, though in many
other poinis, as already observed by Mr. Hume, the plate is
not satisfactory.

Both P. Baillont and P. pusilla are easily distinguished
from the Little Crake, P. parva, with which they have been
and are so often confused, not only by their smaller size, but

Ann. d& Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6, Vol. v. 6

82 On Rallus pusillus of Pallas and tts Allies.

by having the outside web of the first primary white instead
of brown, and the sides and flanks barred with black and
white, of which there is scarcely a trace in P. parva.

In attempting to point out the different ranges of these three
species I shall only draw conclusions from the specimens I
have seen, and such references as there can be little or no
doubt about.

The range of Porzana pusilla, so far as I can ascertain
from the specimens before me, is throughout the Indian
peninsula (except Sindh, though Mr. Hume mentions that a
specimen of P. Bazllont (P. pusilla, mihi) was shot by Mr.
Blanford at Manchur Lake, in Sindh; but I have not seen
it), extending south to Ceylon and the Andaman Islands. It
cecurs north of Tavoy, and extends through China to the
Philippine Islands, and has been obtained at Bintulu, in
N.W. Borneo. It occurs in Afghanistan, and is recorded
from Beluchistan, ‘Turkestan, Dauria, S.E. Siberia, and
Japan ; but it seems to me probable that the specimens from
Beluchistan have been wrongly identified, and should be
referred to P. parva. My. Scully says it is a summer visitor
in small numbers to the main valleys round Gilgit.

With regard to P. parva, which he also obtained at Gilgit,
Mr. Scully says, ‘‘ This species appears merely to pass through
the district in spring and autumn. It is found in Sindh in
winter; and the birds that visit us probably breed further
north.”” It is common in Sindh, and we have specimens
from Beluchistan, Afghanistan, ‘Turkey in Asia, South and
Central Europe, and Britain, as well as one from Mtesa’s
Country, which lies just north of Lake Victoria Nyanza.

The true Porzana Baillend is a straggler to Great Britain
and ranges from South and Central Europe to the Cape
Colony and Madagascar. A specimen was obtained by Mr.
Cumming at Fao, at the head of the Persian Gulf.

So far as is known the ranges of P. pusdlla and P. Bailloni
are widely separated, and P. parva occupies the intermediate
country as well as being found in part of the country occupied

by each.

Critical Notes on the Polyzoa. 83

XII.— Critical Notes on the Polyzoa. By the Rev. THOMAS
Hincgs, B.A., F.R.S.

Part IJ.*—-CLASSIFICATION.

1. Preliminary Section.

Many years have now elapsed since the publication of Smitt’s
fruitful work on the Scandinavian Polyzoa f, in which a new
basis of classification was proposed and the foundations of a
natural system were sought, not in the comparatively trivial
variations of colonial growth and habit, but in the more sig-
nificant and essential characters of the individual zocecium.
When it is remembered that the older classifications were
founded primarily, without exception, on zoarial peculiarities,
we can feel little surprise that the proposals of the Swedish
naturalist, discrediting as they did the fundamental principle
on which they rested, were at first regarded as too revolu-
tionary in character, and failed to produce any immediate
effect on the systematic treatment of the Polyzoa. Probably,
too, the fact that his great work, containing a singularly able
and exhaustive account of his researches and theoretical views,
is written in the Swedish language may help to account for
the comparatively long period during which its specific claim
was almost unrecognized and its influence but slightly felt,
Certain it is that so late as 1880, when my ‘ History of the
British Marine Polyzoa’ was published, the principal writers
on the Class gave at least a nominal adherence to the old
views, and that in no systematic work had Professor Smitt’s
principles been adopted and applied.

To estimate rightly the work which the Swedish naturalist
has accomplished in this department of zoology we must
remember that it is not a mere revision of an existing system
that we owe to him, but the institution of a new system,
resting on new foundations, and implying a new interpreta-
tion of the facts with which it deals. His distinctive merit
is that he substituted zocecial for colonial characters as the
proper basis of a natural arrangement, thus giving a new
direction to research and preparing the way for a system which

* Part I. was published in the ‘ Annals’ for February 1887,

+ “ Kritisk forteckning ofver Skandinaviens Hafs-Bryozoer,” Ofvers.
af Kongl. Vetenskaps-Akad. Forhandlingar, 1864-67. In 1867 the prin-
ciples on which his classification was founded were discussed in a paper
entitled “‘ Bryozoa Marina in regionibus arcticis et borealibus viventia,
recensuit F. A. Smitt,” Ofvers. K. Vet.-Akad. Férh. 1867, no. 6.

84 Rev. T. Hincks’s Critical Notes

should rest not on mere superficial resemblances, but on
genetic affinity.

The details of his classification—his definitions of genera,
his identifications of species, his grouping of varietal forms,
and other points—may be open in some cases to criticism
and revision; but it may be safely affirmed that he has indi-
cated the direction which all sound and fruitful research must
take for the future *.

Within the last few years there has been a very general
acceptance of Prof. Smitt’s fundamental principle amongst
students of the Polyzoa, though there are still serious diver-
sities of opinion as to the zocecial elements which possess the
highest systematic value, and we must await the results of
yet further investigation before we may hope to realize a
perfect system. In the meantime it may be useful to indi-
cate the nature and scope of some of the differences which
exist amongst writers on the Polyzoa, and endeavour to esti-
mate our actual position with reference to systematic questions.

Amongst those who in recent times have occupied them-
selves with these questions I may name Jullient, Koschinskyt,
and Pergens and Meunier §. Waters too, in his numerous
papers (chiefly on fossil forms) and in his supplementary
notes on the ‘ Challenger’ Polyzoa, has given us many inter-
esting suggestions bearing on systematic points which merit
caretul consideration. ‘lo some of these 1 hope to refer here-
atter.

All these writers are agreed in seeking the basis of classi-
fication amongst the characters of the zocecium, so far at jeast
as the Cheilostomata are concerned. Pergens and Meunier
adopt in great part, though only provisionally, the revision

* It must be remarked here that Smitt did not carry out his principle
in the arrangement of the Cyclostomata. He says, ‘ Forme vero Cyclo-
stomatum sicut in antiquioribus geologiz temporibus maxime floruerunt,
sic etiam inferiorem evolutionis gradum retinuerunt, ita ut, quamvis variis
figuris coloniarum abundet hic ordo, zocecia fere eequalia pre beat” (“ Bryo-
zoa Marina in regivnibus arcticis et borealibus viventia,” Ofversigt af
Kongl. Vetensk.-Akad. Foérhandl. 1867, no. 6, p. 467.

+ ‘Note sur une nouvelle division des Bryozoaires Cheilostomiens,”
Bulletin de la Soc. Zool. de France, t. vi. (1881); ‘‘ Monographie des
Bryozoaires d’eau douce,” did. t. x. (1885) ; “ Les Costulidées, nouvelle
Famille de Bryozoaires,” ¢bid. t. xi. (1886) ; ‘ Mission du Cap Horn, Bryo-
zoaires.’

{ “Kin Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Bryozoen-Fauna der ilteren Ter-
tidrschichten des siidlichen Bayerns,” i. Abtheil., Cheilostomata. Palzeon-
tographica, herausgegeben von Karl A. von Zittel, Band xxxii. Erste Liefe-
rung, 1885.

§ “La Faune des Bryozoaires Garumniens de Faxe,” Ann, de la Soe.
Malacologique de Belgique, tom. xxi, (1886) pp. 12, 13.

on the Polyzoa. 85

and extension of Smitt’s system, which I have embodied in
my ‘History’ of the British species. They take exception
at the same time to the importance assigned to the zocecial
orifice, which (they hold) is liable in many species to remark-
able variations and cannot be regarded as a stable character.
They say :—‘ Celui-ci (l’orifice zoécial) présente dans beau-
coup d’espéces des différences remarquables, et substituer une
classification» basée principalement sur le seul caractére de
cette ouverture a celle qui avait principalement en vue la
forme de la colonie, c’est remplacer une classification arti-
ficielle par une autre, toujours moins éloignée de la réalité.
On ignore encore quels sont les caractéres rée]lement stables
dans les Cheilostomes aussi bien que dans les Cyclostomes”’ *.
They add, ‘ Dans ces derniers (Cyclostomes) presque tout
est encore A faire; dans les premiers, M. Hincks s’attache
presque exclusivement a la forme de Vorifice zoécial.”

Upon this I would remark that the latter statement can
hardly be accepted as a correct representation of the actual
fact. Ihave not relied by any means “ exclusively ” on the
form of the orifice in forming genera, nor has it been as a
matter of choice that I have in any case contented myself
with a single character ; much less can it be said with truth
that it has been my purpose to make the zocecial orifice, as a
substitute for the colonial form, the basis of my classification.
My primary object has been to give effect to the new syste-
matic principle zn the best way which the actual state of our
knowledge would permit; and if in some cases the structure
of the zocecial orifice has been adopted singly as the basis of
generic groups, it is simply because, from the imperfection of
our knowledge, no other characters of equal stability and
significance could be found. I will reproduce here the
following passage trom the “ Introduction’ to my ‘ History,’
which has reference to this subject :—‘‘ What, then, are the
most significant features of the zocecium for classificatory
purposes? Form, superficial sculpture, the presence or
absence of spines or other appendages, these are generally
too variable and inconstant to yield any sure criteria. But
we may find such in the structural peculiarities of the cell—
as, for instance, the modifications of the aperture, the degree
in which the primitive opening is preserved or obliterated,

* “Ta Faune des Bryozoaires Garumniens de Faxe,” Ann. de la Soc,
Roy. Malacologique de Belgique, tom. xxi. (1886), Mr. Walford has
strangely misinterpreted the latter part of this passage and has given to
one of its clauses a meaning the very opposite of that which the authors
intended ; see his paper on “ Bryozoa from the Inferior Oolite,” Quart.
Journ. Geol. Soc. br August 1889,

86 Rey. T. Hincks’s Critical Notes

the ribbed condition of the front wall (as in Membraniporella
and Cribrilina), the chambered condition of the cavity (as in
Steganoporella), &c. One of the most constant features of the
zccecium, too, is to be found (as noticed long ago by Hassall)
in the orifice, which exhibits a series of well-marked modifi-
cations, and has in some cases a developmental history, which
affords the most valuable, because the most significant, cha-
Tacters) “".

In point of fact a very considerable proportion of the
Cheilostomatous genera which I have constituted or adopted
are not based on “the form of the orifice.” The following
may be instanced in addition to those referred to in the above
passage :—Stphonoporella, a Membraniporidan form charac-
terized by a calcareous tubular structure attached to the
lamina immediately below the aperture ; MHuthyris, also Mem-
braniporidan, based on the structure of the operculum, which
marks a distinct advance upon the typical Membranipora ;
Micropora, Smittipora (Jullien), Thalamoporella, Setosella;
Microporella, founded on the form of the orifice in combination
with the “special pore;” Portna, Anarthropora, Mastigo-
phora; Aspidostoma and Rhynchopora, both based on the
remarkable structures connected with the orifice, not on the
mere form of it; Stolonedla, allied to Beania, but having the
membranous front-wall of the boat-shaped zocecium protected
by modified spines, which are united so as to form a con-
tinuous covering. Others might be added, but these are
amply sufficient to show that, although in certain leading
groups the stress has undoubtedly been laid on the form of
the orifice, as being at once the most stable and significant
character at present available, there has been no intention of
basing the classification generally (as in the old zoarial
systems) on a single character.

As to the zocecial orifice, I believe that it has an intrinsic
systematic value, and will probably always hold a distinct
place as one of the criteria of affinity. In those sections at
least of the Cheilostomata in which the oral opening has lost
the primitive simplicity of the Membraniporidan type and is
closed in by a solid frame, in which a well-organized oper-
culum works on a distinct hinge, this structure has an
undoubted significance of a very high order. Smitt, after an
elaborate study of the modifications of the zocecial orifice and
the relation between the principal forms of it, felt himself
justified in assigning it the foremost place as a generic cha-
racter. Even Jullien, who makes the “ front-wall”’ the
corner-stone of his system, admits the significance of the oral

* Hist. Brit. Mar, Pol., Introduction, pp. exxix, cxxx.

on the Polyzoa. 87

opening as a generic distinction and gives it a prominent
place in his diagnosis. Koschinsky, in his very valuable
paper on the Cheilostomata, gives it as his opinion emphati-
cally that the form of the orifice is one of the most constant
and available characters for classificatory purposes :—‘* Sehen
wir von diesen und einigen anderen Fiillen ab, so erweist sich
die Form der Mundéffnung immerhin als eine der constant-
esten und brauchbarsten Merkmale” (op. cet. p.9). Waters
(‘Supplementary ‘Challenger’ Report, p. 3) has the fol-
lowing :—“ Much has lately been written about classification,
and some very unfortunate and premature attempts have been
made at remodelling ; established genera have been rechrist-
ened, and generic names given where it has been doubtful if
specific were required. . . As to my own position, I have
repeatedly stated that, as “far as the Cheilostomata are con-
cerned, I consider an immense advance was made when the
zocecial characters were put in the first rank, and believe that
we are upon the right track ; but none of us can suppose that
there will not be much to alter as new facts are brought to
light.” I quite concur in these remarks. We are feeling
our way as yet; but I believe, with Mr. Waters, that “ we
are on the right track,’’ and that we shall more surely reach
our goal by the patient accumulation of facts and the careful
study of their significance than by premature and revolu-
tionary change.

I have already quoted the passage in which Pergens and
Meunier refer to the variability of the orifice in many species,
and have pointed out the error into which they have fallen in
supposing that there has been any intention of substituting
a single-character classification of any kind for the old system
founded on colonial form *.

As to the alleged variability, there are no doubt cases in
which differences of greater or less importance occur within
the limits of a species. Some of these I have already pointed
out elsewhere; but, so far as my experience goes, there is
nothing exceptional i in the amount of variability which occurs

* Jullien also implies that the classification adopted by Smitt and (with
modifications) by myself rests on “the form of the orifice” (‘Note sur
une nouvelle division des Bryozoaires Cheilostomiens,’ p. 2). It does, of
course, rest in part on this character and on the pase structure of the
orifice, but by no meansas a whole. We have recognized a high signiti-
cance in this character, but we have never proposed, so far as I know,
to imitate the error of ‘the older systematists, and base our system ona
single structural feature. In a certain number of genera undoubtedly it
has been made the diagnostic; but this, as [ have already explained, is
simply because no other character of equal significance, or, indeed, of any
special significance at all, could be found at the time.

88 Rev. TIT’. Hincks’s Critical Notes

in the zocecial orifice. Such appears to be Dr. Koschinsky’s
opinion. Smitt, from the use which he makes of this cha-
racter in his classification, must have found reason for
believing in its general constancy as well as in its signifi-
cance. Granting a certain amount of variability, it is only
what we might expect, for variability in greater or less
degree is met with in every element of organic structure, and
supplies the material, as we know, with which natural selec-
tion works in the evolution of new forms. It would be strange
if any form of structure were free from variation ; but in the
case before us, so far as my observations enable me to judge,
there is, as I have said, no special instability, but, on the
contrary, a remarkable constancy.

In my ‘ History of the British Polyzoa’ I have carefully
noted the “range of variation” for a large proportion of the
species. An analysis of the observations recorded under this
heading will show that the zocecial orifice is one of the most
stable structural elements and that the amount of variation
which it actually undergoes is for the most part trifling both
in amount and significance. Of course this remark applies to
the adult primary orifice,

In some species (belonging to various genera) there is a
difference which may truly be called remarkable between the
orifice of the ordinary and that of the ovicelligerous cells.
Before an ocecium has made its appearance in the colony our
attention is arrested by the presence of two dissimilar classes
of zocecia, in one of which (the less numerous) the orifice is
not only of abnormal size, but of equally abnormal form.
The latter will in time bear the ovicells and is modified with
a view to this function. We have good illustrations of this
peculiarity in Cribrilina clithridata, Waters, and Schizo-
porella longirostrata, Uincks. Of course this is not a case of
varietal difference ; the diversity of form is a specific charac-
ter and for a special purpose. It is quite possible, however,
that in the absence of the ocecia this twofold structure of the
cells might be misinterpreted, and might be classed as one of
the ‘remarkable differences” which go to prove the instability
of the characters of the orifice; and I have therefore thought
it well to direct attention to it here *.

* Smitt has noted the occurrence (in Escharella rostrigera) of larger
zocecia amongst the ordinary ones, exhibiting a great difference both in
the form and size of the orifice. Ocecia, as far as he could see, were
totally wanting, and he was unable to determine the physiological signifi-
cance of the difference. We can have no doubt, with our present know-
ledge, that the larger zocecia with the modified orifice were the zooids
destined to bear the ocecia,

on the Polyzoa. 89

Dr. Jullien, in his paper on the ‘ Costulidées ” and his
Cape-Horn Report, takes his stand on Smitt’s fundamental
principle. He thus defines his position :—‘ La classification
que je me propose de suivre . . . . a pour base fondamentale
Jes caractéres tirés de la zowcze isolée, depuis son origine
jusqu’a son extréme vieillesse ” *. He proceeds to show that
most of the recent writers on the Polyzoa (amongst whom he
includes Busk, Smitt, Hincks, MacGillivray, and A. W.
Waters) have followed the evil example of d’Orbigny, whilst
giving their nominal adherence to the zocecial principle of
classification. They have adopted the principle, but have
been unable to recognize or weak enough to ignore its legiti-
inate consequences. As an illustration of their inconsistency
he refers to their treatment of the genera Cellepora and Rete-
pora, which they retain as originally founded on merely
zoarial characters.

Now Busk, it may be remarked in passing, never pro-
fessed to deal in any serious way with the revision of the
classification, the importance of which he must nevertheless
have fully recognized. The descriptive portions of his
‘Challenger’ Report must have severely taxed his energies
at his advanced age, and before it was concluded he had to
bear the additional burthen of declining health. It is true he
adopted and introduced into his work certain portions of the
new classification ; but rather, it would seem, in deference to
the prevalent feeling in its favour than as the result of any
independent and comprehensive study of the questions at
issue. He would certainly have been the first to admit that
his ‘ Report’ does not embody a consistent system, and might
probably have added that circumstances did not admit of his
attempting to frame one. Its value lies in the extensive and
accurate diagnosis and delineation of specific forms which it
embodies, a kind of work which, in the present state of our
knowledge, is of peculiar and primary importance.

As to the charge of inconsistency and want of thoroughness
in giving effect to the fundamental principle of the new
system on the part of those who introduced it, it may be
admitted at once that there is a certain amount of truth in it.
Under the peculiar conditions of the case 1 venture to think
that this may be easily explained and was but natural.
Indeed, it could hardly have happened otherwise.

The early application of new principles which contravene
established modes of thought and strike at the root of vener-
able systems is apt to be somewhat hesitating and to savour
more or less of compromise. Much of the pioneer work in

* ‘Mission du Cap Horn, Bryozoaires,’ Introduction, p, 1.

90 Rev. T’. Hincks’s Critical Notes

such cases will be largely tentative in character. The full
consequences of a new principle are not apprehended all at
once, nor is it easy to cast off on the instant the yoke of old
opinions, even when their foundations are shaken. All this
is in the order of nature. It must be remembered, too, that
there were serious difficulties in the way of arriving at a
definite decision on many points at a time when the new
systematic views had not as yet been thoroughly discussed
nor thei full significance appreciated. It seems to me, I
confess, hardly just to make the hesitating step of those who
were entering an untried region, and were unable to compre-
hend fully at first all the new conditions with which they had
to deal, a matter of reproach. ‘Their work has no doubt been
a progressive one and has resulted in a much fuller and more
thorough application of the new principle than they had
realized at first. And I am far from denying that there are
still oversights to be rectified and inconsistencies to be can-
celled. Dr. Jullien finds one of the chief grounds for the
charge of inconsistency which he brings against many of the
later writers on the Polyzoa in their retention of the genera
Retepora and Cellepora—artificial assemblages of species
which, according to the new views, have no claim to be
maintained, It is quite true that in my ‘ History’ I have
retained both these genera; but it is also true that in the case
of Retepora I have pointed out the inadequacy of the fenes-
trate structure of the zoarium as the basis of a genus *, and,
remarking that the zocecial characters of the British species
are similar, have left the rest of the group to be dealt with
after a fuller study of foreign species than was then possible.
As to Cellepora, in retaining it I did so on the ground that
there were zowcial characters on which it might be founded.
This opinion I have long since abandoned; but neither time
nor opportunity has been available so far for the exhaustive
examination of the numerous forms which have found a place
in the Celleporine group, on which alone a reconstruction
could be founded. ‘The genera Ketepora and Cellepora I
regard, and have long regarded, as merely provisional.

* “The reticulation is merely a form of ramification, and is probably
entitled to no more systematic weight, apart from the characters of the
zocecium, than the simple branching, which was the distinction of the old
genus Eschara. ‘The retiform zoarium is associated with very different
types of cell, whilst, on the other hand, a form in my possession . . . which
cannot be distinguished generically, in other respects, from many of the
Retepore, exhibits no trace whatever of reticulation... .. Strongly
marked as is the facies which its peculiar habit of growth gives to the
Retepore, we must not assign too much weight to it as a clue to natural
affinity.” (Hist. Brit. Mar. Pol. i. p. 339.)

on the Polyzoa. 91

Professor Smitt, in his later writings, has dismembered them
and distributed the species with which he deals amongst other
groups *,

After all, however, it matters little that the early expositors
of the new systematie views did not see their way as clearly
at first as they did subsequently. It may be admitted that
they did not at once entirely renounce the principles “ dont
leur jeunesse a été impregnée ” (Jullien) ; but this will hardly
be held to justify the summary way in which Dr. Jullien
rejects their authority and supersedes their work. In the new
classification of the Cheilostomata which he has proposed
the whole of the existing families have disappeared with two
exceptions T; the familiar names which have long held a
place in the literature of the class have been swept away and
a new coinage has taken their place.

This step, to say the least of it, must be accounted prema-
ture, and in the interest of science I venture to think is to be
regretted.

Dr. Jullien himself has entered upon a course of investiga-
tion which may throw light on the minute structure of the
Polyzoa and possibly on the true basis of a natural system.
His interesting studies of the anatomy of the Cheilostomatous
forms may be expected to disclose the significance of struc-
tural elements of which at present we know but little, and so
guide us in our search for the evidences of natural affinity.
It would certainly have been more satisfactory to receive
from him a new system at the close of an extended course of
such research rather than in its early stages.

Pergens and Meunier have emphasized the importance of
anatomical and embryological research as a means of arriving
at a natural classification, and are of opinion that the able
investigators who have followed these lines of study have
failed so far to solve the problem, because their researches
have stopped short at the formation of the primary zocecia.
It may be so, but it is more probable that such studies may
throw light on the affinities of the Class and the true basis of
its higher divisions rather than on the constitution of family
and generic groups, which must rest chiefly on the more appa-
rent zocecial characters.

* Comparing Escharotdes rosacea and Retepora marsupiata, he places
them boti in the same genus, and remarks :—“ The difference in the form
of the colonial growth cannot beof any generical value” (Flor. Bryoz. pt. 2,
p-68). Ican find nothing to substantiate Dr. Jullien’s statement respecting
Smitt (‘Note sur une nouvelle division &c.,” op. eit. p. 2) that in his
work on the Floridan Bryozoa “ he relapses into the old errors.”

+ The Ceide of d’Orbigny and Atteide of Hincks.

92 Rev. T. Hincks’s Critical Notes

Dr. Pergens has recently published an important paper *
containing the results of his anatomical and developmental
studies at the Zoological Station, Naples. He has had the
opportunity of examining a large number of species with all
the modern aids and appliances, and the paper is a valuable
contribution to our knowledge of the Polyzoa. We are
promised a continuation of it, which will be awaited with
much interest. So far the results obtained do not appear to
throw much new light on systematic questions; but if the
observations recorded may be trusted, and they have evidently
been made under the most favourable circumstances, with all
care and full command of the newer methods of research, they
will exclude several of Dr. Jullien’s interpretations of struc-
ture, and notably his view of the nature and origin of the
so-called pores in the cell-wall, which plays an important
part in his proposed classification.

It would be impossible to examine the details of this classi-
fication within the limits of the present paper; but in the
second section of it (on the Cribrilinide) I shall refer to the
conception of the systematic significance of the zocecial front-
wall, on which it is largely founded.

I pass on to consider briefly Dr. Jullien’s strictures on
another case of supposed departure from the true principle of
zocecial classification. Some years since [ instituted the
genus Barentsia for the reception of a Pedicelline form, cha-
racterized by the concentration of muscular tissue at the base
of the peduncle, as in the Pedicellina gracilis, Sars. Dr.
Jullien contends that this genus is founded on zoarial and not,
as it should be, on zocecial characters, and has therefore no
claim toacceptance. Accordingly he disallows it, and restores
the species which have been ranged under it to Pedicellina f.
I venture to think that he has committed himself to a hasty
judgment in this case, which he will find it difficult to main-
tain.

The distinctive character of the genus Barentsia is the
remarkable modification of the muscular apparatus and the
structural change in the peduncle which it involves.

The question at issue turns on the interpretation which we
put upon the so-called “stem” or peduncle of the Pedicel-
linide. In my view it is not an element of the zoarium at

* “Untersuchungen an Seebryozoen,” Zool. Anzeiger, nos. 317 u. 318
(1889),

+ “ Aussi je n’admets pas la classification proposée par Th. Hincks pour
les Pédicellines: les genres en sont établis non sur la forme de la zocecie
ni sur les caractéres zoceciaux, mais sur le pédicelle de la zucecie ” (‘ Mis-
sion Se, du Cap Horn,’ p. 6).

on the Polyzoa. 93

all, but an integral part of the zocecium. Dr. Jullien, in the
passage quoted below, speaks of it as something absolutely
distinct from the zocecial structure; but he must have for-
gotten the investigations of Salensky*, Vigelius +, and others,
and the conclusive evidence afforded as to its morphological
significance by the relation which has been demonstrated
between it and the “Pedicellina-cup” or “crown.” <As
Vigelius has clearly shown, the Pedicellina-cup is not the
mere “ equivalent of a polypide,” but “ the homologue of a
‘polypo-cystide,’ of which the stalk constitutes an integral
part.” He adds:— In ahnlicher Weise habe ich auch den
K6rperbau von Barentsia aufgefasst.” It is quite unneces-
sary to repeat here the admirable demonstration of the homo-
logies upon which this interpretation of the Pedicelline struc-
ture is based, which we have from the authors to whom I
have just referred. ‘Their writings are accessible to the
student of the Polyzoa. It may be added that Nitsche, who
adopted a somewhat different theoretic view of the Pedicelline
cup, was prepared to regard the peduncle (and also the stolon)
as homologous with the zocecium of the Ectoprocta. Long ago
Allman ¢ anticipated to some extent the conclusions of recent
investigators respecting the nature of the peduncle, regarding
it as homologous with the posterior part of the cell in the
unstalked forms of Polyzoa. His prevision is sustained by
the results of the later research.

The genus Larentsia, then, is founded on distinctly zowcial
characters, and as representing an important modification of
the Pedicelline type has every claim to a place in our system.
If its validity is challenged it must be on different grounds
from those on which Dr. Jullien relies.

As I have remarked in a previous portion of this paper,
there is hardly any serious difference of opinion now as to the
true basis ot the classification of the Polyzoa, although we
have not yet determined with certainty the most significant
elements of the zocecial structure, as indications of genetic
affinity. We have reached a stage, as it seems to me, in
which there is need not so much of large schemes of recon-
struction as of patient investigation and the quiet accumula-
tion of data, which sooner or later must open the way for us
to a true apprehension of the order of nature. Meanwhile

* “ Ktudes sur les Bryozoaires Ectoproctes,” par M. Salensky, Ann. d.
Sc. Nat. 6° sér. Zool. t. v. (1877), article no. 3.

+ ‘ Die Bryozoen, gesammelt wahrend der dritten u. vierten Polarfahrt
des Willem Barents, in den Jahren 1880 u. 81,’ yon Dr. W. J. Vigelius,
pp. 89, 90. j

{ ‘Freshwater Polyzoa,’ p. 22.

94 Rey. T.. Hincks’s Critical Notes

there is no doubt room for critical revision of the details of
the current classification and for such readjustment as may
be rendered necessary by our increased knowledge of specific
forms and may tend to make it a more complete expression of
its fundamental principle. And I may say in passing that I
am very sensible of the service which Dr, Jullien has ren-
dered by his enthusiastic and uncompromising loyalty to that
principle, though I am unable to accept the special scheme of
classification which he has associated with it.

‘To Dr. Koschinsky we are indebted for a valuable critique
on a number of Cheilostomatous genera, in which he suggests
some modifications of the existing groups and constitutes a
number of new ones.

Some of the changes which he proposes seem to me to bein
every way worthy of consideration. ‘The enormous increase in
the number of described species within the last few years would
alone render some revision of the genera absolutely necessary.
Weare now ina much better position for determining the pre-
cise value of the characters employed in diagnosis, and have a
much larger knowledge of the modifications of the generic types.
A group “which might seem sufticiently isolated and distine-
tive, when represented by only two or three species, in which
the diagnostic characters are clearly and strongly marked, will
present a very different aspect when it includes a multitude of
forms, amongst which the common characters may have been
more or less obscured and variously affected by ceaseless
niodification.

As our knowledge widens the lesson is pressed upon us
with added force that we cannot isolate plots of the great
genealogical network and shut them up within hard-and-fast
lines, but must be content with a large amount of indefinite-
ness in our system, in view of the infinitely varied and
complex relationships of organic life.

While I am unable to accept all Dr. Koschinsky’s criti-
cisms, I freely admit that there is much force in many of
them and that he has established a case for the reexamination
and revision of some of the existing groups,

Section 2, Family Cribrilinide, Hincks.

Syn. Fam. Costulide, Jullien, Bull. Soc. Zoologique de France, t. xi.
(1886).

In his paper entitled “ Les Costulidées, nouvelle Famille
de Bryozoaires,” Dr. Jullien proposes a new classification of
the forms which have hitherto been ranked in the famil
Cribrilinide, Hincks, including the genera Membraniporella,

on the Polyzoa. 95

Smitt, and Cribrilina, Gray. He contends that this family
has no claim to stand, as it is incorrectly defined (‘mal
définie ’’), and accordingly he has cancelled it and substituted
for it his family Costulidées, from which, as he defines it, the
genus Membraniporella is excluded. ‘The capital error there-
fore in my definition of the Cribriline family, according to
Dr. Jullien, is that I have made it wide enough to contain
the latter genus. For this he condemns and abolishes it.

Now even if his view were correct, which I hope to show
that it is not, it is more than questionable whether there
would be any sufficient ground for displacing a well-established
family name and adding a new one to our already overbur-
thened nomenclature. Usage is certainly against the course
which Dr. Jullien has taken; and though the common practice
may not be absolutely the best, it may be wiser to recognize
it than to unsettle our nomenclature and enlarge the weari-
some synonymy which is the reproach of systematic natural
history. In the present case, if Dr. Jullien’s view were
correct, the retention of the family with an amended diagnosis,
accompanied by a proper notification of the change, would do
no wrong to the author of it and would certainly be in the
interest of the student*.

But it is unnecessary to discuss this question here, as I am
not prepared to admit that the genus A/embraniporella is an
alien in the Cribriline family. Dy. Jullien refers it to the
Membraniporide. He says, ‘Cependant les Membrani-
porella sont encore des Membraniporidées, toutes leurs espSces
n’ont pas leurs épines absolument soudées sur la ligne
médiane de la zocecie: ce qui les différencie énormément des
Cribrilina, oi la soudure est non seulement compléte sur la
ligne médiane, mais ot on voit encore de petits trabécules, qui
soudent entre elles les épines principales. Les Membranipo-
rella sont les Membraniporidées les plus élevées, et ne doivent
peut-étre pas étre détachées de cette famille” («Les Costu-
lidées,? pp.1;;2).

Upon this | remark first of all that I cannot assent to Dr.
Jullien’s statement that there are species of Membraniporella
in which the (moditied) spines are not soldered together along
the median line. ‘The type of Smitt’s genus is Membrani-

* In support of his view Dr, Jullien has adduced an ageravated case
in which names have been changed and misapplied in defiance of all law
and custom (‘ Mission Sc. du Cap Horn,’ Bryoz. p. 4). For such there is
nothing to be said. But to deal with such cases and others of the same
class, and to revise our system in harmony with Dr. Jullien’s dictum, “ un
genre doit rester tel qu'il a été établi par son auteur,” would be to revo-

lutionize the nomenclature of the Polyzoa, aud it is more than probable
that we should find the cure to be worse than the disease.

96 Rev. T. Hincks’s Critical Notes

pora nitida, in which the extremities of the ribs are closely
and permanently united, so as to form a distinct median line.
This is an essential character of the only genus Membrani-
porella which we know, and it is an essential character of the
Cribriline family. Forms in which it is wanting must be
placed elsewhere.

Dr. Jullien regards the Membraniporelle as the highest of
the Membraniporide ; to me they are the lowest of the Cr?-
brilinide. Let mesay at once, however, that I am in perfect
agreement with him when he urges that the true MJembrant-
pore, Membraniporella, and the Cribrilinide are forms which
‘¢ enchainent et pourraient 4 la rigueur ne former q’une seule
famille.” No doubt they are terms in an evolutional series,
connected by many transitional links, and on merely genea-
logical grounds might well be gathered into a single group.
But the question will arise, Why should we stop here? for
we shall probably find that the group is not an isolated thing,
but touches other groups at many points, and that the family
relationship is wide and far-reaching. If we are to have any
system at all embracing a number of limited groups the latter
must represent the more marked stages in the evolutional
process, the new structural departures, as it were, and the
boundaries traced around these groups must be treated rather
as imaginary lines, drawn for the sake of convenience, than
as actual and abiding partition- walls *. For always and in
all directions our ‘‘ distinctive characters ”’ will be gradually
changing their aspect and significance, according to the method
of nature. Only in this way can we make our classifications
correspond with the actual plan of organic life. The Cribri-
line family, in my judgment, has been rightly constituted to
represent an important morphological advance in the Mem-
braniporine tribe.

Now if we examine this tribe, we find in the first place a
series of forms (genus Aembranipora) in which the zocecial
aperture is wholly closed in by the primitive membranous
covering, and there is no trace of a calcareous front-wall ; in
some cases the margin of the aperture bears a number of
spines or spinules, which may possibly have to some extent
a protective function, in others the spines are more massive
and bend in over the aperture, so as to form a rude kind of
roofing. In some species they are altogether absent. The

* “Tn all our classifications of a truly natural group, where the diffe-
rent species will be arranged into more or less complete series, we must
be prepared for seeing the limits between the divisions fading away, espe-
cially when ~ developmental changes are known.” (Smitt, ‘ Floridan
Bryozoa,’ part 2, p. 41.)

on the Polyzoa. 97

orifice, through which the polypide issues from its cell, is a
simple semicircular opening in the membranous wall, which
is closed by a movable valve.

In another section we meet with an important modification
and adaptation of the spinous appendages, resulting in the
formation of a true roof-like structure, which gives a new
character to the zooecitum and marks a great advance upon the
slight protection afforded by a number of isolated spines.
The spines are now represented by broad flattish ribs, which
bend in over the aperture, those on each side meeting in the
centre of the cell, where their free extremities are firmly
soldered together. Laterally they remain separate, and the
fissures between them are filled in by the primitive membra-
nous wall. This group is the genus Membraniporella of
authors. In it a well-framed protective covering, in great

art calcareous, has been superadded to the simpler structure
of the true Wembranipore—a most significant morpholovical
advance.

If we proceed a step further we find that in other kindred
forms the ribbed front-wall is strengthened and consolidated
by the addition of small lateral offsets (calcareous) from the
ribs, which stretch across at short intervals from one to the
other, and so bind them together and strengthen the fabric.
The spaces between these intercostal supports are usually occu-

ied by a line of pores. The genus Crébrilina has been
founded for this well-marked structural type; and the two
last-named genera constitute the family Crébrilinide, as I
have defined it, of which the distinguishing character is that
the zocecia possess a ribbed calcareous front-wall, more or less
consolidated, a character which has no existence amongst the
true Membranipore.

Dr. Jullien, as we have seen, affirms that the genus Mem-
brantporella includes species which have a calcareous front-
wall and others in which the marginal spines are not abso-
lutely soldered together on the median line (‘ Costulidées,’
p- 1). On what characters then, we may ask, is the genus
founded, and by what criteria is it distinguishable from Mem-
branipora? By admitting that species which have the spines
thoroughly united along the median line may mingle in the
same group with others in which they are not “ absolutely ”
united (that is, I presume, not really united at all), he virtu-
ally destroys the foundation on which the family Cribrilinide
has hitherto rested. What remain, then, as the distinctive
features of his own Costulide? The ribbed calcareous front-
wall is also a character of his Membraniporidan genus Mem-
braniporella. The small processes (“ trabecules ”’) given off

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 7

98 Rey. T. Hincks’s Critical Notes

from the sides of the ribs, and binding them one to the other,
form in fact the only distinguishing character of the group.
It is hardly necessary to say that, however interesting as a
step in the development of the front-wall, this detail has no
special significance and certainly no claim to be adopted as
the basis of a family group.

But, as I have pointed out before, the genus Membrani-
porella is founded on a well-marked type-form, J. niteda,
Johnston, in which the spines are transformed into ribs and
are no longer isolated, but elements of a well-compacted
protective covering, which roofs in the front of the cell. It
is at this point in the evolutional series that a new family
may be legitimately instituted, not to break the natural con-
tinuity of development or obscure the natural relationships,
but to mark the morphological advance.

I am compelled therefore to reject Dr. Jullien’s proposed
change and to maintain the family Cribrilinide as at present
constituted.

It must be remembered that the front-wall in this group is
by no means homologous with the front-wall as it exists in
most of the Cheilostomatous families. Its mode of growth
is different, its constituent elements are different. It is not
a continuous extension of the cell-wall, but is formed by the
adaptive modification of certain spinous processes which
originate on the wall below the margin of the cell. Its fune-
tion, like that of the solid covering characteristic of other
families, is protective, but the two are built on different struc-
tural plans and bear different relations to the zocecial
organism. A clear indication of this important fact should
be included in the diagnosis of the family.

In the course of a careful study of a large number of Cribri-
line species which I have lately made one or two interesting
points have been determined, which may be briefly noticed :—

i. Modification of the Spines.—In the early stages of the
Cribriline cell the marginal spines, which are to form. the
front wall, present the same appearance as the corresponding
parts in a Membranipora.

They are (in Membraniporella nitida) slender and suberect,
but ultimately bend in over the aperture, and increase con-
siderably in width by the secretion of calcareous matter round
the edges. In this way a broad Hattish rib is formed, in the
centre of which the original spine is traceable. ‘his trans-
formation of the spine is constant throughout the family.

ii. The Orifice and Operculum.—The orifice amongst the
Cribrilinide is formed by the two uppermost ribs, which are
often stouter than the rest and which shut off and enclose the

on the Polyzoa. 99

terminal portion of the aperture. It is not therefore strictly
homologous with the orifice of the other Cheilostomata, which
is due to an arrest of the calcification of the front- wall,

There is some variation in the position and character of the
two ribs which close in the orifice. In C. crass¢costa,
Hincks *, two large stout spines originate one on each side at
the top of the cell, and bend round to the front, in the centre
of which they unite, inclosing a space of which the cell-wall

is the upper boundary. These spines are usually very broad
and represent the peristome of the solid-walled Cheilosto-
mata. More commonly the two uppermost ribs of the costate
roof, which originate at some distance from the upper extre-
mity of the cell, constitute the boundary of the orifice in front
(the lower margin), whilst the cell-wall encloses it at the sides
and top. These two marginal ribs are thick and solid, and
at the central point of junction the extremities frequently
project and give a mucronate appearance to the front of the
orifice. This is often very marked, as in C. annulata,
Fabricius, and C. furcata, Hincks. Sometimes these mar-
ginal ribs do not “meet exactly, and not unfrequently they
remain permanently disconnected ; sometimes the extremities
seem to exceed the required length and are forced outward ;
usually a small cleft may be detected, which marks the point
of junction.

Dr. Jullien takes exception to my retention of those forms
with a guasi-mucronate lower margin amongst the Crdébri-
linide, and considers that I am false to the principles on
which my classification is founded in not removing them to
the genus Mucronella, That I have not done so he seems to
regard as an admission that the structure of the orifice is essen-
tially a character of inferior value as compared with the front-
wall of the zocecium, which he has adopted as the most
important for classiticatory purposes.

I do not propose at present to discuss the validity of the
mucronate margin in Mucronedla as a generic distinction, but
merely to point out that it is by no means the structural
equivalent of the two ribs which close in the orifice of the
Cribrilinide. The structures are totally dissimilar in their
morphological significance. The occasional and variable
prominence (for it is by no means constant where it occurs) in
certain species of Crzbrilina, at the point of junction of the
ribs which compose the lower margin, and which is in fact

* This is a very distinct form from the St. Lawrence, characterized
by having a small number of very massive ribs, which are separated by
wide intervals. In this species the protective covering is reduced to a
minimum. For description and figure see a paper on ‘ The Polyzoa of the
St. Lawrence,” ‘Annals’ for March 1888, p. 216, pl. xiv. = 5.

100 Rey. T. Hincks’s Critical Notes

the result of the junction, is not comparable with the solid
mucronate rising of the margin (itself an mtegral part of the
cell-wall) in the Mueronelle. J am perfectly justified there-
fore in not assigning a like systematic value to structures
which differ entirely in their origin and their relation to the
other elements of the zocecium, and which have really nothing
essential in common.

At the same time in the family Cribrilinide I regard the
structure of the front-wall (or costate roof, as it may be
called, to distinguish it from the front-wall proper) as the
dominant character and much more significant than the orifice.
It is the record of the evolutional changes through which
the Membraniporine zoeecium has passed in one of the family
lines, it tells the story of its gradual modification with a
completeness that leaves little to be desired, and enables us
to mark out a systematic group which is absolutely natural.
But though we assign this rank to the unique protective
covering of the Cribriline cell, it by no means follows that
the ordinary Cheilostomatous front-wall is universally entitled
to this distinction. ‘The structure which replaces the latter
amongst the Cribrilinide, as we have seen, is aberrant and
exceptional and has a distinct evolutional meaning.

It remains to be proved that the solid caleareous covering
which we meet with in other groups has any special morpho-
logical value or presents characters which are available for
the purposes of the systematist. Dr. Jullien has certainly not
supplied any evidence so far in support of his new view to
which much weight can be attached. In fact his case rests
mainly on the assumption (baseless, as I have just shown)
that my treatment of the Cribrilinide is virtually a renun-
ciation of the principles which I have hitherto maintained.
If we add to this his contention (‘ Les Costulidées,’ p. 3) that
the fact of his having observed in different species monstrous
cells, destitute of orifice but with “a superb front-wall,” is a
proof of his doctrine ‘‘ que Dorifice est moins caractéristique
que la paroi frontale,” we have the whole case. This is cer-
tainly to base the primacy of the front-wall amongst systematic
characters on a very slender foundation, and will hardly
warrant such confident statements as the following :—“ Des
différents faits que nous venons d’énoncer il résulte que la
forme de Vorifice est un caractére d’une valeur inférieure,
dominé par celui qu’on peut tirer de la paroi frontale, et que
les genres Schizoporella, Lepralia, Mucronella établis par Th.
Hincks doivent étre rejetés comme mal caractérisés ” * (‘ Les

* After this condemnation it is somewhat startling to read the follow-
ing passage in the Cape-Horn Report :—“ Genre Lepratia, Th. Hineks

on the Polyzoa. 101

Costulidées,’ p. 3); and again, “ En établissant la famille des
Costulidx, j’ai fait voir la faiblesse du caractére principal
adopté par Th. Hincks, pour sa classification des Bryozoaires
Cheilostomiens, consistant simplement dans la forme de
Vorifice zocecial *, et j’ai établi la plus grande valeur carac-
téristique de la frontale (paroi). Cette appréciation m’oblige
a rejeter tous les genres que l’auteur anglais a eréé d’aprds la
maniére d’étre de l’orifice, sans tenir compte de la disposition
de cette paroi, et a bouleverser complétement les classifications
admises jusqu’aé ce jour. Je suis done amené a définir de
nouveaux groupements, pour l’établissement desquels je
m’appwieral: 1°, sur la paroi frontale; 2°, sur la disposition
des origelles ; 3°, sur la forme de l’orifice; 4°, sur l’anatomie.”
(‘ Mission Sc. du Cap Horn,’ p. 45.)

It is not my present purpose to examine at any length Dr.
Jullien’s scheme of a general classification of the Polyzoaf ;
but I venture to suggest that the time has not arrived for an
efficient revision of our system and that the work of recon-
struction (so faras it may be needed) should not be com-
menced until the foundations on which it is to rest have been
thoroughly tested.

The dogma of the “ front-wall,” which Dr. Jullien would
make the corner-stone of his new structure, has not yet been
subjected to a searching examination. In his system it is
associated with the theory of the ‘ origelles,” which must

« y]

certainly be regarded, to say the least, as still sub judice, and
upon which the researches of Dr. Pergens have already
thrown considerable doubt. It would be impossible to accept
the proposed system, whatever its merits may be, in the present
stage of inquiry ; and with all respect for Dr. Jullien [ must
hold that it is undesirable in the interest of science to sweep
away existing classifications and unsettle established nomen-
clature and remove old landmarks uutil the foundations of the
new order that is to follow have been well and securely laid.

(not Johnston, 1858), 1880. Cet ancien genre de Johnston a été entiére-
ment bouleversé par Th. Hincks, et ne devrait plus exister aujourd’ hui,
. mais comme je comprends ce genre de la méme facon que Hincks,
je renvoie & sa définition.” The genus is placed in the family Smittide,
J. Jullien, the diagnosis of which is founded altogether on the structure
of the zocecial orifice.

* This statement may be somewhat misleading. It is no doubt true
that in my classification the structure (rather than the mere “ form”) of
the zocecial oritice is a primary character; but in a large proportion of
cases it is associated with other significant characters, and where it has
been employed alone it has been from the absence (as it seemed at the
time) of other available diagnostics.

+ See ‘ Mission Sc, du Cap Horn,’ p. 7.

102 Critical Notes on the Polyzoa.

To return to the Cribrilintde. The history of the oper-
culum in its relation to the orifice in this family is worthy of
notice. We can trace the passage from the simple Membra-
niporidan stage, in which the operculum is a membranous
valve closing a semicircular opening in the primitive wall, to
the fully developed chitinous door, fitted exactly into the oral
framework and moving on a kind of hinge. Amongst the
Membraniporella—the lowest of the Cribrilinide—there seems
to be a very slight modification of the Membraniporidan
arrangement. ‘The operculum (in J. nitida) is formed of
delicate membranaceous material and is not enclosed by the
orifice, as in a frame, nor does it work upon the denticular
processes which act as hinges in so many of the Polyzoa.
When it is thrown back it is suberect and leans against the
Jower margin of the orifice, rising from the membranous wall,
which is depressed and lies at some distance below the arched
ribs. When it is shut it is enclosed above and at the sides
by the cell-wall, but is nowhere in contact with the mbbed
roof of the cell. It lies on the primitive wall, as in Jlem-
branipora. 'The same structure is met with in some of the
Cribriline, as C. annulata and OC. punctata ; but in most of
the species which I have examined (as in C. hippocrepis) the
operculum is composed of stout chitinous material, is closely
fitted to the shape of the orifice, the base being in contact with
the lower margin, and in the present case works on lateral
denticles placed one on each side. We are able to trace in
this element of the structure, as in the general character of
the zocecium, the progress of evolutional change from the
lower Membraniporidan to the higher Cribriline type.

In his family of the Costulide Dr. Jullien has instituted
no less than twelve genera, of which eleven are new, exclu-
sive of the Steginoporide of d’Orbigny, which he rightly in-
cludes in this group.

Of these genera a large proportion, in my judgment, are
founded on trivial characters of no special significance, and
cannot be maintained. The characters drawn from the
“ front-wall”’ especially are generally of the very slightest
moment, some of them hardly of specific vaiue. ‘lhose
drawn from the “ pores d’origelles”? can hardly be estimated
until we are in possession ot the results of further investi-
gations, but are probably of very secondary importance,

I have already given my reasons for holding that C. hippo-
erepis, Hincks, cannot be detached from the Cribriline group,
on account of the structure of its zocecial orifice ; but within
this gioup I am inclined to agree with Dr. Jullien that it
should stand as the type of a new genus.

Dr. Fr. Meinert on the Ugimyia-Larva. 103

This paper has assumed of necessity more of a controversial
character than I could have desired. I trust that none of the
evil spirit of controversy has found its way into what I
designed to be a purely critical discussion in the interest of
scientific truth.

XIII.—On a new Species of Tit.

Dehesa de Cologan,
Puerto de Orotava,
Tenerife,
1st December, 1889.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural
History.

GENTLEMEN,—I enclose you the description of a new species
of ‘Tit that 1 have just discovered in the island of Kl Hierro,
the most southern and western of the Canarian Archipelago.
It is abundant in the pine-forest there.
Yours faithfully,
E. G. MEADE-WaLpo.

Parus ombriosus, sp. nov.

P. Paro tenerife similis, sed fortior et robustior ; tergo toto olivaceo-
viridescente, nec ceruleo ; tectricibus alarum viridibus, majoribus
angustissime albo terminatis: subtus citrinus, P. tenerife similis.

haud a mari distinguenda,

Named from the ancient Moorish name (Ombrios) of the
island of Hierro, where alone it has been found.

XIV.—How does the Ugimyia-Larva imbed itself in the
Silkworm? By Dr. Fr. MEINERT.

THE ‘Bolletino della Societa Entomologica Italiana,’ anno se-
condo (1870), contains two papers concerning the Ugimyia
sericarie. One is a little note only (‘ Sull’ insetto Ugi,”
pp. 134-137) by Rondani, mentioning the larva and pupa of
a‘l'achenarian which Mr. Menegazzi had discovered in Japan
making its way out from the cocoon of a silkworm. In con-
clusion Mr. Rondani (p. 137) gives a description of the larva

104 Dr. Fr. Meinert on the Ugimyia-Larva.

and of the pupa, and, without knowing the imago, he
classifies the animal as a new distinct genus and species
—Ugimyia sericarie, The other paper, a dissertation
by Cornalia (2c. pp. 217-227), gives an account of the
imago, accompanied by figures exhibiting the animal in
its successive stages of evolution. Prof. Cornalia further
advances the theory that the fly in question, after the fashion
of the common Tachinarie, deposits its eggs externally
on the skin of the silkworm, into whose inner organs the
maggot then forces its way through the skin. Afterwards,
before transforming itself into a pupa, the maggot again
makes its way out from the pupa and cocoon of the silkworm.

Before, however, Mr. Rondani published his paper, the
Secretary of the English Legation in Japan, Mr. Adams,
had already given an account of this remarkable fly and its
attacks on the silkworm (“ Deuxiéme rapport sur la sériculture
au Japon,” Rev. univ. d. séricult. Lyon, no. 36, 1 avr.
1870*). And in the interval between the publications of
Rondani and Cornalia the same fly was mentioned by Guérin-
Méneville under the name of Tachina (? Phorocera) Oudji in
his ‘‘ Observations sur la nature de l Oudj?, parasite des vers a
soie au Japon, présentées A l’Académie des Sciences, dans sa
séance le 17 avril, 1870’ (Compt. Rend. Ixx. p. 844; Rev.
et Mag. Zool. 2 sér. tom. xxii. pp. 178-181). Besides, the
matter has been touched upon by Prof. Westwood (Proc.
Entom. Soc. Lond. 1870, p. xxii), by Mr. Haberlandt (‘ Der
Seidenspinner ’), and by Mr. Pryer, who, in his ‘ Catalogue
of Japanese Lepidoptera,’ mentions the Uji as an enemy of
the silkworm, and, further, states that he “has noticed that
the Uji . . . . deposits its eggs about the larva on the leaves,
and not on the insect.” Unfortunately these three last-named
papers have not been accessible to me.

‘The Ugi-plague, however, has been more thoroughly treated
in Japan, its native country, than in Kurope, and principally
in an excellent paper by C. Sasaki, Rigakushi (“ On the Life-
history of Ugimyia sericariw, Ronda,” Journ. Sc. Coll. of
the Imp. Univ. of Japan, 1886). But other Japanese savants,
before Myr. Sasaki, have studied this fly, its habits, and
its connexion with the silkworm. ‘Twelve or thirteen years
earlier, the father of the above author, Mr. N. Sasaki,
commenced some investigations into the subject, stating that
the larva or maggot of the Ugimyia was found imbedded in
the main trunk of the silkworm’s trachee directly under a

* The figures accompanying this paper are styled by Guérin-Méneville
“suffisantes.” Sasaki, however, deems them insufficient. I have seen
neither the paper nor the illustrations.

Dr. Fr. Meinert on the Ugimyia-Larva.* 105

stigma, from which he concluded that the maggot entered
the stigma from the outside from eggs deposited by the
fly on the mulberry-leaves. C. Sasaki does not tell us
whether his father published these investigations ;. but very
similar views and opinions are set forth by the anonymous
author of the ‘ Review of the Japan Silk Trade for the
Season 1873-74.’ By the great courtesy of the Danish
Consul-General at Nagasaki, Mr. de Bavier, I am able to
quote at some length this Review, which is very ey met
with in Europe. "Phe author writes (p. 6) as follows:

“In the Third Report of Japanese Sericulture, tea
Yedo, August 10th, 1870, Mr. F. O. Adams, First Secretary
of the British Legation, summing up his previous researches
on the subject, states that the nae of the Uji, after having
fed upon the chrysalis and killed it, pierces the cocoon ; that
the cocoon thus pierced can menien be reeled, nor, of course,
be used for reproduction ; and that the proportion of cocoons
containing Uji varies from 10 to 80 percent. Jn the absence
of all Phat information on the part of the natives, who seem
to have paid no attention to the matter, he was led to surmise
that the larva of the Uji must in spring transform itself into
a fly, and that the fly deposited its eggs under the epidermis
of the silkworm. ...

‘In order to put Mr. Adams’s theory to the test of experi-
ment we reared some silkworms in a room where every pre-
caution was taken to exclude flies and other insects. ‘lhe
result was as follows :—

312, say 50 per cent., cocoons pierced by moths.
6235 » Say 38 per cent., pierced by Uji.

40: say 7 per cent., unpierced either by moths or Uji.
& 33, say 5 per cent., double cocoons.

ee . This was in 1873. » In October some Uji
on being ‘cut open were found to contain the well-formed
embryo of a fly. On the drd May we had the satistaction of
finding a number of flies which had emerged from the Uji
prisoners under a veil of gauze arranged for that purpose; the
empty shells of the larve were found in earth, where ‘they
had remained imbedded since their birth.

‘The proportion of Uji, which, in spite of our precautions
to protect the silkworms, we had found in our cocoons, was so
startling, that we contrived this year to protect them still
more efficiently than we had done the year before. ‘The eggs
therefore were hatched and the worms fed under a wooden
framework provided with sliding doors and entirely covered
with gauze. ‘The windows of the room itself were closed with

106 Dr. Fr. Meinert on the Ugimyia- Larva.

frames covered with the same material. The result was
this :—

“275, say 31 per cent., cocoons pierced by moths.

“450, say 53 per cent., pierced by Uji.

“135, say 12 (?) per cent., unpierced by either moths or Uji.
‘30, say 4 per cent., double cocoons.

“In the presence of these facts the theory that the fly of
the Uji deposits its eggs under the epidermis of the silkworm
must clearly be given up. Does, then, the fly lay its eggs on
the mulberry-leaf? Is the food the vehicle by which the
germ of the Uji finds its way into the silkworm’s intestines ?

... To the kindness of a correspondent who takes a
warm interest in the matter we are indebted for the following
note :—‘ The fly of the Uji is the Ugimyia sericaria (sic),

2119 09,

thus named by Rondani.
¢e to Mr. C. Sasaki, Mr.

I may also quote what, according
G. A. Greeven writes in the ‘Japan Times’ of May 4th,
1878 :— My experiments have now shown me that the
hatching of the Uji takes place in the stomach of the cater-
pillar, and that it immediately forces its way through the
membrane of the stomach and makes a path for itself toa
stigma.”

Mr. C. Sasaki commenced his investigations in 1883, and
in the following year he communicated to the American
periodical ‘Nature’ a short preliminary article, “ Udschi-
myta sericaria, Rond., a Fly Parasite on the Silkworm ”
(printed ‘ Nature,’ vol. xxx. pp. 435, 436), which two years
atterwards was followed by the fuller account mentioned
above. IT rom this last-named treatise I shall try to point
out the principal results obtained by Mr. Sasaki concerning
the evolution of the Ugimyta sericarie :—(1) The fly deposits
its eggs on the under surface of the mulberry-leaves, zenerally
at the end of May. (2) The silkworms being at this time
of the year in their third or fourth stage of evolution, devour
the eggs—often a great number of them—together with
the mulberry-leaves. (5) The eggs remain from one to
nine hours in the digestive canal of the silkworm, and the
maggots having emerged from the double-shelled eggs, like-
wise remain there for from one to eight hours more before
piercing through the walls of the canal. (4) Having pierced
through the walls of the digestive canal, the maggots directl
enter the abdominal ganglia and feed on the ganglion-cells.
(5) Having devoured the ganglia, the maggots pass into the
body-cavity of the silkworm, and, travelling through the mass
of fat, they search for those portions of the tracheal system

Dr. Fr. Meinert on the Ugimyia-Larva. 107

of their host where the stigmata open. (6) On reaching one
of these places the maggot forms a sort of cup for the recep-
tion of its body by heaping up the fats and muscular fibres
of its host, and sticking them together with its saliva.
(7) At the bottom of the cup an opening is left, and
through this opening the maggot resting in the cup maintains
its connexion with the air, while through the mouth of
the cup it is able to project its head into the abdominal
cavity of the silkworm, on whose fat it is feeding. (8) The
cup being formed, a dark brown spot appears on_ the
silkworm’s epidermis around the stigma, continuing visible
on the pupa also after the transformation. (9) When fully
developed the maggot forces its way ovt thiough the skin of
the silkworm, or, it the worm has been transtormed into a
pupa, through the pupa and its cocoon. (10) Whereupon
the maggot seeks the ground, and there, in a couple of days,
it is transformed into a pupa. (11) The pupa remains in the
ground during the winter, and in the middle of April or at
the commencement of May the fly appears.

As will be seen, some of these points have already been
settled by authors of earlier date; but to Mr. C. Sasaki
belongs the merit of having stated them in a way meeting some
objections which might otherwise have been advanced. Thus,
for instance, regarding the question how it is possible for the
eggs to arrive safely into the digestive canal of the silkworms
My. Sasaki (/. ¢. p. 16) explains :—“ That the eggs do not
get hurt in passing into the body of the worm is further con-
firmed by comparing the size of the pieces of the leaves con-
tained in the digestive canal with that of the egg. It will be
found that the size of the former is many times that of the
latter.” Another question, why only one or two full-grown
maggots emerge from a silkworm or cocoon, although
the silkworm most frequently has been infested by a much
larger quantity of the parasites, Mr. Sasaki explains in the
following way (p. 17) :—“ This is due to two reasons: Ist,
the silkworm, when infected by more than one maggot, dies
from not being able to endure the injuries caused by these
parasites, which then perish bya kind of suicidal death ; 2nd,
one among several maggots infesting the same silkworm may
grow more actively and rapidly than the others, which will
then die from the want of requisite food.”

The development of the Ugimyia sericarie, as related by
Mr. Sasaki, is really deserving of attention, as involving so
much of interest and so many surprising points. But still I
could not believe in the correctness of all his assertions,
and one of them especially seemed to me to be very little

108 Dr. Fr. Meinert on the Ugimyia-Larva.

worthy of credit. I could not imagine that the point no. 6,
concerning the formation of the cup and the maggot’s con-
nexion with the tracheal system of the silkworm, was in
accordance with the real facts.

Therefore, deeming it possible to study these facts on
specimens preserved in alcohol, I addressed myself to the
Greek Northern Telegraph Company, and was met with the
utmost kindness on the part of the Company’s President,
Mr. 'Tietgen. A short time afterwards I received from one
of the officers of the Company, its Superintendent at
Nagasaki, Mr. C. Kvagh, a parcel containing, besides nume-
rous maggots and some pupz and imagines of the Ugimyza,
also two specimens of the silkworm preserved in alcohol.
One of these speciméns was intact, but with a dark brown
spot surrounding one of its stigmata; the other was cut
open longitudinally, and a maggot was seen projecting its
anterior end from the mouth of a sort of cup fastened to the
inner surface of the silkworm’s skin. I feel highly indebted
to Mr. C. Kragk for his courtesy, and I beg to express my
sincerest thanks.

In the first place I cut open the silkworm that was intact,
and a half-grown maggot (its length being about 5:0
millim.) was found lying between the skin and the digestive
canal of the silkworm. But as for the rest, nothing like a
cup was to be seen, nor was the rear end of the maggot situated
inside the stigma surrounded by the dark spot. On the
contrary, the maggot was lying quite freely, as it were just
moulded into the mass of fat, its head projecting about 1°5
millim. beyond the anterior edge of the dark spot, while its
distance from the silkworm’s skin was something like 2 or 3
millim. The rear end of the maggot certainly had approached
one of the hindmost stigmata of its host; but the stigma in
guestion was not situated in the centre of any spot, and no
trace of a cup was to be found. Besides, a mass of fat
covering the rear end of the maggot entirely closed the stig-
mata of the parasite.

Thereupon I turned my attention to the other specimen,
with the body cut open and the maggot peeping out from the
cup; but I soon observed that the maggot was glued to the
bottom of the cup, a way of mounting, however, which in
such preparations made for public instruction very often can-
not be avoided.

This examination of the two silkworms not being sufficient
to satisfactorily solve the question, I again addressed the
Superintendent, Mr. Kragh, who had the extreme courtesy
to send me a new supply of about a hundred cocoons with

Dr. Fr. Meinert on the Ugimyia-Larva. 109

pupas enclosed, the majority of which were supposed to be
infested by maggots. For sending silkworms the season was
too far advanced.

Of these pup only a fifth, or, perhaps, a little more,
were found to be ina normal condition, without any brownish
spots, and not at all infested by the parasite. Among the
rest something like a tenth part did not exhibit any spots ;
but nevertheless in each pupa a maggot was found, and in
one specimen two maggots. However, though no spots were
visible on these pupee, a dark lump (of compressed trachez) was
found constantly inside one of the stigmata, exactly as in the
spotted specimens. Occasionally a pupa was found exhibiting
brownish spots and having the dark lump inside a stigma,
but without any parasite at all. Still I dare not deny that
possibly a small maggot may have been overlooked by me,
although I searched for it most carefully.

Generally the pupe had one or more spots around one
of the stigmata (in most cases one of the first pair of abdo-
minal stigmata), and inside that same stigma the dark-coloured
lump mentioned. The maggot was found occupying a place
more or less in the midst of the abdominal cavity of its host,
thoroughly imbedded in a white mass of fatty structure.
Exceptionally two or more stigmata were surrounded by such
spots; but then also two maggots, one considerably smaller
than the other, were found inside the silkworm. ‘T'wice I
found three maggots, one large and two smaller ones.

As to the position of the maggot inside the pupa, it was
but rarely found to be in contact with either the trachez of
its host or the stigmata, or with the dark-coloured lump, nor
could I discover anything like a cup. Asa rule the maggot
was lying longitudinally in the middle of the pupa, -having
its mouth turned sometimes forwards, sometimes backwards.
If two or three maggots were found the larger one held the
central position, pressing the smaller ones towards the sides.

At length, having examined about fifty cocoons, I found
a pupa in which the maggot was lying in a long sac, with
its stigmata turned towards the bottom of the sac. The
outer end of the sac, which really had some connexion with
a stigma and with the epidermis of the silkworm, was of a
brownish colour, while the inner part was whitish, much
thinner, and cut off. ‘Twice afterwards, in other specimens, I
again found a similar sac containing the maggot. And, finally,
I met with a pupa in which the maggot, as usual, was found
located in the middle of the body, while from its bed a
short canal led towards one of the pupa’s stigmata, the
walls of that canal being of a brownish colour at the outer

110 Dr. Fr. Meinert on the Ugimyia- Larva.

end. The three or four cases just mentioned agree with
the theory of Mr. Sasaki to a certain extent. In some im-
portant points, however, the distinguished Japanese savant
may be mistaken, as I shall now try to prove.

The cup or sac is not, I should say, constructed by the
maggot ‘by heaping up the fats and muscular fibres.” It is
merely a portion of the tracheal system of the silkworm
swelled by the presence of the parasite and tinged brown by
its excrement. Having forced its way into the trachea,
the young maggot imbeds itself there, with its spiracle-
plates turned towards the stigma of the silkworm and with
its mouth peeping out from the trachea into the body-cavity
of the host. By-and-by, as the maggot grows, the trachea
expands and swells, its outer part assuming a brownish

fo)
colour from the maggot’s excrement, while the inner portion

remains uncoloured. I therefore conclude that if a living or
fresh silkworm infested by a maggot is cut open for investi-
gation, the inner part of the trachea or sac, being thin and
white, may break off, while the outer, brownish, part remains
in connexion with the skin of the silkworm. This last-men-
tioned brownish part of the trachea, then, ts the “cup” of Mr.
Sasaki. By means of the microscope it may be clearly seen
that the inner surface of the sac is formed exclusively by
the inner membrane of the trachea, the tunica intima, and
does not show any trace of muscular fibres or of fats. It
is also observable that on the tunica intima of the main
trachea forming the inner surface of the sac, as well as on
the other adjacent smaller trachez, the brownish colour is
more intense, while the muscular fibres and fats sur-
rounding the sac are much less coloured. From the same
source, viz. the excrement of the maggot, the dark spot on
the silkworm’s skin also derives its existence. ‘hat the sac
is formed by the trachea is proved, moreover, by the fact that
the mouths of the smaller trachez are easily distinguished on
its inner surface.

As to the sticking-power of the colouring-fluid (excrement
or saliva), it must be very slight indeed, or, rather, none at all ;
otherwise the sac or cup would adhere to the skin of the
silkworm, and probably be thrown away, together with the
cast-off skin, at its transformation into a pupa. But this is
not the case: the sac remains inside the host, and consti-
tutes the dark lump found behind the stigma of the pupa.
With proper care this lump may be unrolled, and proved
to be a sac large enough to embrace the maggot living in
the body of the pupa. As will be remembered, the maggot

Dr. Fr. Meinert on the Ugimyia-Larva. 111

was found three or four times still occupying such a sac
corresponding to the lump.

In connexion with what is here stated, I shall call attention
to the fact that those Tachina-larve that feed parasitically on
insect-imagines * in a similar way occupy a sac formed by
the trachea of the host (conf. Cholodkowsky, Zool. Anzaig.
1884, p. 316), a fact which I have had the opportunity of
ascertaining myse!f when examining the maggot of Tachina
pacta infesting a Carabus hortensis.

When therefore Mr. Sasaki says that the maggot of
the Ugimyia occupies a cup, I agree with him to some
extent, although [ deem it more appropriate to style the
“cup” a sac. But, in opposition to his views, I am of
opinion that the maggot only for a time occupies that place
and that it leaves it, sooner or later, in order to force its way
into the central part of the body of the silkworm or of the
pupa. At what time the maggot emigrates from its sac I
cannot say precisely ; | have had too few silkworms at my
disposal. But this I can maintain, that the maggot is
very seldom found in the trachea of the pupa, and that it is
often very young when it leaves the sac, viz. in its second
larva-stage, the length of such emigrated maggots being some-
times only irom 3:8 to4 millim. Perhaps this migration may
be influenced by the moultings or the pupation of the maggot.

Having at my disposal a very great number of maggots,
of every length from 3°8 to 14 millim., I had a fine oppor-
tunity for studying the evolution of the spiracle-plates. I
have not seen the first larval stadium of the Ugimyia-maggot,
viz. from its leaving the egg until its locating itself in the
corpus adiposum of the silkworm, but I had before me the
three following stages. In the second stadium the spiracle-
plates exhibit only two short, broad, thin-skinned areas
(“‘ fissures’), while in the third stadium these areas are three
in number, a little longer, somewhat narrower, and alread
of arather angular shape. In the fourth (or last) stadium
their number continues three; but they have become long
and comparatively narrow, with curved outlines. In all
stages I found that the spiracle-plates were closed, the so-
called “ fissures’? were no fissures, and the respiration takes
place through the thin-skinned areas of the spiracle-plates.
This remarkable circumstance, however, perfectly agrees
with the fact that the Ugimyia-maggots are found imbedded

* With other Tachina-larvee, which force their way into the body
of their host through its skin, the hypodermis of this skin forms the
sac (cfr, Auth. Entom. Tidsskr. 1886, p. 191).

112. Mr. W. F. Kirby on a new Species of Drayon-fly.

in the body-cavity of their host, without any communication
whatever between the air of their tracheal system and the
atmosphere. This state of things I have observed, how-
ever, not only in the Ugimyia-maggot, but also in maggots of
other parasitical Diptera, of Tachina, Lucilia, [ypoderma,
&e., the genus Gastrophilus alone making an exception *.
Summing up the results of my investigation, I come to the
following conclusions :—(1) Mr. Sasaki is right, undoubtedly,
in his opinion that the eggs of the Ugimyta find their way
into the body of the silkworm through its mouth; and I
should think that other caterpillars also are infested in the
same way. (2) The Ugimyta-maggot for a while only is
located immediately inside one of the silkworm’s stigmata,
and certainly does not form its bed “ by heaping up fats and
muscular fibres;”’ but the bed is a widening or swelling
of the trachea itself. This fact is fully in accordance with
what is known of the parasitical life of many Tachina-larvie.
(3) The plates of the spiracles or stigmata of the Ugimyta-
maggot are quite closed, a fact that may be observed also in
other Musca- and Cistrus-larve, the genus Gastrophilus

alone excepted.

Copenhagen,
November 12, 1889.

XV.—Description of a new Species of Dragon-fly. By W.
F. Kirsy, F.E.S., Assistant in the Zoological Department,

British Museum.

Dr. Karscu has lately pointed out, in the ‘ Entomologische
Nachrichten,’ that my /ylla exiqua is apparently identical
with Nannophya pygmea, Kamb. I find that I had been
misled by an old label attached to a pair of an undescribed
genus and species in the British Museum. These I now
describe, although they are without locality, as I have already
described the genus and figured the neuration under the name
of Nannophya, and this seems to be the readiest means of pre-
venting further confusion. I think it probable that the speci-
mens are from some part cf the Malay Archipelago.

* For further information concerning the evolution of the spiracle-

lates I may refer to a little paper, ‘‘ Ugimyia-Larven og dens Leie i
A ikeormen? which I am publishing in the ‘ Entomologiske Meddelelser,’
Bd. ii. 1890, with some figures.

Bibliographical Notices. 113

AINO, gen. nov. Libellulidarum.

Nannophya, Kirb. Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond. xii. p. 318 (1889), nee
Ramb.

As this genus is fully characterized in the journal quoted
the characters need not here be repeated.

Aino puella, sp. n.

Nannophya pygmea, Kirb. (nee Ramb.), Trans, Zool. Soe. Lond. xii.
p. 313, pl. lvi. fig. 7 (1889), neuration only.

Exp. al. 27-28 millim., long. corp. 17 millim.

Male.—Head and thorax clothed with rather long hairs.
Face chocolate-brown, bordered above and on the upper part
of the sides with ivory-white ; frontal tubercle bronzy green,
and surmounted by a crest of black bristles, the face being
clothed with shorter ones. Occiput black, shining, with two
white contiguous dots behind the occipital triangle. Thorax
pulverulent blue ; abdomen and legs black. Wings hyaline ;
pterostigma rusty brown.

Female.—Head as in male ; thorax and legs reddish choco-
late ; a V-shaped spot on the back of the mesothorax ; meso-
thorax with a yellow stripe on each side above and the greater
part of the pleura yellow ; traversed obliquely by a chocolate-
coloured stripe, connected in front with the dark colouring
above and below, and swelling out into a large dark spot in
the middle; abdomen black, with yellow bands, gradually
diminishing, at the base of the first five segments above, and
the appendages and the space between yellow. Wings tinged
with yellow at the base as far as the triangles.

Locality unknown (Malay Archipelago ?).

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

Notes on Sport and Ornithology. By His Imperial and Royal
Highness the late Crown Prince Ruporr of Austria. Translated,
with the Author’s permission, by C. G. Danrorp. Gurney and
Jackson.

Most of those ornithologists who were familiar with the German
language had read with pleasure the account of an excursion made
by the Crown Prince along the Upper Danube in the latter part of
April 1878, chiefly made known through his companions Dr. A. E.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 8

114 Bibliographical Notices.

Brehm and the late E. F. von Homeyer, while Prof. A. von Pelzeln
was allowed to publish extracts from the narrative of ‘ Funfzehn
Tage auf der Donau,’ printed for private circulation. In 1879
similar sketches were given of a recent visit to Spain and Portugal ;
‘ Hine Orient Reise’ followed, with a graphic description of a journey
up the Nile to Nubia, and afterwards through Palestine; other
articles, chiefly on ornithology, subsequently made their appear-
ance, and finally all these papers were published in one volume.
Mr. Danford, as a brother sportsman and ornithologist, was strongly
impressed by the freshness and originality of the observations made
by the young author, whose permission to translate the work was
obtained, and the task, which was a labour of love, was already
far advanced when the sad death of the Crown Prince took place.
Mr. Danford’s familiarity with many of the localities mentioned, as
well as with the technicalities of natural history and sport, coupled
with his knowledge of German, have enabled him to rendcr the
author’s exact meaning and even to reproduce his vivacious turns
of phrase with a fidelity which calls for our highest admiration.
Everyone will, we think, enjoy the description of the marshy low-
lying woods of the Danube and their profusion of bird-life ; while
if the destruction of White-tailed Eagles, Vultures, Black Storks,
&e. at their breeding-places seems too prominent a feature, 1t must
be remembered that the nests to which the Crown Prince was
taken were those known to the foresters and comparatively easy of
access, whereas ten times as many lay hidden at some distance
away from his route. In the Fruska-Gora, Homeyer shot a Griffon
Vulture from its nest on an oak, the only instance with which we
are acquainted of a tree being selected by that cliff-haunting species,
though the Black Vulture, which was met with in the same locality,
always nests in a tree. An interesting account is given of the
remarkable antipathy felt by the “Stein” Eagles for the Black
Vulture, which they attack on every possible occasion; from the
description we are inclined to believe that the aggressors are imma-
ture Golden Eagles which, having as yet no domestic cares, employ
their time in persecuting the Vultures. As regards the identity of
the Pigmy and the Booted Kagles the Author’s experience coincides
with our own, and it is surprising that different views should have
been entertained for so long a time in certain quarters. ,
The visit of the Crown Prince to Spain in 1879 was of brief
duration, and some of the assertions set forth in this work must
charitably be set down to inexperience. With regard to the distribu-
tion and numbers of the Bearded Vulture, a rude and flat contra-
diction is given to an ornithologist who had certainly passed more
months among the haunts of that bird than the Crown Prince had
spent days; and upon this point we may therefore quote the inde-
pendent testimony of Lord Lilford, who is unrivalled for his
acquaintance with birds of prey in all parts of the Peninsula :—
‘«« [ have noticed this {the Bearded] Vulture in almost every province
of Spain that I have visited. A pair are generally to be found
breeding in the neighbourhood of every establishment of Griffons,

Bibliographical Notices. 115

and when the latter birds have picked the bones of a carcass bare,
the Bearded Vultures come down and, swallowing the smaller bones,
carry off the larger into the air, and, letting them drop from a great
height upon the rocks, devour the fragments at their leisure.” More-
over, not content with dwelling upon the supposed rarity of this
species in Spain, the Crown Prince goes on to say that ‘in all high
mountains, whether situated in Central or Southern Europe, Northern
Africa, or Central Asia, it is very much thereverse | of common];” yet,
on p. 566, he tells us that it still inhabits the Retyezat, Transylvania,
‘‘in considerable numbers”! The statement that the Spanish
‘« Stein” Eagle is characterized by “a white tail tipped with black ”
is quite misleading, and can only apply to immature examples, for
in adult Golden Eagles from Spain the rectrices are just like those
in Scottish specimens. ‘The fact is that in Spain the Crown Prince
was forced, like everyone else in that country, to try and find
things out for himself ; whereas on the Danube and throughout the
Austro-Hungarian Empire he was naturally a great personage, for
whom everything was, to use a vulgar phrase, “ cut and dried” by
obsequious proprietors and foresters. In saying this we do not for
one moment wish to detract from his merits as a sportsman and a
naturalist, for he was undoubtedly both. He never shunned hard
work, and the reader will be struck by his wonderful energy, keen
enjoyment of wild life and scenery, and his exuberant animal spirits,
these features being especially noticeable in the descriptions of the
visit to the Danube, the journey to the East, and the sketches from
Hungary, Transylvania, &c. On the whole the book is very inter-
esting, though the style is somewhat wordy and monotonous, a
fault which the translator was unable to rectify. For the rest, Mr.
Danford has performed his task with great ability and is entitled
to the thanks of all true naturalists; the general style of the
volume is admirable, and the type is bold and clear.

The Fauna of British India, including Ceylon and Burma. Edited
by W. T. Buanrorp. fishes, by Francis Day. 2 vols. 8vo.
London: Taylor and Francis, 1889.

Axsour a twelvemonth ago we noticed the commencement of this
valuable series of Handbooks of Indian Zoology, on the publication
of the first part of Dr. W. T. Blanford’s account of Indian Mam-
malia, As then indicated the task of describing the Fishes had
been entrusted to Dr. Francis Day, whose great illustrated work,
‘ The Fishes of India,’ was already established as the authority on
this part of the Fauna of our Eastern Empire, and in the course of
the year which has just terminated the two volumes devoted to the
class Pisces have made their appearance. These volumes must be
regarded with a somewhat melancholy interest not only because
they are the last records of a life, many years of which were
zealously devoted to the study of the subjects of which they treat,
but also from the consideration that the author did not even live to

116 Bibliographical Notices.

witness the publication of the results of his labours. Before one
half of the first volume had beon printed Dr. Day was so ill that
he could no longer take any part in seeing his work through the
press, which was consequently thrown entirely upon the Editor ;
and he died within a very few days of the publication of the first
volume.

So far as the book is concerned, however, under the careful and
conscientious editorship of Dr. Blanford, intensified no doubt by the
feeling that special care was requisite in dealing with the orphaned
work of a deceased friend, it has probably suffered very little by the
untimely death of its author. Of its interest to the zoologist there
ean be equally little doubt. It contains the characters of over
1400 species of Indian fishes*, and as these consist to a great extent
of forms ranging on the one hand from the Red Sea and African coasts,
and on the other from Japan and the Pacific, to the Indian region, it
embraces a most interesting and important series of forms. From
another point of view the great number of Indian freshwater fishes,
many of them with marine affinities, first made known to European
zoologists by Hamilton-Buchanan some seventy years ago, are of
great interest, and to the number of these Dr. Day has by his own
researches made considerable additions.

As to the mode in which the work has been carried out there is
little to be said. From the great number of species to be described
it was no doubt impossible to introduce statements as to their natural
history, such as Dr. Blanford was able to incorporate in his account
of the Indian Mammals, and indeed it is probable that in the case
of Fishes there was comparatively little to be said. But the short
descriptions seem to be carefully drawn up, the groups, families,
genera, and species are tabulated throughout, and as a guide to the
determination of the species here recorded the book leaves little or
nothing to be desired.

There is, however, one point to which we would call attention,
as we think it marks a serious defect in an otherwise excellent book.
The synonymy of the species and genera is very imperfectly given,
and in most cases the reader is referred for information upon this
point to the author’s ‘ Fishes of India.’ To the collector wishing
to ascertain the names of his specimens this is of little consequence,
but to the student of Ichthyology it is a very different matter. For
all the higher purposes of systematic Natural History a knowledge
of synonyms is indispensable, and it will be a great disappointment
to the student to find that to obtain this in the present case he must
refer to another book which perhaps is not within his reach. Of
many species with a very wide distribution it may safely be pre-
dicated that they have been several times described under different
names by authors who have had to deal with collections from
particular localities, and under such circumstances the absence of

* This number has been considerably increased by the numerous marine
species noticed and described by Dr, Alcock in his interesting papers
published in the last two numbers of this Journal.

Bibliographical Notices. May

all indications of the synonymy becomes a very serious defect.
We do not mean that in a work like the present anything ap-
proaching a full synonymy could be given, but two or three of the
synonyms of most importance, especially from a distributional point
of view, would have added enormously to the value of the work.

Apart from this, however, the present work must be regarded as
a most valuable contribution to the literature of Ichthyology. The
species, as already stated, are all tabulated, and further they are
described with quite sufficient detail to enable them to be readily
identified ; of a great number excellent woodcut figures are inter-
calated in the text, generally one or two under each genus; and each
volume is provided with a full table of contents and a very complete
index, which will render the book exceedingly easy to consult.
The classification adopted differs somewhat as regards the sequence
of the orders from that in general use, and indeed from that of the
author’s ‘ Fishes of India,’ inasmuch as it commences with the
Chondropterygii, which are directly followed by the Physostomi, and
these by the Acanthopterygit, the remaining orders coming in the
same sequence in both works. No reason is given for this change,
which, however, is not of much consequence, as the book is not
intended as a guide to Ichthyological classification.

In the conclusion of the Preface to the second volume the Editor
informs us that a volume on Birds may very shortly be expected, and
we hope that the concluding part of his own treatise on the Indian
Mammalia will not be very long in making its appearance. The com-
pletion of this and of the other volumes on Birds and on the Reptiles
and Batrachia will furnish students with a most valuable help in
the study of the Vertebrata of the Indian region, and we can only
repeat the hope that means may be found to enable the Invertebrate
fauna to be treated in a somewhat similar manner. Of course the
extent of the ground to be covered will always render it impossible
to treat the groups of the Invertebrata in the style adopted in these
volumes, but catalogues with tabulated characters would be of in-
estimable value to zoologists, and surely the men might be found
to do the necessary work if only the authorities can see their way
to carry out such a plan.

Bergens Museums Aarsberetning for 1888. 8vo. Bergen, 1889.

Tue Annual Report issued by the Museum at Bergen for the year
1888, besides the usual statements as to the state of progress of the
establishment, and an obituary notice of Mr. A. Lorange, the late
curator of its Antiquarian department, and a description with figures
of some curious vessels, chiefly drinkmg-eups, formerly belonging to
the guilds of Bergen but now deposited in the Museum, contains
several articles of considerable interest to naturalists.

The first of these is a description by Dr. Danielssen of a new
species of Cerianthus, which he names C’. borealis, originally obtained

118 Bibliographical Notices.

by him in 1858 near Molde and since found near Bergen and in
the Hardangerfjord. Dr. Danielssen from the first regarded it as a
distinct species, but his colleague in the production of the ‘ Fauna
littoralis Norvegie,’ the late Dr. J. Koren, came to the conclusion
that it was identical with Gosse’s Cerianthus Lloydit. Continued
observation, however, has convinced Dr. Danielssen that the Nor-
wegian species is quite distinct from C. Lloydii, and he now describes
and figures it, with details, under the above name. As the two
forms are very nearly allied it seems quite possible that C. borealis
may occur upon our own coasts and have been hitherto regarded as
belonging to C. Lloydii, so that a note of the characters attributed
to the new species may be acceptable to some of our readers. Dr.
Danielssen describes it as having an elongate cylindrical body, 36
millim. long, and living in a tube of about double that length and
closed at the bottom. The body of the animal is a little wider in
the middle, and tapers off especially towards the posterior extremity,
where there is a round aperture. The upper margin, which is
finely corrugated longitudinally, ean be drawn over the buccal disk
and tentacles so as to conceal them almost entirely. The buccal
disk is somewhat depressed, and the oblong central mouth has two
mouth-angles. The marginal tentacles are in two alternating rows,
18-27 in each row; they are not retractile, nor are the buccal
tentacles, which are of the same number and arranged in two
irregular series. The body is yellowish white, with the disk rather
darker, and the tentacles have a brownish tinge.

The second article is a continuation of Mr. James A. Grieg’s
account of the results of his investigations of the fauna of the West-
land fjords, in which he enumerates the Echinoderms, Annelides,
Polyzoa, Myzostomida, and Pycnogonida obtained by him in the
Mosterfjord. These notices of animal forms occurring off the shores
of a country so near to us as Norway must be of considerable _
interest to British zoologists, and their value is enhanced by the
statements with regard to mode of occurrence which are given
in connexion with several of the species. In this paper Mr. Grieg
also describes a new species of the Holothurian genus Cucumaria,
under the name of C. mosterensis, which is figured with details in an
accompanying plate.

In another article Mr. Grieg describes examples of the White-
beaked Dolphin (Lagenorhynchus albirostris) captured in April last
at Bildden. Mr. Grieg gives a full description of the species with
very carefully prepared tables of measurements of the various parts
of the skulls and skeletons of individuals captured. <A good figure
is given of a female specimen.

Another zoological paper is that by Mr. G. Armauer Hansen on
Neomenia, Proneomenia, and Chetoderma, in which the nomencla-
ture and characters of those three Gephyrean genera are discussed
and illustrated in a plate. Of Neomenia the author cites three
species, namely, V. carinata, affinis, and Dalyelli: the last a form
noticed by Dalyell under the name of “ Vermiculus crassus;” the
first originally named Solenopus nitidulus by Sars, but never

Bibliographical Notices. 119

described by him. Proneomenia, a genus established in 1882 by
Hubrecht, includes all the other Neomenie described by Koren
and Danielssen in the account of the Norwegian North-sea Expe-
dition, besides the type species, P. Sluitert of Hubrecht, and a new
species, here noted by the author under the name of P. filiformis.
This is an important discussion of the characters of some exceedingly
curious and obscure forms of animals.

Of the two remaining papers one contains an account of a curious
series of experments by Dr. J. Brunchorst on “ Galvanotropism,”
or the peculiar influence exerted by the galvanic current upon the
direction of growth of the roots of plants. This curious paper,
which is illustrated with a considerable number of woodcuts, leads
up to the following general result :—‘‘ The negative galvanotropic
curvature depends upon irritant action and is so far analogous to the
geotropic and heliotropic movements; while the positive g ealvanotr opic
curvature is simply a chemico-pathological phenomenon, having
only a purely external analogy with the directional movements of
the roots, and therefore does not deserve the name of galvano-
tropism.”

The remaining paper in the volume consists of a long list of
earthquake shocks recorded as having occurred in Norway since
the year 1758. The number is very considerable, especially of late
years, when, probably, a closer observation has been kept upon such
phenomena. The author of this article is Mr. '[. C. Thomassen, and
in his concluding remarks some interesting generalizations will be
found.

Pr oceedings of the Bristol Naturalists’ Society. New Series, vol. vi.
part i. for 1888-89. Pp. 1-164. 8vo. Bristol, 1889

Tue Zoologists have many interesting notes and papers in this
part i. of vol. vi.n.s. Thus, the putrefactive organisms, discovered
and described by the Rev. Dr. W. H. Dallinger, throughout their
wonderful succession of forms, adapted more or less obviously to the
dissolution and breaking up of decomposing matter, constitute a
subject of great importance both in the elucidation of life and
beings, and in explanation of the phenomena of putrefaction and
fermentation.

In Entomology, Mr. W. K. Mann notices the rare lepidopterous
Heliothis scutosa as having been caught in North Somerset ; and Mr.
G. C. Griffiths treats of Mimiery amongst the Lepidoptera. Snakes,
their habits and their reputed power of fascination, are the subjects
of two interesting papers by Dr. W. Duncan and Dr. A.J. Harrison.
Some Birds exhibited at the meetings are mentioned, three of them
rare in this country. Personal and collected observations on the
Mole, by Mr. C. I. Trusted, are well worth noting. Mr. G. M.
Smith gives a short account of the water-cells in the Camel's
stomach. There is also a short but thoughtful note on the “ per-
ceptions of animals,” by Prof. C. Lloyd Morgan; technically expressed,

120 Geological Society.

“the inferences of animals” are said to be “ habitual and intelli-
gent, but not rational.”

Voice, language, and phonetic spelling, especially the advantages
of the last, are succinctly but clearly treated by Dr. A. B. Prowse.

For Botany, Mr. J. W. White has ‘‘ Notes Supplemental to the
Flora of the Bristol Coal-field,’ and Mr. C. Bucknell gives part xi.
of “The Fungi of the Bristol District.” Mr. C. Jecks offers some
good suggestions as to the causes of the difference in the colour
between the flowers and foliage of Tropical and of ‘Temperate regions.

Local Geologists and others may well be thankful to Prof. C. Lloyd
Morgan for his elucidation of the Geology of Tytherington and
Grovesend, illustrated with a geological map and section along the
Yate-and-Thornbury branch railway from the Midland Railway on
its way to Gloucester. The Old Red Sandstone, the Mountain
Limestone, and the Keuper beds constitute the country. Their
subdivisions are compared with the strata at Clifton and elsewhere,
and their faultings, discordances, and overlaps are carefully described
and made to account for some of the physical features of the surface.
Mr. T. M. Reade’s work ‘On Mountain-building” is carefully and
favourably reviewed by the Rev. M. B. Saunders.

Meteorological observations are given by Dr. G. F. Burder and
Mr. D. Rintoul.

The Engineers have three excellent and most interesting
papers :—on Sewage Systems, very fully and thoughtfully, by Mr.
A. P. I. Cotterell; on the loading, delivery, and warehousing of
Grain in all their details, by Mr. J. M. McCurrich ; and Mr. G. E,
Crawford’s short but most noteworthy and technical explanation of
the height, foundations, materials, shape, stability, and utility of
the Eiffel Tower.

Thus at least five of the several branches of Scientific Research
have received attention at Bristol, and some considerable increase
of facts, generalizations, and practical application, during the past
year; and doubtless these published papers and abstracts will be
not only useful as memoranda, but will be good and fertile seed in
further cultivation of the several fields of knowledge to which they
belong.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

November 6, 1889.—W. T. Blanford, LL.D., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. “‘Contributions to our Knowledge of the Dinosaurs of the
Wealden and the Sauropterygians of the Purbeck and Oxford Clay.”
By R. Lydekker, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.

The first section of this paper was devoted to the description of

Geological Society. 121

the remains of Iguanodonts from the Wadhurst Clay near Hastings
collected by Mr. C. Dawson. They were considered to indicate two
species, for which the names Jgyuanodon hollingtoniensis and I. Fittone
had been proposed in a preliminary notice.

In the second section an SEREE AGE metatarsus of a species of
Megalosaurus from the Hastings Wealden was described, and
shown to indicate a species quite ‘distinct from the one to which a
metatarsus from the Wealden of Cuckfield belonged. Two cervical
vertebrae of a Sauropterygian from the Purbeck of the Isle of Port-
land were next described, and referred to Cimoliosaurus portlandicus,
Owen, sp.

The concluding section described an imperfect skeleton of a larze
Pliosaur from the Oxford Clay, in the collection of Mr. A. N. Leeds,
which indicated a species intermediate between the typical Kime-
ridgian forms and the genus Peloneustes. These specimens were
considered as probably referable to Pliosaurus ferox. Evidence was
adduced to show that Pliosaurus Hvansi, Seeley, should be transferred
to Peloneustes,

2. “On some Paleozoic Ostracoda from North America, Wales,
and Ireland.” By Prof. T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S., F.G.S.

The chief materials referred to were :—

1. Some good specimens of North-American Ostracoda from the
Lower Helderberg and Cincinnati Groups in the British Museum
and the Author’s collection ; these have given occasion for a critical
revision and careful illustration of several forms.

2. In the ‘ Paleontology of New York,’ vol. i. 1859, several of
the Paleozoic Ostracoda of New York State were described but not
figured. Copies of some of the original drawings have been cour-
teously supplied, with Dr. James Hall’s permission, by Mr. J. M.
Clarke, of Albany. They enlarge our knowledge of the Lower
Helderberg fauna.

3. A large collection of Palseozoic Ostracoda, collected in the Lake
Champlain ‘district and elsewhere, sent by Prof, R. P. Whitfield, of
New York, for examination by the Author.

4. Other specimens belonging to the Utica Slate Series from
Ontario, presented to the Author by Dr. John Young.

5. An interesting series of Lower-Silurian (Ordovician) species
from near Welshpool, comprising a characteristic Cincinnati species,
sent by Mr. J. Bickerton Morgan.

6. A rare Paleozoic Cytheroid Ostracod from Kildare, collected
by Mr. Joseph Wright, F.G.S.

The specimens were described as nearly as possible in the
order of their natural relationship, and thus, besides adding to the
known forms, they were shown to illustrate the modifications ex-
hibited by the genera and species of these minute bivalved Crus-
taceans, both in limited districts and in different regions.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 9

122 Miscellaneous.

Amongst the forms described were the following new species and
variety :—Prinutia mundula, Jones, var. cambrica, nov. ; P. humilior,
sp. noy.; P. Morgani, sp. nov.; P. Ulrich, sp. nov. ; P. Whitfieldt,
sp. nov.; Entonis rhomboidea, sp. nov.; Strepula sigmoidales, sp.
nov. ; Hacer Halli, sp. nov.; Lsochilina lineata, ene NOV. 5: 2
fabacea, sp. noy.; Leperditia Claypolei, sp. noy.; Xestoleberis
‘Wrightii, sp. nov.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On a new Entoniscian (Pinnotherion vermiforme, gen. et sp. nov.)

parasitic on the Pinnotheres of Modiola. By MM. A. Grarp
and J. Bonnier.

Tur animal which is the subject of this note is doubly interesting,
as belonging to a group of little-known Crustacea and as furnishing
a new example of parasitism in the second degree.

‘rabs of the genus Pinnotheres occur commonly at Wimereux in
Mytilus edulis, Linn., Modiola modiolus, Linn., and Mactra stul-
torum, Linn.; more rarely in Cardium edule, Linn., and Donax
anatinum, Lam. Several specific forms are no doubt confounded
under the name of Pinnotheres pisum, Linn. In September last we
found in an old Modiola (covered with Serpule and all perforated
by Clone) a female Pinnotheres of considerable size (15 mill. wide),
but differing from P. veterwn, Bosc, which is said sometimes to
inhabit the Modiole. This female bore no ova, and the ovigerous
feet were slightly atrophied. but our attention was particularly
attracted by a violet-grey mass, visible through the transparent
dorsal integument, and resembling in aspect an egg-mass of Grap-
sion Carolinii, Giard. A puncture made with a slender-pointed
pipette furnished mature embryos of an Entoniscian, and taking all
the precautions indispensable in such cases, we were soon able to
extract the adult female which contained these embryos in her
incubatory cavity. The latter occupied the whole left side of the
visceral cavity of the Pinnotheres, from the frontal margin of the
carapace, end, contrary to what occurs in other Entoniscians, it was
prolonged into the caudal portion of the Crab as far as the third
segment of the abdomen. The genital glands of the host were
atrophied, the liver much reduced and very pale. The sac
enveloping the parasite adhered to the right branchial part and
passed, as customary, beneath the intestine.

This parasite, which we shall call Pinnotherton vermiforme, belongs
to a new genus. The characters, in the female sex, are furnished
especially by the form of the first incubatory plate and by the

Miscellaneous. 123

ovarian bosses. The first incubatory plate is destitute of a trans-
verse lamella, and its recurrent portion is of unusual length. There
are no dorsal ovarian bosses. ‘The ventral bosses are two in
number ; the second (posterior), which is excessively long and ecylin-
drical, seems to form the prolongation of the body of the animal, of
which it displaces towards the back the pleon bent intoa Y with the
cephalic part. The muscles of the wall of the body which covers
the ovary, notwithstanding this enormous distention, have retained
great power, and the ovarian bosses contract energetically. The
second, especially, exhibits vermiform movements, which enable it
to bend back and to insinuate itself, as has been said, into the tail
of the Crab, notwithstanding the folding forward of the latter.
The organs situated in the neighbourhood of the genital aperture,
and called seminal receptacles, are of a nearly ovoid form, and their
surface presents four or five lobes arranged like the ribs of a melon.
The liver, of a fine cherry-red colour, was filled with an abundant
liquid, holding in suspension concretions analogous to renal products.
This, however, is the ordinary aspect of the liver of the Entoniscians
some time after oviposition, between two periods of sexual activity.
This supposed liver seems to play the double part of an organ of
excretion and an organ of reserve. The pleon and its lateral and
terminal appendages greatly resemble the corresponding parts in
Grapsion.

In the midst of the embryos, and attached to the folds of the
incubatory lamin, there were two degraded males; notwith-
standing careful search with the lens and the microscope, we did not
meet with any Cryptoniscian males. One of the two degraded
males measured 2 mill. and was in full sexual maturity; it was
destined, no doubt, to fecundate the next deposit of ova. The
other was much smaller (one third), dead and already partially
decomposed ; it must have fecundated the ova then developed.
The degraded male resembles those of Grapsion and Portunion, but
it is almost entirely destitute of pigment. The caudal furca is very
long ; further, the median ventral hooks are placed upon the seventh
thoracic segment (genital segment) and on the first pleal segment ;
the second pleal segment only bears a small rudimentary tubercle.
The males of all the Entoniscians at present known bear no median
hook upon the genital segment. The appendage of Priapion is of
quite a different nature. In Pinnotherion the apertures of the
deferent ducts are situated, not upon the median appendage, but
towards the anterior margin of the seventh segment.

The spermatozoids, fixed by osmic acid and examined, after colora-
tion, with homogeneous immersion, present the complex structure
of the spermatozoids of the Thoracostraca, but they have not the
streaks characteristic of those of the Lobster, Cray-fish, &c.

The embryo greatly resembles that of Grapsion and Portunion.
It is strongly pigmented with brown and green, notwithstanding
the obscurity of the medium in which it is developed. Its eyes are

124 Miscellaneous.

large. The albumino-fatty lobules present a regular metameric
arrangement, as in the embryo of . Athalges paguri, Rathke. The liver
is very strongly contractile. The claw of the sixth pereiopod is
long and powerful; the terminal rod short and very transparent.

To sum up, in the principal features of its organization the genus
Pinnotherion seems to be especially allied to Grapsion; but it is
clearly distinguished in the female sex by the form of the first
incubatory plate and of the ovary ; in the male sex by the arrange-
ment of the median ventral hooks.

Pinnotherion vermiforme seems to be very rare, since we have
only met with a single couple, although we have examined hundreds
of Pinnotheres obtained from the various Acephalous Mollusea
enumerated above-—Comptes Rendus, December 9, 1889, p. 914.

Deep-sea Trawling off the S.W. Coast of Ireland.— Additional
Foraminifera. By Josrrpy Wrienv.

With reference to the ‘ Report of a Deep-sea Trawling Cruise off
the S.W. Coast of Ireland,” Foraminifera, by Joseph Wright, pub-
lished in the ‘ Annals’ for December 1889, the following corrections
are necessary :—Lheophaw distans, Brady, should be Hormosina Car-
pentert, Brady, as shown by further examinations; Tvatularia
agglutinans, d’Orb., and 7’. aspera, Brady, should be omitted for
the present as not altogether satisfactory. The following are some
additional species which have since been found :—

Rheophax membranacea, Brady. Very rare.
Haplophragmium glomeratum, Brady. Common.
Teaxtularia concava, Karrer. Not typical. Very rare.
Bolivina lobata (Brady). Very small. Very rare.
Cassidulina crassa, Orb. Very rare.

Lagena Orbignyana (Seg.). Very rare.

marginata (W. & B.). Trigonal form. Very rare.
jimbriata, Brady. Very rare.

Nodosaria inflewa, Rss. Very rare.

Globigerina sacculifera, Brady. Very small. Very rare.

THE ANNALS

ANB

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

[SIXTH SERIES.]

No. 26. FEBRUARY 1890.

XVI.— On the Structure of Coccosteus decipiens, Agassiz.
By R. H. Traquair, M.D., F.R.S.*

[Plate X.]

In a paper on Homosteus (13) published in the ‘ Geological
Magazine’ for January 1889 I entered into the structure of
Coccosteus so far as was necessary for the purpose of insti-
tuting a comparison between the two genera. In the present
communication I propose to consider the structure of Cocco-
steus in greater detail.

The figure which I gave in that paper of the cranial shield
is reproduced in Pl. X. fig. 2, with the addition of the dorsal
cuirass. It is, I believe, accurate, and represents the result
of a close study of a very great number of heads. Compara-
tively few specimens are, however, available for the purpose,
those especially from Lethen and most of those from Orkney
being ill-adapted for following the sutures separating the
plates, while Cromarty and Edderton furnish those in which
the surface is most perfectly preserved, thus affording the best
opportunity for accurately distinguishing the true sutures from
those superficial grooves which in past times have been so
often confounded with them. Quite recently, however, the

* Read before the Royal Physical Society of Edinburgh, 18th Decem-
ber, 1889.

Ann, & Mag. N, Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 10

126 # Dr. R. H. Traquair on the

Edinburgh Museum has acquired a small collection of Cocco-
steus-remains from Stromness, in Orkney, in which the details
of the surface of the cranial plates are most beautifully shown,
and are entirely corroborative of the sketch which I published
a year ago.

As I have previously stated (12, p. 511), I retain only two
species of Coccosteus from the Scottish Lower Old Red Sand-
stone, namely (. decipiens, Ag., and C. minor, H. Miller,
the differences which have led to the separation of “ oblungus,”
Ag., “cuspidatus,” Ag., microspondylus, trigonaspis, and
pusillus, M‘Coy, and Miller’, Egert., being dependent either
upon the mode of preservation or upon trivial variations in
the shape of certain plates, which are extremely common up
to certain limits. That which I find especially difficult to
understand is how Prof. von Koenen (10) should propose to
remove C. Milleri, Egert., and C. pusillus, M‘Coy, from
Coccosteus altogether, placing them in Brachydetrus, the fact
being that they are simply synonyms of decipiens, Ag. C.
minor, H. Miller, once mixed up with C. pusillus, M‘Coy, may
possibly have to be put into a new genus on account of the
structure of the vertebral column, which presents an appear-
ance as if possessed of ossified centra*; but I can see no
reason for associating this species with v. Koenen’s Brachy-
detrus.

The following description of the structure of the bony
skeleton of Coccosteus is therefore based upon an examination
of the common and well-known species C. decipiens, Agassiz.

Head.—In Pl. X. fig. 2 the bones forming the cranial
shield are sketched, as well as the ramifications of the lateral-
line grooves. ‘These bones are :—one median occipital (m. 0.),
two external occipitals (e.0.), two central plates (c.), two
marginals (m.), two postorbitals (pt.o.), two preorbitals ( p.o.),
one posterior ethmoidal (p.e.), and one anterior ethmoidal
(a.e.), between which last and the premaxille (p.mx.) the
nasal openings (n.) are observable. I have already (13, p. 5)
explained that I have applied those names without the inten-
tion of considering any of the bones exact equivalents of
bones similarly named in ordinary fishes.

The orbit, the upper margin of which is formed by the exca-
vated outer edges of the post- and preorbital buckler-plates, is
completed below by the superior maxillary bone (m.a. fig. 1),
which strongly resembles in shape that of typical Paleonis-
cide in being broadly expanded behind, where it covers the
cheek, and suddenly excavated to form a tapering process

* This is apparently the species “ with a true bony vertebra” referred
to by Murchison in ‘ Siluria,’ 8rd ed. p. 504.

Structure of Coccosteus decipiens, Agassiz. , 127

directed forwards under the eye to the premaxilla. To the
posterior margin of the maxilla is fixed the jugal or post-
maxilla, a triangular plate with posteriorly directed apex,
which fills up the space between the maxilla and the lateral
part of the body-cuirass.

So far as I can see, the maxilla of Coccosteus decipiens does
not seem to have borne any teeth. But in a specimen from
Gamrie in the Edinburgh Museum there is distinct evidence
of the presence of both vomerine and palatal teeth. The
specimen lies on its back, giving a beautiful view of the
ventral cuirass, in front of which are the two rami of the
mandible converging to meet each other anteriorly, while
external to and in front of them the upper margin of the oral
cleft is seen formed by the maxilla and premaxillea. No
teeth are, as usual, seen on the maxille, but internal to them
and between them and the contiguous mandibular ramus is
seen a row of conical teeth, evidently placed on the edge of a
palatal or palato-pterygoid bone, which I have not yet seen
in its entirety. Also in front of the meeting of the mandibu-
lar rami and behind the premaxillary and ethmoidal region is
a clump of five conical teeth, clearly vomerine in position at
all events. It is also clear that the whole of the dentition of
the front of the mouth is not here exposed, as the clump
referred to is on the left side of the middle line, and the corre-
sponding space on the right side is covered by the anterior
extremity of the corresponding mandible,

The bone representing the mandible is well known from
the description of Hugh Miller. It is an elongated, vertically-
flattened plate (fig. 1, mm.), broader behind than in front, with
rounded posterior extremity, slightly sigmoid contour when seen
from the side, and near the anterior extremity sharply bent in-
wards towards its fellow. It is remarkable tor having two sets
of conical teeth, one consisting of a row of abcut halt a dozen
being situated about the middle of the upper margin of the
bone, while another row of about the same number occupies
the vertical anterior margin, which would otherwise be sym-
physial. This is certainly a very curious circumstance, and
one is simply at a loss to imagine of what use teeth could be
in such a situation, or how they worked. It was indeed the
position of these peculiar symphysial teeth that led Hugh
Miller originally to compare the working of the jaws of Cocco-
steus with those of an Arthropod (2, Ist ed. p. 57; see also
footnote in 4th and subsequent editions).

‘There are no traces of ossified internal cranial bones, of
hyoid or of branchial arches ; consequently these parts must
have been entirely cartilaginous. I may mention that the

10*

128 y Dr. R. H. Traquair on the

bones figured by Huxley as ‘‘ the chief parts of the hyoidean
arch’ are in reality the ventral rami of the dermal plates
which I have termed “ interlateral.”

Body- Cuirass.—The front part of the body behind the head
is encircled by a girdle of osseous dermal plates, somewhat
comparable to a shoulder-girdle, expanded backwards dorsally
and ventrally, while at the lower part of the sides the cuirass
is so deeply cut in that the dorsal and ventral expansions
were long considered to have no connexion with each other.
Most of the osseous plates which form this cuirass are well
known from the writings of Pander, H. Miller, and Sir P.
Egerton, but nevertheless some correction 1s still necessary.

The great median dorsal plate (fig. 2, m.d.) is of an elon-
gated pentagonal figure, its short base articulating with the
median and lateral occipitals, its acute apex and elongated sides
articulating with the two dorso-lateral plates, which it exten-
sively overlaps. Its under surface shows the well-known
median longitudinal ridge, ending behind in the “ nail-head”’
prominence, as in the corresponding plate in Homosteus. The
anterior dorso-lateral plate, the os articulare dorsi of Pander,
(a. d. 1), is of a somewhat rectangular form when detached,
though zn sdtu it appears irregularly trapezoidal owing to its
upper and lower margins being obliquely overlapped by the
median dorsal and by the antero-lateral respectively ; its
anterior margin shows a small articular process by which it
is joined to the external occipital. Immediately behind it is
placed the posterior dorso-lateral (p.d.l.), or the os trian-
gulare of Pander, a triangular plate which also articulates
with the median dorsal above and the postero-lateral below,
while its oblique hinder border is free.

The antero-lateral plate (a./.), being the os marginale of
Pander, occupies a position below and in front at the nar-
rowest part of the lateral portion of the cuirass. It is pecu-
liarly trapezoidal in shape, or it might be described as trian-
gular, with the downward and forwardly directed apex
obliquely truncated. Its anterior border, gently convex in
the middle, forms part of the anterior margin of the cuirass,
though it is for the most part shut out from that by the ante-
rior dorso-lateral above and the interlateral below ; its postero-
superior margin, somewhat wavy or zigzagged, overlaps the
anterior dorso-lateral besides articulating with the small
postero-lateral. The postero-inferior margin is free and
slopes obliquely downwards and forwards ; the short anterior
margin is fitted on to the interlateral. ‘This antero-lateral
plate is the one lettered “ce” by Huxley (8, p. 30) and “3”
by Hugh Miller (7, p. 133, fig. 6), though he has represented

Structure of Coccosteus decipiens, Agassiz. ~ 129

the very same plate on the preceding page (p. 132, fig. 5, 2 2)
as forming a part of the ventral cuirass.

The postero-lateral plate (p. /.) is a small one situated at
the posterior angulated margin of the lateral part of the cuirass
and articulates with the antero-lateral, the anterior dorso-
lateral, and the posterior dorso-lateral, its posterior margin
being free. This plate is not noticed by Pander or Huxley,
but it is lettered 2 by Hugh Miller (7, p. 133, fig. 6).

The interlateral plate (@. l.) is one of great ‘interest, as its
form and relations have not yet been properly recognized.
It consists of two parts, lateral and ventral, united at a con-
siderable angle to each other when uncompressed, which,
however, is very rarely the case. The lateral portion, seen
in fig. it forms a sort of fork, on which the short inferior
margin of the antero-lateral plate articulates, and thus is
formed that connexion between the dorso-lateral and ventral
‘portions of the cuirass which was unknown to Pander and
Huxley, and which, so far as I am aware, has not previously
been demonstrated. The lower limb of the fork forms a
conspicuous rounded lower margin, tuberculated like the other
plates, and bears a most suspicious resemblance to the part
represented by Prof. v. Koenen as a pectoral spine in C,
Bickensis (10, pl. 1. fig. 2). In C. decipiens it is, however,
very much shorter than the part alluded to in C. Bickensis ;
however, in CO. minor it attains a very considerable propor-
tional length (13, pl.i. fig. 3, 7.7.). ‘Lhe ventral portion (see
fig. 3), devoid of tubercular ornament, is elongated in shape,
and, passing inwards and slightly forwards to meet its fellow
of the opposite side, forms the anterior margin of the ventral
portion of the body-cuirass ; to it posteriorly are articulated
the anterior ventro-lateral and the anterior median plates.
This part of the bone was known to Pander, and is repre-
sented in two of his figures (6, pl. i. fig. 2, and pl. v. fig. 1,
x), though in the text he compared it with the jugular plate
in Polypterus or Osteolepis. Huxley, on the other hand (8,
p- 35, fig. 21, a), considered the bone to be hyoidean in its
nature, as we have already noticed.

Neither Pander nor Huxley seems to have recognized the
lateral portion of this bone, which serves to articulate the
dorso-lateral portion of the cuirass with the ventral; indeed,
Huxley remarks (8, p. 32) that “ the ventral shield appears
to me to have had no connexion with the dorsal.” But of
the connexion of the two in the manner I have described
there cannot be the slightest doubt. See also my saa of
the parts in C. minor (13, pl. 1. fig. 3).

The plates forming the expanse of the ventral shield are

130 Dr. R. H. Traquair on the

already so well known from the figures of Pander and Hugh
Miller that I need hardly enter into detail regarding them,
especially as I have in Pl. X. fig. 3 accurately given their
respective shape and mode of overlap. ‘They are six in num-
ber :—antertor median ventral (a. m. v.), posterior median
ventral (p.m.v.), two anterior ventro-laterals (a. v. 1.), and
two posterior ventro-laterals (p.v.l.). LImay, however, men-
tion that, judging from the course of the lateral-line groove
on the anterior ventro-lateral plate, Pander has reversed its
position, putting the front end behind and vice versd ; for
we shall presently see that on this plate the sensory canal
occurs on the anterior and not on the posterior part of its
surface.

Distribution of the Lateral-line Grooves.—The course of
the lateral sensory canal is indicated on certain of the dermal
bones by conspicuous grooves, which, as in the case of Pter-
tchthys and Bothriolepis, have often been mistaken for
sutures. ‘There is, however, no difficulty in distinguishing
them from sutures, when one by experience really comes to
know the characteristic appearance of the latter.

On the anterior half of each anterior ventro-lateral plate is
seen a curved groove, starting from near the middle of the
anterior margin and then curving sharply round to proceed
to the inner border close behind the antero-internal angle.
On the median dorsal plate a groove is seen of a V-shaped
contour, the apex being in the middle line somewhat in front
of the posterior extremity of the bone, the limbs diverging
forwards towards the superior margin of the posterior dorso-
lateral plate. On the anterior dorso-lateral plate a continua-
tion of this groove runs forwards to the postero-internal angle
of the external occipital, near which it is met by a branch
coming diagonally upwards and forwards from the postero-
inferior angle of the plate. ‘The side-canal thus formed passes
now on to the cranial shield at the point indicated, and there
at once gives off a branch running forwards and slightly
inwards, parallel with and close to the outer margin of the
median occipital, becoming lost on the posterior margin of
the central. The main groove then runs forwards and out-
wards parallel with the outer margin of the shield, giving off
first a branch passing to the external projecting angle of the
marginal plate, then turning forwards and inwards still
parallel to the shield-margin it passes on to the postorbital
plate, where it gives off another branch to the postorbital angle.
Here it bends sharply backwards and inwards at an acute
angle, runs on to the central plate, approaching its fellow of
the opposite side, and near the middle of this plate it again

Structure of Coccosteus decipiens, Agassiz. | 131

turns sharply forwards, passes on to the anterior part of the
preorbital and ends near the small nasal opening in front. In
some specimens a cross commissural branch is seen on the
central plates, connecting the two main trunks at the con-
spicuous angles which they make in that place.

A groove is also observable on the maxilla, apparently
continued from the second external branch of the main groove
on the postorbital, and passing along as a suborbital branch
close to the hollowed-out orbital margin of the bone. It gives
off behind the eye another branch, which passes in a curved
manner downwards and backwards towards the margin of the
bone posteriorly.

Sclerotic Ring.—A specimen from Gamrie in the Edinburgh
Museum shows evidence of a sclerotic ring such as has been
figured by v. Koenen (10, pl. il. fig. 2, pl. iv. fig. 2).

Internal Skeleton.—In the typical Coccosteus decipiens,
Ag., there is no trace of vertebral centra, the space occupied
by the persistent notochord being always empty in the fossils.
Agassiz in his restored figure (1, pl. vi. fig. 3) has repre-
sented on both dorsal and ventral aspects of the notochordal
space a continuous row of distally-pointed neurapophyses and
hemapophyses, also a dorsal and anal fin situated opposite
each other, each supported in Teleostean fashion by a series
of proximally-pointed interspinous bones, dipping down be-
tween the neurapophyses, the supposed fin-rays being, accord-
ing to the same idea, pointed at their extremities. Pander (6,
pl. iv. fig. 1) still retains the two median fins, with the long
hemapophyses in front of the anal, though he was more
correct in making the interspinous bones articulate end to end
with the neurapophyses by expanded extremities. But though
M‘Coy had previously (5, p. 602) strongly doubted the exist-
ence of ananal fin in Coccosteus, Pander’s figure has been copied
into almost every text-book; Prof. von Koenen has trans-
ferred the body-skeleton and fins as there represented to his
restoration of the allied genus Brachydeirus, while the anal
fin is also mentioned as present by Zittel in his handbook (14,
p. 160). M‘Coy was, however, correct—there is no anal fin
in Coccosteus ; but besides this Pander’s figure is incorrect in
other points, which I shall now indicate.

It is not possible to trace the vertebral column to its com-
mencement, owing to its obscuration by the dorso-lateral
cuirass ; where it first becomes visible is about the middle of
the length of the great median dorsal plate. There we find
short broad neural pieces continued obliquely backwards and
upwards into neural spines, which gradually lengthen until
we come to the dorsal fin, which commences a little beyond

132 7 Dr. R. H. Traquair on the

the apex of the plate just mentioned. Here we have two sets
of interspinous bones articulated end to end with each other
and with the neural spines, which latter are truncated and
not pointed. In avery good specimen in the British Mu-
seum I count about fifteen ossicles in the proximal set and
twelve in the distal, though probably the numbers were equal
in the perfect state, and in both sets they have the same form,
namely they are slender, elongated, and expanded at both
extremities. It is evident from the last-mentioned circum-
stance that the ossicles of the seeond row are not dermal fin-
rays, but belong to the same category as those of the first ;
two rows of interspinous bones being, in fact, of constant
occurrence in the primitive Ganoids.

Beyond the dorsal fin the neural spines become very short
as well as less oblique in their direction.

On the hemal aspect of the vertebral axis no such elon-
gated apophyses occur anteriorly, as depicted in the restora-
tions of Agassiz and Pander. Immediately behind the lateral
plates of the cuirass we find small, nearly circular, hemal
pieces wethout spines, then spines are added which, gradually
lengthening, become longest in the region opposite the dorsal
fin, whence they again diminish towards the extremity of the
tail. It is this peculiar lengthening of the hemapophyses
under the dorsal, a fact also noticed by M‘Coy, which has
evidently given rise to the old idea of the presence of an anal
fin.

In all specimens of Coccosteus where the internal skeleton
is well preserved there is found a pair of peculiar slender bones
(x), each of which is pointed at both ends and bent below
the middle at an obtuse angle in somewhat L-shaped fashion,
the long limb pointing upwards towards the vertebral axis,
the short one forwards. ‘These bones were noticed by Pander
(6, p. 73), who, though extremely doubtful as to their nature,
supposed that they “ vielleicht den Extremititen als Stiitzen
der weichen Flossen angehérten.” ‘Their position is certainly
suggestive of their having had something to do with pelvic
limbs—more I cannot say.

Mr. A. Smith Woodward has pointed out to me that in
several specimens in the British Museum a small oval or
somewhat rhombic bony plate (y) is seen lying in a position
posterior to the last-mentioned bones. I have not observed
it in any other specimens than those; but its presence in a
similar position im more than one example would seem to
indicate that it was a scute placed in the ventral mesial line.

Were pectoral members present?—I have now examined
with the utmost care a very great number of specimens of

Structure of Coccosteus decipiens, Agassiz. 133

Coccosteus decipiens in all conditions of preservation and from
all the beds and localities of the Scottish Old Red Sandstone
which have yielded such remains, including the collections in
the British Museum, in the Museum of Practical Geology, in
the Edinburgh Museum of Science and Art, the Gordon-
Cumming collection at Forres, and many others, but without
meeting with any other parts either of endo- or exoskeleton
than those Ihave described. And, in particular, [ have not
seen the smallest evidence of the presence of any pectoral
limb, nor any trace of an articular surface on any of the
bones to which such a limb could have been articulated. It
can scarcely be believed that had such a limb been present it
would either have escaped preservation or observation in so
large a number of specimens. Nevertheless more than one
author has been disposed to believe in the presence of such a
limb in Coccosteus.

In the restored figure of Coccosteus given by Hugh Miller
in the first edition of the ‘ Old Red Sandstone’ (2, pl. iii.) no
limb is represented, and its absence is positively affirmed in
the text. But in subsequent editions, and also in Duft’s
‘Geology of Moray’ (3, pl. vill. fig. 1), a peculiar ‘ paddle-
shaped ”’ body is represented appended to the head. How-
ever, Hugh Miller, in a footnote, explains that he has ascer-
tained that the supposed arms “ were simply plates of a pecu-
har form.” Of course there is not the smallest doubt that the
idea of this limb owed its origin toa displaced maxillary bone.

But more recently, in connexion with what appear un-
doubtedly to be fragments of a large and peculiar form of
Coccosteus, 'Trautschold (9 and 11) has described and figured
from the Old Red Sandstone of Russia certain peculiar bodies,
which he considers, though not without doubt, to appertain
to supposed large arms or “‘ Ruderorgane’”’ belonging to that
species, which he accordingly names Coccosteus megalopteryx.
What the fragments are to which he applies the term ‘ Ober-
arm” I have not the slightest idea, as I have not seen them,
and certainly nothing like them has ever been found along
with Coccosteus decipiens. But with regard to the peculiar
flat triangular bodies represented in his first memoir on the
subject (Y, tab. vi. and tab. vii. fig. 2), I have had the privi-
lege of examining two specimens contained in the British
Museum.

In the first place there is no evidence whatever that these
bodies belong to Coccosteus at all, any more than the supposed
“‘Oberarm,” as nothing in any way resembling them has ever
been seen in connexion with the most perfect specimens of C.
decipiens, the type of the genus, which the Scottish Old Red

134 Dr. R. H. Traquair on the

Sandstone has afforded. Prof. v. Koenen has also expressed
grave doubts (10, supplementary note) as to their having
belonged to Coccosteus, though he thinks it not impossible
that the piece referred to as “ Oberarm” may be identical
with the “ stabférmiges Ruderorgan,” the existence of which
he himself maintains. .

In the second place it seems to me highly probable that
they are Selachian appendages; indeed, their form and
appearance is strongly suggestive of an affinity with Ora-
canthus, which is certainly Selachian, although some years
ago Mr. J. W. Davis was inclined to refer it to the Placo-
dermi, though not as a pectoral limb. These so-called
‘‘ Flossen”’ are flat bodies, of a horn-shaped outline, pointed,
with one margin convex, the other concave, truncate base, and
rounded lateral edges. A great part of the surface is sculp-
tured with closely-set tubercles, which are occasionally irregu-
larly elongated, and all with stellate bases; these tubercles
being an integral part of the substance of the appendage,
the term “ Schuppenhaut”’ applied to them by Prof. Traut-
schold seems hardly appropriate. The basal margin of the
body is not tuberculated but striated, and this striated portion
extends further up on one side than on the other.

Now, Prof. Trautschold admits (11, p. 36, note) that the
body figured by Pander as an “ ichthyodorulithe” (6, pl. vil.
fig. 22) is identical with the end of one of the supposed
“fins” of Coccosteus megalopteryx ; and if so, then its micro-
scopic structure is not that of a Coccostean bone, but of a
Selachian appendage. For here are the words in which
Pander refers to the body in question:— Fig. 22. Ein
Ichthyodorulithe, mit ausgezeichnet schénen Sternen auf beiden
Flichen und Kanten. Die Sternchen sind iusserlich von
denen von Asterolepis, Coccosteus und [Homosteus unméglich
zu unterscheiden, aber die microscopische Structur ist ganz
verschieden. Knochenhéhlen fehlen giinzlich. Die Tuberkel
bestehen aus wahrer Dentine und die ganz innere Masse aus
einem Gewebe von Markcaniilen, umgeben von concentrischen
Kreisen, in der Grundsubstanz, welche von den nach allen
Seiten ausstrahlenden feinen Zahnréhrchen unter rechten
Winkeln durchschnitten werden” (6, pp. 102, 103). From
this description, along with Pander’s figure of the microscopic
structure (cb. fig. 34), the true nature of these bodies is, I
think, pretty evident.

I am therefore quite unable to accept Prof. Trautschold’s
views as to the “ fins ”’ of Coccosteus.

But, as already mentioned, Prof. von Koenen has affirmed
the presence in Coccosteus of a “ Ruderorgan,” and in his re-

Structure of Coccosteus decipiens, Agassiz. 135

stored figure of his “subgenus” Brachydetrus (10, pl. iv. fig. 1)
he has represented the same as a long, pointed spine diverging
backwards from the antero-inferior angle of the antero-lateral
plate of the cuirass. In tab. ii. fig. 2 of the same work he has
also represented the spine én situ in a specimen of Coccosteus
Bickensis, v. Koen.; but the supposed spine is here much
shorter than in the restoration, and lies horizontally just
below the antero-lateral plate, in the very spot where the
outer margin of the interlateral plate occurs in Scotch speci-
mens of the genus. I have already stated that the appear-
ance here is strongly suggestive to my mind that this
‘‘ Ruderorgan”’ or pectoral spine is nothing but the outer
Kante, as the Germans would call it, of the interlateral plate.
But though the corresponding .part in C. decipiens is very
much shorter than that here represented, it attains a very
considerable proportional length as well as a very spine-like
appearance in C. minor, H. Miller, as is shown in my outline
figure of that species (13, pl. i. fig. 3). That it should also
attain similar proportions in other species is highly probable.

Of course I have not seen Prot. v. Koenen’s specimens,
and it is not always safe to judge from figures and descrip-
tions alone. ‘This much I am, however, entitled to say—that
if such a pectoral swimming-organ really does occur in Prof.
v. Koenen’s species Bickensis, that species cannot be referred
to Coccosteus, in which no such organ is present. And, again,
if it is present in Brachydetrus bidorsatus, v. Koen., then
Brachydeirus is not merely a “subgenus” of Coccosteus, but
a genus with a very great distinction indeed.

List of Works referred to.

(1) Acassiz, L.—‘ Monographie des Poissons Fossiles du vieux grés
rouge.’ Neufchatel, 1844-45.

(2) Mrtter, HucuH.— The Old Red Sandstone, or New Walks in an
Old Field.’ Edinburgh, 1841, and subsequent editions.

(3) Durr, P.—‘ Sketch of the Geology of Moray.’ Elgin, 1842.

(4) Mitter, H.—‘ Footprints of the Creator, or the <Asterolepis of
Strumness.’ Edinburgh, 1849.

(5) M‘Coy, F.—‘ Systematic Description of the British Paleozoic
Fossils in the Geological Museum of the University of Cambridge.’
London, 1851-56.

(6) PaAnpDER, C. H.—‘ Ueber die Placodermen des devonischen Sys-
tems.’ St. Petersburg, 1857.

(7) Grey-Ecrerton, Str P. pe M.—“ Paleichthyological Notes.—
No. 12. Remarks on the Nomenclature of the Deyonian Fishes,”

136 On the Structure of Coccosteus decipiens, Agassiz.

Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1860, vol. xvi. pp. 119-136. Contains
also notes on Coccosteus by Hugh Miller.

(8) Huxtry, T. H.— Preliminary Essay upon the Systematic
Arrangement of the Fishes of the Devonian Epoch,” Dec. Geol.
Survey, x., 1861.

(9) TrautscHoLtp, H.— Ueber Dendrodus und Coccosteus,” Trans.
Imp. Russ. Min. Soe. xy., 1880.

(10) Kornen, A. von.— Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Placodermen des
norddeutschen Oberdevons,” Abh. der konigl Gesellsch. der
Wissenschaften zu Gottingen, xxx., 1883.

(11) TravutscHoip, H.—“ Ueber Coccosteus megalopterya, Trd., Cocco-
steus obtusus und Cheliophorus Verneuili, Ag.,” Zeitschr. der
deutsch. geol. Gesellsch. 1889, pp. 35-48.

(12) Traquair, R. H.—* Notes on the Nomenclature of the Fishes of
the Old Red Sandstone of Great Britain,” Geol. Mag. (3) vol. v.
1888, pp. 507-517.

(18) Traquatr, R. H.—“ Homosteus, Asmuss, compared with Cocco-
steus, Agassiz,’ Geol. Mag. (3) vol. vi. 1889, pp. 1-8.

(14) Zirrer, K. A. von.—‘ Handbuch der Palaeontologie,’ i. Abthei-
lung, iii. Band, 1 Lieferung.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE X.

(In all the figures the same letters refer to the same things.)

m. 0. Median occipital. m. d, Median dorsal.

e. 0. External occipital. a. d. 1. Anterior dorso-lateral.
m. Marginal. p. d. l. Posterior dorso-lateral.
ce. Central. a. l, Antero-lateral.

pt.o. Postorbital. p. l. Postero-lateral.

p.o. Preorbital. 2. l, Interlateral.

pt. e. Posterior ethmoidal. a.m. v, Anterior median ventral.
a. e, Anterior ethmoidal. m, v. Median ventral.

p.mx, Premaxillary. a. v. 1, Anterior ventro-lateral.
n. Nasal opening. p. v. l. Posterior ventro-lateral.
mx. Maxillary. x. Peculiar internal bones.

jy. Jugal. y. Posterior ventral plate.

0. Orbit. mn. Mandible.

Fg. 1. Restored outline of the skeleton of Coccosteus decipiens, Agassiz.
The dotted lines indicate the ramifications of the lateral-line
system; the thin lines on the body-cuirass here and in fig. 3
denote the overlapped edges of the plates.

Fig. 2. View of the head and dorso-lateral portion of the body-cuirass
from above.

Fig. 3. View of the ventral portion of the body-cuirass from below. The
thin lines denote the overlapped edges of the plates.

On the Reptiles and Batrachians of Amoorland. 137

XVIL.—A List of the Reptiles and Batrachians of Amoorland.
By G. A. BOULENGER.

[Plate IX.]

THE recent acquisition by the Trustees of the British
Museum, among other examples from the late Dr. J. G.
Fischer’s collection, of a series of Reptiles and Batrachians
obtained by Hr. Dorries of Hamburg on the Ussuri River *,
has induced me to publish, in addition to notes on the little-
known forms, a complete list of the Reptiles and Batrachians
hitherto recorded from Amoorland. This fauna presents an
interesting mingling of North Palearctic (Lacerta vivipara,
Vipera berus, Rana temporaria), Central Asian (Hremias),
Japanese (Tropidonotus vibakari), and Oriental (Tachy-
dromus, Coluber tenturus) types.

Ree CEA:
LACERTILIA.

1. Tachydromus amurensis.
Peters, Sitzungsb. Ges, Naturf. Freunde, 1881, p. 71; Bouleng. Cat.
Liz. iii. p. 6.

Described by Peters from examples obtained at Kasake-
wicha, on the Amoor. The following description is taken
from four specimens (2 g, 2 ?) collected at Chabarowka by
Hr. Dorries.

Snout short, obtuse, its length equal to the distance be-
tween the orbit and the posterior border of the tympanum.
Granules between the supraoculars and the supraciliaries
absent or reduced to two or three ; a small shield, sometimes
broken up into two or three, separates the large anterior
supraocular from the loreal ; temporal scales perfectly smooth,
7 or § on a line between the orbit and the tympanum ; four
(rarely five) upper labials anterior to the subocular; three
specimens have four pairs of chin-shields, the fourth has five.
Large dorsal scales in 7 or 8 longitudinal series, of which
the median are smaller than the others ; 24 to 27 in a longi-
tudinal series between the axils. Ventral shields smooth,
outer very feebly keeled, in 8 or 10 longitudinal and 25 to
28 transverse series. Preanal shield entire in the males,
divided or semidivided in the females. Three inguinal pores
on each side. Brown or olive above, uniform or with darker

* I had previously described a new genus of Newts, Geomolge Fis-
chert, from the same collection (P. Z. 8, 1886, p. 416),

138 Mr. G. A. Boulenger on the
spots, usually blackish on the granular lateral region; with

or without a light streak from the eye to the collar; lower
parts yellowish or greenish white.

sail aaah

Motallength ...f./5.% 26 claret able elise nels 173 151
15 er-\0 eee RL Ie tA ot oo OOO AOC 12 1133
Width otdhead aaripeenttnlcnsre sr aiaterchen. 8 9
BOO Ya cynic cc. c'0ie.e ete aioe serine ersten sia 44 53
Fore limb: 0 arts eaten ereiehelave elevetene 19 20
shiGblitid “Gopooooavcau00o GD CCdb00C 25 Diff
Tail hfe otic ace nia ae ee eho eastalensieiiore 117 85

2. Lacerta vivipara, Jacq.

Bedriaga, Abh. Senck. Ges. xiv. 1886, p. 338.

Our common lizard extends right across Europe and Asia,
from the Atlantic to the Pacific, north of lat. 43° N.
Vipera berus and Rana temporaria have an almost identical
range. Siberian specimens in the British Museum, for which
we are indebted to the kindness of Dr. Strauch, are from
Padun (River Angara), Stanowoi Mountains (EK. Siberia),
Nicolawsk (Amoor), and Saghalien Island.

3. Eremias argus.
Peters, Mon. Berl. Ac. 1869, p. 61, pl. —. fig. 3.

A specimen of this common North-Chinese lizard, col-
lected by Mr. A. Adams in Manchuria (no precise locality
appended), is in the British Museum.

OPHIDIA.

4, Ablabes rufodorsatus, Cantor.
Coluber rufodorsatus, Strauch, Schl. Russ. R. p. 79.
Common over the greater part of China, and occurs in
Eastern Siberia from Lake Baikal to the Amoor and Posiette

Bay. The most northern locality from which we have a
specimen in the British Museum is Peking.

5. Coluber dione, Pall.
Elaphis dione, Strauch, op. ect. p. 82.

Extends from South-eastern Europe through Central Asia
to the Amoor (Barnard, Reinowke), Corea, Peking, and Yesso.
The north-eastern specimens in the British Museum are from
Peking and the Ussuri River.

Reptiles and Batrachians of Amoorland. 139

6. Coluber Schrencki’, Strauch.
Elaphis Schrencku, Strauch, op. ert. p. 100.

This species was described from specimens from the
Chingan Mountains (Amoor), Posiette Bay and Whladi-
vostok, and Hakodate in Japan. A specimen from the
Ussuri River, received from the Warsaw Museum, is in the
British Museum.

7. Coluber teniurus, Cope.
ELlaphis teniurus, Strauch, op. cit.

Its range extends from Novgorodski (Strauch) to the
Eastern Himalaya, Indo-China, Borneo, and Sumatra. The
most northern specimens preserved in the National Collec-
tion are from hills north-west of Peking.

8. Tropidonotus tigrinus, Boie.
Strauch, op. cit. p. 176.

Common in North Chinaand Japan. Recorded by Strauch
from Strelok Bay (Peter the Great Bay). A specimen from
Gensan, Corea, is in the British Museum.

9. Tropidonotus vibakart, Boie.
Strauch, op. cit. p. 174.

This common Japanese snake was first recorded from con-
tinental Asia by Strauch, whose specimens are from Posiette
Bay and Baranowsky on the River Suifin. Two specimens
from Chabarowka are in Hr. Dérries’s collection, and present
the following characters :-—

One or two pre- and three postoculars ; temporals1+1+1,
or 1+1+4+2, or 1+2+2; seven upper labials, third and
fourth entering the eye; in one specimen the sixth labial on
one side is excluded from the labial margin and becomes a
temporal. Scales in 19 rows, with distinct apical pits.
Ventrals 150, 151; anal divided; subcaudals 59, 60. Uni-
form grey-brown above, head marbled with black; lips yel-
lowish, with black bars down the suture of the shields; a
yellowish black-edged spot on each side of the occiput; lower
parts yellowish white, with a series of small brown spots on
each side.

10. Vipera berus, L.
Strauch, op. cit. p. 206.

Extends, like Lacerta vivipara, from Europe to Man-
churia, as far south as Posiette Bay and Saghalien Island.

140 Mr. G. A. Boulenger on the

11. Ancistrodon intermedius, Strauch.
Trigonocephalus intermedius, Strauch, op. cit. p. 245.

Inhabits Eastern Siberia, as far west as the Government
of Irkutsk, and Japan. Four specimens are in the British
Museum, viz. one (a) from the River Kunge (from the St.
Petersburg Museum), one (0) from Sincinogorsk (from the
Bremen Geographical Society), and two (c, d) from Chaba-
rowka (Dorries Collection).

The scaling of these four specimens is as follows :—

a. b. Cc. d.
IDM) 5 do eno woe 7—7 7—8 7—T7 7—8
Rows of seales .,.. 23 23 293 OB
Wentralisies. sen a 161 166 155 156
Subcaudals........ 49 45 40 40

12. Ancistrodon Blomhoffit, Boie.
Trigonocephalus Blomhoffit, Strauch, op. cit. p. 251.

Inhabits Japan, the greater part of China, and Amoorland.
In the British Museum from the Ussuri River.

BATRACHIA.
ECAUDATA.

13. Rana temporaria, L.

The range of the common frog extends eastwards to
Amoorland (Kasakewicha, Berlin Museum), and Yesso. The
Asiatic specimens in the British Museum are from Ilisk,
Eastern Turkestan (Zansdell), Sinus Abrek, E. Siberia, and
Yesso.

14. Rana amurensis. (Pl. IX. fig. 1.)
Bouleng. Bull. Soc. Zool. France, 1886, p. 598.

The original description of this very distinct species, the
smallest of the temporaria-group, was taken from two speci-
mens from Kasakewicha, on the Amoor, preserved in the
Berlin Museum. The following description is based upon
nine specimens from Lake Kanka, collected by Hr. Dérries.
We have also numerous specimens from Chemulpo, Corea,
but in bad condition.

Vomerine teeth in two short oblique series or oval groups
behind the level of the choane. Head rather depressed, as
long as broad ; snout rather elongate, rounded, scarcely pro-
jecting ; loreal region not very oblique; nostril halfway

Reptiles and Batrachians of Amoorland. 141

between the eye and the end of the snout ; interorbital space
a little narrower than the upper eyelid ; diameter of the tym-
panum about two thirds the diameter of the eye; the distance
between the eye and the tympanum equals half or two thirds
the diameter of the latter. First finger not or scarcely
extending beyond second. Tibio-tarsal articulation reaching
the eye; tibia shorter than the fore limb. Inner metatarsal
tubercle small, oval, blunt; no outer tubercle. Subarticular
tubercles small. Toes two-thirds or three-fourths webbed.
Skin smooth; dorso-lateral glandular fold feebly marked.
Brown above, dorso-lateral folds edged with darker; fre-
quently a pair of more or less distinct dark lines along the
middle of the back ; loreal and temporal regions blackish; a
whitish streak bordering the upper lip; lower parts spotted
or marbled with brown. Male without vocal sacs; thumb
with black nuptial excrescences.

millim, millim.
EOnNSnHOUDLORVelbeesae verre cet cen: 44 45
Meng thyotgheadss, gras se6 sta so oiehee ob tee 14 14
Wirdithvoighea dhrriviero ici screaruiea ate 14 14
Diameter of the6yeri sein ona ys of dos 4 4
Diameter of the tympanum .......... 2°5 2'5
Ikength\of thessnout) 15.065 bes. 5 aac es 5 55
HOTS Mera chaheter Ac a tie boos wate 24 26
Elindelimiby, ee ea taeie stavske tena shane dens 68 69
TUN OES Chace ame 6 ri OG Cee Ce ee rei ii
nn CLECOCL ic Reine ec hcisaain Avan os 4'5 5
Inner metatarsal tubercle ............ 15 Sess

15. Bufo Raddit.

Strauch, Voy. Przewalski, Rept. and Batr. p. 53; Bouleng. P. Z. 8.
1880, p. 501.

Known from the Valley of the Amoor, Daouria, Peking,
and Chefoo.

16. Bufo vulgaris, Laur.

Its eastern range extends over nearly the whole of China
and Amoorland and Japan. The differences between Euro-
pean and Japanese specimens, which consist chiefly in the
greater size and perfect distinctness of the tympanum, the
black lateral stripe, and the deep black spots or marblings of
the lower parts in the latter, are completely bridged over by
the Chinese and Manchurian specimens. Specimens from
Ichang, on the Yangtse Kiang, and Ningpo come nearest
the Japanese, from which they do not differ in coloration ;

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 11

142 Mr. G. A. Boulenger on the

but the tympanum, although as distinct, is not so large.
Specimens from Shanghai, Chefoo, Peking, and Corea are
intermediate between the latter and the Kuropean ; the tym-
panum is always very distinct, but varies considerably in
size; the dark lateral stripe is usually ill-defined or absent,
and the belly may be either largely spotted with black or
almost immaculate. Judging from the two specimens col-
lected at Chabarowka by Hr. Dorries, the northernmost form
is still nearer the European; the tympanum is rather small,
but perfectly distinct, the belly is immaculate, and the colora-
tion might be said to be identical with that of Huropean
specimens, but for the presence of traces of a light vertebral
line, as is often found in specimens from Japan, Corea, and
Northern China. The following table shows (in millims.) the
variations in the size of the tympanum :—

3
pac]
a = : 3 to .
o &§ «4 3 tome a
A. mm. Oo o Co eS
S——. ——
é, 8) dd. Oh Gin Oo
From snout to vent...... 76 125 65 88 120 87 102 120 132
Diameter of the eye ia De ead, ark 8 Sees lal
Diameter of thetympanum 25 4 38 3 Gat 9) if 8

17. Hyla Stepheni.
Bouleng. P. Z. S. 1887, p. 579, pl. li. fig. 1.

Of this species, recently described from a specimen received
alive from Port Hamilton, Corea, by the Zoological Society,
two specimens, male and female, from the Ussuri River, are
in Hr. Dorries’s collection. It is easily distinguished from
Hf. arborea by the much larger and more prominent metatarsal
tubercle. I give the following measurements of the two
specimens :—

Ete
millim. millim.

iromusnoutatOnventiarcie sisi mecie: 385 40
Dength of head iva cre aeeiecte sles 12 13
Wiadithiot heads .cc ct cseepet tetas eater 13 15
Diameter of the tympanum .......... 2 3
Fore dani y 2 Was eics ce cic ie eens ios coe 20 93
ind: Limb Ved ie cece tone sik 51 57
CUD a yale asic oo es Re Eee iis toate 1165) 17
MEN GEOE, eirs Ee co octane eI na aoe 4 4

Inner metatarsal tubercle ............ 25 D5

Reptiles and Batrachians of Amoorland. 143

18. Bombinator orientalis. (Pl. IX. fig. 2.)

The Oriental form for which I propose the above name
agrees with B. pachypus in the proportions of the limbs and
the absence of gular sacs, and with B. ‘gneus in the absence
of nuptial excrescences on the toes and the red colour of the
lower parts. Nineteen specimens are in the British Museum,

viz. -—

1-1l. $9, nupt. temp. Chefoo. Swinhoe.
12-15. § 9, nupt. temp. N. China. A. Adams.
16. 2. S.E. coast of Corea. A. Carpenter.
17-19. g¢ 2, nupt. temp. Chabarowka. Dorries.

Measurements.

Chefoo. Chabarowka.

7 —"——.

G. 2. 3. OF

millim. millim. millim. millim.

TOMESNO Ut LOLVeNU aay cere 52 46 36 40
Von dir ter cet wea ec CR eee cen ee 16 14 1H) 13
Wvaiolinat OF WEEVOls Gog 566060 b eb ue Gon 18 16 13 13
Hone limb cette an ptt rr viene 26 23 20 20
etinrGelimib ie eytecieeitys eee si crecusion tr. 61 55 49 59
SRT OEE}. Py Ber erdset cae Se a cee a na 18 16 15 15
Foot, from inner metatarsal tubercle 16 15 14 14

The upper surfaces are usually as coarsely warty as in B.
pachypus. As in BG. igneus, the upper parts are always
spotted or marbled with darker and show no trace of the four
light spots of B. pachypus; the ground-colour varies from
a dull olive with few and somewhat ill-defined darker spots
to a bright green handsomely spotted or marbled with deep
black. Lower parts blood-red, spotted or marbled with deep
black, usually neither of the two colours predominating ; no
white dots on the belly ; tips of fingers and toes red.

The distinctive characters of the three species of Bombi-
nator may be analysed as follows :—

Gular ‘Nuys Belly Tips of

Crus. Ae excres- at aa
sacs. ones more digits.
1. qneus.... ‘Shorter than Present. | Nose as Black.
foot. tens Red,
2. orientalis At least as : ale
long as Absent. Bright.
3. pachypus.. foot. On toes. Yellow.

144 M. E. Penard’s Notes on some Heliozoa.

From this analysis we see that B. ordentalis, although
intermediate between B. cgneus and B. pachypus, is on the
whole nearer the latter. So far as we know, the enormous
area separating the habitats of B. dgneus * and B. orientalis
does not seem to be tenanted by any form of the genus Bom-
binator or any other Discoglossoid.

CAUDATA.

19. Salamandrella Keyserlingit.

Dybowski, Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien, 1870, p. 287, pl. vii.
Isodactylium Schrenckii, Strauch, Salam. p. 56, pl. i. fig. 1.

Lake Baikal, Schilka and Ussuri Rivers. Specimens from
Chabarowka are in Hr. Dorries’s collection.

20. Geomolge Fischert.
Bouleng. P. Z. 8. 1886, p. 416, pl. xxxix. fig. 2.
The only specimens known of this very remarkable Sala-

mandroid are the two types obtained by Hr. Dorries at
Chabarowka.

XVIII.—Notes on some Heliozoa. By M. Hua. Prenarp F.

THE Heliozoa are most frequently met with in the fresh water
of pools, peat-mosses, and brooks. Although these organisms
were observed during the last century (Joblot, O. F. Miller,
Eichhorn) it is only within about thirty years that they have
been well known. Classed for a long time with the Infu-
soria, they were grouped by Hiickel in 1866 into a special
subclass. By their particularly elegant forms and their whole
organization the Heliozoa, by showing us to what degree of
differentiation a simple Rhizopod may attain, fully deserve
the interest which has attached to them, and it is to them that
I would for a moment call attention.

These animals are in reality only Rhizopods; but while in

* Not recorded east of the Ural. 3B. pachypus, which inhabits the
plain in the west of Europe, appears to be exclusively a hill-form in the
east; it is not known from Russia.

+ Communicated to the Société de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle de
Genéve, 3rd October, 1889; Bibl. Univ., ‘Archives des Sciences Physiques
et Naturelles,’ tome xxii. pp. 523-539,

M. E. Penard’s Notes on some Heliozoa. 145

their near Ameebiform relatives the tendency towards per-
fection is in general directed to the acquisition of a rigid
capsule open at one point to allow the passage of the pseudo-
podia, as is seen in the carapaces of the Difflugiv, Arcelle,
Euglyphe, &c., in the Heliozoa we may say that this ten-
dency has led towards the possession of a coat of mail sur-
rounding the whole body, and from which issue in all
directions long radiating pseudopodia.

The external envelope, however, in some of them still
consists only of a thick layer of hyaline plasma, which, in
the Actinophrydians, is marked by large vacuoles ; in others
(Lithocolla) this hyaline layer is covered with stones derived
from the medium in which the animal lives; in the Clathru-
(ine we find an elegant solid trellis-work, formed throughout
by the individual and pierced on all sides; but in the
majority of the species we meet with a true coat of mail, the
mobile elements of which, siliceous scales and spicules, are
buried in the external mucilaginous layer which has just been
mentioned,

The pseudopodia are always remarkable for their fineness,
their rigidity, and their length; in this respect they differ
at the first glance from those of the Amceban Rhizopods,
whether naked or testaceous, although in some of the latter
(Euglypha, Trinema, Cyphoderia, &c.) they may also be
very long, very fine, and comparatively rigid.

All the true Heliozoa have at least one nucleus, sometimes
two, or even more, but in general unity is the rule ; Acééno-
spherium Hichhornit, on the other hand, constantly contains
a considerable number, up to one hundred or more.

This nucleus likewise always possesses what has been
called a vesicular structure, which also occurs among the
Amcebe ; passing from the centre towards the periphery, it
consists of a voluminous central body, surrounded by a thicker
or thinner zone of hyaline substance (the nuclear fluid), liquid
in appearance, and in its turn bounded by a true nuclear mem-
brane, rather thick in the Actinophrydians and very delicate
in the other Heliozoa. As to the central mass of the nucleus,
generally regarded as the nucleolus, it is most frequently
simple; but sometimes we find it divided into several frag-
ments immersed in the nuclear fluid.

The nucleus, taken as a whole, is central in some species,
excentric in the majority, but it always belongs nevertheless
to that part of the plasma which has been called endosare, to
distinguish it from a generally less homogeneous, more

fo)
granular zone, which, however, is often absent or impossible

146 M. E. Penard’s Notes on some Heliozoa.

to distinguish from the former, and to which the name of
ectosare is given.

In this brief general description of the Heliozoa we may
mention lastly the more or less numerous vacuoles which
appear and disappear irregularly in the mass of the
plasma, and the more differentiated contractile vesicle, which
probably is not deficient in any Heliozoon. ‘This vesicle pre-
sents phenomena of diastole and systole, slowly increasing
in volume and then suddenly contracting. Frequently we
only see one of them; but I have remarked that even in the
species which normally have only a single one we may always
expect to find individuals which have several ; thus the num-
ber of the contractile vesicles, in my opinion, is only of very
secondary value in the determination of species.

I wish at present to treat only of some points in the anatomy
of the Heliozoa and of some still imperfectly known pheno-
mena in the life of these animals. In fact at Wiesbaden, a
locality which has proved to be very rich both in species and
individuals, I have had the opportunity of studying most of
the forms which have hitherto been described, and my obser-
vations have been made upon a number of individuals so con-
siderable that I have been able to arrive at conclusions
deserving of some interest.

In the first place I shall say a few words upon the protec-
tive covering of certain typical forms. In Acétnophrys sol it
is the vacuolized ectosare which performs the part of the enve-
lope; the body is surrounded by a layer of vesicles, which,
by their mutual pressure, often form a regular pattern of cells
with the walls formed simply of hyaline plasma. In Actino-
spherium Lichhorni the case is again the same, but the layer
of cells is more regular, so that, under a low power, the ecto-
sare appears like a wide clear band traversed by radiating
strie, these striae only representing the walls of the cells.

If now we pass at once from the Actinophrydians to the
ereat family of the Acanthocystide we find a very different
structure. ‘The central mass of the body is still surrounded
by a mucilaginous envelope, but without vacuoles ; and this
envelope itself seems to be doubled, the narrow inner zone
remaining homogeneous and clear, the outer one contaimmng
a considerable number of small tangential scales, which are
sufficiently close together to lead to the belief in a continuous
membrane, or may even overlie one another; besides these
tangential scales we find, immersed in this external zone of
the envelope, the bases of the radial spicules to which we shall
refer hereafter.

M. E. Penard’s Notes on some Heliozoa. 147

Now most authors, who, it must be said, seem to have the
idea only of a continuous membrane where there are in reality
only free scales plunged in a mucilage, have regarded either
this membrane or the narrow clear zone of plasma which lies
immediately within it as a sort of exudation of the central
plasma of no particular importance; and as, on the other
hand, this central plasma is really often seen split into two
concentric zones, the two latter have, in the Acanthocystide,
been denominated the ecto- and endosare.

In my opinion we have here a confusion. In fact I have
been able to ascertain that the skeletal mucilaginous zone is
perfectly active, and behaves physiologically—for example,
during the capture of prey—like the vacuolized ectosare of
Actinophrys. I should therefore be inclined to regard it as
the true ectosarc. It is true that this opinion is open to
dispute; but as I have referred to it at greater length else-
where *, [I shall not dwell upon it here; moreover the
sequel of this communication will contain some explanations
of this point.

Let us return to the skeleton properly so called, to the
siliceous spicules, and take as an example one of the largest
species, Acanthocystis turfacea, Carter, which is best fitted
for observation.

The skeleton of a typical and adult Acanthocystis turfacea
is composed of siliceous elements of three forms :—

a. Of thick, very short, tangential scales, giving rise by
their combination one after the other to the appearance of a
continuous membrane ;

b. Of large radial spicules, bifurcate at the apex, and ter-
minated like nail-heads at the base, nearly equalling in length
the diameter of the animal itself; and

ce. Of smaller radial spicules, exceedingly fine, widely bifur-
cated at the apex, intercalated among the large spicules.

The structure of these spicules is not well known, and
therefore | may venture to dwell upon them for a moment.
Having had the opportunity of observing a great number of
individuals of different ages, I have in the first place ascer-
tained certain points, which may be summed up as follows:—

a. The long spicules of Acanthocystis turfacea are thicker,
more definite, and longer in proportion as the animal is older.

b. In the young we see only the stem of the spicule, which
is fine and not well detined; the nail-head-of the base and
the fork at the apex are not visible (do not exist ?).

* ¢ Archives de Biologie,’ tome ix. (1889),

148 M. E. Penard’s Notes on some Heliozoa.

c. The chief body of the spicule is already perfectly
distinct when the base and the head are still scarcely so.

d. In the adult the base and the fork at the apex always
remain more indistinct than the body of the stem; the fork,
of a dull blue colour, is, as it were, implanted upon the stem,
which seems as if truneated behind the bifurcation.

e. The body of the spicule perfectly resists concentrated
sulphuric acid, as also ared heat, while the head and the base
disappear ; but after the action of these reagents the spicule
is then traversed in this species by a central line, which is
brownish by refraction and seems to show that it is hollow,
as indeed Greeff has already stated.

jf. The spicule, especially when young, seems to be covered
with a very fine mucilaginous varnish. This may be inferred
from the appearances in the living animal, then after simple
desiccation, and finally in glycerine, or from the effects pro-
duced by the action of an acid.

From these observations, checked by others made upon
three different species (Acanthocystis aculeata, erinaceus, and
albida) which have given me the same results, I think it is
permissible to draw the following conclusion :—‘ The spicules
of the Acanthocystides are clothed, at least during the time
of their growth, with a mucilaginous varnish, within which
they are formed. Their growth takes place at the same time
at the base and at the apex.”

I may add that, having found in January last in one of
my bottles a great quantity of young individuals belonging
to Acanthocystis albida, sp. nov., and examined them from
time to time, at each observation I found their radial spicules
more vigorous, so that in three months their thickness and
length were nearly double what they were at the first obser-
vation ; later on these animals remained stationary and died
in water which no longer furnished them with food. As
there is scarcely any doubt that I had constantly to do with
the same generation, we must infer from this that these
animals took three months at least to arrive at the adult
state, and that their life is consequently tolerably long.

Another point in the physiology of the Heliozoa which is
still obscure regards the movements of the animal, and leads
me to say a few words on the pseudopodia.

Here again we find a well-marked difference between the
Actinophrydians, that is to say the genera Actinophrys and
Actinospherium on the one hand, and the rest of the Heliozoa
on the other. ‘The pseudopodia of Acéténophrys consist of a
hyaline axial thread, which, however, is rarely visible,

M. E. Penard’s Notes on some Helitozoa. 149

covered by a layer of greyish plasma, rather thick at the base
and very fine at the apex of the pseudopodium, and in which
regular but very slow movements of granules have been
recognized. The axial thread, which may be seen even in
the interior of the inner plasma of the animal, where it abuts
against the nuclear membrane, presents the curious pheno-
menon that under certain circumstances it may completely
dissolve and disappear from sight, to reappear an instant
afterwards. Hitherto we have not succeeded in explaining
this phenomenon; some authors have imagined an actual
retreat, in which the thread would roll up upon itself, but
this attempt at an explanation cannot be sustained, for besides
that one would easily see the thread in the rolled-up state, I
have several times in compressed specimens witnessed the
slow dissolution of this thread, the outlines of which, gradu-
ally losing their distinctness at the same time throughout the
whole length of the thread, finally disappeared completely at
the same time that the pseudopodium became Amoeboid.
Perhaps we have here only what may be called a voluntary
and facultative hardening of the axis of the pseudopodium, re-
sembling what takes place at the surface of the body of the
Ameoebe and other Protozoa in which the ectosare is viscous
or, on the contrary, resistant and non-glutinous at will.

The pseudopodia in their entirety present very interesting
phenomena ; at one moment rigid and elastic, like steel wires,
they will become all at once soft and indifferent, without,
however, always changing their form; exposed to a shock
(produced, for example, by a violent stream of water), they
will retract themselves suddenly into a single mass, to push
out again in a few minutes and attain a length double that of
the body. The pseudopodia of Actinosphertum, shorter rela-
tively to the diameter of the animal, are absolutely similar to
those of Actinophrys, as indeed is the case with the whole
animal, which differs so little from the latter, that I have often
been tempted to derive it from a simple colony of Acténo-
phrys, but a colony fixed as such in the sequence of genera-
tions and resembling the colonial Radiolaria.

As to the pseudopodia of the <Acanthocystides, they are
distinguished from those which we have just been considering
by a much more considerable fineness and at the same time
by a much greater comparative length. They are composed
ot a rigid thread, upon which are sprinkled small granules of
grey plasma, united to each other no doubt by a sort of proto-
plasmic varnish. The granules, with the varnish, would then
represent the greyish covering of the pseudopodia of Actino-

150 M. E. Penard’s Notes on some Heltozoa.

phrys. As to the rigid threads, they have been seen to
traverse the body of the animal and to converge towards a
common centre, where there was a central granule brightly
stained by carmine.

In other respects the pseudopodia of the Acanthocystides
present the same phenomena as those of Actinophrys ; they
are rigid or soft according to circumstances, and they retract
suddenly upon themselves during the passage of a stream of
water, forming globules like those of a thread of glass exposed
to a flame.

It is by means of these long pseudopodia that the Heliozoa
move upon the mud or run over aquatic plants. The Actino-
phrydians, however, most frequently appear motionless ; but
sometimes, for example when acolony breaks up, the individuals
are animated bya perceptible movement; we then see that they
pull upon their anterior pseudopodia, the points of which they
have stuck to the soil, while the posterior ones drag behind,
become elongated by ‘traction, and finish by detaching them-
selves and shortening. The lateral pseudopodia, also fixed
to the soil by their ‘points, likewise drag a little behind, so
that from the general appearance of the animal we can foresee
the point at which it will finally arrive.

As to the Acanthocystides, the movements of which are
sometimes so rapid that they traverse in one minute a course
equal to ten or twelve times their diameter, I have succeeded
after a very careful examination in explaining them in the
following manner :—'The animal, resting on its pseudopodia
like a cursorial spider upon its legs, throws out in front some
of these pseudopodia ; these attach themselves to the soil by
their points, which are at the moment viscous and perhaps
also slightly dilated into heads; then, stiffening, they draw
the animal towards them ; the body, while advancing slightly,
turns a little upon itself from behind forwards, probably be-
cause the cords or pseudopodia which drag it originate above
the equator of the animal ; new pseudopodia, always antero-
superior, then attach themselves by their points in front of
the former ones and stiffen in their turn. This movement
continuing and the anterior cords pulling while the posterior
ones detach themselves one aiter the other, often with a small
sudden sheck, and the lateral ones seeming to steady the whole,
the animal progresses by rolling continually over and over, 50
that, by transmitted light, we see all the excentric elements,
prey or granules, contained within the body traverse this
body in a straight line, at first from behind forward and then
from in front backwards. It must be remarked that during
Jocomotisn the body appears to turn much too slowly rela-

M. E. Penard’s Notes on some Heliozoa. Tot

tively to the distance travelled—that is to say that, instead of
traversing a space equal to about three times its diameter in a
complete turn, it is not until after executing a much longer
passage that a complete revolution has been made ; this is
because the sphere which may be imagined as circumscribing
the animal is not represented by the body itself, but rather
by the extremities of the pseudopodia.

Such, according to my observations, is the process of loco-
motion in the Heliozoa; and this explanation would confirm
the opinion of Hertwig and Lesser, who, in a memoir, of
which, however, I had no knowledge until long after arriving
at my own conclusions, have described a Heliozoon as “ rolling
after the fashion of a ball and by the contraction of the
pseudopodia.”’

The pseudopodia of the Heliozoa, besides their functions as
locomotive organs, also play a certain part in the capture of
prey. In Actinophrys the little organisms which have fallen
among the pseudopodia as into a spider’s web glide along
these threads until they arrive quite close to the body, at the
same time that a portion of plasma issuing from the ectosarc
advances to meet them, encloses them, and keeps them ne
whole hours in a large vacuole full of liquid, in which they
are digested. The pseudopodia themselves may be active in
so far that they bend round the captured prey and draw it on ;
but this fact, although certain, is much more rare than is
generally supposed.

In the Acanthocystides the phenomenon of the capture of
prey is still more interesting, and is at present known only in
its broad features. After having studied it in half a dozen
species I can describe it as follow s, again taking Acantho-
cystis turfacea as an example.

When a small organism, such as a Monad for example,
comes in its course in contact with an Acanthocystis, the
radial spicules of the latter separate and lie down, at the same
time that a depression is formed at the spot upon which the
prey has fallen; the bases of the spicules then change their
position, moving in the very body of the mucilaginous layer
which bears them, and gain the margins of the depression,
where the spicules are soon seen accumulated i in disorder; the
tangential scales do the same, and the whole mucilaginous
mass separates, thus leaving an opening in which the prey
finally comes into direct contact with the imterior body or so-
called ectosare of the Acanthocystis. At this moment the
withdrawn mucilage begins to show an active movement all
round the Monad, and finally englobes it completely ; the
spicules ascend on their part, and the tangential scales, com-

152 M. E. Penard’s Notes on some Heliozoa.

pletely immersed in the mucilage, arrive at the top before the
radial spicules, although after the complete closure of the
mucilaginous arch. It is very interesting to see the scales
advance, one after the other, in this hyaline envelope, in which
they seem to swim, as it were in midwater, as if by a move-
ment proper to them ; the radial spicules, having their base
only immersed in this envelope, appear to have more resist-
ance to overcome and arrive at the top more slowly; never-
theless they reach it, and, after a moment of contusion, resume
their relative positions, and the Acanthocystis is then again
completely covered by its coat of mail, and an observer
coming upon it at this moment might wonder by what means
so large a prey could have penetrated beneath the membrane.
The whole phenomenon scarcely lasts more than a minute.

As to the kind of nourishment of the Heliozoa, this is
variable according to the medium; we see some which are
stuffed with microscopic Algee, Diatomez, Desmidiex, Ke. ;
but in general they seem to prefer to capture small animals,
Monads, Vorticelle, Rotifera, &c. Actinophrys, in particular,
consumes an incredible number of the latter, and does not
always capture them without trouble.

There is much more to be said upon the physiology and
constitution of the Heliozoa. Ihave not mentioned the bodies
of different nature contained in the internal plasma, such as
grains of starch, chlorophyll, &c., nor the phenomena of
multiplication (fission, conjugation, budding, spores), nor the
siliceous cysts into which the animals withdraw, nor the
colonies which certain species like to form. All this would
lead us rather too far*. I prefer at present to add a few
words upon certain organisms which may show us points of
approximation between the Heliozoa on the one hand and
the Monera, Amcebe, and even the Flagellata on the other.

The first of these organisms is Vampyrella spirogyre of
Cienkowski. Hiickel has classed the Vampyrelle among the
Monera, or Rhizopods destitute alike of nucleus and of con-
tractile vesicle; of late, indeed, very numerous grains of chro-
matine or of nuclear substance have been discovered in several
organisms which had previously passed as devoid of nucleus ;

* I would nevertheless revert to certain very brilliant blue grains,
sometimes very large, enclosed within the body of the Acanthocystides,
the signification of which I have discussed in the second part of my
memoir on the Heliozoa (Arch. de Biologie, tome ix.), For some time
I have come to the conclusion that we had to do here simply with grains
of starch. Now, a few days ago, having opened a glycerime-preparation
in which I preserved one of these large grains, I treated the latter with
iodine, and saw it immediately acquire a fine violet colour, It is there-
fore starch, and my first suppositions were erroneous.

M. E. Penard’s Notes on some Heltozoa. 153

and in some individual Vampyrelle it appears that Zopf has
found a true nucleus. But Hiickel’s classification still retains
a great systematic value. As regards the Vampyrelle, I do
not know whether the authors who have made them Heliozoa
(e.g. Biitschli, in his fine work on the Protozoa) have not
attached too great importance to mere external resemblances.

Vampyrella spirogyre, in its normal state, is a small Rhi-
zopod otf about 40 micromillimetres in diameter, spherical, of
a fine brick-red colour, devoid of nucleus and contractile
vesicle, but containing in its ectosare a great quantity of
small non-contractile vacuoles. From the exterior radiate a
considerable number of pseudopodia, some long and covered
with granules, the others very short and as if terminated by
pins’ heads, the last appearance being due to the fact that,
especially when the animal is progressing, very small hyaline
spheres run constantly over these pseudopodia, seeming posi-
tively to be thrown out by the animal and to fall again imme-
diately at the very point from which they were expelled.
The phenomenon of these little balls springing up on all sides
is so extraordinary that when I had this species under my
eyes for the first time I thought I could not do better than
name it provisionally the “Vampirelle jongleuse;”’ subse-
quently I found that it had been described and even bore two
names— Vampyrella lateritia in consequence of its colour, and
Vampyrella spirogyre, after the plant from which it prefers to
obtain its nourishment.

It is upon the manner in which this species acts in order to
empty the cells of the Spdrogyre that I wish to say a few
words here; in fact my observations have led me to an
explanation different from that usually given. The Vampy-
rella is said to pierce a hole in acell of Spirogyra and to
introduce into it a pseudopodium, the business of which is to
search the contents of the cell. For my part this is how I
can describe the phenomenon which I have observed
repeatedly, always arriving at the same conclusions :—The
Vampyrella attaches itself to a cell of Spiregyra, retracts its
pseudopodia, except a few by which it adheres to the Alga,
and then moulds itself to the cell upon a portion of its sur-
face, and becomes motionless. For a moment nothing takes
place ; then we see the attached zone rise up into an arch in
the interior, the margins remaining firmly attached and formed
into a ring; the arch gradually rises, and suddenly the wall
of the Alga bursts, the cell-juice of the Spirogyra passes in
a violent stream into the Vampyrella; the greyish plasma of
the cell passes in its turn more slowly, with the green chro-
matophore, which is seen to glide in a mass ; the cell is com-

154 M. E. Penard’s Notes on some Heliozoa.

pletely emptied, the Vampyrella emits pseudopodia, becomes
detached, and moves away, leaving a very visible rupture in
the empty cell. It then often goes to the next cell, or even
to a third, and, having emptied these in the same manner
and become greatly enlarged, it encysts itself. At this
moment it has lost its brick-red tint, which is at the utmost
visible here and there in spots in the greenish mass with
which its body is stuffed. Later on it will divide within its
cyst into several embryos, which will pierce a hole and issue
one after the other, already clothed in their fine red colour.

To return to the nutrition of the Vampyrella: this is
effected, in my opinion, by a true phenomenon of suction, the
whole body of the animal acting as a sucking-cup; what
would seem to be opposed to this view is that the cell of the
Alga as it is emptied does not flatten under the pressure of
the surrounding liquid; but it 1s possible that the cell, as it
loses its original contents, gets filled with water through the
partition which separates it from the following cell, or even
through the whole of its own wall.

Another organism to which I wish to call attention is a new
form of Heliozoon which I have met with this summer in
considerable abundance, but only on one occasion. The
body, which is very small (about 15 micros) and of a reddish
tint, is normally spherical, but is subject to very rapid defor-
mations of considerable amount, though always tolerably
thickset and retaining its distinct outline; the ectosare, a thin
lighter band, is traversed by a line of very small tangential
spicules, but has no radiating ones; the pseudopodia, which
are hyaline, sparingly eranular, excessively long, filiform, and
thicker at the base than at the apex, are in very ‘small number.
The animal runs like a spider by means of its pseudopodia,
leaping to one side or straight forward with surprising agility,
so that it progresses almost as rapidly asa Flagellate. It has
sometimes appeared to me even to swim freely in the water,
and can at any rate beat with its pseudopodia, which, how-
ever, have nothing to do with real flagella. This organis:
possesses an excentric nucleus in a clear endosare, and a con-
tractile vesicle. ‘There is no doubt that itis a true Heliozoon,
which resembles some Amebe in the plasticity of its body
and in the nature and restricted number of its pseudopodia
(Ameba radiosa).

Lastly, I have a few words to say upon another organism
which | also found in abundance this summer at Wiesbaden,
but only in a single locality. It is a true Monad, spherical,
of small size (10-15 micros), with two very clear flagella
which I have often seen beating and drawing food into a

Mr. G. E. Dobson on a new Species of Sorex. 155

depression or mouth opening near their base. But what
distinguishes this Protozoon from the Flagellata in general is
the possession of numerous filiform, rigid, straight pseudo-
podia covered with granulations, n fact Sloe to those of
the Acanthocystides, and by means of which the animal
attaches itself to the ground and moves slowly. This
organism is furnished with a central nucleus and a contractile
vesicle, and ean feed equally by the whole of its surface, after
the fashion of the Heliozoa. Although this Protistan must
be regarded as a Flagellate, it seemed to me to be of interest
to mention it here, as it appears to have acquired certain
elements characteristic of a very different group of Protozoa.

XIX.—Description of a new Species of Sorex from Saghalien
Island. By G. E. Doxsson, M.A., F.R.S.

THE following description of the largest species of the genus
Sorex as yet known to inhabit the Hastern Hemisphere is
derived from an examination of four specimens, two adult
females preserved in alcohol and two skins with skulls, which
form part of the collection of the Zoological Museum of the
Imperial Academy of Sciences at St. Petersburg.

Sorex unguiculatus.

Larger than Sorex alpinus, but with a considerably shorter
tail, and distinguished from every known species of the genus
by the extraordinarily large size of the manus and its claws,
which have their parallel ouly in Croctdura macropus. In
the shape of the head, body, and tail this species resembles
S. vulgaris; the tail is clothed evenly with short, rather stiff
hairs, which do not form a pencil at the extremity ; the fur
is dark brown above, on the under surface the extremities of
the hairs are ashy ; the dorsal surface of the manus is clothed
with a few short, shining, grey hairs, but the digits are
naked and the rings of integ ument are divided into tubercles,
not entire as in S. “yulgart ts.

The manus and pes are very large, especially the former,
which greatly exceeds that of S. vu/gards both in breadth and
in length, the claws of the three middle digits being nearly as
long as the digits without claws; on the other hand those of
the digits of the pes are not unusually large.

The skull differs altogether from that of S. vadgarts in its

156 Rev. J. T. Gulick on Divergent Evolution

much greater width between the mastoid processes and also in
the proportions of the teeth.
The second incisor is the most
vertically extended and largest
of the upper unicuspidate teeth,
presenting in this respect a
character almost peculiar to
the species; the third uni-
cuspidate tooth is about the
same size as the second, but
considerably exceeds the fourth unicuspidate tooth in vertical
extent ; the penultimate premolar stands in the tooth-row and
is nearly as large asin S. alpinus. ‘These are the characters of
the teeth in the four specimens available for examination ;
but, owing to all being examples of full-grown animals, the
cusps are more or less worn, so that it is impossible to give
their exact relative size.

The following are the measurements of an adult female
specimen preserved in alcohol:—Length, head and body 68
millim.; tail 53; eye from end of muzzle 12; ear, length 7;
elbow to end of middle digit, without claw, 20; manus to
extremity of middle claw 11; ditto, without claw, 8}; pes
14; distance between tips of first upper incisor and last pre-
molar 5.

Hab. Saghalien Island; Nikolajewsk, at the mouth of the
Amur River.

Type, an adult female, No. 1535, preserved in alcohol in
the St. Petersburg Museum, collected by Dr. L. von Schrenck.

This species by its dentition belongs to that section of the
genus characterized by the large size of the penultimate pre-
molar, which also stands in the tooth-row, and of which S.
alpinus and S. minutus are typical; but it differs, as above
remarked, from all known species in the remarkably large
size of the manus and its claws.

XX.—Divergent Evolution and the Darwinian Theory.
By Rev. Joun T. Guuick, Ph.D.*

In a paper on “ Divergent Evolution through Cumulative
Segregation ” (Journ, Linn. Soc., Zoology, vol. xx. pp. 189-
274) I have endeavoured to show that selection, whether
natural or artificial, is a process that has no tendency to pro-
duce divergent evolution, unless different sections of one

* From the ‘ American Journal of Science,’ January 1890, pp. 21-30.

and the Darwinian Theory. 157

original stock are subjected to different forms of selection,
while at the same time some cause prevents free crossing
between the different sections. We now inquire whether
Darwin has made us acquainted with any cause or combina-
tion of causes that, without the aid of man, produces diversity
of selection and at the same time the independent generation
of the different classes of variations thus preserved.

Darwin discusses the causes of natural selection more fully
than the causes of diversity of natural selection. He does not
speak of uniformity and diversity of natural selection, but of
the individuals of the same species living under the same ex-
ternal conditions as being modified in the same way, and of
those living under dissimilar external conditions as being
modified in different ways. Again, he speaks of “ the diver-
gent tendency of natural selection,” resulting from “ the
principle of benefit being derived from divergence of cha-
racter,”’ as explaining divergence of character in the members
of one species competing with each other on a common area.
How the contradictions in the two statements are to be recon-
ciled, and how, in the second case, the unifying influence of
free crossing is prevented, he does not show, so far as I can
discover. As the subject is of the highest importance in the
explanation of divergent evolution, and as it is specially
desirable to get as clear an understanding as possible of Dar-
win’s method of explanation, I shall consider his reasoning

somewhat fully.

Same Degree of Local Separation under Different Environ-
ments.

Darwin often speaks of the influence of crossing in retarding
or preventing the formation of new races and species; but,
from the following extracts from his ‘ Origin of Species,’ it
will be seen that it is not quite so clear what combination of
causes he considered necessary for the production of two or
more species from one original species. ‘lhe obscurity in his
statements results, I think, from the fact that “a new species ”
may be one that has been formed by monotypic transforma-
tion, the old form disappearing with the production of the new,
or it may be one that has arisen through polytypic transform-
ation, which is the modification of one branch of the species,
while other branches remain either unmodified or modified in
other ways. For the formation of a new species, in the
former meaning of the word, he evidently did not consider it
necessary that the species or any part of it should enter a new

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 12

158 Rey. J. T. Gulick on Divergent Evolution

environment or that crossing should be prevented. But did
he not consider both these conditions necessary for the forma-
tion of two or more species from one original species ?

He says, ‘Intercrossing will affect those animals most
which unite for each birth and wander much, and which do
not breed at a very quick rate. Hence with animals of this
nature, for instance birds, varieties will generally be confined
to different countries; and this I find to be the case. With
hermaphrodite organisms which cross only occasionally, and
likewise with animals which unite for each birth but which
wander little and can increase at a very rapid rate, a new and
improved variety might be quickly formed on any one spot, and
might there maintain itself in a body and afterward spread, so
that the crossing would be chiefly between the individuals of
the new variety living together in the same place... .

‘Even in the case of animals which breed slowly and
unite for each birth, we must not assume that the effects of
natural selection will always be immediately overpowered by
free intercrossing ; for I can bring a considerable body of
facts showing that within the same area varieties of the same
animal may long remain distinct, from haunting different
stations, from breeding at slightly different seasons, or from
varieties of the same kind preferring to pair together... .

“Tsolation also is an important element in the changes
effected through natural selection. Jn a confined or isolated
area, if not very large, the organic and inorganic conditions of
life will be almost uniform ; so that natural selection will tend
to modify all the varying individuals of the same species in the
same manner. Intercrossing with the inhabitants of the sur-
rounding districts will also be prevented. Morita Wagner
has lately published an interesting essay on this subject, and
has shown that the service rendered by isolation in preventing
crosses between newly formed varieties is probably greater
even than I have supposed. But, from reasons already
assigned, I can by no means agree with this naturalist that
migration and isolation are necessary for the formation of new
species.” [‘ Origin of Species,’ fifth edition *, Chapter 1V.,
Section on *‘ Circumstances favourable for the Production of
New Forms through Natural Selection.’’]

Again, in the same chapter, in the section on “ Various
Objections,” in answer to the question ‘‘ How, on the principle
of natural selection, can a variety live side by side with the
parent-species ?” he replies, “It both have become fitted for
slightly different habits of life or conditions they might live

* The same passages occur in the sixth edition, pp. 80, 81.

and the Darwinian Theory. 159

together, though in the case of animals which freely cross and
wander much about varieties seem to be almost alway ys con=
Jined to distinct localities. But if we put on one side poly-
morphic species, in which the variability seems to be of a
peculiar nature, and all mere temporary variations, such as
size, albinism, &c., the more permanent varieties are generally
found, as far as I can judge, inhabiting distinct stations,
high land om low land, dry or moist districts, or distinct
regions”? *,

In the portions of these passages which I have distinguished
by italics Darwin seems clearly to maintain that for the for-
mation of coexistent permanent varieties some degree of local
separation is necessary. I therefore conclude that when he
says he cannot regard migration and isolation as necessary
for the formation of new species he intends to express, in
opposition to Moritz Wagner, the opinion that a species may
be transformed into a new species without leaving its original
locality, but that he does not intend to say that two or more
divergent species can arise in the same locality from the same
stock. If I interpret him rightly he considers the partial
separation described in the first of the paragraphs just quoted
as sufficient to allow of the formation of divergent species,
when the external conditions of the separate “districts are
sufficiently different and sufficiently permanent to secure long-
continued divergent natural selection. ‘That the second para-
graph is to be interpreted in accord with this meaning I judge
from the fact that natural selection is mentioned here as the
cause of the divergence which crossing tends to overpower,
and in the third paragraph uniformity in the environment is
represented as ensuring uniform natural selection. ‘The
varieties that are restrained from crossing with each other by
diverse times and habits of breeding he must regard some-
times as slightly divergent forms tending to disappear under
the pressure of uniform natural selection, and therefore never
becoming separate species, though one of them may prevail
and be established as a new species, and sometimes as forms
that are becoming more and more divergent, because they
have found their way into districts or stations where they are
somewhat separated from each other, and where the conditions
are somewhat different, and the natural selection, therefore,
somewhat diversive.

If this is not his meaning, if he intends to teach that forms
arising in one place and not locally separated from each other
can continue to diverge till they become separate species,

* In the sixth edition this passage will be found, slightly modified, in
Chapter VII. p. 169,
Js

160 Rey. J. T. Gulick on Divergent Evolution

how can he say on the next page that forms isolated ina small
area, being exposed to uniform conditions, would be modified
by natural selection in a uniform manner? He evidently
coes not intend to be understood as teaching that in these
cases mentioned in the second paragraph there is a cause of
divergent evolution which produces separate varieties and
species in spite of the unifying influence of natural selection
resulting from uniform conditions.

Darwin's Theory of Natural Selection through the Advantage
of Divergence of Character.

There is, however, one passage in the ‘ Origin of Species’
which may be interpreted as assigning a cause for divergence
of character in representatives of the same species that are
surrounded by the same environment. These are the words:—
“Only those variations which are in some way profitable will
be preserved or naturally selected. And here the importance
of the principle of benefit being derived from divergence of
character comes in; for this will generally lead to the most
different or divergent variations being preserved and accumu-
lated by natural selection.” (‘Origin of Species,’ Chap. IV.
first page of the section on the “ Probable Results of the
Action of Natural Selection, through Divergence of Character
and Extinction, on the Descendants of a Common Ancestor.”
In the sixth edition this passage occurs on pp. 90-91.) The
connexion in which this passage stands seems to indicate that
“the benefit derived from the divergence of character ’’ is con-
sidered the cause of “ the most different or divergent variations
being preserved and accumulated by natural selection,” even in
the case of the representatives of the same species that are com-
peting with each other on the same area, and are in no way
prevented from intercrossing. It is therefore necessary to
show the difficulties that beset such a theory, especially if we
adhere to the more general theory that diversity in the kinds
of natural selection affecting a species must be due to differ-
ences in the environments by which it is surrounded.

In the first place natural selection, which is the superior
propagation of those best adapted to the environment, prevents
the interbreeding of the adapted forms that propagate with
the unadapted that fail of propagating ; but it can never pre-
vent the interbreeding of those forms which, through different
kinds of adaptation to the environment, survive and propa-
gate, and therefore it can have no influence in producing
accumulated divergence, unless it is supplemented by some
gegregative principle that prevents the different kinds of adap-

and the Darwinian Theory. 161

tations from being interfused. In the second place, as long
as we follow Darwin’s explanation of the causes of natural
selection, we must hold that the representatives of one species
while surrounded by the same environment, whether prevented
from intercrossing or not, will, through the uniform action of
natural selection, be modified in the same way, if at all, and,
while surrounded by distinct and dissimilar environments,
will be modified in divergent ways; but in this latter case, as
they will be prevented from competing with each other by
occupying different areas, they can derive no advantage from
divergence of character through its preventing competition ;
therefore the divergence that follows must be attributed to
some other cause. In other words, the advantage attributed
by Darwin to divergence of character is freedom from com-
petition, through diversity of adaptation, and, as some degree
of prevention of crossing is necessary for permanent difference
in adaptations, the advantage cannot be secured unless there
is some cause preventing the crossing of the divergent forms.
Now the prevention of crossing, if it ever arises, will be
secured either while the individuals that are prevented from
interbreeding are occupying the same limited area and exposed
to the same environment, or while occupying distinct areas
and exposed to either the same or different environments.
In the first case we are told by Darwin that exposure to uni-
form conditions “ will tend to modify all the varying indi-
viduals of the same species in the same manner.” in the
second case, as the sections of the species that are prevented
from crossing occupy separate areas, the advantage of freedom
from competition is already secured without divergent adap-
tation, and there can be no further advantage of that kind.
Again, it is not difficult to show that divergence is in itself
no benefit, for multitudes of more divergent forms fail, leaving
the field to less divergent ones. ‘This is generally true of
monstrosities and frequently true of other kinds of variations.
Neither can it be claimed that freedom from competition is
an advantage, unless it results in treer access to unappropria-
ted resources, and this advantage is most frequently gained by
migrating into a lveality presenting the same environment,
but not previously occupied by the species. In this last case
the access to unappropriated resources does not depend on
new adaptations ; and, as any new adaptations that might
bring advantage to the representatives of the species in one
district would be of equal advantage in the other district, no
divergence of character could be advantageous, It is this
impossibility of advantage in divergence of character in por-
tions of a species exposed to the same environment which

162 Rey. J. T. Gulick on Divergent Evolution

leads many naturalists to maintain that isolation does not
tend to produce divergence unless accompanied by exposure to
different environments. But their reasoning is inconclusive,
inasmuch as they have never shown that divergence depends
on its being advantageous. In my study of Sandwich-
Island mollusks I have found very strong reasons for believing
that divergence may arise in the representatives of one species
during exposure to the same environment, producing not only
non-adaptive but also adaptive differences. But whether
adaptive or non-adaptive, whether due to natural selection or
to some other principle, differences that arise under the same
environment cannot be advantageous differences, and the
divergence through which the differences are reached is not
advantageous divergence. It seems to me evident that neither
is divergence always advantageous, nor is the advantage of
access to unappropriated resources necessarily dependent on
divergence; that neither does the accumulation of diver-
gence depend on its being advantageous, nor is advantageous
divergence always accumulated.

Darwin’s Theory that Exposure to different Environments
is Essential to Diversity of Natural Selection.

Diversity of natural selection in different portions of the
same species depends upon diversity in the relations of the
different portions to the environment. Now observation
shows that cumulative diversity in the relations of the species
to the environment may be introduced, (1) by dissimilar
changes in the environment presented by the different areas
occupied by the different portions ; (2) by different portions
of the species entering different environments ; or (3) by dis-
similar changes in the habits of the different portions of the
species in using the same environment. Certainly in this
third class of cases, if not in the other classes, without pre-
vention of free crossing between the different portions there
can be no cumulative diversity in relation to the environ-
ment, and therefore no cumulative diversity in the natural
selection; and without the same condition there can be no
accumulation of divergent effects of natural selection in any
case. Darwin, however, forgetting the possibility of diver-
gent changes in the habits of isolated portions of a species
exposed to the same environment, maintains that exposure
to different environments is essential to diversity of natural
selection and to divergence. Without change in the climate,
soil, or organic forms lying outside of the species, there is,
according to him, nothing to produce modification.

and the Darwinian Theory. 163

“If a number of species, after having long competed with
each other in their old home, were to migrate in a body into
a new and afterwards isolated country, they would be little
liable to modification, for neither migration nor isolation in
themselves effect anything. These principles come into play
only by bringing organisms into new relations with each
other, and in a lesser degree with the surrounding physical
conditions.” »[‘ Origin of Species,’ on the fourth and fifth
pages of the first chapter on “ Geographical Distribution.” ]*

Each separate island of the Galapagos Archipelago is
tenanted, and the fact is a marvellous one, by many distinct
species ; but these species are related to each other in a very
much closer manner than to the inhabitants of the American
continent or of any other quarter of the world. This is what
might have been expected, for islands situated so near each
other would almost necessarily receive immigrants from the
same original source and from each other. But how is it
that many of the immigrants have been differently modified,
though only in a small degree, in islands situated within
sight of each other, having the same geological nature, the
same height, climate, &c.? This long appeared to me a
great difficulty: but it arises in chief part from the deeply
seated error of considering the physical conditions of a country
as the most important; whereas it cannot be disputed that
the nature of the other species with which each has to com-
pete is at least as important, and generally a far more im-
portant element of success. Now if we look to the species
which inhabit the Galapagos Archipelago, and are likewise
found in other parts of the world, we find that they differ
considerably in the several islands.” [‘ Origin of Species,’
near the middle of the second chapter on “ Geographical
Distribution.’’] f

The implication in both these passages is that if the repre-
sentatives of the same species are surrounded by the same
organic forms, as well as by the same physical conditions in
isolated countries, they will not undergo divergent modifica-
tion. This is in complete accord with the third paragraph
quoted near the beginning of this paper from the fourth
chapter of the ‘ Origin of Species.’

Divergent Forms of Seaual Selection.

In the passages last quoted there is no mention of any
exception to the principle that difference in external con-

* See ed. 6, p. 319. + See ed. 6, p. 359.

164 Rey. J. T. Gulick on Divergent Evolution

ditions is necessary to divergent evolution. No suggestion is
given that through the action of sexual selection divergent
species may be produced that are not at all dependent on
differences in the environments, still there can be no doubt

that this was Darwin’s view. Though he does not directly -

discuss this problem in any passage I have been able to dis-
cover, he clearly expresses the opinion that the differences
between the different races of man, and between man and the
lower animals, are in no small degree due to sexual selection,
and he never speaks of difference in sexual selection as depend-
ing on difference in the environment, though, at the close of
the twentieth chapter of ‘The Descent of Man,’ he speaks of
sexual selection in man as having probably “ exaggerated ”
the “characteristic qualities’ “which are of no service to”
the tribes and races that possess them. The differences, how-
ever, in the races of man are attributed to sexual selection,
not because of any lack of difference in their environments,
but because the characters in which they differ do not seem
to him to be related to the environment. The colour of the
skin, hair, and eyes, and the different forms of the head and
face, do not seem to be adapted to different conditions in the
environment, while they are undoubtedly occasions of attrac-
tion or aversion for those seeking partners. He has not,
however, shown whether the change of taste precedes the
change of form and colour or the reverse. Differences between
the sexes of the same species in secondary sexual characters
are for weighty reasons attributed to sexual selection ; but he
does not show how this divergence between the sexes leads to
the production of new species. This production of difference
of character between the sexes, being in no way dependent on
the prevention of crossing between the divergent sexes, must
be a wholly different process from the production of races and
species, which is absolutely dependent on prevention of cross-
ing between the divergent races and species. ‘There is never-
theless every reason to believe that when the representatives
of a species capable of sexual selection are for many genera-
tions separated into groups that never cross, diversity of tastes
is one of the forms of diversity that inevitably arises; but that
the psychological divergence is the cause of the other corre-
lated divergences is not socertain. ‘The theory of divergence
in races because of divergence in the forms of sexual selection
seems to rest on the assumption that a psychological divergence
may be accumulated and rendered permanent in a new and
definite form without being subjected to selection ; but if this
is true of a psychological divergence, why may it not be true
of any form of divergence? The difference in the ideals of

and the Darwinian Theory. 165

beauty in different races is as important as difference in the
skin and hair; and in accounting for the origin of races, it is
quite as important to account for the former as for the latter ;
any theory that simply attributes the difference in the colour
of the skin to difference in the ideal of beauty will be met by
the suspicion that the difference in the ideal was preceded by
the difference in the colour. My own strong conviction is
that the true explanation is equally applicable to either set of

phenomena.

Darwin's Reference to the Causes which Check the
Crossing of Varteties.

In the second paragraph quoted from Darwin at the be-
ginning of this chapter we find mention of three causes that
may for a long time prevent the members of the same species
from freely intercrossing while occupying the same area; but
subsequent statements, in the same and the three succeeding
sections, show that he regarded geographical and local sepa-
ration as the forms of separate breeding that are most favour-
able to the production of new species. Moreover, in the two
sections relating to “‘ Divergence of Character,” he seems to
maintain that the prevention of intercrossing is not a neces-
sary condition for divergence of character in members of the
same species that are competing with each other *. In
Chapter XVI. of his “ Variation under Domestication” several
causes that interfere with the free crossing of varieties are
enumerated ; but they are nowhere recognized as essential
factors in the evolution of divergent varieties and species,
without which diversity of natural selection would be of no
avail, and with which divergence will take place though there
is no change in the environment. They are looked upon as
characteristics in which many varieties more or less resemble
species ; but they are regarded as the results rather than the
causes of divergent evolution.

Conclusion.

We therefore find that though Darwin has not recognized
segregation, which is the independent propagation of different

* In ‘Nature,’ vol. xxxiv. p. 407, Mr. Francis Darwin states that in his
copy of Belt’s ‘ Naturalist in Nicaragua’ the words ‘‘No, No” are pen-
cilied in his father’s handwriting on the margin opposite the sentence :
“ All the individuals might vary in some one direction, but they could not
split up into distinct species whilst they occupied the same area and inter-
bred without difficulty.” This seems to give a decisive answer concerning
Darwin’s opinion on this subject.

166 Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadide.

variations, as a necessary condition for the production of
divergent races and species, he has pointed out one process by
which segregation is produced in nature. This one process is
geographical or local separation under different environments.
It may be the result of migration or of geological and other
changes in the environment; but, in either case, there is the
preservation of different variations through diversity of natural
selection due to the difference in the environments, and the
independent propagation of the same variations due to their
geographical or local separation. We have in this process an
important cause of segregation resulting in divergent evolu-
tion; but no one can maintain that this is the only cause
producing segregation and divergence, unless he ignores the
_ fact that, in some cases, the isolated portions of a species, while
exposed to the same environment, acquire divergent habits in
the use of the environment, producing diversity of natural
selection ; and that, in other cases, without exposure to diffe-
rent environments, the very process producing the isolation
brings together those of one kind, preventing them from cross-
ing with those of other kinds, as when individuals of a special
colour prefer to pair together. In the former cases indis-
criminate separation is transformed into segregation ; and in
the latter cases the isolation is segregative from the first,
while in both classes of cases the divergence is without expo-
sure to different environments.

Osaka, Japan.

XXI.— Description of a new Genus of Oriental Cicadide.
By W. L. DIstTAnt.

TALAINGA, gen. nov.

2. Body somewhat elongate, the abdomen cylindrical.
Head with the front globose and prominent, including outer
margins of eyes about as broad as base of mesonotum; ocelli
about twice as far apart from eyes as from each other. Pro-
notum with the lateral margins ampliated, deeply notched
about centre, and then more broadly ampliated at posterior
lateral margins. Anterior femora robustly spined. ‘Tegmina
talc-like, semiopaque, the whole apical area with the vena-
tion reticulate and forming a mass of small cell-like areas ; in
some specimens the ulnar areas are also crossed by transverse
veins; interior ulnar area about same width at apex as at

On two new Species of Acrea from Mombasa. 167

base ; basal cell about twice as long as broad. Wings with
the outer margin deeply sinuate near abdominal area; apical
areas Six, in some specimens broken up by transverse veins
into a more numerous and reticulated series.

This diagnosis is founded on two female specimens, the
structure of the abdomen implying that the tympana are
uncovered in the male, thus locating the genus in my sub-
family Tibicenine. Talaingai is allied to Geana, from which
it is at once distinguished by the reticulated tegmina &e.

Talainga Binghami, n. sp.

@. Body and legs black ; eyes ochraceous, their posterior
margins pale sanguineous ; pronotum with the lateral margins
and a curved spot on lateral areas behind eyes pale san-
guineous, posterior margin—excepting extreme centre—nar-
rowly ochraceous. Abdomen above with the marginal seg-
ments more or less greyishly pilose.

Tegmina tale-like, semiopaque, very pale ochraceous, the
venation black and margined with the same colour, the apical
area being thus composed of numerous small, black-mar-
gined, cellular areas; the costal membrane ochraceous, the
basal cell shaded with black. Wings pale bluish green, the
venation more or less concolorous, excepting that deliminating
the more or less reticulated apical areas ; posterior margin
blackish from apex to the sinuation near abdominal area.

Long. excl. tegm., 2 23-26 millim., exp. tegm. 70-77
millim.

Hab. Burma, Kr. Hills (Bingham).

This beautiful genus is a great acquisition to our knowledge
of the Eastern Cicadidse. The type of coloration distinetly
resembles that of Zosena splendida, Dist., which is also found
in Burma, a country that has produced some of the hand-
soinest insects of the whole family, and is still likely to con-
tain many Cicadean novelties.

Talainga Binghami will be subsequently figured in my
‘Monograph of Oriental Cicadide.’

XXI1.— Descriptions of two new Species of Acreea from
Mombasa. By H. GRosE SMITH.

Acrea crystallina.

Male.— Upperside. Both wings devoid of scales except at
the apex of anterior wings, W here they are narrowly brownish

168 On two new Species of Acrea from Mombasa.

grey, narrowly irrorated internally with ochreous, and on the
outer margin of posterior wings, where there is a row of
ochreous lunules capped with grey between the veins; the
spots and markings on the underside of posterior wings show-
ing through ; both wings tinged with brown at the base.

Underside. Posterior wings with the outer row of marginal
lunules almost white, bordered all round with black; an irre-
gular row of black spots across the disk ; two black spots on
the discocellular nervules, two others inside the cell towards
the base, one above the subcostal nervure, one below the
median nervure, two others below the submedian and internal
nervures respectively, and one above the costal nervure, the
last-named five spots all near the base; the space inside the
precostal nervure, the base of the wings, and abdominal fold
pink, shading to white.

The female resembles the male, but is rather larger.

Expanse of wings 23 inches.

Hab. Voi River, interior of Mombasa (Last).

Acrea uvui.

Male.— Upperside. Anterior wings bright fulvous-ochreous,
with the base to the extent of one third of the wings, costal
margin, apex, hind margin, and a broad transverse band from
beyond the middle of costal margin to the middle of the hind
margin black. Posterior wings same colour, slightly paler
towards the abdominal fold, with the base and outer margin
broadiy black.

Underside. Anterior wings paler fulvous-ochreous, dusky
towards the base, crossed beyond the middle by a black band
as on the upperside ; costal margin narrowly, apex and hind
margin broadly, black. Posterior wings paler; a band of
black spots betore the middle, a cluster of black spots at the
base ; a rather broad marginal black band, in which, on the
margin between the veins, is a row of ochreous lunules. —

Female resembles the male, but less black at the base, and
on the inner margin of the anterior wings, from the base to
the middle, is a rather broad black band, and on the poste-
rior wings the colour shades from the middle to the abdo-
minal fold to pale ochreous.

Expanse of wings 1} inch.

Nearest to A. eponina, Cram.

Hab. Voi River, Mombasa (Last).

On some Coleoptera from the Bonin Islands. 169

XXIII.— Observations on some Coleoptera from the Bonin
Islands. By Cuartes O. WATERHOUSE and C, J. GAHAN.

Tue British Musenm has recently received a few Coleoptera
collected by Herr P. A. Holst in the Bonin Islands. They
are referable to three species, one being a new species of
Buprestide of, the genus Chrysochroa, most nearly allied to
C. purpureiventris from Penang &c.; the second is a new
species of Cerestum, which has its nearest ally in a Chinese
species ; and the third is the widely distributed Sphenophorus
obscurus, Bdv.

Chrysochroa Holstit, n. sp., Waterh.

Elongata, angusta, aureo-viridis, micans ; thorace crebre punctato,
antice utrinque gutta cuprea notato ; elytris postice bene acumin-
atis, creberrime punctatis, singulis costis quatuor leyvibus instructis,
apice purpureo-cupreo, angulo suturali acute dentiformi.

Long. 13 lin.

Hab. Peel Island, Bonin Islands (P. A. Holst).

Antenne (except the basal joint) black. Thorax mode-
rately narrowed in front, very slightly convex, distinctly but
moderately finely punctured, the punctures slightly separated
from each other on the disk, more crowded together and
stronger at the sides; the disk has a punctiform impression
on each side of the median line, rather in front of the middle ;
at the front margin there is on each side a small coppery
spot, the commencement as it were of a longitudinal stripe.
The elytra are a little wider than the thorax, much more
gradually acuminate than is usual in this genus, closely and
finely (but distinctly) punctured; each elytron has four
well-marked smooth coste, the third one abbreviated at the
base and behind; the sutural angle is dentiform, but there
is only a slight indication of serration at the apical margin.
The sides of the sterna and abdomen are densely and very
finely punctured and clothed with pale silvery-grey pubes-
cence, which is only visible in certain lights.

This species is perhaps nearest to C. purpureiventris,
Deyr., from Penang &c., but is much narrower, with the
elytra more clearly quadricostate &c.

Cerestum simile, n. sp., Gahan.

Brunneo-ferrugineum, sparse griseo-pubescens; capite punctato ;
prothorace dorso dense rugoso-punctato, cum macula parva media

170 Mr. H. Grose Smith on three new

levi, supra sparse—lateribus et subtus sat dense—pubescente ;
scutello griseo ; elytris dense punctatis, punctis postice gradatim
decrescentibus, apicibus rotundatis; pedibus fulvo-testaceis,
femoribus subabrupte clavatis ; processu mestosterni fere plano ;
antennis corpore paullo longioribus, articulis a tertio ad decimum
(quarto breviore excepto) subsequalibus.

Long. 13, lat. 33 mm.

This species bears a very close resemblance to Ceresiwm
unicolor, Fabr.* But in the latter the disk of the prothorax
is much less coarsely punctured, and the punctures are, in
fresh specimens, almost concealed by the rather close pubes-
cence which covers the whole of the prothorax. In the
femora a more important difference may be noted; these, in
the present species, are somewhat abruptly thickened, with a
longer stalk at the base; in C. unicolor the femora are
stouter, but the thickening is more gradual from the base.

In its structural characters the present species shows a close
affinity to an undescribed form from China.

XXIV.—Descriptions of three new Species of Butterflies from
New Ireland, captured by the Rev. Rh. H. Rickard, in the
Collection of H. Grose Smith. By H. Grose SMITH.

Asthipa clinias.

Allied to cttrina, Feld., and glortola, Butl., from which it
differs in the following respects :—

Male.—On the upperside of anterior wings the vitreous spot
between the second discoidal and upper median nervules is
very short, the cell is almost entirely dark brown, there being
only a comparatively short, and narrow vitreous spot above
the median nervure. On posterior wings the spot at the end
of the cell is very small ‘and there is a double submarginal
row of white spots, the inner row being very distinct -but
interrupted between the lower median nervule and submedian
nervure, the three upper spots being treble the size of those
towards the anal angle ; the outer row of spots is indistinct.

Underside. Anterior wings with a single row of submar-
ginal white spots, outside which are two small spots near the
apex and two between the upper and middle median nervules.
On the posterior wings is a double row of submarginal white
spots, the inner row interrupted as on the upperside, the outer

* In the Catalogue of Gemm. and Harold this species is erroneously
placed in the genus Hesperophanes, ;

Species of Butterflies from New Ireland. Wa

row being uninterrupted; on the lower median nervule, half-
way between the margin and the median nervure, is a patch
of white scales.

This species is much larger than either of those above
mentioned.

Expanse of wings 34 inches.

Asthipa rotundata.

Male.— Upperside dark fuliginous brown, with bluish-white
vitreous spots. Anterior wings with two spots beneath the
first and second subcostal nervules; between these at the end
of the cell are three elongate spots, the second the longest,
the third the shortest ; between the upper and second median
nervules a cordate spot close to the median nervure and a
small round spot beyond it ; two broad elongate spots, some-
what attenuated externally, between the middle and Jowest
median nervules and between the latter and the submedian
nervure respectively ; a rather narrow elongate spot in the
cell close above the median nervure. Posterior wings with
the cell and the spots above and around it as in cétrina,
but those on the disk are narrower and that between the
lowest median nervule and the submedian nervure is deeply
bifid externally ; there is a row of round white spots towards
the outer margins of both wings, being on the anterior wings
very conspicuous and on posterior wings nearly obsolete.

Underside. Both wings as above, but on the anterior wings
near the outer margin between the median nervules are
several minute white spots, and on the posterior wings are
two very conspicuous, submarginal, uninterrupted rows of
white spots, the inner row consisting of seven lunulate spots,
the outer row of twelve small round spots.

The female resembles the male, but is paler, and the two
spots below the cell are outwardly more acute.

Expanse of wings, g 27, ? 3 inches.

Nearest to A. garamantis, Godman and Salvin; but the

shape of the wings, especially in the male, is broader and
rounder.

Doleschallia Rickardi.

Male.— Upperside. Both wings dark brown, rather paler
towards the base. Anterior wings crossed beyond the cell by
an oblique band of three rather broad blue spots, irrorated
with white, extending from the costa to the upper median
nervule; across the disk is a large blue patch, divided by the
median nervules, extending at the upper end into the end of

172 Dr. E. L. Trouessart—Synoptical Revision

the cell and at the lower end as far as the submedian nervure,
where it is narrower than at the top and slightly curves out-
wardly ; a curved row of five subapical white spots.

Underside. Both wings dusky brown, paler towards the
apex and outer margin of anterior wings and crossed by an
irregular black line, which, on anterior wings, is narrowly
margined externally from the costa to the upper median ner-
vule by bluish white, thence internally to the middle of pos-
terior wings by dusky white; outside the black line on both
wings is a rather broad, ill-defined, darker brown band; on
anterior wings three irregular bright brown lines cross the
cell beyond the middle, the line nearest the base bordered ex-
ternally and irregularly with bluish white; the five white
subapical spots as above, beneath which are three nearly
obsolete ocelli, Posterior wings beyond the middle with two
conspicuous and several other nearly obsolete ocelli; a bluish-
white spot in the cell on the median nervure edged externally
with black.

Expanse of wings 2% inches.

Nearest to D. dascon and dasyclus, Godman and Salvin.

XXV.—Synoptical Revision of the Family Halacaride.
By Dr. E. L. Trovessarr *.

THE memoir in course of preparation, with the assistance of
M. G. Neumann, upon the “ Marine Acarina of the shores
of France ” being unavoidably retarded by the execution of
the plates, we think it as well to give at present_a synopsis
of the actually known species of the family Halacaride.
We hope in this way to induce the sending of new materials
which will enable us to complete the investigation of this
marine fauna which is still so little known.

The number of memoirs relating to the marine Acarina
is still but small. We shall content ourselves with giving
the following list + of the more important of them, referring

* Translated from the Bulletin Scientifique de la France et de la
Belgique, tome xx. 1889, pp. 224-251.

+ Bibliography.

1. Gossg, P. H. “On new and little-known Marine Animals” (Ann.
Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. xvi. (1855) pp. 27 & 305, pls. 3 & 8).

2. Hoper, G. “Contributions to the Zoology of Seaham Harbour.
I. Onanew Marine Mite. II. On some undescribed Marine Acari”
(Trans. Tyneside Nat. Field Club, 1860, vols. iv. & v.).

of the Family Halacaride. 173

for a more complete bibliography to Dr. Lohmann’s mono-
graph indicated below.

In the following pages each bibliographic reference will be
indicated by its number placed in parentheses, after the name
of the author of the memoir cited.

Besides the species already known, we shall give the
diagnoses of several new genera and species, derived not only
from the French coasts, but also from other regions of the
globe (Tierra del Fuego, New Zealand).

Family Halacaride, Murray, 1877.

Char. Exclusively marine Acarina, destitute of traches,
with a distinct rostrum ; maxillary palpi free, fusiform, of 4
(rarely 3) joints, the first and third short, the second elon-
gated, the fourth, or terminal, pointed and styliform. Man-
dibles terminated by a straight or recurved claw, which
represents the immobile finger of the chelicera, the movable
one being atrophied. Hypostome formed by a more or less
elongate bivalve furrow, of which the two symmetrical parts
are soldered together at the base or throughout their length.
Three eyes, of which two are situated at the normal place
upon the cephalothorax, and the third, unpaired one, in front
upon the epistome. Integuments strengthened by more or less
extensive dorsal and ventral dermal plates, with the surface
smooth, grained, punctured, or sculptured. Legs lateral, well
developed, terminated by a double claw, which is generally
pectinate.

. Brapy,G.S. “A review of the British Marine Mites, with descrip-
tions of some new species” (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1875, p. 301, pl. 42).
“Notes on British Freshwater Mites” (dvd. 1877, p. 24,

4, :
pl. 4).

5. Murray, A. ‘ Economic Entomology : Aptera, 1877,” pp. 205 et seqg.

(a summary of the preceding papers, with figures).

6. Cui~ton, C. “On two Marine Mites (Halacaride)” (Trans. New
Zeal. Inst. vol. xv. 1883, with fig.).

7. Trovrssart, EK, “Note sur les Acariens marins recueillis par
M. Giard au Laboratoire maritime de Wimereux ” (Comptes Rendus,
5 Nov. 1888, p. 753; reproduced with some modifications in the
Bull. Bibl. Scient. de ’Ouest, Niort, 1888, no. 8).

8. Loumann, H. “ Die Unterfamilie der Halacaride (Murray) und die
Meeresmilben der Ostsee ” (Zool. Jahrb. iv. 1889, p. 269, with 3 plates;
issued as a separate paper in December 1888),

9. TRovEssarT, HK. “Sur les Acariens marins des cétes de France, 2°
Note” (Comptes Rendus, 3 June, 1889, p. 1178).

“ Diagnoses d’espéces et genres nouveaux d’Acariens marins
des cétes de France” (Le Naturaliste, ]1° année, 1889, pp. 162 &
181).

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 13

10.

174 Dr. E. L. Trouessart—Synoptical Revision

The absence of traches and the form and arrangement of
the palpi, the last joint of which is pointed and styliform
(and not palpiform), suffice to distinguish this family from
that of the T'rombidiide, with which it has been proposed to
unite the Halacaride. From its characters the latter family
may be placed between the Gamaside and the Sarcoptide.
At present we know about 7 genera and 35 species.

The Halacaride live in the sea and in the brackish water
of estuaries and salt-marshes. They walk and climb, rather
than swim, upon the bottom, the rocks, Algz, and fixed or
slow-moving animals of which they are commensals. ‘Their
food seems to be varied; it consists in great part of Diatomez

and of organic matters in course of decomposition derived
from the fragments rejected by the animals of larger size
upon which we find them, and which belong to all classes—
Crustacea, Mollusca (oysters, mussels, &c.), Echinoderms,
Acalephe, Hydroids, Corals, Bryozoans, Sponges, &c. ‘The
young of many species may be regarded as parasites, feeding
almost exclusively upon organic matters, especially the ova
of Copepoda, and attaching themselves to other animals to
profit by what falls from their table. The adults on the
contrary lead a vagabond life, and seek in preference the
Diatoms which they find in abundance attached to the fronds
of Algee.

We find the Halacaride from the zone of stranded Alge
toa depth of 30-50 fathoms; but it is in the Laminarian
zone, or more exactly in the zone of the Corallines and Red
Alge, that they are most abundant, at depths of 5-10 fathoms.
Very few are found upon the brown Alge (Hucacez) ; on
the other hand they are numerous and varied specifically
upon the red and calcareous Alga (Floridez and Coralline).
Upon the great rocky bottoms destitute of vegetation we
meet with types (Scaptognathus, Coloboceras) which are want-
ing everywhere else. ‘Their geographical distribution,
although in general pretty extensive, presents some remark-
able peculiarities ; thus, the genus Agawe, an essentially
southern type, widely diffused in the Mediterranean and
extending to the southern hemisphere (‘Tierra del Fuego), does
not appear to advance in the ocean to the north of the mouth
of the Loire, and is wanting in the North Sea and the
Baltic.

The distinction of the species in this group presents great
difficulties in consequence of the great uniformity of the type,
of variations of colour due to the kind of food, and of this
peculiar fact, which it is important to mention, that the
nymphs, before their last moult, already present a rudiment of

of the Family Ualacaride. 175

the genital organ (H. Lohmann). ‘The legs are generally
shorter in the nymphs, which have in each limb one joint
less * than the adults. Otherwise the construction of the
rostrum, tarsi, and dermal plates is very nearly the same as in
the adult.

Many individuals at the moment of their capture have the
body and limbs incrusted with a sort of mud, in the midst of
which Acinete are sometimes fixed in considerable numbers.

Synopsis of the Genera aud Species of the
Family Halacaridee.

Genus RHOMBOGNATHUS, Trt. 1888.

Trouessart (7), November 1888, p. 754.
Aletes, Lohmann (8), December 1888, p. 51.
Pachygnathus, pt., Gosse (1), 1855.

Char. Rostrum short, conical, with the maxillary palpi
lateral, applied closely along the mandibles, which are termi-
nated by a hooked claw. ‘Tarsus separated from the double
terminal claw by an additional cylindrical, slender, and more
or less elongated joint.

Seven species, of which four occur on the French coasts.
Most of them are of a greenish-black colour, of small size,
and of a short, thickset form.

1. Lhombognathus pascens.
Ateles pascens, Lohm. (8), p. 64, figs. 64, 70.

Char. Claws angularly recurved ; additional piece of the
tarsus produced in the form of a hook only in the anterior
feet. Coxe of the first pair of legs united into a single
ventral plate. Ocular plates with only a single cornea.
Total length 0°35 millim.

Hab. Atlantic coasts, France: Baie de Port-lin, near Le
Croisic, upon stranded red Algee (4. Chevreux), rather rare.
Shore of the Channel, Etretat (dle. C. Trouessart). Baltic,
Kiel (Lohmann), upon sandy shores, living and stranded red

Algee.
2. Rhombognathus Seahami.

Pachygnathus Seahami, Hodge (2), 1860,
Aletes Seahami, Lohm, (8) p. 57, figs. 88, 94.

Char, Claws angularly recurved ; additional piece of the

* Four, instead of five as in the adult.

13*

176 Dr. E. L. Trouessart-—Synoptical Revision

tarsus hooked in all the feet. Coxe of the first pair united
into asingle ventral plate. Claws with a simple comb. Ocular
plates having only a single cornea. ‘Total length 0°37 millim.

Hab. Atlantic coasts: France, Le Croisic, Pen-bronn
and Port-lin (Chevreuw), upon Corallines, brown Alge, and
stranded Algw. Very common everywhere ; the most widely
distributed species of the coast of Le Croisic. Shores of the
North Sea; England, Seaham Harbour, littoral zone. Shores
of the Baltic, Kiel (Lohmann), region of Red Seaweeds.

3. Rhombognathus setosus.
Aletes setosus, Lohm. (8), p. 58, figs. 79, 80.

Char. Claws recurved like sickles; additional joint of the
tarsi with no hook ; anterior margin of the epistomial plate in
the form of a hood entirely concealing the rostrum. Coxe of
first pair well separated, forming a narrow chitinous band on
each side. Ocular plates with the cornea simple. Total
length 0°32 millim.

Hab. Shores of the Baltic, Kiel (Lohmann) ; sandy shores.

4. Rhombognathus nigrescens.

Pachygnathus nigrescens, Brady (4), p. 26, pl. iv. figs. 4, 5.
Aletes nigrescens, Lohm. (8), p. 60.

Char. Claws angularly recurved and furnished with a double
comb, without lateral teeth ; additional joint of tarsi furnished
with a hook on all (?) the feet. Ocular plate with the cornea
simple. Size very large, double that of the other species.
Total length 0°72 millim.

Hab. A single specimen found in England by Brady in a
pool of fresh water on the rocks (Northumberland).

5. Rhombognathus notops.

Pachygnathus notops, Gosse (1), p. 805, pl. vill. figs. 1-4.
Aletes notops, Lohm. (8), p. 62, figs. 89, 94.

Char. Claws recurved like sickles, with a lateral tooth, but
without a comb; additional joint of tarsi without a hook ;
epistomial plate leaving the rostrum exposed; ocular plates
furnished with a double cornea. A plumose hair on the tarsi
of the first pair of feet. Total length 0°35 millim.

Hab. Shores of the Ocean. France: Le Croisic, Pen-
bronn (Chevreux), on Corallines (Corallina officinalis) and
green Algex, pretty common. British coasts: Shetland

of the Family Halacaride. 177

Islands, Ilfracombe ((osse), littoral zone. Baltic, Kiel (Loh-
mann), region of Red Seaweeds.

6. Rhombognathus magnirostris.
Trouessart (10), Le Naturaliste, August 1889, p, 181.

Char. Like R. notops, but larger and stouter ; additional
joint of the feet much elongated, not hooked. Rostrum large
and broad. Epistome cut off squarely at the level of the
base of the palpi. Legs with long and slender sete. ‘Two
plumose hairs well developed on the third joint of the four
pairs of feet. Comb of the accessory tooth of the claws broad
and strong. Total length 0°45 millim.

Hab. Shores of the Mediterranean, upon the Corsican
Moss (Gigartina helminthocorton) and the Corallines and Red
Seaweeds collected in the same localities and confounded
under that name.

R. magnirostris, var. plumifer, var. nov.

Differs from the type by the presence of a third feebly
plumose hair on the third joint of all the legs. The other two
strongly plumose. ‘Total length 0°38 millim.

Hab. Shores of Tierra del Fuego: Saddle Island (Cape
Horn), upon Seaweeds (Codium fragile, Ceramium Dozit),

collected by M. Hariot (Mission du Cap Horn).

7. Rhombognathus minutus.

Pachygnathus minutus, Hodge (2), 1860,
Aletes minutus, Lohm., (8), p. 65.

Char. Claws falciform, pectinated, with a lateral tooth ;
additional joint of tarsus hooked. Ocular plates with a double
cornea. Size small? (species imperfectly known). ‘Total
length 0°28 millim.

Hab. English coast: Seaham, Northumberland (lodge) ;
littoral zone.

Genus SIMOGNATHUS, Trt., 1889.

Trouessart (9), p. 1179, & (10), p. 162,
Pachygnathus, pt., Brady (3), p. 306,

Char. Rostrum short and broad, with mawillary palpi
touching each other above, applied to one another in the median

178 Dr. E. L. Trouessart—Synoptical Revision

line, passing beyond the mandibles and the hypostome, their
extremities being directed downwards (and not inwards, as in
Rhombognathus). No additional joint in the tarsus ; legs of
six joints.

By the arrangement of the parts of the mouth, this genus
approaches Leptognathus rather than Rhombognathus. It
may be regarded as a Leptognathus with a much shortened
rostrum. <A single known species.

1. Simognathus sculptus.

Pachygnathus sculptus, Brady (3), p. 306, pl. 42. figs. 1-6,
Simognathus sculptus, Trouessart (9), p. 1179, & (10), p. 162.

Char. Legs nodose, with angular joints, especially the
penultimate joint of the anterior pair, which is armed with a
strong spine at its posterior and inferior angles. Claws not
pectinated; those of the anterior feet stronger and less re-
curved than those of the other feet. All the plates of the
cuirass (except the sternal and ventral plates) strongly pitted,
as also the hypostome and the first three joints of the legs.
Total length 0°42 millim.

Hab. This fine species appears to occur only upon rocky
bottoms, at depths varying from 10 to 50 metres. Shores of
France: Rochers de Basse Kikerie (near Le Croisic),
dredging by means of swabs (Chevreux), a single individual.
English coast : Durham and N. Yorkshire, Robin Hood’s
Bay (Brady), at 35 fathoms.

Genus COLOBOCERAS, gen. nov.

Char. Rostrum cylindro-conical, with lateral palpi parallel
to the sides of the rostrum, formed of three joints—the first
short, the second three times as long; the third rather short,
conical, terminated by a small point. Mandibles styliform,
terniinating in two long sete. Legs of five joints.

This new genus approaches /Halacarus more than any other
genus, and may be regarded as forming the passage between
Rhombognathus and Halacarus. It differs essentially from
the latter by its palpi, which have only three joints, the third
and fourth appearing to be soldered into one. Only one
species known.

1. Coloboceras longiusculus, sp. n.

Char. Body elongate, of a garnet-red colour, nearly black ;
the legs of a lighter red, much shorter than the body, slightly

of the Family Halacaride. 179

nodose, with the claws terminated by two teeth, the larger of
which is inserted nearly at a right angle; destitute of a
ciliated comb. Rostrum small, with the epistome cut squarely
at the base of the palpi, the hypostome prolonged into a bi-
valve spatuliform furrow, within which the mandibles slide,
each terminating in a long seta, which passes beyond the
rostrum. Anus terminal. ‘Total length 0°50 millim.

Hab. Shores of France: Roches de Castouillet (near Le
Croisic), by dredging with the aid of swabs (Chevreux) ; two
individuals,

Genus HaLacarus, Gosse, 1855.

Halacarus, Gosse (1), p. 27.

Halacarus, Copidognathus, and Leptopsalis, Trouessart (7), p. 755.

Char. Rostrum elongated, cylindro-conical; palpi free,
parallel, articulated upon the sides of the rostrum, composed
of four joints, of which the third is much shorter than the ter-
minal joint, which is strongly conical, elongated, often styli-
form, and furnished with three divergent sete: upon its inner
margin; second joint the longest of all. Hypostome in the
form of a more or less elongated bivalve furrow, triangular or
truncated in front. Mandibles (cheliceree) terminated by a
single finger, generally hooked. Claws of the feet inserted
directly upon the tarsus without any additional joint.

The number of species of this genus is already considera-
ble, at least seventeen, eleven of which occur upon the French
coasts. This is the reason that we attempted to subdivide it
by forming the genera Copidognathus and Leptopsalis, the
former founded upon a species (C. glyptoderma) in which the
mandibles are very strong, and terminate in a straight, kaife-
shaped finger with a serrated blade. But a thorough exa-
mination of several allied species having shown this cha-
racter to be rather variable, we have preferred to reunite
this species with the genus Halacarus proper. The genus
Leptopsalis includes two species in which the last joint of the
palpi ts bifid, simulating a little forceps; this character seems
to be of sufficient importance for us to retain this group as a
subgenus.

Subgenus HALACARUS, proper.

Char. Last joint of the palpi terminating in a single
point.

In the enumeration of the species we shall follow the order
and arrangement adopted by M. Lohmann in his Mono-

graph (8).

180 Dr. E. L. Trouessart—Synoptical Revision

Group A a.—Rostrum small, triangular, conical, with rather
short palpi, the last joint conical at tts point only, and
very little longer than the penultimate. A single exotic
species, which, by the shortness of its palpi, approaches
the genus Coloboceras.

1. Halacarus parvirostris, sp. n.

Char. Rostrum presenting the characters of the group ;
palpi with the last joint cylindrical for four fifths of its length,
and terminating suddenly in a very small point. Hypostome
eroove-like, constricted in front, truncated at the level of the
base of the last joint of the palpi. Epistome presenting an
obtuse, rounded projection at the level of the base of the
rostrum. Anterior legs shorter and more robust than the
posterior, with the second joint inflated, and the fourth nearly
triangular, furnished with a spine beneath; claws with no
ciliated comb; no ungueal groove on the tarsus. Dermal
plates finely punctured in indistinct rosettes. Total length
0°40 millim.

Hab. On seaweeds from New Zealand sent to the Museum
at Paris (M. Hariot). This species is, in all respects, very
distinct from the two species described by Chilton, which will
be mentioned further on.

Group A.—Rostrum narrow, with the lateral margins parallel
as far as the basal region; hypostome compressed, longer
than the basal part of the rostrum ; third joint of the palpi
bearing at its antero-internal angle a very fine spine
directed obliquely forward; fourth joint sabre-shaped.
Sexual aperture projecting in the form of a bivalved bulb.
‘Two species.

2. Halacarus Murray.

Lohmann (8), p. 70, figs. 83, 86.

Char. Those of the group; anus terminal. Legs slender,
the posterior very long ; claws much elongated, pectinate ; no
ungueal groove on the tarsi. Dermal plates feebly developed.
Ocular plates with a single cornea, and in the inner angle a
large pore* with a small chitinous plate behind it. Adl the
hairs of the legs very long and very slender, not spinous. Total
length 0°52-0:57 millim.

Hab. Baltic, Kiel (Lohmann), in the region of Red Sea-

* To see these details of the chitinous cuirass of the Halacaridz it is

indispensable to treat them with amore or less concentrated solution of
potash, which renders them colourless and transparent.

of the Family Halacaride. . 188

weeds on the Floridez, sponges, and Flustre, at a depth
of about 12 fathoms.

3. Halacarus levipes.
Trouessart (10), Le Naturaliste, p. 162.

Char. Very similar to the preceding species, but differing
from it in the presence of spinous hairs, mixed with the long
slender hairs, wpon the anterior legs. Hypostome less com-
pressed, elongate triangular. It is perhaps only a southern
variety of H. Murrayt. Total length 0°50 millim.

Hab. Shores of the Mediterranean. A single individual
found upon Corsican moss (Gigartina helminthocorton).

Group B.—Rostrum triangularly conical, with the apex
directed forward ; hypostome shorter than the basal part
of the rostrum, with no constriction at its base. Last
jomt of palpi conical, more or less pointed, but not
styliform. Genital aperture in the form of an oval frame,
differing but little in the two sexes.

Subgroup 1.—Body compressed, abdomen elongated as in the
preceding group, flanks parallel to the level of the inser-
tion of the legs.

4. Halacarus floridearum.
Lohmann (8), p. 72, figs. 111, 115.

Char. Anus terminal ; third joint of palpi furnished on its
inner margin with athick, non-setiform spine. Ocular plates
with no cornea; third joint of first pair of legs bearing only
three hairs planted in a triangle upon the most inflated part.
Claws ciliated. Dermal plates pitted except the sternal plates.
Total length 0°45-0°50 millim.

Hab. Baltic, Kiel (Lohmann), region of Red Seaweeds, on
Floridez, at depths of 3-12 fathoms.

5. Halacarus balticus.
Lohmann (8), p. 73, figs. 105, 120.

Char. Anus terminal; third joint of palpi furnished with a
strong spine upon its inner margin; third joint of first pair of
legs having two dorsal sete behind the triangle formed by the
three hairs inserted about the middle. Ocular plates with a
large cornea. Hpistomial plate with a nearly straight ante-
rior margin. Claws not ciliated. Tarsi with a slightly deve-

182 Dr. E. L. Trouessart—Synoptical Revision

loped ungueal groove. Dermal plates pitted only on the back.
Total length 0°60-0°65 millim.

Hab. French coast: Pas de Calais, at Wimereux (Giard),
upon Eudendrium capillare; Le Croisic (Chevreur), upon
Bryozoa (Aleyonidium hirsutum), and Baie de Port-lin upon
Facus serratus. Baltic: Kiel (Lohmann), region of Red
Algz, at 12 fathoms.

6. Halacarus striatus.
Lohmann (8), p. 74, fig. 117.
Hi. tnermis, Trouessart (7), p. 754.

Char. Anus terminal. No spine on the third joint of the
palpi. Ocular plates narrow, without cornea. Dermal plates
pitted only on the back. Claws pectinate. No ungueal
groove on the tarsi. Total length 0°62-0°70 millim.

Hab. French coasts: Le Croisie (Chevreur), Laminarian
zone, upon Corallines ; Baie de Port-lin and open coast upon
Corallina officinalis. North Sea, upon Thuiaria Thuia, off
Newcastle-on-Tyne (Gard). Baltic: Kiel (Lohmann), re-
gion of Red Alge, at 3-5 fathoms.

Subgroup 2.—Abdomen short, with a semicircular outline
posteriorly ; flanks swelled, convex, and not parallel.

7. Halacarus spinifer.

Hi. ctenopus, pt., Trouessart (7), p. 754.
H. globosus, Trouessart, MS., loc. cit.
H. spinifer, Lohmann (8), p. 75, figs. 101, 102.

Char. Palpi with the third joint furnished with a strong
spine on its inner margin; third joint of first pair of legs
armed with two spines behind the triangle formed by the
dorsal sete. Claws of the first pair very short and very
stout; all the claws pectinate. Ocular plates with cornee.
Epistomial plate produced into a point above the rostrum.
Anus terminal.

The adults are generally of a dark colour (brown, more or
less blackish) ; the young and the nymphs are light-coloured,
yellowish, or of a more or less lively coral-red. It is the
largest species known in the family, and one of the commonest
on our shores. ‘Total length 1-00-1°10 millim.

Hab. French coasts: Pas de Calais, Wimereux (Giard),
upon the byssus of mussels, on Lasea rubra and Eudendrium
capillare ; canal from Caen to the sea (Le Sénécha/) in brackish
water, on Hydroids; Atlantic coast; Le Croisic (Cher-

of the Family Halacaride. 183

reux) upon Alge (Corallines &c.), very common. Baltic:
Kiel and Gotland (Lohmann) upon Red Seaweeds (at 12
fathoms) and on Green Seaweeds.

8. Halacarus ctenopus.

Hi. ctenopus, Gosse (1), p. 28, pl. iii. figs. 6-10; Brady (8), p. 310;
Lohmann (8), p. 77.

Char. Like the preceding species, but smaller and more
elongated, and never presenting the dark colour of the adult
H. spinifer. Epistome with an acute anterior point. Claws
of the first pair very similar to those of the others. Claws of
the third and fourth pairs destitute of ciliated combs, while
those of the other two pairs (2 and 3) are provided with them.
Anus terminal. A notogastric plate. Ungueal groove but
slightly developed, as in the preceding species. Total length
0°80 millim.

Hab. French coasts (rare): Le Croisie (Chevreux), on
floating seaweeds. Coasts of England and Ireland, the Shet-
land islands, Scilly, &c. (Gosse, Brady), at depths varying,
according to the localities, from 7 to 35 fathoms (littoral,
Laminarian and Coralline zones).

9. Halacarus actenos, sp. n.*

Char. Very like the preceding species, but all the claws
destitute of ciliated combs. No notogastric plate. Epistomial
plate terminating behind in a triangle. No ungueal groove
on the tarsi. Total length from 0°65 millim. (male) to 0°75
millim. (female).

Hab. French coasts (Atlantic), scarcer than H. spiniger,
but more generally distributed than H. ctenopus: Le Croisic
(Chevreux), Baie de Port-lin, on Fucus serratus; Arcachon,
on oysters (Zrouessart) ; Saint Jean-de-Luz (Neumann), on
Alge (a male individual more brightly coloured (orange-red)
and with shorter limbs than the males from Le Croisic).

10. Halacarus Harioti, sp. n.

Char. Epistomial plate forming a very obtuse angle in

* This species may perhaps be the Halacarus ctenopus? of Grube (H.
frontispinis in the text), found by that naturalist at Roscoff (Abhandl.
schles. Ges. Naturw. 1868, pp. 123, 124) and described as resembling
H. ctenopus, but with non-pectinate claws. However, Grube says formally
that he did not see, on the penultimate joint of the palpi, the short and
strong spine which characterizes H. actenos as well as H. ctenopus,

184 Dr. E. L. Trouessart—Synoptical Revision

front. All the claws pectinate, those of first pair like the
others; a well-developed wngueal groove on the tarsi. Man-
dibles slender, with a feeble claw. A well-developed noto-
gastric plate. In other respects like the preceding species.
Total length 0°70 millim.

This species is dedicated to M. Hariot, the botanist attached
to the “ Mission du Cap Horn,” who collected it at the same
time as the Algw of that region.

Hab. Shores of Saddle Island, Cape Horn (Hariot), upon
Alge (Codium fragile) .

Subgroup 3.—Form of the rostrum and palpi as in the pre-
ceding subgroup, but the third joint of the palpi without
the internal spine. Plates of the cuirass greatly de-
veloped and strongly sculptured as in the following
subgroup. Sculpture of the notogastric plate forming
longitudinal lines. Hpistomial plate cut square in
front, leaving the rostrum exposed.

11. Halacarus Fabricii.
Lohmann (8), p. 79, figs. 81, 82.

Char. Ocular plates wide, furnished with a very visible
cornea. Median spine of the penultimate joint of the first
and second pairs of legs finely pennate and furnished with a
tubercle at the base. Epistomial plate rounded in front. All
the claws pectinate; tarsus with a slightly developed ungueal
groove. Anus terminal. Total length 0°52 millim.

Hab. French coast: Arcachon (Trouessart), on oysters ;
shores of the Mediterranean (TZvouwessart), on Corsican moss.
Baltic: Kiel (Lohmann), on fixed and floating Green Algze
and on Red Alge (at 12 fathoms).

12. Halacarus loricatus.
Lohmann (8), p. 81.

Char. Ocular plates wide, with the cornea apparent.
Spine of the penultimate joint not pennate and without a
tubercle at the base. Otherwise like the preceding species.
Total length 0°40 millim.

Hab. Baltic: Kiel (Lohmann), upon Red Algw at 12
fathoms.

13. Halacarus glyptoderma.
Copidognathus glyptoderma, Trouessart (7), p. 754,

Char. Like the preceding species, but the hypostome square,
truncated, wider and shorter than that of H. loricatus. Man-

of the Family Halacaride. 185

dibles stout, terminated by a straight nail in the form of a
serrated knife-blade. Spine of anterior feet not pennate.
Epistomial plate much developed, with three impressions
sculptured in relief, one on each side and one in front.
Total length 0°50 millim.

Hab. Atlantic coast of France: Marennes (Charente-
Inférieure), upon oysters (Zvrouessart).

14, Halacarus Lohmanni, sp. n.

Char. Like the preceding, especially ZZ. Fabrici?. Anterior
legs stouter and shorter than the posterior, with the margins of
the joints angular beneath; tarsus with a well-developed
ungueal groove. Total length 0°40 millim.

This species is dedicated to Dr. H. Lohmann, author of the
monograph of the Halacaride of the Baltic.

Hab. Shores of New Zealand; upon Alge sent to the
Paris Museum (Hariot).

Group C.—Rostrum with the base wide and constricted; the
hypostome short, forming with the rostrum a reversed
heart; cuirass complete, the strongly sculptured plates
only leaving between them a linear space. Last joint of
the palpi slender, elongate, styliform.

15. Halacarus rhodostigma.
Gosse (1), p. 27, pl. iii. figs. 1-5; Lohmann (8), p. 83.

Char. Claws of the feet destitute of lateral teeth and
ciliated combs. ‘T'arsi with no ungueal groove. Cuirass com-
plete, covered with points in rosette not forming more salient
patterns or longitudinal streaks. Second joint of the anterior
legs inflated. ‘Total length 0°35-0°40 millim.

Hab. French coast: Arcachon, Marennes ( Trowessart), upon
oysters (common). English coasts: North Sea (Northum-
berland), Channel (Weymouth, Gosse) ; littoral zone of Lami-
nariz and Corallines.

16. Halacarus gracilipes, sp. n.

Char. Claws destitute of lateral teeth and of combs as in the
preceding species. No ungueal groove on the tarsus. Cuirass
complete, with a sculpture forming projections and longttu-
dinal lines, finer upon the epistomial and notogasirie plates.
Second joint of the anterior limbs not more inflated than that

186 Dr. E. L. Trouessart—Synoptical Revision

of the other legs, which are all slender with cylindrical joints.
Total length 0°40-0°45 millim.

Hab, French coasts: Le Croisic (Chevreux), upon Lascea
rubra; Roches de Castouillet, by dredging with swabs ; Medi-
terranean (Zrouessart), upon Corsican moss ( Gigartina helmin-
thocorton). English coast: Scilly Islands (in a preparation
communicated by Mr. Brady, mixed up with Halacarus
ctenopus).

17. Halacarus oculatus.
Hodge (2); Lohmann (8), p. 82, figs. 67, 68.

Char. Like the two preceding, but rather more elongated ;
second joint of anterior limbs inflated. Claws furnished with
a lateral tooth and a ciliated comb. Cuirass with a sculpture
forming projections and lines as in the preceding species.
Total length 0°38-0°42 millim.

Hab. French coast: Arcachon (Trowessart), upon oysters.
English coast: North Sea, Seaham (Hodge). Baltic, Kiel
(Lohmann) ; region of Red Alge and of floating seaweeds.

18. Halacarus gibbus, sp. n.

Char. Legs very nodose, having the second and fourth
joints inflated on the four pairs, but especially on the anterior
pairs ; claws not pectinate, but furnished with a small slender
tooth. Epistomial plate presenting in the middle a strong
oblique pyramidal crest, the point of which is confounded with
the anterior point of the plate, thus forming a sort of boss or
hood which projects in an acute angle above the rostrum.
Cuirass presenting projections and lines with distinct punc-
tuation, as in the preceding species. ‘Total length 0°40-0°45
millim.

Hab. French coast: Le Croisic (Chevreux), Roches de
Castouillet, by dredging with swabs.

Subgenus LEPTOPSALIS, Trt., 1888.
Genus Leptopsalis, Trouessart (7), p. 754.

Char. Rostrum elongated, with the palpi slender, parallel,
the last joint terminated by a double point ; hypostome forming
a narrow spatuliform groove, attaining the base of the last
joint of the palpi. Otherwise the characters of the genus
Halacarus proper.

Two or three species. The type is Leptopsalis Chevreuct,
Abe

of the Family Halacaride. 187

19. Halacarus (Leptopsalis) longipes.
Trouessart (7), p. 754.

Char. Facies of the nymphs of Hal. spinifer, but pre-
senting the characters of the subgenus. A small spine
directed obliquely forward upon the inner margin of the
penultimate joint of the palpi. Hpistome cut squarely in
front. Legs long, cylindrical; claws pectinate, with a very
feeble lateral tooth ; no ungueal groove. Anterior legs with
slender sete, sparingly spinous. Anus terminal. ‘Total
length 0°60 millim.

Hab. French coast: Pas-de-Calais, Wimereux ((iard),
on the byssus of mussels. A single individual, 2nd nymph *.

20. Halacarus (Leptopsalis) Chevreuat.
Trouessart (10), p. 162.

Char. Body ovoid-conical, with the anus terminal. Legs
very nodose, with the penultimate joint pyriform. Epistome
short, belobate, with a median emargination. Rostrum much
elongated, slender, and compressed; hypostome very long,
thin, and spatuliform ; mandibles very slender, nearly styli-
form. Claws pectinate, with a small median piece. Tarsus
with an ungueal groove. The variety from the Mediter-
ranean has the penultimate joint of the legs rather angular
than pyriform. ‘The cuirass is nearly smooth. Total length
0:80-0:90 millim.

Hab. French coast: Le Croisic (collected in numbers by
M. Chevreux, to whom the species is dedicated), Baie de
Port-lin on Red Seaweeds (Floridez), on Polysiphonia and
on Alcyonidium hirsutum; Baie de Croisic on Oorallina
officinalis, Laminarian zone; Banc de Basse-Hergo on brown
Alge, &c. ; Saint-Jean-de-Luz (Newmann) on Alge. Shores
of the Mediterranean (Zrouessart) on the Corsican moss
(Gigartina helminthocorton) ft.

* Another Halacarid, taken by M. Chevreux at Le Croisic upon Sponges
(Halichondria panicea), greatly resembles this species and has the extre-
mity of the palpi bifid; but the hypostome is less spatuliform, the hairs
of the anterior legs are spinous, as in ZH. spinifer, and there is an ungueal
groove.

- + A third species would appear to take its place in this subgenus, viz. :—

Halacarus olivaceus, Grube, Abhandl. schl, Ges. Naturw, 1868, p. 121,
pl. ii. fig. 8. This species, which we know only from Grube’s figure and
description, approaches Leptopsalis Chevreurt in the form of its rostrum
and legs. Obtained by Grube at the island of Batz, near Roscoff.

188 Dr. E. L. Trouessart— Synoptical Revision

Genus AGAUE, Lohmann, 1889.
Lohmann (8), p. 85.

Char. Palpi articulated laterally to the rostrum, elongated,
mobile, third joint scarcely shorter than the last one, which is
conical and bears some short sete. Otherwise the characters
are those of Halacarus proper.

M. Lohmann (Jl. c.) has taken as the type of this genus the
Halacarus parvus of Chilton *, a species from New Zealand
which is known to us only from the description and figure
given by the last-named author.

But this description and figure leave some doubts as to the
true aflinities of this species, which might well be a Lep-
topsalis. In consequence of this M. Lohmann (in ltteris)
has kindly agreed with us to take as the type of the genus
Agaue brevipalpus, Trt., a species from the Atlantic and
Mediterranean, which distinctly presents the characters of the
genus as indicated by M. Lohmann himself.

This genus, which is essentially southern (as it does not
advance towards the north beyond the mouth of the Loire),
includes, besides H. parvus, four species, of which three are
Kuropean.

1. Agaue brevipalpus.
Trouessart (10), p. 181.

Char. Rostrum elongated, with a broad conical base, and
with the anterior region (starting from the base of the palpi)
narrow and compressed ; hypostome passing beyond the point
of the palpi; third joint of the palpi bearing a short and
slender spine directed forward. pistome terminated in front
by a very obtuse point. Anterior legs more robust than the

* Chilton, /. c. (6), describes two species of Halacaridz from the shores
of New Zealand, viz. :— “

1, Halacarus parvus, Chilton.
Agaue parva, Lohmann, /. c, p. 86,

Char. Epistomial plate cut squarely, slightly rounded in front. Claws
pectinate, furnished with a large lateral tooth ; an ungueal groove. First
pair of legs with close-set tactile hairs. Total length 0°70 millim.

Hab. New Zealand, Littleton Harbour, littoral zone.

2. Halacarus truncipes, Chilton.

Char. This species is remarkable for the great development of the
ungueal groove of the tarsus, within which the claws can be withdrawn
and completely concealed, in such a way that Chilton supposes that they
do not exist and are replaced by simple hairs.

Same habitat.

of the Family Halacaride. 189

others, bearing large prickles with blunt or turned points.
Claws not pectinate, with no median piece, Tarsi with no
ungueal groove. Anus terminal. Dorsal plates not well-
developed, separated by a wide space of striated and shagreened
skin. ‘otal length 0°53 millim.

Hab. French coast: Arcachon (Trouessart) on oysters,
Le Croisic (Chevreux) on Red Seaweeds (Floridez), Baie de
Port-lin. Mediterranean (7rouessart) on the Corsican moss
(Gigartina helminthocorton) .

2. Agaue hirsuta.
Trouessart (10), p. 181.

Char. Like the preceding species, but larger and more
robust. Legs of the first pair very long and very stout, twice
as thick as the others, with very stout blunted prickles.
Epistome acutely pointed. Rostrum short and stout, with the
hypostome shorter than the palpi, deeply bilobed. Claws of
the mandibles recurved and very stout. Last joint of the
palpi short, acutely pointed; third joint furnished with a
stout short spine, directed inwards or somewhat oblique.
Claws briefly pectinate in a serrate form, furnished with avery
stout unidentate median piece. ‘Two rows of stout setee on the
back. ‘Total length 0°-70-0°75 millim.

Hab. Shores of the Mediterranean on the Corsican moss.
( Trouessart).

3. Agaue microrhyncha.

Trouessart (10), p. 181.

Char. Like the two preceding in general form, but with a
short, small, and feeble rostrum. Eypistome obtuse. Claws
pectinate, except those of the first pair, with no projection at
the median piece. Dermal cutrass complete, the dorsal plates
having only a nearly linear space between them. ‘Total
length 0°43 millim.

Hab. Shores of the Mediterranean on the Corsican moss,
with the two preceding species ( Z’rouessart).

4, Agaue cryptorhyncha, sp. 1.

Char. Similar to A. hirsuta, but with the anterior legs
scarcely longer and a little stouter than the others, second and
fourth joints armed with large blunt prickles. ‘Two. stout
pointed prickles below the penultimate (4th) joint of the second
pair of legs. Rostrum in great part concealed beneath the

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. i4

190 Dr. E. L. Trouessart— Synoptical Revision

epistome, of which the anterior margin, cut squarely and a
little rounded, advances as far as half the length of the
second joint of the palpi. Inward spine of third joint very
slender. Claws pectinate except the first pair; tooth of the
median piece appearing to be inserted beneath the tarsus in
the form of a short spine (except in the first pair, where it is
in its normal position, as in A. Adrsuta). Plates of the
cuirass finely punctured, leaving little space between them.
Total length 0°68 millim.

Hab. Shores of ‘Vierra del Fuego, Cape Horn (Hariot),

upon Algae (Ceramium Dozit).

Genus SCAPTOGNATHUS, gen. nov.

Char. Rostrum large, separated from the body by a well-
marked constriction, pyriform as in the genus Leptognathus.
Palpi very stout, arranged laterally, widely separated from
each other, and constructed to act horizontally one opposite to
the other ; second joint very long and very stout, armed at its
extremity with a strong double spine directed inwards ; third
joint null or very small; fourth bent downwards, very
slender, styliform, Epistome very short or null, leaving the
rostrum exposed. Hypostome very long, attaining the ex-
tremity of the second joint of the palpi, strongly spatuliform.
Mandibles very long and very slender, with the point straight
styliform.

Only one species known. Notwithstanding the resemblance
presented by this type in the general form of the rostrum to
the genus Leptognathus, it difters therefrom essentially in the
structure of the parts of the mouth. ‘The palpi, with the
second joint very robust and furnished with an inwardly-
directed fork at its extremity, constitute organs of prehension
evidently intended to act in the horizontal and not vertical
direction. On the other hand the very slender mandibles can
act only in an antero-posterior direction by sliding in. the
groove of the hypostome.

1. Scaptognathus tridens, sp. n.

Char. Rostrum very large, nearly as long as the body;
second joint of the palpi in the form of a cubitus, of which
the olecranon would represent the anterior extremity outwards;
this extremity furnished within with a strong forked spine in
the form of a mattock, forming, with the slender and pointed
last joint, which is bent downwards, a sort of trident. Hypo-
stome transparent, dilated in front in the formofaT. Legs all

of the Family Halacaride. 191

slender, cylindrical, with feeble, non-pectinate claws. Cuirass
sculptured like the skin of a Crocodile, especially on the base
of the rostrum. Total length 0°75 millim. (rostrum alone
0:30 millim.).

Hab. Le Croisic (Chevreux), Roches de Castouillet, by

dredging with swabs.

Genus LEPTOGNATHUS, Hodge, 1860.

Leptognathus, Hodge (2) ; Lohmann (8), p. 86.

Char. Rostrum very long, compressed, constricted at the
base. Palpi articulated upon the dorsal surface of the ros-
trum, along the median line, forming, with the elongated
pointed hypostome, a forceps, of which the movable branches
(palpi) move vertically ; the second joints of the palpi touching
each other throughout their length in repose. Claw of the
mandible recurved. Epistome very short, apparently replaced
by the base of the maxillary palpi. Three species of this
genus have been described.

1. Leptognathus falcatus.

Leptognathus falcatus, Hodge (2).

Rhaphignathus falcatus, Brady (3), p. 807, pl. xlii. figs. 7-10.

Leptognathus falcatus, Lohmann (8), p. 89.

Char. Epistome extending as far as the base of the palpi,
between which it projects in the form of a small button.
Anus projecting ina bulb-like form. Plates of the cuirass
smooth. ‘Total length 0°90 millim.

Hab. French coast: Pas-de-Calais, Wimereux (G'zard), on
Lasea rubraand Corallina officinalis. English coast (Hodge,
Brady): Laminarian and Coralline zones, Northumberland

and Scilly Islands.

2. Leptognathus marinus.
Lohmann (8), p. 88, figs. 121, 122.
Char. Differs from the preceding species chiefly by its
small size. Total length 0°60 millim.
Hab. French coast : Le Croisic (Chevreua), Grande Céte,
on Corallina officinalis. Baltic: Kiel (Lohmann), upon red
and green Algz, at 12 fathoms.

3. Leptognathus violaceus.
Kramer, Arch. f. Naturg. 1879.

Char. This species appears to differ from the preceding
only by its pitted cuirass. Total length 0°88 millim.
Hab, Pools of Thuringia, upon Algw (Kramer).

192 Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing on the

Synoptical Table of the Genera of the Family Halacaride.

: ( Palpi lateral, separate ...... . RHOMBOGNATHUS ;
A. Rostrum short, triangular; | Palpi lateral, separate 1, RuomBoen , Trt

Y joints in the palpi , :
ur es P&'P*s.2 Palpi touching above the ros-

Mer ei op enet | Conver= (is SEraimeet Ea meee tetas eee 2. SimoanaTuus, Trt.

( Only three joints in the palpi .......... 3. CoLoBocERws, Trt.
(Palpi termi-

B. Rostrum elon- : i nated by a> 4. Hatacarus, Gosse.
gate, not con- Joint 3 soe ene
stricted _at its” palpi much) ~ ely :
base, with the shorter than } Palpi_termi-

palpi parallel. Four Ube nated by a} Subg. Lepropsatis, Trt.

double point.

the palpi.

Joint 3 of palpi nearly as long

as joint 4,

joints in’
| 5. AGAvE, Lohm.

appearing to be formed of

6. ScapTrognaTuus, Trt.
only three joints.

C. Rostrum much elongated,
constricted at its base, pyri-<
form. Palpi in contact above the ros-

| trum, with four well-deve-

loped joints.

( Palpilateral, widely separated,
| 7. Leptocnatuus, Hodg

XXVI.—The right Generic Names of some Amphipoda.
By the Rev. THomas R. R. Stespine, M.A.

In the ‘Annals and Magazine’ for December 1868, Norman
defined a new genus felleria, with Helleria coalita, n. sp.,
for the type. By a slip either of the pen or of the press the
superior antenne were said to be with, instead of without
secondary appendage. ‘That the superior antenna were much
shorter than the inferior was made a generic character.
Earlier in the same year, 1868, as was subsequently pointed
out by Eaton, the name Hellerza had been given by Ebner to
a genus of the Isopoda. The Amphipod genus, however, was
left with its name unaltered until 1887. In that year
E. Chevreux, having obtained specimens of both sexes of
Norman’s species, renamed the genus Guernea, with a Latin
rendering of the original definition. In this he retained the
statement that the upper antenne have an accessory flagellum,
but omitted the character describing them as longer than the
lower antennx, because he found that this did not apply to

right Generic Names of some Amphipoda. 193
the female. In the same year, 1887, H. J. Hansen described

his Prinassus Nordenskidldit, n. gen., n. sp., without giving
any separate generic definition. His single specimen was a
female, in which the upper antenne were rather longer than
the lower, and had no accessory flagellum. ‘There is every
probability that his species is the same as Norman’s Hellerva
coalita, and there can be no doubt that his genus is identical
with that defined by Norman and Chevreux. Whether
Guernea or Prinassus should have the priority is not so easy
to decide. Chevreux’s paper comes to hand as an “ Extrait
du Bulletin de la Société Zoologique de France, t. xii. 1887,”
and is dated on the cover as published in Paris, 1887.
Hansen’s paper similarly comes to hand as a “ Sertryk af
Vidensk. Meddel. fra den naturh. Foren. i Kjébh. i887,”
and is dated on the titlepage as published in Kjébenhavn,
1887. Extracts from the ‘Annals and Magazine’ have the
great advantage of showing the exact month in which the
description of a new genus or species has appeared, but in the
extracts above-mentioned there is nothing to indicate which
has the priority. It would be a decided boon if, in all publi-
cations of the kind, this inconvenience could be remedied. In

apers extracted from the reports, for instance, of our own
British Association, there is in general nothing which de-
cidedly shows whether they were published during the year
in which they were read, or not till the following year. In
the case of the Transactions of a Society for any given year,
the presumption will be that they were not actually published
till the year following, although in some instances parts of
these Transactions may have been in fact issued while the
year to which they refer was still current. It would save
much trouble if “ separate copies’? were provided with an
exact reference to the volume and paging of the work from
which the excerpt is made, as well as with the true date, not
of the reading, or not of that alone, but of the first actual
publishing of the paper concerned,

It may be of interest to English readers to know that the
genus Hriopis, Bruzelius, which Boeck identified with Niphar-
gus, Schiddte, was reinstated in 1888 by the eminent Polish
writer, Wrzesniowski, who found that the maxilla were dis-
tinct in the two genera. It appears, however, from Scudder’s
‘ Nomenclator Zoologicus,’ that Hriopis was preoccupied be-
fore its use by Bruzelius, and therefore, as Opis was altered
into Opisa, 1 propose to change Eriopis, Bruzelius, into Hri-
opisa.

Dr. P. P. C. Hoek, recently appointed Director of the new
Zoological Station at Helder, last year explained that his

194 Bibliographical Notices.

Orthopalame Terschellingii had proved to be identical with
Microprotopus maculatus, a genus and species described by
Norman in the ‘ Annals and Magazine’ for December 1868.
The genus Orthopalame is therefore cancelled.

M. Jules Bonnier has also, during 1889, discovered and
pointed out that in instituting the new genus Dryope in 1862,
the late Mr. Spence Bate was in error in attributing two
branches to the last uropods, and that, in fact, the genus
Dryope, of which the name was preoccupied, is identical with
the genus Unciola, Say. The uropods in question are diffi-
cult to observe, because, while above they are covered by the
minutely scabrous telson, below they are almost concealed
by the produced ventral plate of the sixth segment of the
pleon. It may be questioned whether the inner branch of the
third uropods in this genus is not rather coalesced with the
peduncle than absolutely wanting. This is a point which
some embryologist might decide.

Of the species which Dr. Julius Vosseler described last
year among the Amphipoda of Spitzbergen under the name
“Amphitopsis dubia, n. sp.,” it may be said that there is great
reason to regard it as identical with Amphithopsis glacialis,
Hansen, 1887, although Hansen does not figure or mention the
pair of apical setules which Vosseler notices and represents on
the telson. Hansen suggests that his species ought possibly
to be referred to Boeck’s genus Laothoés, because the lower
antenne are longer than the upper. In Boeck’s genus, how-
ever, it is the upper antenne that are longer than the lower.
Further, in Laothoés the first maxille have a little one-jointed
palp, while Vosseler, at least for his “Amphitopsis dubia,”
figures the first maxille as having a large two-jointed palp.
Boeck himself says that Laothoés was preoccupied by Fabri-
cius among Lepidoptera in 1808, and therefore ought to be
exchanged for some other name to stand among the Amphi-
poda. Scudder gives ‘‘ Laothoe, Fabr. Lep. 1808, A ;” and if
this is correct, there will be no need to alter Boeck’s generic
name, but figures of Laothoés Meinerti, Boeck, are, I believe,
still a desideratum.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

The Flora of Suffolk. By W.M. Hinp, LL.D., assisted by the late
Cuvurcuitt Basineron, D.D., F.L.S. London: Gurney and
Jackson, 1889. Pp. xxxiv, 1-508.

In 1860 a ‘Flora of Suffolk’ by the Rev. J. 8. Henslow and E.

Skepper was published, the former of whom regarded himself as “ a

consulting but sleeping partner.” This, which was issued more as

Bibliographical Notices. 195

an inducement to others to add to, than as complete, is now followed
up by the present work, which, none the less that the author regards
it as not pretending ‘‘ to be an exhaustive account of the botany of
Suffolk,” is a great advance in the right direction, and shows that a
large amount of information has been gathered together and utilized.

The book contains a Map of the County, introductory chapters
treating of the Natural Features, Geology, Climate, Rainfali, and
Distribution of Plants; a plan of the Flora, Books, MSS., Herberia,
and Authorities; the Flora proper, with a chapter on Paleonto-
logical Botany ; Tabular View of the Species of Suffolk and adjoin-
ing Counties; the flora of East Anglia and Holland compared ;
the Progress of Botany in Suffolk; Additions, Corrections, and
Indexes.

What are the features that make the flora of an East Anglian
county specially interesting to the botanist? There are two, the
Fens and Broads, and the remarkable district called the ‘ breck-
lands.” We may dispose of the Broads by saying that they are
probably not much altered so far as plant-life goes by drainage and
are mostly “ growing-up,” that is, becoming smaller by the growth
of the surrounding vegetation, though they are nothing like botani-
cally examined.

With the Fens the case is very different ; in Suffolk a strip along
the northern part of the county and perhaps a very small portion
between Ely and Lakenheath is all that is in anything like a state
of nature, such as Wicken Fen in Cambridgeshire at present ‘is.

The flora of the “ breck-lands” is perhaps the most local and
specialized in Britain; many of the species are quite confined to
these sandy heaths and warrens, and not only do the plants point to
a former maritime condition, but the birds and insects also, and it
seems probable that there are yet other species to be found in early
spring.

The historical aspect of a flora is always of much interest ; we
cannot trace back our records more than three centuries with any
certainty. Mr. D. Jackson has disposed of the supposed records by
Scribonins Largus in Kent, and shown that they are mythical. Dr.
Hind says “in some pre-Reformation glass in Gislingham Church
the columbine (Aquilegia vulgaris) is represented ; similar flowers
have been recently found in the neighbouring parish of Yaxley by
the Rev. W. H. Sewell, who regards the painting as the record of a
plant grown on the spot in the fifteenth century or even earlier.”

Cf course this is, as the author observes, “‘a somewhat doubtful
interpretation of an historical monument.”

This is now not capable of proof, and the first record Dr. Hind
has for Suffolk is the Sea-Pea (Lathyrus maritimus) by Caius (1555),
quoted by Martyn in his ed. of Miller’s ‘The Gardener’s and
Botanist’s Dictionary,’ followed by those from Rev. Dr. Bullen
(1562), Turner (1568), and Gerarde (1597), &e.

Taking the flora as it is written, the Map shows the county
divided into five botanical districts founded on the political divisions
for parliamentary purposes. This seems the mistake of an other-

196 Bibliographical Notices.

wise admirable book ; what possible connexion the two can have it
is difficult to see. It may at once be admitted that the county is
not one that lends itself to easy division by the river-basins, now so
generally adopted. Where even some modification of this has been
attempted in conjunction with other natural features (as in a late
‘Flora of Finland’) the result is better than here given.

Dr. Hind gives the one (and sole?) reason in its favour—the ease
of finding them on any ordinary map. Three of the districts in the
east and the other two in the west nearly fall into the E. and W.
Suffolk of Mr. H. C. Watson’s Topographical Botany, his division of
the county being the meridian of Greenwich, not a good one it must
be admitted.

The introductory chapters are very well done, but it is time that
under Climate the highest and lowest temperatures if given should
be associated with what really affects plant-life, 2. e. the aggregate
amount of heat in summer and cold in winter, accompanied in the
latter with some statistics of the snowfall; again, early spring tem-
peratures are a great factor in plant-life, and especially April varia-
tions; the writer has known Channel-Island plants to survive 25°
of frost in February, but suecumb to 8° in April &e.

The author (with his confréres) has consulted or had entrusted to
him a large number of local herberia, and, what is better, made
good use of them. ‘There seem to be very few improbabilities in the
Flora proper; but under @nanthe some revision is needed. It may
very reasonably be suggested that @. pimpinelloides should be
deleted and its localities in part relegated to @. Lachenalii and some
perhaps to @. silaifulia? Stsymbrium irto should surely have been
starred as an introduction; this has probably been accidentally
omitted to Sempervivum. Melampyrum sylvaticum can hardly be
that species ; probably M. pratense, var. hians, Druce, is really the
plant found. The authority for Galeopsis dubia, Leers, is not good
enough to accept it as a Suffolk plant. Henslow and Skepper’s
record for Lithospermum purpureo-cernleum is not mentioned ; it
was, however, hardly likely to have been a native at Bergholt.

The absences from a flora are always of interest; but when the
county list and that of the adjoining counties is thrown into the
tabular form consulting it becomes wearisome and the eye is apt to
be misled. If the ‘pales form must be given, a list added after, of
all the wants of the county, with indications of their distribution
around, condensed as in Mr. Watson’s works, would be of especial
use.

Of the absences @nanthe crocata may be noted ; this is wanting
in Cambridgeshire and a large portion of northern Essex, and,
although given as a notable one, is perhaps not so, as on present
knowledge it seems absent from Holland, Belgium, and Denmark.
Lathyrus montanus, Bernh. (Orobus tuberosus), is a much more
remarkable absentee, though wanting in Norfolk? and Cambridge-
shire.

Potamogeton zosterifolius and P. acuitfolius can hardly be really
absent, though doubtless they will (if found) be very rare and local.

Bibliographical Notices. 197

The chapter comparing the flora with that of Holland induces one
to wish that this had been carried further, so little of such work
has been attempted in British local floras. Being the work of the
late Dr. Babington, Dr. Hind probably did right in so leaving it ;
none the less it is to be regretted. One plant, however, stated to
be absent from Holland ts not so, 1. e. Peucedanum palustre,
Meench., but occurs in many parts abundantly ; doubtless the slip
has occurred from the Dutch betanists putting it under the genus
Thysselinium, Hoffm.; had it been absent it would have been a
remarkable fact in distribution. Arenaria leptoclados and Galium
Vaillantii are also Dutch species.

The chapter on “The Progress of Botanical Study in Suffolk ”
contains much interesting matter and satisfactorily concludes the
work,

The writer would suggest that if a new edition is at any time
undertaken a careful examination should be made of the material at
Kew, in Smith’s and Winch’s herbaria at the Linnean Society, and
in the British herbarium at the Natural-History Museum at Ken-
sington; in the first two there certainly is additional matter, and
though very time-consuming, the want, if known, may be filled by
some one. In these matters we miss that kind and ever-helpful
botanist the late Rey. W. W. Newbould.

ARTHUR BENNETT.

The Fauna of British India, including Ceylon and Burma. Pub-
lished under the Authority of the Secretary of State for India in
Council. Edited by W. T. Branrorp. Birds.—Vol. I. By
Kuernr W. Oares. London; Taylor and Francis.

In his able Preface the Editor of this series justly congratulates
Indian ornithologists upon tie acquisition of the services of the
author of ‘The Birds of Burmah,’ a work which, from the excel-
lence of its letterpress, deserves to be bracketed with Col. Legge’s
‘Birds of Ceylon.’ From the scientific point of view the present
volume and the two which are to follow will supersede the well-
known and classic Jerdon, although many old Indians, who care little
for classification, will continue to dwell with pleasure on the badly-
printed pages from which they received their earliest lessons in
bird-lore. In this they will be justified by the fact that Jerdon’s
work contains more ample notes on migration, habits, folk-lore, &c.
than will be found in Mr. Oates’s book, owing to the limits assigned
by the authorities to the number and size of the volumes which
make up this series. When we consider that the sum total of species
enumerated by Jerdon will be exceeded in the present work by more
than one half, the necessity for compression by the author will be
obvious. The increase is largely due to the extension of the area now
comprised in British India, but also to the number of additional
species that have been recorded from localities which were little
known in Jerdon’s time, when such collections as those now in the

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 15

198 Miscellaneous.

British Museum—the Hume, Tweeddale, and other representative
series—were undreamt of.

In this instalment, which contains a great part of the Acromyo-
dian Passeres, the arrangement of the families is new and to some
extent based upon the plumage of the young birds, a character of
unquestionable value as evidence of relationship, Mr. Oates begins
with the Corvide, which he divides into three subfamilies—Corvine,
Parine (Tits), and Paradoxornithine ; and the position of the
second will come as a shock to a good many old-fashioned syste-
matists. While we think of it we may note, for correction in the
errata, a slip of the pen on p. 16, line 19, where ‘ eastwards”
should be ‘“ westwards.” Wisely, as we think, Mr. Oates has
retained the Jackdaw in the genus Corvus, and has not placed it
under Coleus; but, having done this, it seems inconsistent to put
the Red-billed and the Yellow-billed Choughs each in a different
genus, solely on account of the shape of their beaks. In the Para-
doxornithine he makes a new genus, Scworhynchus (p. 68). The
next family—Crateropodidee—contains Lthopocichla (p. 159), Sitti-
parus (p. 171), Lioparus (p. 174), Hilarocichla (p. 243), Alophorxvus
(p. 259), and Xanthiwus (p. 274), gg. nn.; while we gather that
Criniger burmanicus and Molpastes humw are here distinguished
specifically for the first time, though no ‘“ sp. n.” is inserted to catch
the eye of the Recorder of Aves. In the Dicruridee Dissemurulus,
in the Certhiide Hlachura, are gg. nn.; Regulus is raised to the
rank of a family; the Sylviide, Laniidee, Oriolide, Eulabetide, and
Sturnide follow, and in the last there is a new genus, Agropsar.
Woodcuts of the typical species or of their heads and feet add to
the value of this carefully-written volume, which will for a long
time hold its place as the standard work on Indian ornithology.

We would suggest that in the succeeding volumes a little more
system with regard to proper names is desirable. As a rule, when
we find simply Blyth, Jerdon, Anderson, or Stolickza, we understand
that those naturalists are dead; but here, although Col. Godwin-
Austen, Dr. Scully, Messrs. Hume, Blanford, Davison, and many
others are happily still among us, their names seldom, if ever, have
a prefix. In fact Col. Lloyd, Dr. Stewart (dead, we believe), Mr.
Gammie, and Mr. Bligh are among the few thus distinguished ; and,
remembering the wrath-appeasing reply of the subaltern to Lord
Gough-—“ Sir, we never say General Alexander or General Cesar ”
—this exceptional and distant politeness seems somewhat invidious.

MISCELLANEOUS.
Mimicry of the Environment in Pterophryne histrio.
By Mr. J. E. Ivzs,

Tun author stated that his attention had been drawn to the
remarkable resemblance of the colour-markings of the Frog-fish to
the Sargassum weed in which it lives. This fish is a member of the

Miscellaneous. 199

Pediculati, and shares the sluggish habits common to the group.
On account of the elongation of the carpal bones and other peculiar
modifications, they have poor powers of swimming, their structure
being adapted to moving about on the bottom, among corals, sea-
weed, and other low forms of life, which they closely resemble in
colour and in many points of outline. By this resemblance they are
concealed both from their enemies and their prey. The member of
the group best known is the common Fishing-frog, Lophius pisca-
tortus, whose remarkable mimicry of its surroundings has been well
described by Mr. 8. Kent. In the genus Antennarius, closely related
to Pterophryne, the species present wonderful similarity of colour to
the forms among which they live. Dr. Giinther has paid considerable
attention to this genus, and he has also given an excellent figure of
Pterophryne histrio, under the name of Antennarius marmoratus*.
Pterophryne histrio is found among the floating masses of Sargassum
weed in the warm seas. Here it makes its peculiar nest by binding
together the fronds of the sea-weed with gelatinous threads, and
depositing the eggs throughout the mass. The ground-colour of the
fish is of a pale yellow, and on this light background are darker
irregular brownish bands, closely resembling the branched fronds of
the Sargassum weed. Along the edges of these darker bands, on
the bands themselves, and also to a lesser extent upon the rest of
the body, are little white specks of various sizes, on an average about
that of a pin’s head. On the belly, around the mouth, and on the
dorsal spines, are numerous leaf-like cutaneous filaments. Mr. Ives
stated that, after careful consideration, he had come to the conclusion
that the colour-markings of the fish, and the cutaneous filaments,
had been developed in mimicry of the Spirorbis-covered Sargassum
weed. Professor Benjamin Sharp, who spent last winter in the West
Indies, had informed Mr. Ives that on the Sargassum weed, of which
he saw large quantities, were invariably scattered great numbers of
Spirorbis shells. Professor Moseley in “ Notes by a Naturalist on
the ‘ Challenger’ ” (p. 567) speaks of the resemblance in coloration
of the forms inhabiting the Sargasso Sea to the Sargassum weed.
He attributes the white spots of Pterophryne histrio and also of some
shrimps and crabs to mimicry of the patches of Membranipora that
encrust the Sargassum weed. The white spots upon Pterophryne
histrio, however, are much smaller than the patches of Membra-
nipora, and are also much more striking to the eye. This latter
fact appears to be due to the delicate fenestrated character of this
Bryozoan. The patches of Membranipora, also, do not occur in the
same abundance upon the Sargassum weed as do the Spirorbis
shells. Professor Moseley probably confounded the numerous Spir-
orbis shells with patches of Membranipora. As far back as 1757,
Peter Osbeck, describing this fish which he had met with in the
Sargassum weed of the Atlantic Ocean while on a journey to the
East Indies, said, with reference to the cutanecus filaments, “ pro-
bably Providence has clothed it in this leaf-like manner, in order

* Journal des Museum Godeffroy, Heft xi. pp. 161-165, pls. 99-106.

200 Miscellaneous.

that the predaceous fishes might confound it with the sea-weed, and
therefore not exterminate it” *.—Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad.
Nov. 5, 1889, p. 344.

On Seasonal Dimorphism in Japanese Butterflies.
By Dr, Avotr Frirze.

Besides the nine Butterflies cited by Pryer > as seasonally di-
morphous in Japan, namely Papilio machaon, L., P. «uthus, L.,
P. macilentus, Janson, Pieris napi, L., Golias hyale, 1b iors
multiformis, Pryer, Vanessa C-album, L., V. C-aureum, te and
Polyommatus phleas, L., two new ones occur, according £0 my
investigations in the interior of central J apan in the summer “of 1889,
namely T'hecla arata, Brem., and Vanessa levana, L,

Thecla arata, Brem., which has hitherto been regarded as single-
brooded, has two generations which are markedly seasonally di-
morphous, and this seasonal dimorphism shows itself especially upon
the underside, while the upperside of both generations is uniformly
blue; only the blue of the summer form is darker than that of the
winter form. In the latter the ground-colour of the underside is
dark greyish green, interrupted by three white bands of different
breadth, to which are added on the hind wings several smaller
white streaks. The lower angle of the hind wings is orange-red,
with four black spots, the two upper ones haying a bluish-white
nucleus. It is this generation that Pryer has figured. It flies in
May and June.

The summer generation, which flies in August, shows on the
underside exactly the pattern of the spring generation, but instead
of the greyish-green coloration we have here a dark brown, and in
place of the white bands and streaks we find light brown ones;
the orange-red of the angle of the hind wings is much less intense,
and the bluish-white nuclei in the black spots disappear entirely or
almost entirely.

Vanessa levana, L.—The seasonal dimorphism of the European
form of this species has long been known; it occurs also in the
Japanese form, although here other and very remarkable characters
occur. Thus, while the summer generation, the so-called prorsa
form, which flies in August, is exactly like the German form, the
German spring generation, the /evana form, is entirely wanting in
central Japan. In its place appears a prorima form, which has a
rather close resemblance to the form figured by Weismann in his
‘Studien zur Descendenztheorie’ pl. i. fig. 2. From this the
Japanese prorima is distinguished chiefly by the greater prominence
of the black spots and bands, by several brown spots at the root of
the fore wings, and by a straight light brown transverse band upon
the hind wings. This generation flies in May and June, and has
hitherto been regarded as a distinct species, Vanessa burejana,
Brem.—Zool. Anzeiger, January 13, 1890, p. 12.

* Peter Osbeck, Reise nach Ostindien und China. Aus dem schwed-_
ischen ubersetzt von J. G. Georgi; Rostock, 1765, p. 400.

t Pryer, ‘ Rhopalocera Niponica.—A description of the Butterflies of
Japan,’ Jokohama, 1886 and 1888,

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SIXTH SERIES. ]

No. 27. MARCH 1890.

XXVII.—On Abdominal Appendages tn Hexapoda.
By E. Haase *.

In his celebrated memoir upon the development of the Great
Water-Beetle (Hydrophilus piceus) A. Kowalewsky, in 1871,
first called attention to the fact that in the embryo of an
insect stages might occur in which certain abdominal seg-
ments bear appendicular structures homologous with the
thoracic legs. He first observed such leg-rudiments on the
first two abdominal segments, and then saw the posterior pair
disappear, while the anterior remained longer in the form of
small tubercles. ‘These results of Kowalewsky’s were exten-
ded by K. Heider in 1886 + so far that “ at a certain period
of development indications of the rudiments of extremities
may be recognized on all the abdominal segments.”’

In 1877 V. Graber } succeeded in establishing the occur-
rence of rudimentary appendages homologous with the legs
on the first and second abdominal segments in a Mantis (I.
religiosa).

In 1884 H. Ayers found that in an American Cricket

* Translated from the ‘Sitzungsberichte der Gesellschaft Naturfor-
schender Freunde zu Berlin, Jahrg. 1889, pp. 19-29.

+ Abhandl. d. k. preuss. Akad. d. Wiss. m Berlin, p. 42.
t ‘ Die Insecten, i. fig. 1; and see Morphol. Jahrb, xiii. (1888), tab.

xxv. fig. 18.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 16

202 M. E. Haase on Abdominal

(Qeanthus niveus), soon after the segmentation of the blas-
toderm, an indeterminate number of paired tubercles are formed
upon the abdomen, which exactly correspond to the first
traces of the true thoracic legs, but of which only those
on the first and last (?) segments are retained for any length
of time.

Further, in 1884, W. Patten observed in a Caddis-worm
(Neophylax concinnus) that, when the thoracic legs are about
half-grown, a pair of rudimentary appendages are developed
upon each of the first three abdominal segments. He also
found * that in the embryo of the House-Cockroach (Blatta
germanica) a considerable number of abdominal appendages
are originally developed, but that they rapidly disappear
down to the first pair.

Finally, V. Graber ¢ has recently recognized within the
eight pairs of abdominal stigmata the same number of unde-
veloped limb-rudiments, of which the appendages of the first
abdominal segment especially, both in their position and their
histological structure, were perfectly homologous with those
of the thorax.

From these statements we obtain a fresh support for the
supposition that the eatsting Hexapoda are to be derived from
polypodous myriopodiform ancestors.

After Balfour (1880) had adopted this view, the author
sought (in 1881) to determine that primitive form of the
Tracheata from which both Myriopoda and Hexapoda were
to be derived, and came to the result of adopting as such a
hypothetical form, nearly allied to the recent order Symphyla,
which is represented only by the single genus Scolopendrella,
and this he named Protosymphyla.

The more accurate investigations of last year, specially
furthered by B. Grassi’s labours, already enable us to attempt
the closer definition of the characters of these hypothetical
forms by the elimination of such peculiarities as appear to
have been acquired secondarily by the existing orders which
come under consideration.

Notwithstanding that in the indefiniteness of the parts of
its mouth, the simplicity of its body-segments, &c., it far
exceeds all known ‘Tracheata, Scolopendrella itself is to be
regarded as a form secondarily developed in several direc-
tions, especially degeneratively. ‘Thus its tracheal apertures
are confined to the lower surface of the head, its visual organs
are aborted, and its thirteenth pair of legs converted into a
tactile organ, which yet possesses no ganglion. If the sexual

* Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. 1884, p. 48.
+t Morphol. Jahrb. xiii, (1888), p. 598.

Appendages in Hexapoda. 203

organs by their being paired, as also by their rather ventral
position on each side of the intestine, show a primitive con-
dition, their opening in an unpaired slit *, placed behind the
third pair of legs, appears to be of secondary origin.

The order Chilopoda also, as already urged by V. Graber
and the author in opposition to F. Brauer, is above all ex-
cluded from being regarded as a direct ancestor of the Insecta,
by the decided drawing up of the first pair of legs to form
part of the mouth-organs, and, further, the asymmetrical
development of the dorsally-placed sexual organs is to be
regarded as secondary, although their aperture, situated close
in front of the anus, shows the original type, still represented
by the Annelid-like Peripatus.

To decide the question whether the postembryonal increase
from 9 or 7 to 17 ¢ or 13 leg-bearing segments common to
the Chilopoda Anamorpha (e. g. Lithobius) and Scolopendrella
is to be regarded as a phyletic repetition, or, as is more pro-
bable, as a secondary larval phenomenon, our knowledge is
still insufficient; at any rate, in Scolopendrella the gemmipa-
rous zone is situated in front of the subsequent thirteenth pair,
and therefore, as in the Chilopoda, immediately before the
preanal segment, and the insertion of new somites occurs from
before backward, so that in both the hindmost pair of ambu-
latory legs is also the youngest.

The order Diplopoda stands in the closest relation to Sco-
lopendrella by the intimate fusion of the last two pairs of jaws
into a gnathochilarium, which appears as a simple appen-
dage even in the first embryonic rudiment, and by the anterior,
although separated, opening of their paired and decidedly
ventrally-situated genital sacs (behind the second pair of
legs); and their apparently double segments are to be
accounted for by the union of two individual segments
effected by the fusion of their dorsal plates, as demonstrated
by Newport and since, among others, by the author, Latzel,
and, recently, Heathcote. In point of fact the resemblance
of the embryo Judus to an insect-larva, which is so often
referred to, is also so far purely superficial, that one of the
thoracic segments{ has no appendage, and consequently the

* Successful serial transverse sections now enable me to confirm the
union of the germ-sacs with the anterior unpaired slit, as stated by B.
Grassi in 1884, in both sexes.

+ In the Chilopoda referred to the poison-gland segment and also the
preanal genital segment, which also bears jointed appendages, are inclu-
ded in the number 17.

t By analogy with Scolopendrella nothacantha, Latz. & Haase (= Tsa-
belle, Grassi), and Pauropus, and in accordance with Heathcote’s view
(Phil. Trans. vol. clxxix. (1888) p. 159), we must regard the fist thoracic
segment as the footless one.

iG=

204 M. E. Haase on Abdominal

third pair of legs of the Iulide must be referred to the abdo-
men.

As to the Pauropoda, they can only be regarded as rami-
fications of the great Protodiplopodan stem, degenerated by
a subterranean mode of life, among other things the tracheal
system having been completely lost, but which also in their
genitalia and “development still show throughout the funda-
mental form of this type, represented in a minor degree by
Polyxenus, whilst their buccal organs and antenne are
aborted.

The examples of polypodism in the embryos of insects cited
at the commencement had in common the comparatively long
persistence of the rudiments of the first pair of abdominal legs,
and recent investigations have even shown that, before their
final disappearance, these may undergo special transforma-
tions. As long since as 1844 Rathke had observed peculiar
“ pilzhutartige Korper,” also afterwards detected by Korot-
neff and V. Graber, and regarded them as ‘ branchiform
respiratory arrangements.” Ayers also subsequently disco-
vered on the same segment of the embryos of Cicanthus
lateral excrescences of the ectoderm, which he described as
vesicular appendages, united with the body by a short
peduncle and lined with a layer of large cells, the cavities of
which were connected with that of the body, and which he
characterized as ‘ branchiz.”

Further, in Llatta, W. Patten described the transforma-
tion of the leg-appendages of the first abdominal segment into
similar ‘‘ pear-shaped structures,” but urged against their
interpretation as branchie their thick cell-lining, and ascribed
to them rather a sensorial function and a glandular one to their
lining. The author has found similar appendages also on
the first abdominal segment of tolerably mature embryos of
Periplaneta orientalis.

While in Hydrophilus, according to V. Graber, the appen-
dages of the first abdominal segment persist in the tudimentar y
state, on the embryo of the Cockchafer they show, according
to the same naturalist, a considerable increase in size. As
early as the seventeenth day * they have become compara-
tively stronger in growth than the typical legs, while ‘“ the
originally very inconsiderable rudiments of the other (abdo-
minal) segmental appendages have entirely disappeared ?’—
nay, they finally become much longer than the thoracic legs
and almost three times as broad. They then form a soft sac
which is united with the body by a short peduncle, lined
with large ectodermal cells and filled internally with meso-

* Morphol, Jahrb, xiii, (1888) p. 599.

Appendages in Hexapoda. 205

dermic elements, but which possesses neither muscles, nerves,
nor trachee. With the thirtieth day commences the retro-
gression of the abdominal sacs, and “ on the excluded embryo
we can find only the closed-up scar of its peduncle.”

Conditions like those of the embryonic development of the
insects just referred to are to be found perséstent in the mature
representatives of a section of Hexapoda, which, although
nearly related to the Orthoptera, has been justly separated by
F. Brauer from the other insects as ‘ Apterygogenea,”
which never have possessed wings.

Thus in Campodea, the genus of Thysanura which in
general stands nearest to the primitive form, there are leg-
like appendages upon the first abdominal segment, and these
in young animals are comparatively more strongly developed
than in the adults; at the same time the whole ventral surface
of this segment, by the abundance of cells and staining
faculty, reminds one of embryonic tissue. The appendages
are seated in the same direction as the thoracic legs, and also
show an indistinct articulation into two or three joints. Thus
only the portion of the ventral plate which is situated between
them is to be regarded as the “‘ ventral shield.”’ The aborted
musculature of these leg-rudiments, which completely resemble
the developing extremities of the Symphyla, is also to be
deduced from that of the thoracic legs, and in their segmental
division, such as appears characteristic of mesoblastic appen-
dages, it is traceable to the last joint of the rudiment. On
the next (second) abdominal segment instead of the leg-like
appendage there appears externally a cheliform movable
piece, and within a cutaneous sac lined with very large hypo-
dermic cells in part glandularly developed, which is protruded
by the inflow of blood and retracted by special longitudinal
cutaneous muscles attached to it at the apex. Towards the
end of the body, at least to the extremity of the seventh abdo-
minal segment, the planing down of the duplicatures and their
fusion with the ventral shields gradually becomes more and
more intense, at the same time the cutaneous sacs decrease in
size, and the cheliform spur increases, so that even on this
account the former may be claimed as older formations. At
the eighth abdominal segment the saccules return within the
body and at the same time come together in the middle in
front of the opening of the sexual organs; as in Japyx, the
movable abdominal spurs are wanting trom this segment
onwards also in Campodea.

In the largest representative of the Thysanura, Japyx
gigas, there is on each side of the narrow, unpaired ventral
shield of the first abdominal segment a tripartite mass of

206 M. E. Haase on Abdominal

glandular cells, immersed like a pocket, and united with
retractor muscles and nerves, the efferent ducts of which lead
into peculiar hollow capillary processes, so that one is re-
minded of the scent-glands of Pertplaneta and Corydia; in
Japyx solifugus the glandular mass is simple and less deve-
loped. In all species of Japya there is at the margin of the
duplicature which represents the rudiment of a leg, and
amalgamates with the ventral shield, an unjointed movable
chitinous appendage, exactly like an ordinary terminal spur
(calear).

As in Campodea, there are also in Nicoletia, according to
B. Grassi *, ventral sacs and spurs from the second to the
eighth abdominal segments; with regard to the important
conditions in the first abdominal segment Grassi unfortu-
nately says only :—‘‘ the false feet, and, I believe, also the
vesicles, are wanting.” In Leptsmina, which, according to
Grassi, possesses abdominal spurs only on the three penulti-
mate segments, there is on each of the abdominal segments
1-8 “a pair of organs comparable with the segmental
vesicles”? (ventral sacs). In Lepisma the ventral sacs are
entirely wanting, while the abdominal spurs may occur from
the seventh to the ninth segment.

The ventral sacs and spurs are most highly developed and
have been longest known in the genus Machilis, which was
regarded by P. Mayer as particularly near to the primitive
insects. ‘The ventral sacs were described as long ago as 1836
by Guérin, as delicate, protrusible vesicles at the hinder
margins of the ventral plates, which he regarded simply as
resembling the branchiz of the lower Crustacea. After the
discovery of the trachee by H. Burmeister and C. T. von
Siebold, this interpretation was rejected by the latter, but it
has been revived by the most recent investigator, J. T.
Oudemans. On the first abdominal segment there is one, on
each of the four following segments two, and on each of the
others a pair of delicate membranous sacs of considerable size,
which are protrusible by the inflow of blood. ‘They are
covered with a transparent, perfectly smooth and _ solid
chitinous cuticle, the partly glandular matrix-layer of which
contains distinctly limited, flat cells with large nuclei, and
they have their own nerves and strongly transversely striated
retractor muscles ; trachees never enter them. On the first
abdominal segment the movable spurs which are elsewhere
articulated outside the sacs are wanting, but this is probably
to be regarded less as a primitive condition than as a sup-

* Boll. Soe. Ent. Ital. xviii. (1886), p. 6, and xix. (1887), p. 7.

Appendages in Hexapoda. 207

pression of the structure, due to the bending of the abdomen,
which is angularly applied to the thorax.

Organs which we may regard as homologous with these
ventral sacs are met with first among the Chilopoda in the
genera Lithobius and Henicops, standing still nearer to the
Protosymphyla, in the coxe of the last four, or more rarely
five, pairs of ambulatory legs, where they occur as thread-
spinning coxal glands. In the Scolopendride and Geophi-
lide, derived by elongation from the shorter primitive forms,
analogous organs, here characterized as pleural glands (on
account of the union of the coxe with the pleura), occur
in the last leg-bearing segment.

Among the Symphyla a lobiform plate appears in Scolo-
pendrella immaculata on the coxee of the second pair of legs,
and this in the next segment is transformed into a ventral
sac which is only slightly protrusible. The distal part is
covered with a transparent homogeneous chitinous cuticle,
and lined with a few gland-like hypodermic cells. Below
this layer of cells lies the reticulated tissue of the adipose
mass, through which blood-corpuscles pass into the ventral
sac. Outside of this coxal saccule, as we must call it here,
there is to the thirteenth segment a claw-like appendage
increasing in size posteriorly, which can by no means be
regarded as the rudiment of a leg, but only as the product of
transformation of a joint-spur, and which occurs similarly on
the two posterior pairs of coxw in Machilis*, On the twelfth
segment the coxal sac is reduced to a softer, oval, mem-
branous piece ; in the undeveloped legs of young animals we
find no trace of appendages on the coxe.

In the order Diplopoda also protrusible sacs situated in
the cox are often present; thus they occur in the anterior
segments in Chordeumide and Lysiopetalum, as well as in
the section of the Colobognatha derivable from the Chilo-
gnatha, in Polyzonium and Siphonophora, and indeed they
appear first, and at the same time most strongly developed,
on the third pair of legs, the somite of which would therefore
correspond to the first abdominal segment of the Hexapoda,

As these ventral sacs in the coxee of the Myriopoda, or at
the posterior margins of the ventral plates of the Thysanura,
usually occur at the end of partially unconnected develop-
mental series, we are compelled to assume their probably
polyphyletic development within the order. And yet, in
their position, in their origin, and at the same time in their

* To what extent such structures, originally equivalent to the ordinary

cutaneous setze, can become developed, is shown especially by the tibial
spur, e. g. of the Heterocera.

208 On Abdominal Appendages in Hexapoda.

histological structure they show so many common features,
that we may, with H. Hisig *, think of them as repetitions of
old inherited tendencies. ‘To this may be added that in the
pterygote Insects referred to they likewise occur during em-
bryonic Jife in a position relatively to the limbs which
corresponds with that demonstrated in the Thysanura and
Symphyla, inasmuch as the vesicular sac is always situated
within the coxal joint or the leg-like abdominal spur, just as
V. Graber has indicated in the development of Hydrophilus T.

Now to glance.at the physiological significance of the
ventral sacs, it seems probable, trom the developmental
history of G’canthus, and especially of the Cockchafer, as
already assumed by H. Ayers and VY. Graber, that in these
Insects they perform secondarily a respzratory function, which
can only be regarded as a special development of cutaneous
respiration (the above-mentioned embryos, in the egg, lying
generally in moist earth), as the dorsal vessel and
tracheze are not yet in action when these ventral sacs possess
their highest development. That in the Symphyla and
Thysanura also the ventral membranous sacs have a similar
respiratory, and perhaps a specially excretory significance, 1s
supported by the defective or aborted development of the
tracheal system and the ventrally concealed position of the
stigmata in these forms.

Thus Scolopendrella has only cephalic stigmata, the trachez
from which extend exactly into the third segment, onward
from which the coxal membranous sacs occur. So also Cam-
podea has stigmata only on the three thoracic segments, and
these lead into feebly developed trachee ; and Nicoletia,
according to Grassi, forms only delicate dorsal longitudinal
trunks, and feeble ventral transverse anastomoses, so that
here also the tracheal system appears to be only feebly deve-
loped. In WMachilis, again, the longitudinal trunks are
entirely wanting, and the feeble abdominal trachee present
only a slight ramification. According to the observations of
J.T. Oudemans (and the same thing was observed by the
author in the open) Machilis in captivity extruded its ventral
sacs, especially if it were in a warm and at the same time
moist atmosphere, but always only when it was perfectly
quiet ; this is against the one-sided conception of the ventral
sacs as defensive arrangements analogous to the fleshy forks of
the Papilionid larvee, for example, seeing that the latter come
into action only when their bearer is disquieted.

* Monographie der Capitelliden &c. in Fauna und Flora von Neapel

&c. xvi. (1887), pp. 871-403.
{ Morphol. Jahrb. xiii. (1888), p. 605,

On the Oral Folds in the Shells of Clausilia. 209

In favour of at least the partially respiratory function of
their ventral sacs, the feeble development of the trachex in
the above-mentioned Diplopoda and Collembola may be cited ;
in the latter the ventral tube, which is often very extrusible,
corresponds to the first pair of ventral sacs of the Thysanura,
and stigmata occur at the utmost (Smdnthurus) on the
anterior margin of the prothorax. Further in favour of this
function is the’ fact of the deficiency of the ventral sacs in
those Thysanura which possess a more highly developed
tracheal system of the Orthopterous type, with strong ventral
longitudinal trunks, such as Japyx gigas and_ solifugus,
Lepisma (and Lepismina?). On the first abdominal segment
of Japyx, the decidedly glandular function of the ventral sacs,
as in the Chilopoda, which, according to H. Hisig (d. ¢.
p. 392), is to be regarded as the primitive one, has apparently
alone persisted. Any special glandular functions of the
ventral sacs in other torms still need more accurate observa-
tions, which the author hopes to make very shortly.

That in reality the ventral sacs, of the Collembola for
example, perform other functions is rendered probable by
some observations upon the living animal, the results of
which, however, are contradictory; thus Nicolet, Olfers,
Lubbock, and Tullberg ascribe to the ventral tube the action
of an adherent organ, while O. Reuter regards it as an
arrangement for the reception of water; in Macrotoma, again,
A. Sommer has described large, unicellular glands, opening
by a pore.

The ventral sacs of Aachilis also show upon the dorsal
surface a special glandular epithelium of much thickened,
sharply defined cells, the plasma of which breaks up into
fine, close cords, just as has been demonstrated by A. Weis-
mann and ©. Grobben tor the excretory antennal glands of
the Crustacea.

XXVIII.— On the Nomenclature of the Oral Folds in the Shells
of Clausilia. By Epcar A. Suir, F.Z.S., and B. B.
W oopwAakD, F.G.S.

[Plate XI. A, figs. 1—-4.]

Ir is well known to all conchologists that among the distin-
guishing features of the genus Clausclia the folds (plice and
lamelle as they are variously termed) within the aperture or
mouth of the shell are especially characteristic.

210 Messrs. E. A. Smith and B. B. Woodward on

They have been extensively relied on by specialists in
formulating subdivisions of the genus, and hence a definite
and correct nomenclature becomes of the highest importance
to the student.

On this account, and in hopes of reducing to order the con-
fusion which has arisen through the various applications of
some of the terms, these notes lave been put together and the

. . . 5
accompanying explanatory table with the figures prepared.

Most of the available published descriptions are, unfortu-
nately, either like those of A. Schmidt, unaccompanied by
the figures so indispensable to their right understanding, or,
where figures are given, as in Fischer's Manual, both are
inadequate, since folds shown in the cuts are neither lettered
nor described ; indeed, we are free to confess that without an
appeal to Ceasar certain points would still have remained
doubtful in our minds.

Dr. Bottger, from whom aid was naturally sought in a
question affecting a subject of which he is so perfect a master,
not only most kindly afforded in writing the information
desired, but also took the trouble to prepare and send over
marked specimens *, so that no doubt now remains respecting
the correct identification of Schmidt’s nomenclature.

For many reasons it seems best to employ the Latin terms
which have been applied to these folds or plaits. Moreover,
since the German specialists have carried the study in con-
nexion with them furthest and have framed the most com-
plete system of nomeuclature, it appears most advisable to
adopt Dr. Béttger’s modification of Schmidt’s terminology.

In the accompanying table (facing this page), to save space,
these Latin terms are placed together in the first column,
lettered to correspond with the figures, and not. repeated,
where the vernacular equivalents occur, in the following ones.
By referring to this table and the illustrations. the significa-
tion of any term employed by the authors quoted can be seen
at a glance.

Perhaps it may not be out of place here to briefly sketch
the history and development of this system of nomenclature.

Rossmiissler appears to have initiated it. In 18357 he desig-
nated the two principal folds on the columellar lip as the
lamella superior and lamella inferior, and named the tnterla-
mellare between them. A little later (1836) he distinguished

* Now in the Natural-Flistory Collection of the British Museum,
+ Iconog. pt. i. p. 75.
t Op. cit. pt. il. p. 8.

[ To face p. 210.

/ESSIN, MoE, RossMASSLER,
,876, 1835-36,

| ares SS ee eee
| | |

lle. | Lamella superior.
Hepes. Interlamellare.
1elle, be, Lamella inferior. |
lte. llaire. Columellarfalte. |
(ou, sq
| |
|
relle. | | |
|
| |
Plis p Aer |Gaumenfalten. |
unmenfalte, sup
deu |
Gaumenfalte. troj | |
| etc/asilaire.
} | |
aumenfalte. infé
{
fe Ba 'Mondformige Falte.

eee = ee

Terminology
recommended.

|
On the Columellar Lip.

a, Lamella superior.

6, Lamella inferior.
c. Lamella subcolunellaris.

d. Lamella parallela.
e. Lamella fulerans.
f. Lamella spiralis.
g- Lamella inserta.

On the wall of the
Outer Lip.
;
2

h. ie
Ke,

é. Plica principalis.

1
ik 2 Plice palatales,
&e.

Plicee suturales,

a’. Lamelle interlamellares. |

On the Columellar Wall |
, (Mot visible from|
without),

't, Plica lunata (or, Lunella).

B6rraEr,

A. ScumipT,
(Westerlund and
von Mollendorff),
Sa ey

Oberlamelle.

Interlamellare.

Unterlamelle.
Subcolumellarlamelle. | Subcolumellarfalte.
|

|
{ t
|
| Parallellamelle.
| Lamella fulerans,

Spirallamelle.

Lamella inserta.

Gaumenfalten.

Q
3 ( Plicm suturales, |Plicm (or, plicu- - :
Ke. lee) suturales. ee
Plica principalis.
1 2
2 5 3
3 Plice palatales. 4
Ke. &e.

Mondfalte,

FiscHER,
1881.

Lamelle pariétale.
Plis interlamellaires,

Lamelle columellaire.
Pli subcolumellaire.

Phi spiral.

;Plis palataux.

Pli lunulé, ou, Lunelle.

KoseEtr,

Oberlamelle.

Unterlamelle.
Subcolumellarfalte,

Spirallamelle.

Suturalfalten.
4 Principalfalte.
| Gaumenfalten.

Mondfalte.

Cressy,
1876.

Oberlamelle.

Unterlamelle.
Spindelfalte.

Spirallamelle.

Obere Gaumenfalte.

Mittlere Gaumenfalte.

Untere Gaumenfalte.

Mondfalte.

Moguin-Tanpon, Dvrvy,
55, 1850,

| Lamelle supérieure.

Plis interlamellaires
(Plica interlamellares),

Lamelle inférieure,
Pli columellaire.
(ou, sous-columellaire).

Plis palataux. Plis palataux.

supérieur,ou premier.) premier.
deuxiéme. deuxiéme.
troisiéme. troisiéme.
ete. etc.

inférieur, ou dernier.

Pli lunulé, on, Lunelle.

PFEIFFER,
1848,

—_———_$ ——$——— — —_ - —

Lamella supera.

TLamella infera.
Plica subcolumellaris,

Plice palatalos.

(a) superm

(b) inferm.

Pli subcolume aire,

Lunella,or,Plica lunata.

}
|
|

|
)
|
|
|

|
|

Pli basal, ou basilaire.

Pli pavistal,

Pli columellai

Pli sutural,

RossatAssirr,
183

Lamella superior,
Tnterlamellare.

Lamolla inferior,
Columellarfalte,

CGaumenfalten.

Mondfrmige Falte,

the Oral Folds in the Shells of Clausilia. 211

the following :—a. Gaumenfalten, plice palatales ; b. Colu-
mellarfalte, plica columellaris; {c.] Die mondtérmige Falte,
plica lunata.

In 1841 Cantraine* sought to establish the terms which
appear under his name in the table. Some of these are still
employed by the French school of conchologists.

Fortunat Forster, in 1842 T, proposed a series of names
which, inasmuch as they were somewhat fanciful and intro-
duced no new or useful point, may here be passed by.

The systems of Rossmissler and Cantraine were correlated
in 1848 by Pfeiffer t, who subdivided the pliew palatales into
(a) supere, and (b) infere.

Up to this period only those folds visible within the mouth,
or whose existence could be traced through the semitrans-
parent shell, had attracted attention ; but in 1850 A. Schmidtg
first described the lamella spiralis and employed it for the
purpose of classification.

Dupuy (1850)|| followed Rossmiissler and Pfeiffer, but added
to the list a Callus palatalis (Pl. XI. A, fig. 4, c.p.). This,
however, judging from the example quoted—Clausilia phale-
rata, Ziegl.=C. fimbriata, Mihlt.—is merely a thickening of
the shell-wall in a narrow tract running nearly parallel to the
lines of growth, and consequently at right angles to the true
folds. He also gave an explanatory figure of such folds
as are visible within the aperture.

In 1853 Caillaud{ discussed the lamelle and gave a good
dissected figure showing their arrangement in the interior of
the shell, but he omitted all reference to the plice; and,
although he correctly figured the lamella inserta, made no
allusion to it.

Moquin-andon (1855)** merely followed Dupuy in every

particular.

The terminology at present in use was practically perfected
by A. Schmidt in 1568f7, when he introduced the terms
lamella parallela, lamella fulcrans, and lamella inserta.

* “Malacol. Médit. et littorale,” Nouv. Mém. Acad, Roy. Bruxelles,
xiil. no. 7, pp. 144, 145,

+ Nova Acta Acad. Cees.-Leop. Carol. Nat. Cur. xix. pt. ii. pp. 251-
282 (one plate).

{ Monoe. Helic. Vivent. ii p. 395.

§ Zeitsch. f. Malakozool. 1850 (1851), p. 186.

|| Hist. nat. Moll. France, pp. 359, 340 (note).

4] Journ. Conch. iv. pp. 419-424, pl. xiil. fig. 4.

** Hist. nat. Moll. terr, et fluv. France, tom. ii. p. 316.

+7 ‘System europaisch. Clausilien,’ pp, 6-8.

212 On the Oral Folds in the Shells of Clausilia.

Clessin (1876) * omitted these, and introduced some slightly
different vernacular names for certain of the others.

Schmidt’s system was followed by Béttger (1877) +, who
slightly modified (as noted in the table) the method of enume-
rating the plice palatales. To this modified scheme Wester-
lund and Von Méllendorff have given their adhesion, and it
is the one adopted in the first column of the table as being the
fullest and most satisfactory.

Kobelt (1878) t, like Clessin, omitted to mention the folds
described by Schmidt in 1868, and, in addition, restricted the
term ‘ Gaumenfalte ” to the plice palatales.

Fischer, in his Manual (1881, pp. 484, 485), gave some
useful figures ; but, as already noted, his nomenclature is
imperfect, the work of his German contemporaries being
overlooked,

Finally, Von Martens (1883) § gave a figure with the ver-
nacular names of the principal folds, but, strange to say,
made no reference to those on the columellar wall.

It may be as well to draw attention to the fact that those
plaits which occur on the columella itself and on the colu-
mellar wall above are called ‘ lamelle,’” whilst, on the other
hand, those only which are met with on the outer wall of the
body-whorl are designated “ plice.” If this application of
the terms plice and lamella be universally adopted a good
deal of misapprehension and confusion will be avoided.

As regards the meaning and origin of these curious depo-
sitions—for they are such, and not in any strict sense folds—
the present is not the time or place to enter into any specu-
lations ; but the following points deserve attention :—

1. The lunella is sometimes replaced by a series of very
short plicee ranging one above the other in such a manner as
to suggest the very strong probability that this fold arose
from their coalescence.

2. In the same way the lamella fulerans would seem to
result from a thickening of part of the Z. spzralis, which blends
with the similarly thickened /. cnserta, till they spread across
to the neighbouring folds; for when /. julerans is present
l. spiralis and 1. inserta are so reduced as to be scarcely
perceptible if they be not altogether lost.

It must be understood that the figures here given are more

* Deutsch. Excur. Moll. Fauna, p. 227.

+ ‘ Clausilienstudien.—Paleontographica,’ Supp. iii. p. 10.
{ ‘ Illustrirtes Conchilienbuch,’ p. 285.

§ ‘Die Weich u. Schalthiere,’ pp. 186-138.

Mr. H. Druce on new Species of Lepidoptera. 213

or less diagrammatic and that the position, rather than a correct
delineation, of the various folds is sought to be indicated,
with the view of introducing in a single figure as many of
them as possible, since all are nof present in any one species.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. A.

Figs. 1-3. Diagrammatic sections of a shell of Clausilia with portions of
the shell-walls removed, to show the positions of the various
lamelle. 1, front view; 2, back view; 3, seen from below.

Fig. 4. Front view, with outer wall and columella removed, to show the
plice.

a-l, These letters correspond with those prefixed to the terms given in
the first column of the table.

cl, Clausilium. s. Sinus.
e.p. Callus palatalis. sut. Suture.

XXIX.—Descriptions of new Species of Lepidoptera from Cen-
tral America. By HersBert Druce, F.L.S8., F.R.G.S.,
BZ.

THE new species will be figured in the ‘ Biologia Centrali-
Americana.’

Iam. Sphingide.
Subfam. Sparverw-s.
OryBaA, Walk.
Oryba imperialis.
Clanis imperialis, Druce, Biologia Centrali-Americana, Heterocera.
vol, i. tab, iii. fig. 1 (1883).

Primaries and secondaries bright green: primaries crossed
about the middle from the costal to the inner margin with a
wide band of darker green, edged on each side with a greyish
line, the base dark brown ; a convex wide black line extends
from the apex to the anal angle ; a narrow brown line crosses
the wing beyond the middle from the costal to the inner mar-
gin; each side of the line is irrorated with greyish scales ;
the fringe brown, excepting just at the anal angle, where it
is yellow: secondaries crossed by two black bands, the outer
band being the widest and thickly irrorated with greyish
scales at the anal angle; the fringe bright yellow, excepting

214 Mr. H. Druce on new Species of

along the outer margin nearest the apex, where it is reddish
brown. The underside of both wings bright orange-red,
clouded with brown along the outer margins, both wings
crossed beyond the middle by two narrow brown lines: pri-

maries with a dark brown line extending from the apex to the
middle of the outer line, crossing the wing. The upperside
of the head, thorax, and the abdomen dark green, the tegulee
tipped with brown; the abdomen banded with black and with
black and yellow spots at the sides and several patches of
bluish-grey scales down the middle. The underside of the
head, thorax, and abdomen bright orange-red; the antenne
and legs dark brown. HExpanse 5 inches.

Hab, Panama, Chiriqui (fibbe, type mus. Staudinger) ;
Peru (mus. Druce).

‘This very fine insect is allied to Clanis achemenides, Cram.,
specimens of which are before me from Colombia. Walker’s
Uryba robusta is without doubt conspecific with C. ache-
menides and should now be placed in the genus Oryba, A

fine specimen of Oryba tmperialis is in the Oxford Museum
from an unknown locality.

Fam. Arctiide.
Hauisipora, Hiibn.

Halisidota labaca, sp. n.

Primaries pale brownish yellow, with a small orange-
coloured spot close to the base, three large spots along the
costal margin, a large elongated patch on the outer margin,
and two rather broad streaks on the inner margin partly
crossing the wing towards the middle, all pale brown : secon-
daries pale yellowish white, partly hyaline near the base.
The underside of the primaries as above, but with all the
markings more indistinct. The head and thorax the same
colour as the primaries; the abdomen above orange, the anus
and the underside whitish; the legs and antennz orange-
brown. Expanse 2} inches.

Hab. Mexico, State of Jalisco (Richardson).

A very distinct species, but nearest H. cinctipes, Grote.

EUHALISIDOTA, Grote.
Euhalisidota agelia, sp. n.

Primaries and secondaries uniformly greyish hyaline white ;
rimaries crossed by three very faint yellowish- “brown lines.
The head, thorax, and abdomen yellowish white; antenne

Lepidoptera from Central America. 215

pale yellowish brown ; legs and underside of the head, thorax,
and the abdomen yellowish white. Hxpanse 14 inch.
Hab. Mexico, State of Jalisco (Richardson).

SALLA/A, Felder,

Sallea lacipea, sp. n.

Primaries white, with a broad >-shaped black mark at the
anal angle, extending partly along the inner margin, but not
nearly reaching the base of the wing, the upper part of the
> reaching the end of the cell; the fringe black just below
the apex: secondaries white, the inner half broadly black,
but not reaching the base. ‘The underside of both wings the
same as above. The head and tegule white; the thorax and
upperside of the abdomen deep black ; the sides, anus, and
the underside of the abdomen dark orange-yellow; the
antenne and legs black. Hxpanse 2 inches.

Hab. Guatemala, in the city (Rodriguez).

This species is allied to S. ochrosterna, Felder, from which
it is at once distinguished by the entirely white costal mar-
gins of the primaries. We have received five males captured
at the electric light in the city of Guatemala. The female
is unknown.

Fam. Lithosiide.
Eupu.e, Hiibn.
Eudule bada, sp. n.

Primaries and secondaries hyaline orange-yellow ; the pri-
maries crossed from the costal to the inner margin by two
indistinct, waved, blackish bands. The head, thorax, abdo-
men, and legs orange-yellow ; the antenne black. Expanse
3 inch.

Hab. Mexico, Volcan de Ixtaccihuatl 11,500 feet (Richard-
son).

A small but very distinct species.

fam. Saturniide.
ARSENURA, Duncan.

Arsenura hichardsoni, sp. n.

Primaries and secondaries brownish fawn-colour, shaded
with dark brown along the inner margin and near the base of
the primaries; both wings are thickly irrorated with small

216 Mr. H. Druce on new Species of

black dots and a number of greyish scales near the base; a
rather large lunular-shaped brown spot, edged with black, at -
the end of the cell; both wings crossed from the apex to the
inner margin by a submarginal, rather wide, waved, black
line, which follows the outline of the wings; the black line is
edged on the outer side by a narrow fawn-coloured line ; the
outer margin of the wings is pale reddish brown, the fringe
being the same colour; a black elongated spot close to the
apex, below which are three madder-brown markings ; the
bases of both wings are thickly clothed with fawn-coloured
hairs. The underside pale fawn-colour; the outer half of the
wings is greyish white, thickly irrorated with pale brown;
both wings are crossed by two very indistinct brown lines,
the outer margins and the fringe pale brown. ‘The head,
thorax, abdomen, and legs brownish fawn-colour; the an-
tenn yellowish brown. Expanse 53 inches.

Hab. Mexico, Bolaiios, State of Jalisco (Richardson).

In form this insect resembles Arsenura erythrine, Merian,
and to some extent in coloration it is like Saturnia pandora
of Klug. I have named this fine species after its captor
Mr. Richardson.

Fam. Lasiocampide.
Gasina, Walk.

Gasina agdamea, sp. n.

g. Primaries pale yellowish brown, shaded with dark
brown at the end of the cell and near the base; the costal
margin white, the veins beyond the cell white edged with
dark brown, the inner margin near the base of the wing
yellowish brown: secondaries pale cream-colour, darkest at
the base and along the inner margin. ‘The underside of both
wings yellowish white, almost yellow at the base of the
wings; the costal margin of the primaries edged with black
nearly to the apex. The head, thorax, and abdomen yellowish
brown, banded with white ; antennz pale cream-colour, tipped
with white.

The female is almost the same as the male, but is con-
siderably larger and has much less white on the primaries.

Expanse, g 23, 9 23 inches.

Hab. Mexico, Coatepec (J. Brooks) ; Cuesta de Misantla
(M. Trujillo) ; Guatemala, in the city (Rodriguez).

This tine insect is allied to Gasina albicollis, Walk., but it
is entirely different in colour.

Lepidoptera from Central America. 217

Gasina agesistrata, sp. n.

@. Primaries and secondaries pale yellowish brown, with-
out markings of any kind, excepting along the costal margin
of the primaries, which are very faintly shaded with darker
brown. The head, thorax, and abdomen yellowish brown,
the underside of the abdomen and the legs dark brown, the
antenne yellowish. Expanse 24 inches.

Hab. Guatemala, in the city (Rodriguez); Honduras,
Ruatan Island (Gawmer).

Two specimens of this insect, both females, very distinct
from any known to me.

Hyprias, Herr.-Schiff.
Hydrias lacinia, sp. n.

Primaries semihyaline greyish white, with all the veins and
the marginal line dark blackish brown; a broad white band,
edged on both sides by two narrow, fine, brown lines, crossing
the wing from the costal to the inner margin, and a submar-
ginal waved white line extends from the apex to the anal
angle: secondaries greyish, the costal and outer margin white,
the hairs on the inner margin yellowish. ‘he head, palpi,
and front of the thorax yellowish brown; the thorax, base of
the abdomen, and the anus blackish brown; the sides and
underside of the abdomen, thorax, and legs yellowish brown ;
the antenne greyish brown, darkest at the base. Hxpanse
1? inch.

Hab. Guatemala, in the city (Rodriguez).

A very distinct species, not nearly allied to any other
known to me.

APATELODES, Packard.

Apatelodes lacetania, sp. n.

3g. Primaries blackish brown, crossed about the middle
from the costal to the inner margin by a curved dark brown
band ; two black streaks close to the apex and several dark
markings on the inner margin close to the base: secondaries
greyish brown, the fringe of all the wings dark blackish
brown. Underside dusky greyish brown; both wings with
a submarginal white line. ‘The head, thorax, and abdomen
black, the tegule edged with greyish hairs; antenne and
legs black.

Female like the male, but larger and much paler in colour.

Hxpanse, g¢ 14, ¢ 12 inch.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 17

218 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Buprestide.

Hab. Mexico, Omilteme, in Guerrero, 8000 feet (A. /7/.
Smith).

A very distinct species. Mr. Smith captured both sexes in
July 1888.

Fam. Limacodide.
Peroua, Walk.
Perola lacipea, sp. ui.

Primaries dark brown, with a reddish tinge near the base ;
a waved grey line crosses the wing from the apex to the mner
margin and a short grey line extends from the costal to the
middle of the outer margin: secondaries very dark brown,
almost black. Underside of both wings uniformly blackish
brown. The head, antenne, and thorax reddish brown, the
abdomen and legs dark brown. Hxpanse ? inch.

Hab. Mexico, ‘Tierra Colorada, in Guerrero, 2000 feet
(H. I. Smith).

One male captured by Mr. Smith in October 1888.

SemMyYRA, Walk.
Semyra agemytha, sp. ni.

g. Primaries bright reddish brown, darkest at the base; a
spot at the end of the cell, a waved streak on the imner mar-
gin close to the base, one near the anal angle, and one on the
outer margin all metallic silvery: secondaries pale fawn-colour,
palest at the base and along the inner margin; the fringe of
both wings reddish fawn-colour. The head, thorax, and
abdomen bright reddish brown, the anus yellowish; the an-
tenn and Jegs dark fawn-colour. Hxpanse 1 inch.

Hub. Mexico, Omilteme, in Guerrero, 5000 feet (H. H.
Smith).

Mr. Smith captured one specimen of this pretty little insect
in August 1888.

XXX.— Descriptions of two new Central-American Buprestidee.
By Cuares O. WATERHOUSE.

Thrincopyge marginata.

Viridi-cyanea, nitida; capite crebre sat fortiter punctato ; thorace
fortiter punctato, disco subtilius punctulato ; elytris depressis, sat
fortiter striato-punctatis, late rufo-marginatis, apice truncatis,
minute denticulatis.

Long. 8 lin.

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Buprestidee. 219
Hab. Mexico, Kurango city (flohr).

This beautiful species closely resembles 7. ambdieas,
LeConte, but is broader, more shining, and slightly differently
coloured, with no red border to the thorax, but a broader border
to the elytra. ‘The thorax is broader in front of the middle,
and less evenly punctured, the punctures on the middle of the
disk being small and those at the sides very coarse ; the sides
are more “distinetly margined. ‘The elytra are very similar,
but have the apex of each more broadly truncate, the Samer:
ture being rectilinear. ‘The prosternal process is very deli-

cately and sparsely punctured. ‘The visible part of the meso-
sternum is very obliquely narrowed posteriorly.

Although this species is so close to 7’, ambiens that at first
I thought it might be merely an extreme variety, it is note-
worthy that the mesosternum in the specimen described is
separated from the metasternum. No doubt this is accidental ;
but, as there does not appear to be any fracture, it is evident
that the connexion between the meso- and metasterna cannot
be so intimate as in J’. ambiens, in which they are completely
connate.

Trypanidius Flohri.

Elongatus, parallelus, depressus, niger, sat nitidus ; thorace creber-
rime evidenter punctato, medio sulcato, eneo tincto, lateribus
rufo-velutinis; metathoracis episternis coxarumque posticarum
parte externa rufo-velutinis.

Long. 52 lin,

Hab. Mexico, Navarrete (Flohr).

The head is slightly tinted with steel-blue, excavated at
the upper part, sulcate at the lower part of the face, leaving
two oval swellings. The thorax has the sides very gently

co)
arcuate; the disk is raised and longitudinally channelled in

the middle, tinted with brassy green, closely and very dis-
tinctly punctured, and obliquely vermiculate- rugulose. The
large lateral impression is filled with bright red, dull, velvety
pubescence. The elytra are rather flat and horizontal , closely
punctured with cuneiform punctures, with a rather smoother
line indicating the usual costa; the apex of each is rather
broadly rounded and denticulate. ‘The prosternal chin-piece
is very slightly emarginate in the middle. The prosternum
is closely and rather roughly punctured, the process margined,
narrowed at the apex. Lateral carina of the basal seoment

of the abdomen rectilinear posteriorly.

17?

220 Messrs. A. H. Foord and G. C. Crick on Muscular

XXXI.—On the Muscular Impressions of some Species of Car-
boniferous and Jurassic Nautiloids compared with those of
the recent Nautilus. By Arruur H. Foorp, F.G.S., and
G. C. Crick, Assoc. R.S.M., F.G.8., of the British
Museum (Natural History).

In the ‘Geological Magazine’? for November 1889 we
described and figured the impressions of the shell-muscles
of Celonautilus cariniferus, J. de C. Sowerby, sp.*, from
the Carboniferous Limestone of Ireland. We have since
had the good fortune to meet with other species in the
British Museum Collection, both of Carboniferous and Jurassic
Nautiloids, in which similar impressions are more or less
completely preserved.

In the figures @ indicates the anterior boundary of the mus-
cular impression, p the posterior, and s the last-formed
septum.

The accompanying figure (fig. 1} + of a east} of the
interior of the shell of a recent Nautilus (N. pompilius) is

Fig. 1.

here introduced for comparison with the fossil forms to be
described below. Upon the side of the body-chamber is
seen the impression of the ear-shaped shell-muscle, together
with part of the “annulus” or band that connects it with

* Min. Conch. vol. v. 1825, p. 180, pl. cecelxxxii. fig. 3 (excl. fig. 4).

+ Figs. 1-4 inclusive were all drawn on a reduced scale with the camera
from the original specimens.

{ To obtain the cast, the shell having been longitudinally sectioned,
one half was filled with paraftin and then immersed in dilute hydrochloric
acid until the shell was completely dissolved.

Impressions of Carboniferous and Jurassic Nautiloids. 221

the corresponding impression on the other side*. Both in
recent and fossil species the upper or anterior boundary of the
impression (a) is much more distinctly marked than the lower
or posterior (), and accordingly the latter, as would naturally
be expected, is rarely preserved in fossil forms. On the inner
surface of the shell the anterior boundary of the impression is
marked by a very fine sharp ridge, which therefore in the cast
appears as a distinct groove. ‘The impression of the annulus
is not quite so distinctly marked.

(a) Carboniferous Species.
Solenocheilus latiseptatus, de Koninck, sp.t
Fig. 2 represents a natural cast (4 nat. size) of Soleno-
cheilus latiseptatus from the Cement-stone of Carboniferous

age of the Arden (Quarries, Nitshill, near Glasgow (B.M.
No. . 25496). Only the anterior boundary (a) of the mus-

cular impression is preserved, and that in the shape of a
groove; but it shows that in this highly inflated form, with
an evenly rounded periphery, the annulus connecting the two
muscles of attachment was very short on the ventral side, so
that the muscles were rather more ventral than lateral ;
whereas in those species having a more or less flattened peri-
phery, e. g. N. pompilius, N. polygonalis, &c., the reverse is
the case, the annulus being much longer on the ventral side.

* The appearance of the shell-muscle and annulus as seen on the body
of the Nautilus, with which the impression here figured closely agrees, is
admirably figured in Sir Richard Owen’s ‘ Memoir on the Pearly Nauti-
lus,’ 1832, plate 1.

+ ‘Faune du Calcaire Carbonifére de la Belgique’ (Ann. du Mus.
Roy. d’Hist. Nat. de Belgique, tom. ii.), 1878, p. 110, pl. xxii. figs. 1, 2, 3.

222 Messrs. A. H. Foord and G. C. Crick on Muscular
(b) Jurassic Species.

Nautilus, sp. nov.

Fig. 3 illustrates (% nat. size) a specimen (B.M. no. 69767)
of a new species of Nautilus from the Interior Oolite of Sher-
borne, in Dorsetshire. On the side of the specimen that is

Fig. 3.

figured the anterior boundary of the muscular impression ean
be traced as a groove from the umbilicus with but slight
interruption to the periphery. Upon the opposite side, which
is denuded of the shell and much eroded, only traces of the
impression can be made out.

Nautilus polygonalis, J. de C. Sowerby *.
Fig. 4 represents (% nat. size) a specimen of Nautdlus
* Min. Conch. vol. vi. 1826, p. 56, pl. dxxx.

Impressions of Carboniferous and Jurassic Nautiloids. 223

polygonalis (B.M. no. ©. 2847) from the Inferior Oolite; the
locality is not recorded. It is a longitudinal section of a shell
and shows the course of the anterior boundary (a) of the
muscular impression from the umbilicus to the periphery.
Not only does this muscular impression greatly resemble that
of the recent Nautilus (N. pompilius), but the curvatures of
the sufures are also nearly identical, as may be seen by com-
paring them with those of fig. 1.

Nautilus obesus ?, J. Sowerby *.

The only example of this species known to us which
shows any trace of the muscular impression is a cast of a large,
crushed, and much broken body-chamber from the Iron-
stone (Inferior Oolite) of Duston, Northamptonshire (B.M.
no. $2328 6). ‘This measures 14 inches along the curve
of the periphery, the last-formed septum being 42 inches
wide, and the width of the aperture 94 inches. Fig. 5 has

Fig. 5.

been reduced with the camera from a tracing of the actual im-
pression : a indicates the anterior and p the posterior boundary ;
s indicates a portion of the last-formed septum. ‘The irregular
line on either side of the figure represents merely the broken
edge of the umbilicus. Although the specimen is so badly
preserved, not only can the anterior boundary of the muscular
impressions and annulus be made out, but a portion also of
the posterior boundary. On one side of the body-chamber
several lines close to and concentric with the anterior boun-
dary of the impression indicate former points of attachment
of the anterior edge of the shell-muscle, and may be compared

(=) .
with similar lines to be observed in the shell of the recent

Nautilus t.
Nautilus clausus, d’Orbigny f.

Vig. 6 was traced from a young specimen (2 inches in

* Ibid. vol. ii. 1816, p. 51, pl. exxiv.

+ See Geol. Mag. dee. iii. vol. vi. p. 495 (Nov. 1889), fig. E.

} ‘Paléontologie Frangaise, Terr. Jurassiques,’ tom. i, 1842, p. 158,
pl xxxili.

224 Mr. H. G. Smith on a new Papilio.

diameter) of this species from the Inferior Oolite of Caen,
Normandy (B.M. no. 37024). The anterior boundary (a)
of the impression can be distinctly followed from the umbili-

Fig. 6.

Sa
Ne ee ae

cus on the one side across the periphery to the umbilicus on
the other side ; but no trace exists of the posterior boundary.

The above figures (38-6) show how closely the Jurassic
species of Nautilus approximate, as regards their muscular
attachment, to the recent Nawéd/us; and this analogy may be
carried still further back in geological time judging by the
figure of a Triassic species (N. salinartus) given by Moj-
sisovics *, in which a considerable portion of the anterior
boundary of the shell-muscle is preserved.

We are indebted to the kindness of Dr, H. Woodward,
F.R.S., for the use of the woodcuts illustrating this paper.

XXXII.— Description of a new Papilio from the West Coast
of Africa. By H. Grose Smiru.

Papilio harpagon.

Male.—Upperside. Both wings blackish brown, with
brownish-white spots and bands, as in P. ucalegon, Hew., but
on the anterior wings the spot towards the end of the cell, and
the band, below the median nervure, is broader, and in the
middle of the cell is an indistinct brownish-white spot. On
posterior wings the band is broader and extends externally as
far as the end of the cell.

Underside. Anterior wings as on the upperside. Posterior
wings with an orange-coloured spot at the base inside the
precostal nervure and another beyond it divided by the costal
nervure, followed by three large, indistinct, black spots; a
short indistinct streak of orange colour below the median ner-
vure at its base.

Eixpanse of wings 3+ inches.

Hab, Gaboon.

Very near to P. ucalegon, but blacker, with wider bands,
and otherwise differing as above described.

In the collections of Mr. Crowley and H. Grose Smith.

* “ Die Cephalopoden der Mediterranen Trias-Provinz ” (Abh, d. k. k.
geol. Reichsanst. Band x.), 1882, pl. xei. fig. 3 a,

Mr. G. E. Dobson on new Species of Crocidura. 225

XXXIII.—Description of new Species of Crocidura from
Africa. By G. E. Dossoy, M.A., F.R.S.

THE following descriptions of three new species of the genus
Orocidura ave derived from examinations of specimens pre-
served in the collections of the British Museum, and of the
Zoological Museum of the Imperial Academy of Sciences at
St. Petersburg. All belong to the section of the genus with
twenty-eight teeth. The dentition of each species will be
found figured in Part III. of my Monograph of the Insecti-
vora, of which I am about to publish the plates.

Crocidura nana.

Scarcely if at all larger than Crocédura etrusca, and there-
fore the smallest species of this section of the genus as yet
discovered. Fur above dark slate-brown, with a faint
greyish tinge ; beneath white, the colour of the upper sepa-
rated from that of the lower surface by a sharp line. ‘The
feet are clothed with short shining whitish hairs; the tail
with short brownish hairs, with many long fine dark brown
hairs projecting almost to the tip. Hars moderate, clothed
with short dark brown hairs.

The anterior maxillary tooth is shorter than the third
incisor in vertical extent, but exceeds it in cross section at
the base, and the postero-internal part of its base is in con-
tact with the premolar. (See Monograph of the Insectivora,
part ili. fase. i. pl. xxviii.*) Length, head and body, about
40 millim., tail 30, pes 84, distance from tip of first upper
incisor to apex of principal cusp of last premolar 33.

Hab. East Africa (Dollo, Somali Land).

‘Type, the skin of an adult individual, collected by Messrs.
F. L. and W. D. James, preserved in the British Museum
(Nat. Hist.).

As I am very unwilling to describe new species from skins,
I waited for a long time, hoping that a specimen preserved
in alcohol might be procured ; but my expectations not having
been realized I resolved to leave this very interesting species
no longer undescribed, particularly as the characters afforded
are ample for its recognition.

Crocidura Strauchit.

Slightly larger than C. aranea, but with a much longer
tail and larger ears. ‘The tail is moderately thick, and
clothed with short fur, which nearly conceals all the scales,

* This part of my work will be published in a few weeks.

226 Mr. G. E. Dobson on new Species of Crocidura.

and between which the long fine hairs project at intervals to
within a short distance of the e extremity ; the muzzle, chin,
manus, and pes are well covered with short fur like the under
fur on the tail. The ears are apparently naked, being clothed
only with very short almost invisible hairs. The fur of the
body is short throughout, on the head, back, and upper sur-
face of the tail cinnamon-brown, with bright yellowish- -brown
extremities, beneath similar, with ereyish tips.

The teeth (see Monograph of the Insectivora, part ul.
fasc. 1. pl. xxvii. figs. 2 & 2 a) somewhat resemble those of
C. aranea, but, besides being altogether larger, they may be
at once distinguished, not only from those of that species,
but also from those of every other species of this section of
the genus, by the form of the anterior maxillary tooth, the
base of which develops a horizontal postero- -internal process,
so that the posterior margin of-the base of the tooth is deeply
concave.

Tn the single specimen, an adult male, there is a well-
marked lateral gland in the usual position.

Length, head and body, 85 millim., tail 55, eye to tip of
nostril 12, ear 10, elbow to end of middle digit (without
claw) 181, manus 8, pes 12, tibia 13, distance of tip of
first upper incisor from apex ‘of principal cusp of the last
premolar 5.

Hab. N.E. Africa (Soudan).

Type, an adult male, No. 1988, preserved in alcohol in the
collection of the Zoological Museum at St. Petersburg.

This species somewhat resembles C. flavescens in the colour
of the fur, and in the length of the body and tail, but it may
bi te once distinguished by its smaller size, much shorter

s, forearm, and tibia, by the presence of a ’ well- developed
ea gland, and by the deep concavity in the posterior mar-
gin of the anterior maxillary tooth.

I have much pleasure in connecting with this interesting
species the name of Dr. Strauch, Director of the Zoological
Museum of the Imperial Academy of Sciences at St. Peters-

burg.

Crocidura macrodon.

In colour and in distribution of the fur like C. Strauchit,
but with much larger feet, a shorter tail, a much longer
muzzle, and altogether larger teeth. The muzzle is remark-
ably long and pointed, the ears moderate, clothed only with
very short hairs, and a few longer ones springing from the
margin of the internal folds ; the vibrisse on the sides of the
muzzle are fine and very long, the longest extending back-

On the Constitution of the Body in the Blattide. 227

wards behind the ears. The fur of the body is short; the
tail is clothed with coarse short fur from which long hairs
arise; the feet are covered with short hairs of which the
longest are at the bases of the claws, which they nearly equal
in length.

Both the upper and lower anterior incisors are remarkably
long (see Monograph of the Insectivora, pt. iil. fase. 1. pl. xxvil.
fig. 3), the upper anterior incisor has a short basal cusp
which does not extend even below the cingulum of the second
incisor. Viewed laterally the third incisor is very little
smaller than the anterior maxillary tooth; but seen from be-
neath the latter much exceeds the former in cross section at
the base, and its cusp very slightly exceeds the anterior basal
cusp of the premolar ; its base is not emarginate posteriorly as
in ©, StrauchiiZ, The anterior lower incisor has a shallow
notch for the posterior basal cusp of the anterior upper
incisor,

Length, head and body, 68 millim., tail 46, eye from tip
of nostril 14, length of ear 84, elbow to end of middle digit
19, manus 84, pes 14, tibia 14, distance of the tip of first
incisor from apex of principal cusp of the last premolar 53.

Type, preserved in alcohol, No. 1968, in the collection of
the Zoological Museum at St. Petersburg.

XXXIV.— On the Constitution of the Body in the Blattide.
By E. HaAAse *.

Any extension of our knowledge of the structure of the
Cockroaches, however small, is of special interest, because two
characteristic representatives of this family of Orthoptera, the
House-cockroach (Phyllodromia germanica, Fab.) and the
Kitchen-cockroach (Pertplaneta orientalis, Linn.), from their
occurrence in the dwellings of man and their adaptation to
this protective habitat, are to be obtained in abundance
throughout the year, and further because, on account of their
considerable size, they have always served as a chosen material
for an introduction to the anatomy of insects.

But, moreover, the oldest remains of fossil insects known
to us, the Silurian Palwoblattina Durvillec, Brongn. f, and

* Translated from the ‘Sitzungsberichte der Gesellschaft Naturfor-
schender Freunde zu Berlin,’ Jahre. 1889, pp. 128-156.

+ F. Brauer sees in the preserved remains of the wing indications of a
probably synthetic Orthopteron approaching the Mole-Cricket (Ann. k.
k, Naturhist. Hofm. Wien, i. 1881, p. 1).

228 M. E. Haase on the

half of all the species known from the Carboniferous forma-
tion are to be referred to the Blattide.

As the gradual embryogeny of the insect-body distinctly
shows, its constitution is to be carried back to the scheme
which was drawn up by B. Hatschek * for the origin of the
Annelid from the trochophore. But as the structure of the
fully-developed insect-embryo is at the same time more
sharply defined in its elements than in the case of the Anne-
Jida, Myriopoda, and Crustacea, and above all is subject to
no variations in the number of its segments, it is desirable to
modify somewhat Hatschek’s more generally applied denomi-
nations of the constituents of the body for the Hexapoda.
Thus the expression ‘frontal piece” may be substituted for
Hatschek’s “ head-segment,”’ as this only forms the head of the
insect in conjunction with the jaw-bearing metameres. Fur-
ther, in consequence of the definitely fixed number of the abdo-
minal segments in the developed embryo of insects, Hatschek’s
“‘end-segment ”? represents no indifferent terminal portion,
as it does among Annelida, Crustacea, and many Myrio-
poda. By the complete suppression in the mature embryo
of any indefinite anterior girdle acting as a gemmiparous zone
there rather remains only of the terminal segment a terminal
section incapable of further development of segments, which,
as it bears the anal aperture, may be characterized as the
‘anal piece.”

Consequently the body of the mature embryo of the
House-cockroach consists (1) of a frontal piece which bears
as a central process the labrum and as lateral appendages the
antennary lobes, shows no primitive-vertebriform rudiments
of the secondary body-cavity, and is perforated posteriorly
by the orifice of the mouth. The originally ventral position
of the antenne, which has been so often cited in evidence of
their limb-nature, probably only corresponds to the place of
their first origin, and therefore does not carry with it their
equivalence to the persistent ventral pedal appendages.

Behind the frontal piece comes (2) the definite number of
true metameres, with bilateral, primitive-vertebral founda-
tions of the secondary body-cavity and ventral pedal appen-
dages. Of these segments the first three advance towards
the frontal piece and their appendages become jaws ; in this
way the head of the insect is produced. Behind these follow
three thoracic or mesosomatic segments, with the thoracic legs,
and finally the abdomen, composed of ten true metameres,
the early-indicated embryonic limbs of which soon disappear.

* Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Wien, i. (1878) p. 77.

Constitution of the Body in the Blattide. 229

The abdominal segments are closed (3) lastly by the “ anal
piece,” into which neither the ventral cord nor the secondary
body-cavity is continued, and which remarkably resembles the
frontal piece. Tor on the “ anal piece ’’ are also two terminal
appendages, originally quite ventral and lobiform, like the
antenne, afterwards with tentaculiform terminal appendages,
although less developed and later in appearing than the an-
tenne, the cerct, which only subsequently move close to or
above the anus.

Further, there is on the anal piece a median dorsal plate
above the anus, the anal operculum (lamina supraanalis),
and generally two anal valves (valvule) bounding it laterally,
to which an inferior opercular piece is but rarely added.

The same number of segments as in Blatta occur in all
‘Thysanura, particularly distinctly in Aachilis, in which the
tenth segment still forms a closed ring, while the strongly
developed anal piece is distinguished “by three long many-
jointed appendages, of which the median one represents the
anal operculum and the two lateral ones the cerci. In many
of the lower insects and their larve we also find the same
number of segments distinctly marked, as may be best recog-
nized in the Acrydia and other Orthoptera, in the larvee of
Dragon-flies, &c. ; even in the larva of Hydrophilus Rh. Heider
has demonstrated the occurrence of ten true abdominal seg-
ments.

A comprehension of the variable constitution, especially of
the abdomen, of the Hexapoda is possible only from the con-
ception of the insect- body founded upon Hatschek’s scheme.
As will be shown, the divergent conditions can easily be
referred back to the primitive condition, such as we have
found in the above-mentioned Orthoptera, by citing both the
dorsal and the ventral plates of the abdominal segments in
simple numbers so far as they are independent and ‘distinctly
demonstrable, by furnishing these numbers above with a plus
sign iG len the plates are still distinct in the embryo,
but in course of development become so aborted and sup-
pressed that it usually requires special preparations to render
them visible, furnishing them above with a minus sign (—)
when the plates entirely disappear in the course of the deve-
lopment, and entirely omitting the numbers of those segments
which are never formed even in the embryo; and lastly by
indicating a secondary amalgamation by a uniting sign (~)
and the anal piece by the letter A, seeing that it is homologous
in all forms. As an example how by this schematization an
insight into the course of the gradual reduction or amalga-

230 M. E. Haase on the

mation of the abdominal segments is rendered possible we
may also take our Cockroaches.

In the almost completely developed embryo still enveloped
in the egg-membranes (without the branchiuform appendages
of the first ventral segment) a diminution of the number of
the abdominal segments results from the tenth being sup-
pressed, first ventrally and then dorsally, and, as was first
demonstrated by Cholodkovsky *, finally having its dorsal
plate amalgamated with the anal opercular plate , when it
is still recognizable in the adult male. Subsequently the
oecurrence of sexual maturity exercises an influence upon the
last four segments, inasmuch as the tenth especially appears
to be completely aborted in the female. ‘he anterior nine
dorsal plates remain in both sexes distinctly developed, rather
less so certainly in the females, only the eighth and ninth are
retracted somewhat under the seventh dorsal plate. While
in the males the nine ventral plates remain developed until
maturity, in the females the eighth plate first retreats over the
seventh into the body and gradually becomes soft-skinned ;
then the ninth plate also passes into the body and over the
seventh ventral plate ; im Periplaneta the latter, having the
middle of its hinder margin cut off by paired notches, finally
grows into a shovel-like process which projects beyond the
posterior segment and applies itself to the anal valves f.
‘Thus in the inature females probably of atl Cockroaches nine
dorsal plates, but only the first seven ventral plates, are recog-
nizable. By the retreat of the female sexual aperture, situated
in the eighth ventral plate, a considerable space—the genital
pouch—is produced; this is formed chiefly by the extended
connective membrane between the elongated seventh and the
eighth ventral plate. his serves for the development of the
egg-cocoon which is retained by the internal appendages of
the posterior gonapophyses.

A graphical representation of the divisions of the body of
the mature female Cockroach may be furnished by the fol-
lowing number-sketch, in which the numbers standing above
the line denote the dorsal and those beneath it the ventral

shields of the abdomen § :—

———— ] 9 2 + oss
Fr+1, 2,3 See ee 1G ee LO
Head ++ —"

Thorax 1—7, 8, 9, 10
* Zeitschy. f. wiss. Zool. xlyill. (1889) p. 100.
+ L. CG. Miall and A. Denny (‘The Cockroach,’ 1886) inaccurately
characterize this plate (p. 68 &c.) as the tenth dorsal shield.
{ These “ podical plates” were regarded by Huxley as the terga of an
eleyenth abdominal seginent.
§ Fr indicates the “ frontal” and A the “ anal piece.”

Constitution of the Body in the Blattide. 231

on the other hand the formula for the abdomen of the male
of Phyllodromia, for example, would be :—

ss AB

1—7, 8,9, 10
++ -
1—7, 8, 9, 10

The sexual differences extend also to the appendages of the
anal piece. ‘Thus in Pertplaneta ortentalis the aual valves of
the male are also of a transversely triangular form, but con-
siderably more feebly chitinized than those of the female ; in
the female of Phyllodromia they are similar but still more
strongly developed, and they bear at their lower extremity a
longitudinally-cleft plate, which is wanting on the soft-
skinned, rather globular, anal swellings of the male. The
sexual differences of the anal operculum (/amina supraanalis)
have been long since employed in classitication by H. Bur-
meister and C. Brunner von W: attenwyl.

The movable anal appendages (cerc?), as already men-
tioned, resemble the cephalic antennx in their formation , only
they appear later and are less developed. In their structure
and possession of sensorial sete they also agree with the
antenne ; nay, from V. Graber’s * experiments upon decapi-

tated cockroaches, their function would also seem to consist in
the reception of ‘olfactory stimuli, ‘The number of joints
in the cerci in the Kitchen-cockroach is 14-16, in the House-
cockroach 9-11. In secondarily derived forms with a more
globular abdomen the cerci decrease; thus, in the Panes-
thidee, for example, in which the female presents only seven
distinct dorsal and ventral plates, they appear only as short,
inarticulate, triangular appendages. The late development
and frequent reduction of the cerei seem to show that the

are old inherited appendages which are approaching abortion
(through disuse).

On the ninth ventral plate of all embryos and young
animals of both the House- and the Kitchen-cockroach short,
rigidly setose, unjointed appendages are to be seen which
distinctly originate from the ninth segment f. In the female
young forms of Leriplaneta which are still destitute of rudi-
ments of wings these styles may be detected even after the
retractation of the last ventral plates; they are seated upon

* Biol. Centralbl. Bd. v. p. 452.

+ Cholodkovsky (/. ¢. p. 94) ascribes their origin to the tenth segment
and supposes en to become converted into the genital hooks of the
male; both these views are founded upon errors of observation.

232 M. EE. Haase on the

the chitinous plates, which may be recognized as the remains
of the ninth ventral plate on each side of the short gonapo-
physial buds. In mature females (with wing-rudiments) the
styles have entirely disappeared ; thus they are probably cast
off suddenly during a change of skin without being again
produced, as no rudiments of them can be recognized.

In the mature males of Periplaneta, as in those of most
exotic genera, the styles persist distinctly and symmetrically
developed.

A want of symmetry in the ninth ventral plate already
noticed by Brunner *, probably set up in the males of all
forms with the completion of sexual maturity, consisting ina
defect of the margin on one side, and an oblique inflection
towards the dorsal surface, and probably to be ascribed to the
strong development and projection of the long unciform
titillator, often causes the reduction, but rarely the complete
disappearance, of the styles. Thus in the adult male of the
House-cockroach the styles occur only as small knobs, of
which the larger left-hand one passes over about in the middle
of the ventral plate, which is rendered unsymmetrical by a
left-sided emargination; in “ctobta the right-hand style
disappears entirely. These styles, although noticed by
Brunner (/. c. p. 129), were entirely overlooked by Brehm T
in Periplaneta. In many exotic genera the styles are quite
rudimentary, as in. the above-mentioned Panesthia,

The styles are rudimentary in a much greater degree than
the cerci, although not such old structures. They occur in
the same low grade of development elsewhere only in the
males of certain families of the Orthoptera, in Mantide, and
many Locustide, and are, as was first recognized by Wood
Mason {, perfectly homologous with the abdominal styles
which are seated upon the ninth ventral shield of many
Thysanura (Machilis, Lepisma, Lepismina, Nicoletia), where
they assist in the forward movement of the body, and also
pertorm tactile functions ; in young Cockroaches also we see
them penetrated by strong nerves and muscles which gradually
become rudimentary.

In opposition to these styliform appendages in their embry-
onic development are the gonapophyses, of which it need only
be said that they make their appearance in the female only
at the retractation of the eighth and ninth ventral plates in
the form of processes in the neighbourhood of the sexual

* “Nouveau Systéme des Blattaires,” in Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. in
Wien, 1865, p. 15.

+ Arb. Russ. Entom. Ges. 1879,

{ Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1879, p, 181.

Constitution of the Body in the Blattide. 233

aperture. The anterior pair of gonapophyses remains simple
and originates on the eighth segment, while the posterior
pair forks secondarily and springs from the ninth segment;
the position of these gonapophyses therefore corresponds to
that ascertained for the above-mentioned Thysanura, as well
as the position of the parts of the ovipositor in Grasshoppers
and Aculeate Hymenoptera, so that these appendages may
probably be regarded as homologous structures.

On the other hand the paired uncinate hooks of the male
of Phyllodromia appear to originate on the tenth ventral
plate, so they should not be regarded as homologous with
the developed valves of the penis in Machilis, which are
seated upon the ninth abdominal ring, but, like the numerous
other chitinous pieces around the male genital aperture, only
as partial thickenings of the wall. These chitinous projec-
tions probably all serve to open and dilate the vagina of the
female, especially as a perforated penis, which is highly
developed in Machilis, seems to be wanting in the Blattidee.

As Cholodkovsky proved, leg-rudiments perfectly homo-
logous with the thoracic legs are formed in the young embryo
from the first to the ninth abdominal segment. Of these
embryonic appendages the first pair then become converted
into peculiar branchuform organs (/.¢. p. 94), which disappear
before the exclusion of the embryo; in fact on the first
abdominal segment even of older embryos we find only the
median ventral shield, which is surrounded by soft, trans-
versely folded connective membrane. On the second to the
ninth segments of the same stage the leg-rudiments undergo
a plate-like change of form.

On the nearly mature embryo of Phyllodromia I find on
the isolated ventral surface of the first abdominal segment
only the median ventral shield representing the sternal plates
of the thorax. On the second segment a median shield
which is pretty strongly chitinized at the hinder margin also
occurs in the middle, but on each side there is a plate more
strongly chitinized, especially towards the lateral margin, but
which is also covered with fine wavy wrinkles and short
spines. ‘he median ventral shield which is situated above
the lateral plates is separated from the latter by delicate
longitudinal folds, which may be traced distinctly as tar as
the seventh abdominal segment.

On the adult animal the tripartition of the ventral plate is
distinctly retained only on the second abdominal segment,
while the other ventral plates form a single shield on which
no trace of longitudinal folds can any longer be recognized.
Indications of this constitution of the ventral, plates are still

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 18

234 Mr. W. L. Distant on a new Genus of Cicadide.

to be found in Periplaneta and Blabera on the second abdo-
minal segment; here the secondary transverse line * is
interrupted in the middle, and only an indistinct demarcation
of the median shield is to be recognized.

The peculiarities of the formation of the ventral plat:
above described in Phyllodromia are in correspondence with
the remarkable condition of the ventral covering of the abdo-
men of Machilis, in which paired duplicatures which may be
raised for half their length are united by flat anterior median
shields.

Thus we get a fresh proof of the relationship of the Cock-
roaches with the Thysanura, which at the same time indicates
that the ventral plates of the Hexapoda do not represent
sternal shields of the same class any more than they corre-
spond to the ventral shields of the Chilopoda, but that they
are produced by the amalgamation of paired abdominal leg-
rudiments flattened into plates with an unpaired median

shield.

XXXV.— Description of a new Genus of the Homopterous
Family Cicadide. By W. L. DisTant.

In a collection of Rhynchota made in the Naga Hills by
Mr. William Doherty, and which has just reached my hands,
I was surprised and delighted to find another gorgeous addi-
tion to our knowledge of the Indian Cicadide, which again
requires fresh generic subdivision. It is allied to the genus
Polyneura; and as I have already passed that portion of the
family in my Monograph, I describe it here and will subse-

quently figure it in the Appendix to my work.

ANGAMIANA, gen. nov.

Body robust and elongate, broad and somewhat flattened.
Head small, including eyes much narrower than pronotum,
and narrower than base of mesonotum ; ocelli much wider
apart from eyes than from each other; face convex, slightly
prominent above. Pronotum with the lateral and posterior
margins very broad, the lateral margins strongly ampliated
and obscurely angulated. Anterior femora distinctly and

* This fine transverse line, which divides the ventral shields of the
abdomen into ventral plates and anterior shields, only originates later

from the coalescence of delicate transverse wrinkles of the chitinous skin
which is still soft.

Mr. O. Thomas on a new Cynopterus. 235

robustly spied. Tympana covered; opercula broad, ob-
tusely angulated, not reaching the middle of the abdomen.
Tegmina ‘with the apical third more or less reticulately veined,
the apical areas numerous, generally twelve or thirteen in
number.

This genus is allied to Polyneura, from which it differs by
the much narrower head, the semihyaline and not opaque teg-
mina, and the different reticulation in the venation of same ;
the pronotal margin and the size of the opercula are also
distinctive characters.

Angamiana ewtherea, n. sp.

Body black; eyes castaneous; anterior, lateral, and poste-
rior margins of pronotum (the first narrowly), and an abbre-
viated, central, narrow, longitudinal fuscia to same, posterior
margin of metanotum, head beneath (excluding face), ster-
num, and opercula pale greenish ochraceous ; legs and rostrum
black. Body more or less clothed with greyish pile, espe-
cially at the lateral margins of the mesonotum and the base
and segmental margins of the abdomen.

Tegmina semihyaline and of a pale shining bronzy hue,
the venation darker and either ochraceous or greenish, the
costal membrane pale greenish; the extreme base and the
veins enclosing the postcostal area black ; the veins enclosing
the two uppermost apical areas, the terminal vein of the lower
ulnar area, and the outer margin dark bronzy. Wings pale
bluish green, becoming pale bronzy towards apex, the outer
margin dark bronzy.

The opercula are broad and divergent, their outer margins
convex, their inner margins oblique, their apices obtusely
angulated and not reaching the middle of the abdomen. The
rostrum about reaches the posterior coxe.

Long. excl. tegm., ¢ 46, ¢ 40-42 millim.; exp. tegm.
3 3 124-132 millim.

Hab. Continental India, Naga Hills (Doherty).

XXXVI.— Diagnosis of a new Cynopterus from Borneo.
By OvprieLp 'THoMAS.

Cynopterus spadiceus, sp. n.
Closely allied to C. latidens, Dobs., with which it shares
the characteristic structure of the teeth, but distinguished by

its larger size, much shorter fur, especially on the under sur-

face ot the body, the presence of tufts of coarse yellow hairs
18*

236 Mr. R. I. Pocock on

on the sides of the neck, and by the entire nakedness of the
throat, wing and interfemoral membranes, and limbs. The
hind legs especially in C. latidens are clothed above to the
ankles, while in C. spadiceus they are wholly naked.
Colour dark rufous brown above and on the sides below,
paler on the neck and along the centre of the belly.

Skull and dentition much as in the allied species, except
that the anterior premolars are deciduous, being absent in the
type; the molar teeth above are larger and heavier, those
below are rather longer but not quite so broad, and the last
lower molar is slightly larger. The incisors number ¢ and
are subequal in size, the inner ones above being very slightly
longer than, but of the same thickness as, the outer.

Measurements of the type, an adult female, preserved as a
skin :

Head and body (stretched) 130 millim. ; forearm 77 (=3°05
in.) ; thumb, including claw, 25; lower leg 27.

Skull.—Greatest breadth 25; palate, length 19; front of
canine to back of last molar, above 13°6, below 15:7; ™+ 3:0
Bh alld dD Yate ira rms a 0) < ARS erent 74) [OOS 7478.

Hab. Baram, N.W. Borneo. Collected by Mr. Charles
Hose.

XXXVI.—Report upon a small Collection of Scorpions and
Centipedes sent from Madras by Mr. Edgar Thurston, of
the Government Central Museum. By KR. I. Pocock, of
the British Museum (Natural History). |

[Plate XII.]

SCORPIONIDEA.

THE Scorpions sent by Mr. Thurston are referable to four
species, whereof one is new. ‘The series of the species Se.
Swammerdami has been most useful in showing the amount
of variation presented during the passage from the young to
the adult condition.

Isometrus maculatus (De Geer).

This species is cosmopolitan.

Buthus Martensti, Karsch.

Buthus Martensti, Karsch, Mitth. Miinchn. ent. Ver. 1879, p. 112, 3;
Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1889, iii. p. 335, pl. xv, dQ.
Buthus grammurus, Thorell, Ann. Mus. Genov. 1889, pp. 567-570, 2,

pl. v. fig. 4.

Scorpions and Centipedes from Madras. 237

This species has been recorded from so many widely
separated localities in India that it is not rash to surmise that
it exists all over the country. The British Museum has
specimens from Sikkim, Umballah, Bengal, Madras, and
Bombay. All the specimens possess the black lines on the
tail which Thorell states to be characteristic of grammurus,
and a feature by which it may be separated from hottentotta.
This, however, is not the case, for nearly all the specimens
of hottentotta in the British Museum have black-lined tails.

Scorpio Swammerdami (Simon) *.
Heterometrus Swammerdami, Simon, Rey. Mag. Zool. 1872, p. 56,
pl. vi. fig. 3.
Pandinus asper, Thorell, Etudes Scorpiol. pp. 125-128 (1876).
eee Kochii (Peters, MS.), Karsch, Mitth. Miinchn, ent. Ver. 1879,
p: 127,

a lucidipes, Simon, Bull. Soc. Zool. Fr. x. p. 88 (1885).

This Scorpion is the largest of the Indian species and one
that is very easily recognized in the adult condition; the
cephalothorax is much depressed laterally and posteriorly,
the inner border of the hand is straight, and the tail is long
and powerful.

Four species presenting these characters have been
described—two by Mons. Simon, one by Dr. Thorell, and
one by Dr. Karsch. But the examination of a long series of
forms, such as exists in the British Museum, shows that the
characters of these so-called species are not constant and that
they vary with age, sex, and individuals. This is clearly
shown by the appended table of measurements of some of the
Museum specimens. Included in the table are many of the
examples sent by Mr. Thurston from Madras, and these
specimens, being immature and adult examples of both sexes,
have proved most useful in establishing the above-given
synonymy.
~ Of Se. asper Dr. Thorell says:—“ P, Swammerdamt
(Sim.) valde affinis est P. asper; forma manuum in utraque
specie eadem, sed P. Swammerdami major est, obscurior,

* All must agree with Dr. Thorell that if the name Aranea be abol-
ished as a generic term the name Scorpio must be treated in a similar
fashion. But the principle upon which this system rests, if widely ex-
tended—anid consistency demands that if it be applied to one case it be
extended to all—would lead to the abolition of many names which are
now in common use. Thus Papilio, Musca, Vespert tho, Anguis, &e.
woud have to be abandoned, and much confusion would thereby be
occasioned. Consequently it were surely better that these terms, which
were originally used in a general sense, be retained as restricted by zovlo-
gists of the present day. . ;

238 Mr. R. I. Pocock on

minusque scaber, et granula in superficie superiore manuum
ejus majora sunt, humilia et rotundata, cephalothorax multo
brevior quam segmenta caude 1™+2™, cauda circiter 43
longior quam cephalothorax, vesica latior quam segm. caude
5™, parum longior quam latior, aculei longitudo vesice lati-
tudine minor.”

However, in specimens of Swammerdami the colour of the
trunk varies from reddish brown to dark green; the degree of
granulation also varies considerably, in smaller specimens the
granules upon the hands are relatively coarser and much more
defined than in larger specimens, in which they appear to
have been worn away and fused together; the length of the
tail inereases with the size of specimens and varies with sex,
being considerably longer in the adult male than in the adult
female. In young specimens the cephalothorax equals in
length the length of the first two caudal segments taken
together; in the adult female it is shorter and in the adult
male very much shorter; the width of the vesicle also increases
with age; in small specimens it is as wide as the fifth caudal
segment, in large spécimens it is much wider.

So far, then, the differences between asper and Swammer-
dami may be accounted for on the supposition that asper is
merely an immature specimen. But on glancing over the
table of measurements given by Dr. Thorell of his type,
there may be noticed some curious facts which seem at first
irreconcilable with the view of the specific identity between
Swammerdami and asper. The following measurements are
given in millimetres :—Total length 97, cephalothorax 153,
tail 60, first two caudal segments 163, fifth caudal 13, width
of vesicle 5; manus, length 153, width 123.

Now, if the accompanying table of measurements be exam-
ined, it will at once be seen that specimen N is almost of the
same length as the type of asper, and therefore, unless the
two be different species, the other measurements should
coincide approximately. But this is certainly not the case,
the measurements of asper being enormously greater in each
instance. But no doubt the explanation of this discrepancy
is that the type of aspex being dry, the segments of the abdo-
men, as is often the case, have become drawn together by
the shrinking of the arthrodial membrane, so that the first
overlaps the second, the second the third, and so on. Now
specimen N is preserved in spirit and the tergites and sternites
of the abdomen are perfectly distinct. But if it be allowed
that the shrinkage in the type of asper amounts to a little
more than 2 millimetres for each abdominal segment, we ma
roughly put the original length of the specimen at about 115

Scorpions and Centipedes from Madras. 239

or 116 millimetres. If, then, it be compared with specimen
G in the list, which is 1154 millim. in total length, it will be
found that the other figures agree remarkably well, the only
exception being that the length of the tail in asper is far too
little, being 60 as opposed to 63. But if we take the
measurement as given by Dr. Thorell of each caudal seg-
ment separately, we find that the total amounts to61?. Thus
only a slight difference is left, and this needs no accounting
for if it be remembered that 63 represents the leneth of the
segments plus the arthrodial membrane, whereas 61? is the
length ménus this membrane. The type of asper, then,
appears to be a young male of Swammerdami.

Dr. Karsch describes his species as follows :—‘‘Pandinus
Kochi (Peters, MS.), quam formam a Pandino Swammer-
dami (Ki. 8.) differre nullo modo possum quam magnitudine
minore, ca. 105, in Swammerdami 158 mm.; sed Thorell
cephalothoracem hujus speciei caude segmentis 1°+ 2° con-
junctim multo breviorem descripsit, qui in nostra forma in
duobus exemplis siccatis ex Java segmenta 1™+2™ caudee
anteriora longitudine omnino equat et ad P. asprum, Thor.,
speciem minorem long. ca. 97 mm. cadere non potest, quum
Thorell ejus cephalothoracem segmentis caude 1° + 2° conj.
parum breviorem describeret et species nostra P. Swammer-
dami nec P. aspré sculpturam ostendat,”

It is clear from what is written above that at the time Dr.
Karsch had not seen a specimen of S. Swammerdami ; con-
sequently the statement about the sculpture of his species
must be treated with caution. For the rest, the difference in
the length of the first two caudal segments observed between
Swammerdami, asper, and Kochi is, as we have shown, a
character dependent upon age and sex. For instance, in
specimen N in our table—a young female—the cephalothorax
equals in length the first two caudal segments. 1 believe
therefore that the types of Aochit are young females of
Swammerdami. It must be admitted, however, that an
element of doubt on this point exists on the strength of Java
being assigned as the locality for the species.

Mons. EK. Simon separates (ustdipes trom Swammerdami
for the following reasons :—the size is smaller, the legs are
bright yellow, the hand is much smoother and a little wider
than long (in Swammerdami it is exactly as wide as long),
the fifth caudal segment is the same length as the cephalo-
thorax (a little longer in Swammerdam?), of the same width
as the vesicle, and strongly channelied above in its upper
half (a little narrower than the vesicle and scarcely chan-
nelled in Swammerdami). But each of these as a specitic

240 Mr. R. I. Pocock on

character may be taken exception to. Size by itself is of
course valueless; the colour of the legs, as shown by the
Museum series, varies from very dark brown toclear pale yellow
—thus in specimen J they are very deep brown, in A light
brown, in F dark yellow, in M pale yellow; the fifth caudal
segment is shorter than the cephalothorax in females, as long
in males of a certain age, and longer in large males ; and the
vesicle, as stated above, is wider than the fifth caudal seg-
ment in adults and of the same width in young forms; the
groove on the upper surface of the vesicle varies from being
invisible to clearly pronounced ; the sculpturing of the hand
is also a matter of individual variation.

The only character that seems of importance is the width
of the hand, for in ducdd7pes it is stated that the hand is wider
than itis long. Now, a glance at our table of measurements
shows that, although subject to variation, the length of the
hand is always greater than the width; so that when, in
addition to the statement about lucidipes, it is noticed that
Mons. Simon asserts that in Swammerdami the width of the
hand is as great as the length, the conclusion seems almost
inevitable that his measurements have been taken along
different lines from those in the table. In the table the
greatest width is taken along a line at right angles to the
axis of the brachium, and the greatest length from a point on
the anterior (inner) surface at the base of the dactylar pro-
longation to the extremity of the dilatation of the hand.
And this measurement of the length always exceeds that of
the width. If, however, the width be taken from the point
of articulation of the movable dactylus to the extremity of the
dilatation, it will be found to be as great or greater than the
length.

That this explanation is the true one is rendered practically
certain by the fact that in the figure of the type of Sc. Swam-
merdamt the form of the hand is the same as in the specimens
in the Museum collection, and that when measured as these
have been measured the length is always greater than the
width.

Sufficient grounds have now, I think, been found in each
case to justify the conclusion respecting the specific identity
of the forms that have received the above names.

241

Scorpions and Centipedes from Madras.

Table to show the amount of Variation presented by Sc. Swammerdami.

Specimen.

CEO RUE et ROWE

| Mode of preser-

In spirit.
”
Dry.

”

In spirit.
”

”

)

”

Dry.

Do.
In spirit.
”

Sex.

Total
length.

millim,
176
140
TSI
NOY!
119

Trunk

distorted.

115°5
91
75
166

151°5
146
140
96

Cephalo-
thorax,
length.

millim,
20
18
18
17
15:5
16:5

155
125
105
21
21
20
19°3
135

Ist two
tail-seg-
ments,
length.

millim.
27:3
23
22
On
17:1
20
16:5

15
10:5
25

24
21
13:5

5th tail-sezment,

length. | width.

millim. | millim.

a
S
EmINTOOWOO NT QuINITO

ae |

Vesicle,
width,

millim. | millim,

millim,

Manus,

width. | length.

Locality.

Ceylon.

Madras,
Burdwan.

”

India.
Madras,

”
”

”
India.

”
Coonoor.
Madras,

242 Mr. R. I. Pocock on

Hormurus leviceps, sp.n. (Pl. XII. figs. 1 and 1a.)

Colour of upper surface of trunk varying from ochraceous
to piceous, under surface always much paler, testaceous or
ochraceous ; palpi and legs reddish brown to almost black
above, paler beneath; vesicle always much paler than the
rest of the tail, usually streaked beneath with darker bands of
colour; aculeus dark brown.

Cephalothorax closely and finely punctured throughout,
almost wholly smooth, sometimes very slightly and finely
granular in its postero-lateral portions, marked here and there,
especially on its margin, with setiferous pores; marked
throughout its extent by a median longitudinal sulcus; its
anterior margin somewhat shallowly excised; the area around
the median eyes flat or slightly depressed; the median eyes
of relatively small size and not elevated on to a tubercle.

Tergites very finely and closely punctured, smooth or
feebly granular at the sides, the punctures very numerous and
fine on the hinder margin; the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth
marked with two conspicuous depressions, which define a
more or less pyriform area; these depressions only faintly
developed on the first, second, and seventh tergites.

Sternites marked with two abbreviated subparallel depres-
sions, very faintly and closely punctured.

Tail.—Lower surface thickly and closely punctured, the
first four segments not keeled below, the lines of the keels
being marked by serially arranged setiferous pores, the fifth
segment with its inferior keels marked by three rows of
unevenly spaced granules ; upper surface of the tail without
keels; the anterior segments very slightly granular at the
sides ; the posterior segments smooth throughout ; the median
sulcus perfectly smooth ; vesicle pyriform, flatter and lightly
sulcate above, smooth and setose beneath ; aculeus short and
abruptly curved.

Palp.— Humerus with upper surface thickly and_ finely
punctured, and either, at all events in its proximal half,
thickly and finely granular, or almost wholly smooth, its
anterior surface finely and sparsely granular and bounded
above and below by a series of stronger sharp tubercles ;
its inferior surface finely and closely punctured, smooth ;
the posterior surface somewhat coarsely granular above.
Brachium with upper surface smooth and punctured, pos-
terior surface feebly granular and defined above and below
by a subtuberculate ridge; inferior surface smooth and
punctured; anterior surface smooth or slightly granular
proximally, defined below by a series of conspicuous denticles

Scorpions and Centipedes from Madras. 243

and above by a subtubercular or subgranular ridge, the basal
prominence armed with two larger and sometimes a few
smaller teeth, each of the larger teeth bearing a setiferous
pore. Hand thickly punctured above, smooth or subrugulose,
distinctly though sparsely granular in front, smooth below
and somewhat coarsely granular behind, the “ hand-back ”
defined above and below by a conspicuous subgranular keel.
Movable dactylus slightly or considerably shorter than the
*“ hand-back,” with a feebly developed lobe at the distal end
of the inner snrface; when the dactyli are closed a corre-
sponding but less well developed lobe on the immovable
dactylus fits in front of that on the movable dactylus.

Femora of the first three pairs of legs furnished beneath
with a posterior long and an anterior short series of granules ;
femora of the fourth pair granular beneath only at the distal
extremity.

Pectines with, as a rule, five teeth, rarely four or six, and
in one instance only three.

Stigmata slit-like.

The genital operculum in the female without trace of median
suture, the right and left halves having coalesced to form a
plate, very much wider than long, with angularly produced
posterior margin.

Measurements in millimetres of a 3 spectmen.—Total length
55; cephalothorax, length 8, width 8°5; tail, length 25—
first segment 3, second segment 3°5 (taken together 7), fifth
segment 5°4 ; vesicle and aculeus, length 6; humerus, length
7; brachium, length 7-5; “ hand-back,” length 9; width of
hand 5°5; movable dactylus, length 7.

A number of specimens of various ages and both sexes.

This species is closely allied to Hl. caudicula, L. Koch, a
species found in the Australian and Austro-Malayan region.
H. leviceps, however, may be recognized by being almost
wholly smooth (H. caudicula having distinctly sculptured
tergites and coarsely granular cephalothorax and palpi), in
having the median eyes much smaller and not situated on an
eminence, in having the form of the dactyli the same in the
two sexes, and in having the genital operculum in the female
of a different shape (in cawdicula this plate bears distinct
traces of the median suture, is more heart-like in shape, less
angularly produced behind, and less wide relatively to its
length) ; moreover, the ridge which forms the upper boun-
dary to the “ hand-back”’ is more strongly developed.

In addition to the series sent by Mr. Thurston from
Madras the British Museum possesses two specimens (¢ ? )
sent by Mr. W. Davidson from the Anamallai Hills, Koim-

244 Mr. R. I. Pocock on

batur. These appear to differ slightly from the Madras form
in being a little more granular, in having a slightly longer
tail, and in having the anterior margin of the cephalothorax
a little more deeply excised.

This species also presents strong points of resemblance
with FH. diremptus, Karsch—the only species of the genus
known from Africa—but, according to the description, the
cephalothorax of déremptus is a little longer than the “ hand-
back,” whereas in leviceps it is always shorter; moreover,
the movable finger of déremptus bears near the middle of its
inner surface a large lobe and the fingers are widely separated
at the base when closed (in leviceps they are in contact
throughout their length).

CHILOPODA,

Only a few species of this group were obtained, yet more
than half of them prove to be new. Of these one is a species
of Himantarium and the others are species of Otostigma.
It seems at first a surprising fact that out of the four species
of Otostigma in the collection all should be new to science ;
but it is not a matter for wonder in the face of the cireum-
stance that, although this genus is richer in species in the
Oriental Region than any other (with the exception perhaps
of Scolopendra), yet until now only one species, and that a
widely distributed one, has been recorded from India proper !

In tact, the knowledge that we possess of Indian Myrio-
poda—and the same almost may be said with respect to
Spiders and Scorpions—is ridiculously scanty considering the
length of time that the country has been occupied by the
English. Judging by analogy, these animals must be
exceedingly abundant, and an enormous number of new forms
could doubtless be collected by anyone who would but take
the trouble to look for them.

Scutigera longicornis (Fabr.).

A very widely ranging species. Common in India and
Burma, and extending through Sumatra and Borneo.

Genus RHYSIDA.

Rhysida, Wood, Journ. Ac. Sci. Philad. v. p. 40 (1863).

This name was put forward by Dr. Wood to take the
place of Branchiostoma of Newport, Branchiostoma having

been previously applied by Costa to the genus which is com-
monly known as Amphiovus. But Dr. Wood’s proposal has

Scorpions and Centipedes from Madras. 245

met with no acceptance. Nevertheless, in accordance with
the laws of nomenclature, hisname Rhysida must be adopted
for those centipedes which, since Newport’s days, have been
termed Branchiostoma.

Rhysida immarginata (Porath).

Branchiostoma immarginatum, Porath, Bih. Sv. Vet.-Ak. Handl. iv.
p. 24 (1876).
Common in Further India, but never before recorded from

India proper.

Heterostoma spinosum, Newport.

Hitherto known only from Ceylon.

Otostigma splendens, sp. n.

Colour mostly ochraceous, but shining with metallic lustre.

Hlead-plate not narrowed behind, a little wider than long,
not sulcate.

Antenne short, composed of seventeen segments, whereof
the basal two are naked and the rest pubescent.

Maxillary sternite convex from before backwards and from
side to side; prosternal plates short, armed with four sharp
teeth ; basal tooth bidentate ; claw stout and short.

Tergites trom the fifth strongly bisulcate, from the eighth
marginate, from the sixth faintly wrinkled laterally, and in
the posterior half of the body obsoletely grooved between the
sulci.

Sternites marked with two very abbreviated sulci in front
and with two median impressions, one central, the other pos-
terior.

Anal somite.—Sternite with straight converging sides and
lightly concave hinder margin; pleuree covered with small
pores, the process slender, short, armed apically with two
strong s pines and above with one strong spine; legs mode-
rately long; femur armed with six spines, one in the middle
of the upper inner margin, two on the under inner margin,
and three on the under outer margin ; tarsus unarmed, claw.
spined ; ¢ergite not impressed behind.

Legs.—Tarsal segment of the preanal legs unarmed;
proximal tarsal segment of the rest of the legs armed with
a single spur.

Three specimens, length 50 millim.

This species is undoubtedly very closely allied to O. cey-
lonicum, Haase, but it appears to be very much less wrinkled ;.

246 Mr. R. I. Pocock on

moreover, in ceylonicum the tarsus of the preanal leg is armed
with a spur, the pleure terminate in a single spine, and
the anal tergite has a different form.

Otostigma morsitans, sp. n.

Colour olivaceous, legs and under surface paler, not or
hardly metallic.

Head-plate wider than long, not narrowed behind and not
sulcate, sparsely but somewhat deeply punctured.

Antenne short, composed of seventeen segments, whereof
the basal two are naked and the rest pubescent.

Mozxillary sternite. punctured like the head, prosternal
plates short, in contact, and obscurely divided into four teeth ;
basal tooth of the maxillipedes bearing two feebly developed
teeth.

Tergites very finely and closely punctured and also fur-
nished with larger and more scattered punctures ; from the
sixth bisulcate, from the eighth marginate, and from the fifth
wrinkled laterally ; in the posterior half of the body the ter-
gites are wrinkled also in the centre and those in about the
hindmost third of the body are armed with many irregularly
arranged spicules.

Sternites punctured like the tergites, not bisulcate, but
furnished with two impressions on each side of the middle
line in the centre of the plate and a much fainter impression
in the middle of its posterior border.

Anal somite.—Sternite with nearly straight converging
sides and very lightly concave hinder margin; pleure thickly
and finely punctured, bearing a single well-developed spine
in the middle of the posterior edge, the process very short
and armed with two apical spines; legs moderately long and
slender, tarsus unspined, femur armed with only five spines,
situated on the under surface—two of these form an internal
and three an external series; tergite bearing a median keel
in its anterior half, scarcely impressed behind,

Legs.—Proximal tarsal segment of all the legs, including
the preanal pair, armed with a single inferior spur and some-
times also with an anterior spine.

Length of largest specimen 61 millim.

This species is also closely allied to O. ceylonicum. It
differs, however, in having a very short pleural process ter-
minated by two spines and in having the spines on the anal
femora confined to the under surface. In having the poste-
rior tergites covered with spicules it resembles O. carinatum,
but with this species it cannot be confounded.

Scorpions and Centipedes from Madras. 247

Otostigma nudum, sp. un. (Pl. XII. figs. 3-3 0.)

Colour of tergites pale olivaceous, of sternites testaceous,
of head, first tergite, and maxillary sternite rufous, tarsi with
pale green tint.

Head-plate ovate, long, longer than wide, not sulcate.

Antenne short, composed of seventeen segments, whereof
the proximal three are naked and the rest pubescent.

Mavwillary sternite relatively long, sparsely punctured, and
marked with a shallow, median, longitudinal sulcus; pro-
sternal plates long and produced far forwards, so that the
anterior edge is almost on a level with the apex of the basal
tooth of the maxillipede, the two almost in contact and each
armed with four poorly developed teeth; the basal tooth of
the maxillipede sharp and bearing on its inner side a small
tooth ; claw stout and curved.

Tergites very minutely and closely punctured ; from the
fifth bisulcate, from the eighth marginate, those in the middle
and posterior half of the body wrinkled laterally and in the
middle.

Sternites conspicuously trisulcate, being marked with the
usual lateral sulci and, in addition, with a median, longitu-
dinal, more or less abbreviated sulcus.

Anal somite-—Sternite with posteriorly converging lateral
margins and lightly concave posterior margin; pleure
covered with relatively large pores, the process short, stout,
slightly incurved, and terminated by twospines, not armed with
lateral or superior spines ; tergite not sulcate and not poste-
riorly impressed ; /egs short and stout, femur armed with
seven spines —two on the upper-inner edge, two on the under-
inner edge, and three on the under-outer edge; upper surface
of femur, patella, and tibia obsoletely and longitudinally
sulcate ; tarsus not armed with spur, claw furnished with
two basal spines.

Legs with tarsal segments unarmed ; claws spined.

Length of body 52 millim,

In possessing trisulcate sternites, larger pleural pores, and
forwardly-produced prosternal plates this species is allied to
O. geophilinum, Haase ; but it differs markedly from all the
Old-W orld species of the genus known to me in having the
tarsal segments of all the legs unspined.

A single specimen only was sent.

Otostigma ruficeps, sp.n. (Pl. XII. figs. 2-2 0.)

Colour of tergites somewhat grass-green, legs and sternites
paler ; head-plate, with exception of the frontal area, which is

248 Mr. R. I. Pocock on

green, and first tergite, castaneous ; antenne green; maxillary
sternite castaneous, with the exception of its anterior third,
which is pale green.

Head-plate truncate behind, wider than long, not sulcate.

Antenne relatively long , composed of twenty-one elongate
segments, whereof the basal two are naked and the rest pubes-
cent.

Mazillary sternite wide, distinctly hollowed in its lateral
portions, the concavity being bounded behind and at the sides
by a well-marked ridge; prosternal plates divergent from
the base, each armed et four strong and sharp teeth ; basal
tooth of the maxillipedes projecting far in advance of the
prosternal plates, each distinctly bi- or tridentate ; claw long
and slender.

Tergites from the seventh sulcate, from the tenth margi-
nate, obsoletely wrinkled.

Sternites not sulcate, at most bearing the very faintest indi-
cations of two lateral impressions.

Anal somite.—Sternite with very convex lateral margins
and strongly concave posterior margin; pleure thickly
covered with small pores, the process short and stout, termi-

nated by one or two small spines, without superior or lateral
spines ; ¢ergite with a faintly marked posterior impression ;
(anal legs absent).

Legs with the claws armed with two basal spines; the
proximal tarsal segment armed with two spurs, an anterior
and an inferior; in addition the patella of the first pair of legs
armed with a single anterior spine, and the tibia of the first
seven pairs armed with a siugle anterior spine.

A single specimen, length 41 millim.

In the absence of the anal and preanal legs it is not possible
to point out the affinities of this species. But it is sufficiently
characterized by the depressed condition of the sides of the
maxillary sternite—a peculiarity which I have never seen in
any other member of the genus.

HMimantarium (?) striatum, sp.n. (Pl. XII. figs. 4-4 6.)

Colour ochraceous, with darker markings and a pale median

band above, paler beneath.

Head-plate scarcely longer than wide, convex, anterior and
lateral margins convex, with rounded postero-lateral angles
and straight posterior margin, completely covering the max-
illary fect ; frontal lamina large and distinct.

Basal plate as wide as the “head, very short, os. about
five times as wide as long.

Scorpions and Centipedes from Madras. 249

Mawillary sternite very wide, twice as wide as_ long,
marked by a deep and wide sulcus, which runs longitudinally
from the middle of the anterior border to the middle of the
posterior border; maxillipedes almost reaching the anterior
border of the cephalic plate, the claw enormously long, lightly
curved, and blade-like.

Antenne not attenuate, of a uniform thickness throughout,
the apical segment as long as the two that precede it ; shortly
hirsute.

Tergites not bisulcate, but conspicuously although finely
striate.

Sternites marked with a median circular porous area and
behind the middle with a transverse porous area, which in
the middle and hinder half of the body becomes divided into
two halves.

Anal somite.—Tergite not covering the pleure; pleure
moderately inflated, furnished with many close-set pores
where they come in contact with the anal tergite and sternite,
and a few scattered but conspicuous pores on the disk ; ster-
nite parallel-sided, with rounded postero-lateral angles and
straight posterior margin, its surface marked with a median
longitudinal sulcus ; anal legs very short, considerably shorter
than the preceding pair, composed of five segments and ter-
minated by a claw.

Number of pairs of legs (2) 69; length 38 millim.

A single specimen.

This species has been only provisionally referred to the
genus Himantarium; lack of material has prevented me
from putting the specimen to a critical examination suffi-
ciently exact to determine its generic position. It is un-
doubtedly congeneric with Dr. Meinert’s Himantartum insigne
and indicum (two species from Kooloo), but it differs from
both in having its pleure distinctly porous and its anal legs
armed with a claw.

Mecistocephalus punctifrons, Newport.

Common throughout the Oriental Region.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XII.

Fig. 1. Hormurus lecviceps, sp. n., 5, nat. size,

Fig. 1a. Ditto, 2. Sternum, operculum, and pectines.
Fig. 2. Otostigma ruficeps, sp. n. Head from above.
Fig. 2a. Ditto. Head from below.

Fig. 2b. Ditto. Anal pleura from the side.

Fig. 8. Otostigma nudum, sp. n. Head from above.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. Nf)

250 Mr. R. I. Pocock on a new Scorpion.

Fig. 3a. Otostigma nudum, sp. nu. Head from below.

Fig. 3b. Ditto. Anal somite from below.

Fig. 4. Himantarium (?) striatum, sp. n. Head from above.
Fig. 4a. Ditto. Head from below.

Fig. 4b. Ditto. Anal somite from below.

XXXVIII.—Deseription of anew Genus and Species of Scor-

pion belonging to the Group Jurini. By R. I. Pocock,
of the British Museum (Nat. Hist.).

[Plate XI. B, figs. 1-1 c.]}

UROMACHUS, gen. nov.

Sternum pentagonal, longer than wide.

Movable and immovable dactyli of the cheliceree armed
with three strong teeth above, and with a series of similar
tubercular teeth below.

Hands distinctly costate.

Cephalothorax with anterior margin truncate; ocular
tubercle not divided.

Stigmata circular.

Vesicle of tail elongate, about as long as the fifth segment,
almost parallel-sided, not globular; slender at its anterior
end, flattened beneath ; aculeus very short, about one fifth of
the length of the vesicle, stout in its anterior half, its poste-
rior half becoming abruptly spiniform.

This genus is closely allied to Cherilus of Simon, and
may only be separated from it by the remarkable form of the
caudal vesicle. ‘The vesicle is somewhat elongate in Cherilus,
but in this new species it is so totally different in shape
from that of any other Scorpion, that I have thought the
peculiarity worthy of generic distinction, Is it a sexual
character ?

Uromachus pictus, sp.n. (Pl. XI. B, figs. 1-1.)

Colour reddish brown, variegated with black.

Cephalothorax.—Anterior border almost straight, very
slightly emarginate; the sides abruptly sloped at an angle
from the median portion; the ante-ocular area nearly flat,
slightly hollowed anteriorly and smooth, the post-ocular area
deeply marked by the median sulcus, which is continuous in
front with a hollow on each side of the ocular tubercle, the
sides of the sulcus distinctly granular; the tubercle situated
well in the anterior half of the cephalothorax, not sulcate but
prolonged in front and behind into a short tapering process ;

Mr. R. I. Pocock on a new Scorpion, 251

the lateral portions of the cephalothorax somewhat coarsely
granular; two contiguous lateral eyes on each side.

Tergites sparsely and bluntly, but somewhat coarsely
eranular; the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth with a median
low smooth keel in front, and one low smooth keel on each
side, the seventh bearing on each side above a low eminence
terminating behind in a tubercle, and below a subtubercular
keel which also terminates behind in a large tubercle.

Sternites smooth, anteriorly bisuleate.

Tait more than five timesas long as the cephalothorax, taper-
ing gradually from the base to the posterior end of the fifth
segment; the segments above excavated only in front and
close to the joint; the rest of the upper surface flat, or nearly
so; the first segment provided with ten keels, the second,
third, and fourth with eight keels, the fifth with seven keels ;
the superior keels on the first four well expressed and denti-
culate in the posterior half; the superior lateral keels more
prominent and complete on these same segments, but less
denticulate than the superior keels; the rest of the keels
almost smooth, more or less uneven and subtubercular on the
first three segments, but on the fourth they are distinetly but
irregularly and bluntly dentate; in the fifth segment the
superior keels are almost absent, being represented merely by
the edge formed by the slope of the lateral surface at right
angles to the upper surface, this edge is sparsely and bluntly
dentate, the superior lateral keelsare well expressed and bluntly
and sparsely dentate; the three inferior keels more strongly
developed than in the preceding segments, and strongly and
sparsely dentate ; the upper surface of this segment anteriorly
obsoletely bicostate. Vestcle—Upper surface nearly flat and
smooth in front, in its posterior two thirds convex from side
to side, and thickly and coarsely granular; beneath it is flat
or slightly concave, and, as also are the sides, coarsely but
bluntly granular ; its greatest width is less than one third of
its length, and its greatest height or thickness less than one
fourth of its length; anterior half of the aculeus subtuber-
cular below, the posterior half spiniform but short, and but
little curved.

Palpi: humerus with upper surface sparsely but coarsely
granular, and bounded in front and behind by a low, bluntly
subdentate keel; the anterior surface somewhat strongly
tubercular and granular; the posterior surface smooth.
Brachium distinctly carinate above, behind, and below, the
keels smooth or subtubercular. Manus dilated, turnished
with ten complete, mostly granular or subtubercular, strong
keels, the superior internal keel dentate ; the intercarinal

19%

252 Bibl iographical Notices.

spaces granular and adorned with a reticulated pattern formed
of rows of minute granules; dactyli short and strong, in con-
tact throughout, neither sinuate, lobate, nor strongly dentate,
but armed with a number of oblique, subparallel rows of
denticles, the apical denticles of each row being the largest.

Legs with femora anteriorly granular.

Pectines furnished with five large teeth.

Measurements in millimetres.—Total length 62; cephalo-
thorax, length and width 7; distance of central eyes from
post-marginal 4; tail, length 41°5—first segment, length 4,
width 3-2; second, length 5:2, width 2°8; third, length 5°8,
width 2°8; fourth, length 63, width 2°8; fifth, length 10,
width 2°3: vesicle, length 9:7, greatest width 2°5, at base
1:7, height 2; aculeus, length 2 ; palpi, humerus, length 5:5 ;
brachium, length 6; manus, width 4, length 6°7, height 4;
length of “ hand-back”’ 6; movable digit, length 6.

Two dried specimens in the Museum, apparently adult,
but of doubtful sex, from Silhet. One of these, which I have
selected as the type, was from the collection of Mr. Stains-
forth.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. B, Fries. 1-le.
Fig. 1. Uromachus pictus, gen. et sp. nov., nat, size.
Fig. 1a. Ditto. Fifth caudal segment and vesicle from the side.
Fig. 1b. Ditto. Aculeus from the side.
Fig. 1e. Ditto. Aculeus from below.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

A Monograph of Oriental Cicadide. By W.L. Distant. Published
by order of the Trustees of the Indian Museum, Calcutta.—
Part 1. 4to. London: King & Co., 1889.

A Cataloque of the Mantodeu, with descriptions of new Genera and
Species, and an Enumeration of the Specimens in the Collection of
the Indian Museum, Calcutta. By J. Woop-Mason,—No. 1. 8vo.
Calcutta, 1889.

In some recent notices of Manuals of Indian Vertebrate Animals
issued under Government auspices, we ventured to express a hope
that on the completion of the proposed series of works it might be
found possible to treat the rich invertebrate fauna more or less in
the same fashion. We have now to notice the commencement of
two works which would seem more or less to tend towards this
desideratum, although they do not, in many respects, take a
position parallel to that of the other volumes above referred to.

Mr. Distant’s ‘ Monograph of Oriental Cicadidee’ certainly covers
the same ground, but it is a much more elaborate work than we

Geological Society. 253

should have dared to hope for; in fact, a similar treatment of the
Oriental Insect-fauna alone would produce a small library of books
such as no Government could be expected to take the responsibility
of publishing. But should the production of a series of Manuals of
the Indian Invertebrata ever be realized, such books as Mr. Distant’s
will be of great importance in the identification of species, to be
briefly described in the smaller works; but in that case we hope
that they may not, as in the case of the late Dr. Day’s ‘ Indian
Fishes,’ cause the elimination of nearly all synonymy.

That Mr. Distant’s book will be somewhat voluminous may be
inferred from the fact that this first part includes, besides the pre-
liminary general matter, the descriptions of only twenty-eight
species belonging to four genera, and leaves 9 genera still to be
treated in his first subfamily of Cicadine. ‘The descriptions are
carefully drawn up, and the student ought to have little difficulty
in determining the various species, especially with the aid of the
beautifully-executed plates, two of which illustrate the present part.
There is only one drawback to the treatment of the subject by the
Author, namely, that he divides the family into two subfamilies,
Cicadine and Tibicenine, solely upon characters belonging to the
male insect, and that he seems inclined to lay rather much stress
upon the development of the tympanic opercula, also a male cha-
racter, in the distinction of species and genera; but with a book of
which only a first instalment has appeared, any criticism is perhaps
out of place.

Mr. Wood-Mason’s ‘Catalogue of Mantodea’ is not so strictly
au Indian book as Mr. Distant’s. It is, in fact, a catalogue of the
Insects of the family Mantodea contained in the Indian Museum ;
and although, as might be expected, it contains a great number of
Eastern species, these are interspersed with others from various
parts of the World, especially Africa and Australia, and even South
America. This first part, which is probably about half of the
entire work, includes notices of eighty-seven species, five of which
are described as new, and the descriptions of some other species
previously described by the Author are also given, as well as occa-
sional notes on the characters of other forms, which are often
illustrated with very instructive woodcut figures. Two new genera
of Eremiaphilide are characterized under the names of Parowy-
ophthalmus and Parepiscopus, both for forms in which the eyes project
upwards more or less in the shape of horns.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

November 20, 1889.—W. T. Blanford, LL.D., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. “On the Occurrence of the Striped Hyena in the Tertiary of
the Val d’Arno.” By R. Lydekker, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.

A portion of the left maxilla of a Hyena, in the British Museum,

Dirk Geological Society.

containing the entire carnassial, the hinder half of the third pre-
molar, and traces of the inner extremity of a molar, was referred by
the Author in 1885 to H. striata, and provisionally regarded as of
Pleistocene age, but subsequently concluded to have been of Upper
Pliocene age. ‘The Author has also referred a right upper carnassial
of a Hyzena from the Red Crag to the same species, on the supposi-
tion that Prof. Gaudry’s reference of H. arvernensis to H. striata
was correct. In the present case, Dr. Weithofer has concluded that
Hf, arvernensis is entitled to rank as a valid species, and has accepted
the Author’s determination of the Red-Crag form, thereby implying
that the identification of the latter with H. arvernensis was erro-
neous. Dr, Weithofer also states that all the specimens from the
Pliocene of the Val d’Arno which have come under his notice are
more nearly allied to the Crocutine group.

In the present paper, measurements of the recent, Red Crag,
and Val-d’Arno specimens referred by the Author to H. striata
were given, and the differences shown to be within the limits of
individual variation, whilst the actual contour of the teeth corre-
sponded, leading the Author to maintain the correctness of his
original determination.

After comparison of the British-Museum specimen with the upper
jaws of Hyzenas from the Val d’Arno, figured by Dr. Weithofer, it
was shown that the former specimen was distinct from H. robusta
(which latter is allied to H. felina of the Siwalik Hills), whilst a
nearer resemblance, though with well-marked specific difference, was
made out with H. topariensis, which was in turn observed to be
closely allied to, if not identical with, H. Perrieri.

It was observed that H. arvernensis could be with diffieulty dis-
tinguished from H. brunnea, and that both of these were nearer to
H, striata than to H. eroeuta, whilst H. Perrievi appeared to connect
them with the latter.

2. On a new Genus of Siliceous Sponges from the Lower Cal-
careous Grit of Yorkshire.” By Dr. G. J. Hinde, F.G.S.

The Author referred, in the first instance, to the discussion as to
the nature of certain renuline bodies occurring in the Corallian of
Yorkshire and elsewhere. Although regarded of late years as the
globate spicules of a siliceous sponge, the apparent absence of
acerate and forked spicules in association therewith has always pre-
sented a difficulty. Recently the Author has recognized in specimens
from Scarborough certain siliceous sponges which seem to be formed
entirely of globates. In outward appearance the sponge is upright,
and palmate or fan-shaped, the largest being 140 millim. in height.
The wall is 14 millim, thick, and consists of plates which anasto-
mose so as to form a labyrinthine structure, and are perforated
regularly by oval slits. The laminated walls are composed entirely
of small reniform spicules (globates), well seen where secondary
crystallization has not fused them together. The globates, like
those of Geodi, are built up of fibres radiating from the centre,

Geological Society. 255

and terminating on the outer surface in nodose ends, which causes
a spotted appearance.

The exceptional character of these fossils consists in their having
the siliccous skeleton composed entirely of globates. The nearest
living form is Placospongia, in which both the axis and the dermal
crust are formed of globates with an interspace built up of nume-
rous pin-like spicules. Assuming the absence of pin-like spicules
in the Scarborough fossil, the differences are more than generic.
The name Renulina, given by Blake to the globates, having been
preoccupied, the Author proposed that of Rhawella for the genus, and
described the sponge from the Lower Calcareous Grit as R. perforata,

sp. n.

December 4, 1889.—W. T. Blanford, LL.D., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. “On Remains of Small Sauropodous Dinosaurs from the
Wealden.” By R. Lydekker, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.

The Author first noticed some teeth from the Wealden of Sussex
and the Isle of Wight, provisionally referred by Mantell, and sub-
sequently by Sir R. Owen, to Hylewosaurus, which he had made the
type of a species of Plewrocelus. He then described the imperfect
centrum of a dorsal vertebra from the Wealden of Cuckfield, pre-
served in the British Museum, and a somewhat larger imperfect
vertebra obtained from the Wealden of Brook, Isle of Wight.

In the absence of any evidence in favour of a contrary view, he
proposed provisionally to refer the vertebrae to Plewrocalus valdensis,
a name which he had given to the form represented by the teeth in
a paper published in the ‘ Geological Magazine’ for the current year.
He stated that they afforded absolutely conclusive evidence of the
occurrence in the English Wealden of a diminutive Sauropodous
Dinosaur, which was the contemporary of the huge Hoplosaurus
and the still more gigantic Pelorosaurus, and that they also served
to increase the evidence as to the similarity of the Dinosaurian
fauna of the Upper Jurassic of North America to that of the
Upper Jurassic and Lower Cretaceous of Europe.

2. * Ona peculiar horn-like Dinosaurian Bone from the Wealden.”
By R. Lydekker, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.

Among a series of vertebrate remains sent from the Dorsetshire
County Museum to the British Museum, there is an imperfect, stout,
short, cone-like bone from the Wealden of Brook, Isle of Wight.
It appears to present a close resemblance to the horn-cores of the
Dinosaur described by Prof. Marsh as Ceratops.

The Author did not regard the specimen as affording conclusive
evidence of the existence in the Wealden of a large Dinosaur fur-
nished with horn-like projections on the skull like those of the Ame-
rican Ceratops, but suggested that such might really prove to be its
true nature.

256 Miscellaneous.

Dece

/, {. Blanford, LLD:, 2 2:35;
President, in the Chair.
The following communication was read :—

>
8)

“ On the Oecurrenee of the Genus Girvanella, and remarks on
Oolitic Structure.” By E. Wethered, Esq., F.G.S.

The Author referred to his previous work, wherein he had shown
that Girvanella is not confined to Silurian rocks, and that as a rock-
forming organism it is more important than was supposed, oceurring
in the Gloucestershire Pea-grit, and also in the Coraline Oolite of
Weymouth. He now dealt more in detail with its occurrence (1) in
the Carboniferous Oolitic Limestone; and (2) in the Jurassic Oolites.

In the Carboniferous Limestone of the Avon valley, oolitie lime-
stone occurs on four horizons, in three of which the Oolites rest on
dolomite. In none of these three cases are there signs of Girva-
nella. From beds partly Oolitic, and not resting on dolomite, he has
been able to determine two new species. The Oolite not associated
with dolomite is less crystalline, and the original structure is better
preserved.

In referring to G. pisolitica, he discussed whether Girvanella is
most allied to the ‘ Challenger’ Foraminifer, Hyperammina vagans,
or to Syringammina fragilissima. ‘Traces of the organism occur in
the Clypeus-grit. but none are quoted from beds of the Great Oolite,
nor from the Portland Oolite. The Author had already shown that
the pisolites in the Coralline Oolite of Weymouth were not concre-
tions, but forms of Girvanella. Excluding these, he showed that the
spherules are of four types, of which one is the ordinary oolitic
granule, while each of the others suggests the presence of Grva-
nella.

The characters of the genus, as seen under the microscope, were
indicated, and four new species were described.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Note on a Young Specimen of Zoarces viviparus.
By Ernest W. L. Hour, Marine Laboratory, St. Andrews.

On the 4th Jan. a female viviparous blenny extruded between
forty and fifty young in the tank-room. Such of the young as were
examined at the time measured, within a narrow margin, 2 inches.
On the 25th Jan. several were measured, but, owing probably to
the meagreness of the food-supply, little or no increase of growth
was observable, the length varying from 2 to 2;4, inches. To this,
however, there were two exceptions. Onemeasured 14 inch, the other
only 15 > inch; the former appears normal in every respect except
size, the latter is darker than the rest and exhibits a downward
bend of the notochord about 4 inch from its posterior end. The

Miscellaneous. Zan

yolk-sae has disappeared, though the animal is shorter than a larval
form two months before extrusion. Indeed, it is lkely that the
yolk was absorbed before extrusion, otherwise it would not have
escaped attention so long.

In examining a number of pregnant females this winter, I have
been struck with the frequent occurrence in the earlier stages of one
or more deformed embryos. The deformity appears confined to the
caudal region, which is bent, or even spirally twisted. Ryder * and
others have shown that in some normal oviparous fish the tail of the
embryo is affected in a similar way by unfavourable conditions of
temperature. But it does not appear that any so-affected embryos
hatched.

Here it is evident that the deformity, however caused, has had no
effect on the embryo beyond retarding its growth. The little
creature has the ordinary proportions of a larval form of the same
length, and appears active and healthy, feeding greedily on Copepods.

The young blennies at this age lie quietly at the bottom of the
vessel in which they are confined, ever and anon making a dart at
a passing Copepod. They rarely rise into midwater, though Cope-
pods are much more abundant near the surface than at the bottom.

On the Relationship of the Annelida and Mollusca.
By M. A. Grarp.

In the Report on the great prize in the physical sciences pub-
lished in the ‘ Comptes Rendus’ of the 30th December, 1889 (p. 1055),
it is said:—‘ What especially merits attention in the memoir of
M. Roule is the place which he assigns to the Annelida in the
animal series. He makes them near relatives of the Mollusca.”

With reference to this passage M. Giard remarks that long before
both Roule and Hatschek he expressed the same opinion. In 1876,
at the close of a note upon the development of Salmacina Dystera,
Huxl., he wrote as follows + :—

“(General results.—The formation of the organs of sense inde-
pendently of the nervous system, and before the completion of that
system, the presence of ectodermic respiratory organs, the late origin
of the circulatory apparatus, are so many characters approximating
the embryo of Salmacina to that of the Mollusca. The divergence
between the Mollusca and the Annelida only commences after the
Trochosphera-stage, and even after this stage the morphological
agreements and histological resemblances between the two types are
still very numerous. The relationship of the Mollusca and the An-
nelida is certainly nearer than that of the latter to the Arthropoda ;
the existence of metameres in the Arthropoda and the Annelida has

* * Report of Commissioner U.S, Fish and Fisheries Commission,’ 185,
p-. 982.
+ ‘Comptes Rendus,’ January 24, 1876,

258 Miscellaneous.

masked the true affinities in the eyes of naturalists. It is among
the Rotifera that we must seek the origins of the three groups; the
Gastrotricha lead to the Annelida through the genus Hemidasys*.
.... The affinities of the embryos of the Gasteropoda with those
of the Rotifera (Brachionus) have already been brought to ight by
the fine investiyations of Salensky.”

Somewhat later t the author maintained that the perfect agree-
ment furnished by the superposition of the first embryonic stages
and the general presence of the 7'rochosph era-stage in the Mollusca,
Polychetous Annelida, Rotifera, Brachiopoda, and Bryozoa show
clearly that these various groups belong to a single mass. To the
objection that the embryogeny of the Oligocheta, Hirudinea, Cepha-
lopoda, and Nematoda presents considerable differences from that
of the above types, he replies that these groups are so united to the
preceding ones by a series of forms allied anatomically and organo-
genetically that we must regard them as the extremities of those
branching series of which Lamarck indicated the existence in the
heart of his fundamental masses. Some of them perhaps (Nema~
toda, Oligocheta) diverged from the common stem before the T'ro-
chosphwra-stage. External form may be misleading—there is more
difference between an Ascaris and a Serpula than between a Ser-
pula and a Terebratula. From the anatomical conformity between
the Oligochta and the Polycheta it would seem that, at least in
this case, there has simply been falsification of the embryogeny in
the former. As Euaves and Lumbricus issue from the ovum nearly
in the adult form, the Trochosphwra-stage has been suppressed. In
Limneus the embryo leads a half-free life in the liquid which sur-
rounds it, and we find a Trochosphere reduced in proportion to the
freedom of movement.

In 1878 ¢ the author insisted again upon the necessity of creating
for the Mollusca, Annelida, and satellitic groups, a group equivalent
to the Vertebrata and Arthropoda, for which he proposed the name
of Gymnotoca, It was characterized anatomically by the existence
of a secondary excretory system (deutonephra or segmental organs)
replacing the primary excretory system (protonephric system), the
existence of which is permanent in the ancestral group of the Platy-
elmintha. The phylum Gymnotoca was divided as follows :—

(1. Mottusca: Cephalopoda, Gasteropoda, Acephala,
| Scaphopeda, Polyplacophora, and Neomenida.
| 2, ANNELIDA: Cheetopoda, Gymuotoma ( Polygordius )
\ TOTOCA 2 ‘ ; aos) é S))
GYMNOTOCA « Hirudinea, Grephyrea, Chaetognatha, &c.
| 3. BRACHIOPODA,
| 4. Crrtata: Rotifera, Gasterotricha, Bryozoa.

* M. Giard now regards Dinophilus as more ancestral, but this is only
of secondary importance here.

+ ‘Revue Scientifique,’ March 18, 1876, p. 277.

{ Bull. Sci. du Nord, 1878, pp. 47 et segq.

Miscellaneous. 259

From the embryogenetic point of view the Gymnotoca are charac-
terized by the Trochosphera-larva, like the Arthropoda by the
Nauplius-embryo.

The phylogenetic table of the Gymnotoca given by M. Giard in
1876 may be compared with the genealogical tree of the Trochozoa
prepared by M. Roule in 1889, and, according to the author, the
only essential alteration consists in the adoption by the latter of
Hatschek’s term Trochozoa.

In attempting to homologize the schizoccele of the higher Gymno-
toca with the enteroccele of the more archaic forms (Sayitta, Bra-
chiopoda), the fact that the original mesodermie cells in the schizo-
ceelian types originate from the endoderm, at the margin of the
prostomium, in points perfectly homologous with those in which the
endodermic diverticula are formed in the enteroccelians, led the
author at first to regard the latter as representing the primitive
state, of which the derived (condensed) form is realized in the Mol-
lusca and Annelida. His later researches have enabled him to
generalize this interpretation and to formulate the following empi-
rical law :—

“When, in the development of allied animals, an organ originates
either by invagination or folding of a cellular lamella ( Wolffian
process), or by the formation of a solid cellular mass which is after-
wards cleft or hollowed by a cavity, the latter mode of formation must
be regarded us a condensation of the former.”

This formula may be applied to the Gymnotoca not only in the
question of the two forms of mesoderm, but also in the comparison
of the archigastrula (Sagitta, Brachiopoda) and of the derived modes
of gastrulation in the formation of the ventral nervous system by a
furrow (Salmacina, Protodrilus) and by thickening &e. With regard
to the nervous system and to the ectoderm generally the author states
that in no Annelid examined by him has he seen anything like the
syncytium described by M. Roule. ‘The contours of the ectodermic
cells can always be shown by suitable reagents.—Comptes Rendus,
January 15, 1850, p. 90.

On the Kauna of Mountain-lakes. By Dr. F. Zscuoxxn,

The faunistic investigation of three neighbouring alpine lakes of
the Rhietic Alps, the dividing chain between Vorarlberg and Grau-
biinden, gave the following results :—

a. Lake of Partnun: elevation 1874 metres; length 450, breadth
200, depth 35 metres; temperature 9°5-10°5 C. The basin is
enclosed by lofty rocky walls in the midst of the limestone moun-
tains ; its botiom consists partly of fine mud, partly of coarse gravel.
A green Algal vegetation is rather luxuriantly developed in the
lake, while the banks are scantily covered with plants. Almost
throughout the whole summer the basin receives a great influx of

260 Miscellaneous.

snow-water. ‘lhe surface is frozen over in the first half of November
to open again at the beginning of June.

Animal inhabitants :—Vorticella microstoma, Ehr.; Planaria
abscissa, Tjima; P. subtentaculata, Dugés; Dorylaimus stagnals,
Duj.; Scenuris variegata, Hoffm.; Lumbriculus variegatus, O. F.
Mull.; Lynceus quadrangularis, O. F. Mull.; ZL. sphericus, O. F.
Mull. ; Cypris compressa, Baird; Cyclops tenuicornis, Claus ; C. elon-
gatus, Claus ; Hygrobates longipalprs, Konicke ; Limneria histrionica,
Bruz.; Puchygaster tau-insiqnitus, Lebert ; oan henurus spec., Dug. ;
Rhyacophila vulgaris, Pict.; Chironomus plumosus, Linn. ; Chine
nomus, 5 sp., Meig.; Tipula sp., Meig.; Corethra sp., Meig. ;
Pisidium fossarinum, Cless.; P. Foreli, Cless.; Limncea truncatula,
Miull.; Z. ventricosa, Moq.-Tand.; Cottus gobio, Linn.; Phowinus
levis, Ag.; Rana temporaria, Linn.; Triton alpestris, Laur.

b. Lake of Tilisuna: elevation 2100 metres; length 270, breadth
150, depth 15 metres; temperature 11°-12° C. The lake lies more
open than that of Partnun, partly in Biindnerschiefer, partly in
erystalline rock. The subsoil is composed chiefly of coarse pebbles.
Vegetation in the water inconsiderable, on the bank tolerably
luxuriant. This basin also receives a great influx of snow-water.
The periods of freezing and breaking-up agree nearly with those of
the Partnun lake.

Animal inhabitants:—Vorticella microstoma, Khr.; Planaria
polychroa, O. Schm.; Dorylaimus stagnalis, Duy. ; Senuris variegata,
Hoffm.; Lynceus quadrangularis, O. F. Mull. ; LZ. acanthocercordes,
Fisch. ; Cypris compressa, Baird; Phryganea pilosa, Oliv.; Hydro-
porus piceus, Heer; Chironomus plumosus, Linn. ; Chironomus sp.,
Meig.: Pisidium nitidum, Jenyns; Limneea truncatula, Mill. ; Fre-
dericella sultana, Gerv.; Cottus gobio, Linn.; Phowinus ene Ag.;
Rana temporaria, Linn.

ce. Lake of Garschina: elevation 2189 metres; length 200,
breadth 100, depth 3 metres ; temperature 15°-16° C. It lies quite
open in the midst of fine Alpine meadows. Its bottom consists of
fine mud; the surrounding rock is a Biindnerschiefer, rich in
Fucoids. Algal vegetation much developed in the lake. The
influx of snow-water ceases entirely in the summer; the basin is
then fed only by springs. The ice-covering breaks up only at the
end of June.

Animal inhabitants :—LEpist; ylis plicatilis, Khr. ; Vorticella micro-
stoma, Ehr. ; Calidina parasitica, Gigl. ; Microstoma lineare, Oerst. ;
Planaria abscissa, Tima; Polycelis nigra, O. F. Mull. ; Dorylaimus
stugnalis, Duj.; Clepsine bioculata, Sav.; OC. marginata, Sav. ;
Senuris variegata, Hoftm.; Lumbriculus pellucidus, Dupel; Lyn-
ceus quadrangularis, O. F. Mill.; Cypris compressa, Baird ; Cyclops
s’rrulatus, Fisch. ; Diaptonus castor, Jur.; Gammarus pulex, Linn. ;
Limnesia histrionica, Bruz.; Pachygaster tau-insignitus, Lebert ;
Perla alpina, Pict. ; Cloé sp., Pict.; Sialis lutarca, Linn. ; Phry-
ganea varia, Fab.; P. pilosa, Oliv.; P. ruficollis, Pict. ; Notonecta
lutea, Mull.; Hydroporus nivalis, Heer ; H. erythrocephalus, Heer ;
Chironomus, 4 sp., Meig.; Corethra sp., Meig.: Pisidiwm fossa-

Miscellaneous. 261

rinum, Cless.; P. ovatum, Cless.; Limnea truncatula, Mill. ; Cottus
gobio, Linn.; Phowinus levis, Ag.; Rana temporaria, Linn. ; Triton
alpestris, Laur.

The results here communicated were obtained in August 1889,
during a long zoological excursion, which was unfortunately much
interfered with by unfavourable weather. The examination of the
three basins referred to, which are so different in every respect, will
be continued for several years. At the same time the investigations
will be extended to some other lakes of the Rheetic Alps, especially
to the Liinersee, on the Seesaplaner. In this way it may be pos-
sible to obtain a complete picture of the Lake-fauna of a definite,
narrowly bounded Alpine region, and at the same time to approach
more closely to certain biological questions. The faunistic and
biological results of 1889 are described in detail in a report which
appears in the ‘ Verhandlungen der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft
in Basel.’

Protozoa and Rotatoria were this time not particularly collected ;
but these groups will be studied in future years. The lists of the
other groups must also be greatly enriched.— Zoologischer Anzeiger,
No. 326, January 27, 1890, p. 37.

On the Actinian Genera Agir and Fenja.
By Prof. F. E. Scuurze and Dr. D. C. Danietssen.

In a‘ Notice on the Actinida of the Norwegian North-Atlantice
Expedition,’ published in the Annual Report of the Museum at
Bergen, Dr. Danielssen described two new genera, allied in appear-
ance to Peachia and Edwardsia, but in which a complete intestine was
said to pass from the mouth to the posterior extremity of the body,
to open there in a functional anal pore. In a communication to the
‘Gesellschaft Naturforschender Freunde zu Berlin,’ on the 19th
February, 1889, Prof. F. E. Schulze expressed some doubt as to the
validity of these descriptions, and suggested that the forms in
question might possibly have been examples of species of the family
Edwardsiide which had been cut in two by the dredge. In answer
to this suggestion Dr. Danielssen wrote to his critic, and a portion
of his letter was read by the latter at the meeting of the same
society on the 16th April last. Dr. Danielssen says :—

“You must not forget that I am an old zoological fisherman, who
has worked with the dredge for fifty years, and that during this
time J have met with hundreds and hundreds of animals which
were mutilated in one way or another, From many years’ expe-
rience, therefore, I can perfectly well distinguish such specimens from
uninjured ones, And if your supposition were correct, and I had had
to do with the torn-off anterior parts of animals, then, even if a mis-
take had been at all possible, the lower extremity of the animal
must show a constriction which would at once strike the experienced
observer. Such a constriction, in fact, does occur in certain injured

262 Miscellaneous.

specimens, in which, moreover, the lower extremity of the body-
cavity is open; but it is entirely wanting in the well-preserved
individuals described. In the latter the lower extremity of the
body-eavity, which is divided into 12 chambers, is closed by a
distinct floor, which surrounds the anus, and is divided by the 12
septa into tiie same number of segments. In each of these segments,
in Fenja, there is an exceedingly fine oval aperture, partly covered
by a fold; both the floor and the aperture are clothed with epithe-
lium. Here, consequently, there can be no question of tearing
away.

* As regards Adgir, here also the described animals were quite un-
injured. Some specimens were torn hy the dredge, but could be
distinguished from the uninjured ones without any difficulty. In
Aigir the body-cavity is likewise divided into 12 chambers by 12
septa, which reach to the floor, where they are firmly attached, and
which they consequently divide into 12 segments surrounding the
anus. At the lower end of the rectum in this animal there are
fissures through which the chambers of the body-cavity communi-
eate with the rectum. These fissures do not extend to the anus,
but terminate some millimetres above it and are clothed with
epithelium. During the observation of living animals I frequently
saw tolerably long, solid masses of excrement discharged from the
anus, after which the aperture contracted again. In dfgir conse-

uently there can be no question of mutilation.” —Sitzungsber. Cesell-
schaft Naturf. Freunde zu Berlin, 1889, pp. 55 and 99,

On the Anatomy and Developmental History of Petromyzon Planeri.
By M. K. Nesrier.

Investigations upon Petromyzon Planert made by the author in
Prof. Leuckart’s laboratory have revealed some interesting facts,
especially with regard to the development of the definitive cesophagus
during the metamorphosis. Dr. Schneider, in his ‘‘ Contributions
to the Comparative Anatomy and Developmental History of the
Vertebrata,” states that the cesophagus is produced as a new
formation, an invagination originating from the anterior extremity of
the intestinal fold, continuing forwards the mesenterial fold of the
stomach, and running into the dorsal margin of the branchial
cavity. Although at first hollow, this soon becomes solid, and then
extends, as a solid cellular cord, to the velum. The latter thus
furnishes not only the epithelium, but also the mucous membrane
and musculature of the cesophagus.

The author’s investigations led to different results. The cesophagus
really originates as a solid cord, but its cells furnish only the epithelium
of the definitive cesophagus, the central cell-material being absorbed ;
the musculature originates from the surrounding connective tissue.

Miscellaneous. 263

Moreover the cesophagus is not formed as an invagination from
the anterior extremity of the intestinal fold, but as a pad-like
epithelial growth along the lower border of the dorsal fold in the
branchial space, which, being afterwards constricted off at its base
by the surrounding connective tissue, becomes a solid cellular cord
running in the depths of the fold. The starting-point of the whole
new formation is certainly the spot at the end of the branchial
space where the entrance to the stomach is closed by the thickening
of the lips surrounding it.—Zool, Anzeiger, January 13, 1890, p. 11.

The Amphipoda of the Boulonnais.—I. Unciola crenatipalmata,
Spence Bate. By M. Jutes Bonnier,

In this paper, which is illustrated by two plates, the author gives
a detailed description of the Amphipod Crustacean first described
by Gosse as identical with the Uneiola irrorata of Say, and after-
wards recognized as distinct by Spence Bate and described by him
under the name of Dryope crenatipalmata. The author discusses at
some length the characters presented by the species, and gives the
following series of tables to serve for its identification :—

J. AmMPutIpopa.

( Maxilliped rudimentary .......... HYPERINA.
aan 6. | (Sixth pleopod with
| Seete eave on) an endopodite.... GAMMARINA.
ya smaes Maxilliped | Sixth pleopod with
well deve-{ no endopodite.... COROPHINA,
Pleon well de-./ | loped. Fifth and sixth pleo-
veloped. } pods without endo-
(es SPOGUIbES i oeus ermal. CERAPINA.
| Five Pais Ol PLEO PODS”. ns-c\rsun ces cues cuss ee onyae DULICHINA.
emer TUGGMONEALY EGR) tr los salve Side Citic a tale ee ean ee .. LASMODIPODA.
II. Coropurna,
Berraipiular pal pus Wanting 2.6.44 2's ooGlwos Hee oats oN eelapwo eed bees ORCHESTUD®,
( Joints 2 and 3 of the
( Coxopodites of the maxilliped narrow. STreENoTHOID A.
| pereiopods broadly 4 Joints 2 and 3 of the
Mandibular palpus of } Beene: L ie eae Mic
twoorthreejoints.) CG COU ween, MIcroPROTOPID®,

Coxopodites of the pereiopods narrow and
\. not-well developed .. ....:..5naciebaie aw CorRoPHIID»®,

264 Miscellaneous.

III. Coropntm®.

(MMandibulanpalpus vol 2 jOImts< 5.05 s «rslads. ahlistals waste -ysielebale ots eek Coe es Corophiwm.
( dilated; mandi- | elongate seems Unciola.
bular palpus -
a Betis with joint 3 | nodiform...... Siphonecet
2 (free ; basipodite | ‘

of sixth pleo- {

pod | (less developed

| thanthesecond. Lrichthoni

Corophiid.

Mandibular pal-
pus of 3 joints ; ; harrow; first ;
last 3 segments \ { pereiopod )

{of pleon more developed

thantheseeond. Neodela.

{ ;
\coalesCent..8 Sn ..on pos ta ee ee eee Chelura.

IV. Unctota.

( two thirds {crenulated .... U. erenatipalm
lenethofsecond; |
margin of pro-
narrow ;_ third | podite of second | , 4
joint of anten-2 pereiopod (simple ........ U, wrrorata.
| Heats \} one third length { of a single joint. U. planipes.

of second ; |

Joints 2, 3, and eellum of anten-

| accessory fla-<
|
4 of the infe-J L nule |

_pluriarticulate. — U. crasstpes.
rior antenne

| broad ; infero- ( produced into a point .......... U, petalocera.
posterior part
| of fourth joint
with the mar- |

(gin broadly roundediai.. ent eee U. laticornis.

The genus Unciola was established by Say in 1818, and adopted
by Milne-Edwards and other authors. Synonyms are Dryope, Sp.
Bate, Glauconome, p. Kroyer, and Cyrtophium, p. Danielssen.

The species referred to the genus, as seen in the above table,
are:—1l. Unciola crenatipalmata, Sp. Bate (=dirrorata, Gosse, nec
Say), of the seas of western Europe; 2. U. irrorata, Say (= Glau-
conome leucopis, Kroyer, and Cyrthophium Darwinti, Danielssen),
from the Arctic seas and those of Britain and Norway; 3. U. plan-
pes, Norman (=Tleucopes, Sp. Bate and Westw., Glauconome Kroeyert
and Steenstrupii, Boeck), from the shores of Greenland, Norway,
England, and France; 4. U. petalocera, G. O. Sars, from the Arctic
Ocean; 5. U. crassipes, Hansen, from the west coast of Greenland ;
and 6, U. laticornis, Hansen, from the same region,—Bull. Scient.
tome xx. 1889, pp. 229-254.

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SIXTH SERIES. }

Now 28, APRIL 1890:

XX XIX.—Descriptions of new and imperfectly-defined Species
of Jurassic Nautili contained in the British Museum
(Natural History). By Artaur H. Foorp, F.G.S.,
and G. C. Crick, Assoc.R.8.M., F.G.8., of the Geolo-

gical Department, British Museum.

In studying the Jurassic Nautili in the British Museum it
became evident to us that many of the species required re-
vision, Sowerby’s names especially having been used by
authors indiscriminately for forms which, on investigation,
were found to disagree materially with the types. It has been
our endeavour, with the aid of the excellent material furnished
by the National Collection (which contains many of Sowerby’s
types), to give such definitions and figures of the species as
may conduce to their correct identification by future workers.
We have found it necessary to create some new species,
which have been derived chiefly from the rich Jurassic fauna
of Dorset and Somerset. ‘T'wo species are included from the
Lias of France; and we here record our indebtedness to Dr.
Paul Fischer, of the Museum of Natural History, Paris, who
with great kindness sent us some specimens from the d’Or-
bigny Collection to compare with those of the British Museum,
We have also the pleasure to acknowledge the liberal assis-
tance rendered to us by the authorities of the Woodwardian

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 20

. Foord and Crick on new and

a
is

Messr

266

‘Sy xixxp ‘Td “(QZBT) 6g ‘d ‘1A ‘JOA ‘POUOD ‘UT ‘KqtaMog ‘OQ ep “ff ‘snuobhnvay
‘MITTO() WIAA

0% 84 ‘t 1d OT “d
14d “(OGST 209 ‘Td HON) POSMTTOTT 974190 FD ‘qq00A7] PUB SLUIOP , SMIVIUMAAGQNS
‘oT ‘Tsay tid
or dt 3d ‘(COSST (2°98 ‘Pd OTT) VOSNIPOW O19 “HD ‘qqaokryT pus SLLLOPY “27VT
‘7 ‘Sy xixxp ‘Td “ozgT) gg ’d “TA ‘Joa “YouoyH “UT éKqloMog “CQ ep “f ‘snppavove
‘xxxp ‘Td ‘(9Z8T) 9¢ id ‘1A ‘JOA *youog “UTP ‘Aqtenog *D ep *f ‘sypuobhijod
‘ALITOQ UAMO'T
g8y tmx ‘Td
‘org 'd “pe pug ‘Reel “SOD MITSHTOA ‘AaMg *[oor) “pale, pUB SUMO X ‘gapio0anjsD
(Camere (cpeb at (Om eeett ‘oq, “SuBLT ‘Te ‘AUSIGIO,p. ‘s798-L0p
9) ‘N=) GhE “4 “(GPST) “tT TO4 TBYLAYS “WOT OP “APO, ‘KusIqig,p ‘siswaal0}
raxx ‘Td ‘GPT “A ‘(ZFRT) ‘I TOA ‘SSBIN LE LOT, “suvrg ‘Ted ‘AUSIqIO,P “snzniusnuas
“ixxo "[d “OTST) GF “4 ‘TE “Joa “YouoD “AT ‘Kqtamog *f ‘snzvIUNL
ta “ra ‘syd ‘gg “d
“(g9gT) ‘ut yd ‘ouoMY, MP Use NP sonbrSopoyuogTeg sepuygy “torycomun(y ‘S20
‘axxo ‘Td “(LTST) SG “dH TOA “You “ULN ‘Kqtamog “ft ‘4 SmepaultapU?

—

———

——

‘ixxxpo ‘yd ‘(PIST) EST ‘a ‘TE TOA “YoucD “ULV ‘KqtoMog ‘fp ‘sng.t98 SN]27NDAT

"sVIT

‘jaddg ‘seswara07j99 ——

aout ‘ds ‘s2swau0ping
‘ao “ds aypusy

saou ‘ds ‘snpoyiasad
‘AUBIGIO,p ‘snsnn]9
‘aout ‘ds ‘sngogdasrq]nu
‘KUTIGIEQ,p ‘sngzoUlour ——
‘Kqdoaog ‘fp ‘snsaqgo
‘sou ‘ds ‘aqnjh ——

‘sou ‘ds ‘sngnaurjopnasd ——
*Kqtaarog *f ‘snyoauy ——
‘sou ‘ds §snznwto

*Aou ‘ds ‘snUD.Layasey, ——
‘sou ‘ds ‘snzsnqo ——
‘TaryLouN(] ‘SNQVAgalaz. ——
‘royjIomn(y “wapinor*
“AOU AS (S7LUAPUUAS SNL AT

‘OL
“GT

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic Nautil’. 267

Museum, Cambridge, and those also of the Museum of Prac-
tical Geology, who lent us specimens from their valuable
collections. It may be added that all the illustrations accom-
panying this paper were drawn by one of us upon the wood
(upon a reduced scale) with the aid of a camera, by which
means accuracy of outline is secured.

We are again indebted to the kindness of Dr. Woodward,
F.R.S., for the use of the woodcuts illustrating this paper.

Appended is a list (p. 266) of the species of Jurassic Nautili
contained in the British Museum. ‘The new and revised species
are placed in the first column, and in the second those which
do not require revision and are therefore not described in the
present paper; of each of the latter, however, we give the
reference to the original description.

LIAS.

1. Nautilus simillimus, sp. nov.

Nautilus simil/imus.—a, iateral view of a young individual, showing the
closed umbilicus ; 6, peripheral view. Drawn from a specimen in the
British Museum. Nearly two thirds natural size.

Sp. char. Shell somewhat compressed on the sides, nar-
rowly rounded on the periphery, completely involute. Um-
bilicus closed by a shelly callus. Septa moderately distant ;
sutures slightly curved on the sides of the shell and forming
a shallow sinus upon the periphery. Siphuncle unknown.
Test ornamented with fine, close-set, subregular, wavy, lon-
gitudinal ridges, which are somewhat coarser on the sides of

20*

268 Messrs. Ioord and Crick on new and

the shell than on the periphery ; finer lines are intercalated
between these, and the whole are crossed by fine and nume-
rous lines of growth, which impart a cancellated appearance
to the test, especially in young shells. In addition to the
finer ornaments there are a series of obscure folds radiating
from the umbilicus, and dying out upon the periphery.

Remarks. This species resembles Nautilus strvatus, J.
Sowerby *, in its general form and perfectly in its sculpture,
but it is distinguished by its completely closed umbilicus.
A large but imperfect and crushed example (no. 89850) repre-
sents the adult stage in the growth of the shell, while the
young is exemplified in an exquisitely preserved specimen
(no. 89887). ‘The name simellimus which we have given to
this species is intended to express its close resemblance to N.
striatus.

Horizon. Lias.

Locality. Charmouth, Dorsetshire.

2. Nautilus Jourdant, Dumortier.

1874. Nautilus Jourdan’, Dumortier, Etudes Paléontologiques sur
les Dépots Jurassiques du Bassin du R hone, pt. iv. (Lias Supérieur)
p. 44, pl. vil. figs. 1-5.

1889. Nautilus Jourdani, 8. 8. Buckman, Quart. Journ, Geol. Soc
vol. xlv. p, 455 (footnote).

Nautilus Jourdani.—a, lateral view, showing the deep umbilicus and the
ornaments of the test; 0, peripheral view, showing the form of the
sutures, Drawn froma specimen in the British Museum (no, 19587).
About one half natural size.

Sp. char. Shell moderately inflated; umbilicus not very

* Min, Conch, vol. ii. p. 1&3, pl. clxxxil.

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic Nautili, 269

large ; whorls flattened both on the sides and on the periphery,
the greatest thickness being at the umbilicus. The sides of
the latter are steep and the borders subangular, the test being
here very thick. ‘The septa, of which there are about thir-
teen in an entire whorl, form a strongly marked sigmoidal
curve upon the sides of the shell, but are only very slightly
sinuous on the periphery. ‘The siphuncle is situated a little
below the centre. ‘The test is covered with numerous, thread-
like, longitudinal ridges, two or three in the space of 1 line,
more approximate on the periphery than on the sides, as is
usually the case with such ornaments. The ridges become
partly obsolete when the shell has attained a certain dia-
meter, say between 4 and 5 inches. Tine lines of growth are
seen where the shell is well preserved, especially in the region
of the umbilicus.

Tt should be added that the interior of the umbilicus is
ornamented with fine, radiating, flexuous ridges directed
forward ; these are crossed by spiral ridges somewhat widely
spaced.

Remarks. This species is distinguished from N. ornatus (to
be subsequently described), which appears to be its nearest
ally, by its more compressed form, more angular umbilicus,
and finer sculpture.

florizon. Upper Lias.

Locality. Floore, Northamptonshire.

3. Nautilus terebratus, Dumortier.

Fig. 3.

to)

Nautilus terebratus.—a, lateral view, showing the raised border of the
umbilicus ; 0, front view. Drawn from a specimen in the British
Museum (no. C, 3096). Two thirds natural size. Kxcept in well-
preserved specimens the longitudinal ornaments are barely visible ;
we have therefore given a separate figure of them (fig. 4),

270 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

1874. Nautilus terebratus (Thiolliére), Dumortier, Etudes Paléontolo-
. A . uy . ’ . .
giques sur les Dépéots Jurassiques du Bassin du Rhone, pt. iv. (Lias
Supérieur), p. 42, pl. vi. figs. 1-4.

Sp. char. Shell inflated, subglobose, a little compressed on
the sides, and slightly flattened upon the periphery, more so
in the adult than in the young shell. Aperture wider than
high. Umbilicus open, exposing the inner whorls, very deep,
the sides steep and having an angular border w ith a’ thick-
ened rim, which is very characteristic. Septa rather distant,
being nearly 1 inch apart on the periphery, where the height
of the whorl is 2 inches in the specimen measured. Sutures
very slightly bent upon the sides of the shell and forming a
very shallow sinus upon the periphery. Siphuncle nearly
central. Test rather thin, ornamented on the
periphery with fine, close-set, longitudinal Fie 4

ridges, crossed by lines of erowth, the latter
covering the whole of the surface of the test.
The accompanying woodcut (fig. 4) exhibits
these ornaments drawn natural size, from a
specimen in the British Museum Collection.

Remarks, Vhe name terebratus was attached
by Thiolhitre to a specimen in the museum at
Lyons, and the species was subsequently
described by Dumortier (loc. cit.) , whose figures
and descriptions enabled one of us to recognize
it in the Woodwardian Museum, Cambridge, where it is well
represented. ‘The authorities of that Musewn having kindly
presented a specimen to the British Museum, we are enabled
to give figures of this well-characterized species, which is now
recorded in Britain for the first time.

This species has two characters in common with Nauwéilus
Jourdant, Dumortier, viz. an angular umbilicus and longitu-
dinal ornaments ; but the latter are confined to the peripheral
region, and the umbilicus has a very characteristic rim.

M. Dumortier states that he only knows this species from
La Verpilliére *, where it is not very rare; but entire speci-
mens are uncommon. He adds that it is one of the most
characteristic shells of the Upper Lias of France.

Horizon. Upper Lias.

Locality. Near Lincoln.

* A village in the Department of Isére, about 18 miles north-east of
viens

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic Nautili. 271

4, Nautilus robustus, sp. nov.

Fig. 5.

Nautilus robustus.—a, lateral view, showing the cast of part of the body-
chamber, the test being present in the septate part of the shell, where
a few lines of orowth are indicated ; 6, front view. Drawn from
a specimen in the British Museum (no. 87 (10). Rather less than one
third natural size.

Sp. char. Shell of robust habit, slightly compressed on the
sides and flattened on the periphery, especially towards the
aperture; the angles formed by the junction of the sides and
periphery rounded. Umbilicus open and exposing almost all
the inner whorls ; its sides rounded and rather steeply sloping.
Aperture wider than high. Septa 1 inch distant from each
other in the median line of the periphery, where the whorl
has a thickness of 35 inches; in the middle of the sides their
distance is only half an inch ; the last two septa are only
three quarters of an inch apart on the periphery. The
siphuncle has not been seen. The body-chamber occupies at
least one half of the last whorl. ‘The test is very thick and
its surface smooth, or marked only with lines of growth, as
seen in fig. 5, a.

Remarks, There are three examples of this fine species in
the British Museum Collection, two of which are adult shells
and the other in the adolescent stage of growth. The largest
specimen (the figured one) measures about 8 inches in its
greatest diameter and about 5} inches in its greatest width.

This species is most nearly allied to Nautilus toarcensis,

df Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

@Orbigny *, but is distinguished by its narrower form, more
open umbilicus, and closer septa.

Not feeling certain that the present species had not already
been described, we communicated with Dr. Paul Fischer, of the
Mus. d’Hist. Nat. Paris, enclosing woodcuts of this and of
another species described in the present paper under the
name of N. Fischeranus. Dr. Fischer has kindly replied to the
effect that he finds no form either in the Museum of Nat. Hist.,
the Museum of the Ecole des Mines, or in that of the Sorbonne,
which can be identified with certainty with either of our
specimens. With regard to the form here called N. robustus,
he observes that it resembles perhaps some specimens of
Nautilus toarcensis, VOrb., but that the umbilicus in the
latter appears more open and the aperture more dilated.
With these remarks we fully concur, and we are glad to have
the opinion of so experienced a paleontologist as Dr. Fischer
in confirmation of our own.

Horizon. Upper Lias.

Localities. Moutiers, Courcy T (Calvados), France.

5. Nautilus Hischeranus, sp. nov.
Fig. 6,

Nautilus Fischeranus.—a, lateral view, showing the test with fine lines of
growth and some of the sutures, where the shell is removed ; }, peri-
pheral view. Drawn from a specimen in the British Museum (no,
37007). Rather more than one third natural size.

* Prodr. de Paléont. Stratigr. vol. i. p. 245,=. latidorsatus, d' Orb.
7 ne : ld . =
Pal. Frang., Terr. Jurass. vol. i. p. 147, pl. xxiv. (not of Schlotheim).
t Courcy isa village about 34 miles north-east of Falaise.

imper fectly-defined Species of Jurassic Nautili, 273

Sp. char. Shell compressed, with deeply embracing whorls,
rapidly increasing in diameter ; flattened upon the sides, with
a narrowly rounded periphery. Umbilicus deep, with rather
steeply sloping sides, the inner whorls exposed. Septa
somewhat distant from each other, being about three quarters
of an inch apart in the median line of the periphery, where
the thickness of the whorl is 2 inches. Sutures slightly
curved upon the sides and forming a very shallow sinus upon
the periphery. ‘Test smooth, showing only irregular lines of
growth. Only a part of the body-chamber is preserved, so
that the proportion it bears to the septate part of the shell
cannot be ascertained.

Remarks. 'The present form is so unlike any other fossil
Nautilus, that no comparison can be made.

A figure of the present species was submitted to Dr. Paul
Fischer (along with one of N. robustus), and he fails to iden-
tify it with any species known to him, but suggests the
possibility of its being represented in the private collection of
the late Hugéne Kudes-Deslongchamps at Caen. However
this may be, we, like Dr. Fischer, can find no published
description or figure which can be identified with it.

We have much pleasure in dedicating this beautiful species
to Dr. Paul Fischer, of Paris, who has laid us under many
obligations in connexion with the Jurassic Nautili.

Horizon. Upper Lias.

Locality, Fontaine-Ktoupe-Four (Calvados), France.

Lower OOLITE.

6. Nautilus ornatus, sp. nov.
Fig. 7.

Nautilus ornatus.—a, lateral view of a young shell, showing the open
umbilicus and the ornamentation of the test ; b, front view, showing
the position of the siphuncle. Drawn from aspecimen in the British
Museum (no, 51952), About half natural size.

274 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

Sp. char. Shell inflated, rapidly enlarging; sides com-
pressed, but somewhat inflated in the middle ; periphery
broad, flattened. Umbilicus of moderate size and exposing
a portion of the inner whorls; sides steep, margin rounded.
Septa rather distant, being 21 inches apart where the whorl
has a height of about 6 inches. Siphuncle rather large,
situated above the centre. The test is ornamented in the
adult shell with aseries of longitudinal flattened bands sepa-
rated by incised lines; these bands are almost entirely con-
fined to the periphery, very few of them extending to the sides
of the shell; they number about thirteen to an inch. The
whole of the test is covered with fine subregular lines of
growth, which curve backwards on approaching ‘the periphery,
where they form a shallow sinus. In a young shell (44
inches in diameter, see fig. 7) the longitudinal ornaments
cover the whole surface of the test, and they are in the form
of delicate irregularly-spaced ridges, with very fine lines
occupying the interspaces. ‘The ridges are more numerous
on the periphery than on the sides of the shell.

Remarks. Vhe adult characters of the ornamentation of
this species have been drawn up from‘a gigantic specimen, 2
feet im diameter, which was found at Sherborne, Dorsetshire.
This is probably one of the largest examples of Nautilus
known; at least the writers have never seen any account of
a specimen approaching it in size. A smaller one from the
same locality (Sherborne) measures 11 inches in its greatest
diameter; it isa cast of the septate part of the shell, together
with a portion of the body-chamber. Fragments of the test
with its characteristic ornaments adhere to the cast in one or
two places.

This species, in respect to its ornamentation, bears some
resemblance to N. Jourdani of the Upper Lias, but can be at
once distinguished by its less angular whorls and the rounded
margin of the umbilicus. The latter character also distin-
euishes it from JN, terebratus from the same beds, whose orna-
ments, like those of the adult shell of N. or natus, are almost
entirely confined to the peripheral area. There are no other
species known to us from the Inferior Oolite with which this
form can be confounded.

FHlorizon. Interior Oolite.

Locality. Near Sherborne, Dorsetshire.

Nautilus lineatus, J. Sowerby.

1813. Nautilus lincatus, J. Sowerby, Min. Conch. vol. i. p. 89, pl. xli.
21820. Nautilites aperturatus, Schlotheim, Die Petrefactenkunde,
p- 83.

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic Nautili. 275

1821. Nautilus ineatus, Winch, Trans. Geol. Soc. vol. v. pt. ii. p. 555,

1830. Nautilites lineatus(?), Zieten, Les Pétrifications de Wurtemberg,
p. 23, tab. xviii. figs. 2 a-c.

1532. Nautilus lineatus, Lonsdale, Trans. Geol. Soc. ser. ii. vol. iii.
pt. i. p. 272.

1835. Nautilus lineatus, Phillips, Geology of Yorkshire, pt. 1. p. 129.

1836. Nautilus lineatus, Roemer, Die Verstein. des norddeutschen
Oolithen-Gebirges, p. 179.

1840. Nautilus ineatus, Millet, Bull. Sec. Géol. de France, vol. xi.

. 365,

1845, Nautilus lincatus, Murchison, Outline of the Geology of the
Neighbourhood of Cheltenham, new ed. p. 80.

1849. Nautilus lineatus, Quenstedt, Die Cephalopoden, p. 56, tab. 11.
fig. 16.

1850, Nautilus lineatus, Lycett, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. ii.

. 412.
1862. Nautilus lineatus, Giebel, Fauna der Vorwelt, Band ii. Abth. 1.
. 154.

1854, Nautilus lineatus, Morris, Cat. British Fossils, 2nd ed. p. 507.

1857. Nautilus ineatus, Etheridge, in Mem. Geol. Sury. Great Britain ;
Hull, On the Geology of the Country around Cheltenham, pp. 42, 48.

1858. Nautilus lineatus, Ooster, Cat. des. Céphalopodes Fossiles des
Alpes Suisses, pt. 11. p. 8.

1858, Nautilus lineatus, Quenstedt, Der Jura, p. 284.

1858. Nautilus lineatus, Oppel, Die Juraformation Englands, Frank-
reichs und des stidwestlichen Deutschlands, p. 566.

1860, Nautilus ineatus, Wright, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xvi.
p. 40.

13860, Nautilus lineatus, Coquand, Synop. des Foss, Second. de la Cha-
rente, de la Charente-Inférieure, et de la Dordogne, p. 9.

1864. Nautilus lneatus, Wbray, Etudes Géologiques sur le Département
de la Niévre, fasc. 15, 14, p. 269,

1867. Nautilus lineatus, Waagen, Ueber die Zone des Ammonites
Sowerby? (Geogn. Paliont. Beitriige, Band 1.) p. 590 (84).

1871. Nautilus lineatus, Phillips, Geology of Oxford and the Valley of
the Thames, pp. 131, 164.

1875. Nautilus hneatus, Lepsius, Beitriige zur Kenntn. der Juraforma-
tion im Unter-Elsass, p. 26.

1879. Nautilus lineatus, Stoddart, Proceed. Bristol Naturalists’ Soc.
vol, ii. pt. iil. p. 279. :

1880. Nautilus lineatus, Choffat, Etude Stratigraphique et Paléontolo-
gique des Terrains Jurassiques du Portugal, livr. i. p. 41.

1884, Nautilus lineatus, Mallada, Boletin de la Comision del Mapa
Geologico de Espana, Sinopsis de las Kspecies Fosiles de Espana,
vol. xi. p. 228 (figured zed. vol. v. 1878, pl. iv. figs. 5, 6).

1884, Nautilus lineatus, Damon, Geology of Weymouth, Portland, and
Coast of Dorsetshire, new ed. p. 220,

[Not 1842. Nautilus lineatus, d’Orbigny, Paléont. Frang., Terr. Jurass.
vol. i. p. 155, pl. xxxi. |

Sp. char. “ Flatted, spheroidal, umbilicate, surface obscurely

striated, back flat, broad, with a concave line in the interior
(which appears convex around the cast). Aperture rather
square, deeply indented by the preceding whorl; septa nume-
rous. . . . Diameter about one third longer than the thick-
ness. ‘The septa are very concave, with three slight waves

276 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

in their margins. The siphunculus is near the middle ot
each septa” [septum] (Sowerby).

Remarks. Vhe unsatisfactory character of Sowerby’s
description and figures of this species has given rise to much

Fic. 8.

Nautilus lineatus.—a, lateral view, showing the closed umbilicus, and
parts of the septa where the test is broken away; ), front view,

showing the position of the siphuncle and the compressed form of

the shell. Drawn from a specimen in the British Museum (no.

3854 a), “ Sowerby Collection.”’ A little less than one half natural
x ?
size.

confusion regarding its identity, and more than one species
has doubtless been included under the name /éneatus.
Though neither of the figured types of Uéncatus are contained
in the British-Museum Collections, yet there is a specimen
(one of those (a cast) numbered 43854) labelled in Sowerby’s
handwriting “Nautilus lineatus, M. C. 41,” which agrees in
all respects with his figures in the ‘ Mineral Conchology ’
(vol. i. pl. xli.). He, however, describes the species as
“ umbilicate,”’ a statement which is not borne out by his
figures; and we think it highly probable that Sowerby’s
figured specimens (which are both casts) had a closed umbilicus,
because if the shell were present it would entirely fill up the
cavity seen in the cast. Another specimen (cut and polished
and also numbered 43854) is also labelled by Sowerby “Naw-
tilus lineatus, M. C.,” but it differs from his figured types in
more than one particular, viz. in its more flexuous and. less

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic Nautili. 277

numerous septa, and in the siphuncle, which, instead of being
near the centre, as in the type (lower figure of Sowerby’s
plate), isabove. ‘To this form we have therefore given a new
name—Nautilus pseudolineatus.

Nautilus lineatus must now be restricted to shells of a
somewhat robust habit of growth, with flattened sides and
broad flattened periphery, closed umbilicus, numerous, very
slightly flexuous septa, and a nearly central siphuncle. It
may be added that the shell had a perfectly smooth surface.

The name iéneatus, which was clearly intended by its
author to have reference to the faint ridge seen upon casts
along the median line of the periphery, has apparently misled
many paleontologists, for we have seen in collections various
Jurassic Nautili labelled “ Zéneatus”’ which certainly belonged
to more than one species. In point of fact this median line
or ridge is the “ Normallinie ” of the Brothers Sandberger *,
and cannot be used as a specific character, since it is found
not only in numerous species of the Nautilide, but also in
some species of the Orthoceratide.

The following species are evidently closely related, viz. :
Nautilus lineatus, N. pseudolineatus, sp. nov., N. polygonalist,
and N. glaber, sp. nov.

Horizon. Inferior Oolite.

Locality. Yeovil, Somersetshire. 'The specimen already
referred to as bearing one of Sowerby’s labels (“Nautilus
lineatus, M. C. 41’) is not localized.

8. Nautilus pseudolineatus, sp. nov.

Sp. char. Shell subcompressed, flattened upon the sides
and periphery, the latter being moderately broad and having
a subangular border. Umbilicus closed. Whorls about
three, increasing rather slowly in diameter. Body-chamber
occupying about half a volution ; aperture wider than high.
Septa rather deeply concave, nineteen or twenty in the last
whorl, the last two very approximate. Sutures forming a
sigmoid curve on the sides of the shell and a slight sinus on
the periphery. Siphuncle rather large, subcentral. ‘Test
thick, smooth. Anterior border of muscular impression well
defined, broadly arched (see fig. 9).

Remarks. The greatest diameter of the largest specimen in
the Collection (no. C. 324) is 64 inches.

The slow rate of increase of the whorls in this species is

* “Die Versteinerungen des rheinischen Schichtensystems in Nassau,’
G. and F. Sandberger, 1850-56, p. 41. :
+ J. de C. Sowerby, Min. Conch. vol. vi. p. 56, pl. dxxx.

278 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

its distinguishing character. It is nearly allied to N. U/neatus,
Sow., but differs therefrom in its more distant and flexuous

Nautilus pseudolineatus.— Lateral view of a specimen, showing the closed
umbilicus and several of the septa; @ indicates the anterior border
of the impression of the shell-muscle, s points to the last-formed sep-
tum. Drawn from a specimen in the British Museum (no, 69767).
One third natural size.

sutures, more concave septa, the position of its siphuncle, and
its slower rate of increase.

Florizon. Inferior Oolite.

Localities. Sherborne, Bridport, Burton-Bradstock, Dorset-
shire; Yeovil, Somersetshire. A fine specimen—a section
(no. C. 324 b)—is also recorded from Somersetshire, but from
what place in that county is not known. ‘Two specimens,
numbered respectively 43854 (“ Sowerby Coll.’’) and C. 2942,
have no locality recorded against them in the register.

9. Nautilus glaber, sp. nov.

Sp. char. Shell completely involute, slowly increasing in
diameter, compressed laterally, flattened on the periphery.
Whorls wider than high, widest just above the umbilical
region. Umbilicus completely closed. Septa moderately
distant, shallowly concave ; the sutures strongly bent back-
wards on the sides and very slightly sinuated upon the peri-
phery. Siphuncle situated markedly above the centre. Sur-
face of the test quite smooth. Body-chamber unknown.

The larger specimen of the two representing this species in

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic Nautili, 279

the British-Museum Collection measures about 54 inches in
its greatest diameter.

Fig. 10.

Nautilus glaber.—a, lateral view, showing the closed umbilicus and some
of the septa exposed by the removal of part of the test; 6, front
view, showing the position of the siphuncle and parts of the sutures
where the test is broken. Drawn from a specimen in the British
Museum (no. C. 2840). Rather less than half natural size.

Remarks. This species is nearly related to N. pseudo-
lineatus, but differs therefrom in its compressed form, more
distant septa, and strongly bent sutures, as well as in the
more nearly marginal position of the siphuncle. It has also
somewhat close affinities with N. polygonalis, J. de C, Sow-
erby *, especially in the curved form of its sutures and the
position of its siphuncle. It aay be distinguished from that
species by its more compressed form, closer septa, and the
siphuncle being further removed from the margin.

Horizon. Inferior Oolite.

Localities. Somersetshire ; Bayeux (Calvados), France.

10. Nautilus obesus, J. Sowerby.

1816, Nautilus obesus, J. Sowerby, Min. Conch. vol. ii. p. 51, pl. exxiv,

1832. Nautilus obesus, Lonsdale, Trans. Geol. Soe. ser. ii. vol. iii. p. 273.

1834. Nautilus obesus, Robert, Bull. Soc. Géol. de France, vol. iv.
Paar ite

1842. Nautilus lineatus, VOrbigny, Paléontologie Frangaise, Terr,
Jurass. vol. i. p. 155, pl. xxxi. (not of J. Sowerby).

* Min. Conch. vol. vi. p. 56, pl. dxxx.

280 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

1845. Nautilus obesus, Murchison, Outline of the Geology of the Neigh-
bourhood of Cheltenham, new ed. p. 80.

1852. Nautilus obesus, Giebel, Fauna der Vorwelt, Band iii. Abth. i.
p. 165,

1854, Nautilus obesus, Morris, Cat. British Fossils, 2nd ed. p. 307.

1857. Nautilus obesus, Etheridge, in Mem. Geol. Surv. Great Britain ;
Hull, On the Geology of the Country around Cheltenham, p. 48.

1860. Nautilus obesus, Wright, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xvi. p. 40.

1871. Nautilus obesus, Phillips, Geology of Oxford and the Valley of
the Thames, p. 164.

1873. Nautilus obesus, Sharp, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxix.
pp. 294, 299.

1879. Nautilus obesus, Stoddart, Proceed. Bristol Naturalists’ Soe.
vol. il. pt. iii. p. 279.

1888. Nautilus obesus, Beeby Thompson, The Middle Lias of North-
amptonshire, p. 54.

Fig. 11.

Nautilus obesus.—a, lateral view of a cast, showing the septa and the open
umbilicus ; 6, front view, showing the position of the siphuncle.
Drawn from a specimen in the British Museum (no. 39623). Rather
more than one third natural size.

Sp. char. “ Gibbose, umbilicate, plain; back broad, flat ;
mouth large, squarish ; septa very numerous, not recurved ;
siphuncle nearly central. . . . ‘Thickness about three fourths
the diameter. The mouth is large, being two thirds the
diameter long. The septa are very numerous; their angles
not being recurved gives a very open form to the umbilicus.
The siphuncle is transversely oval.” (Sowerby.)

Remarks. We may add to this description that there is a
specimen in the Woodwardian Museum from Bridport, Dor-
setshire, on which the test remains; it is marked only with
lines of growth. This shell is 4 inches in diameter.

This species appears to be most nearly allied to Nautilus

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic Nautili. 281

toarcensis, VOrbigny, but the latter is readily distinguished
by its much thicker and broader shell, larger umbilicus, and
nore distant septa.

It is often a matter of very great difficulty to identify the
species of Nautilus figured in the ‘ Mineral Conchology,’
owing partly to the brief descriptions and partly to the
figures being foreshortened, with the object of economizing
space by showing as much of the specimens as possible in
one view. ‘T'wo views at least of each species are essential
in order to give a correct idea of the form of the shell. There
can be little doubt, however, that the specimens we have, after
very careful comparison, referred to N. obesus are identical
with Sowerby’s fossil. hough the éype specimen is unfor-
tunately not in the “ Sowerby Collection,” there is an
example in that collection labelled, probably by Sowerby
himself, ““N. obesus,” which sufticiently agrees with the figure
and description in the Min. Conch. to justify its reference
thereto. Besides this individual there are several others both
from England and France which, though young shells,
possess unmistakably the characters of the present species.
It is hoped that the figures here given of N. obesus may help
to make it recognizable.

On comparing examples of this species from the Interior
Oolite of Courey, Normandy, with d’Orbigny’s figure of
Nautilus lineatus *, we find that they agree remarkably well,
and we have therefore placed the N. Méneatus of d’Orbigny in
the synonymy of the present species.

Horizon. Inferior Oolite.

Localities. Bath, Dundry, Somersetshire; Minchinhamp-
ton, Gloucestershire : Courcy, Normandy.

11. Nautilus tnornatus, d’Orbigny.

1842. Nautilus inornatus, VOrbigny, Paléontologie Frangaise, Terr.
Jurass. vol. i. p. 152, pl. xxviii.

1845. Nautilus ‘nornatus, Murchison, Outline of the Geology of the
Neighbourhood of Cheltenham, new ed. p. 91.

1849, Nautilus tnornatus, dOrbigny, Prodr. de Paléont. Stratigr.
vol. i. p. 245.

1857. Nautilus tnornatus, Etheridge, in Mem. Geol. Surv. Great
Britain ; Hull, Oa the Country around Cheltenham, p. 27.

1858. Nautilus ‘nornatus, Ooster, Cat. des Céphalopodes Fossiles des
Alpes Suisses, pt. iil. p. 8.

1863. Nautilus inornatus, Day, Quart. Journ, Geol. Soe. vol. xix. p. 291.

1864. Nautilus inornatus, Kudes-Deslongchamps, Etudes sur les Etages
Jurassiques Inférieurs de la Normandie, p. 83.

* Paléont. Franc., Terr. Jurass. vol. i. p. 155, pl. xxxi. figs. 1, 2.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 21

282 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

1871. Nautilus inornatus, Phillips, Geology of Oxford and the Valley
of the Thames, pp. 131, 164.

21877. Nautilus mornatus, J. Buckman, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soe.
vol. xxxiii. p. 2.

1879. Nautilus cf. inornatus, VOrb., Branco, Der Untere Dogeer Deutsch-
Lothringens (Abh. zur geol. Special arte von Elsass-Lothringen),
Band ii. Heft 1. p. 57.

1884. Nautilus tnornatus, Mallada, Bol. Com. del Mapa Geol. de
Espana, Sinopsis de Fosiles de Espaiia, vol, xi. p. 228 (figured zed.
vol. v. 1878, pl. iii. figs. 5, 6).

Fig. 12.

Nautilus tnornatus.—a, lateral view of a cast, showing the septa and very
small umbilicus; 6, front view, showing the siphuncle, “normal
line,” and the septa. Drawn from a specimen in the British Mu-
seum (no, C, 2843), Rather less than one half natural size.

Sp. char. Shell inflated, smooth, slightly umbilicated, flat-
tened on the sides and periphery, making the section sub-
quadrate, the greatest thickness being just above the umbili-
cus. Aperture wider than bigh. Sutures rather flexuous on
the sides and curved backwards in crossing the periphery.
There is a small dorsal (internal) lobe. Siphuncle a little
above the centre. Body-chamber unknown.

Remarks. This species most nearly resembles Nautelus
obesus, J. Sowerby, but it may be readily distinguished by its
less robust shell, wider septa, and less open umbilicus, as
well as by the slightly different position of the siphuncle.

The French specimen is a natural cast showing the sutures,
siphuncle, and internal lobe, but the ornamentation of the
inner whorl or young shell only is preserved. ‘This consists
of very fine lines of growth, crossed by fine, longitudinal,
thread-like lines, the decussating sculpture characteristic of
the young of Na utilus.

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic Nautili, 283

It is very doubtful whether the I uglish references to this
species are correct, because d’Orbigny’s figure in the ¢ Paléon-
tologie Frangaise ’ does not correctly represent this species, a
specimen of which from the d’Orbigny Collection we have
had the opportunity of examining.

Horizon. Inferior Oolite.

Locality. Burton-Bradstock, Dorsetshire.

12. Nautilus multiseptatus, sp. nov.

Fig. 13,

Nautilus multiseptatus.—a, peripheral view of the septate part of the
shell, showing the sutures and “ normal line ;” 4, lateral view of the
same ; ¢, interior whorl of another specimen, showing the siphuncle
and the inner (dorsal) lobe of the sutures. Drawn from specimens
in the British Museum (no, 82379). a and 6 rather more than half
natural size ; c, natural size.

Sp. char, Shell compressed at the sides and somewhat
flattened on the periphery, so that the whorls have a sub-
quadrate section. Umbilicus open, of moderate size, with
rather steeply sloping sides, probably exposing the inner
whorls, but the specimens are not complete enough to deter-
mine the amount of enrolment. Septa very numerous,
thirteen in about half a volution; sutures gently curved upon
the sides of the shell and nearly ‘straight upon the periphery.
Internal (dorsal) lobe very conspicuous (see fig. 13 aCe ihe
cast is marked with a very distinct ‘ normal line ” along the
median line of the periphery (see fig. 13, a). Siphuncle
below the centre. Some detached body-chambers, probably
belonging to this species, have portions of the test preserved,
and this is quite smooth.

Remarks, This species appears to be nearly related to

7A td

284 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

Nautilus obesus (see fig. 11), but it is distinguished by its
closer septa, the position of its siphuncle, its more slender
whorls, and narrower periphery.
The specimens were all obtained in the Northamptonshire
Ironstone, and from most of them the shell has been dis-
solved away, leaving hollow spaces surrounding the casts.
Horizon. Inferior Oolite.
Locality. Duston, Northamptonshire.

13. Nautilus clausus, @Orbigny.

1842. Nautilus clausus, VOrbigny, Paléontologie Frangaise, Terr.
Jurass. vol. i. p. 158, pl. xxxiil.

1849. Nautilus clausus, VOrbigny, Prodr. de Paléont. Stratigr. vol. 1.
p. 260,

1852. Nautilus clausus, Giebel, Fauna der Vorwelt, Band iii, Abth. 1.
p. 155,

1858. Nautilus clausus, Quenstedt, Der Jura, p. 350.

1858. Nautilus clausus, Chapuis, Nouv. Rech. sur les Foss. des Terr.
Seeondaires de la Province de Luxembourg (Acad. Roy. de Bel-
sique, tom. xxxill. des Mém.) pt. i. p. 14, pl. ii. fig. 1.

1860. Nautilus clausus, Wright, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xvi. p. 15.

1860. Nautilus clausus, Coquand, Synop. des Foss. Secondaires de la
Charente, de la Charente-Inférieure, et de la Dordogne, p. 9.

1864. Nautilus clausus, Ebray, Etudes Géologiques sur le Département
de la Niévre, fase. 15, 14, p. 270.

1868. Nautilus clausus, Dewalque, Prodrome d’une Description Géolo-
gique de la Belgique, p. 352.

1873. Nautilus clausus, Sharp, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxix.
9. 299.

21878. Nautilus clausus, Bayle, Explication de la Carte Géologique de
la France, vol. iv., Atlas, pl. xxxvi.

1884. Nautilus clausus, Mallada, Boletin dela Comision del Mapa Geo-
logico de Espana, vol. xi., Sinopsis de las Especies Foésiles de
Espana, p. 228.

Sp. char. Shell inflated, rapidly enlarging, somewhat
compressed on the sides, broad and flattened on the peri-
phery ; surface of test smooth or marked only with very fine
subregular lines of growth. Whorls completely mvolute,
widest in the region of the umbilicus, which is closed by a
shelly callus. Aperture much wider than high. Septa
slightly curved on the sides and forming a shallow sinus on
the periphery. Siphuncle a little below the centre. )

Remarks. This species bears some resemblance to Nautelus
subtruncatus, Morris and Lycett *, and it is also like WN.
Baberti of the same authors; it differs from the former in
its smooth test and from the latter in the same feature and
also in its closed umbilicus.

* Mon. of the Mollusca from the Great Oolite, Pal. Soc. 1850, pt. i.
p. 10, pl. i. figs. 1, 2.

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic Nautili, 285

We have lately had the great advantage of examining a
Specimen of the present species from the VOrbigny Collec-
tion of the Museum of Natural History, Paris, and there is in

Fig. 14.

Nautilus clausus.—a, lateral view, showing the septate part of the shell
covered with the test, and the cast of the body-chamber with part of
the anterior border of the muscular impression, represented by the
curved line; 6, peripheral view, showing some of the septa at the
lower part of the figure. Drawn from a specimen in the d’ rbigny
Collection of the Museum of Natural History, Paris. About one
half natural size.

the British Museum a good representative of it trom Moutiers
(Calvados). We have also seen a young specimen in the
Woodwardian Museum, Cambridge, which appears to belong
to this species ; it is from Dundry, the only British locality
mentioned by d’Orbigny. N. clausus is evidently rare in
England, for it is not recorded in any of the papers on the
geology of Somerset, by Htheridge, ‘Tawney, and Stoddart ;
and Mr. fH. Wilson has informed us that there are no
examples of it in the Bristol Museum. Under these cireum-
stances the determination of this species by Wright from
Leckhampton Hill (Gloucestershire), and by Sharp * from
the Northampton Sands, must, in the absence of descriptions
and figures, be accounted of doubtful accuracy, The finest
specimen of this species that we have seen is from Sherborne,
Dorsetshire ; 1f measures 9 inches in diameter and 64 inches
in width,

* For references to these authors’ papers see the table of synonymy
above.

286 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

Florizon. Inferior Oolite.
Localities. Dundry, Somersetshire; Sherborne, Halfway
House, Dorsetshire.

14. Nautilus perinflatus, sp. nov.

Fig. 15.

Nautilus perinflatus.—a, lateral view of septate part of the shell, showing
the small umbilicus, with a portion of the test; 6, front view, show-
ing the position of the siphuncle. Drawn from a specimen in the

3ritish Museum (no. 18398). Rather more than one third natural
size.

Sp. char. Shell much inflated, very slightly flattened on
the sides; peripheral area scarcely defined. Whorls semi-
lunate in section, rather more than twice as wide as high,
deeply embracing. Umbilicus very small. Septa rather
approximate; sutures slightly curved on the sides of the
shell and forming a shallow sinus on the periphery. Siphuncle
near the inner margin. ‘Test thick, marked only with lines
of growth.

Remarks. This species closely resembles the N. subinflatus
of d’Orbigny *, but differs in the position of its siphuncle and
the greater size of the shell. Moreover, the examples upon
which d’Orbigny’s species was founded were obtained from
the Kimmeridge Clay of Chatelaillon, near Rochelle (Cha-
rente-Inférieure), Honfleur (Calvados), and other localities,
whereas the English specimens are from the Inferior Oolite
of Bradford-Abbas, Dorsetshire, and Bristol.

* Prodr. de Paléont. Stratigr, 1850, vol. ii. p. 43; this species was

originally called inflatus (Paléont. Frang., Terr, Jurass, 1842, vol. i,
p. 165, pl. xxxvii.).

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic Nautili. 287

The largest specimen known to us is from the Inferior
Oolite of Sherborne, Dorsetshire; its greatest diameter is
8 inches and greatest width 64 inches. Distinct traces of the
anterior border of the muscular impression are observable on
the cast of its body-chamber.

Horizon. Inferior Oolite.

Localities. Bradtord- Abbas, Sherborne, Dorsetshire ;
Bristol, Somersetshire.

15. Nautilus Smithi, sp. nov.

Fig. 16.

Nautilus Smithi.—a, lateral view; 6, front view, showing the ornaments
of the young shell and also the position of the siphuncle. Drawn
from a specimen in the British Museum (no. C. 747). About two
thirds natural size.

Sp. char. Shell inflated, rapidly increasing, slightly com-
pressed on the sides, broadly rounded on the periphery.
Whorls much wider than high, widest in the region of the
umbilicus. ‘The latter is small, with a subangular margin
and steeply sloping sides. - The septa are rather distant from
each other on the periphery, being half an inch apart where
the height of the whorl is 1? inch. The sutures are but
slightly curved on the sides and form a very shallow sinus on
the periphery. The siphuncle is slightly above the centre.
The test is ornamented with fine lines of growth, which tend
to gather into obscure folds and form a deep sinus on the
periphery ; these are crossed by close-set longitudinal lines,
more distinct in the young shell.

Remarks. Vhe chief distinguishing character of this species

288 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

is the subangular border of the umbilicus. In this last
feature and also in the wide and semilunate section of the
whorl this species resembles Nautilus eacavatus* ; but the
latter has a much larger umbilicus and closer septa. It ma
also be compared with N. Malherbi, Terquem yt; but the
latter is at once distinguished by its less globose form and
much larger umbilicus.

The type of this species (B. M. no. C. 747) is in the
“Wm. Smith Collection; hence the specific name. ‘There
is a fine example from Sherborne, Dorsetshire, in the Wood-
wardian Museum, Cambridge, in which the test is beauti-
fully preserved. ‘Two smaller ones in the same Museum are
from Halfway House, Dorsetshire, and one shows the sculp-
ture of the young shell perfectly.

Horizon. Inferior Oolite.

Localities. Burton-Bradstock, Halfway House, Bradford-
Abbas, Dorsetshire. Two specimens in the British Museum
(nos. C. 747 and C. 3095) are without localities, but are
undoubtedly British.

16. Nautilus burtonensis, sp. nov.

Fig. 17.

Nautilus burtonensis.

a, lateral view, showing the large umbilicus ex-
posing the inner whorls: , peripheral view, showing some of the
sutures where the test is removed. Drawn from a specimen in the
British Museum (no. C. 2841). Somewhat less than half the natural

size.
* J. de C. Sowerby, Min. Conch. vol. vi. p. 55, pl. dxxix. fig. 1.
+ Mém. Soc. Géol. France, sér, ii, vol. v. pt. 11. 1855, p. 245, pl. xii.

~
‘

fies. 5, 5 a, OO

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic Nautili. 289

Sp. char. Shell subglobose, compressed on the sides and
periphery, the latter at first narrow and considerably flat-
tened, but in the later stages of growth becoming wider and
more rounded. ‘The umbilicus is very large in proportion to
the shell-diameter, its greatest width being 13 inches, while
that of the shell is about 5 inches; it is moderately deep and
exposes all the inner whorls, the sides slope steeply, and the
outer border is subangular. The test, which is admirably
preserved, is thick, and its surface is marked only with fine
lines of growth, which make a deep sinus upon the periphery
(see fig. 17, b). The septa are rather wide apart ; the sutures
slightly sinuous on the sides of the shell and forming a slight
sinus on the periphery. In a young shell (2; inches in
diameter) the inner lobe is very conspicuous. ‘The siphuncle
is a little below the centre.

Remarks. This fine species is unlike any other known to
us in the Jurassic rocks, but it bears some resemblance in the
character of its umbilicus to the recent Nautilus wmbilicatus,
from which species it differs, however, in the proportionately
greater size of its umbilicus and more flattened periphery.

Horizon. Inferior Oolite.

Locality. Burton-Bradstock, Dorsetshire.

MIDDLE OOoLITE.

17. Nautilus calloviensis, Oppel.

? 1840. Nautilus heragonus?, J, de C. Sowerby, in Grant’s Fossils of

Cutch, in Trans. Geol. Soc. ser. ii. vol. v. pt. ii. P.1o20;eple xxi.
fig. 4 (not of Sowerby ).

1842. Nautilus hevagonus, VOrbigny, Paléontologie Frangaise, Terr.
Jurass. vol. i. p. 161, pl. xxxv. figs. 1, 2 (not of Sowerby).

1858. Nautilus calloviensis, Oppel, Die Juratormation Englands, Frank-
reichs und des siidwestlichen Deutschlands, p. 547.

1875. Nautilus calloviensis, Waagen, Mem. Geol. Sury. India, Palzeont.
Indica, Jurassic Fauna of Kutch, vol. i. p. 18, pl. iii. fies. 2, a, 6.

1884. Nautilus calloviensis, Lahusen, Mémoires du Comité Géologique
[Russia], vol. i. no. 1, p. 42, Taf. iii. figs. 28, a, b, and 29, a, 6
(young).

1884. Nautilus hevagonus, Mallada, Boletin de la Comision del Mapa
Geologico de Espana, Sinopsis de las Kspecies Fésiles de Espana,
vol, x1. p. 229 (figured 1878, vol. v. pl. iv. fig. 9).

Sp. char. General form cf the shell somewhat compressed,
smooth, or marked only by faint, very fine, close-set lines of
growth. The whorls are obtusely angular, flattened at the
sides, and broadly truncated upon the periphery, the greatest
thickness being at the umbilical margin. ‘he umbilicus is
very small. ‘The septa form a sigmoid curve upon the sides
of the shell and are slightly sinuous upon the periphery.

290 On new and tmperfectly-defined Jurassic Nautili.

Siphuncle central. The ornaments of the test are described
more exactly by Dr. Waagen* as follows:—“ The shell
itself is covered with two systems of fine stria, of which the
parallel ones, which follow the direction of the spiral, are
limited to the external part of the shell. The others—strie

Fig, 18.

Nautilus calloviensis.—a, lateral view of a cast, showing the septation and
part of the body-chamber ; 6, front view. Drawn from a specimen
in the British Museum (no, 88979), Nearly two thirds natural size.

of growth—cover the whole shell, are somewhat faleiform on
the sides, but bend strongly backward on the external part.
On very large specimens these lines become very strong and
numerous, and look as if cut in with a knife; the other sys-
tem of striw then entirely disappears. . . . On the cast the
normal line is often very strongly pronounced.”

Remarks. This species is rather near to N. dineatus, but it
is distinguished by its more sinuous and approximate septa
and narrower umbilicus. .

The differences which separate the present species from N.
hexagonus, J. de C. Sowerby, have been pointed out by that
author in his description of the Kutch fossils collected by
Captain Grant f. He says, “ This [N. hevagonus?] differs
from N. hevagonus in having a smaller umbilicus and in being
more rounded.”

Oppel distinguished this species from Sowerby’s by its
wider aperture; it may also be known by its deeply-lobed

* Mem. Geol. Surv. India, Paleeont. Indica, Jurassic Fauna of Kutch,
vol. i. p. 18.
+ Trans, Geol. Soc. ser. ii, vol. v. pt, ii, 1840, Explanation of Plates.

On the Dentition of Pleuroplax (Pleurodus). 291

sutures, in which character it approaches Nautilus (Herco-
glossa) franconicus, Oppel.

Horizon. Calcareous Grit and Kelloway Rock.

Localities. Wiltshire; Marcham, Berkshire (Calcareous
Grit), Scarborough, Yorkshire (Ielloway Rock).

XL.—On the Dentition of Pleuroplax (Pleurodus), A. 8S.
Woodw. By James W. Davis, F.L.S.

[Plate XIII.]

In May 1879 * I described the teeth and spines of Pleuroplax
(Pleurodus) affinis, Agass., occurring in a thin shale above
the Better-bed Coal of Clifton and Lowmoor, near Halifax.
A comparison of these spines with similar ones from the
Staffordshire Coal-field, in the cabinet of Mr. John Ward, of
Longton, showed them to be closely related. In connexion
with one of the Staffordshire spines were a few fragments of
teeth, referred with probability to the genus Helodus, and the
inference was drawn that the two genera had similar spines.

Mr. Ward has just issued an admirable account of the North
Staffordshire Coal-field +, in which he refers to the occur-
rence of numerous teeth of Helodus simplex, Ag., in associa-
tion with a spe much resembling that of Pleuroplax, the
full description of which he reserves to a future time. Mr,
Ward also describes a specimen in his collection from the
Northumberland Low Main Coal of the jaw of Pleuroplax
Rankinet, Ag. It “is somewhat in the shape of a horseshoe,
with a blunt rounded extremity, the articular ends expanded.
Both rami support teeth, several of which unfortunately are
displaced. ‘l’hose in position are arranged upon the jaw with
the lateral expansions pointing antero-posteriorly. ‘he ante-
rior teeth are relatively narrower than the posterior, The
most posterior tooth, at least, has the summit of the crown
crenulated,”

Recently, whilst on a visit to Glasgow with my friend Mr.
A. Smith Woodward, we found two specimens of Pleuroplax
which prove not only that the two genera had similar spines,
but that they are one species with the same spine. One of
the specimens is from the University Museum, Glasgow, and

* Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxv. p. 181, pl. x. figs, 1-11.

+ “The Geological Features of the North Staffordshire Coal-fields,”
by John Ward: Trans. N. Stafford. Inst. of Mining and Mechanical
Engineers, vol. x. (1890).

292 Mr. J. W. Davis on the

has been lent to me by Professor John Young; and for the
second I am indebted to Mr. James Thomson, of the same
city. ‘The former, represented on Pl. XIII. fig. 1, exhibits
the anterior portion of the body of the fish; the head, con-
sisting of a mass of cartilaginous or chondroid substance,
occupies nearly one half of the part preserved. The mouth,
with teeth scarcely at all displaced, is well defined, the man-
dible is large, the upper jaw is not so easily distinguishable
from the other elements of the cranium; the anterior extre-
mity of the snout is unfortunately absent, but sufficient
remains to show that the head was large ‘and. broad. A
hollow above the posterior teeth of the jaws may indicate the
position of the orbit.: The whole of the surface of the head,
together with the remainder of the body, is covered with
glistening dermal tubercles or shagreen. The teeth are
numerous, and, so far as can be identified, are arranged in
shark-like concentric rows. ‘Those occupying the posterior
surface of the jaws are the teeth hitherto known as Pleurodus,
whilst the anterior teeth, far larger in number, are those
styled LHelodus or Lophodus. ‘The front teeth are pointed and
adapted for seizing and holding prey, whilst those behind
eradually assume broader and more massive proportions, and
apparently in the palatal teeth of the Pleurodont type there is
evidence of the ankylosing of three or four teeth together,
The teeth occupying a median position in the jaws have their
longer axis in the same line as that of the jaw, with the
result that the Lophodont or Helodont teeth present an ex-
ternal cutting-surface, which resembles, when a pair of teeth
is taken separately, the dentition of some of the Petalodonts
(fig. 1a). The head viewed from the front side, where the
matrix 1s fractured, is seen to be squeezed over towards the
exposed surface, and the opposite rami of the jaws can be
traced along the edge of the matrix. ‘The length of the rami
of the } jaws is 0°03 m. ; ; ata distance of 0°025 m. behind the
extremity of the jaw is a spine which has apparently been
displaced ; it is 0°U40 m. in length and 0-010 im. in breadth,
and, pointing towards the head, the spine extends in a dia-
gonal direction with the base towards the dorsal aspect of the
fish. Its position appears to indicate that it was located
immediately behind the occipital region of the head.

Mr. Thomson’s specimen does not exhibit the teeth em situ
in the jaws, but in a slightly segregated form on the slab ;
in this respect it forms an extremely valuable companion to
the specimen already referred to, because the relative size and
form of the teeth are better seen. There are six teeth exposed
of the Pleurodont type and near sixty teeth may be counted

Dentition of Pleuroplax (Pleurodus), A. 8S. Woodw. 293

of the Helodont type. A representation of the slab is given
on Pl. XIII. fig. 2, and drawings of the teeth, natural size
and enlarged, are also given (figs. 2a-2q). The surface of
all the teeth is enamelled and ornamented by minute pune-
tures, indicating the superficial extremity of the nutritive
canals.

These specimens are important as affording positive evi-
dence of the structure of another group of Cochliodonts.
Until the description of the dentition of Psephodus magnus
by Traquair * was rendered possible by the discovery of the
Kast-Kilbride specimen, very little reliable information
respecting this family was accessible. The dentition of
Pleuroplax as exhibited in these specimens confirms the opinion
expressed by Traquair that the teeth of the genus Lophodus
of Rowanowski were merely accessories in the dentition of
other genera; and the statement of Sir R. Owen + in 1867,
“that it would seem as if the several teeth of each oblique
row in Cestr acon had been welded into a single dental mass
in Cochliodus,” may well be applied to the whole of the family
of the Cochliodonts ; the broad palatal teeth of Plewroplax
clearly indicate that their present form and construction is
due to the ankylosis of the smaller series of teeth possessing
the Lophodont character which still remain separated in the
anterior parts of the mouth.

‘The occurrence of the teeth of /felodus on the slab from the
Staffordshire Coal-field in conjunction with the spine of
Pleuroplax, reterred to in my paper { on Pleurodus affinis,
seems to point to the inference that Yelodus simplex must
also be considered a Lophodont and absorbed in other
genera. ‘l'his view is confirmed by Dr. Traquair §, who has
pointed out that ‘a fine series of specimens of /Telodus simplex,
Ag., in the collection of Mr. John Ward, F.G.S., Longton,
clearly shows that the teeth in this species have the form of
‘Lophodus,’ that the entire dentition consisted of teeth gene-
rally similar in shape, and that the dorsal fins were armed
with spines resembling those of Plewrodus.” Mr. A. Smith
Woodward || restricts the genus Helodus to the type species
H. simplex, Ag., “a genus still awaiting elucidation.” He

regards it as en related to Pleur oplas both by the den-
tition and the dorsal fin-spine, and has no doubt ace in what-

* Geol. Mag. dee. iii. vol. ii. p. 340, pl. vill. (1885)

+ Geol. Mag. vol. iv. p. 59.

{ Op. cet. p. 182.

§ Geol. Mag. dee. iii, vol. il. p. 544, 1885 (footnote), and vol. v. p. 84,
1888.

|| ‘Catalogue of the Fossil Fishes in the British Museum,’ part. i.
p. 171 (1889).

294 Mr. A. S. Woodward on a

ever family Plewroplax be placed, the type species of Helodus
must follow. The difficulty in associating the two genera is
stated by Woodward to be that “in all known examples of
the last-named genus (Pleuroplax) all the teeth are described
as fused into plates, while in the typical //elodus no such
arrangement has been discovered.” 'T'his difficulty is removed
by the discovery of the examples now figured.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIII.

Fig. 1. Anterior portion of body with head of Pleuroplax, showing posi-
tion of mouth with teeth zm situ, nat. size.

Fig. 1 a. Front view of the same specimen, exposed on margin of slab.

Fig.1b. Teeth from the median portion of the upper and lower jaw in
juxtaposition, enlarged 4 diam.

Formation and Locality. Shale under the Drumgray Coal, Airdrie.
Ex Coll, Rankine Collection, University Museum, Glasgow.

Fig. 2. Group of teeth of Plewroplaz.

Fig. 2.a. Large posterior tooth, enlarged 2 diam.

Fig. 2b. A second example, also from posterior part of jaw, X 2 diam.
Fig. 2c. External and lateral aspect of a median tooth, with the former

magnified 2 diam.
Fig. 2d. ¥xternal and surface aspects of a median tooth, x 2 diam.
Fig. 2e. A tooth with deep root, X 5 diam.
Fig. 2 f. Side view of a tooth similar to fig. 2e, X 5 diam.
Fig. 2g. An example of a more elongated or attenuated tooth, X 5 diam.
Fig. 2h. Tooth with a prominent crown; the lateral extension of the
base greatly prolonged on one side, very short on the opposite
one, X 3 diam.

Formation and Locality. Black-band Ironstone, Airdrie.
Ex Coll, James Thomson, Esq., F.G.S.; private collection.

XLI.— Evidence of a Fossil Tunny from the Coralline
Crag. By A. Smith Woopwarp, F.G.S8., F.Z.8.

M. Raymonp Storms, of Brussels, who has long been en-
gaged in studying the osteology of the Scomberoid Fishes,
has lately published * some interesting observations on the
vertebral column of the typical genera of that family, resulting
in the determination of a series of large fossil vertebrae from
the Scaldisian Pliocene formation in the neighbourhood of
Antwerp. These fossils indicate a fish of very large size,
and agree precisely with the corresponding vertebra of

* R. Storms, ‘Sur la présence d’un Poisson du genre 7hynnus dans
pepe ae : eon ee y
les Dépéts Pliccénes des EKnyirons d’Anvers,” Bull. Soc. Belge Géol.,
Paléont., Hydrol., vol. ii. (1889), pp. 163-178, pl. vii.

Fossil Tunny from the Coralline Crag. 295

Thynnus so far as they are distinguished from those of the
known allied genera. Some slight differences, however, are
observable when comparisons are instituted with the ver-
tebre of the two larger existing Tunnies (7. thynnus and T’,
germo), and, though these distinctive features cannot be
exactly formulated, M. Storms decides to apply the provisional
name of Thynnus scaldisiensis (scaldisii) to the Pliocene
fish until sufficiently complete examples are discovered for
precise specific definition.

Full details of the characters by which the various ver-
tebree of Thynnus may be recognized are given in the memoir
just quoted, and it is thus unnecessary to enumerate them
here. The object of the present note is merely to remark
that vertebra closely resembling the Scaldisian fossils occur
in the Coralline Crag of Suffolk ; and, though these are of
somewhat smaller size, it will be convenient to record them
under the same name—Zhynnus scaldistensis—until further
and more satisfactory evidence of the species is forthcoming.

A hinder caudal vertebra of this form, from the Coralline
Crag of Aldborough, was presented to the British Museum by
Mr. Searles V. Wood, F'.G.8., many years ago, and has long
been labelled ‘ Vertebra of a Scomberoid Fish” by Mr,
William Davies. This specimen most nearly resembles the
two vertebra represented by M. Storms, loc. cit. figs. 20, 21,
and is almost in the same state of preservation, though the
lamellar transverse processes are more completely broken
away; in proportions it appears identical, but in size it is
somewhat inferior, the length of the centrum being only
0-044, its breadth 0-047, and its depth 0:035 m.

A second veitebral centrum referable to the anterior por-
tion of the caudal region has lately been obtained by the
British Museum (no. P. 55838) from the Crag of Suffolk, and,
though the precise locality is unrecorded, the mineral con-
dition of this fossil resembles that of the foregoing so com-
pletely, that it may probably be assigned to the same horizon,
The specimen agrees most nearly with figs. 12 and 19 of
Storms, which represent the thirtieth vertebra of 7. thynnus
and 7. scaldisiensis respectively ; it resembles the first in the
position of the inferior vascular foramen, but corresponds
more closely with the second in the slenderness of the middle

art of the ridge between the lateral fossa. The centrum
measures 0°038 im. in length, 0°039 in breadth, and 0:032 in
depth, and the base of the characteristic hemal arch is indi-
cated, while the neural arch is entirely destroyed.

Other Scomberoid caudal vertebree, more impertectly pre-
served and having the appearance of derived fossils, occur in

296 Prof. M‘Intosh’s Notes from the

the Red Crag of Woodbridge (Brit. Mus. nos. 43328, P. 5582).
These are more latei rally” compressed than the vertebrae of
Thynnus scaldisiensis, and differ remarkably in the stouter and
broader proportions of the ridge between the lateral fossee.
Discoveries in the Eocene vende it probable that these fossils
represent some early Tertiary genus at present undetermined.

XLII.—Notes from the St. Andrews Marine Laboratory
(under the Fishery Board for Scotland).—No. XI. By
Prof. M‘Inrosu, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., &e.

1, On the Occurrence of the Hydromeduse and Scyphomedusze
throughout the Year.
2, On Arachnactis.

1. On the Occurrence of the. lydromeduse and Scyphomedusee
throughout the Year.

In examining the Meduse three nets were often used
simultaneously, viz. surface, midwater, and bottom, and no
special apparatus was at any time employed for the closure of
the two latter during descent and ascent. Fairly reliable
observations, however, were made with regard to the bathy-
metrical distribution of these pelagic organisms without the
latter arrangement, as proved by the fact that each net occa-
sionally had a fauna of its own, and that, as the season
advanced, certain forms which at first were near the bottom
appeared by- and-by in the midwater- and finally in the sur-
face-net. In August 1888, for instance, the surface-net wa
less rich in species of Hydromedusee than either of the othe
though certain forms occurred in great abundance, a transfer-
ence of the latter from the lower regions of the water having
taken place.

It is possible that some of the forms subsequently mentioned
may pertain to the same Hydroid stock, representing perhaps
younger and older stages or mere variations ; but as our
knowledge of the group, though largely added to by the
labours of Allman, Agassiz, Heeckel, Hincks, and others, is
still in need of improvement, it has been considered advisable
to follow to a certain extent the descriptions of Forbes. No
gonozooid of Corymorpha, which occurs in considerable
numbers on smooth ground off the Budda Rock, has yet been
obtained.

In contrasting in August the fauna of the bay with the
offshore in the neighbourhood of the Bell Rock, the greater

St. Andrews Marine Laboratory. 297

abundance of Lizzta octopunctata and Lizzia blondina in the
latter area is noteworthy. Moreover, small specimens of
Bougainvillia britannica were abundant in the open water.
Minute Medusa-buds were common to both areas, as also were
Thaumantias inconspicua, T. hemispherica, and T. melanops.

The importance of the Medusz in regard to the fisheries
rests mainly on the vast number of ova and the resulting free
planule which they produce, for both largely increase the
food-materials for larval and early post-larval fishes, as well
as for the Invertebrates on which they and the somewhat
older stages feed.

In the laborious work of examining the various nets
throughout the year I have to acknowledge the skill and
steady perseverance with which Mr. Pentland Smith, M.A.
(now of the Horticultural College, Swanley), aided me.

Oceania (Tiara) octona, Fleming, first appeared in the
bottom-net in March. In August it was often procured in
the midwater-net and in a ripe condition, while in September
both large and small specimens were common; some were
ripe. Since Dr. Fleming found the species in this neighbour-
hood in 1821 it has occurred all along the eastern coast.
Oceania conica is ripe at Naples in March, while O. pileata
is mature in January.

Oceania episcopalis, Forbes.

An example about } inch in diameter occurred in the mid-
water-net in the middle of June. It seems to be much less
common than the preceding species. It was found by Forbes
on the western fishing-banks of Shetland in 1845, the largest
reaching 13 inch in diameter.

Oceania globulosa, Forbes.

In the midwater-net in August and once in September,
Forbes procured his examples in Bressay Sound, Shetland,

in 1835.

Besides the foregoing an Oceania was captured in August
with only one yellow tubercle (instead of three) between the
tentacles, with pinkish ocelli and ovaries, and quite mature.
In other respects it resembled O. octona. Another had no
tubercles between the centacles, which were in four groups,
five in each, and with two additional. ‘The ocelli and ovaries
resembled those of O. octona.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 22

298 Prof. M‘Intosh’s Notes from the

Bougainvillia britannica, Forbes (Margelis ramosa, Agassiz).

A single example appeared in the midwater-net in March ;
in May only once, in small numbers. It occurred almost
daily in June in the midwater-net, and of variable size. None
were quite ripe. A single large immature specimen was cap-
tured in July; and it was comparatively scarce in August,
though towards the end of the month it was ripe. Many
small examples frequented the open water beyond the bay.
Throughout September it occurred in small numbers, and
many were ripe.

It is common round the British shores. Prof. Allman *
observes that the gonosome is developed in autumn. Lo
Bianco f states, on the authority of Du Plessis, that this
Hydromedusa appears in winter and spring in the Bay of
Naples.

The polyparies are found off St. Andrews Bay and the
neighbourhood of the Forth.

Bougainvillia nigritella, Forbes.

Small specimens were captured in the bottom-net in April
and comparatively large examples in the midwater-net in
August. Ripe forms occurred once or twice in September.
Forbes found it in Bressay Sound, Shetland, in the autumn

of 1845.

Lizzia octopunctata, Sars, was first captured in the bottom-
net in March, in the midwater-net in April, when the speci-
mens also had buds, and only once in May. One or two
examples were obtained during the first half of June. In
August again it appeared in the surface-net.

It seems to be most frequently procured in early spring, and
is generally distributed along the eastern coast. Forbes,
found it on both sides of Shetland. It is not an abundant
form in the bay, and it ranges from j!5 to 345 inch in diameter.

L. octopunctata is an active and voracious form, engulfing
the bodies of Appendicularie, while the tails project as
singular appendages to the Medusa, and the same happens to
small Sagittee, the end being fixed in the manubrium, and
sometimes the umbrella is everted.

At Naples L. Aéllikert, Gegenb., is ripe in March.

Lizzia blondina, Forbes.
Procured on the ground near the Bell Rock in August.
It was formerly obtained by Forbes in the Zetlandic seas.

* “Gymnoblastic or Tubul. Hydroids,’ p. 312.
+ Mitth. Z. Stat, Neapel, 8 Bd. p. 385 (1888).

St. Andrews Marine Laboratory. 299

Sarsia tubulosa (Sars), Lesson.

This species made its appearance towards the end of April,
and a few attained half an inch in diameter. ‘Throughout
May and June it occurred in the midwater-net almost daily
and of variable size, though many were small. All were
immature. At the commencement of July all were in the
latter condition, and small, but they became larger as the
month advanced, comparatively few, however, being obtained
at any given time.

In the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for August 1887 the
Hydroids which were reared from planule of Sarsta are men-
tioned, the species being Syncoryne decipiens, Dujardin. As
this Hydroid is not common in the Bay of St. Andrews, these
Medusoids probably were carried by currents from the estuary
of the Forth and the neighbourhood ; yet they were in great
numbers, penetrating all the nooks of the bay, and passing
far up the estuary of the Eden.

Forbes chiefly found this form in June and July off the
coasts of Ireland and Shetland. It is very generally dis-
tributed, however, along the eastern shores and probably also

on the western.

Sarsia (Codonium) pulchella, Forbes,

Obtained in May. It has a greenish tinge at the oral
extremity. The relations of this form require elucidatian.

Syncoryne eximia, Allman.

The gonozooid of this form was captured in May,

Stauridium productum, 8. Wright.

~Gonozooids procured in June and July. Lo Bianco gives
October as the month for them at Naples.

Besides the foregoing, a gonozooid of Podocoryne carnea,
Sars, occurred in July. Lo Bianco thinks this species at
Naples sends off buds throughout the year.

Thaumantias pilosella, Forbes (Laodice cruciata, Agassiz),
was captured sparingly m April and May, increasing in size
as the latter month advanced, small specimens being most
common in the former and the beginning of the latter month,
In June swarms occurred in the midwater-net almost every
day, and the individuals as a rule were somewhat larger than
in the previous month, though not quite mature. They were

20%

300 Prof. M‘Intosh’s Notes from the

nearly ripe in August. At the beginning of September many
had attained 14 inch in diameter and were mature.

Forbes described 7. pilosella only from Shetland and the
south of England; but it is abundant all along the eastern
shores.

In this species, as in allied forms, it is probable that after
discharge of the reproductive elements the Hydromeduse
perish; they certainly disappear from the areas they previously
frequented in myriads.

An undetermined form* was met with at the beginning and
end of June, and often in great numbers in July, many
having the male elements fully developed, but none had ripe
ovaries. They were notable for their size (13 inch in dia~-
meter). This species likewise occurred in the midwater-net
in August and once in September. It differs from Thauwman-
tias pilosella in the arrangement of the tentacles and the great
length of the manubrium, which is proportionally almost as
large as in Tima.

Thaumantias quadrata, Forbes.

An immature example occurred in the midwater-net in
August. Forbes found it abundantly in the harbour of Tar-
bet, Loch Fyne, in the autumn of 1845. It would appear to
be a late Medusoid.

Thaumantias octona, Forbes.

Numerous examples of this small form were captured in
the middle of June. It also occurred in the surface-net in
August. All were immature. Forbes procured it both at
Oban and at Tarbet, Loch Fyne.

Thaumantias melanops, Forbes, came somewhat sparingly
under notice in May, and, as in the former case, increased in
size as the month advanced. It occurred in multitudes in the
midwater-net in June, and on an average larger than during
the previous month. One, 7°; inch in diameter, had fully-
developed ova on the 13th of June. It was one of the
most conspicuous Hydromeduse in July, when it was fully
mature. Some reached #inchin diameter. While appearing
almost daily in the midwater-net, it also towards the end of the
month was found in the bottom-nets, though the specimens
in these were small and immature. It occurred both in the
midwater- and bottom-nets in August.

It is generally distributed along the eastern coast. Forbes
procured it in Shetland.

* Vide Report of the Fishery Board for Scotland, ix. pl. v. figs. 6-9.

St. Andrews Marine Laboratory. 301

Thaumantias maculata, Forbes.

In June this form well illustrated the variability of a species
in regard to maturity. Specimens were very numerous and
very ripe on the 23rd, while those obtained on the 25th were
immature. At the beginning of July they were almost ripe and
fully half an inch in diameter, and a week or two afterwards
others of the same size were mature. This variability in
regard to maturity probably depended on the stage of growth
of a particular series, which it may be was swept by currents
into the bay.

Forbes found this Hydromedusa several times in Bressay
Sound, Shetland. It was never plentiful.

Thaumantias gibbosa, Forbes.

Many examples apparently of this form were procured in
the midwater-net on the 13th and 18th June.
Forbes captured it in the Hebrides.

Thaumantias pileata, Forbes.

A few specimens referable to this species were procured at
the beginning of June.

It was discovered by Forbes at Portrush, on the north
coast of Ireland, in June 1839.

Thaumantias hemispherica (Gronovius), O. F. Miiller.

This, perhaps, is the most conspicuous of the group both
in regard to size and numbers in June, and it is often stranded
on the West Sands in great profusion, and nearly 1 inch in
diameter. Moreover it has an additional interest, since it is
frequently selected by the larval Peachie for attachment by
the widely open mouth and tentacles. The young anemones
are thus carried about without effort on their part, and obtain
some of the advantages of the Arachnactis-stage of Hdwardsia.
T. hemispherica reached full maturity this month. During
July it was in great profusion in the midwater-net and occa-
sionally appeared in the bottom-net; and since the latter
feature did not occur previously, it may be presumed that it
was not entirely due to the capture of the Medusoids on the
way up. Larval anemones (Peachie) now considerably larger
still adhered to this species and to T. melanops, occupying
diverse positions, as on the outer surface at the margin of the
base or on the manubrium. ‘he Hydromeduse were also
often fully ripe. Some of the larger exceeded ? inch.

Small examples were common in the bottom-net in August,

302 Prof. M'Intosh’s Notes from the

both inshore and offshore, as in the neighbourhood of the Bell
Rock. Mature specimens again were numerous in the mid-
water-net, many having larval Peachiw attached to them both
in and beyond the bay, though perhaps they were most nume-
rous within the limits. In the surface-net it occurred in
limited numbers and in full maturity with many free ova.

The numbers were not much diminished throughout Sep-
tember and the majority were ripe. In the earlier part of
October many were mature, others nearly so. Many occurred
in the midwater-net during the first half of the month, and
they ranged on each side of $ inch. Even in December a
few examples were captured in the midwater-net.

The species appears to be common all round the shores of
Britain, as well as in the North Sea generally.

Thaumantias lucifera, Forbes.

Minute specimens were found in the bottom-net in March.
It also occurred sparingly in May, while in June great num-
bers were met with at the beginning and end of the month.
It was generally under } of an inch. It appears to be gene-

rally distributed round the British shores.

Phialidium variabile (= Thaumantias globosa &c., Forbes)
was captured sparingly in May and June in the midwater-
net. Its size ranged from } inch in diameter downwards.
None were quite mature.

The same species in the varieties globosa, convexa, and
sarnica appeared in the midwater-net in August, as well as
in the bottom-net—chiefly at the beginning of the month.

Forbes limits its occurrence to Shetland, on both sides of
which it was found plentifully in the harbours. It seems to
have a wide range on both eastern and western shores of
Scotland.

Phialidium variabile, var. inconspicua, Forbes, occurred in
considerable numbers several times about the middle of June.
All examined were immature, and none exceeded } inch in
diameter. It was in full maturity in August, abounding in
the bottom-net at the beginning of the month, while compa-
ratively few were got in this net towards the end. It also
appeared in the midwater- and surface-nets.

Forbes procured this form in the Hebrides.

Besides the foregoing a few examples of a Thaumantias
appeared in the midwater-net in February and April. In
the.same net a small form was procured on the 24th May

St. Andrews Marine Laboratory. 303

which does not seem to correspond with anything named.
It had numerous brick-red and comparatively large ocelli.

It is no wonder that the Medusoids of this type are so
abundant in St. Andrews Bay, since Obelia, Clytia, and the
Campanularians are so common.

Clytia Johnstont.

The gonozooids are characteristically plentiful in April,
issuing from the stock in swarms. Moreover the old poly-
pites and thecxe were thrown off and new ones reproduced.
lho Bianco observes that at Naples the formation of the
Medusoids occurs in the gonophores from October till March,
while the free Medusoids are procured in January.

In July numerous minute Medusoids, some probably per-
taining to Obelia, were captured in the bottom-nets. They
had perhaps only recently gained freedom, and, along with
the various planule, frequented the lower regions ah the
water. Medusoids are very common all round the British
shores during this month, and the water is sometimes ren-
dered phosphorescent by the swarms from Obelia alone.
These frequently occur at the surface as well as throughout
the water.

Tima Batrdit, Johnst.

In January specimens were captured fully 2 inches across
and almost colourless, the peduncle alone showing a whitish
tip, with a faint brownish hue at the base of the tentacles.
The reproductive elements were well advanced, so that the
spawning-period could not be far distant. Only a single
small example was procured in February in the midwater-
net. In May a few comparatively young specimens also were
obtained. It is noteworthy, however, that no very small ex-
amples have been seen, though occasionally initsearliest phases
it may have escaped observation or have been confounded with
other forms, especially as the young is unlike the mature form.
Only two small examples, one within and one without the bay,
were got in August. Both small (? inch) and fairly grown
forms (about 14 inch) appeared in the midwater-net in Septem-
ber, as also the small abnormal one formerly described *. All
were immature. The same remarks apply to October, the
largest, however, being only 1; inch in diameter. In Decem-
ber Tima reached its maximum size, a specimen fully 3 inches
across being captured in the midwater-net. A few of medium

* Vide Aun. & Mag. Nat. Hist. January 1890, p. 41,

304 Prof, M‘Intosh’s Notes from the

size were also procured in the surface-net. The reproductive
organs were well developed, but not quite ripe. This month
and January would appear to be the period during which
these Hydromeduse asa rule reach full maturity. Lo Bianco
states (fide Chun) that the ova of Tima flabellaris are ripe in
October.

This form was first observed by Dr. Johnston, of Berwick,
in 1833, and shortly after by Edward Forbes on the West
Sands at St. Andrews. It abounds all along the eastern
shores of Britain to the estuary of the Thames.

The Hydroid stock from which Tima springs is not well
known, though Heckel gives Lafoéa and Campanularia for
the eroup. Louis Agassiz had formerly raised the Campanu-
larian zoophyte from an American Tima.

Witla stellata, Forbes ?

Another gonozooid 2°5 millim. in diameter presented a
somewhat globular umbrella with twenty-four large purplish
tentacular bulbs, from which proceeded as many slightly
pinkish tentacles. ‘The subumbrella reached nearly to the
tip of the umbrella. The lips of the peduncle were produced
into four branched filiform processes. The four double ovaries
were filled with large orange-red ova, apparently ripe.

Melicertum (Stomobrachium) octocostatum, Sars, appeared in
the midwater-net in January, and thereafter disappeared till
August, when small numbers were captured once in the same
net. It occurred sparingly once or twice in September and
of good size. Throughout October similar specimens were
occasionally met with in considerable numbers. None were
mature. It was somewhat plentiful in the surface-net at the
commencement of December, and a few, 4 inch in vertical
diameter, likewise were got in the midwater-net. ‘This form
appears to attain full size at St. Andrews. Forbes did_ not
frequently meet with this common species.

Circe rosea, Forbes, was present in great numbers in January,
not only in the bay but far out at sea, and at surface, mid-
water, and bottom. Vast numbers continued throughout
February in the midwater-net and smaller numbers in the
surface- and bottom-nets. Many young specimens were
present. In the large forms the reproductive organs showed
numerous clear cells. In March they were still very abun-
dant in the midwater- and bottom-nets, and the majority were
full-grown, though small forms were also mingled with them.
Circe attained full growth in April; indeed no larger forms

St. Andrews Marine Laboratory: 305

were seen, and the reproductive organs were well develop ed
The species then disappeared till November, when it occurrh-
in considerable numbers, though none were large. Througut
out December it appeared sparingly in the surface-net, b.
of somewhat larger size than in the previous month; while '
the midwater-net it was in profusion, the larger forms being
about 3 inch, the smaller less than } inch. he reproductive
organs were fairly developed. This species and Pleuro-
brachia occurred in three out of four hauls in the bottom-net.
Circe thus forms one of the features of the pelagic fauna
during the winter months.

Forbes found the species only in the Zetlandic seas in
1845. It is, however, abundant off the east coast of Scot-
land. L. Agassiz, again, mentions that he procured the
American form only in July. Forbes points out the differ-
ence of his species from Brandt’s in regard to the eyes,
which are absent; but A. Agassiz observes that what Forbes
took for ocelli in Brandt’s figure are only sections of the
chymiferous tubes.

Scyphomeduse.

Minute ephyre about 35 inch in diameter appeared in the
bottom-nets towards the latter third of February. Swarms
again occurred in March in the same region. A wealth of
Medusoid life is found close to the bottom at this season. In
May considerable numbers of young Aurelie, ranging from
$ to 4 inch in diameter, were captured. As the month ad-
vanced they increased in size, and the contrast was still
greater when placed side by side with the minute forms pro-
eured in March. Young Aurelie and Cyanee are often
beached on the sands in May. In July (1888) the adults
were comparatively rare, a condition unusual in ordinary
seasons. ‘hus only a young example $ an inch across was
found in the midwater-net at the beginning of the month and
a few larger in the same net on the 19th. Asa rule the
immense numbers of these forms prove troubiesome in the
trawl- and other nets both from their stinging-powers
(Cyanea) and their weight.

In regard to Cyanea a single example 2 inch across the
disk was procured in June, and only once were a few speci-
mens 7 or 8 inches in diameter stranded on the sands (June).
In former years not only did this form and Aurelia abound
at the surtace of the bay in July, but far out at sea. It
would seem that warm sunny weather is connected with the
presence of these and other marine forms at the surface. It

306 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinodds.

is worthy of note that once in January a large example was
procured by the trawl in deep water and at a considerable dis-
tance from the shore—a solitary survivor of the hosts of
autumn.

2. On Arachnactis.

In the Zetlandic seas no more conspicuous form than
Arachnactis occurs amongst the pelagic animals in July. It
is, however, by no means common along the eastern shores of
Scotland, so far as present experience goes. At Plymouth,
again, Mr. Harmer stated at the meeting of the British Asso-
ciation at Neweastle that it was abundant. Its comparative
rarity in the Bay of St. Andrews is peculiar, since Hdwardsice
are by no means unfrequent ; indeed, the stomachs of some
Pleuronectids are filled with them. The only example yet
observed at St. Andrews is a minute form about ¢ inch in
diameter which was captured in the midwater-net on the 11th
June amongst Hydromedusee and other Ccelenterates. In
lateral view (fig. 1) it somewhat resembles a cushion-star,
and is more or less translucent, a faint tinge of yellowish exist-
ing only at the tips of the tentacles. Of the latter, four are
conspicuously larger than the rest, three a little shorter, while
two tentacle-buds occur opposite the median one (fig. 2).
The oral region shows two prominent papill, and the mesen-
teries, though apparently mot quite complete, are well
marked,

XLI.— British Fossil Crinoids. By ¥. A. Batuer, B.A.,
F.G.8., Assistant in the British Museum (Natural History).

[Plate XIV. ]

l. Historical Introduction.

Tue fossil Crinoidea of the British Isles are of great interest
to the zoologist, for in the early days of geology they attracted
the attention of many enthusiastic workers and most of the
common genera were established on the evidence of British
specimens. ‘The first work of any importance is James

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds. 307

Parkinson’s ‘ Organic Remains of a Former World’ (1811):
his figures and descriptions, though both excellent and careful,
were unaccompanied by names on the Linnean system ;
since, however, they were constantly referred to by Von
Schlotheim in his ‘ Petrefaktenkunde’ (1820), they are of
importance in enabling us to identify the types of the German
author. George Cumberland, of Bristol, the author of a
paper in the ‘ Transactions of the Geological Society ’ (1819)
and of ‘ Reliquiz Conservate ’ (1526), is another whose work
is liable to be passed over on account of its deficiency in
systematic names; but, when we compare the completeness
of description and the accuracy of draughtsmanship shown by
these two early authors with the two lines and a half of dog-
Latin diagnosis unelucidated by so much as a diagram that
are nowadays thought enough to bear the weight of a specific
name, then we shall not doubt for long which method is the
more advantageous to science.

The morphology and classification of the group were first
set on a satisfactory basis by J. 8. Miller in ‘The Natural
History of the Crinoidea’ (1821), where 11 genera, including
Encrinus, Pentacrinus, and Comatula of former authors, and
26 species were described. J. Phillips, in the ‘ Geology*of
Yorkshire’ (1836), originated many names of both species
and genera; while three years later the same author revealed
in Murchison’s ‘Silurian System’ the existence of many
types previously unknown. ‘The British Devonian Crinoids
alluded to by Sedgwick and Murchison and J. de C. Sowerby
in 1840 were more fully described by Phillips in the ‘ Paleozoic
Fossils of Cornwall &e.’ (1841). The Carboniferous Crinoids
of Ireland next received attention at the hands of R. Griffith
(1842), J. E. Portlock (1843), and especially F. M‘Coy
(1844). ‘The Synopsis of the Silurian Fossils of Ireland’ by
the last-named paleontologist, though bearing date 1846, does
not seem to have been published till 1862. Meanwhile in
1842 T. and T. Austin had begun to publish in the ‘ Annals
and Magazine of Natural History’ a series of learned papers,
the practical value of which has always been very seriously
diminished by the absence of illustration. ‘Toa slight extent
this omission was repaired by their ‘ Monograph on Recent
and Fossil Crinoidea,’ which appeared at intervals from 1843
to 1849*. Other early workers in this fruitful field were
W. A. Lewis and J. C. Pearce.

* The destruction of the original covers renders it difficult to settle the
dates of the various parts with exactness ; but a consideration of all the
evidence has suggested the following table :—

308 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds.

Thus far work had chiefly been done on the Paleozoic
Crinoids, and some of this is improved upon by F. M‘Coy in
his ‘ Description of the British Paleozoic Fossils in the
Geological Museum of the University of Cambridge’ (1851).
But English workers in the latter half of the century have
rather withdrawn their attention from these earler forms,
and the works to which chief reference must now be made
are those by L. G. de Koninck, to whom many of our Car-
boniferous genera and species are due, and the ‘ Iconographia
Crinoideorum in stratis Suecie siluricis fossilium’ of N. P.
Angelin (1878), the Crinoids proper edited by G. Lind-
strém. Jn this latter work only one aciually British specimen
is described, Pertechocrinus interradiatus, and that probably
not a good species; but, as it is well known how close a con-
nexion exists between the British and Scandinavian Silurian
deposits, we may expect to find other of Angelin’s species
represented in this country. A visit to Sweden during the
present year will [ hope enable me to settle some of the ques-
tions that at present vex the minds of many English students.
If, however, British workers have not of late done much on
Paleozoic Crinoids, some good work stands to the credit of
W: H. Baily, R. Etheridge, Jun., J. G. Grenfell, W. P.
Sladen, and above all J. Rofe, whose well illustrated papers
in the ‘Geological Magazine’ (1865, 1869, 1871, 1873)
added much to our knowledge of the structure of Carboni-
ferous forms. Many names of more or less value are due to
the ‘Catalogue of Fossils in the Woodwardian Museum,’ by
J. W. Salter (1873).

The year 1850 saw the Cretaceous Crinoids attacked by
E. Forbes in F. Dixon’s ‘ Geology of Sussex,’ a piece of
work by no means so good as his ‘ Monograph of the Kchino-
dermata of the British Tertiaries’ (1852). Some Liassic
Crinoids have been described by F. M‘Coy (1848) and T.
Wright (1854) in the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural
History,’ and by Tate and Blake in ‘The Yorkshire Lias’
(1876). During the last ten years almost the only writer
has been P. H. Carpenter, who has chiefly confined himself
to the Comatulide.

Not. | Sig. 3B, cu Pp. 4 1elGy seissil ik 1843.
Dic 745) Dy Bl eee Meee sells LY. 1844,
Ot 97 EG. (lay uate: Seg Wik 1844,
oe gy HT: gy AO SOE oe MUL VO Ve45;
Daal 5510 dy1Ke, hy MOO ean oe D.ap. 0 1846.
% 16.) 25) Ly My 4, (SLOG spe Le DE, ) SAG:
gfe sp NO. y POG ae! SUI OV Ses
» o 9 PQ. » JIs-IZ67 i XV, Vi Tote:

My. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids. 309

Notwithstanding this roll of honourable names, a roll which
might even be extended, it is possible for one of the chief
living authorities on Palseozoic Crinoids—Dr. Charles Wachs-
muth—to say in a letter dated Dec. 30, 1889, “ The British
Crinoids . . . . are in a greater confusion than the Crinoids
of any other country.” ‘The causes for this state of things,
which cannot but be considered a discredit to British Paleon-
tology, are two. First, much of the work done by the older
writers is worse than valueless (it is as well to speak the
plain truth at once, however repugnant to one’s feelings) ;
drawings, when given, are often unlike the specimens; the
descriptions incomplete, if not inaccurate. This is no mere
expression of opinion, but a simple fact proved over and over
again by the inability of eminent foreign workers to recog-
nize many genera and most species. Much, however, may
be pardoned to the pioneers of the science; their attempts
were heroic, and their failures naturally splendid. The
second cause is the lack of recent workers; not only have
men been wanted to describe many new genera and species,
but some one has been especially needed who should revise
the work of his predecessors in accordance with the advanced
state of knowledge. Had Sir Wyville Thomson lived this
reproach would no doubt have been removed ; and we may
not blame those who were restrained by etiquette from tres-
passing on a field supposed to have been claimed by another.

Delay is no longer excusable. The chief fossiliferous
localities all over the country have been well ransacked, and
many are now no longer worked; a few more species may be
found no doubt, but a vast mass of material in museums and
in private collections awaits description. Further, by the pub-
lications of Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer in America, and
by those of Dr. P. H. Carpenter in this country, the task for
both Paleozoic and Neozoic Crinoidea is rendered far more
easy than it would have been ten years ago. This task then
I propose to undertake in a series of papers: already I have
received much encouragement, much kind help, and many
promises of assistance ; but | would here appeal to every one
who owns or who is in charge of collections of British Fossil
Crinoids to aid me with information or by the loan of speci-
mens. livery specimen entrusted to me will be taken all
possible care of, and returned to its owner or guardian at the
earliest possible opportunity.

I should greatly prefer to deal with the Crinoids in an order
determined solely by zoological affinity ; but localities, col-
lections, and considerations of expense will probably necessi-
tate a more geological arrangement. I propose therefore to.

310 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids.

begin with the Dudley Crinoids, with which everyone is
acquainted, but of which we have as yet no real knowledge,
And I shall deal first with the section that appears to be most
simple morphologically—the Inadunata Vistulata; what
genera are herein contained will be seen from the ensuing
paper.

I would also ask anyone who may be kind enough to lend
me specimens to endeavour to give some definite information
as to horizon and locality. The late President of the Geolo-
gical Society Jamented the lack of British palzeontologists ;
but how can paleontology exist at all in a land where almost
every Paleozoic fossil is labelled: —‘* Wenlock Limestone,
Dudley,” “ Devonian, Devonshire,” or ‘ Carboniferous,

Yorkshire ”’ ?

II. The Classification of the Inadunata Iistulata.
(Plate XIV.)

Common CHARACTERS,

Under the name “ Fistulata’’ Messrs. Wachsmuth and
Springer brought together in 1886 the following families as
defined by them, viz., Hybocrinidx, Heterocrinidx, Anomalo-
crinidx, Belemnocrinide, Cyathocrinide, Poteriocrinide,
Encrinide, Astylocrinide, Catillocrinide, and Calceocrinide.
In common with other Inadunata the genera referred to these
families possess the following characters :—no interradials,
and no plates above the radials proper, are included in the
dorsal cup; there may, however, be from 1 to 3 plates (not
homologous with interradials) in the posterior interradius ;
infrabasals may or may not be present; the plates of the cup
are joined to one another by close suture. Among them-
selves the genera of the Fistulata agree in the following cha-
racters :—the food-grooves pass from the arms, along the
surface of the tegmen, between the orals (when these are
present) to the mouth, and are protected, on the disk as
on the arms, by alternating covering-plates; in the anal or
posterior interradius the perisome of the tegmen is extended
ventrally as a sac often of large size.

The ventral sac of the Fistulata, from which the name of
the group is derived, appears to differ from the anal tube of
some Camerata no less than from the smaller anal opening
of other Crinoids. Dr. Wachsmuth in 1877 wrote as
follows:—“It evidently formed a large portion of the

* « Noteson the Internal and External Structure of Palzeozoic Crinoids,”
Amer. Journ, xiv. 115-127, Newhaven, 1877, see pp. 126-127,

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds. 311

visceral cavity. Its great size compared with the lower cup,
the presence of large numbers of small pores, and the position
of the anal aperture near the bottom instead of at the summit,
seems [sic] to imply that the anal apparatus occupied in the
internal economy of this sac only a limited space. The inflated
sac can accordingly not be homologized with the slender,
heavy plated tube of <Actinocrinus. We can only com-
pare its lateral opening, which is generally placed low
down near the arm-bases, with the anal aperture of species
in which the anus is located in the ventral disc.” In 1879
Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer add* to this, that the
plates are thin, that “the pores perforate the plate at
each angle,” that ‘in some species there are in place of the
pores slit-like fissures of considerable length’? which they
compare with hydrospires of Cystidea, and that the anal
opening is ‘‘ rarely observed, evidently lateral—not posterior
—and low down.” ‘To this view of the ventral sac they have
since adhered (Rev. III. (83), Proc. 1885, p. 305). It is,
however, difficult to distinguish any pores or slits in the
common Cyathocrinus of our Wenlock Limestone, which
appears to be identical with C. acinotubus of Angelin f,
neither do Angelin’s figures of Cyathocrinus alutaceus, C.
glaber, C. muticus, and C. ramosus show any trace of pores.
Further, I have been unable to find any anal opening in the
best preserved specimens of Gssocrinus in the British Mu-
seum, which are the only specimens displaying its supposed
position that have come under my notice. I am not aware
that the anal opening of any Fistulate has as yet been figured
or even definitely described. It is possible that the anal
opening is at the distal extremity of the sac after all, but that
its minuteness, and the closing of the plates around it after
death have prevented its recognition. Even with recent
Crinoids, as Dr. P. H. Carpenter tells me, a similar difficulty
is often experienced. But these slight objections, supposing
them to prove well founded, would hardly disturb the main
contention of Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer, that the
ventral sac of the Fistulata is a peculiar organ unparalleled in
other groups. Besides promoting excretion it probably sub-

* “ Revision of the Paleocrinoidea, Part I.” (pp. 9 and 60), Proc. Ac.
Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1879, pp. 232 and 283, In future this work will
be referred to as “ W.& 8. Revision,’ and the pages of the authors’ copies
given in brackets; the reference to the Proceedings will be indicated
thus, “ Proc. 1879, p. 232.”

+ H. Trautschold places the ventral sac of C. actnotubus with that of
the ordinary Actinocrinus type (‘ Ueber den muthmasslichen Geschlechts-
apparat von Poteriocrinus multiple, Trd.,” Festschrift k. Gesell. Natur-
forscher, Moscow, 1882).

31) be Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil’ Crinotds.

served respiration ; but whether, as Trautschold has sug-
gested *, it was also connected with reproduction seems more
than doubtful. Further, in its morphological relations to
the plates of the dorsal cup it differs, as will shortly be
seen, from the anal tube of other Crinoids. .

The Fistulata then are justly separated as an easily recog-
nized group. But it is one that has presented many diffi-
culties to the systematist, as evidenced hy the numerous and
conflicting classifications that have been proposed. Into all
these it is as unnecessary, as it would be wearisome, to enter;
for the observations and erudition of Messrs. Wachsmuth and
Springer enabled them, four years ago, to put forward a
classification which was an enormous advance on all systems
previously maintained either by themselves or by other authors.
Since that time one or two alterations, occasionally for the
better, have been proposed; and these will be alluded to in
their proper place. Mr. 8. A. Miller, in his recently published
‘North American Geology and Paleontology’ (Cincinnati,
1889), has on pp. 214-216 given a classification of Paleozoic
Echinodermata, to which politeness necessitates some allusion.
It is, however, so remarkable a production that only the
previous work done by this enthusiastic paleontologist can
induce one to believe that he has put it forward in good faith.
It is then the genera as defined by Messrs. Wachsmuth and
Springer, to which one or two may be added, and the families
into which those genera were by them distributed, that will
form a natural basis for the following discussion.

Discussion indeed might seem unnecessary, especially as
the new forms to be hereinafter described do not throw much
fresh light on the subject. But, in endeavouring to assign
these new forms to their place in the system, I was confronted
by certain difficulties. Thinking that those difficulties were
due to my own obtuseness or ignorance, I attacked the subject
afresh on every side. Still, now that all is done, I find
myself unable to accept in their entirety the views of Messrs.
Wachsmuth and Springer; and, thinking it hardly compatible
with scientific honesty to describe forms in terms with which
I cannot agree, I feel bound to set before the public what
seems to me to be the truth of the matter.

‘TERMINOLOGY.
Before plunging into a lengthy argument it will be as well
to clear the ground by an explanation of the terms employed.

* Op. cit., and “ Ueber Crinoideen, Zusatze und Berichtigungen,” Bull.
Soc. Imp. Nat. Moscou, lvii. pp. 140-145 (1882).

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds. 313

Nothing conduces so much to the advancement of science as
a uniformity of terminology, especially if such terminology
be based on scientific principles. That of the Crinoidea is
only just assuming shape and fixity, and that it does so at all
is due chiefly to the labours of Dr. P. H. Carpenter. ‘I'o him
I am indebted for some notes explaining the terms which will
in future be used by himself and by Messrs. Wachsmuth and
Springer: theSe notes are quoted as P. H.C. (MS.). To
these terms I shall adhere so tar as my judgment will permit
me. I shall also adopt the terms preposed by the same autho-
rities in Wachsmuth and Springer’s paper ‘“ Discovery of the
Ventral Structure of Zaaxocrinus &e.” (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philadelphia, 1888, p. 354, footnote 3), with one exception :
these terms are quoted as W. & 8S. & CU.

Crown=Crinoid minus the stem.—W. & 8. & C,

Calyx =Crinoid skeleton minus stem and free arms.—W. & S. & C.

Dorsal cup=all parts of the calyx below the origin of the free arms.—
W.&8.& C. I should myself have preferred to retain “ calyx” for
the dorsal cup, and to have used some such word as “cyst” in its
place ; “ calice ” is the natural French word for “ cup,” and the alter-
native “la tasse dorsale” smacks a trifle too much of the tea-table,
Proposers of technical terms should remember two things: to avoid
words already overweighted with meanings; and to use words that
can be easily transferred to other tongues: hence the advantage of
Latin or Greek over the vernacular. But in this instance I content
myself with a protest.

Tegmen=that part of the calyx lying above the origin of the free arms,
This one term includes both ‘ disk” and “ vault” of W.& 8S. & C.,
since I do not believe in the existence of a structure “covering the
disk.” This cannot be argued out here, and will be better discussed
when treating of the Camerata. The term ‘“tegmen calycis” was
used in the same sense by Zittel (‘ Paleeontologie,’ 1879),

Infrabasals=the radially situated circlet of plates proximal to the stem ;
not always present. This term is preferable to “ Under-basals,”
which Dr. Carpenter always uses, because the latter word is a mon-
grel, half Latin half English, and cannot be used in any language as
“ Infrabasal” can.

Basals=the interradially situated circlet of plates either proximal to the
stem or ventrad of the Infrabasals when those are present. The
“parabasals” of some authors, j

Radials=the radially situated circlet of plates veutrad of the Basals, and
this circlet only —P. H. C. (MS8.).

Brachials, “In forms with 5 undivided arms (e. g. Symbathacrinus) the
Radials bear the Brachials directly ; and throughout the whole group
every joint beyond the Radial is morphologically a Brachial, as is
shown both by comparative anatomy and by embryology.”—P. H. C,

MS.).

PP chil: of the first order; the second and pubsciient primary
radials of W. & S. are now called Ist, 2nd, &c. costals, up to the
axillary. ‘Miller used this term in Aprocrinus, Pentacrinus, and
Comatula.”—P. H. C. (MS.).

Distichals=Brachials of the second order; used by Miller.—P. H. C,
(MS,).

Ann. & Mag. N, Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 23

314 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds.

Palmars = Brachials of the third order.—P. H. C. (MS.).

Postpalmars= Brachials of the fourth order.

Free brachials=“ the component pieces of the arms beyond the last axil-
lary.” —P. H. C. (MS.).

Syzygy. “Only used for the immovable (?) union between two brachials,
in which the hypozygal loses its pinnule (supposing pinnules to occur).
The apposed faces may be smooth (some Pentacrint), striated (most
Comatule), or dotted (some Actinometre).”—P. H. C. (MS.).

Close Suture. “The apposed surfaces smooth or partially striated. 2.
All the subradial plates, both laterally and longitudinally ; the calyx-
plates of most Camerata, some Platycrinide excepted.”—P. H. C.
(MS.).

Loose Suture. “ Distinguished by the formation of a more or less developed
facet, cut out of the edge of the plate. It may be smooth, striated,
or have faint ridges, and is sometimes perforate. Ez. The union
between radials and costals of some Platycrinide. The brachials of
the Camerata, Cyathocrinidz, and some Poteriocrinidze. The radials
and interradials of the Articulata. Stem-ossicles. Pinnule-ossicles
of many Neocrinoids.”—P. H. C. (MS8.).

Muscular Articulation. “ The articular ridge, whether vertical or trans-
verse, is always perforate. Jv. The brachials in all Articulata, and
in some Poteriocrinidze and Encrinidze (uniserial arms only).”—

P. H.C. (MS).

Instead of the terms here given, Dr. Carpenter proposes to
use ‘ Synarthrosis ” for Close Suture, ‘‘ Amphiarthrosis ” for
Loose Suture, and ‘ Diarthrosis ” for Muscular Articulation.
But it is very doubtful whether the adoption of terms from
Vertebrate anatomy is wise, especially when, as in this case,
the terms connote certain relations of bone, cartilage, and
synovial membrane, tissues that do not exist in the Crinoidea.
I shall therefore use the equivalents with which Dr. Carpen-
ter has fortunately favoured me.

As any other of the old terms used by me will be used in
the accepted sense it is unnecessary here to explain them;
any new terms that may seem necessary will be defined as
they are introduced. It is, however, important to explain the
orientation adopted. Any attempt at a purely morphological
orientation is impossible so long as homologies with other
Echinodermata remain uncertain. or practical purposes it
is best to consider the adult Crinoid in its natural position,
7. e. with the ventral disk uppermost, and then to view it
from the anal side. The anal interradius will then be Pos-
terior, the radius opposite to it will be Anterior, Left and
Right will correspond with the left and right of the observer.
Viewed from above, with the anterior radius away from the
observer, Right and Left remain the same. ‘To preserve this
orientation when the dorsal cup is viewed from below, the
anterior radius must be nearest to the observer. ‘The accom-
panying Table compares this with the various systems of
nomenclature that are in use; I give Lovén’s ‘ without

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids. 315

prejudice,’ not implying any homology between Hchinozoa
and Pelmatozoa. In his ‘ Challenger’ Reports Dr. Carpen-
ter has spoken of Band C as Right, D and E as Left; but
he agrees with me that the orientation adopted by Wachsmuth
and Springer, which is the one I now follow, is practically
the most convenient for the description of fossil Crinoids.

oH
a) S ee
Sie 5 a8
$ = =
oe e cs . ne
S) oy tS Aaa to?
Te 5 ry _2 oS a0
Se. 5 Orientation here followed. as —=.8
<8 a 53
eg a ass
7a U%qg mM Ss aR 3
O 9-8 |; SR Bo
. Ee = a es HO H
ms on Dk oo,
i Aa E a De? oD)
_ 4 o
A Anterior Radius. Il. N.
A-B Right Anterior Interradius. 3. N.N.E.
B 9 . Radius. IV. N.E.
B-C » Posterior Interradius. 4 E.
|
C > a Radius. V S.E.
C-D Posterior Interradius. 5. Ss.
D Left Posterior Radius. I S.W.
D-E ey Interradius. 1 RE
KE Right Anterior Radius. I, N.W.
E-A - " Interradius. 2. N.N.W,

In using the terms Proximal and Distal I reckon from the
Chambered Organ ; so that the Infrabasals and the top Stem-
ossicle are the proximal elements of Crown and Stem respec.
tively.

DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERS.

Of the many characters in which the genera of the Fistulata
differ from one another, the following have been with justice
considered as of chief importance :—

t ~~“
(als

316 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds.

A. The Base: whether Dicyclic or Monocyclic ; if the former,
whether the Infrabasals are 5 or 3 in number.

B. The Anal Area of the Dorsal Cup: the number of plates,
from 0 to 3 or possibly more, that are included; the
relations of those plates to one another and to the adjoin-
ing plates.

C. The Arms: whether simple, dichotomously branching, or
with lateral armlets; whether pinnules are present or
absent.

D. The Mode of Union between Plates and Ossicles : whether

Syzygy, Close Suture, Loose Suture, or Muscular Arti-
culation prevails.

In attempting to construct a natural classification care must
be taken not to fix on any one character to the exclusion of
others; since, however, it would be impracticable to discuss
all the above points at once I shall proceed to deal with them
in the order just indicated.

A. The Base.

Our views as to the difference between Monocyclic and
Dicyclic forms have of late undergone considerable change,
chiefly owing to the discovery of minute infrabasals in either

the embryonic stages or the adult of many forms previously
~ supposed to be without them *. At the same time these dis-
coveries have confirmed the rule laid down by Wachsmuth
and Springer :—that where infrabasals are present the angles
of the column are interradial and the sides of the column,
the lobes of the axial canal, and the cirri are radial; but
that where infrabasals are absent these conditions are re-
versed t. While therefore many forms turn out to be Pseudo-
Monocyclica, the distinction between true Monocyclica and
Dicyclica is if anything strengthened.

To turn to the Fistulata. In the Hybocrinide no infra-
basals have been observed; but Wachsmuth and Springer
suggest (Rev. I. (74) Proc. 1879, p. 297) that those plates
are ‘probably rudimentary,” and, as the simplicity of the
column precludes definite proof, we may have to consider the

* See especially H. Bury, “The Early Stages in the Development of
Antedon rosacea,’ Phil Trans. clxxix. B (1888), pp. 257-801, London,

1889, Infrabasals on pp. 270-271, 288-289, pl. xlvi. fig. 46, pl. xlvii.
figs. 48, 52, 53. ; , »
t+ See this rule more fully stated in their paper “ Discovery of the

Ventral Structure of Tavocrinus &c.,” Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia,
1888, p. 35],

My. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds. 317

family as pseudomonocyclic. The Heterocrinide, Anomalo-
crinide, and Belemnocrinide are all truly monocyclic; while
the remaining Fistulata are undoubtedly dicyclic. Is this
fact alone enough to warrant a separation into two groups ?

This question involves two others. First; can one group
be derived from the other? Second; if so, which group is
ancestral? Let me repeat that this is not a question of the
origin of Pseudomonocyclica, for they, it is obvious, are
derived from Dicyclica; but it is a question of the relations
between Dicyclica and Monocyclica Vera.

It has hitherto been generally supposed that the Mono-
cyclic stage is the older of the two. No particular reasons
have been given for this opinion beyond the natural one that
a dorsal cup formed of two circlets only is simpler than one
formed of three. Such an argument however, unless sup-
ported by Paleontology or Embryology, really begs the
question; the hoof of Hquus caballus is from one point of
view simpler than the 5-toed foot of Phenacodus, but it is
not simpler when origins are considered. Those who take
the Monocyclic type to be the older may suppose that infra-
basals were subsequently developed as a new and sudden
accession to the elements of the dorsal cup. ‘This idea again
has the merit of simplicity, but it overlooks the difficulty of a
change in the orientation of the stem. It is true that in the
species of Antedon described by Mr. Bury the infrabasals
appear after the basals; but Antedon is so specialized a form,
and the infrabasals are in so extremely degenerate a state,
that no morphologist could attach any importance to this fact.
Should the monocyclic base of the Inadunata Larviformia,
which Wachsmuth and Springer regard as more ancestral
than the Fistulata, be adduced in favour of this view, it would
be enough to point out that, with the exception of the very
irregular Pisocrinus (Wenlock and Niagara), they have not
been found below the Devonian. Dr. J. Walther *, who
likewise derives Dicyclica from Monocyclica, is forced by diffi-
culties of orientation to homologize Monocyclic basals with
Dicyclic infrabasals, and Monocyelic radials with Dicyclic
basals, while he regards the radials of Dicyclica as an entirely
new element in the dorsal cup. This view implies that the
arms, the anus, and the elements of the tegmen have turned
through an angle of 36°: a comparison of /ocrinus and Mero-~
crinus (Plate XIV. figs. 5 & 11) shows the extreme difficulty
of accepting such a reversal of our accepted homologies. It 1s
just to Dr. Walther to remember that his very suggestive

* “Untersuchungen iiber den Bau der Crinoiden u.s.w.,” Paleeonto-
graphica, xxxii. pp, 155-200, Stuttgart, 1886,

318 Mr. F, A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds.

paper was published before Mr. Bury’s researches on Antedon ;
had he been acquainted with these, and also better acquainted
with the earlier Paleozoic erinoids, he would hardly have
written as he did.

On the other hand, the tendency of infrabasals to diminish
in size during geological time, in other words the general
change of Dicyclica into Pseudomonocyclica, suggests that
the Dicyclic type is more primitive than the Monocyclic. In
this connexion we may recall Wachsmuth’s statement that
basals and infrabasals seem to be early developed in the
individual, “ for they are as large in the young as in the
adult, and do not show much increase in proportions in later
geological epochs” (Rev. I. (19), Proc. 1879, p. 242). One
might also allude to the stems of some Bohemian Cystidea,
which are composed of alternating circlets of plates as though
developed in extensions of the calyeal perisome. The only
objection to the derivation of Monocyclica, through Pseudo-
monocyclic stages, from Dicyclica, lies in the involved change
of orientation. Here, however, it seems to present less difhi-
culty than on the converse hypothesis. The atrophy of
infrabasals is we see a very gradual process, and, as proved
by specimens of Forbesterénus in the British Museum, it does
actually appear to be in some cases accompanied by a change
in the position of the lobes of the axial canal.

So far as the Fistulata are concerned there is no geological
evidence to show whether Monocyclica, Pseudomonoeyclica,
or Dicyclica be the older. All my contention is that Mono-

cyclic forms may, should other evidence render it probable,
be derived from Dicyclic.

The distinction between an infrabasal ring of 5 plates and
one of 3, is of far inferior importance. It is acknowledged that
3 infrabasals represent the original 5, of which two pair have
fused and the 5th remains as a rule in its pristine condition.
In the Fistulata, as in Antedon, this unaltered infrabasal is
that in the anterior radius ; the fused pairs are therefore those
of the left and right sides respectively. This fusion of infra-
basals may be regarded as a generic character, but nothing
more; for any genus with 5 infrabasals may have its ana-
logue with 3 infrabasals, as, for example, Cyathocrinus has
Gissocrinus. It is fairly obvious that an infrabasal ring of
5 plates is more ancestral than one of 38, and that one small
and two large infrabasals represent a more archaic stage than
do three equal infrabasals. In Stemmatocrinus the infrabasals
are anchylosed into a pentagonal disk, and this is no doubt a

later development. No cases of 4 or 2 infrabasals are known
in the Fistulata.

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds. 319

B. The Anal Plates.

We have now to consider the character that forms the
basis of Wachsmuth and Springer’s classification, viz., the
number and relations of the plates in the posterior inter-
radius. And first it may be pointed out that, as interradials
do not enter iato the composition of the dorsal cap in any
Fistulate, none of these plates can well be the homologues of
interradials: in many of the Camerata actual interradials
are present in the anal area, but in the Fistulata at least we
must look elsewhere for the origin of the so-called ‘ anal”
plates.

Physiologically these plates have a two-fold importance.
Their chief function is to actually support the ventral sac :
in Catdllocrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 29), for example, the “ anal
plate ” ison a level with the arm-joints and supports a single
row of large and heavy plates ; in Joer‘nus (Pl. XLV. fig. 5)
the “anal plate”? merely serves to support a line of stout
plates which form a median ridge to the ventral sac. Their
second function is to increase the space between the right and
left posterior radials, so as to allow room for the free deve-
lopment of the sac: of this Huspdrocrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 17)
and Poteriocrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 26) are good examples. ‘This
physiological aspect of the question is noteworthy, because it
assists our comprehension of the morphological relations of
the plates,

The main types of structure are familiar to all students of
Paleozoic Crinoids ; but for convenience of reference I have
given diagrams of the composition of the dorsal cup in every
genus of the Fistulata (Pl. XIV.). These diagrams, which
are compiled from the best authorities and verified when
possible by reference to actual specimens, will also serve to
draw attention from the confused masses of verbiage that
have somewhat obscured the subject, and to concentrate it on
the facts themselves. ‘To further dispel prejudice, the plates
as to which any doubt exists are, in the main diagrams, left
unlettered ; but they are repeated alongside with the various
interpretations that have been or that may be placed upon
them. The more important variations are those presented by
Hoplocrinus (1 & 2), Hybocrinus (3), Baerocrinus (4),
Tocrinus (5), Heterocrinus (6), Dendrocrinus (15), Homo-
crinus (16), Cyathocrinus (20), Poteriocrinus (26), Botryo-
ertnus (30), and Ceriocrinus (38); and I would request any
not already well acquainted with the structure of those genera
to study the diagrams of them before proceeding.

Fluctuations of opinion have rendered this subject so per-

320 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids.

plexing that it will be well to give a short historical sketch
of the views of the leading authorities.

In 1879 Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer (Rev. I. (71-72)
and footnote, Proc. pp. 294, 295) noting that Hall had wrongly
described the ventral sac of Jocrinus polyxo as an arm, wrote:
‘“‘the similarity in the appearance of the ventral sac and the
arms and pinnule is indeed most striking. If there is in
nature any such thing as a transmutation of one organ into
another, it would seem that such was the case here, and this
may lead to a better understanding of the functions of the
ventral sac’; and again (Rev. I. (65), Proc. 1873, p. 288)
‘was not the ventral tube here [in Jocrinus], and in Crinoids
generally, originally a modified arm? This, if true, would
at once explain why the anal area leans always towards the
right and never to the left side of the body.” ocrinus
(Pl. XIV. fig. 5) then was taken by them as the starting-point :
the axillary plate that supports on the left the ventral sac
and on the right an arm, was regarded as a costal with inter-
radial functions, and the plate on which it rests as a radial
homologous with the other radials of the dorsal cup. In
Dendrocrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 15) the right posterior radial was
supposed to have split transversely into two plates (R and
R+), both ‘strictly radial” and “homologous with the
single radial in other Cyathocrinide.” The plate (x) that
in focrinus was supported by a costal, has here passed down
into the dorsal cup and is “aregular anal plate.” In Homo-
ertnus (Pl. XLV. fig 16) “the suture between the sections of
the compound plate (R and R+) is sloping instead of hori-
zontal” and “by this trifling alteration”? R+ is “ trans-
formed into an anal plate.” “ This was the first step towards
a Poteriocrinus anal arrangement, and in fact to complete it
required only the interposition of a third small plate,” 7. e.
a plate (¢) of the ventral tube, to come down between x and R
(PI. XIV. fig. 26). Cyathocrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 20) arose from
Dendrocrinus by ‘the consolidation of the compound plate
into one,” ¢. e. N+ is rejoined to R, but occasionally remains
as in Botryocrinus and Barycrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 30). Simi-
larly in feterocrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 6), which then included
Ectenocrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 7), Wachsmuth and Springer re-
garded K+ as the lower part of a compound radial; the two
plates that occur in the right posterior and right and left
anterior radii were considered homologous with a complete
single radial. So far, whether correct or not, they were con-
sistent : but in Hybocrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 3) they regarded the
large plate, which exactly corresponds in position to R+ of
Homocrinus, as an anal plate pure and simple homologous

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds. 321

with x. They admitted indeed that the small right posterior
radial only equalled the upper half of the radial (R) of Den-
drocrinus, but the lower half (R+) appeared to them to be
absent, ‘‘ though perhaps represented in a portion of the large
undivided anal plate.” This view again may or may not
have been correct, but it was hardly consistent with their
explanation of the other forms. Nothing was said about the
homologies of the anal plates in Hoplocrinus and Baerocrinus,
with which genera Wachsmuth and Springer were then
unacquainted.

In 1882, Dr. P. H. Carpenter published an important
paper ‘ On the relation of Hybocrinus, Baerocrinus, and [Hybo-
cystites.” (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. no. 151, vol. xxxviil.
pp- 298-312, pl. xi. London, Aug. 1882.] Under the name
Hybocrinus, Carpenter then included the American genus
Hybocrinus of Billings and the European Hoplocrinus of
Grewingk ; I here follow Wachsmuth and Springer in main-
taining the distinctness of the two genera. In this paper while
“concurring in the views of Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer
respecting the mutual relations of Hybocrinus, Homocrinus,
and Dendrocrinus,’ Dr. Carpenter is ‘ not altogether in
accordance with them as to the relations of these three types
to Jovrinus.” He “cannot follow their comparison of” the
dorsal cup of Loerinus “ with Dendrocrinus.”’ This indeed is
obvious, for he misquotes their comparison, and states that
Wachsmuth and Springer homologize the lower half of the
compound radial in Dendrocrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 15, R+) with
the upper axillary plate in Jocrinus (Pl. XLV. tig. 5,C). The
learned Americans are not, it is true, always easy to under-
stand, but it is hardly fair to suppose that they talk nonsense.
This incomprehensible fiction, however, appears to be the
reason why Dr. Carpenter “ cannot follow these authors in
regarding Jocrinus as the starting-point from which the de-
velopment of the anal plates may be traced from one genus
of the Cyathocrinide [=F istulata] to another.” ‘ Viewed
in a purely embryological aspect, Cyathocrinus or a Dendro-
erinoid form with the two halves of the ‘compound radial?
[R and R+] united, is a lower type than Jocrinus. For the
continuous line of the radials is broken into by the anal plate
[ x ], which is in direct contact with a basal, as in the early
Pentacrinoid.” This argument assumes, rightly or wrongly,
that the anal plate x is homologous with the anal of the
Antedon-larva. Further, Dr. Carpenter sees the inconsistency
of Wachsmuth and Springer’s attitude towards Hybocrinus,
and prefers to homologize the whole of the large “ anal”
plate in that genus with the lower part of the compound

322 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids.

radial of Dendrocrinus: he regards it as a modified radial,
the arm-bearing portion of which has been cut off,” and he
names it the “ azygos’”’ plate. In LHoplocrinus too he thinks
that “the azygos plate is fundamentally a modified radial
belonging to the right posterior ray,” though here “ that the
anal [x] and azygos [R+] plates may have fused is pos-
sible enough.”

In 1883 Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer continued the
discussion in a paper ‘on Hybocrinus, Hoplocrinus, and
Baerocrinus”” (Amer. Journ. xxvi. 3865-377, Newhaven,
Noy. 1883), where they laid the foundation of their present
views. In this paper they accepted P. H. Carpenter’s homo-
logy of the large “ anal” plate of Hybocrinus with the lower
half of the radial in Dendrocrinus (R+), and they adopted
for it his term “azygos.” At the same time, whether in
consequence of Carpenter’s criticism or not, they executed a
complete volte-face on the subject of Locrinus, ‘They curi-
ously misquote Carpenter as having suggested that the
axillary plate of Joerinus was an “ azygos”’ plate, whereas
he distinctly admitted it to be a “ brachial,” 7@. e. costal.
Instead they ‘insist that it is the equivalent of the combined
small radial [R] and small anal plate [x] in Hybocrinus,
and that the large plate underneath, which both Carpenter
and [Wachsmuth and Springer] took to bea radial, is an
azygos plate.”” They now take Baerocrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 4)
as starting-point, and regard it as having only four radials
and ‘a large undivided azygous plate of similar form.”
This plate Carpenter had regarded as a radial; but Wach-
smuth and Springer consider that the plate which in other
genera represents the right posterior radial is not here deve-
loped. In Hoploerinus the right posterior radial is again
developed (Pl. XIV. fig. 2); it gradually absorbs the right
upper corner of the “ azygos” plate (Pl. XIV. fig. 1), until,
in Hyboerinus, it attains somewhat more the shape of an
ordinary radial (Pl. XIV. fig. 3). In LHybocrinus “ the
upper left corner of the azygous plate has become divided off
into a special anal plate.” Jocrinus (fig. 5), Dendrocrinus
(fig. 15), Homocrinus (fig. 16), and Botryocrinus (fig. 30)
are regarded as a series in which “ the posterior radial grows
larger by absorbing more and more the azygous plate,” until
in Cyathocrinus (fig. 20) it has disappeared. In this paper
then the authors consider the “ azygos” plate to be an inde-
pendent morphological element of the dorsal cup, not a modi-
fied radial ; e. g. the two plates in the right posterior radius
ot Dendrocrinus do not represent a compound radial: and
they have given up the idea that the ventral sac is developed

Mr, FE. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds. Bes5

from an arm. As to the homologies with Antedon-larva,
they differ from P. H. Carpenter, for they write: ‘ The
different phases in the Paleontological development of the
azygous side... . . resemble most remarkably the stages
of growth in the anal arrangement of Antedon.... Ata
time when even the radials were yet imperfectly developed,
we find in both forms a large anal (azygous) plate (Baero-
crinus), Which is lifted out from between the radials (/ybo-
crinus) and becomes developed into a conspicuous funnel (the
later Cyathocrinide), until at the termination of Pentacrinoid
life and the close of the Carboniferous, the anal plate disap-
pears entirely [Hrisocrinus (39)].” “. . . The ‘anal’ plate
of the young Antedon is not the homologue of the. .....
especialy ianal plate: [x |, but 22 0)2. of the undivided
azygous plate in Baerecrinus and Hoplocrinus [Az] .....
The special anal plate in //ybocrinus is the first step towards
a plated tube.”

In 1885 Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer [Rev. III.
Section 1 (11, 12, & 40), Proc. 1885, pp. 233, 234 & 262]
substantially repeat their 1883 hypothesis, with, however, the
following important additions and alterations. The lower
segments of the compound radials, where such occur, were
probably embryonal plates (¢. e. of an ancestral character),
which were absorbed by the upper segments or permanent
radials in the same way as the “ azygos ” and “ anal”’ plates
were absorbed by the right posterior radial. The “azygos”
piece may indeed itself represent one of these lower segments,
viz., that of the right posterior radial; this is well seen in
Anomalocrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 8) and Ketenoerinus (Pl. XIV.
fig. 7). This very slight admission does not really alter
their previous view that the azygos plate was a primitive
fundamental element of the dorsal cup ; for what they give
with the one hand they take away with the other, in that
they make adi the lower radial segments similar primitive
elements. ‘he anal plate (x) and the right posterior radial
are as before supposed to be derived from the azygos. But
they change their ideas as to the “anal” of Antedon-larva.
The azygos plate, they now say, is unrepresented in the
Pentacrinoid ; this is odd, but perhaps it has been over-
looked.

In 1886 Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer re-enforce these
views. [Rev. III. Section 2 (196 & 199), Proc. 1886,
pp. 120 & 123.] The “anal” of Antedon-larva is an
interradial with special function, while the azygos plate is as
much radial as interradial. “ They both agree, however, in
being absorbed by other plates; the azygous plate paleonto-

324 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids.

logically by the right posterior radial and anal plate, the
other in the growing animal over the whole surface.” Their
remarks of three years back on /Tybocrinus are now modified ;
and they show that this genus possessed a true ventral sac,
though a very minute one. ‘This organ is also present in
Flybocystis. It is therefore probable that it was also present
in Hoplocrinus and Baerocrinus, though not preserved in the
few specimens known ; Wachsmuth and Springer do indeed
deny its presence, but, as they do not appear to have seen the
specimens, their mere negative statement is no more than an
opinion. It is unnecessary to give a further analysis of
Wachsmuth and Springer’s views as they at present stand,
for they can be easily gathered from the diagrams. The
most debatable points only have been alluded to, and on
these we may summarize their position as follows :—

(1) Azygos plate (Az) a primitive element of dorsal cup.
(2) Anal (x) and right posterior radial derived from azygos
plate.

(3) Anal of Antedon not homologous with any plate of the
Fistulata but an embryonic interradial.
(4) Stages of evolution are :—
(a) Baerocrinus, 4 Radials and | Azygos (fig. 4).
(b) Hoplocrinus, large Azygos and small right posterior
Radial (figs. 1 & 2).
(c) Hybocrinus, large Azygos, right posterior Radial in-
creasing, and x developed (fig. 3).
(d) Locrinus, Radial growing larger at expense of Azygos,
and here has absorbed x (fig. 5).
(e) Heterocrinus and Ectenocrinus, Azygos diminishing, x
here removed from it (figs. 6 & 7).
(f) Dendrocrinus, Radial still larger, Azygos smaller and
touching x (fig. 15).
(g) Homocrinus, Radial larger, Azygos smaller, x larger
(fig. 16).

Here is a dichotomy; one branch continues :—

(hb) Botryocrinus, Radial nearly normal, Azygos small, x
large (fig. 30).

(i) Cyathocrinus, Radial normal, Azygos entirely absorbed
by Radial, x very large (fig. 20).

(3) aaa the same, but x becoming absorbed

5122).

(k) ann Radial normal, Azygos and x entirely

absorbed (fig. 23).

My. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinovds. 325

The other branch continues :—

(1) Potertocrinus, Radial nearly normal, Azygos and x of
about equal size, a plate of the tube, ¢, sunk into
dorsal cup (fig. 26).

(m) Zeacrinus, Azygos beginning to merge in Radial, x
smaller and ¢ not so low down (fig. 27).

(n) Certocrinus, Azygos and x both absorbed, ¢ alone
remains partly in dorsal cup (fig. 58).

(0) Eritsocrinus, Azygos and x absorbed, ¢ again risen
above limits of dorsal cup (fig. 39).

The later stages from the Homocrinus type downwards, in
either branch, will no doubt be generally accepted ; only in
a few of the details one might prefer a different interpretation.
But as regards the earlier stages and on points 1, 2, and 3, I
have to differ entirely. In fact I would almost assume the
position originally occupied by Messrs. Wachsmuth and
Springer, which, it seems to me, they abandoned for quite
insufficient reasons. But before bringing forward any new
ideas, it will be better to attack those which at present hold
the field.

The history of this controversy is curiously full of mis-
understandings and misrepresentations. I hope that I have
made no such mistakes: I have done my best to avoid them ;
and Dr. Carpenter, who has kindly looked through the MS.
of the present paper, agrees to my account both of his own
paper and, so far as he can judge, of the papers by Messrs.
Wachsmuth and Springer. In the first place Wachsmuth
and Springer turned to the right about in 1883 without
giving any reason, and the only discoverable reason is the
criticism by P. H. Carpenter. But of this criticism half, as
already pointed out, was based on a complete misapprehension
of Wachsmuth and Springer’s views, while the other half
was based on a homology of the Antedon anal that is denied
by Wachsmuth and Springer. The latter anthors have
therefore still to give some reason for their desertion of a
hypothesis that was in its main lines perfectly consistent.

But, taking things as we find them, let us proceed to con-
sider the arguments based on the Antedon-larva. And first,
what is the “anal” of the Pentacrinoid? It is not an inter-
radial; tor the so-called ‘ interradials ’ that some observers
claim to have seen are only perisomic plates of no morpho-
logical importance ; further, it is a most gratuitous assump-
tion to make Antedon the only form with an interradial in
the anal area while devoid of true interradials in the other
interradil. The supposition that the azygos plate exists in

326 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids.

Antedon, but as yet undiscovered, is rendered more untenable
than ever by the fact that the elaborate researches of Mr.
H. Bury (doc. cit.), as well as Barrois, Gétte, and other pre-
vious workers, have failed to indicate any traces of it. At
the same time the “anal” of Antedon is not the Azygos
plate; for not only does it originate on a level with the radials,
but it attains before its disappearance a far higher position
than is attained by the Azygos plate in any fossil form. The
idea of Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer, that this plate is
absorbed by the other plates, is quite unfounded; what Dr.
W. B. Carpenter * wrote was :—‘ The entire plate is re-
moved at once by a continuance of absorption over its whole
surface,” not ‘ over the whole surface.” The only adequate
answer to the question is that given by P. H. Carpenter, viz.,
that the “anal” of the Pentacrinoid is homologous with the
anal x in the adult Paleozoic Fistulata. ‘The positions
which it successively assumes can, as we shall see, only be
explained on this hypothesis. ‘To this answer I only see one
objection; namely, that Antedon and the Fistulata have
always been placed by both Wachsmuth and Springer and
P. H. Carpenter in different “ independent primary divisions ”
of the Crinoidea, and still are so placed}. But with this
objection I must leave Dr. Carpenter himself to deal.
Secondly, whether this homology be granted or not, what
light, on the assumption that ontogeny reproduces phylogeny,
can a recent Antedon possibly throw on the ancestral condi-
tions of Silurian Fistulata? Let us overlook the objection
just mentioned, and let us suppose that Antedon is, atter all,
lineally descended from the Fistulata through either Agassiz-
ocrinus or the later Poteriocrinide—even then what does it
tellus? It merely passes through the stages that are repre-
sented in the paleontological (7. e. the phylogenetic) series by
Ceriocrinus, Hrisocrinus, and Stemmatocrinus. In fact it
hardly takes us back to the middle of the Carboniferous, cer-
tainly not to the Ordovician and Silurian genera. Conse-
quently Dr. Carpenter’s conclusion that “ Cyathocrinus, or a
Dendrocrinoid form with the two halves of the compound
radial united, is a lower type than Jocrinus” falls to the
ground. Under any circumstances his argument would prove
Certocrinus and Graphiocrinus earlier than Zeocrinus or even
Heterocrinus—a sufticient reductio ad absurdum.

* “ Researches on the structure &c. of Antedon &c.” Phil. Trans.
vol. elvi. p. 747, London, 1866.

+ P. H.C. in Nicholson and Lydekker’s ‘Manual of Paleontology,’
i. p. 445, 1890. ;

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids. 324

The first point of Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer, that
the Azygos plate is a primitive element of the dorsal cup,
rests on two assumptions. first, that Baerocrinus has only
four radials and that the fifth plate is the azygos plate. In
any case Baerocrinus is an abnormal form, but I fail to see
that it becomes any more normal by this explanation. As
there are two plates in the dorsal cup, neither arm-bearing,
but each like the other and both in all other respects like the
three radials, there is no conceivable reason why one should
be called a Radial and the other an Azygos plate; except
indeed the reason. that Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer’s
hypothesis would not otherwise hold water. ‘The second
assumption is that the lower halves of certain radials are
embryonic plates. The dorsal cup of the early Pelmatozoa
may no doubt have contained more plates than the fixed
number of the Fistulata: but these plates, if any of them re-
mained, would, as in Acrocrinus, alternate with the rest, and
would probably be below the basals. On the other hand the
compound radials of //eterocrinus and similar forms simply
resemble an ordinary radial horizontally bisected, and as such
they have been regarded by all other authors. Possibly the
object of this structure was to give greater flexibility to a cup
in which the more movable forms of joint were as yet un-
developed. At any rate, since the azygos plate is admitted
to be the homologue of these lower segments of the radials
there can be no adequate reason for regarding it as a primitive
element of the dorsal cup.

Let us now consider the second point, viz., the derivation
of the anal x and right posterior radial from the azygos
plate Az. In the first place I fail to understand what Messrs.
Wachsmuth and Springer mean by one plate absorbing
another. A plate may be absorbed by the general tissues of
the body in the individual, or it may be developed to a less
extent in a line of descendants; at the same time other plates
may increase in size and may ultimately occupy the room of
the former: but to say that these plates absorb the other is
either an incorrect or an unscientific statement. The deriva-
tion of the right posterior radial from Az cannot therefore be
by any process of absorption ; although it might, as P. H.
Carpenter has suggested, make its first appearance as a small
arm-bearing portion cut off from Az. But why should this
be the origin of the right posterior radial alone? Why
should not the upper radials of Heterocrinus, Ectenocrinus,
and Anomalocrinus be similarly derived from the lower
radials ? This then is not only an assumption, but an incon-
sistent one. Similarly the derivation of x from Az is an

328 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids.

assumption, and one that does not harmonize with the facts ;
for the two plates are widely separated in such early forms
as Ectenocrinus, Anomalocrinus, and probably in Heterocrinus,
Tocrinus, and Merocrinus. It may indeed have been this
obvious objection that made Wachsmuth and Springer main-
tain that the axillary plate of Zocrinus consisted of R and x
fused. ‘This supposition, however, for which no other reason
can be found, would lead to an inconsistency of a different
kind. Inno other genus of the Fistulata does the plate x
support the ensuing plate (¢) of the ventral tube on its left
side: this fact was well known to Messrs. Wachsmuth and
Springer in 1879, but they seem to have overlooked it in
1886.

Finally, the earlier stages of the evolution as set forth by
Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer entirely depend on the
foregoing assumptions, to which such exception can be taken.
And not only this, but they derive Dicyclica from Mono-
cyclica and these again from Pseudomonocyclica. And again,
starting from forms without pinnules, they pass through
forms with pinnules back to forms without pinnules, and then
to forms with pinnules again: this would have been all very
well in 1879, but is totally inconsistent with the importance
they attach to pinnules in 1886, when separating the Cyatho-
crinide from the Poteriocrinide.

What then are the true homologies and relations of the
plates of the anal area? The so-called “ azygos” plate
I follow P. H. Carpenter in regarding as primitively the
lower portion of the right posterior radial. Really there is
little choice in the matter. Hveryone is agreed as to which
plate is the azygos in the various genera, and it is always
found adjoining the right posterior radial. In the majority
of the earlier forms it occupies a position immediately below
the radial, e. g. Jocrinus (5), Heterocrinus (6), Hctenocrinus
(7), Anomalocrinus (8), Merocrinus (11), Dendrocrinus (15),
and in three of them it is exactly paralleled by other radial
segments. It is hard to imagine that it began at one side of
the radial in a few confessedly abnormal forms, that it sud-
denly found its way to a situation beneath the radial, and
that it slowly worked its way back to its former position.
Holding then the view that this plate is morphologically a
radial element, I regret that the name “ azygos” should ever
have been applied to it. Words, we know, have a powerful,
though often unconscious, influence on thought, and it occurs
to me that the selection of this word by Dr. Carpenter led
Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer to their idea that it was
a primitive independent element of the dorsal cup. Dr. Car-

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinords. 329

penter tells me that he followed E. Billings; but a reference
to Billings * shows that he spoke quite correctly of “ azygos
interradials ” or more correctly still “the plates of the
azygos interradius.” With equal correctness one may speak
of an “ azygos radial” ; but the plate in question although
originally a radial is certainly not the azygos radial,
for that is in, the anterior radius. I shall therefore drop
the term “azygos” as either meaningless or misleading,
and shall call the plate the ‘ Radianal”: this name
should satisfy those who regard the radial as derived from
the radianal, no less than those who prefer with me to
follow Carpenter. In the diagram and formule I shall
designate it R’ instead of Az.

The next plate to be considered is the ‘special anal”
plate, hitherto designated x ; I shall retain this sign as
appropriately suggestive. Now, taken as proven the correct-
ness of Carpenter’s views as to the radianal, we shall incline
to regard those forms as primitive in which the radianal is
more of a radial and less of an anal, in which it is not in an
asymmetrical position but corresponds to the other lower radial
plates. Such forms are Jocrinus (5), Heterocrinus (6),
Ectenocrinus (7), Anomalocrinus (8), and Merocrinus (11).
Now in all these forms x is supported by R and does not
touch R’. Obviously then x is not derived from R/, but
originates above R, and on its left side. By parity of
reasoning we assume the next stage to be represented in such
forms as [Hybocrinus (?) (3), Ottawacrinus (12), Dendrocrinus
(15), and Homocrinus (16), since in them R’ is rather more
asymmetrical. In these x has passed down from above R
and now rests with its lower half between the right and left
posterior radials, being supported partly by R’ and partly by
the basal. Carabocrinus (13), Botryocrinus (30), and similar
forms are, as all acknowledge, the next stages in the shifting
of the radianal; in these x has sunk still lower into the
dorsal cup and is now entirely in a line with the radials. The
great increase in size of X in some of the Botryocrinites and
Cyathocrinites does away with the need for a radianal, and it
consequently disappears ; this does not affect the argument.
In Parisocrinus (25) and Kuspirocrinus (17) among pinnule-
less forms, and in the Poteriocrinites (26, 27), another change
has taken place ; the radianal has passed through a revolution
of 90°, and the lowest plate of the ventral sac (¢) has sunk
down between R and x. Further than this it is needless to
follow the process; this is enough to show that the course of

* ‘On the Crinoidez of the Lower Silurian Rocks of Canada, Canadian
Organic Remains,’ Decade iv. pp. 23-24 et passim, Montreal, 1859,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 24

330 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids.

evolution has been a gradual sinking of the plates supporting
the ventral sac into the dorsal cup. It is therefore perfectly
logical to conclude that the original position of x was, where
we see it in Zocrinus and Merocrinus, resting on the left upper
slope of either the right posterior radial or its costal. To
these earlier forms then we must turn to discover its homo-
logies, and we immediately see that in size and position it is
just like the adjacent arm-plate. Further the series of ossicles
that follows it in many forms can hardly be distinguished
from a brachial series; e. g. Jocrinus, Merocrinus, Heterocrinus.
This view is confirmed by the evolution of the Calceocrinide
as gathered from a recent paper by Dr. Eugene N.S. Ringue-
berg* ; in this family the earliest genus Castocrinus (Pl. XIV.
fig. 9) shows a series of anal plates supported by the first costal
of the left posterior radius, which is exactly comparable to the
arm-bearing costal of the right posterior radius ; Proclivo-
erinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 10) shows the intermediate stage between
this and Calceocrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 19). There can be little
doubt that there is here presented the whole process of the
transformation of an arm into a support for the ventral sac ;
the ancestor of Castocr’nus must have had simply 5arms._ It
will be noticed that in Castocrinus the anal plates arise from
the left posterior arm and not from the right (I have assumed
that Dr. Ringueberg’s figures are not reversed, in the text he
makes no mention of “right” or “ left’), consequently I
merely adduce the case to show the possibility of the process
and the tendency of the Fistulata to accomplish it, if not by
one means, then by another. To the exact homologies of the
plates in the Calceocrinide I shall return when dealing with
that family ; I agree with Dr. Ringueberg in his rejection of
Wachsmuth and Springer’s nomenclature, but differ from
him on a few points (see Pl. XIV. figs. 9,.10, 19). My con-
clusion therefore is that x originated as a plate morpholo-
gically corresponding to an ordinary brachial; and, for this
reason, | propose to distinguish it as the “ Brachianal.”

The Brachianal and the Radianal are not only morpholo-
gically distinct, but they were evolved in fulfilment of distinct
physiological aims. Their differing functions have already
been alluded to; the brachianal primitively serves to support
the ventral sac, while the radianal serves to enlarge the space
between the right and left posterior radii. Of course the
radianal does come to share in the support of the sac, when
¢ sinks down on to its summit; while the brachianal, as it
sinks and widens, does its part in enlarging the anal area.

* “The Calceocrinidee &e.,” Ann. N. York Acad. Sci. vol. iv., Article
xvii. plates x. and xi, 1889.

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinovds. Bei

But in the beginning, physiologically no less than morpho-
logically, the two plates were distinct.

It will be observed that the position now taken with regard
to the brachianal is not precisely that held by Messrs. Wachs-
muth and Springer in 1879. They then inclined to regard
the whole ventral sac as a metamorphosed arm, and, oblivious
of the fact that, Jocrinus possessed no pinnules, they compared
the structure in that genus to a series of brachials supporting
coalesced pinnules. ‘This view is as unnecessary as it is un-
tenable. The brachianal itself and the plates that follow it
in regular series, which may be called 2nd, 3rd, &c. brachi-
anals, are indeed to be regarded as brachials; but the remain-
ing plates of the sac are nothing more than plates deposited
in an extension of the ventral perisome. Such an extension
of the ventral perisome up an arm is no uncommon thing in
Paleozoic Crinoids; Onychocrinus is especially characterized
by it, while in the Fistulata it is well shown by the common
Botryocrinus of Dudley. Even more to the point is Angelin’s
description of Cyathocrinus (= Gnorimocrinus) tinterbrachia-
tus * :—“ Basis tubi ventralis cum brachio connata,” and the
accompanying illustration.

What light the foregoing explanation of the anals of the
Fistulata may throw upon the anal plates of Crinoidea in
other suborders cannot here be considered. There is no doubt
something to be said for applying it to the Ichthyocrinide,
while in Thaumatocrinus the peculiar anal appendage may
represent a series of brachianals that have lost their con-
nexion with the anal tube. But in these forms the presence
of interradials complicates the problem. Often too has the
anal series of Reteocrinus and allied genera been compared to
a 6th arm; but even accepting that view there would be no
actual homology between brachianals derived from the right
posterior radius, and brachianals derived from a posterior
radius unrepresented in the Fistulata. Until then I have
carefully examined all the variations of the anal area pre-
sented by other Crinoids I can express no opinion on. this
matter. My present business is with the classification of
the Fistulata.

* §Tconoeraphia Crinoideorum,’ p, 23, pl. xxix. fig. 78.
fo) 2 ) Lo)

24%

332

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds.

INDEX TO GENERA.

N.B.—The numbers refer primarily to the figures on the Plate, but
when the name itself does not occur on the Plate, then the number refers

to the note on the figure.

The more prominent synonyms are given,

Many genera that have been reckoned as Fistulata are now referred else-

where.
Achradocrinus ........

ANCASSIZOCHINUS ae erreurs
Ampheristocrinus..........
PNMOMTMEVO OUT) 5 66600000600
Arachnocrinus ........ Tank

Astylocrinus, #0m., syn. of
Agassizocrinus.

Ataxocrinus, Lyon, syn. of
Anomalocrinus,

WAtGeleStOCrIMUS 4a eee ces
IBEKeGHINER! GSoogouudcsdcs-
BaryerinWs a).icehey)Giniaw ses

Belemnocrinus .......
BOM YOCHIMNUG tre eri oie <r
Bursacrinus essere oie
Calathocrinus, v. Meyer non
Hall, ? syn. of Encrinus.
Calceocrinus ... :
Carabocrinus..... eet
Cassianocrinus, Laube, syn.
of Encrinus.
@astocrimusi i. .ieeee
CatillocumuSyseses se oc.
Seriocrinus, White non Kénig. 3
Cheirocrinus, Salter MS., syn.
of Caleeocrinus.
Chelocrinus, v. Meyer, syn. of
Enerinus.
Closteroerinus .......
@odiacrimus’ 2.2.4...
@oshocrmius) ses ee eee
Cremacrinus, Ur ich, ‘sy n, of
Calceocrinus.
Cromyocrinus 226) ds nee
Oy athocrmussecicin cau aes
Cyrtidocrmus(.) = sab sees a6
Dactylocrinus, Sladen non
Quenst.,syn.of Scytalecrinus.
Dadocrinus ‘
Decadocnmusssseeee eee
Deltacrinus, Ulr ich, syn. kor
Caleeocrinus.
Mendrocrinus. «eee
Ectenocrinus .
Edriocrinus .
Enerinus
IDINSOCMINE, Genoosacooccce
Eucheirocrinus, M7. § W. + SY
of Calceocrinns.
Kupachycrinus . .
Euspirocrinus ..
Flabellocrinus, Klipst.,
Encrinus.
(Cssoerinus

oe eee

syn, of

By
o

Halysiocrinus, Ulrich, ? syn.
of Calceocrinus.
Herpetocrinus .:.... .. sss set
EHeterocrinus, 2iall, % cna)
Tleterocrinus, W.§ S., syn. of
Hetenocrinus.
Holocrinus... .6).. 4 eee
Homocrinus «.. . 2. :i cis eee
Hoplocrinus,, < ww. nceneeielne

Elyboerimus” 27.0.5 aie
Hybocystis. 25 <cthien Gace ene
Hydreionocrinus .......... 26
Hydriocrinus, Tr d., syn, of
Scaphiocrinus.

ELypocrinus: 7). oleae serene
TOCrinUS 34:5 5% «cars hee
Lecythiocrinusi. ....0taeeees
Lecythocrmus «45. eae

Menocrinus, S.A. Miller, syn.
of Lecythiocrinus.
Merocrinus.. 2.» 2.2.5 wantermelen
Myeocrinus 4... +.) .-s meee
Myelodactylus, Hall, syn. of
Hlerpetocrinus.
Nematocrinus, MW. § W., syn. of
Catillocrinus.
Ohiocrinus (0.5.60 sce ee
Oncoerinus:. : 0... sie Rie
Ophiocrinus, .dng., syn. of
Streptocrinus,
Ottawacrinus: ..... asec
Pachylocrinus, W. § S., syn.
of Woodocrinus.
Paleocrinus, #. Bill., syn. of
Cyathocrinus.
Parisocrinus .... ecanebienee
Pendulocrinus, Austin MS,
syn. of Calceocrinus.
Phialocrinus .....
Philoerimus! i.) aeuele 26
Poteriocrinus../.. «0c eee
Proclivocrinus ....0.secemeeeee
Scaphiocrinus’. .). 2. seca
Seytalecrinus...55 .seadeeemeo

SICVOCTINUS < . «inset
Sphierocrinus ...s.. fee
Stemmatocrinus .......... 90

Stenocrinus, JV. & S., syn. of
Tleterocrinus.
Streptocrinus........ Pasi P40)
Synyphocrinus -.. .).c same
Tibrachiocnnus! +. seo
Vasocrinus. 2... .0 ane eo
Woodocrinus. . 26

Zeacrinus .. 27

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids. 333

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV.

(Illustrating the structure of the Dorsal Cup in the genera of
Fistulate Crinoids.)

With the exception of the bottom line the figures follow each other in
four vertical rows; three fourths of the bottom line is occupied by the
Calceocrinidee and Catillocrinide. Each row again is divided into five
vertical columns: the first column on the left contains the simple generic
diagrams; the circlets of radials, basals, &c. are indicated by letters placed
on the left, and in some cases where any doubt might arise letters are
inserted in other positions, but this is only done where all writers are
agreed as to the homologies and the anal plates are never lettered : the
next four columns contain diagrams of the anal plates and the posterior
radial; these are lettered in accordance with the different views as to
their significance. The second column contains the views of Wachsmuth
and Springer in 1879 (figs. 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16, 17, 25), the third column
those of P. H. Carpenter in 1882 (figs. 1, 2, 8, 4, 5, 15). The views which
these authors then held as to other genera were not definitely expressed by
them, but they may easily be inferred from those that are given. The
fourth column gives the latest views of Wachsmuth and Springer (1886),
which it is presumed they still hold (all figs. except 9, 10, 12, 14, 19, 28,
29,31). In the fifth column are indicated the views that seem to me
more probable.

In each generic diagram the Left Anterior Interradius is on the ex-
treme left and the Anterior Radius is on the extreme right: thus the
position of the Posterior or Anal Interradius is always the same.

Explanation of the Lettering.

1B. Infra-basal. functions, P. H.C.; Radianal,
B. Basal. AGB:
R. Radial. Az, Azygos, W.&8.
C. Costal or Brachial. x. Special anal plate, W.&8.;
Rx. Lower half of a_ bisected Brachianal, F. A. B.

Radial. t. First plate of tube, W. &8.;
kh’. A Rx that has assumed anal Second Brachianal, F, A. B.

Notes on the Figures.

1. Hoplocrinus dipentas. The type specimen differs in its anal area from
the variety shown in fig. 2. The specific name is given here, as
in all cases where the generic diagram has been taken from one
species more than another.

3. Hybocrinus. Hybocystis is of essentially similar structure in the anal
area.

4, Baerocrinus. The cracked lower right-hand corner of the £. post.
Radial has been with insufficient reason regarded as an anal
opening.

6. Heterocrinus. This=Stenocrinus of W. & S.,a genus founded on the
type species of Heterocrinus, H. heterodactylus. Ohiocrinus is
of essentially similar structure in the anal area.

. Ectenocrinus of S. A. Miller=Heterocrinus of W. & 8S. Type is
Heterocrinus simplex, Hall. Herpetoerinus appears to be closely
allied to this, but structure is uncertain.

W. & 8. have as yet had no opportunity

ba I

9, Castocrinus, Ringueberg. of expressing their opinion on these
10, Proclivocrinus, Ringueberg. forms, which are alone enough to

upset their published views.

334 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds.

39.

Ottawacrinus. The view of Mr. Walter Billings may be correct, but
mine is far simpler and equally probable.

Carabocrinus. Suppl=a supplementary radianal or basal.

Thenarocrinus callipyge. Both genusand species are as yet undescribed,
so that no opinions have been expressed; the genus can be
recognized from the figure but not the species. I have, how-
ever, given the proposed specific name of the type for reasons
indicated under (1).

Euspirocrinus. Closterocrinus, Hall, is very doubtful but probably
allied to this.

Cyathocrinus. Spherocrinus, if it be an independent genus at all,
Streptocrinus (W. & 8.=Ophiocrinus, Angelin), and Arachno-
erinus have the same structure in the anal area.

Gissocrinus, Lecythocrinus, Miiller em, Zittel, appears to resemble
this in dorsal cup.

. Achradocrinus. Hypocrinus Schneidert, Beyrich (“ Ueber eine
Y ’ J

Kohlenkalk-Fauna von Timor,” Phys. Abh, d. k. Ak. d. Wiss.
Berlin, 1864, pp. 83-84, pl. ii. figs. 16 a, b,c), appears to differ
from this only in having 3 1B instead of 5.

Codiacrinus, The * marks the posterior interradius, and position of
x. Lecythiocrinus, White, is of the same structure, and is pro-
bably a synonym.

Belemnocrinus, Holocrinus resembles this, but no anal plate has been
oe It was probably present in youth and atrophied in
adult.

3. Poteriocrinus. The genera Scaphiocrinus, Scytalecrinus, Decado-

erinus, Woodocrinus, Celiocrinus, and Hydreionocrinus, while
differing in arm-structure and general form, have all a similar
structure in the anal area. Phlocrinus, de Kon., is probably a
Woodocrinus.

Zeacrinus only differs slightly from Woodocrinus; the depression of
the dorsal cup produces a more curved outline of the anal plates.

Mycocrinus. The grooves at the top are where the arms articulate.

Botryocrinus. Barycrinus, Vasocrinus, and Stcyocrinus have a similar
structure in the anal area. In a few species the Radianal is
very smali and may even become obsolete.

Oncocrinus bucephalus. See remarks on (14). Cyrtidocrinus, Ange-
lin, is very doubtful, but seems like this.

Cromyocrinus. The unstalked Ayassizocrinus has a similar arrange-
ment of anal plates. In Edriocrinus there are no IB; B are
anchylosed; x in line with R but narrower, supports a small
plate ; ventral sac unknown.

Graphiocrinus, In Bursacrinus the Brachianal extends as in Phiulo-
erinus, Trautschold non Eichwald (37), to the lower portion of
the costals. Synyphocrinus, Trautschold, is in W. & 8.’s opinion
a synonym of Bursacrinus.

Lriso rinus, Stemmatocrinus only differs in that its IB are anchy-
losed into a single plate. Lncrinws and Dadocrinus have as yet
shown no trace of any anal plate ; in other respects their dorsal
cup resembles that of Lv isocrinus,

Miss Ei. M. Sharpe on new Hast-African Butterflies. 335

XLIV.—Descriptions of new Species of East-African
Butterflies. By Emity Mary SHARPE.

Miss JACKSON has entrusted to me for description some
specimens of butterflies recently collected by her brother,
Mr. F. J. Jackson, the well-known African explorer, During
the journey which Mr. Jackson has recently made, as leader
of the first caravan sent by the British Kast-African Company
into the interior, he obtained a considerable number of Lepi-
doptera, which he will fully describe on his return to England,
but meanwhile, by the desire of his sisters, I describe some
of the novelties.

Mr. Jackson’s collection was principally made in the
Ukambani country, and as he is now in the Victoria Nyanza
district we may expect further consignments of interest.
Several species were obtained in the Ulu Mountains which
are identical with others from Kilimanjaro in the British
Museum, and my father tells me that this is the case with
the birds.

I have to acknowledge with many thanks the kind help
which I have received from Mr. A. G. Butler and Mr. W.F.
Kirby in the determination of the species.

Fam. Acreide.
Genus PLANEMA.

Planema Jacksoni, sp. n.

Similar to P. montana, Butler, from Kilimanjaro, but
differs in having the hind margin of the hind wing orange-
rufous, whereas in P. Jacksont the black border extends
along the whole of the hind margin. In the colouring of the
hind wing P. Jackson? resembles P. gea of Fabricius, but it has
a greater extent of broad black margin extending to the apex
of the submedian nervure. In the colouring of the fore wing
P. Jacksoni approaches P. gea, but has a much greater extent
of orange-rufous, a band of which colour traverses the wing
and nearly touches the broad extent of orange-rufous on the
inner margin of the wing, being only separated from it by a
line of black at the extremity of the lower median nervule.

336 Miss EK. M. Sharpe on new Hast-African Butterflies.

Fam. Pieride.

Teracolus bifasciatus, sp. u.

Similar to 7’. eone (cf: Butler, P.Z.S. 1876, p. 144), but
having the orange patch divided in two by a series of con-
fluent black spots, increasing in size to the last but one. It
differs also in the second black band on the hind wing, which
encloses a very distinct patch of white near the upper hind
margin of the latter. 7’. brfasciatus has one black spot at the
end of the cell. There are several other minor differences,
the present species having more orange markings than
T. evone, and the tint of the under wing in 7, bifusciatus
inclines to a pale olive-green colour.

Teracolus Jacksoni, sp. n.

Similar to 7. Thruppid, Butler, but larger, and having only
four long red spots on the fore wing. In 7. Jacksoni the
black band which occupies the oreater part of the inner
margin of the fore wing is connected with the black apical
markings: The black band on the hind wing is much
broader and continuous, and has not the white pateh which
T. Thruppit shows on the inner portion of the posterior
margin. The shade of the under surface of the wing in
T. Thruppit is more of a yellowish white, while in 7. Jacksoni
it is decidedly green.

Pinacopteryx nigropunctata, sp. n.

Similar to P. pigea, but with a black border along the
greater part of the costal margin, and having a very distinct
black edging round the apical portion of the fore wing ; the
hinder wing having a distinct black spot distributed along
the hinder margin at the end of each nervule. The under
surface is very different from that of P. pigea, being faintly
but distinctly spotted with black on the hinder wing, and
having two distinct black spots on the fore wing—one small
one at the apex of the discoidal cell, and another larger one
above the third median nervule in the centre of the fore
wing.

Bibliographical Notices. 337

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

A Catalogue of British Fossil Vertebrata. By Arrauvur Sita
Woopwarp, F.G.S., and Caartes Davirs SaErsorn, F.G.S8. 8vo.
xxv & 396 pages. Dulau and Co., London: 1890 (January).

Tur Introduction gives a reasonable apology for the Vertebrates
here catalogued being restricted to Britain, because British Palson-
tology may be taken as an epitome of that of the whole world ;
and, we presume, because a full European, and much more a world-
wide, list would have little chance of being prepared and published
just now. Earlier catalogues of more or Tess similar character are
then mentioned ; and, taking the geological formations in order from
below upwards, the authors! give “historical notes on the loealities,
the finding, and the possessors of the most remarkable or interesting
of the Vertebrate fossils either recorded or known to have been
collected. At page vi it should have been stated that, although the
Rey. W. S. Symonds gives in his ‘ Records of the Rocks,” 1872,
p. 184, probably trusting to memory, the eredit of discovering the
oldest British Fish to Mr. J. E. Lee, and however the specimen
referred to may be labelled, yet Mr. J. W. Salter describes it in the
Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. July 1859, as having been lately found by
Mr. aan Lightbody (the well-known geologist, en living at
Ludlow), when in company with Mr. Lee, of G@acrleout and as being
in Mr. Lightbody’s collection at that time. So also Mr. G. Nasa
Coombe ought to have been mentioned in connexion with Mr. Dixon
at p. xvii, and Mr. Simmons as a careful collector of Chalk fossils
at p. xviii. The method of the arrangement of the names in the
Catalogue, the meanings intended in the use of different kinds of
lettering for accepted genera and species, for synonyms and cross-
references, and for the known localization of type specimens (that
is, such as were originally used for description, not necessarily
zoological types), are carefully indicated, and the names of nume-
rous kind friends, advising and helping, are mentioned at pp. xxili
and xxiv.

Next follow five pages of the valuable results of careful biblio-
graphic industry, by Mr. W. H. Brown, in determining the dates of
publication of tbe parts and plates and supplemental sheets of the
‘ Recherches sur les Poissons fossiles,’ by Louis Agassiz, Text, vols. i.—
y., and Atlas, vols. iv. (1833-44), giving the right dates of publi-
eation for the genera and species described and figured therein ;
also of his ‘ Monographie des Poissons fossiles du Vieux Grés
Rouge &e.,’ Text and Atlas (1844-45). The dates of the publica-
tion of Sir Richard Owen’s ‘ Odontography ’ (1840-45) have also
been supplied by the same industrious bibhographist at p. xxix.

*“ A Table showing the Stratigraphical Distribution of the Genera
of British Fossil Vertebrata,” including a few known but not yet
described, follows at pp. XXX-XXXy.

308 Bibliographical Notices.

The rest of the book consists of the Catalogue itself, which
demands the best attention and is worthy of the highest praise and
recommendation that we can offer. It is a model for scientific
bibliographists, thoroughly and conscientiously worked out in every
respect, both as to literary and biological accuracy ; and herein it
stands high as a worthy successor (though within geographical and
palzontological limits) to H.G. Bronn’s well-known ‘ Index Paleon-
tologicus.’

I. The Fishes (Pisces) have 198 pages, including a page of
notes of their doubtful specimens and unknown species. II. The
Amphibia and their miscellaneous fragments have 10 pages. III.
The Reptilia, with their miscellanea and Ichnites, occupy 92 pages.
IV. The Aves and their miscellaneous entries have 9 pages. V. The
Mammalia and their miscellanea 84 pages. There are also addi-
tional notes on localities, fishes, reptiles, &c. at pages 395 and 396.

As the Mammalia occupied only six pages in Morris’s ‘ Catalogue
of British Fossils’ in 1854, and the whole Vertebrate group only
forty-nine pages, we readily see how the number of known fossil
forms has increased since that date. The more elaborate synonymy,
however, partly from the more liberal plan adopted and partly from
accumulation of descriptive memoirs, has had some influence in this
necessary enlargement of the Catalogue.

What we have to find fault with is—(1) The absence of initial
capitals to proper names and their adjectives, whereby much is lost
of the history of the species, especially to beginners. Why such
ultra-pedantic decapitation has ever been recommended it is difficult
to say, except that the old Romans had their writing all made in
letters of one size, and that modern printers have to reach a little
further for ‘‘ capitals ” than for ** lower-case ” letters. The Linnean
plan of giving capitals even to common nouns, if used for the
species, as well as to proper names, is preferable, for it helps
amateurs and beginners, and the lists have a less dull and formal
appearance, (2) The frequent and arbitrary change of an author’s
terminology when the specific name, being in the genitive case, has
ended with ‘‘11,” which termination is euphonious, good enough in
itself, and quite in accordance with Latin names, of which as many
end in ‘“‘ius” asin “us.” Uniformity cannot require the change,
for there is no need of uniformity at all in this matter, any more
than with the unfortunate guests of Procrustes. Curiously enough,
when this change is made and noticed in the Catalogue, the original
“ii” are placed in square brackets, thus [ ], as if this were
the correction of a mistake, whereas it is correct and true by the
right of the author of the specific term. (8) That aspis, as well
as lepis, is really feminine, though used as a masculine word, might
have been noticed at p. 395. (4) Excepting a pedantic ‘ levesi-
ensis” instead of ‘‘Lewesiensis,” an oversight in not giving E.
Charlesworth the credit of being the first to name specifically
Coryphodon Colchestert, and the above-mentioned errors of judg-
ment in occasional pedantry as to forms of nomenclature, we find
no fault with this remarkably perfect and well-printed Catalogue.

Bibliographical Notices. 339

Its clear and faultless printing on good paper, the trustworthy
authority for the determinations, and the elaborate care taken with
synonyms and localities, altogether make this book handy, easily
consulted, and of exceeding value—indeed indispensable—to all
geologists interested in or occupied with Vertebrate Fossils.

North-American Geology and Paleontology for the use of Amateurs,
Students, and Scientists. By S. A. Mitier. Large 8vo, pp. 664.
Cincinnati, Ohio: 1889. Dulau and Co., London.

Tue first edition of this work was published in 1877 and duly
noticed in the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol.i. (January 1878)
pp. 99-101. A “second edition ” (so called, but in reality only a
Supplement) was published early in 1888 (with a short preface,
consisting mainly of extracts from letters of approval) and bound
up together with a reissue of the first edition and an index to both
in the same volume, making 334 pages (88 more than the first
edition). The third edition, now before us, consisting of 664 pages,
takes on a new feature by the reproduction of a great many
(119+) woodcuts illustrative of Paleozoic genera and species found
fossil in Canada and the United States. Eighty-five pages are
occupied with an extended notice of Geology in general and the
geological structure of North America in particular, worked up
from the Reports of various State Surveys, which was confined to
nineteen pages in the first edition. On the other hand, Prof. E. W.
Claypole’s essay on the ‘Construction of Systematic Names in
Paleontology,” pp. vii-xv in the first edition, has been modified
into eleven dogmatic pages (90-100) on * Nomenclature.”

Introductory remarks and classifications are given for both the
Vegetable and Animal Kingdom and for the Classes and Orders as
far as their Paleeozoic members are concerned. In the Molluscoida
only the Bryozoa [Polyzoa, Busk] have a place, the Brachiopoda
being relegated to the Mollusca.

Diagnoses of the genera are copied or attempted throughout, and
many new genera and species, determined by the author himself,
are included with figures.

It would have been well had the author given his attention to all
the critical remarks offered in the review of his book in January
1878. We might even now repeat much of what was there stated,
especially about diphthongs being often ignored and words and
references in German and French being printed without a fit know-
ledge of these modern languages. Indeed, when the reader refers
to the remarks on Orophocrinus versus Codonites at p. 265, he finds
not only a characteristic sample of how German words are mis-
printed, but we see a sad example of narrow, dogmatic, and invidious
treatment of the German language, of a German scientific periodical,
and of a German paleontologist !

We think that Mr. §. A. Miller has acted very wisely in omitting
his etymological explanations of the meaning of specific names from

340 Bibliographical Notices.

the text, for very many were execrably bad in the earlier edition,
and might have unfortunately been repeated even now; for we still
see here and there the ugly mark of the illiterate amateur—for
instance, where lepas in turrilepas is “a scale,’ and where such a
derivation as lepis, a scale, and dittos, double, is given for Leper-
ditia, which is really derived from the name of M. Leperdit, of
Rennes. In this instance, as in others, we see that the author has
not referred to the original nor to some later accounts of the genus.
Indeed, it seems probable that the author’s personal researches in
paleontological books and scientific periodicals, whether British,
French, or German, have been too limited for any one presuming to
treat so extensively of fossil organisms as this Catalogue is supposed
to do. The book is designed on a good basis, and doubtless this
edition is better and therefore more useful than its predecessors ; but
the author’s more accomplished friends, of different specialities, might
aid him very much both philologically and paleontologically in a
future revision of his Catalogue.

The hard pedantry of refusing initial capitals in specific names,
of having only one letter ‘‘1” in the genitive masculine, of dog-
matically altering grapsus (in combination) to graptus, of ignoring
the masculine gender of the Latinized words cheilus or chilus, rhyn-
chus, and phycus (in combination), because the Greek forms are
neuter, is not good even in the dog-Latin of modern naturalists.

Although “Students and Scientists” may escape unhurt among
the errors and weaknesses of this Catalogue, we are sorry for the
** Amateurs,’ led by an amateur who tells them (in his Glossary,
pp. 629 et seq.) that e@gilops is ‘an acorn,” altilis “ flattened,”
aucella ‘a little bird,” bellulus “very pretty,” breviusculus “ very
short,” cerasiformis ‘like a dried cherry,” dikrocheilus ‘“ two-
edged,” euginum “fertile,” insectus “uncut,” mummiformis (!)
‘resembling a mummy,” temerarivs ‘ accidental, casual,” vadosus
“full of shadows,” and above all “qractlius, a, um,” “ majus, a, um,”
and ‘minus, a, wn,” the neuter comparative forms of gracilis, mag-
nus, and parvus! Had he given us also plus, pla, plum, he would
have made the series nearly complete !

A Catalogue of North-American Paleozoic Crustacea, confined to the
non-Trilobitic Genera and Species. By Antnony W. Voapes.
Printed in advance of vol. v. no. 1 of the ‘ Annals of the New-
York Academy of Sciences.’ 8vo. 38 pages, 2 plates, and some
woodcuts. Author’s edition. Fort Hamilton, New York Har-
bour, November 1889.

A sYSTEMATIC arrangement of the genera under orders and families
occupies five pages and a half, and the annotated catalogue of the
American species follows, with nine woodcuts (mostly outline dia-
grams) of types and two lithographic plates, one of them illustrating
Xiphusures and Eurypterids from a plate in Dr. H. Woodward's
memoir, 1867, and the other Ostracods and Phyllopods from T.

Geological Society. B41

Rupert Jones’s plate in 1870. This is a well-intentioned work,
carefully planned, but not quite correctly carried out, by the indus-
trious and, indeed, enthusiastic author. Some verbal errors, false
concords, and occasional errors in the arrangement are met with;
but we recommend it for the use of students of fossil Crustacea, if
cautious in verifying references, wording, and classification.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

January 8, 1890.—W. T. Blanford, LL.D., F.R.S.,
President, in the ‘hen

The following communication was read :—

“On some British Jurassic Fish-remains referable to the Genera
Eurycormus and Hypsocormus.”’ By A. Smith Woodward, Esq.,
F.G.S.

Hitherto our knowledge of the Upper Jurassic Fish-fauna has
been mainly derived from specimens found in fine lithographic stones,
where the various elements are in a state of extreme compression.
Within the last few years remains of similar fish have been dis-
covered in the Oxford and Kimeridge Clays of England, and these
are of value for precise determination of certain skeletal features in
the genera to which they belong.

The Author described Hurycormus grandis from the Kimeridge
Clay of Ely, a large species which makes known for the first time
the form and proportions of several of the head-bones in this genus.
A technical description of all the bones the characters of which are
distinguishable was given, and the Author concluded that there is
considerable similarity between the head of Hurycormus and the
recent Ganoid Amia, even to minute points of detail.

He further described Hypsocormus tenuirostris and H. Leedsit
from the Oxford Clay of the neighbourhood of Peterborough, the
osteology of this genus not having as yet been elucidated. Portions
of the jaws have been discovered, affor ding valuable information as to
the form and dentition of the principal elements.

These jaws are not precisely paralleled by any other Jurassic
genus, though they possess a resemblance to Pachycormus, as also
to the Upper Cretaceous genus, Protosphyrenda.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On Bucephalus Haimeanus. By M. L. Hvurr.

Tue animals belonging to the genus Bucephalus were first noticed
by von Baer in Anodonta anatina and by Pagenstecher in Unio
prctorum. This freshwater species was named Bucephalus poly-
morphus. In 1854 Prof. de Lacaze-Duthiers described a marine

oa2 Miscellaneous.

species, B. Haimeanus (Ann. Sci. Nat. 4° sér. tome i.), which he met
with at the Balearic Islands, at Mahon, and also at Cette, in Ostrea
edulis and Cardium rusticum. The author has frequently found the
latter or a nearly allied species in Cardium edule, inhabiting the
same regions of the body of the host, and presenting the same mor-
phological characters.

The cockles in which the parasites are found have a sickly aspect,
by which they may be easily recognized ; their abdomen, which is
normally firm, yellow, and opaque, becomes soft and whitish ; “it
has the aspect of an cedematized tissue, infiltrated with fluid”
(Lacaze Duthiers, J. ¢.).

U Th mM

Bucephalus Haimeanus from Cardium edule.
a. Oral cup. 6. Digestive cavity. c. Genital apparatus, d. Excretory
organ. e, Caudal appendage.

On opening such a Cardium the lacunar tissue representing the
general cavity is seen to contain an immense number of white fila-
ments, several centimetres in length, branched, knotted about the
intestinal loop, and pushing away the hepatic, renal, and genital
glands ; the atrophy of the last-named is especially marked.

These tubes, the sporocysts, cannot move, but they possess a cer-
tain amount of contractility. Within them are Cercarie in all states
of development. These are described by Lacaze-Duthiers. In fact
the author can detect scarcely any difference between the parasites

Miscellaneous. 343

found by the latter in Cardium rusticum and by himself in C. edule.
The elongated flattened body is covered with a delicate membrane,
finely striated transversely. At its narrower extremity is an un-
armed mouth at the bottom of a sucking-cup. The author has
observed no cesophageal tube, which is contrary to Lacaze-Duthiers’s
statement. In the middle region the body shows a closed cylin-
drical cavity lined with nucleated cells, and in this part there is also
a second circular sucking-disk. The posterior part also has an in-
terior cavity, smaller than that in the middle region, with which it
has no communication, but having a cord running to an aperture at
the base of the caudal lobe (see below). It is probably excretory.
Between the anterior and posterior cavities there is a darker, granu-
lar, transverse band, from the lateral extremities of which similar
bands are given off anteriorly and posteriorly, the whole representing
a capital H. The author regards these as the first traces of genital
glands.

The aboral extremity of the body bears a curious caudal appen-
dage, composed of a voluminous median lobe, flattened transversely,
and from which are given off on each side two filaments of great
length and very contractile, capable of attaining many times the
length of the body and then of retracting by rolling up.

Although during the months of November, December, January,
and February this Bucephalus is to be met with in about 4 per cent.
of the examples of Cardiwm edule, and a certain number of them
always in the state above described, which the author regards as the
adult Cercarian stage, the Distomum belonging to it could not be
found in them; by the end of March all traces of the parasites
disappear *.— Bull, Soc. Linn. Norm. sér. 4, vol. ii. p. 145 (1889),
with a plate.

On the Formation of the Antherozoids in Eudorina elegans,
By M. P. A. Danezarp.

The colonies of Eudorina elegans are composed of sixteen or thirty-
two cells occupying the surface of a sphere, each possessing two
long cilia, a nucleolated nucleus, an amyliferous corpuscle, and a
lateral red point; the colony moves by the agency of the cilia;
asexual reproduction takes place by repeated bipartition of the cells,

The sexual colonies are male and female, the latter closely
resembling the ordinary vegetative colonies, except that the contents
of the cells are more opaque and their number may be reduced to
four. In the male colonies each cell by successive bipartitions gives
origin to thirty-two or sixty-four cells which remain united in the
same plane, forming yellowish disks, which escape and move through
the water often for a considerable time ; when one of them falls in
with a female colony the antherozoids composing it are set free ;

* In a subsequent note M. Huet records his observations upon another
Cercarian parasite of Cardium edule, which he was also unable to trace to
maturity.

344 Miscellaneous.

they are very long, have two long cilia at their anterior extremity,
and a very contractile plasma ; finally they penetrate into the jelly
surrounding the female cells or ‘‘ oospheres,” and the fusion of an
antherozoid and an oosphere gives origin to an ovum, which becomes
red in passing to the condition of latent life.

In Chlamydomonas Reinhardt: the author has shown* that in
two cells which conjugate to form an ovum the nuclei become fused
together, and this is no doubt the case in Hudorina, although it has
not been observed directly.

Besides the normal mode of formation of the antherozoids in
Eudorina the author has observed another which he thinks serves
to elucidate the value and signification of the sexual reproduction in
some Volvocinew. His observations were made in February upon
cultures of about six months.

Ina colony of 32 cells, when the division of the cells has advanced
to the 8- or 16-stage, as the division does not follow a parallel
course in all the oT some will remain entire while others are
already divided into 2, 4, 8, or 16. The division completed these
cells arrange themselves as if to form an asexual colony, and then
the following phenomena were observed, here given in the order of
their occurrence.

On Monday the colony presented two mother-cells, A and B, each
containing 16 elongated green antherozoids, moving briskly within
the cavity containing them.

On Tuesday most ‘of the antherozoids of A had escaped ; those of
B were still very active. Ina third mother-cell, C, the still globular
daughter-cells arranged themselves in accordance with a spherical
surface and then began to move slowly within the cavity ; they were
green and possessed two cilia and a red point.

On Wednesday the antherozoids of B escaped ; their plasma con-
tracted with great facility, and, except in their greea colour, they
exactly resembled the ordinary antherozoids. In C the cells quick-
ened their movements and became more elongated in form; in a
fourth mother-cell, D, the daughter-cells also began to move.

The same phenomena occurred during the following days in each
ecll of the colony.

The author considers that these facts show clearly that in Hudorina
the formation of a disk is not a necessary preliminary to the produc-
tion of the antherozoids, but that green globular cells resembling
the vegetative cells and oospheres may directly give origin to anthe-
rozoids ; whence it follows that the sexual reproduction of Hudorina,
and consequently of Volvow, is only an unimportant modification of
the isogamy which is known to occur in some Chlamydomonades, in
Chlorogonium, Pandorina, and Stephanosphera.—Bull. Soc. Linn,
Normandie, séx, 4, vol. ii. p. 124 (1889).

* Bull. Soe. Linn. Norm, 1887,

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SIXTH SERIES. ]

No. 29. MAY 1890.

XLV.—The “British Area” in Marine Zoology. By the
Rey. Canon Norman, M.A., D.C.L., F.L.S8., &e.

I. Definition of the British Area.

THE British Area may be defined at the south by lat. 49° 30/
N., which parallel, as it passes eastwards, should terminate at
long. 5° Of W., that is, midway between the Land’s End and
Brest. From that point the midchannel must be the boundary
round the south and south-east coast, until at lat. 51° 50’ N.
long. 2° 380’ E. (nearly opposite the Naze) we obtain a mid-
channel, whence that long. (viz. 2° 30’ EH.) may be taken as
the boundary through the North Sea and past Shetland. The
northern boundary is more complex, but coming from the
west by lat. 60° N. and proceeding eastwards we shall reach
a point about midway between Cape Wrath and Faroe at
long. 5° 0' W.; thence a line must be driven direct north-
east past Shetland until long. 1° 0! W. is reached, whence it
should proceed due east to join the eastern boundary already
referred to, viz. long. 2° 30! KE. The western boundary has
no defined limits; it is the slope of that part of the continent
of Europe of which our Islands are the outliers, and descends
to the base of the continent at 1500 fathoms,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol v. 25

346 Rev. Canon Norman on the

IJ. Reasons for the Adoption of this Area.

The exploration of the sea around our Islands was until
about twenty years ago confined to such investigations as
could be undertaken by private individuals, and was conse-
quently limited to the near waters of our shores and in shallow
depths. In 1868 the first government expedition was, at the
instigation of the Royal Society, undertaken ; and from that
time subsequent expeditions have searched, though as yet
only tentatively and most imperfectly, the greatest depths
which may fairly be regarded as within the British Area.

What must now then be regarded as the British Area?
The answer involves the wider questions, What is the area
of a continent ? What of Europe ?

The area of a continent cannot be geographically and
scientifically regarded as limited to that portion which, at this
particular geological epoch is, or, indeed, at any geological
epoch was, uncovered by the sea and left dry. If a stone is
placed in a vessel, and that vessel be partially filled with
water, the stone does not consist of that portion still above
the surface of the water, but embraces the part covered down
to the base which rests upon the bottom of the vessel. Simi-
larly, a continent is not limited to the subaerial exposed land,
but includes its slopes and buttresses and base down to that
depth where it meets and rises from the bed of the ocean.

Where, then, does a continent thus rise? Upon grounds
about to be stated it is here argued that Europe and Africa,
and probably it may be said all continents, rise from the oceanic
bed at a depth of 1500 fathoms. If a good chart of the
eastern North Atlantic be examined* it will be found that
the abyss of the ocean ranges from 1500 to 3000 fathoms,
which latter depth is not exceeded north of lat. 28° N.

We wust first examine how far the theory here propounded
is borne out by evidence, and to what extent depths under
1500 fathoms are found in the North-east Atlantic. The
only cases as yet known of submerged areas not connected

* Admiralty Chart, “ North Atlantic Ocean, Eastern Portion.” The
charts which illustrate the various British North Atlantic Expeditions
should also be consulted, together with ‘Den Norske Nordhavs Expe-
dition, 1876-78, xviii. B (1887); H. Mohn, ‘ Nordhavets Dybder, Tem-
peratur og Stromninger.’

Similar conditions prevail off the east coast of North America down to
Cape Hatteras. Vide Verrill, Physical Characters of the portion of the
Continental Border beneath the Gulf Stream” (Ann. Rep. Comm. Fish
and Fisheries for 1882, published 1884); also A. Agassiz, ‘‘ Three Cruises
of the ‘ Blake,” vol. i. (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. vol. xiv.) cap. iv., ‘¢ Topo-
graphy of the Eastern Coast of the North-American Continent.”

“British Area” in Marine Zoology. 347

with land and at less depths than 1500 fathoms are the fol-
lowing :—(1) The “Josephine Bank,” to the west of Cape
St. Vincent, 466 fathoms; (2) ‘ Seine Bank,” north-east of
Madeira, 81 fathoms; (3) “ Laura Ethel Bank,” about long.
38° 50! W., lat. 47° 0’ N., 36 fathoms ; and (4) a sounding
some 600 miles west of the Shannon, 1451 fathoms. Ad/
other water at less than 1500 fathoms is connected with adjacent
land by lesser depths.

It is very interesting to follow carefully the 1500-fathom
line as bearing upon submerged geography. ‘The most
remarkable fact it reveals is a vast elevated district connected
with the Azores. ‘This district extends some 600 miles east
and west at the Azores, thence rapidly narrowing northwards
it nevertheless apparently reaches more than 1000 in that
direction, in fact right up to lat. 50° N. For the most part
the depths range over this great region of elevation from 1000
to 1400 fathoms; but at the most northern point a sounding
gives 625 fathoms, and near the middle 70 fathoms and 48
fathoms.

The Madeiras, Salvages, and Cape-Verd Islands are regions
of elevation separated from the adjacent continent by depths
exceeding 1500 fathoms.

If we now follow the 1500 coast-line along the continents
of Africa and Europe some very remarkable facts come out.
Commencing at the Gulf of Guinea, at Cape St. Paul, and
proceeding thence up the whole of the African and Kuropean
coasts until the English Channel is reached, we find that at
every single spot soundings of 1500 fathoms, where given, are
within 180 miles of land *, and that for the most part they
are as near as 100, 60, or even 40 miles. To bring this fact
home it may be thus put:—the mean distance of depths
ereater than 1500 fathoms from shore throughout this enor-
mous extent of some 4000 miles of coast-line is less than that
of Dublin from Liverpool! And according to the views here
propounded this is all the extent seaward which naturalists
living upon any part of it could claim as belonging to their
area, so suddenly do the continents thus far north rise out of
the abyss.

Immediately we reach the English Channel submarine
Europe completely changes its facies and is extended greatly
westwards. From the Land’s End we have to go 300 miles
west before even the 100 fathom depth is reached, and 120
more before the ocean bottom is attained. Off the west of

* Except where the Canaries are connected with the continent ; but to
the west of these islands the incline is excessively steep, plunging into
2410 fathoms within 60 miles of Palma.

25%

348 Rey. Canon Norman on the

Treland peculiar features present themselves. At some 330
miles west of the mouth of the Shannon the depth has in-
creased only to 650 fathoms, but beyond and so close to this
sounding that the recording figures meet on the chart we find
1570 fathoms. In fact here and opposite the greater part of
Treland the continent is supported at its base on huge precipi-
tous buttresses some 5400 teet high. ‘Towards the north of
Ireland the great abyss below these precipices trends towards
land in narrow tongue-like form, so that a ‘ Porcupine’
dredging at lat. 50° 24’ N., long. 15° 14’ W., gives 1630
fathoms.

Again proceeding northwards we find the area of submarine
Europe vastly enlarged and stretching further and further
westwards, and 13 degrees or, say, 780 miles are crossed before
we can meet with a 1500-fathom sounding.

To the north of this again we can pass from the north of
Scotland by the “ Wyville-Thomson Ridge” and “ Faroe
Banks” to Faroe, and thence by the “ Faroe Ridge ” to
Iceland in less than 300 fathoms, and in another 100 fathoms
we find a passage from Iceland to Greenland, while the under
1500 fathoms area has enormous extension southward. This
vast submerged continental land separates the basin of the
Atlantic from that of the Arctic Ocean.

The mention of the “ Wyville-Thomson Ridge” brings us
to the explanation of the irregular northern demarcation of the
British area indicated on the map and given in definition.
The reason why this line of demarcation must be brought
nearer to the Shetland Isles than midway to Faroe is as fol-
lows :—Crossing diagonally lat. 60° N. and running from the
shallows of the British seas W. by N. there exists a narrow
ridge, which separates depths of 500-600 fathoms of the
Atlantic from similar depths of the Arctic Ocean, such great
depths of these oceans here alone thus closely approaching each
other. On thesouthern sideof this ridge the waters are affected
by the Gulf-stream, and at the bottom of this ‘ warm area” at
the depths mentioned the temperature is about 48° Fahr. The
Gulf-stream coming against the ridge can only overflow it, and
while the surface to the north of this ridge is thus warmed, the
depths below in the “cold area ”’ remain unaffected, and are at
the low temperature of from freezing-point, 32° Fahr., to 83°
Fahr. This “ cold area,” or most southern projection of the
Arctic Ocean on the northern side of the “ Wyville-Thomson
Ridge,” is known as the Faroe Channel, and has a somewhat
boot-like form, widening beneath the ridge. Here its depth is
500-600 fathoms, thence the depth regularly and gradually
increases northwards, until at the “Norway Deep” (about

“British Area” in Marine Zoology. 349

A .
O'Prern ee?

60F

[wan AREA

ca
eooooene”
rd

4930|/== = owe wwe wo ow wow wee oe’

The British Marine Area, showing its Southern, Eastern, and Northern Limits,

[The finely dotted line to the north indicates the boundaries of the
“cold area” or “ Faroe Channel,”’ |

350 Rev. Canon Norman on the

lat. 68° N., long. 2° W.), or the parallel of the Lofoten
Islands, the great abyss of this part of the Arctic Ocean is
reached in 2000 fathoms. Now the fauna of the “warm
area’? to the south of this ridge exhibits a more southern
character, different from that of the “ cold area”’ of the Faroe
Channel, which latter is more arctic, and the British line of
demarcation driven from long. 5° W. direct N.. past Shet-
land is chosen for the purpose of excluding the “ cold area,”
which belongs more properly to the Arctic Ocean generally
and to Faroe in particular *.

In 1887 a committee was appointed by the British Associa-
tion to consider the question of the British Area, and their
Report (Brit. Assoc. Rep. 1888, p. 95) the following year is
here given :—

“Report of the Committee, consisting of Canon A. M. Norman,
Mr. H. B. Brady, Mr. W. Carruthers, Professor Herd-
man, Professor W. C. M‘Intosh, Mr. J. Murray, Professor
A. Newton, Mr. P. L. Sclater, and Professor A. C.
Haddon (Secretary), appointed for the purpose of con-
sidering the question of accurately defining the term
‘British’ as applied to the Marine Fauna and Flora of
our Islands.

“A circular giving in detail alternate boundaries for a
British marine area, and maps and sections illustrating the
same, was distributed to members of the ‘ British Marine
Area Committee,’ as well as to a large and representative
number of naturalists interested in marine zoology. As was
to be expected, the replies showed that great diversity of
opinion exists not only as to the desirability of hmiting a
British marine area, but also as to how far such an area
should extend.

“A tabulation of replies was subsequently forwarded to
the members of the Committee, and the following statements
appear to express the views of the majority :—

* The following Mollusca have occurred in the Faroe Channel which
are unknown to exist south of the “ Wyville-Thomson Ridge ” :—Bela
scalaroides, G. O. Sars; Buceinum hydrophanum, Hancock, and its var.
Morchi, Friele ; Sipho lachesis, Morch; S. turritus, M. Sars; 8. Sabini,
Gray ; S. delicatus, Jeffreys; S. turgidulus, Jeffreys ; S. concinnus, Jef-
freys; S. hirsutus, Jeffreys; Mohnia Mohni, Friele; Rissoa arenaria,
H. & A. Adams; Solariella obscura, Couthouy; Molleria costulata,
Miller; Cyclostrema areolatum, G. O. Sars; C. rugulosum, G. O. Sars ;
Pilidium radiatum, M. Sars ; Chiton arcticus, G. O. Sars ; Lima excavata,
Fabr.; Montacuta Voringi, Friele; Octopus arcticus, Prosch; O. pisca-
torum, Verrill; Tracheloteuthis Riisei, Steenstrup.

“British Area” in Marine Zoology. 351

“Tt may be desirable for the convenience of curators of
museums and the compilers of faunistic works to limit a
marine area, which may be more particularly described as
* British,’

“The British Marine Area may be conveniently subdivided
into a shallow-water and into a deep-water district.

(1) “ The 100 fathoms contour is a natural boundary line
for the former off the north and west coasts of the British
Islands for the following reasons:—1. It is defined on all
charts, 2. The Admiralty soundings are very complete
down to that depth. 38. The 100 fathoms line roughly corre-
sponds with the beginning of the declivity of the continental
plateau. 4. There isa marked change in the fauna about
that limit. 5. Most of the dredgings of British naturalists
have been taken within that contour.

(2) “The only boundary to the south and east is the half-
way line between Great Britain and the continent; this
should include the Dogger Bank.

‘The above may be termed ‘ The British Marine Shallow
Water District.’

(3) “The deep-water district of the British Marine Area
may be regarded as extending from 100 to, say, 1000 fathoms
—that is, to the commencement of the abysmal floor of the
ocean. As these depths only occur off the north and west
coasts, this region may be termed ‘The British Atlantic
Slope District.’

(4) “The Channel Islands lie outside the British Marine
Area proper.”

It will be seen that I was chairman of the above com-
mittee and Prof. Haddon its active secretary, who took great
trouble in the matter. I was very much engaged at the time
in matters other than scientific, and fear that my own views
were not expressed to him with sufficient fulness and clearness,
The fault was mine, not his; nor, indeed, had I studied the
subject so fully then as I have subsequently. I then, how-
ever, dissented and must still dissent from the conclusions
arrived at, but from no want of appreciation of the pains taken
by Prof. Haddon. Still I think any one reading that Report
can hardly regard it as altogether satisfactory, more especially
as it seems to leave the matter undecided between a 100 and
a 1000 fathoms limit. I have numbered the later paragraphs
in order that they may be now briefly referred to.

(1) I cannot accept the proposition that “ there is a marked
change in the fauna” at about 100 fathoms. The fact is
there is no marked change at that or any other particular

352 On the “British Area”’ in Marine Zoology.

depth exceeding 20 fathoms. The changes in the fauna are
gradual, and are to a great extent more effected by the nature
or the temperature of the bottom than by the actual depth.
There are only two natural limits to representatives of flora
and fauna—lIst the littoral, where there is alternation of sub-
mergence and exposure; 2nd, the termination of the Lami-
narian zone at 15-20 fathoms (commonly), where, with the
cessation of Algoid growth, there is also necessarily a cessa-
tionof phytophagous animals. Secondly, [knowno reason why
the “ 100 fathom line roughly corresponds with the beginning
of the declivity of the continental plateau,” more than any
other depth does so.

(2) The eastern limit proposed in this present paper divides
the “ Dogger Bank;”’ but practically it is impossible to say
from what exact part of the Dogger Bank Mollusca and other
animals come which naturalists obtain through the instru-
mentality of trawlers or long-line fishers ; but the so-called
“* Dogger Bank”’ shells do not really come from the shallow
waters of the Bank, but from the “deeper water” which is
within its British border, and to the north of it.

(3) The chief object of the present paper has been to prove
that the “abysmal floor of the ocean” commences at 1500
and not at 1000 fathoms, and that depths of 1000 fathoms are
not to be found on its floor. In the Report the only boundary
given for the north is the 1000 fathoms limit; but in that
direction no such sounding can be found until lat. 63° N. is
reached. This is far into the Arctic Ocean, and brings us to
a point nearer to Faroe or Norway than to Shetland, and
although the slopes N. and W. of Shetland, which are those
descending to the Arctic Ocean, must in some degree be
embraced, it appears to me right that they should not be
descended to such a depth as would be characterized by water
at or nearly at freezing-point. The limit, as indicated in this
paper, to the north does not descend to water deeper than
300-400 fathoms.

(4) The Channel Islands lie outside the British area
proper, and belong geographically to France, the naturalists
of which country do right in including them in their fauna
and flora. As, however, they belong to us, and are a
favourite and excellent collecting-ground for southern forms,
it is convenient to students that their animals and plants
should find a place in works on British Natural History.

I feel confident that when the enlarged British Marine
Area is fairly realized it will act as a great stimulus to many
naturalists, who restrict their studies to what is “ British,” to
take means for its fuller investigation. A vast field remains

Col. C. Swinhoe on new Indian Butterflies. 353

almost unexplored around our coasts. That much more
extended investigation should take place is of no small geo-
graphical as well as biological importance. In our knowledge
of the contour of Kurope beneath the sea we are far in arrear.
The Americans have beaten us out and out. Few things
attracted more attention at the Fisheries Exhibition than the
admirable model of the North-east American ocean bottom,
showing the descent of that continent into the abyss. Is it
too much to hope that such further explorations may be con-
ducted by our government as shall enable a similar model of
our Marine Area to be placed at no distant period in the
British Museum ?

April 8, 1890.

XLVI.—New Species of Indian Butterflies.
By Colonel C. Swinnor, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

SATYRINE.
1. Melanitis ampa, n. sp.

3 ¢. Upperside uniform pale brown ; fore wing with two
pale blackish-brown rounded spots, the lower the larger,
placed midway between the end of the cell and the outer mar-
gin, one on either side of the third median nervule, the lower
spot indistinctly centred with white.

Underside pale reddish brown, striated with grey; fore
wing crossed by a straight brown band, from the costa more
than one third from the apex to the hinder margin, which it
does not reach, followed by a paler patch and a submarginal
incurved row of five or six ocelli with white centres; hind
wing with an outwardly curved brown band, from the costa
just beyond the middle to the abdominal margin (which it
does not reach) one third from the anal angle, followed by a
pale space and a submarginal outwardly curved row of six
ocelli with white centres ; both wings broadly margined with
brown; wings shaped much as in JZ. aswa, Moore; the grey
striations and ocelli much the more prominent in the female.

Expanse of wings, ¢ 2y'0, 2 210 inches.

North Kanara, July 1886.

Allied to M/. aswa, Moore, with the pattern of the spots
below as in MW, varaha, Moore.

354 Col. C. Swinhoe on new Indian Butterflies.

NYMPHALINE.

2. Huthalia khasiana, n. sp.

g. Upperside of a unitorm dark glossy olive-brown ; ab-
dominal margin of hind wing pale reddish brown; a few
greyish-blue scales on the outer margin of hind wings towards
the anal angle, obsolete in one example, the discoidal and
adjacent markings, as also the double discal blackish lines, as
in EL. appiades, Mén.

Underside dusky ferruginous, with the inner and lower
portions of the hind wing suffused with greenish grey; this

suffusion blends into the dusky ferruginous colour of the rest
of the wing, and in one example covers all the wing below
the apical third ; bands and markings similar to those of Z.
appiades.

Expanse of wings 2;%5 inches.

Khasia Hills, 1888. Three examples.

Allied to £, appiades, Mén.; but the apex of the fore wing is
more rounded, and it canat once be distinguished by the absence
of the broad blue marginal band of the hind wing of that
species.

3. Huthalia rangoonensis, n. sp.

3+ Very much like that sex of EL. kesava, Moore, but is
uniformly paler above, the discal greyish band broader, paler,
and brighter, covering very nearly the whole of the outer
half of the fore wing, leaving a thinner marginal brown band
which is finely attenuated to the hinder angle and in many
specimens does not reach it.

On the underside there is no appreciable difference, except
that in #. kesava in all my specimens there is a black spot
just below the cell where the first median branch is emitted,
whereas in all the specimens of this species there is a distinct
black ring with a smaller one below it, as in the female.

?. Upperside pale olive-brown ; fe brown lines across
the cell of fore wings and a twin brown ringlet and a trans-
verse subbasal mark in the interspace below, with two brown
ringed marks in the hind wing, as in J. kesava 2; a broad
greyish-white discal band across both wings, broadest on the
upper radial vein, otherwise fairly uniform throughout,
margined outwardly with dark brown and strongly dentated,
sinuous inwardly and in places dentated, powdered in the
central portions with pale olive-brown, which also suffuses
the band towards its lower end on the hind wing.

Underside: fore wing pale greyish ochreous; hind wing

bluish grey, with a little greyish-ochreous colour on the upper

Col. C. Swinhoe on new Indian Butterflies. 355

portion of the outer margin; the discal band as above, but
margined on both sides with dark brown, white on fore wing
and upper half of hind wing, the remaining portion being of
the bluish-grey colour of the wing and very slightly irrorated
in some of its central portions ; discoidal and subbasal marks
as in the male.

Expanse of wings, ¢ 2,% to 274, 2 27% to 375 inches.

Rangoon, June, July, and August 1886. Many examples
of both sexes.

Allied to #. kesava, Moore, much resembling that species
in the male, but widely different in the female, especially in
the size and shape of the discal band and in the blue colora-
tion of the hind wing below. Undoubtedly the two sexes
belong to one species, the markings being identical and all
having been taken together.

4, Kuthalia laudabilis, n. sp.

3 ¢. Upperside bright metallic blue-green; a broad bluish-
grey discal band across both wings, broad on the costa of the
fore wing (which it does not quite touch) and gradually
attenuated downwards towards the abdominal margin of the
hind wing, near which it becomes more or less obsolete, its
inner margin sinuous on fore wing; this band is bright and
distinct in the female and indistinct and nearly obsolete in the
male, except at the costa of the fore wing; fore wing with
two discoidal black-lined marks, the upper part of the inner
one centred with vermilion ; hind wing with one black-lined
mark ; both wings with a submarginal lunular dark band and
with the apex of fore wing suffused with blackish.

Underside bluish grey, with greyish-brown transverse
fascia, one just beyond the middle and two submarginal and
close together, the outer one lunular and nearly obsolete in
the male; fore wing with discoidal marks as above; hind
wing with two discoidal marks and two rings above them,
the upper end of the inner discoidal mark and both rings
being centred with vermilion.

Expanse of wings, ¢ 33%, 9 4;% to 44%; inches.

North Kanara, May, June, and July 1886.

Allied to LE. evelina, Stoll, who gives the locality as Ben-
gal; but no other example appears to have come from that
locality. Stoll’s figure agrees with the Ceylon insect on the
upperside, but on the underside it is without purplish and
with pale spots on a dusky outer margin to both wings; both
are widely different from the insect now described not only in
the coloration being bright metallic blue-green instead of

356 Col. C. Swinhoe on new Indian Butterflies.

dull metallic golden-green, but also in the entire absence of
the prominent discal band.

Pree.

5. Callosune alberta, n. sp.

3. Upperside pure white. Fore wing with the costal
line blackish brown, accompanied interiorly with grey irrora-
tions; basal area darkly irrorated with grey, a distinct
greyish-brown mark at end of cell; a large carmine apical
patch, with narrow blackish-brown outer border, running in
on to the veins, which are also blackish brown, and with a
broad, more or less suffused, blackish-brown interior band,
which fines down the outer margin beyond the first median
branch and sometimes to the hinder angle. Hind wing with
the base slightly irrorated with grey; large blackish-brown
marginal spots on each vein, pointed inwardly more or less.

Wide : fore wing white, costal and basal areas greenish
grey ; a brown spot at the end of the cell ; apical area broad,
rosy flesh-colour. Hind wing rosy flesh-colour, tinted with
lilac; a brown spot with a red centre at the end of the cell;
a discal band of spots with pale centres across both wings,
touching the apical flesh-coloured space in the fore wing, well
recurved on both wings, usually complete on the hind wing,
often only faintly indicated in the first median and interno-
median interspaces of the fore wing, sometimes obsolete there ;
in some specimens the spots on this band, especially on the
hind wing, are confluent ; two pale blackish-brown patches at
the margin of the fore wing on the first and second median
branches.

@. Upperside much as in the female of C. dirus, Butler ;
the underside is, however, quite different, being coloured and
marked as in the male, but with the colours and markings much
stronger and darker.

Expanse of wings, ¢ ¢ 1;% inch.

Karachi, October and November 1885.

Allied to C. subroseus, Swinh. (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1884,
p. 443, pl. xl. figs. 6 and 7, g ?), but is more strongly
marked above and below and differently tinted on the under-
side in both sexes, having the peculiar purplish tinting of
some of the African species. I have 37 males and 8 females
of CO. subroseus and 14 males and 4 females of this species ;
they are near allies, but can hardly be seasonal forms of each
other, as C. subroseus occurs more or less all the year round.
I have taken it in every month of the year except September.

Col. C. Swinhoe on new Indian Butterflies. 357

6. Ixias alana, n. sp.

3 ?. Upperside lemon-yellow. Fore wings with the
basal and costal areas irrorated with greenish ; costal margin
black, suffused with greenish yellow, narrow in the male,
broad in the female, suffused inwardly and filling up two
thirds, sometimes nearly the entire cell; apical patch black,
enclosing a broad orange belt (yellow in the female), divided
by black veins into eight areas, the eighth area in the male
being a small circle at the upper end of the cell, absent
in the female, which has a narrower belt, and consequently
a broader inner margin, which thickens much at the end of
the cell, where it joins the costal band; there are also two
large black spots in the two lowest areas of the belt ; first
and second median branches black, making a yellow spot in
both sexes where the second median interspace commences.
Hind wing with a broad marginal black band a quarter of an
inch deep, a very little broader in the female than in the
male.

Underside lemon-yellow in the male, chrome-yellow in the
female, the male with a small blackish spot at the end of each
cell; a blackish patch on the margin of the fore wing near
the hinder angle and some slight greyish irrorations along
the margin of both wings ; female with the spot at the end
of the cell in the fore wing and the patch near the hinder
margin large, the latter running in well on the first median
branch and narrowing down to the angle, with a discal row
of blackish spots running upwards from the patch one in each
interspace, lessening in size and paling in colour as they
ascend. Hind wing with a small spot at the end of the cell,
a blackish patch at the apex, and a few indistinct blackish
spots in the disk; both sexes with minute black marginal
points in the centres of the interspaces.

Iixpanse of wings, ¢ 2 215 inches.

Maldah, July 1886; ten pairs. Barrackpore; six pairs.

Allied to I. colaba, Swinhoe (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1885, p. 142,
pl. ix. fig. 6); differs above in its much deeper black marginal
border, and below in having a black patch near the hinder
angle on the fore wing of the male and in the bright chrome-
yellow colour of the female, the female of J. colaba, of which
I have a fine series, being very pale yellow.

7. Ivias lena, n. sp.

d+ Upperside pale bright primrose-yellow. Apical half of

fore wing brownish black, enclosing an ochreous-red band,

358 Col. C. Swinhoe on new Indian Butterflies.

divided by the veins into eight areas, the eighth area being a
small space at the upper end of the cell, just above the square
knob of the black inner margin ; costal border and basal area
irrorated with greenish grey. Hind wing with the base very
slightly suffused with grey, and with a marginal brownish-
black border about a quarter of an inch deep near the apex,
and attenuated hindwards until it becomes a mere marginal
line at the anal angle.

Underside clear bright ochreous yellow : lower half of fore
wing paling to primrose-yellow ; a brown spot at the end of
each cell, large on the fore wing; a suffused brownish mar-
ginal patch near hinder angle of fore wing: a brown patch on
the costa at the apex of hind wing, and a discal (nearly sub-
marginal) row of brown spots across both wings, one in each
interspace, bent in on the costa of fore wing, the spots largest
on the upper half of hind wing, but otherwise of fairly uniform
size; a black marginal point on each vein in both wings.

@. Differs from male above in its interior band limiting
the subapical ochreous-red area, being broken in the middle,
in the absence of the knob, and in the area being rather
narrower.

The underside is dark chrome-yellow, paling to pale prim-
rose on the lower half of the fore wing, and all the spots
except the one at the end of the cell in the hind wing are large
and of nearly uniform size. vite

Expanse of wings, ¢ 275, 2 2;% to 275 inches.

Andaman Islands.

Allied to 7. andamana, Moore; is much yellower, the
ochreous-red patch in both sexes is deeper, and the black
bands very much narrower, and below the male is well spotted
on the hind wing, instead of being nearly immaculate, as in
I, andamana.

8. Appias olferna, n. sp.

&. Upperside white. Fore wing with the costal and outer
marginal lines black; costal area with grey irrorations for
two thirds of its length; base also slightly irrorated with grey ;
apical patch formed of thick brownish-black bars on the veins,
as in A. zelmira, Cram., but shorter, paler, and more suffused,
lessening in length hindwards and inwardly confluent to the
second median branch; an inwardly pointed large spot on the
first median branch and a very small one on the submedian
vein, sometimes absent. Hind wing with a marginal row of
small, faint, blackish-grey spots, one on each vein ; in one
specimen these spots are obsolete.

Col. C. Swinhoe on new Indian Butterflies. 359

Underside: fore wing white; basal and costal area for
two thirds of its length thickly irrorated with grey, and a few
submarginal grey lunular marks ; apical area and the entire
surface of hind wing tinged with yellow: hind wing with a
touch of ochre on the costa at the base; a thin sprinkling of
grey irrorations on the subcostal vein and first branch, and
another thin sprinkling of grey atoms across the wing, passing
just inside the end of the cell and turning upwards towards
the apex.

?. Above and below very much the same as in that sex
of A. zelmira, but altogether whiter, the discal white area
running in on the median vein to the base of the fore wing ;
the submarginal yellow spots smaller and the marginal brown
band of the hind wing narrower.

Expanse of wings, ¢ ? 14%; to 1749 inch.

Maldah, April and May 1886.

Allied to A. zelmira, Cram.; differs considerably in the
male in the paler colour of the black markings above, in the
absence of the large black marginal spots of the hind wing,
and underneath in the absence of the black veins.

9. Appias Irvinii, n. sp.

3. Upperside white: fore wing with a blackish costal line,
some grey irrorations on the costal area along two thirds of its
length and some at the base ; a black apical patch covering
nearly one third of the costa at the apex and narrowing down
the outer margin to the second median branch, its interior
margin irregular and curved into the patch at its centre, the
veins in the patch white: a small marginal spot on the first
median branch and two or three small indistinct marginal
spots on the veins in the hind wing.

Underside: fore wing white, some costal and basal irrora-
tions as above; apical space and the entire surface of hind
wing tinged with yellow ; a few grey irrorations crossing the
end of the cell, otherwise both wings are without marks,

On Upperside white. Fore wing with a broad blackish
longitudinal band from the base to the end of the cell, com-
pletely filling its upper two thirds, continued up to the black
costal line in a suffused form, and attached to the black mar-
ginal border by a black band on the third median branch,
this band filling one third of the costa at the apex, is broader
than in the male; it also has white veins, its inner margin
curves in a similar manner, but is more irregular, forms two
teeth on the first and second median branches, and is con-
tinued to the hinder margin ; base of wing broadly suffused

360 Col. C. Swinhoe on new Indian Butterflies.

with blackish-grey irrorations. Hind wing with the base
and interno-median interspace irrorated slightly with grey ;
outer margin with large blackish spots on the veins down to
the second median branch, more or less confluent.

Underside coloured as in the male; apical yellow area
limited by a blackish irregular thin band or tine ; costal band
and connecting band as on the upperside, the former uni-
formly coloured up to the costa. Hind wing with the trans-
verse line of irrorations as in the male, but darker ; costa at
the base touched with ochre.

Expanse of wings, ¢ ? 2;% inches.

Mandalay, Upper Burmah, May 1886.

Allied to A. olferna; the male differs above in the black
apical patch of the fore wing, and below in having no markings
except the few grey scales across the end of the cell of the
hind wing; the female differs widely, having no marks on
the hind wing above except the marginal spots, and under-
neath the markings are peculiar to itself.

There are examples of this species in the British Museum
from Upper Tenasserim.

10. Appias retexta, n. sp.

&. Upperside white. Fore wing with black costal line,
below which it is slightly irrorated with grey for two thirds
its length; apical band narrow, formed by blackish spots
fining inwards on the veins, more or less confluent on the
margin, and decreasing in size to the first median branch,
from which a blackish marginal line runs down to the hinder
angle. Hind wing with some small indistinct marginal spots
running slightly up the veins, which are obsolete in some
specimens.

Underside white, a few grey irrorations on the costa of
fore wing for two thirds of its length ; costal and outer mar-
ginal lines black ; otherwise both wings are unmarked.

9. Upperside white. Fore wing with the costal line black ;
a broad black longitudinal band from the base filling up the
whole discoidal space with the exception of a thin streak
above the median vein, and reaching up to the costa, joining
the apical black band by a thin black band along the third
median branch ; a black suffusion below the cell, covering
the base of both wings and running out in the interno-median
area for half the length of the fore wing; apical black band
extending for more than a third of the costa, its inner margin
excavated on the lower radial vein, leaving a white square-
shaped space between it and the discoidal band, then curving

Col. C. Swinhoe on new Indian Butterflies. 361

downwards and lessening in width, it reaches the hinder
angle, and has three teeth running in on the first and second
median branches and on the submedian vein. Hind wing
with large black marginal spots on the veins, more or less
confluent, paling to the anal angle in a greyish suffusion, and
connected with a discal circular shade by blackish thin bands
or lines along the veins; this shade is formed of pale blackish
irrorations, and runs round the cell and below the median
vein, and is suffused over all the lower part of the wing
excepting the abdominal margin.

Underside white. Fore wing with the costa grey, discoidal
band and connecting band pale; apical band indicated by
pale bands on the veins ; lower basal band also visible. Hind
wing with a pale black, short, marginal band at the apex,
the discal shade short and distinct, in the form of a trans-
verse band; marginal spots and connecting vein-lines also
present.

Expanse of wings, g 3 23% to 244; inches.

Bombay and Poona, July to December, common.

Allied to A. libythea, Fabr., the type of which (a female)
is in the Fabrician cabinet at the British Museum, and has
been carefully examined by me. There are three distinct
forms or species in this group; the males of all are somewhat
similar to each other, but when put in rows can easily be
distinguished ; the females are quite distinct and constant in
their characteristics. A. retewta is the dark form, marked
much like the female of A. zelmira, Cram., but without any
spots in the apical border above and without any yellow
coloration below. A. libythea, Fabr., has the apical border
natrower, as is also the discoidal band; there is no connecting
band, no suffused band below the cell, and no marks on the
hind wing except the large marginal spots, which are dis-
connected, and below there are no marks at all except the
discoidal and apical bands on fore wing faintly showing
through the wing, and a transverse medial shade running
across the end of the cell in the hind wing; the third form,
A. ares, Swinhoe (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1885, p. 138), is the
whitest of all, the apical and discoidal bands on the fore wing
are very narrow and pale, and the hind wing above and the
whole surface of both wings below are unmarked.

I have a long series of all three species.

11. Huphina liquida, un. sp. |
3 ¢. Upperside white. Fore wing with the costal line
black, accompanied by some grey urorations on the basal
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 26

362 Col. C. Swinhoe on new Indian Butterflies.

half ; base also slightly irrorated ; apical patch black, covering
more than one third of the costa, and fining down to the
hinder margin, before reaching which it becomes attenuated ;
interior margin of the patch slightly curved into the patch,
more or less diffuse, running in on the veins, and with a bent
knob on the second median branch in the female. Hind wing
with a pale narrow marginal band, inwardly diffuse, becom-
ing gradually obsolete towards the anal angle.

Underside : fore wing white, a broad costal band and apical
patch pale greenish brown smeared with yellow ; a large sub-
apical yellow patch near the costa. Hind wing greenish
yellow ; median vein and a large shadowy band greenish
brown; this band crosses the wing, covering the apical and
discal portions, and has in it some large spots of the ground-
colour of the wing.,

The female only differs from the male in having more
rounded wings and in being paler below.

Expanse of wings, ¢ 275, 2 14% inch.

Mahableshwur, April and May 1887.

Allied to H, remba, Moore, but is uniformly smaller; differs
above in its much smaller apical patch of fore wings, its
nearly pure white hind wings, and in its paler and yellower
coloration below, particularly so in the female; in H. remba
the brown band fills up the whole subcostal interspace and
more than one third of the cell, whereas in H. liquida it is
altogether clear of the cell and is purely discal.

Ihave H. remba from the Nilgiri Hills, from Calicut, and
from Kanara, whence the type came. i

Hesperide.
12. Baoris sikkima, u. sp.

& ¢. Upperside dark vinous brown. Fore wing with three
semidiaphanous minute spots before the apex, the centre one
the innermost, the upper one the smallest; two larger spots
at the end of the cell (absent in the female), the upper one
the smaller: three spots in the disk, the largest in the first
median interspace, square above and pointed outwardly below
on the first median branch; the second outside the first,
smaller, more or less square, in the second median interspace ;
the third minute and round, but generally larger than the
subapical spots, outside the second and in the lower radial
interspace,—the female has an additional spot in a line with
the others in the interno-median interspace, with its lower
side touching the submedian vein, and about the same size as

Col. C. Swinhoe on new Indian Butterflies. 363

the second discal spot ; sometimes, but not always, there is a
very minute spot immediately below the first discal spot.
Hind wing without markings, the patch of velvety hairs on
the hind wings of the male reddish at their base.

Underside slightly paler ; spots on fore wing as above, the
lowest discal spot in the female largely suffused, the outer
half of the two lowest interspaces in the fore wing of the
male pale and shining, the inner half in both sexes blackish,
with a patch of brown raised scales in the centre of the sub-
median vein in the male.

Expanse of wings, g¢ ? 1,%5 inch.

Sikkim, 1889.

Allied to B. scopulifera, Moore (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1883,
p- 932) ; differs in both sexes in having three instead of two
subapical spots, in having three instead of two discal spots in
the male, which are differently shaped, and differs very mate-
rially in the female. This insect is included by Mr. de
Nicéville as one of the varieties of B. oceca, Hewitson. The
descriptions of the so-called variations of B. oceta by Wood-
Mason and de Nicéville in Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, 1881,
p. 258, are to me incomprehensible—B. oceta, Hew., is a
Philippine insect. Hewitson’s type, now in the British Mu-
seum, which I have carefully examined, is from the Philip-
pines, and is not an Indian insect ; above this type Hewitson
appears to have put several Indian Hesperids which are of
two if not three different species, and none of them correspond
with the type. If any one will examine the type of Nilasera
amantes, Hew., in the British Museum incorporated collec-
tion, with the insects Hewitson placed over that name in the
Hewitsonian collection, also in the British Museum, he will
understand in what manner Hewitson failed sometimes to
recognize his own species. There are several other instances
of a similar kind in the Hewitsonian collection. If Wood-
Mason and de Nicéville’s contention be correct that this insect
is so very variable as they state, then it must stand as B.
scopulifera, Moore, because it is not B. oceca, Hew.; but it
appears to me that B. scopulifera as described by Moore,
his B. unicolor, and the insect I have now described as B.
sikkima are all good species of constant characteristics; they
vary a little, but not more than Hesperids usually vary, and
I can show a satisfactory series of all three species.

13. Parnara astigmata, n. sp.

&. Upperside blackish brown. Fore wing with two semi-

diaphanous, yellowish-white, confluent spots at the end of the
26*

364 Col. C. Swinhoe on new Indian Butterflies.

cell; a large square spot in the first median interspace, a
smaller spot outside in the interspace above, and two sub-
apical minute spots; in one specimen a third still more minute
spot near the costa. Hind wing without markings ; cilia of
both wings yellowish white, with black marks opposite the
veins.

Underside slightly paler. Fore wing with the spots as
above and with a row of submarginal, indistinct, small, pale
yellowish spots, one in each interspace, down to the second
median interspace. Hind wing with a whorl of seven minute
white spots in the interspaces round the cell, commencing
near the base, with two in the costal interspace, one behind
the other; an indistinct submarginal row of faint whitish
spots, ending with two diffuse, larger, confluent spots in the
interno-median interspace; cilia of both wings as above.

Antenne with the outer half of the club yellowish white ;
hook dark chrome-yellow.

Expanse of wings 1,°5 to 175 inch.

Nilgiri Hills, western slopes, 2000 to 3000 feet; common.

A wonderful mimic of Halpe cerata, Hewitson. The ab-
sence of the discal oblique series of raised scales in the fore
wing above (the sexual characteristic of the genus Halpe) at
once distinguishes it from that genus; above it very nearly
resembles H. cerata, but the discal whorl of spots on the
hind wing is deficient ; below the spots and markings are of
a similar pattern, but are very minute.

14. Suastus bipunctus, n. sp.

& ?. Upperside dark blackish brown. Fore wing with a
small, lunular-shaped, semidiaphanous, whitish spot below
end of cell in the first median interspace, and a smaller round
spot outside in the interspace above. Hind wing without
markings.

Underside paler, with the spots as above, and with markings
and coloration as in S. aditus, Moore.

Hook of antenne dark ochreous. The spots in the females
are larger than in the males ; in one or two specimens of both
sexes there is a very minute subapical spot, but most of the
males are without it, and some of them have only one small
aot in the second median interspace, the other being obso-

ete.

Expanse of wings 1325 to 143; inch. :

Nilgiri Hills, western slopes, 2500 feet. September,
common.

Allied to S. adttus, Moore ; differs in the absence of the

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Scarabeide. 365

two prominent quadrate spots at the end of the cell of the
fore wings above, in the blackness of the cilia, and in the
very minute size of the spots.

15. Teligonus lara, n. sp.

Upperside dark reddish brown. Fore wings elongate, nar-
row, apex produced, pale brownish grey, outer border very
oblique ; three semihyaline spots, much as in 7’. thraz, Linn.,
but comparatively much smaller, nearly white, very faintly
tinted with chrome-yellow. Hind wings without markings.

Underside as above, but paler.

Antenne white for one third before the hooked tip.

Exxpanse of wings 2;%5 inches.

Nicobar Islands.

Allied to 7. thrax, Linn. ; spots similarly placed, but of a
different colour; the band on the antenne white instead of
yellow, and the apex of fore wing pale greyish instead of
brown. ‘The insect is altogether much smaller, the fore wing
much produced, the outer margin being so very oblique as to
leave the hinder margin very short, measuring a trifle over
3{; of an inch.

XLVII.—WNew Scarabzeidee in the British Museum.
By CHARLES O. WATERHOUSE.

I HAVE recently been rearranging and determining the Coleo-
ptera of the family Scarabeide. I was unable to find the
following species described.

Scarabeus Reicher.

Oblongus, sat depressus, niger; capite rugoso, postice medio levi,
antice acute sex-dentato ; thorace elytris bene latiore, paulo con-
vexo, fortiter crebre punctato, linea irregulari mediana maculisque
quatuor ante basin levibus, lateribus crenulatis nigro-ciliatis ;
elytris sat depressis, nigro-fuscis, opacis (sutura levi), distincte
striatis, striis subtiliter punctulatis, interstitiis sat convexis, sub-
tilissime confertissime granulatis, punctis sat parvis subseriatim
notatis, lateribus tricarinatis ; metasterno piloso, medio canalicu-
lato, punctato.

Long. 19 millim.

Hab. Cape of Good Hope.
This species has the general form and characters of S. ¢ntri-
catus, F., but is much larger. The thorax has the punc-

366 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Scarabeeidee.

tures similar to those in S. intricatus, but crowded together,
leaving a smooth median line and four irregular smooth spots
near the base. The elytra are dull, very densely and finely
granular; each interstice has in its middle portion very
minute shining dots, which are placed near together and give
a more shining appearance to the middle of the inteyrstice.
The metasternum has an impressed line for its whole length ;
the punctures are distinct and not very widely separated.

Scarabeus Andersent.

Niger, viridi-cyanescens, nitidus; capite acute sex-dentato; thorace
lato, conyexo, fortiter punctato ; elytris fortiter striatis, striis for-
titer punctatis, interstitiis sat convexis punctis irregularibus inter-
ruptis.

Long. 10 millim.

Hab. Lake Nyassa.

Very near S. morbillosus, Fabr., but slightly tinted with
bluish green. The thorax is broad, convex, and shining,
crenulated at the sides and with long recurved hairs near the
hind angles; the punctures are rather large and deep,
usually separated from each other by the diameter of a punc-
ture, but more distant at the back part of the disk, The
elytra have the striz strongly impressed, each with a series
of strong punctures, which are rather smaller than those on
the thorax ; the interstices are marked at irregular intervals
with punctures similar to those in the strize; these punctures
in some places touch each other and form an impression which
interrupts the interstice. ‘he antenne are yellow, except
the basal joint. The metasternum is smooth and shining
and has a deep longitudinal median impression. ‘The meta-
sternal process is much less prominent than in S, morbillosus,
and more obtuse ; its sloping sides are distinctly punctured.
The anterior tibie have four equidistant teeth, the upper-
most one only slightly smaller than the others. :

Scarabeus Wilson?.

Niger, sat opacus ; capite rugoso, antice acute sex-dentato; thorace
sericeo-opaco, punctis asperatis sat crebre asperso, linea mediana
excepta ; lateribus denticulatis, nigro-ciliatis ; elytris piceo-tinctis,
confertissime subtilissime granulatis, sicut sericeis, leviter striatis,
strliis punctis parvis haud approximatis notatis, interstitiis fere
planis, evidenter sparse punctatis; tibiis anticis longe quadri-
dentatis ; posticis intus dense, extus longius nigro-ciliatis.

Long. 26 millim.

Hab. Persia (J. Wilson, Esq.).

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Scarabeide. 367

This interesting species has the form and general characters
of S. sacer, but has a quite different appearance on account of
the silky sculpture and the longer and more dense hair on the
legs ; the elytra are a little narrower and the reflexed margin
is narrower. The head has a slightly indicated transverse
ridge, interrupted in the middle. The teeth in front and
those on the anterior tibize are rather longer and more slender.
The thorax has the surface extremely finely coriaceous or
granular; studded with very distinct shining granules, the
granules rather larger and distinctly more separated from each
other, and, as is usually the case, they are almost absent in
the middle of the base, where there are some distinct, but not
very deep, punctures; small punctures may also be seen
near the shining granules. The elytra have the interstices
punctured ; the punctures are distinct but not deep, irregular,

generally separated from each other by about two diameters.

Sebasteos Pogget.

Convexus, niger, parum nitidus ; capite crebre ruguloso, epistomio
subtus dentibus duobus armato; thorace lato, convexo, crebre
fortiter punctato, linea mediana levi, angulis anticis acutis extror-
sum directis; elytris basi angustatis, striatis, interstitiis convexis,
punctis nonnullis subseriatim notatis ; tibiis anticis longis, angus-
tis, intus dentatis, ante apicem sinuatis, extus quadri-dentatis.

Long. 15 millim,

Hab. Congo.

Somewhat resembles S. galenus, but is rather larger and
differs as follows :—Head relatively broader, with the poste-
rior angles more rounded; epistome broadly triangularly
emarginate, with the two middle teeth not so porrect; the
surface longitudinally rugulose. Thorax very broad, much
more strongly punctured, or, rather, the punctures are much
larger, irregular, generally very near together; at the sides
small tubercles take the place of the punctures. Hlytra con-
siderably narrowed at the base, and consequently the sides
are more rounded; the interstices are convex, especially the
third and fifth, each with a line of distinct punctures. ‘The
anterior tibie are longer, with the apical third distinctly
sinuate on the inner side.

Gymnopleurus Thelwalli.

Rotundato-oblongus, bene convexus, fusco-gneus, supra surdus ;
capite antice medio emarginato, granulato; thorace coriaceo-
opaco, nitide granulato, maculis novem paulo elevatis nitidis
ornato, lateribus obtuse denticulatis, angulis posticis acutis, paulo
productis; elytris brevibus, conyexis, granulis minutis aspersis,

368 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Scarabeeidee.

haud striatis, vittis paulo elevatis, interruptis, nitidis instructis ;
lateribus pone humeros acute angulatis, ante apicem haud dila-
tatis, apice arcuatim rotundatis.

Long. 9 millim.

Hab. Lake Nyassa (Thelwall).

Nearly allied to G. Kenigit, F., but shorter and more con-
vex. The head is finely coriaceous and studded with small
shining granules, which are slightly separated from each
other; there is no smooth median line. The thorax is of
nearly the same form as in G’. Kwnigit, but the sides are more
rounded in front and crenulate; the surface is coriaceous or
finely granular, thickly studded with small shining granules,
which are rather near together; there is a small median
smooth spot on the disk, with three irregular shining spots on
each side, and between these and the side (behind the middle)
there is an oblique spot, somewhat interrupted in the middle ;
there is a small impression in the middle of the base. The
elytra have an acute angular projection before the lateral
sinuosity ; the surface is dull and studded with minute
shining granules, which are generally near together; each
elytron has two very much interrupted, slightly raised, slightly
shining stripes, and between the suture and the first stripe
there is an elongate but ill-defined smooth spot. ‘The meta-
sternum is not produced anteriorly, but slopes down, and is
studded with a few asperate punctures.

Gymnopleurus Bocandet,

Oblongus, convexus, eeneo-fuscus, surdus, flavo-griseo-pilosus ; capite
granulato, antice fere octo-dentato ; thorace antice oblique angus-
tato, crebre granulato, maculis septem parum elevatis nitidis,
fovea laterali profunda, basi foveis duabus distinctis, lateribus
post medium paulo sinuatis, haud serrulatis, angulis posticis paulo
productis, obtuse rotundatis; elytris subtilissime sericeo-granu-
latis, tenuiter sat crebre asperato-punctatis, leviter obtuse striatis,
interstitiis alternis maculis obsoletis calvis ornatis; corpore sub-
tus sat nitido, cuprascente.

Long. 12 millim.

Hab, Senegambia.

This species is closely allied to G. maculosus, McLeay,
but is more convex, of a brassy brown colour, and much less
distinctly spotted. ‘The head has eight angulations in front,
the middle pair more prominent ; above there is on each side
an oblique raised line. The thorax is formed as in G. macu-
losus, but is more convex and has the posterior angles more
prominent ; there is a small smooth spot in the middle and
two others on each side of the disk, and another close to the

My. C. O. Waterhouse on new Scarabeeidee. 369

lateral fovea. The elytra have the small asperate punctures
distinct and moderately close together ; the spots on the alter-
nate interstices are very obscure.

Gymnopleurus signaticollis.

Obscure fusco-seneus, surdus, brevissime flavo-griseo-pilosus; thorace
antice oblique angustato, crebre granulato, maculis circiter octo
nitidis eneis ornato, basi bifoveolato, lateribus haud serrulatis,
angulis posticis rotundatis; elytris subtilissime coriaceis, crebre
subtiliter granulatis, striis vix impressis.

Long. 12 millim.

Hab. Nubia.

This species is very close to G. maculosus, McLeay, but is
quite differently coloured and has no spots on the elytra. The
head is rather closely punctured. It has four teeth in front
(besides the obtuse angle of the lateral lobe), the outer ones
obtuse. ‘The thorax is obliquely narrowed in front, broadest
before the hind angles, which are rounded and not so produced
as in G. maculosus; the surface is dull, dotted with very
small shining granules, which are rather close together;
there are two very distinct fovez at the base and the lateral
fovea is also very distinct ; there is a small, smooth, shining
green spot in the middle and another between this and the
base, and on each side of the disk are three very irregular
shining spots. The elytra are rather flattened, with very
obscure strie, dull, dotted with minute shining granules,
which are rather close together. The metasternum is decli-
vous, rather closely punctured.

Gymnopleurus Reicher.

Fusco-niger, opacus; capite sat crebre granulato, antice triangu-
lariter inciso; thorace ante medium oblique angustato, postice
subparallelo, confertim subtiliter rugoso, antice granulis nitidis
asperso, disco et basi medio impressione notatis ; elytris coriaceis,
obsolete striatis, interstitiis secundo et quarto parum convexis,
granulis minutis aspersis ; metasterno sat crebre punctato, medio
paulo inflato.

Long. 11 millim,

Hab. Abyssinia.

This species is allied to G. maculosus, but has much the
appearance of G. mopsus. The head as in G. mopsus, but a
little narrower and with a more distinct angular emargination
in front ; the raised lines are the same; the granulation is a
little more distinct. ‘The thorax is more convex, more finely
rugose, more distinctly angular in the middle of the sides,

370 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Scarabeeidee.

more parallel behind the middle ; the surface is sprinkled with
minute shining granules, as in G. mopsus, but they are
smaller and only distinct at the front margin and front angles ;
there is a very shallow impression in the middle of the disk
and another at the base, and on each side of the disk there
are indications of similar impressions; near the front there
are two very inconspicuous shining spots; the lateral fovea
is well marked. The elytra are dull, with the second and
fourth interstices very gently convex; the surface is sprinkled
with minute shining granules, smaller and much less nume-
rous than in G. mopsus. The anterior femora have a small
tooth on the front, rather beyond the middle. The meta-
sternum is more widely swollen in front than in G. mopsus.

Gymnopleurus Jacksont.

JEruginosus, supra surdus; capite antice bidentato; thorace lato,
antice arcuatim angustato, confertim subtiliter rugoso, angulis
posticis perparum reflexis; elytris confertim subtiliter rugosis,
stria suturali solum distincta; metasterno antice paulo tube-
roso.

Long. 15 millim.

Hab. E. Africa, Masailand (f. J. Jackson, Esq.).

Dark green, dull. Head finely rugose; bidentate in front ;
the usual oblique ridges at the sides not extending far back.
Thorax very broad, closely and, rather finely but distinctly
rugose, with a slight sinuosity behind the posterior angles,
which are rectangular (but obtuse at the very apex) and
slightly reflexed. The elytra at their widest part are scarcely
so wide as the widest part of the thorax; the surface rugose
as the thorax. The anterior femora with a small tooth at
less than one third from the apex. Metasternum closely and
finely rugose in front, with a distinct round swelling in the
middle. Sides of the metasternum dotted with small tuber-
cles. Pygidium closely and finely rugose.

This species is very near to G. humanus, McL., but is a
little less finely rugose, has the posterior angles of the thorax
less prominent and less acute ; and the metasternum has the
anterior swelling rounded, and not at all pointed.

Gymnopleurus Delagorguet.

Oblongo-ovatus, paulo convexus, opacus, zneo-fuscus, subtus erugi-
noso-niger ; capite crebre granulato, anticequadri-dentato; thorace
creberrime granuloso-rugoso, angulis posticis obtusis; elytris
leviter striatis, creberrime granuloso-rugosis, sutura parum nitida ;
metasterno antice paulo obtuse tuberoso, granulato.

Long. 17 millim.

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Scarabeeider. oll

Hab. Port Natal.

Dull brassy brown. The head with four obtuse triangular
teeth in front ; the surface dotted with more shining granules ;
those in front are curved, slightly separated from each other ;
on the vertex they are closer, smaller, and more elongate;
the usual lateral ridges are distinct, and curve inwards pos-
terlorly. The thorax is evenly convex ; the surface granular,
the granules slightly shining, very distinct; between the
granules the surface is very finely rugose; the lateral im-
pression is small; the posterior angles obtuse, not produced ;
there are no basal impressions. ‘The elytra are a trifle wider
than the thorax ; the striz are distinct but dull; the surface
is dotted with minute but distinct shining granules, which
are very close together. The pygidium is rugose. The
anterior femora have a small tooth just beyond the middle.
The tibiz are moderately broad, with three strong teeth.
The metasternum in front is somewhat asperate, with a
swelling in the middle which is inclined to be angular ; the
sides of the metasternum are strongly asperate.

This species has much the appearance of G. mundus, but
has no basal fovea to the thorax, and the sculpture is quite
different.

Gymnopleurus tnconspicuus.

Oblongus, olivaceus, eruginoso tinctus, parum nitidus, subtus eru-
ginosus, nitidus ; capite granulogso et subtilissime rugoso, antice
obtuse quadri-dentato ; thorace convexo, ante medium oblique
angustato, opaco, crebre granuloso, basi biimpresso, lateribus
pone medium paulo sinuatis, angulis posticis oblique rotundatis,
perparum reflexis; elytris thorace vix latioribus, sat crebre
nitido-granulatis, leviter striatis; metasterno medio nitido,
tenuiter parce punctato, antice angulato-tuberoso, opaco, sub-
tiliter crebre granulato ; pygidio obsolete punctulato.

Long. 17 millim.

Hab. N.W. India, Mhow (Major Yerbury).

The head is very finely rugose, with more shining granules
scattered over the surface, the granules of unequal size,
strongest on each side of the vertex, those at the front part of
the epistome range themselves in twos and threes transversely.
The thorax is evenly convex, dull, with very distinct de-
pressed granules, which are close together on the disk (often
touching each other), rather smaller and more separated at the
sides ; the posterior angles are slightly impressed and
obliquely rounded. ‘The elytra are dull, the granules very
distinct and shining, but very small and very slightly
raised, moderately close together ; with a strong magnitying-

ae Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Scarabzida.

glass minute asperate punctures may be seen between the
granules. The anterior tibia are incurved beyond the
middle. The anterior femora have a small tooth rather
before the middle. The metasternum is vertical in front, the
vertical part finely and closely granular.

This species is very close to G. Dejeanid, but is differently
coloured, a trifle narrower, and the posterior angles of the
thorax are more impressed and a little more prominent.

Gymnopleurus subtilis.

Oblongus, paulo convexus, niger, parum nitidus; capite subtiliter
rugoso, antice granuloso, obtuse quadri-dentato; thorace creber-
rime subtiliter granuloso-rugoso, lateribus arcuatis, angulis
posticis obtusis; elytris leviter striatis, subtilissime coriaceis,
crebre subtiliter granulosis ; metasterno medio fere levi, nitido,
antice convexo, crebre granuloso, fusco-fimbriato.

Long. 19 millim.

Hab. N. India (Col. Buckley).

The head is closely and rather finely rugose, more asperate
in front. ‘The middle pair of teeth in front separated by a
comparatively narrow incision. ‘The thorax is not very con-
vex, a little more narrowed in front than behind; densely
and finely granulose-rugose, with numerous small shallow
punctures scattered over the surface, only visible in certain
lights ; the lateral fovea is round and not very deep; there
are no basal impressions ; the margins are narrowly and
slightly reflexed, the posterior angles obtuse and not pro-
minent laterally. The elytra are very finely coriaceous and
finely granular, the granules rather close together, very small
(but slightly unequal), shining. The upper margin of the
basal segment of the abdomen is distinctly thickened. The
metasternum.-is rounded in front (not tuberose in the middle),
archéd, granulose, and clothed with long brown hair.

This species is allied to G. caffer, Fihr.

Gymnopleurus diffinis.

Oblongus, sat convexus, sat nitidus, eneo-cupreus, pedibus nigre-
scentibus ; capite confertim subtiliter rugoso, epistomio asperato,
antice quadri-dentato; thorace subtiliter coriaceo-rugoso, sat crebre
minute punctato, lateribus rotundatis, angulis posticis haud pro-
minentibus; elytris sericeo-opacis, leviter striatis, creberrime
subtiliter nitido-granulatis.

Long. 14 millim.

Hab. Senegambia.
The thorax is somewhat shining, more obliquely narrowed

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinodds. 373

in front than behind, very obtusely angular at the sides, more
finely sculptured than the head, very delicately but densely
rugose, and finely punctured; the punctures are small but
distinct, and separated from each other by about three dia-
meters of a puncture, at the sides they are indistinct; the
lateral fovea is small and round. There are no basal im-
pressions. The elytra are less shining than the thorax, very
finely coriaceous, with very closely-placed, minute, shining
dots or granules ; the strie are fine, and in them some very
fine punctures may be seen. The metasternum is shining,
with an interrupted median impressed line, slightly curved
down anteriorly, and then more obliquely declivous, the front
part rather dull, rather closely asperate-punctate and pilose,
with an indication of a small angular tuberosity in the middle.
The anterior femora have a small tooth rather beyond the
middle. ©.

This species is allied to G. hilaris, Hope, but the thorax
is more narrowed at the base, &c.

XLVIIIl.— British Fossil Crinoids.
By F. A. Batuer, M.A., F.G.S.

Il. The Classification of the Inadunata Fistulata
(continued from p. 334).

[Plate XV. ]

DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERS.
C. The Arms.

We have now to consider the value of Arm-characters in
classification. Here the main principles are so simple and
so generally acknowledged that their discussion need not
detain us long. They are as follows :—

The simplest form of arm consists of a series of ossicles
continuing the line of the Radial; the joint-faces of the ossicles
are parallel to one another, and there are no pinnules. This,
it is fairly obvious, must also be the most primitive form of
arm: examples are, HHybocrinus, Hoplocrinus, and Baero-
crinus (Pl. XV. figs. 1a, 6).

Nearly as simple would be an arm splitting in two, on the
2nd or 3rd costal as axillare, and of which each half should
resemble the preceding type: such arms are not indeed found
in any known Fistulata, but they represent a stage through

374 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Orinotds.

which that group must have passed. What appears to have
been the case is that this dichotomy once started was rapidly
continued, so that the next stage presents us with arms
dividing equally at fairly regular intervals: Dendrocrinus,
Flomocrinus, Locrinus, Merocrinus, Cyathocrinus, and a few
genera closely allied to these have arms of this type (Pl. XV.
figs. 2,3,4). As every additional bifurcation is an advantage
to the animal, it is reasonable to suppose that an arm with a
large number of terminal branches is more advanced in deve-
lopment than one with few; some species of Cyathocrinus for
instance have a far larger number of bifurcations than others.
The next stage shows one limb of each bifurcation after
the first becoming smaller than the other; thus, instead of
one regularly dichotomous arm, there arise two main arms
with bifurcating branches given off alternately on either side.
At first these branches attain quite or almost the length of
the main arm, e. g. Heterocrinus, Ohiocrinus, and Belem-
nocrinus (Pl. XV. figs. 5, 6, 7, 20). The advantage of
such an arrangement over simple dichotomy is not at
once obvious, but it seems to be that the food-grooves are
thus more evenly distributed over the area covered by the
extended arms; further we may suppose the arms to be more
easily wielded when there is a stout median ridge. At any
rate further evolution takes place in this direction ; the main
arm becomes fringed with armlets which again bear small
lateral branches, e. g. Vasocrinus, Barycrinus, and some
Botryocrint (Pl. XV. figs. 9,10). When finally the arm-
lets become small, cease to branch, and are regularly placed
on alternate sides of successive joints, they are called Pinnules ;
a species of Lotryocrinus from the Wenlock Limestone is the
earliest form known to have reached this stage, which is
again exemplified in Decadocrinus, Scytalecrinus, Graphio-
ertnus, and other allied genera (Pl. XV. figs. 13, 14, 15).
This, however, is not the only way in which pinnulate arms
have arisen ; pinnules of course always originate in the same
way, but their arrangement on the arm may be different.
Anomalocrinus (Pl. XY. fig. 11) is enough to show that pin-
nules may be developed directly on a dichotomous arm,
although it is so anomalous a form that it leads no further.
But the pinnules of Scaphiocrinus and Potertocrinus also
appear to have arisen on dichotomous arms without inter-
fermg with the dichotomy (Pl. XV. fig. 12); how this
may have happened is seen in a very beautiful specimen of
Cyathocrinus in the British Museum in which the arms are
very finely divided at the tips and so closely resemble pinnules
that even Mr. Springer was deceived when he examined the

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinords. Be

specimen. Similar minute division of the arms is common in
Homocrinus and may equally well have occurred in Pariso-
crinus ; and it is with these genera rather than with Cyatho-
crinus that Poterdocrinus is in other respects allied. Pinnulate
arms of this type may continue to increase in complexity by
dichotomy, and then by giving off lateral branches just in
the same way as simple arms; but such complexity does not
appear till the Mesozoic Epoch.

The types of arm hitherto considered are uniserial, ¢. e. with
the joint surfaces of the ossicles more or less parallel to one
another. But in pinnulate arms, since every ossicle of the
main arm is really an axillare with its two upper joint surfaces
unequal in size, there arises a zigzag arrangement of the joint
surfaces. This may be so intensified as to produce a biserial
arrangement of arm-ossicles ; thus in a given length of arm
the number of pinnules is doubled, greatly to the advantage
of the animal. This biserial arrangement is chiefly developed
in the genera with the two main arms in each ray; the
same physiological end is attained in a different manner by
the genera with dichotomous arms.

The foregoing statement of facts will probably be accepted
by all; from it the following consequences arise :—Neither
the branching of the arms by itself, nor the development of
pinnules by itself can be taken as characters indicative of
divergence, for similar evolution may have taken place along
many different lines. As regards arms, for instance, no one
would associate Ohiocrinus with Vasocrinus, Holocrinus with
Scytalecrinus, Iocrinus with Homocrinus or Cyathocrinus, or
Euspirocrinus with Oncocrinus because these genera happen
respectively to have very similar arm-structure. The unim-
portance of pinnules on the other hand is best exemplified
by the genus Botryocrinus, for while the Swedish species
have armlets and not pinnules, the common Dudley species
has undoubted pinnules and its arm-arrangement in no way
differs from that of Decadocrinus. In recent Crinoids pin-
nules differ from arms only by containing the fertile portions
of the genital glands; but it is pretty obvious that in these
older Crinoids without pinnules, the genital products must
have been borne at the tips of all the arm-branches : hence
the physiological difference need not even have been so great
as the morphological. There is, however, one character, or
rather combination of characters, which seems to be of rather
greater importance, and that is the persistence of a simply
bifurcate arm bearing first armlets and then pinnules, as
opposed to the development of pinnules on a dichotomous arm,
Between these two types no connecting-links are evident.

376 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds.

Arm-characters in general may, however, be used as a check
on other methods of classification ; they enable us to correct
possible errors in phylogeny, for instance a pinnulate form
cannot be the ancestor of one with simple arms. In this
aspect their study proves of great importance.

D. Modes of Union.

The different varieties of suture and articulation by which
the plates and ossicles of Crinoidea are held together will be
found explained in the section on Terminology (p. 314, ante)
under the words Syzygy, Close Suture, Loose Suture, and
Muscular Articulation ; repetition is therefore unnecessary.

On the variations of these structures in different genera
Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer have laid some stress (Rev.
III. (189) Proc. 1886, p. 115), and have taken the greater
differentiation, of articulation in their family Poteriocrinide as
‘a good distinction ”’ between them and their family Cyatho-
crinide. These differences are, however, rather of degree than
of kind; loose suture and even articulation may take the
place of a close suture whenever there is any need for greater
movement ; while on the other hand a sutural union may
become syzygial when greater firmness is required. It
would certainly not be philosophical to separate a genus
because certain of its articulations were better developed than
those of the other genera of its family. Undoubtedly, how-
ever, some amount of regular evolution is observable in this
point; later forms, as a rule, combine firmness and free motion,
while earlier forms are but slightly flexible.

A difference of union, correlated with a difference in arm-
branching already pointed out, is worth notice. In dichoto-
mous pinnulate arms the several axillaria are united to the
succeeding plates by muscular articulation; in simply bifur-
cating pinnulate arms there is only one axillare that can be so
united. ‘Thus the more cumbrous dichotomous arms have
their powers of movement equalized with those of the simply
bifureating arms (Decadocrinus, Scytalecrinus). But in some
later genera of the simply bifurcate type the balance is again
brought over by the articulation of several of the proximal
arm-plates (Graphiocrinus, Hrisocrinus, Hupachycrinus) , such
as never takes place in dichotomous pinnulate arms.

PRINCIPLES OF CLASSIFICATION.

The chief variations in the structure of the Fistulata con-
sidered, it only remains to be seen how we can best frame a

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Ortnotds. 377

classification that shall show the true relationships of the
various genera. For it is this which has come to be the
object of Systematic Biology. Morphology nowadays devotes
itself to tracing the past history and true kinship of the forms
of life; most especially is this the province of those divisions
of the science known as Kmbryology and Paleontology.
But whereas Embryology deciphers its history in the palim-
psest of an individual, Paleontology reads records that are both
consecutive and distinct. ‘The first step then is to gather from
the successive fossils the actual history of the lines of life.
Two forms might be very similar, but if one came from the
Cambrian and the other from the Trias, we should hesitate
to place them near one another before having worked out the
actual descent; indeed we should not be surprised to find
them belonging to quite different Families. This, however,
might equally be the case with two forms not only similar but
contemporaneous. How many a group once thought to be
self-centred and clearly circumscribed has been proved to have
a polygenetic origin!

But Paleontology, while thus indicating the solution of one
problem of classification, puts before us another of no less
difficulty. The Zoologist, or—to better name him—the
Neontologist, deals with forms co-existing at a single epoch ;
the Palzontologist has to deal with forms that come and go
through many an earth-period. A line of life not only gives
off branches, but itself varies, so that the later descendants
differ greatly from their earlier ancestors. The problem is to
express this latter variation in Classification. A new term is
required: a Serves must be distinguished from a D¢vision;
the former is a difference in degree, the latter in kind. I have
thought it necessary to draw attention to these well-known
principles, for any Classification must depend on its methods
no less than on the facts to be represented by it, and every
one’s method does not seem to be the same. It is in fact the
fashion with a certain school of naturalists to sneer at phylo-
geny. But surely to learn the history of the races of living
beings, and the laws governing that history, is the object of
all our labours. On this alone can a true and final Classifi-
cation be based, and to express this in convenient form is the
Classifier’s only purpose.

GEOLOGICAL HIsTory.

Let us then turn to the history of the Fistulate Crinoids.
The outline of this history must be sought for in the time-
succession of the various genera. ‘This is expressed in the

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 27

378 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Orinoids.

accompanying Table (I.) of Geological Distribution. The
American rock series has been taken as the most convenient ;
for the horizons of the various fossils are more distinct and have
been more carefully noted by American geologists, and Crinoids
appear to be found in America at more horizons than in
Europe. The horizons or localities of extra-American genera
are noted in brackets: W. L.=Wenlock Limestone and
M. L.=Mountain Limestone. To those who have read care-
fully the earlier part of this paper, a mere inspection of this
table will suggest the various lines of descent. So far as
positive evidence goes there is nothing here to conflict with
the history of evolution in various structures as sketched out
in preceding sections. There are of course gaps in the chain
of evidence ; but these were to be expected. Their slight
importance is brought out more clearly by the plan here
adopted of printing the name of a genus only opposite those
strata in which it has actually been found. Calceocrinus for
instance, which is known in the Niagara and Wenlock Lime-
stones and which persists with slight modifications to the
Keokuk, must have been living in the Waverley, Chemung,
and Helderberg eras. Till it has been discovered we need
not hope to find forms intermediate between, say, Botryocrinus
and Vasocrinus. Moreover the sudden appearance in the
Trenton Limestone of no less than 9 genera, all very distinct
from the 8 rare genera found in earlier rocks, is an obvious
indication of a series of Cambrian ancestors as yet known
only by a few undecipherable fragments: it is as unnecessary,
as it would be absurd, to derive all these from Hybocrinus and
Hoplocrinus.

Among the forms known from the Trenton and earlier rocks
are both Monocyclic and Dicyclic genera. I have already
given reasons to show that Monocyclica may have been derived
from Dicyclica (p.318 ante) ; but the table shows that certain
Monocyclic forms are actually the earliest known, viz. Hybo-
crinus, HHoplocrinus, and Baerocrinus. Now these forms
differ so markedly, both in the arm-structure and in the
arrangement of the anal plates, from the other early Mono-
cyclica that they must be regarded as quite a separate family.
It is impossible to derive any of the other genera immediately
from them. This family—the Hybocrinide of v. Zittel, as
emended by Wachsmuth and Springer—may therefore be set
on one side, and the course thus far cleared.

The remaining Monocyclica of the Trenton are Heteno-
crinus, HHeterocrinus, Iocrinus, and Castocrinus. Of these
the last is obviously already much modified in the direction of
Proclivocrinus and Calceocrinus ; if the line along which the

| To face p. 378.

the I

Encrinus. Dadoer. Trias.

we eee

thiocrs Erisocr. Ceriocr. Coal-measures.

ero ota Kaskaskia,

heme. Bites Spbsr ato St. Louis.
| Dy Sees sre sence. | Warsaw.

Stemmatocr. .... | Keokuk.
Erisoer, -++++. | Upper Burlington.
ao Erisocr. Pesan Lower Burlington.
mu pwns o++... | Waverley.
Stites Tqeieeyeee Chemung.
|_laer. ierienae ocr Oeo Hamilton.
acer. atone fa aint Upper Helderberg.

|
ee ; ele era eee Oriskany.

Bncisitens »++... | Lower Helderberg.

Jer. tenths lite abe Niagara.

S sietobte Tatentets Clinton.

MS akeie HOonoe Hudson River.
mae! aon antes: Utica.

aotoars Arend Trenton.
i eco oor -..+.. | Black River.

Betas wnlcdus | I ORRZys

Pee : ;
tree serene veeene bee eee eet teense peeeee . eae Seas Pry) eeees . * seeeee aeeeee weenee shee

we eeee teen seeeee weeeee seeeee tenes

seeeee peeves eenese ' ae ce ere, ween wees veces Eupaehyer, seneee

renee seeeee oe a f b P
weeeee beer os . teeeee sees G _ ~‘Seap mr j. Woodocr, ...... fHydreionocr. Cyathocr, = ..-.-. eeeeee eteeee eens cr. teens

¥ , 7
ee eeeeee ae oo SS 2 ee cr : eeeeee seen peeeee tone onevee opeoes

Dor sa = een a Oe Se ce Pe ee. a <td os tase

seeeee Catillocr, arenes seeeee Z 7 . sens Fy — Sr ry my . bh Loe : asee Tribrachioer, eee

seeers Catillocr, Pe bsaa SyteRe rare . Poterioer. %, . Hydreionocr. Cyathocr. ...... “4 Mu S cade Phialoer, rerss seeece senna
f (CM. L.). “es i

beets penne seeees settee sees Poterior Qyathocr, 9"5..... 00 seeees . 3 , seeeee seenee serves — Erlsoor, teeeee

eet tee thee wrens . . yeee Ce OS) re ee Ce ee | ween eee weheee eee eee seen oeeeee

seen penne errr eens Votero see’ Lo Fees ‘ . seer essen Pritys beeeee weeeee weeeee
7 é

teens eee £ J i . 4 AGhraOGOR Necece “ ohoess OWMMOOR esses: DOOM ity e sss ciceee == vs vne . fereee tence

weer teaeee neeeee os 5 eee eee eeeeee Asnchnocr. COyathocr. Codincr, wsseee nennee euwene sees peees oweeee seneee neeeee sees

er . . Le seeeee
- ° :
7 pe Saree 65x . vee - . seeee . nee . . eens Sesese 8 seeees dreese -— weeeee Fenvee senses tenses seenee . - weet - . Cor) BO
at A, 7 » ‘

tiaras ivi Wensee § cdunen sepeee seeees veonee) vaewes ceceee | Ningara,
:

e see
Pats

- rr ee ee cy weeeee neta ween weneee eeeeee eee eens
ea ee Buccs om muratecsau. sewer Bane¥as Fvtos el. Vaart’ eee eet Ce er ceeeee senees seseee | Hudson River,
Sfesaaee shenees ee ee De eee ee men Be. tats Fences) 8 ate ie ee cee | Utica.

_—_Ectenoer,
shiefer)
naten-Kalk),

eden = sa asee teenee Desccs «s sniite es weeees |= wepaee 6 eh aeue pp esee 0G bawnee = eeeene = eo mte te eene rr .
|

en, +) ete en tire S.ccceeCNE cess, caccee MEES@S 9 US wkhiaue ### = sanceoe Cvvves cocces pincss "| ecece = wenesel wesves e8eene wessnr

* Dr. Ringueberg tells me of this in a better dated 6th March, 1890.

- mas

ur re a cea

7 ere a

a 7
—<——— =

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds. 379

development of these genera has proceeded be prolonged back-
wards instead of forwards, we arrive at an ancestral image
not unlike Letenocrinus, Heterocrinus, or Locrinus. We
therefore conclude that these latter forms approach more
nearly to the common ancestor. It remains to be seen which
of the three is the most ancestral. In the first place Jocrinus
has a simpler,structure so far as the radials proper are con-
cerned; and that in this case the simplicity is archaic I have
already tried to show (p. 327, end of first paragraph).
Secondly as regards the anal plates I have argued that
Locrinus represents a more primitive condition (top of p. 330).
Thirdly the arms are simply dichotomous and not at all
specialized into main arm and armlets. These arguments
should be enough; but to my mind the existence of an exactly
similar and contemporaneous form among the Dicyclica—viz,
Merocrinus—proves that the two were descended from an
ancestor possessing their common characters, and probably
with a Dicyclic base. This ancestor then, if its existence be
granted, was likewise the progenitor of Hctenocrinus and
feterocrinus, and, among the Dicyclica, of Ottawacrinus and
probably Carabocrinus, and possibly of Dendrocrinus and
Euspirocrinus,

The Monocyclic base is of course enough to separate Heteno-
ertnus, Locrinus, &e. from the Dicyclic genera, and at their
subsequent history we shall now do well to glance. Whether
Fleterocrinus or Ectenocrinus be the older is hard to say ;
Fleterocrinus probably, as the brachianal is in a slightly more
primitive position; the arms also are simpler in that the arm-
lets are not so reduced in size, and the syzygial union of
alternate joints characteristic of Hetenocrinus is not here deve-
loped. Be this as it may, Ohdocrinus is, both in time and
arm-development, a natural descendant of Heterocrinus.
Anomalocrinus is a peculiar offshoot from the same stock.
Further than this it is impossible to trace the history of this
family. Hdriocrinus, Belemnocrinus, and Holocrinus, though
Monocyclic, had certainly a different origin; Hdrdocrinus,
however, is so extremely specialized in other respects that one
cannot perceive its true affinities.

Mycocrinus and Catillocrinus appear to be connected in
the structure of the dorsal cup with Calceocrinus ; but the
drooping on the stem, which seems to have been the main
factor in inducing the structure of Calceocrinus, does not
operate here. The resemblance may be merely homoplastic ;
if anything more, we must suppose that structures originally
selected as conducing to one special object, were on a sudden
diverted to another quite distinct. The peculiar arm-arrange-

7H fs

380 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Orinotds.

ment may have arisen from the modified lateral arms of
Calceocrinus along lines similar to those followed in the
evolution of Crotalocrinus. The whole problem, however, is
one that, in the absence of more complete knowledge, admits
of much speculation but of no satisfactory solution.

To pass to the Trenton Dicyclica—similar reasons cause
me to regard Merocrinus as the most ancestral of the 5 genera.
From Merocrinus, Ottawacrinus difters but little, and the two
were doubtless derived from a common ancestor of not much

earlier date. With this same ancestor Carabocrinus, though
an anomalous form, may have been closely connected. But
Dendrocrinus was pr robably derived more directly from tees
erinus, which, except in the development of a radianal,
closely resembles. Huspirocrinus again shows, so far as ae
arrangement of the anal area is concerned, a slight advance on
Dendroer tnus, from an immediate ancestor of which genus it

was probably ‘descended. The arms of these genera resemble
one another in their simple dichotomy, and afford no evidence
either way. One thing is plam—Merocrinus, Ottawacrinus,
Dendrocrinus, and Euspir ocrtnus are all closely connected,
and are all primitive. Their exact relationships are of less
importance.

Proceeding to the Niagara and Wenlock Limestones we
find, chiefly in the Old World, a great influx of new forms.
Thenarocrinus may be connected with Carabocrinus, but its
exact significance will be more fittingly discussed in a later
paper. Llomocrinus very obviously carries on the line of
Dendrocrinus. Huspirocrinus of Gothland and Closterocrinus
of the Clinton group are direct descendants of the Trenton
Euspirocrinus obconicus, while Ampheristocrinus is a very
close relation.

The four genera Streptocrinus, Arachnocrinus, Cyatho-
crtnus, and Gissocrinus resemble one another in the presence
of a large brachianal in line with the radials, and in_ the
absence of aradianal. In this latter respect they differ from
all their contemporaries ; and here a moot point crops up :—
has the radianal become atrophied in Cyathocrinus, or was it
never developed? Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer adopt
the former, | incline to the latter view. If my reading of
Ottawacrinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 12) be correct, it is very easy to
derive Cyathocrinus and its allied genera from that genus
without supposing such a waste of force as the sudden growth
and more sudden disappearance of a radianal. ‘I'he American
authors were evidently driven to their view by their belief that
the radianal was a primitive element of the dorsal cup. They
will perhaps point out that Botryocrinus and Sicyocrinus

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids. 381

actually represent the intermediate stages in the atrophy of
the radianal ; this, however, is disproved by the arms, for while
those of Cyathors inus &c. are simply dichotomous, the more
specialized armlets are already developed in Sicyocrinus and
Botryocrinus.

Clearly then the Dicyclica of Niagara and Wenlock age
must be divided into three groups: one with brachianal, large
radianal, and tendency of tube-plates to sink into dorsal cup 5
a second with large brachianal only ; and a third with large
brachianal and with small radianal. The first group has
rather slender, long, dichotomous arms; the second has short,
rather stout, dichotomous arms; the third has stouter arms,
as a rule with armlets.

Following the fortunes of the first group, Homocrinus leads
us through the Lower Devonian to the Hifel-Kalk of Murope
and the Hamilton group of America. Here occur Pariso-
erinus, Poteriocrinus, and Scaphiocrinus, all closely resembling
one another in the anal area, and in this point also not far
removed from Homocrinus. ‘The main difference is observ-
able in the arms; those of Homoerinus and Parisocrinus are
simple and dichotomous, while those of Potertocrinus and
Scaphiocrinus are already pinnulate. There is here one of
those gaps which a better knowledge of American Devonian
Crinoids would probably fill. From Scaphiocrinus through
Woodocrinus to Celiocrinus and Hydretonocrinus the stages
are gradual and easily traced.

It is convenient next to take the third group mentioned
above, viz. the Botryocrinus group. Here again is a great
gap: at the same time there can be little doubt that both
Vasocrinus and Barycrinus are direct descendants of Botryo-
ertnus ; with them Atelestocrinus is closely connected. Deca-
docrinus, which comes in with Vasocrinus, appears to me to
be also descended from Lotryocrinus, although it is rather
further removed from it than is Vasocrinus. With Decado-
crinus are closely connected the rather later forms Graphio-
crinus and Scytalecrinus. Graphioerinus, however, presents
that modification in the anal area (Pl. XLV. fig. 3 36 6) which
through Bursacrinus, Phialocrinus, and Syn yphoert tnus leads
on to Lrisocrinus, Ceriocrinus, and Stemmatocrinus, and
culminates in the Triassic Dadocrinus and Enerinus. A
different modification of the Decadocrinus type is seen in
Hupachycrinus, with which Tribrachiocrinus is probably to
be connected. Cromyocrinus is a direct offshoot trom
Eupachycrinus and to it in turn Agassizocrinus is closely

allied.
‘These relationships are so obvious, and in fact so generall
} ) S

382 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds.

acknowledged, that I have not judged it necessary to enter
into details. But there is one point in which I differ very
materially from previous writers; that 1s the separation of
these forms which I have just described as descended from
Botryocrinus. Other authors place them close beside Pot-
ervocrinus (s.str.) and Scaphiocrinus. But the dichotomous
many-branched arms of these two genera and their allies
could hardly have sprung from the bifurcate, heavily pinnu-
late arms of Decadocrinus, Graphiocrinus, and Scytalecrinus,
without leaving some traces of the process; these latter closely
resemble the arms of Vasocrinus and of some species of
Botryocrinus. ‘This seems a sufficient reason for separating
the two groups; I have already alluded to differences of
articulation connected therewith; besides this there is a
general similarity of what is called “ habit’ in the members
of each group, and there is certainly nothing to oppose their
alliance in this manner.

To return to the Cyathocrinus group; that genus itself
persists unchanged to the Coal-measures. In Codiacrinus
the brachianal seems to have been again raised above the
level of the radials, and has not yet been observed. Achrad-
ocrinus shows an atrophy of the brachianal, and a diminu-
tion of the arms, characters which are still more pronounced
in LHypocrinus. Lecythocrinus is probably a descendant of
Gissocrinus, and Lecythiocrinus of Codiacrinus.

The Dorsal Cup of Belemnocrinus, except for its mono-
cyclic base, resembles that of Cyathocrinus; the arms show
a tendency to the development of armlets, but are not a great
advance on those of Cyathocrinus: on the whole I incline to
the belief that this genus is descended from Cyathocrinus,
but that intermediate stages have not yet been found. /olo-
crinus is an advance on Lelemnocrinus both as regards atrophy
of the brachianal and the conversion of armlets into stout
pinnules.

dn each of these lines there is a gradual development of
articulation ; this, however, can merely serve to confirm the
general evolution, and it varies so much according to the needs
of individual genera that under no circumstances could any
great argument be based on it.

CLASSIFICATION.

The Genealogy of the Fistulata may be summed up in the
accompanying table (‘Table II.). It is of course needless in
the present year of grace to point out the differences between
a scheme such as this, which shows general relationships, and

[Zo face paye 382.
TREE OF FISTULATE CRINOIDS.

wacrinus,———_————__
i
is. Huspirocrinus.
|
Cyathocrinus. ———
rinus. Closterocrinus. \ \ hate
a ; Streptocrinus. Arachnocrinus.,
Ampheristocrinus.
ls \ \ Gissocrinus.
Lecythocrinus.
crinus. Botryocrinus.——-—_ \
\ . .
Codiacrinus.
Sicyocrinus. Oncocrinus. | \
Vasocrinus.
| Achradocrinus.
Barycrinus.—Atelestocrinus. x
i | Hypocrinus, \
/ | S
/ \
Jecadocrinus. | Lecythiocrinus,
Scytalecrinus. |
\1s. Belemnocrinus.

|
{ :
Holocrinus.
|
! .

pachyerinus.

ibrachiocrinus.

omyocrinus.

Agassizocrinus,

Hoplocrinus.

: Me
Baerocrinus. Fonuiuias!

| ~ Castocrinus. Merocrinus. sa Ne alg aaa ced
. |

_ Heterocrinus. Carabocrinus.
il . Sear eae
ne endrocrinus. Huspirocrinus.
oo Ectenocrinus. Ohiocrinus. Thenarocrinus.
Oyathocrinus. —
Anomalocrinus. Proclivocrinus. Herpetocrinus. Homocrinus. Olosterocrinus. ;
, : Streptocrinus. Arachnocrin
“a Ampheristocrinus, Ms
P Mycocrinus. Calceocrinus. Parisocrinus. issocrinus. ’
?
| r—— j Lecythocrinus.
Scaphiocrinus. Poteriocrinus. a
baled Catillocrinus.
Edriocrinus. Codiacrinus.
Woodocrinus. Sicyocrinus. Oncocrinus.
Vasocrinus.

Cosliocrinus, | Achradocrinus.

| / Barycrinus.—Atelestocrinus.

Zeacrinus.
Hypocrinus.
Hydreionocrinus. ~ ;
Decadocrinus. Lecythiocrinus,
Scytalecrinus. |
“a Belemnocrinus,
s
eee i Holocrinus.

|
Phialocrinus. Bupachyerinus.

Synyphoerinus. Tribrachiocrinus.

Erisocrinus. Oromyocrinus.
Stemmatocrinus,
Dadoecrinus. Ceriocrinus. Agassizocrinus,
if

Enerinus.

i 7s V's. 4 -y 7 F Dahon ans ’ ¥ A 7? Te U a7 a el — .
‘ i , Ma a ef a os i : 7 , Pin 1 : .) 7 t = i i \
ee - og” Bray avian BD vi ° a
ve eet eae tea oe y - a vr arc x a
aaa _ iar es a i hes : y - ae a ae ) a
Sa on - bagyet 7a a) Da) a J
BAS oer ‘gee : Sh = a =
a yn r a a oe ee i a 7
a, aie ew ce ball - : = ary e wT, - _ ao i).
pain —— i ee
-_ = : ae os aD + oe fae, , eee nage a 7 |
; : nv i . - sf ; : ie as 2 - 7
: OF ' - : a , ete Ve
4 . T j = ea i 1 A ‘* , of a 7
' = ‘i - , 2 a a
: - : i a ve
: - — n a - , P|
= ve - : 7 ow ia a > » |
: = a } oe
t - 7 >|
(CC es
: i ~~ — ya t *
: i : 7 - ae
: Be
7 ee
- j ee 7
_ 7
: a ee >! in 4 7
’ ie a St Toe tf ; ; 7 a
’ a n 7
- 7 4 " > a ¥ =
: 7 ae 7 =
; = 2 enh : ‘
« / <i , >=
: mL . rs
‘ a i.e 7 a
oa 1 & : ”) oe 7 | .
7 : 7 J =
>are .
m 4 a
= th | i . ' ‘ os
_— ia
- lar
5 7 7 i ; i
7 os 3 - ,- i i
1 a _ i? aa : . ; y 7
- a ' = ay, Ter) 7
7 - a 7.
: nm - ; —— i pee
é a << iw
_ ee = a 7 ‘ |e
; P i \ 1a a ‘
ae — ,
r = ri itn “9 7 7
e v = a8 ii i 7 3
: —_ .
one 2a ' , 7
ie : i — : ,
= io
: _ oo
a \ a
; J 4) : 7
m > af _ -
a i
sa | : al),
a | j c . ; a
_ 7 De
- ' 7 1 i /
: xy, { 1 ._
a 1 : :
H : 7
a ;
7 i
, -
7 ’ a : ‘ 7 1 a
: 7
7 cree
as
nN Q ae
oe vi .
: L ' 4
¥ - : 7
a -
a 7 iv 7 i a
7 ace ; o 7 -
a - on on n
7 7 va us
PP ’ ¥
RY rT
: is
a7 - —
ne i m
an w - ah
: a bat 1 7 ey

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Orinotds. 383

a tree that follows out the descent of individuals. Too repre-
sent this in convenient classificatory form is the final problem.

First there is a group which one feels almost inclined to
remove entirely from the Fistulata, viz. the HyBocrinipa;
the ventral sac of Hybocrinus and Hybocystis, in which
genera alone it has been observed, is very small, and its truly
fistulate nature doubtful*.

There are next two main groups, one of which includes
the families HETEROcRINID® (to which I add Anomalocrinus),
CALCEOCRINIDA, and CATILLOCRINIDA. So far the families
are very nearly the same as those maintained by Messrs.
Wachsmuth and Springer.

The second group, which comprises all the Dicyclic and
two Monocyclic forms, must be again split up, and here a
rather different arrangement from that of previous writers seems
inevitable.

First comes a Division characterized by brachianal, large
radianal, and usually some other anal plates in the dorsal
cup, and by dichotomous arms. ‘This can again be divided
into three; on one side a Family including Carabocrinus and
Thenarocrinus, but of this I am doubtful; on the other a
Family of Huspirocrinus and its descendants, and in the
middle a Family continuing the main line through Dendro-
erinus; this 1s conveniently split into two Series marking
the development of pinnules; Series 1. may be called
Dendrocrinites, Series 2. Scaphiocrinites. The Family itself,
which will include Meroerinus and Ottawacrinus, may be called
DENDROCRINIDE.

The next great Family starts from Botryocrinus, and this
again must be split into series ; the Botryocrinites will include
all in which the radianal is rudimentary, and pinnules as a rule
not yet evolved from armlets ; the Scytalecrinites will include
Decadocrinus and Scytalecrinus, both of which are elongate
(oxuTady), have three anal plates in dorsal cup, and have
pinnules; the Graphiocrinites will include genera in which
the radianal is lost but in which the brachianal remains in
the limits of the dorsal cup ; the Erisocrinites of Wachsmuth
and Springer may remain, or may be included with the En-
crinites, as comprising genera in which no anal plate remains
in the dorsal cup of the adult ; the Cromyocrinites will include
the rounded forms in which the three anal plates are retained
in the cup. In allusion to the ten arms borne by all genera
of the Family, the name DECADOCRINID& may be fitly applied
to it.

* W. &S. Rey, III. (199, 200) Proc, 1886, p. 123.

384 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinotds.

The last great family consists of descendants of Cyatho-
crinus, and for it may be best retained the name CyATHo-
CRINIDE, though at the risk of some confusion with the
previous applications of the term ; but these applications have
been so numerous that one more can hardly make the con-
fusion worse confounded than it already is. It will be advisable
to separate this family into Cyathocrinites, Codiacrinites,
Achradocrinites, and Belemnocrinites.

Possibly, however, the Family BELEMNOCRINIDA, as its
origin is so uncertain, may be allowed to stand as Wachsmuth
and Springer defined it (Rev. III. (193) Proc. 1886, p. 117).

The Classification then may be tabulated as follows :—

FISD GAAS
?Fam. Hypocrrnipa. Hybocrinus, Hoplocrinus, Baero-
crinus.
Group A.
Fam. 1. Hererocrinipa. Jocrinus, Heterocrinus, Ke-
tenocrinus, Ohiocrinus, Anomalocrinus.

Fam. 2. CALCEOCRINIDA. Castocrinus, Proclivocrinus,
Calceocrinus.

Fam. 3. CATILLOCRINIDE. Mycocrinus, Catillocrinus.

Group B.
Fam. 1. DENDROCRINID&.

Series 1. Dendrocrinites. Merocrinus, Ottawacrinus,
Dendrocrinus, Herpetocrinus (2), Homocrinus,
Parisocrinus.

Series 2. Scaphiocrinites. Poteriocrinus, Scaphio-
crinus, Woodocrinus, Zeacrinus, Coeliocrinus,
Hydreionocrinus.

Fam, 2. ? CARABOCRINIDZ. — Carabocrinus, Thenaro-
crinus.

Fam. 8. EusprrocRINIDm. uspirocrinus, Clostero-
crinus, Ampheristocrinus.
Fam. 4. DECADOCRINIDA.

Series 1. Botryocrinites. Botryocrinus, Sicyo-
crinus, Oncocrinus, Vasocrinus, Barycrinus,
Atelestocrinus.

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids. 385

Series 2. Scytalecrinites. Decadocrinus, Scytale-
crinus.

Scries 3. Graphiocrinites. Graphiocrinus, Phialo-
crinus, Certocrinus '(Bursacrinus, Synypho-
ertnus) ?.

Series 4.—(a). Erisocrinites. Hrisocrinus, Stemmat-
ocrinus.
(0). Encrinites. Dadocrinus, Encrinus.

Series 5. Cromyocrinites. Mupachycrinus, Tribrach-
tocrinus, Cromyocrinus, Agassizocrinus.

Fam. 5. CYATHOCRINIDA.

Series 1. Cyathocrinites. Cyathocrinus, Strepto-
ertinus, Arachnocrinus, Gissocrinus, Lecytho-
crinus.

Series 2. Codiacrinites. Codiacrinus, Lecythio-
crinus.

Series 3. Achradocrinites. Achradocrinus, Hypo-
crinus.

Fam. 6. BELEMNOCRINIDE. Belemnocrinus, Holocrinus.

Incerte sedis—Hdritocrinus.

It seems unnecessary to indicate the diagnostic characters
of these families and series more clearly than has been
already done. ‘The more natural a classification is, the more
difficult must be any attempt at definition: as knowledge
grows, delimitations vanish. Not that this classification is
either natural or complete; of its imperfections in those
directions no one can be more sensible than myself, The
facts, indeed, on which the argument has been based have
been verified as far as possible; the labour of collecting them,

: : =)
which would otherwise have been too great, has been lightened

by the previous work of Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer, to
whom all students of paleeozoic crinoids owe a debt of grati-
tude. ‘That I differ from these authors is due partly to differ-
ence in the interpretation of the facts, partly to a difference of
principle. The principles that govern the above classification,
though not yet universally accepted, are steadily gaining
ground among biologists. It is in the interpretation of the
facts that the real difficulty lies, and here I am as likely as
not to be wrong. Increased knowledge alone can solve our

problems. The proposed classification should be regarded as

386 Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids.

a scaffolding necessary for the erection of that more solid
structure to which it must one day give place.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV.
(Illustrating chief types of Arm-structure in Fistulate Crinoids.)

While the figures of this Plate are necessarily diagrammatic, they have
been constructed either from actual specimens or from the best published
drawings obtainable. Their order is merely intended to facilitate com-
parison and follows no scheme of classification. It is not possible to
indicate in such a Plate the various degrees of articulation, but in figures
7 & 20 syzygies are represented by dotted lines. In each figure the radial
is drawn in whole or in part. In the following notes the specific name is
inserted when that particular species has served as copy for the diagram ;
other species of the genus have of course the same general structure.
In the case of a genus not actually figured, the number indicates the type
to which it approximates in arm-structure.

Achradocrinus—arms unknown.

Agassizocrinus—15; long, stoutish; ossicles short, cuneate; pinnules
strong.

Ampheristocrinus—one brachial only known, quadrangular and very
small.

Anomalocrinus—11; figure based on description by W.& 8. Rey. III.
(212) Proc. 1886, p. 186.

Arachnocrinus—3 ; heavy, scarcely diminishing towards tips; ossicles
short, quadrangular, but axillaries longer.

Atelestocrinus—10; armlets from every 2nd ossicle, on alternate sides,
extend to tips of arms.

Baerocrinus Ungerni—1 a; after Grewingk, from P. H. Carpenter, Quart.
Journ. Geol. Soc. xxxvili. pl. xi. fig. 1.

Barycrinus—10; arms sometimes branch again on 5rd or 4th distichal,
but never in anterior ray, and only in one arm to aray; in B.
tumidus (?) the antero-lateral rays have only one main arm
apiece.

Belemnocrinus typus—20; see W. & 8. Rev. IIT. 1885, pl. v. fig. 10.

Botryocrinus ramossissimus—9 ; after Angelin, op. cit. pl. xx. fig. 8.

Botryocrinus sp. nondescr.—13 ; from specimens from Dudley.

Bursacrinus—arms branch, and are in contact laterally; distichals wide,
flat, slightly cuneate ; palmars less than half the width. W. &
S. consider this so close to Graphiocrinus that they have made
it a subgenus thereof; otherwise its place would seem to be with
the Scaphiocrinites, near Woodocrinus, from which it differs in
the more advanced condition of the anal area. Without seeing
specimens I do not like to venture on the alteration.

Calceocrinus—pinnules not developed; lateral arms dichotomize in a
peculiar manner, out of the ordinary line of evolution.

Carabocrinus—3 ; arms short compared with size of calyx.

Castocrinus—arms irregularly dichotomous, non-pinnulate.

Catilocrinus—arms simple, not branched, many rise from a single radial
as shown in Pl. XIV. fig. 29.

Ceriocrinus—15,

Closterocrinus—arms obscure, see Hall, Pal. N. Y. vol. ii. p. 179, pl. xlia.
figs, 2 a—f.

Codiacrinus—3; see Follmann, “ Unterdevonische Crinoiden,” Verh. d.
nat. Ver. preuss, Rhein]. xliv. pl. 111. fig. 1, 1887.

Mr. F. A. Bather on British Fossil Crinoids. 387

Celiocrinus— in its arm-structure leans decidedly towards Woodocrinus,”
W. & 8. Rey. III. (245) Proc. 1886, p. 169.

Cromyocrinus—15 ; brachials short, at first quadrangular, then cuneate
and in some species interlocking.

Cyathocrinus-—3,

Dadocrinus Kunischi—17 ; after Kunisch, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Ges.
xxxy. pl. vill. 1885. In the separation of Dadocrinus and Holo-
ertnus from Encrinus, I have followed W. & 8.; fora conspectus
of the literature see H. Eck, “ Bemerkungen iiber einige [n-
crinus-Arten,” Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Ges, xxxix. 540, 1887,

Decadocrinus—14.

Dendrocrinus—4.

Ectenocrinus—7.

Hdriocrinus—arms broad at base; in £. sacculus costals 10 or more, dis-
tichals 3 or 4, palmars 3 or 4, all very short and wide; nothing
known of pinnules; Hall, Paleeont. N.Y. iii. pl. Ixxxvii. fig. 10.

Encrinus—18.

Erisocrinus—15 ; costals abut laterally ; brachials uniserial, transversely
oblong.

Eupachycrinus—as in Cromyocrinus ; arms from | to 3 in a ray.

Euspirocrinus—3 ; ossicles stout and wide.

Gissocrinus—3.

Graphiocrinus—15,

Herpetocrinus—4,

Heterocrinus extls—5 a; H. juvenis—5 b; both after Hali, Rep. Geol.
Surv. Ohio, Paleeont. i. pl. i. figs. 12 and 5a,

Holocrinus Beyrichi—19 ; after Picard, Zeitschr. d. deutsch, geol, Ges,
xxxy. pl. ix. figs. 4 and 1.

Homocrinus—4.

Hoplocrinus—1 b.

Hybocrinus conicus—1 6; after E. Billings ; in Canadian Org. Rem. decade
iy. pl. ii. fig. 26, the long arms are all shown.

Hydretonocrinus—16 ; throw off branches towards inner side of ray, meet
laterally ; earlier ossicles cuneate and tend to interlock; pin-
nules short.

Hypocrinus—arms unknown, evidently very small.

Locrinus—2,

Lecythiocrinus—arms unknown.

Lecythocrinus—3 ; see Schultze, “ Echinod. Eifler Kalkes,” Denkschr. k.
Akad. Wiss. xxvi. pl. iv. fig. 1, Wien, 1867.

Merocrinus—2 ; see Walcott, State Mus. 35th Regent’s Rep. pl. xvii.
figs. 5 and 6, 1883.

Mycocrinus—arms unknown, probably as in Catilloerinus.

Ohiocrinus oehanus—6 ; after Ulrich, Journ. Cincinn. Soc. Nat. Hist. vy.
pl. v. fig. 9.

Oncocrinus—simple, dichotomous, with broad ossicles. Cyathocrinites
scroliculatus, Hisinger (Leth. Suec.Suppl. Secund. p. 6, tab. xxxix.
fig, 4, a, b,c: Stockholm, 1840), appears to be of the same genus
as the specimens I was about to describe as Oncocrinus bucepha-
lus. C. scrobiculatus, however, has heen referred by Angelin
(Icon. Crinoid. pp. 15 and 14) to his genus Pyenosaccus. This
genus has been placed by W. & 8. in the Ichthyocrinide as a
subgenus of Lecanocrinus (Rey. I. (41) Proc. 1879, p. 264), and,
so far as P. nodulosus, Ang., is concerned, they are no doubt
right. P. costatus, Ang., was by both Angelin and W.& 8S,
regarded as belonging more probably to the Cyathocrinide

(auctorum) ; this also seems correct. But P._ costatus was in

388 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

Angelin’s opinion allied to C, serobicwlatus, and I believe that
the latter also should be removed from Pycnosaccus; only the
evidence of Angelin’s pl. xv. fig. 11 could lead one to retain it
in that genus, and this figure has a most artificial appearance.
Until, therefore, an examination of the type specimens is possible,
I shall, for convenience’ sake, continue to speak of Oncocrinus.

Ottawacrinus—(4?); beyond the 6 quadrangular costals nothing is yet
known.

Parisocrinus radiatus—8 ; after de Koninck and Le Hon, Recherches sur
Jes Crin. carb. Belgique, pl. i. fig. 126.

Phialocrinus—15.

Philocrinus—16.

Poteriocrinus—12.

Proclivocrinus—as Calceocrinus, q. v.

Scaphiocrinus Swallovi—l2 ; in this sp. the ossicles interlock towards tips
of arms; after Whitfield, Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. N. Y. Bull. i.
December 188], sub Poteriocr. Jesupt. For clearness’ sake the
pinnules are only shown along one set of branches.

Scytalecrinus—15.

Sicyocrinus—9,

Spherocrinus—s. :

Stemmatocrinus—18. See Trautschold, “ Mon. Kalkbr. Mjatschkowa,”
Mém. Soc. Imp. Nat. Moscou, xiv. pl. xiv. fig. 12 (1879).

Streptocrinus—8, but not much known of arms.

Synyphocrinus—vide sub Bursacrinus.

Tribrachiocrinus—arms unknown except so far asshown in PI, XIV. fig. 35.

Vasocrinus—10; 8 costals ; arms and armlets less robust.

Woodocrinus macrodactylus—16; after de Koninck, Mém. Acad. Roy.
Belgique, xxviii. pl. viii. fig. 1 ¢ (1854). For clearness’ sake the
pinnules are only shown along one branch.

Zeacrinus—16 ; dichotomize towards inner side of ray; ossicles short,
their width diminishes by 4 in successive orders; arms meet
laterally, cf. Bursacrinus.

XLIX.—On some new and imperfectly-defined Species of
Jurassic, Oretaceous, and Tertiary Nautili contained in the
British Museum (Natural History). By Arruur H.
Foorp, F.G.S., and G. C. Crick, Assoc.R.S.M., F.G.S.,

Assistant in the Geological Department, British Museum.

In the last number of this Magazine we described and re-
defined some species of Jurassic Nautili in the British Museum.
In this article we complete for the present our work upon the
Jurassic and take up the Cretaceous and Tertiary species,
Since the former paper was published some Jurassic forms
have been added, enabling us to describe a new species from
the Lower Oolite.

Appended is a list (pp. 890 and 391) of all the Cretaceous
and ‘Lertiary Nautili now in the Museum, together with the
new Jurassic species. The species are arranged in two

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic &e. Nautili. 389

columns; the first contains the new species and also those
requiring emendation, the second includes only well-recog-
nized species ; to each of the latter, however, the reference to
the original description is attached.

Tt will be observed that some of the species described
below are placed in the subgenus Hercoglossa, Conrad *. The
following is Meek’s} emended description of this subgenus :—
“Shell more or less discoid, with umbilicus closed or small,
and periphery usually rather narrowly rounded t; volutions
deeply embracing, surface nearly smooth, or with lines of

8) :
growth ; septa deflected backwards in crossing each side, so

as to form a deep, usually angular, lateral lobe.” Type
Nautilus orbiculatus, Tuomey §. Trias to Eocene.

Nautilus Parkinsoni, HKdwards ||, is cited by Meek as
belonging also to Hercoglossa. Of this species only two
examples are known to us, both from the London Clay—the
one figured by Parkinson {] and also by Edwards, now in the
“‘ Sowerby Collection,” British Museum, the other from Col-
chester. Both specimens are remarkably large; Parkinson’s
consists merely of the casts of three chambers, to which a
portion of the inner whorls, badly preserved, is attached ; the
largest chamber is 8 inches in height and 6 inches in width.
Owing to the form of the sutures some doubt originally
existed as to whether this specimen should not be placed in
Aturia. Although the siphuncle is cylindrical, as in Nautilus,
the sutures suggested its being the adult of Aturtéa. Unfor-
tunately the inner whorls are so much crushed that the form
of the siphuncle in the young shell cannot be ascertained.
The specimen from Colchester, which measures 11 inches in
diameter, shows, however, that the siphuncle is cylindrical not
only in the adult, but even where the diameter of the shell
does not exceed 2} inches. We feel justified therefore in
concluding with Meek that Nauttlus Parkinson? belongs to the

* Amer, Journ. of Conchology, 1866, vol. ii. no, 2, p. 101.

+ United States Geol. Surv. Terr. 1876, vol. ix. p. 491.

{ Sometimes flattened, as in Nautilus (Hercoglossa) franconicus, Oppel,
or even sulcated, as in N. (#1.) Picteti, Oppel. For other species of Hey-
coglossa see ‘* Die Cephalopoden der Stramberger Schichten,” in Oppel and
Zittel’s ‘ Paleeontologische Mittheilungen,’ 1868, Band i. Abth. ii. Atlas,
pls. ii., iii., iv. On referring to the ‘ Catalogue of Scientific Works’ pub-
lished by E. Koch, Stuttgart (1880-1886), we find that this part of the
Paleont. Mitth. is erroneously marked both on the cover and titlepage
“ Zweiter Band, Erste Abtheilung,” whereas it should be “ Erster Band,
Zweite Abtheilung.”’

§ Proceed Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1854, p. 167.

|| Mon. Kocene Mollusca (Pal. Soc.), 1849, pt. i. p. 49, pl. vii.

4] ‘ Organic Remains,’ 1811, vol. iii. pl. vii. fig. 15,

Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

390

‘PT 889 “xt 1d “g-7 “80g ma “Id "F 'g “ay

‘tA ‘Td “(TOgT) EL ‘ad “vorpuy ‘eq ‘erpuy ‘Ang TOOK) WOT “pxroyueylgy ws etadee es ----
‘gv “s8y ‘a “Td “(opST) Gog “d

xipueddy “mr yd ‘saonearesq(a) [BoLsopoox) s,urMaeg ul ‘seqtoyp ‘smunhuhiqug p —
‘psy ira td “(pest) ge “d ‘soymag pay

aq} JO dnowy snosdvjery oy} Fo anata amesig ey} Jo stsdoudg "0910 “fi iwyaq” ——
'G ‘p ‘s8y

"mx ‘Jey, “(ZL81) 9g ‘d ‘ TOLeUMIOJeprery “Tayo ep uapodoyeydag qosqut cl 2Ssnayy —.
‘q‘v F'ssy ut ‘Td “(GORT) OT ‘a ‘atorpey we S10q

eee

-Mo'y op SUOIAUA sap oTBI() Bl Op “S807 “TON Sep “sosecy ‘Ora ‘enppounpipon —

‘(OSST) 6ST ‘d ‘Tt ‘Joa ACHBIG WUogTe ep “tporg ‘Ausiqtd,p ‘s sng Havyqns

‘taxo ‘Td ‘(QTST) Ee vd ‘It “Jo "youog “WEN ‘AqTOMOR *( ‘sunhaga

"Xx ‘1d “OFSD 06 dt Joa “jarg ‘aay, “Suey [Rg ‘Ausiqay,p ‘snunsdunyohuopsag7 ——
"Ty ‘ou. “Mra To009 ‘td ‘(real &8 gd “A JOA ‘"TPOMOD ‘UIT ‘Aqie4 MOS ‘0 Pf ‘snsundva
"ax ‘Td “(OFST) ZQ cd 1 aa ‘JoIQ “May, “Suv ‘Teg ‘AUSIGAC, p ‘snumsnvenayy ——
‘tax ‘Td ‘(QFRT) ES a ‘TOA “Jor “May, “Suvty ‘Ted EEO} p ‘snupliquanog
“max ‘Td “(QFRT) 98 ‘d ‘L “JOA "JOIQ *L19J, “SURI [kd SAUSIQIO, p ‘snunyvaypbhioy
"7 OY TA qd “(Gegq) ZT d 00g "eq “uOT Rice) BosnTOT ‘sso, ‘odawyg ‘202747 ——
'O-f ‘soy ‘max ‘7d ‘(geQ]) Jp ‘dh *ags ‘osstng ‘Teg ‘eyardurey 24 yoxoT ‘euyppouguo py
"mrx ‘Td ‘(COPST) ¢ Ld ‘i ‘joa “49IQ ‘aI07, * OUBLT ed ‘AUDIGIO, p ‘snupypinyonog —-
‘sag “tux “Td *((9 Soe TRE (on "WI “MOT, “Savi ‘eq ‘AUSIQIg,p ‘ eruguautayy ——
‘(OGST) cel 'd “It JOA “LoPVAPY “FWOTV ep “por ‘AUSIGIO,p ‘sesewaqzy

“xty nA ‘syd “C2FQT) Oy *d *t 'T04 30 ‘May, “sues Ted ‘AUSIGIC,P ‘supbajoopnasd

‘(SF8D) (qnapooa) 9OT ‘d ‘L TOA ‘Z “108 “4SIFT “IVN ‘OU Y ‘UUW SHON GS —.
‘91 ‘PT “Soy

‘TA ‘td ‘(FEQT) Re Cal Bre "JOA "00G ‘JooX) “MIMO “qaeNny ‘adieyg ‘sesuauophuriDy

(GEST) (qnopooas) GET “dt ‘yd ‘AL “JOA ‘00Q *TOax) ‘SURI, ‘MOZITY ‘sngnoyd

po (hE (GI8L 28 ‘d TI ‘JOA “UOD “UIT I ‘Aqtamog *f ‘sngujnpun snpynn AT

‘SQOMOVLENYD

‘oIssvuas

“ueT]}

-OTYIG ‘snovunp (wssopboo.aqyT ) —— ‘TT.
‘aou ‘ds ‘appalling —— ‘OT

‘aou ‘ds ‘snaxzounqu ——
“LLOFIMO TW ‘s2vapnbunr1g
‘aou “ds ‘sesuauozunpsuny
*AUBIGIO,P ‘saswaruoo0au
‘KqTaMog ‘f ‘snznpo.u

‘sou ‘ds ‘snaepunz.cod (——) ——
‘jaddg ‘snamuoounsf ( )—
“MULATOTYIS

‘snaiqwupbp (nssojb00.La77 )
‘ao ‘ds ‘sngupoaua snpegnp aT

391

ic &e. Nautilt.

of Turass

tes O

rfectly-defined Speci

emper

‘MOTwOyTyUapt oyoads roj oojrod unt 003 orev asoyy, |
“Aroqyousstyesun ATOA ‘OIRAIesedd Jo WOTIp
-W09 Toy} 0} SutMo ‘are soteds s.royyne yey Jo Auvut yey ppe Avut oa pur ‘THAZQnop pereptstuod oq ysnut sotoeds syynVYFEYIG
YJ AZIWOpT AToy} seouRstIMdILO YoONs UT ‘stejoRIeyo oyToeds zoo AUR JHoyIIAr ‘paadosoad st [[eYS oY} JO ourp}No orvq oy} ATUO
YOM UL ‘XLIVUL TepMURLS ATosTVOD v UI s}svo aIe seteds OA\Z SOY} OF POLLoJoI (VITBAR) SLoquessely Wo susutoeds oy, y

‘(CFRT) Teed wad “At ‘TOA ‘90g *Toex) MIMO L “ABN? UT ,‘SpuUvIsT Oso} [BI
amy Jo ASojooxy 042 UO s, “NY Weadg qnory Aq rded vag *vywyy ‘euad0rp, “4 'ds
‘(GC6QT) LF a “TX "TOA ‘00g "Poor ‘UIMOL “qavNy UI “Toy UOT UVISIeg-OYIM], oT} JO
suoTyI0g Jo ASopoay oy} UQ,, ‘snyory “EAA Aq dodud vag *erssagq Sputury ‘ds

‘(vTTRAJSN'V) BILOPTA ‘Stopeex) Ivou ‘4 eussoryy ‘{'ds
0G ‘G ‘sey ‘Axxx ‘Td “(FE [) Zee ‘d ‘It “TATT
‘epuy,] op onbyytpamumy ednors np ‘ssoyg ‘wry sep ‘rosoq ‘ovrppry,p “onjagy ——
DEL ‘GL ‘Soy ‘Atxxx "1d “(pegT) seg “dW “ATT
‘apuy] op oubyynamny ednors np ‘ssog ‘winy sep “seq ‘ovmpary,p ‘saq.coy ——
‘QT MST ‘eT ‘soy ‘atxxx ‘Td “pegT) gee “a It “tATT
‘spur, op onbryynumny odnors np ‘sso,y “WY sap “tosaqy ‘ovryaty,p “ayooquT
UdOeL) ‘YorT Surodvg-png Ynvyyeryyg *, snoegdyja
a
raz ‘sd (egg) FIZ ‘dus0exy “Wey susodeg-png “neyzeyog ‘, suppydooo.ionu
; ‘mAxxop ‘1d “(ePRT) 9g *d ‘IA ‘Joa "ouoH “uly ‘AqtaMog *(—) ep *f* ‘snunqun
‘tA ‘Td (QOEST) OOF *d “XT ‘Toa “MMOL PUR “SVPL “TIT “Tot9yI9 AA “eiqwanog
"Aqooo ‘Td “(ZSZRT) LL *d ‘AT ‘TOA “ouog ‘ur ‘Aqtearog “O ep "f° ‘sypbou
‘(sammsy
pury-7yst1 pur seddn) rtd “(ZT QT) G6 ‘dT JOA "youoy ‘urpy ‘Aqtomog *f ‘semrcadun
‘(emsy puvy-3ey) ‘t*Td (ZIRT) TT “dT TOA “young “ur ‘Aqaomog “fp ‘seyo.zuao

‘AUVILUG I,

‘sou ‘ds ‘snup
-1issng (nssojboolazT) sngynngy “ZT

g ‘1 ‘88g ‘atxx ‘yd “nex ‘qd “(ToO8T) 2¢ “d

‘gorpuy ‘Ted ‘VIpuy “Ang ‘foo “Mo “pxosuvye, ‘seseazyodouryor..y (nssophoo.1oFT )
; ‘(QF8]) Hopoom ‘gg ‘d “ILA ‘TOA ‘IL ‘Tas “90g “TOOK ‘SURI, ‘Seqto, ‘snowayds

_—_

392 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

subgenus Hercoglossa, and not to Aturta. It may here be
added that Conrad distinctly states in his description of
Hercoglossa* that the siphuncle is not funnel-shaped [as in
Aturia], but tubular. He includes in Hercoglossa the Aturia
Mathewsoni of Gabb F, though doubttully, because Gabb did
not describe the character or position of the siphuncle in his
species, merely stating “ siphuncle large.”

It is open to question whether Grypoceras, Hyatt {, should
not be merged in Hercoglossa; we are inclined to the opinion
that it should. Thus the type species of the former (Nautilus
mesodiscus, Hauer §) is distinguished, according to Hyatt,
from that of the latter (N. danicus, Schloth.) by the presence
of a ‘ V-shaped” ventral lobe in the sutures and by a flat-
tening of the periphery ‘fat some stage of growth.” Now in
some species the ventral lobe, as, e.g., in the type, is perfectly
distinct, but in others, as, for instance, N. strambergensis,
Oppel ||, it is so slightly indicated as to approach those species,
such as N. Oppel, Zittel |, in which there is no such lobe.
In other species, again, the presence of the lobe is due, in part
at least, to the sulcation of the periphery.

The flattening of the periphery mentioned by Hyatt as also
one of the characters of Grypoceras is not always accom-
panied by ‘‘ V-shaped ventral lobes,” Nautilus Pictett, Oppel,
having a flattened and suleated periphery, but no ventral
lobe. The distinction therefore between Grypoceras and
Hercoglossa is very difficult to maintain.

We include also in Hercoglossa the genus Hnclimatoceras
of Hyatt **, type HL. Ulricht, White ff.

Professor Dr. K. A. von Zittel {{ retains the name Aganides,
Montfort, for Nautilus franconicus, Oppel, &c.; but if the
type specimen of Montfort’s genus came from Namur, as
stated by Montfort and afterwards by Sonnini §Q, there is a
strong probability that it was a Goniatite, the rocks in that

* Amer. Journ. of Conchology, 1866, vol. ii. no. 2, p. 101.

+ Geol. Sury. of California, Paleeont. 1864, vol. i. p. 59.

{ Proceed. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 1883, vol. xxii. p. 269.

§ ‘Die Cephalopoden des Salzkammergutes,’ 1846, p. 36, tab. x. figs. 4—
6. See also Mojsisovics, ‘Das Gebirge um Hallstatt, 1875, p. 21, Taf. viii.
fig. 1.

* ‘Die Petrefactenkunde,’ 1820, p. 85.

q “Die Cephalopoden der Stramberger Schichten,” in Oppel and
Zittel’s ‘ Paleeontologische Mittheilungen,’ 1868, Band i. Abth, ii. p. 42,
tab. ii. figs. 8-11.

** Proceed. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 1883, vol. xxii. p. 270.

++ Bull. United States Geol. Surv. 1884, vol. i. p. 17, pls. vii., viil., ix.

t{{ Handbuch der Paleontology, Band ii. p. 883 (1884).

§§ Hist. Nat. des Mollusques (Montfort’s ed. of Sonnini’s ‘Suite a
Buffon ’), tom. iv. 1799 (An x.), p. 253, pl. xlviii. fig. 1.

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic ke. Nautili. 393

neighbourhood being of Carboniferous age. It is true that the
siphuncle is represented in Sonnini’s figure as nearly central,
but this might have been a mistake on the part of the artist.
Tt would at any rate be impossible to settle this question
without a reference to the original specimen, and in the mean-
while it would not be advisable to adopt Montfort’s name
Aganides so long as there is any uncertainty about the type
specimen *,

JURASSIC.
1. Nautilus lineolatus, sp. nov.

Sp. char. Shell thick, somewhat inflated on the sides, with
a broad and flattened periphery ; greatest breadth of the whorls
at about the middle of the sides ; aperture wider than high,
presenting a distinctly subquadrate section. Umbilicus very
small and deep, with rounded border. Septa moderately
distant ; sutures rather concave on the sides of the shell and
forming a very slight sinus on the periphery. Siphuncle not
seen. ‘Test thick, ornamented with subregular lines of growth.

A large example from Vetney Cross, Dorsetshire, measures
6 inches in diameter and 4 inches in its greatest breadth.

Remarks. 'This species is closely allied to Nautilus clausus,
VOrbigny, but it is distinguished by its less rapid rate of
increase, by its open umbilicus, and on the whole by its more
compressed form. The body-chamber of a young example
(no. 86952) exhibits traces of the anterior border of the im-
pression of the shell-muscle.

We have not thought it necessary to figure this species, on
account of its great similarity to N. clausus. :

A small specimen from the Upper Lias of Fontaine-Etoupe-
Four probably belongs to this species.

Horizon. Inferior Oolite (England) ; Upper Lias (France).

Locality. Yeovil, Somersetshire (no. 36952) ; Vetney Cross,
Dorsetshire ; Fontaine-Ktoupe-Four (Calvados), France.

2. Nautilus (Hercoglossa) aganiticus, Schlotheim.
1820. Nautilites aganiticus, Schlotheim, Die Petrefactenkunde, p, 83.
1858. Nautilus aganiticus, Oppel, Die Juraformation Englands, Frank-
reichs und des siidwestl. Deutschlands, p. 686.
1868. Nautilus aganiticus, Zittel, ‘ Die Cephalopoden der Stramberger
Schichten,” in Oppel and Zittel’s ‘ Palseontologische Mittheilungen,’
Band i, Abth. ii. p. 45.

Sp. char. Shell somewhat inflated, slightly compressed on
the sides, rather narrowly rounded on the periphery. Umbili-

* See remarks on the name Aganides by Meek (too long for insertion
here), United States Geol. Surv. Terr. vol. ix. 1876, p. 494.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 28

394 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

cus very small or perhaps closed. Septa wide apart, being

9 lines distant from each other where the height of the whorl

is 2 inches. Sutures strongly arched forward after leaving

Bis:

Nautilus (Hercoglossa) aganiticus.—a, lateral view of an imperfect speci-
men, showing the deeply lobed sutures; 6, view of the septum
which faces the letter @ in the other figure, showing the position of
the siphuncle. Drawn from a specimen in the British Museum (no,
C. 3173). A little more than one half natural size.

the umbilicus, then sweeping backward in a larger curve,
and again forward towards the periphery, which they cross
without forming any sinus. Siphunele situated a little below
the centre.

Remarks. This species was long confounded with another
from a higher horizon (the 'Tithonian), afterwards designated
by Oppel jfranconicus*. The present species is now re-
stricted to a form found in the Eisenoolith of Villecomte, in
Lothringen (Lorraine) t. NV. aganiticus is easily distinguished
from N. franconicus by its much more inflated form, rounded
periphery, somewhat less flexuous sutures, and the position
of its siphuncle. Inits general form, especially in the rounding
of the periphery, this species bears a much closer resemblance
to Nautilus (Hercoglossa) portlandicus, which, however,
differs in the form of its sutures. It has perhaps also some
relationship with N. Forbest, @Archiac, and N. Deluct,

* Oppel, “‘ Die Tithonische Etage,” Zeitschr. der deutsch. geol. Gesell.
Band xvii. 1865, p. 546.

+ Zittel, “ Die Cephalopoden der Stramberger Schichten,” in Oppel and
Zittel’s ‘ Paleeontologische Mittheilungen, Band i, Abth, ii. 1868, p. 43,

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic he. Nautili. 395

d@Arch.*, from the Eocene of Sindh (India), with both of
which it agrees in the form of its sutures and the situation of
its siphuncle; it is, however, a more inflated shell and
has a rounder periphery than either of the Indian species.
FHlorizon. Inferior Oolite (Middle Brown Jura).
Locality. Villecomte, Lothringen.

3. Nautilus (Hercoglossa) franconicus, Oppel.

Fig. 2

Nautilus (Hercoglossa) franconicus.—a, lateral view, showing two of the
septa and a peculiar ridge at the base of the body-chamber ; the
curved line upon the cast of the latter is the anterior boundary of the
impression of the shell-muscle ; the test which covers the greater
portion of the septate part of the shell is covered with fine lines of
growth ; they are a little too distinct in the engraving. 6, peripheral
view, showing the flattening of the sides and periphery. Drawn
from a specimen in the British Museum (no. C. 3109). Nearly two
thirds natural size.

1832. Nautilus aganiticus ?, Bronn, in Leonhard and Bronn’s Jahrbuch
fiir Mineralogie, &c., p. 70.

1837. Nautilus aganiticus, von Buch, Ueber den Jura in Deutschland,
Akad. der Wissensch. p. 119.

1849. Nautilus aganiticus, Quenstedt, Die Cephalopoden, p. 58, tab. ii.
fig. 6 (not of Schlotheim).

1865. Nautilus franconicus, Oppel, Die Tithonische Htage, Zeitschr.
der deutsch. geol. Gesell. Band xvii. p. 546.

21865. Nautilus strambergensis, Oppel, wid.

21868. Nautilus strambergensis, Zittel, “ Die Cephalopoden der Stram-
berger Schichten,’ in Oppel and Zittel’s ‘ Paleeontologische Mittheil-
ungen, Band i. Abth. ii. p. 42, Atlas, tab. il. figs. 8-11.

* ‘Description des Animaux Fossiles du Groupe Nummulitique de
VInde,’ 1854, livr. ii. p. 837, (NV. Delucr) pl. xxxv. figs. 2,2a; (N. Forbes)
pl. xxxiv. figs. 12, 12 a.

25*

396 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

1870. Nautilus aganiticus, F. Roemer, Geologie yon Oberschlesien,
p- 252, Taf. xxiv. fig. 6.

1871. Nautilus ef. strambergensis, Herbich, Verh. u. Mitth. des natur-
wiss. Vereines zu Herrmanstadt.

1873. Nautilus franconicus, Neumayr, Die Fauna der Schichten mit
Aspidoceras acanthicum, Abhandl. der k.-k. geol. Reichsanst. Band y.
Heft 6, p. 156.

1875. Nautilus Franconicus, von Ammon, Die Jura-Ablagerungen
zwischen Regensburg und Passau, p. 163, tab. i. fig. 1.

1875. Nautilus franconicus, Favre, Descr. des Foss. du Terr. Jurass.
de la Montagne des Voirons (Savoie), ] Mém. Soc. Pal. Suisse, vol. ii.
p. 1G. plea fis, 6a, 6b.

1876 Na utilus fr anconicus, de Loriol, Mon, Pal.des Couches de la zone
A Ammonites tenuilobatus, Mém. Soc. Pal. Suisse, vol. iii, pt. i. p. 15,

21877. Nautilus aganiticus, Blake and Hudleston, On the Coralline
cae of England, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soe. vol. xxxiii. p- 400.

21878. Nautilus aganiticus, Hudleston, The Yorkshire Oolites, Proc.
Geol. eas vol. v. no 8, p. 482.

1878. Nautilus franconicus, Herbich, Das Széklerland mit Beriick-
sichtigung der angrenzenden Landestheile, Mittheil. aus dem Jahrb.
der kon. ungar. geol. Anstalt, Band v. Heft 2, p. 139, Taf. 1. fig. 3

1881. Me autilus fr canconicus, Schlosser, Die Fauna des Kelheimer Diceras-
Kalkes, Abth. 1. p. 61, Paleeontographica, Band xxviii.

Sp. char. Shell much compressed laterally, flattened upon
the periphery ; the latter broad, with (in the cast) rounded
borders. The greatest width of the whorls is in the umbilical
region. The umbilicus is very small. The septa are mode-
rately distant, the sutures very strongly bent, first forwards
in a narrow lobe on leaving the umbilicus, t then backwards in a
broader one, then sweeping forward again and making a con-
‘spicuous sinus on the periphery. The siphuncle is situated
considerably above the centre.

Remarks. Though Oppel, Zittel, and Neumayr unite in
regarding N autilus strambergensis as a distinct species from
the present one, the resemblance between the two is very
striking. The only difference between them is in the form
of the sutures, which make a wider (backwardly directed)
lobe on the sides of the shell in N. franconicus than they do
in V, strambergensis, and this distinction is expressed in the
figures of the latter given by Zittel (Joc. cit.), which other-
Wise agree perfectly with specimens of JN. franconicus with
which we have compared them. The name franconicus was
originally conferred by Oppel * upon a specimen from the
Lithographic Slate of Solenhofen.

* “Die Tithonische Etage,” Zeitschr. der deutsch. geol. Gesell.
Band xvii. p. 546. The “Tithonian” is a special group of the Upper
(White) Jura, including the period embraced between the Oxfordian and
Portlandian series. See Oppel’s ‘Die Juraformation Englands, Frank-
reichs und des siidwestlichen Deutschlands,’ 1858 ; also Zittel’s “ Die

Cephalopoden der Stramberger Schichten,” Paleont. Mittheil. Band i.
Abth. ii., 1868.

imper fectly-defined Species of Jurassic be. Nautili. 397

The locality of the specimen figured is unknown, but it
agrees in all essential points with the German specimens
in the Collection, and adds to our knowledge of the species
the characters of the body-chamber and of the test. ‘The
latter is smooth, being ornamented only with delicate lines
of growth. The last two septa are exposed by the removal
of the test.” A heavy ridge is developed near the base
of the body-chamber, its indented outline corresponding
roughly with that of the last suture. Part of the anterior
boundary of the shell-muscle is seen on the cast of the body-
chamber (see fig. 2). The aperture is deeply emarginate.

In an excellent figure of this species given by v. Ammon
(oc. cit.) the anterior border of the shell-muscle is repre-
sented upon the cast of the body-chamber.

Horizon, 'Tithonian.

Localities. Normandy, Escragnolles (Var), France; Ran-
den, near Schaffhausen, Switzerland; Einsingen, Wiirtem-
berg.

4, Nautilus (Hercoglossa) portlandicus, sp. nov.

Fig. 3.

Nautilus portlandicus.—a, lateral view, showing two of the septa and the
siphuncle, which projects a little; 6, peripheral view. Drawn from
a specimen in the British Museum (no. 62165). About one sixth
natural size.

Sp. char. Shell subglobose, narrowly rounded on the peri-
phery, gently rounded on the sides, widest immediately above
the umbilicus ; the latter probably closed, or, if open, exceed-

)

398 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

ingly small. Body-chamber forming probably half a volu-
tion. Aperture wider than high. Septa approximate, the
sutures forming a very distinct sigmidal curve on the sides
of the shell; in passing over the periphery the sutures are
slightly bent backwards.. The siphuncle is nearly central.
The test is not preserved.

Remarks. The large specimen (B.M. no. 62165) upon
which the above description is founded is very imperfect, all
the inner whorls are wanting, only the two chambers nearest
the body-chamber being preserved ; nevertheless the species
could be easily recognized by the form of. the sutures and the
narrowly rounded periphery. ‘The dimensions of the fossil
are as follows :—Greatest diameter about 13 inches, greatest
breadth about 74 inches.

Hlorizon, Portland Oolite *.

Locality. Isle of Portland (?), Dorsetshire.

CRETACEOUS.
5. Nautilus radiatus, J. Sowerby.

1822. Nautilus radiatus, J. Sowerby, Min. Conch. vol. iv. p. 78,
pl. ecelvi.

1836. Nautilus radiatus, Fitton, Trans. Geol. Soc. ser. 2, vol. iv. pt. ii.
pp. 204, 367.

1838. Nautilus radiatus, V Archiac, Mém. Soc. Géol. de France, vol. ill.
0. 278.

1840. Nautilus radiatus, VOrbigny, Paléontologie Frangaise, Terr.
Crét. vol. i. p. 81, pl. xiv.

1845. Nautilus radiatus, Ibbetzon and Forbes, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soe.
vol. i., table facing p. 197.

1845, Nautilus radiatus, Forbes, ibid. p. 355.

1849. Nautilus subradiatus, V@Orbigny, Prodr. de Paléont. Stratigr.
vol. i. p- 145,

1852. Nautilus squamosus, Giebel, Fauna der Vorwelt, Band iii. Abth. i.
p- 141 (not of Schlotheim).

1853. Nautilus radiatus, Sharpe, Description of the Fossil Remains of
Mollusea found in the Chalk of England, Memoirs of the Paleonto-
graphical Society, pt. i., Cephalopoda, p. 14, pl. v. figs. 1 a, 18, 2.

1854. Nautilus radiatus, Morris, Cat. British Fossils, 2nd ed. p. 307.

1859. Nautilus Neckerianus, Pictet and Campiche, Desecr. des Fossiles
du Terr. Crét. des Environs de Sainte Croix, Paléont. Suisse, sér. ii.
pt. i. p. 132, pl xvi.

1862. Nautilus radiatus, Bristow and Etheridge, in Bristow’s Geology
of the Isle of Wight, Mem. Geol. Surv. of Great Britain, Sheet 10,

wlSt:

181. Nautilus radiatus?, Etheridge, in H. B. Woodward’s Geology of
eee around Norwich, Mem. Geol. Surv. of Great Britain,
p. 16.

Sp. char. Shell somewhat compressed upon the sides,
rounded upon the periphery; section of the whorls wider
* Portlandien of d’Orbigny.

emperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic &e. Nautili. 399

than high. Umbilicus closed, though open in the cast.
Septa rather numerous, slightly curved upon the sides, a very
obscure sinus upon the periphery. Siphuncle situated below
the centre. Ornaments of the test consisting of numerous,
very coarse, prominent, obtuse ridges, separated by inter-
spaces of about half their own width. The ridges are each
about 3 lines wide upon the periphery, where they form a
narrow backwardly-directed sinus.

Remarks. Pictet and Campiche, in the Pal. Suisse *, have
adopted the name Nautilus Neckerianus for a form which is
evidently identical with Sowerby’s N. radiatus, and the source
of error seems to have been in the locality of the type speci-
men of the last-named species, which is referred to by
Sowerby T in the following words :—‘ Lately found in the
neighbourhood of Maltor, probably in the lower part of the
Green Sand formation. I have received but one specimen, a
cast in Marly Limestone, mixed with grains of Silex and of
blackish Green-earth.” Possibly the locality quoted by
Pictet and Campiche was taken from the supplementary index
to the ‘ Mineral Conchology’ by Mr. John Farey, who gives
‘““ New-Malton, E.,” as the locality of the type.

We have been able to identify Sowerby’s type in the
‘“¢ Sowerby Collection,’ and the matrix agrees with that
described by Sowerby, showing that the specimen came from
the Lower Greensand. In its mode of preservation and
general appearance as to colour, texture, &c., it closely re-
sembles specimens from the Lower Greensand of Hythe.
Without doubt Sowerby’s specimen was derived from the
Lower Greensand, but we have not been able to obtain any
clue as to the locality (Maltor), furnished by him in his
description, above quoted.

There seems to be no ground whatever for Young and
Bird’s statement on p. 271 of their work on the Yorkshire
Coast (2nd ed.), that “ Sowerby’s N. radiatus (tab. 256)
was found near Malton, most probably in the grey limestone
under the Oolite.” Those authors were probably misled by
the locality given by Farey in the Supplementary Index
to vol. iv. of the ‘ Mineral Conchology.’

Nautilus bifurcatus, Ooster {, somewhat resembles the
present species, but differs in its more compressed form, and
in the possession of fine and numerous longitudinal ridges.

* Sér, ii. pt. i. 1859, p. 132, pl. xvi.

+ Min. Conch. vol. iv. 1822, p. 78, pl. ccelvi.

{ Cat. des Céphalopodes Fossiles des Alpes Suisses, pt. ii. 1858, p. 10,
tab. ix. fig. 6, tab. x. figs. 1, 2.

400 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

Horizon. Lower Greensand.
Localities. Atherfield, Isle of Wight; Hythe, Sandgate,
Kent.

6. Nautilus neocomiensis, d’Orbigny.

1768. Un Nautilite, &c., Knorr and Walch, Monumens des Catastrophes
de la Terre, vol. ii. section i. p. 45, tab. 1. fig. 2.

1818. Nautilus squamosus, Schlotheim, ‘Taschenb. f. Mineralogie,
vol. vii. p. 71.

1840. Nautilus neocomiensis, VOrbigny, Paléontologie Frangaise,
(Terr. Crét.), vol. i. p. 74, pl. x1.

1841. Nautilus neocomensis, Duval-Jouve, Belemn. Terr. Crét. p. 10.

1842, Nautilus neocomiensis, Matheron, Catalogue Méthodique et
Descriptif des Fossiles du Département des Bouches-du-Rhone,
p. 259,

1843. Nautilus neocomiensis, Fayre, Considérations sur le Mont
Saléve, p. 54.

1849. Nautilus squamosus, Quenstedt, Die Cephalopoden, p. 58.

1850. Nautilus neocomensis, VOrbigny, Prodrome de Paléontologie
Stratigraphique, vol. il. p. 63.

1850. Nautilus varusensis, VOrbigny, Prodrome de Paléontologie Strati-
graphique, vol, ii. p. 97.

1852. Nautilus neocomiensis, Gras, Catalogue des Corps Organisés
Fossiles du Département de l’Isére, p. 24.

1853. Nautilus neocomiensis, de Verneuil & Collomb, Bull. Soc. Géol.
de France, sér. 11. vol. x. p. 102.

1854. Nautilus neocomiensis, Coquard, Mém. Soe. Géol. de France,
ser. 11. vol. v. p. 147.

1854, Nautilus neocomiensis, Morris, Cat. British Fossils, 2nd ed.
p. 307.

1859. Nautilus neocomiensis, Pictet & Campiche, Description des
Fossiles des Environs de Sainte Croix (Paléontologie Suisse, sé. ii.
pt. i. livr. vii.), p. 128, pl. xv.

1860. Nautilus varusensis, Pictet & Campiche, ibid. p. 123.

1861. Nautilus Kayeanus, Blanford, Mem. Geol. Surv. of India, Palz-
ont. Indica.—I. Cretaceous Cephalopoda of Southern India, p. 31,
pl. xvi. figs. 5, 6, pl. xvii. figs. 1, 2, pl. xviii. figs. 1, 2, pl. xxi. fig. 2.

1861. Nautilus neocomiensis, Reynés, Etudes sur le Synchronisme et
la Délimitation des Terr.-Crétacés du Sud-Est de la France,

. oo.

1862. Nautilus neocomiensis, Bristow and Etheridge, in Bristow’s
Geology of the Isle of Wight, Mem. Geol. Sury. Great Britain
Sheet 10, p. 187.

1866. Nautilus neocomiensis, Stoliczka, Mem. Geol. Surv. of India,
Paleont. Indica.—I. Cretaceous Cephalopoda of Southern India,
p- 210, pl. xvi. figs. 5, 6, pl. xvii. figs. 1, 2, pl. xviii. figs. 1,2, pl. xxi.
fig. 2.

1883. Nautilus neocomiensis, Leenhardt, Etude Géologique de la
Région du Mont Ventoux, p. 56.

[Not 1855. Nautilus neocomiensis, Sharpe, Description of the Fossil
Remains of Mollusca found in the Chalk of England, pt. i. Cephalo-
poda, p. 15, pl. v. figs. 3, a—c. |

Sp. char. Shell compressed at the sides, with a narrowly
rounded periphery. Umbilicus of moderate size, and exhi-

emperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic &c. Nautili. 401

biting the inner volutions. Transverse section of the whorls
wider than high. Septa very slightly curved upon the sides,
and forming a slight sinus upon the periphery. Siphuncle
placed a little below the centre. Ornaments of the test con-
sisting of numerous, prominent, obtuse ridges, separated by
interspaces about half their own width. These ridges are
about 2 lines, wide on the periphery, where they form a deep,
narrow, backwardly -directed sinus.

Remarks. 'This species differs from N. radvatus by its more
compressed form and the much finer ornaments of the test.
Moreover, N. neocomiensis is stated by d’Orbigny to have
been found only in the middle beds of the Neocomian, while
N. radiatus was peculiar to the Craie glauconieuse (“ Craie
chloritée” of d’Orbigny and the older authors), none being
found in the intermediate beds.

N. squamosus, Lange (Schlotheim), and N. varusensis,
d’Orbigny, are placed in the synonymy of the present species
on the authority of MM. Pictet and Campiche. Of the
former those authors affirm that Quenstedt was quite in error
in supposing it to be identical with the neocomiensis of
VOrbigny, the N. sguamosus of Lange being a smooth species
from the Jurassic rocks of the neighbourhood of Baden. Of
the latter (NV. varusensis) the same authors remark that the
short description given of it by d’Orbigny indicates no appre-
ciable difference between it and neocomiensis.

Stoliczka* held that the Nautclus Kayeanus of Blanford
was identical with N. neocomiensis, having arrived at that
conclusion by a comparison of actual specimens of the Euro-
pean with the Indian fossils. He finds, it is true, that
Pictet’s specimens have generally a smaller number of septa
(about 15 to a whorl) than the Indian ones, but the latter
agree perfectly with d’Orbigny’s original figure of N. neoco-
miensis, and, he adds, an equal number of septa, about 20,
are to be observed on specimens from Kscragnolles, the typical
locality of d’Orbigny’s species.

Horizon. Neocomian.

Localities. Grasse, Escragnolles (Var), France ; Neuchatel,
High Alp (Sentis), Appenzell, Switzerland.

7. Nautilus hunstantonensis, sp. nov.

Sp. char. Shell moderately inflated, slightly compressed on
the sides, rounded on the periphery, widest part of the whorls
in the umbilical region. Umbilicus small, deep, with steeply

* Mem, Geol. Sury. India, Paleeont. Indica.—Cretaceous Cephalopoda
of Southern India, 1866, p. 210.

402 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

sloping sides and rounded edges.

Septa rather wide apart,

fourteen to a whorl in a specimen whose diameter is 3 inches
(fig. 5). Siphunele a little above the centre in the young

Fig. 4.

Nautilus hunstantonensis.—a, lateral view, showing the open umbilicus ;
b, peripheral view, showing the lines of growth. Drawn froma speci-
men in the British Museum (no. C. 952), presented by J. E. Lee,
Esq., F.G.8. About one half natural size.

shell, but getting much nearer the peripheral margin in the

process of growth, as may be seen in
the accompanying section (fig. 5),
which is drawn (about three fifths nat.
size) from a specimen in the
British Museum (no. C. 82449).
Surface of the test ornamented with
obscure and irregular plications, com-
mencing in the umbilicus, where they
are most distinct, but becoming less
so as they approach the periphery.
Fine lines of growth cover the whole
of the test.

Remarks. There are two species in
the Gault with which the present one
may be compared, viz. Nautilus
Bouchardianus, dOrbigny, and N.
Montmollini, Pictet and Campiche.
Our species agrees with the former of
these in the position of its siphuncle,

but differs in its more numerous septa and larger umbilicus,
while it is distinguished from the latter chiefly by the posi-

imper fectly-defined Species of Jurassic &e. Nautili. 403

tion of its siphuncle, somewhat larger umbilicus, and more

inflated whorls.

The gradual shifting of the position of the siphuncle in the
present species from a central position in the young toa nearly
external position in the adult is a feature met with in other

ies ; Stoliczka has observed it in Nautilus Hualeyanus
species ; Stoliczka has observed it in Nautilus Huzleyrnus,
Blanford, and‘in N. sphericus, Forbes, and other species *.

? af ) ”) I

Many authors have recorded the occurrence of various
species of Nautilus in the Red Chalk or Hunstanton Lime-
stone T; but the present form does not appear yet to have

been characterized.

Horizon. Red Chalk.
Locality. Hunstanton, Norfolk.

8. Nautilus triangularis, Montfort.

1802. Nawutilite triangulaire, Montfort, in his edition of Sonnini’s
“Suite a Buffon ” (Hist. Nat. des Mollusques, An. x.), vol. iv. p. 292,
pl. xlix. fig. 2.

1808. Nautilus triangularis, Montfort, Conch. Syst. p. 7 (G. angu-
hithes).

1820, ‘Nenatilites angulites, Schlotheim, Die Petrefactenkunde, p. 84.

1832. Nautilus triangularis, Passy, Descr. Géol. de la Seine-Inférieure,

B04,

isd. Nautilus triangularis, VArchiac, Mém. Soc. Géol. de France,
vol. ii. pt. ii. p. 191.

1840. Nautilus triangularis, VOrbigny, Paléontologie Frangaise, Terr.
Crét., vol. i. p. 79, pl. xii.

1842, Nautilus triangularis, Matheron, Cat. Méth. et Descrip. des Fos-
siles du Départ. des Bouches-du-Rhone et Lieux Circonvoisins,

. 259.

1850. Nautilus triangularis, @Orbigny, Prodrome de Paléontologie
Stratigraphique, vol. ii. p. 145.

1852. Nautilus triangularis, Giebel, Fauna der Vorwelt, Band iii.
Abth. i. p. 162.

1854. Nautilus triangularis, Millet, Paléontologie de Maine et Loire,
p. 103.

* Mem. Geol. Sury. India, Paleeont. Indica, ser. ii. 1866, p. 205,
+ The following are some of the principal references :—

(1) Samuel Woodward, ‘An Outline of the Geology of Norfolk,’
1833, p. 54.—Nautilus elegans.

(2) Rev. Thomas Wiltshire, ‘‘On the Red Chalk of England,” Geol.
Assoc. 1859, p. 17, pl. i. fig. 8.— Nautilus simplex.

(3) H. G. Seeley, “ Notice of Opinions on the Stratigraphical Position
of the Red Limestone of Hunstanton,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.
ser. 3, vol. vil. 1861, p. 244.— Nautilus simplex.

(4) Rev. T. Wiltshire, “On the Red Chalk of Hunstanton,” Quart.
Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxv. 1869, p. 185.— Nautilus albensis, N.
Bouchardiunus.

(5) W. Hill, “On the Lower Beds of the Upper Cretaceous Series in
Lincolnshire and Yorkshire,” Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xliv.
1888, p. 347.— Nautilus, sp.

404 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

1859. Nautilus triangularis, Pictet & Campiche, Description des Fos-
siles du Terrain Crétacé des Environs de Sainte-Croix (Paléontologie
Suisse), sér, ii. pt. 1. pp. 141, 149.

1861. Nautilus triangularis, Reynés, Etudes sur le Synchronisme et la
Délimitation des Terr.-Crétacés du Sud-Hst de la France, p. 41.

1866. Nautilus triangularis, Beltremieux, Faune Fossile du Départe-
ment de la Charente-Inférieure, pp. 48, 80.

Sp. char. Shell compressed, smooth, with the periphery
alternately rounded and sharply angular ; umbilicus closed ;
section triangular, the sides very slightly rounded, deeply
emarginated by the preceding whorl. Septa considerably
curved upon the sides, and projecting forwards upon the
peripheral angle, slightly bent backwards in the umbilicus.
According to d’Orbigny the siphuncle is situated below the
centre, not far from the ventral border. Test unknown.

Remarks. This species is readily distinguished from
Nautilus Fleurtausianus, d’Orbigny, as figured and described
in the ‘ Pal. Frang.’ (Terr. Crét. vol. 1. p. 82, 1840, pl. xv.)
by its sharply angular periphery at different stages of growth.
D’Orbigny in his ‘ Prodrome’ (vol. 1. 1850, p. 145) makes
his Nautilus Fleuriausianus a synonym of the present species, -
but he gives no reason for so doing, and we have no evi-
dence to show that WV. Fleurtaustanus underwent the same
changes of form as those noticed in N. triangularis. These
remarkable changes were pointed out by M. Ed. Guéranger
in a paper read before the Geological Society of France (Bull.
sér. i. vol. vii. 1850, p. 803), and he thus described them :-—
“Un caractére particulier et inédit est d’avoir le dos de la
spire alternativement anguleux ou en carene, et parfaitement
arrondi;”’ . . . Stoliczka* considers also that these forms
are quite distinct.

Horizon. Lower Chalk (England). Upper Greensand
(France).

Localities. Sidmouth, Devonshire; Folkstone, Kent ;
Escragnolles (Var), France.

9. Nautilus libanoticus, sp. nov.

1878. Ammonites Traskii, O. Fraas, Aus dem Orient, Theil ii. Geol.
Beobachtungen am Libanon, p. 97, Taf. iv. fig. 4 (not of Gabb).

Sp. char. Shell much inflated, rapidly increasing, broadest
in the umbilical region. Umbilicus probably closed. ‘Test
ornamented with prominent acute ribs, separated by inter-
spaces rather exceeding their own width. Some of the ribs
bifurcate in the region of the umbilicus.

Remarks. A\l the specimens are casts more or less crushed

* Mem. Geol. Sury. India, Paleeont. Indica, ser, 11, 1866, p. 207.

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic &c. Nautili. 405

and distorted, and nothing is seen in them of the septa or
siphuncle; nevertheless the ornaments of the test are suffi-
cient to distinguish the species from others which it may
resemble. The general form of N. libanoticus suggests that
of N, elegans, J. Sowerby, but the character of the ornaments
in the latter differs from that of the former, the ribs being at
once broader and closer together in Sowerby’s species than

Fig. 6.

Nautilus libanoticus.—a, peripheral view of a distorted specimen (no.
C. 542); b, portion of the test of another specimen (no. C. 5424); ¢,
beak from specimen no. 83663; d, beak from no, C. 2918. Drawn
from specimens in the British Museum. a@ rather exceeding one
half natural size; 6 natural size; c and d one and a half times natural
size.

they are in the present one; and this distinction is main-
tained even in casts. Fortunately one of our specimens has
a portion of the test preserved, and it is here figured (fig. 6, 0).
The beaks are exposed to view on the ventral surface of the
body-chambers of several of the specimens (fig. 6, ¢, d).
Horizon. Upper Cretaceous.
Locality, Sahil Alma, Lebanon, Syria.

10. Nautilus Bayfieldi, sp. nov.

Sp. char, Shell somewhat compressed upon the sides and
a little flattened upon the periphery, the thickest part of the
whorls being in the umbilical region. The umbilicus is rather
small, with steeply sloping sides and rounded borders; the
inner whorls partly exposed. ‘The whorls present a sub-
triangular outline in section, owing to the flattening of the
sides and the superior width of the dorsal as compared with

406 Messrs. Foord and Crick on new and

the ventral or peripheral side. The septa are moderately
distant, being about 7 lines apart where the height of the
whorl is 14 inch. The sutures are slightly bent backwards

Fie. 7.

Nautilus Bayfieldi.—a, lateral view of a specimen, showing the umbilicus
and the ribs ornamenting the test; b, peripheral view of another
specimen, showing sutures (s) and ribs. Drawn from specimens in
the British Museum (a, no. C. 3103; 6, no. C. 3102), about two
thirds natural size.

on the sides of the shell and form a shallow sinus on the
periphery. There appears to be an inner lobe. The siphuncle
is situated a little below the centre. The test is ornamented
with numerous acute transverse ribs or plications, separated
from each other by spaces about equal to their own width,
The ribs form a deep sinus in crossing the periphery.

Remarks, This species is closely allied to Nautilus patens,
Kner*, from which, however, it differs in its more com-
pressed whorls, smaller umbilicus, and the position of its
siphuncle, which is below instead of being above the centre.
The present species bears some resemblance to Nawiilus Des-
longchampsianus, d’Orb.t ; but the latter has a more inflated
shell, a distinctly angular umbilical border, and longitudinal
as well as transverse ornaments.

& ON; ersteinerungen Hes Kreidemergels yon Lemberg und seiner Um-
gebung,’ p. 7, tab. i. figs. 2, 2a. See also Dr. Clemens Schliiter, “ Cepha-
lopoder n der oberen Deutschen Kreide,” in Paleeontographica, Band xxiv.
Lief. 1, April 1876, p. 178, Taf. 1.

1f Pa! éont, Fy rancaise (Terr: Crét.), vol. i. p. 90, pl. xx.

imperfectly-defined Species of Jurassic &e. Nautili, 407

We have pleasure in associating with this species the name
of Mr. T. G. Bayfield, of Norwich, from whose fine collection
of Upper-Chalk fossils all the examples of this species, now
in the British Museum, were derived.

Florizon. Upper Chalk.

Locality. Norwich.

11. Nautilus (Hercoglossa) danicus, Schlotheim, sp.

1820. Nautilus danicus, Schlotheim, Die Petrefactenkunde, p. 85.

1834, Nautilus danicus, vy. Buch, Neues Jahrbuch fir Mineralogie,
&e. p. 533.

1835, Nautilus danicus, Beck, Proceed. Geol. Soe. vol. ii. p. 218.

1837. Nautilus danicus, Lyell, Trans. Geol. Soe. vol. y. pt. i. p. 250,
pl. xviii. figs. 4-7. :

1837. Nautilus danicus, yon Buch, Ueber den Jura in Deutschland
(Akad. der Wissensch.), p. 119.

1850. Nautilus danicus, Geinitz, Das Quadersandsteingebirge oder
Kreidegebirge in Deutschland, p. 110.

1850. Nautilus danicus, VOrbigny, Prodr, de Paléont. Stratigr. vol. i.
p. 290. : ;
1851. Nautilus danicus, VOrbigny, Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie,
pol : |
1852. Nautilus danicus, Giebel, Fauna der Vorwelt, Band. ui, Abth. i.

p. 138.

1861. Nautilus danicus, Binkhorst, Mon. des Gastéropodes et des
Céphalopodes de la Craie Supérieur du Limbourg, pt. ii. p. 16.

1865. Nautilus danicus, Blanford, Mem, Geol. Surv. India, Paleont.
Indica, Foss. Ceph. Cretaceous Rocks of 8, India, p. 24, pl. x. figs.
4, 4a, pl. xi.

1865, Nautilus danicus, Stoliczka, ibid. p. 208.

1868. Nautilus danicus, Dewalque, Prodrome d’une Description Géo-
logique de la Belgique, p. 358.

1868. Nautilus danicus, Stoliczka, Records Geol. Surv. India, no. 2,
p. 32.

Nautilus (Hercoglossa) danicus.— Lateral view of a young example,
showing the curvature of the sutures. Drawn from a specimen in
the British Museum (no. C.3106). Natural size.

Sp. char, Shell subinflated, flattened on the sides, narrowly
rounded on the periphery ; umbilicus closed. Septa mode-
rately distant, being 5 lines apart on the periphery, where

408 On some Species of Jurassic he. Nautili.

the height of the whorl is 11 lines. Sutures forming an
acute, forwardly-directed lobe near the umbilicus, then bend-
ing backwards into a somewhat broader lobe, and again
directed forwards towards the periphery, in crossing which
they make a broad arch. There is a very distinct internal
(dorsal) lobe in young specimens. ‘The siphuncle is a little
below the centre. The body-chamber and test are unknown.

Remarks. This species is distinguished from Nautilus
franconicus by the form of its shell, which has a rounded
instead of a truncated periphery ; its siphuncle also is differ-
ently placed. There 1s no species in the Chalk of HKurope
with which it may be compared. N. danicus has been recog-
nized by H. EF. Blantord* in the upper part of the Arrialoor
Group (Cretaceous) of Southern India. Mr. Blanford found
that the only difference between the Indian specimens and
the figures of NV. danicus given by Lyell in the Trans. Geol.
Soc. (loc. cit.) was ‘6a somewhat greater compression of
form” in some of the former; this he found, however, to be
a variable character in the Indian specimens. He remarks
that the very large size to which the Trichinopoly specimens
occasionally attain can scarcely be regarded as a specific
character. The internal lobe is present in young examples
of the Indian specimens, disappearing in older ones. In the
volume already quoted t Stoliczka has the following remarks
on the present species :—“ So far as the existing figures of
N. danicus ['Trans. Geol. Soc., oe. cit.] allow an opinion to
be formed, the Indian fossil does not vary from the Kuropean,
except in the usually greater thickness of the whorls.” The
following species from the Cretaceous rocks of Southern
India form a group of which N. danicus is the European
representative, viz. V. serpentinus, Blantord {, N. Horbesia-
nus, Blanford §, N. trichinopolitensis, Blanford ||.

Horizon. Upper Chalk.

Locality. Faxoe, Denmark.

TERTIARY.
12. Nautilus (Hercoglossa) Cassinianus, sp. nov.
[ Aturia Cassiniana, Edwards, MS. |
Sp. char. Shell compressed, with flattened sides and nar-
rowly rounded periphery. Greatest thickness in the region

* Mem. Geol. Surv. India, Paleeont. Indica, 1861, series i. Cret.
Ceph. of Southern India, p, 24.

+ Mem. Geol. Surv. India, Paleeont. Indica, 1866, series iii. Cret.
Ceph. of Southern India, p. 208.

{ Mem, Geol. Surv. India, Paleont. Indica, ser. i. 1861, p. 25, pl. xii.
figs. 1, 1@; ibid. ser. ii. 1866, p. 208, pl. xcii, fig. 2.

§ Ibid. p. 26, pl. xiii.

| lbid. p. 37, pl. xxiii., pl. xxiv. figs. 1, 2; ibid. ser. iii, 1866, p. 212.

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Scarabzeide. 409

of the umbilicus; the latter closed. Septa approximate,
sutures forming a sharply-bent, forwardly-directed lobe after

so ©
Fig. 9.

LF
Nautilus (Hercoglossa) Cassinianus.—a, lateral view of a fragment, show-
ing the curvature of the sutures; }, front view, showing the position
of the siphuncle. Drawn from a specimen in the British Museum
(no. 71003). Natural size.

leaving the umbilicus, then bent backwards in a similar lobe,
and finally directed forwards towards the periphery, which
they cross with a narrow arch. Siphuncle situated below
the centre.

Remarks. This species closely resembles Nautilus (Herco-
glossa) danicus, but is easily distinguished by its more com
pressed whorls and the position of its siphuncle. It may be
added that the close proximity of these species in the geolo-
gical series (V. (//.) danicus from the uppermost beds of
the Chalk, and NV. (4) Cassintanus from the Lower Hocene)
renders their near relationship highly probable.

The name of this species is taken from a list of the
Edwards Collection of Fossils now in the British Museum,
but the species was never described. Edwards erroneously
placed it in the genus Aturia.

Horizon. London Clay (Lower Eocene).

Localities. Finchley, Middlesex (Edwards’s type) ; Isle of
Sheppey.

L.—Further Descriptions of new Coleoptera of the Family
Scarabeide cn the British Museum. By CHARLES O.
WATERHOUSE.

SIncE my last paper was written (supra, p. 865) I have,
by the kindness of Mr. D. Sharp, been able to examine the
type specimens of the species of Gymnopleurus described
by him. I think that in this genus, as in so many other
Coprophaga, there are two forms of males, a major and a
minor form, the major form having the anterior tibia more
inflexed at the apex and the posterior angles of the thorax

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 29

410 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Scarabeeidee.

more dilated than in the minor form, which more approaches
the female. The series of G. s¢nuatus and Gf’. assamensis in
the British-Museum Collection show this I think very dis-
tinctly. I believe the species of this group described by Mr.
Sharp are all good species, except @. calcar and G. celebicus,
which, in my opinion, are major and minor forms of the same
species; G. dubius, on the other hand, which has been con-
sidered the female of G. calcar by von Harold, appears to me
to be possibly distinct, or it may be merely a large female.

Gymnopleurus Hornet.

Oblongus, subparallelus, parum convexus, niger; thorace fortiter
reticulato-foveolato; elytris surdis, coriaceis, striatis, interstitiis
maculis parvis irregularibus parum elevatis nitidis ornatis.

Long. 45 lin.

Hab. N.W. India (C. Horne, Esq.).

Allied to G. flagellatus, ¥., but smaller and rather more
parallel. The head is of the same form, triangularly incised
in front, closely foveolate-punctate posteriorly. The thorax
is less broad, more rounded at the hind angles, marked with
closely placed dull foveee, which are irregular in size, but are
relatively larger than in G. flagellatus, so that the interspaces
are generally very narrow and form a sort of shining network ;
each fovea has a minute shining tubercle in its centre. The
elytra are dull, finely coriaceous, striated as in G. flagellatus,
the interstices having a series of small, very irregular, slightly
raised, shining spots, somewhat as in St/pha rugosa; meta-
sternum more coarsely foveolate than in G. flageliatus ; lateral
exposed margin of the abdomen not carinate.

Gymnopleurus singularis.

Oblongus, parum convexus, supra obscure cupreus, surdus, subtus
niger, nitidus; thorace subtilissime coriaceo, sat crebre subtiliter
punctato, lateribus medio angulatis dein paulo sinuatis, angulis
posticis obtusis paulo retrorsum productis; elytris subtilissime
coriaceis, striatis, interstitiis guttis minutis nitidis crebre aspersis.

Long. 84 lin.

Hab. Corea (Sir EL. Belcher).

Closely allied to G. sinuatus, of a dull coppery colour
shaded with black, and with a silky appearance. The back
part of the head is dull, coriaceous, with minute asperate
punctures. Thorax very finely but distinctly punctured, the
punctures separated generally by three or four diameters of a
puncture, the punctures towards the sides appearing slightly
asperate. The sides are distinctly but obtusely angular at

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Scarabeeidee. 411

the middle, and immediately behind this angulation there is
a slight but distinct sinuosity ; from this point to the base the
sides are gently curved inwards and the margins are thick-
ened ; the posterior angles are slightly produced backwards,
the produced part obtusely rounded. ‘The elytra are finely
coriaceous, distinctly striated, the strie indistinctly punctured,
the interstices flat, with rather closely placed, minute, shining
dots. The metasternum has an impressed median line, which
widens out into a somewhat deep impression posteriorly ; the
anterior part is slightly swollen in the middle; the sloping
sides with shining granules.

This species is very close to G. maurus, Sharp; but that
species is black and has the sides of the thorax more distinctly
angular.

Gy m nopleu rus assamensts.

Parum convexus, supra cupreus, subtus cupreo-niger, parum nitidus ;
thorace subtiliter coriaceo, punctis parvis sat crebre asperso, ante
medium oblique angustato, postice subparallelo, angulis postice
rectangularibus, sat obtusis ; elytris tenuiter striatis, striis punctis
minutis haud approximatis instructis, interstitiis subtilissime
coriaceis et crebre tenuiter nitido-granulosis ; antennis ferrugineo-
flavis, basi nigris.

Long. 63-10 lin.

Hab. N.W. India, Sylhet, Assam, Corea.

This species is well known in collections under the above
name, but does not appear to have been deseribed. It closely
resembles G. sinwatus, but is coppery in colour and more
finely sculptured, and consequently is less dull; the sides of
the thorax are more distinctly angular.

Gymnopleurus brahminus.

Niger, opacus, supra omnino equaliter subtiliter granulosus ; thorace
ante medium oblique angustato, postice perparum angustiore
fere parallelo, angulis posticis vix prominulis; elytris leviter
striatis.

Long. 93 lin.

Hab. China (J. C. Bowring, Esq.).

This species is close to G. sinwatus, but is quite black and
dull and differently sculptured. The thorax is _obtusely
angular at the middle of the sides, scarcely narrowed towards
the base, almost parallel, with the posterior angles less pro-
minent than in G. s¢nwatus, but a little more so than in
G. melanarius, the angles themselves obliquely rounded off.

412 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Scarabeeide.

The surface is evenly and closely covered with minute, but
distinct round or oval depressed granules, and is without
punctures. The elytra have the surface extremely finely
coriaceous, and covered with minute but distinct round gra-
nules, which are a trifle smaller than those on the thorax,
and not quite so crowded, so that the coriaceous surface is
visible in the very narrow interspaces. ‘he anterior part of
the metasternum is a little more sloping than in G. sinuatus,
and although slightly convex, there is no distinct swelling in
the middle.

Megathopa cupreicollis.

Oblongo-ovalis, convexus, cupreo-seneus ; capite antice rugato,
nigro, vertice sat fortiter punctato ; thorace nitido, parum sericeo,
subtilissime punctulato; elytris nigro-cyaneis, parum nitidis,
sericeo-coriaceis, basi angustatis, convexis, distincte striato-punc-
tatis, interstitiis planis, guttis minutissimis nitidis crebre aspersis ;
pygidio fortiter sat crebre punctato.

Long. 7 lin.

Hab. Peru.

The punctures on the vertex of the head are strong and
yather close together. The thorax has the posterior angles
even more obliquely rounded than is usual; the punctures
are extremely fine but moderately distinct, moderately near
together ; with a strong magnifying-glass, very minute punc-
tures may be seen in the intervals. The elytra are much
narrowed at the base, moderately convex, with lines of very
distinct, moderately closely placed punctures, with scarcely
any trace of strie. The pygidium is obscure green, with
rather strong dark punctures, which are separated from each
other by one to one and a half diameters; metasternum
apparently impunctate in the middle, with strong punctures
at the sides; antenne pale ferruginous.

This species has the sides of the thorax gently sinuate in
front of the middle, as in M. bicolor, with a projection in front
of it, the projecting part itself gently sinuate.

Megathopa virens, Harold, var. ?

Oblongo-ovalis, minus conyexus, nitidus, nigro-ceruleus; capite
vertice punctato, antice rugato; thorace levi, lateribus medio
angulatis, impressis; elytris subtilissime rugosis, fere levibus,
leevissime striatis, striis impunctatis, interstitiis planis ; pygidio
basi levissimo, dimidio apicali confertim rugoso-puuctato, flavo-
pubescente.

Long. 93 lin.

Hab. Brazil ?

Bibliographical Notice. 413

This is the smoothest species known to me; the thorax has
the sides distinctly but obtusely angular and impressed, with-
out any projection before the front angles, the angles them-
selves slightly acute and diverging ; the elytra have the striz
scarcely noticeable, except at the apex ; the metasternum is
entirely smooth, including the sides.

Megathopa enetcollis.

Oblongus, convexus, sat nitidus, eneus, piceo-tinctus ; capite pos-
tice punctato, medio leviore, antice rugato; thorace medio leyi,
lateribus et basi sat fortiter punctatis, lateribus medio angulatis,
impressis, angulis anticis fere rectis; elytris minus nitidis, sat
fortiter striatis, striis punctatis, interstitiis leviter convexis, sub-
tilissime coriaceis piceo enoque mutantibus; stria octava basi
cariniformi; pygidio piceo, fortiter punctato; metasterno medio
levi, ad latera et antice fortiter parce punctato.

Long. 64 lin.

Hab. Brazil.
This species is allied to IZ columbica, Harold, but has the
sides of the thorax strongly punctured.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE.

Memoir on the Anatomy of the Humpback Whale (Megaptera lon-
gimana, Rudolphi). By Joun Srruruers, M.D, Edinburgh:
Maclachlan & Stewart, 1889.

In this volume Prof. Struthers gives us the various observations *
he made on the anatomy of the male Humpback Whale, 40 feet in
length, which for five or six weeks disported itself in the Tay, at
the end of 1883. The proximity of experienced whalers in Dundee,
however, at length proved fatal to the interesting cetacean, as it
fed on the young herrings and sprats, and other pelagic forms in the
estuary. It was harpooned on the last day of December, but in no
vital part, since the harpoons struck too high, and after a chase of twenty-
one hours, in which it exhibited remarkable strength and endurance,
the lines parted on the morning of Ist January and it was free.
Shock, loss of blood, and the exhaustion of the chase, for it dragged
for a time a steam-tug, a steam-launch, and two rowing-boats,
proved too much for it, and it would seem to have died shortly
afterwards without again venturing into St. Andrews Bay, other-
wise the destination of the skeleton might have been different.

* Which appeared in the ‘Journal of Anatomy and Physiology,
1887-1889.

414 Bibliographical Notice.

About a week afterwards the carcass, floated by the gases, was towed
into Stonehaven and thence to Dundee.

The external characters are drawn up from views of the Whale
as itlay on its dorsum at Stonehaven, and an accurate series of
measurements is given of the various parts. The position in which
the author at first examined the specimen prevented him from forming
an accurate opinion with regard to the colour of the dorsal surface
of the great flipper, but it really was entirely white, as described by
Lilljeborg * and as stated in Bell’s ‘ British Quadrupeds’ f. The
outline of the hump given by Prof. Struthers also differs from a sketch
made on its arrival in Dundee, in so far that the posterior border was
less acute distally. A more important divergence in external con-
figuration, however, has been made by the author in regard to the
tail, which, instead of having, as in his figure, a somewhat uniform
line of fimbriz posteriorly, presented on each side of the median
hiatus (which is also deeper than shown) a prominent flap with
four points. Thus the outline of the tail posteriorly was charac-
teristic.

Amongst other interesting features described by the author are
the mamillary pouch containing the smal] mamme of the male, the
hairs of the muzzle, and the whalebone.

In the second part of the treatise the anterior limbs and the
rudimentary posterior limbs are elaborately examined, and con-
trasted with the same parts in Balenoptera musculus, the type with
which the author compares throughout. The greater size of all the
parts in Megaptera is clearly brought out; the proportions of the
hand to the arm and forearm and the elongation of the phalanges
being diagnostic, and fully explaining the nodulated condition of
the flipper of Megaptera. It is noteworthy, however, that the
finger-muscles are less than half the size of those of B. musculus,
while the tendons showed an increase. The elaborate measurements,
and even weights, of the various elements do credit to Dr. Struthers’s
assiduity. The hind limb is represented by a partially ossified
pelvic bone supporting the crura penis, and a cartilaginous femur,
the functions of which latter are obscure.

The third part treats of the vertebral column, which is charac-
terized by the shortness of the bodies of the vertebrae when con-
trasted with those of other finners. The greatest vertebral body in
Megaptera is the second of its 21 caudal vertebre—the 33rd of its
52 vertebre. A careful survey of the epiphyses, ridges, costal
a hemal tubercles and foramina, of the neural arches and
canal, of the articular and other processes is given. The differences
also between the various parts of this species and B. musculus are
shown, such as the breaking up of the anterior border of the spinous
process in Megaptera, and a decided triangular mesial projection on
the posterior articular process of the last lumbar and first two
caudal in the same species. In regard to the transverse processes,

* Scandinavian Cetacea, Flower, Ray Soc. p. 289 (1866).
{ 2nd edition, London, 1874.

Bibliographical Notice. 415

a few of the chief features are, their absence on the 15 posterior
caudal vertebrae, and the upturning of the dorsal transverse pro-
cesses. The spinous processes, again, are rhomboidal, in contrast
with the battle-door shape of those of B. musculus.

The differences of the transverse processes of the axis in the two
forms are interesting. Thus the upper and lower processes unite
in B. musculus, forming a great common terminal plate external to
the ring, wherefis i in Mec gaptera the ends of the processes are three
inches apart. Generally the separated cervical vertebrae in Mega-
ptera are of less breadth compared with the height than in B.
musculus, and their structure would indicate more movement in the
former than in the latter.

After the elaborate disquisition on the vertebrae, the author next
discourses on the ribs. These are thicker and more curved in
Megaptera, and they present a less distinct angle and external neck.
They moreover enclose a proportionally larger thoracie cavity than
in B. musculus. The sternum is narrower than in the latter, and
the first rib lies behind the wing of the sternum. In this example
of Megaptera also there was a wide oblique notch at the end of the
first rib, best marked on the right.

The chevron bones are fewer than in B. musculus, and they have
a wider arch at the top. The spines are less developed than in B.
musculus.

The last part of the treatise contains an account of the skull,
which is proportionally larger in Megaptera, its greater breadth
being especially diagnostic. It has a large foramen magnum, the
occipital plate of the temporal is also larger, and the temporal fossa
is shorter and more posterior in position. The parietal has much
greater expansion on the temporal fossa in Megaptera, and the
sphenoid does not show itself on the surface. The differences in
regard to the pterygoid, palate (which characteristically sends up a
triangular process pushing the pterygoid outwards), and the broader
malar in Megaptera are all carefully detailed. The characters of the
orbit, transverse frontal fossa, nasal bones (fitted to a triangular
spine of the frontals), anterior and posterior nares, ethmo-turbinals,
and yomer are next examined, and the differences in contrast with
B. musculus pointed out. In Megaptera also the maxillaries and
premaxillaries present a marked fall for 7 or 8 inches along the
beak, and they are much inclined inwards at and anterior to the
nasals. The deficiences of the grooves in the palatal roof further
distinguish Megaptera from B. musculus. The greater breadth of
the median beam in the former is also noteworthy, and its brain-
cavity is also broader; the tympanic bone is shorter in proportion
to its breadth in Megaptera, and the form of the posterior division
of the periotic is of special interest in connexion with Dr. Gray’s
remarks on Megaptera nove-zealandie, the figure of the part in the
latter presenting a close resemblance.

The treatise concludes with an account of the differences in the
mandible and hyoid in the two species. Thus the coronoid pro-
cess of the former is shorter, the dental foramen is nearer the

416 Miscellaneous.

condyle in Megaptera, which also has a greater curvature and
thickness of the body of the mandible, and shorter horns to the
hyoid bone.

It is unfortunate that the soft parts of the Tay Whale were so
decayed as to be useless for investigation, since many important
features, ¢. g. the condition of the mucous membrane of the jeju-
num, were thus placed beyond the reach of the anatomist.

The work is a noteworthy contribution to the anatomy of Mega-
ptera, though, perhaps, its interest and value might have been
increased if more frequent references had been made to the labours
of previous observers. A clearer conception of what has and what
has not been previously described would thus have been obtained.
Dr. Struthers, indeed, is to be congratulated on this further addition
to his researches on the Cetacea, and though his official duties (from
which, it is much to be regretted, ill-health has now relieved him)
may have hampered and limited his work, yet this treatise is evi-
dence of that scientific enthusiasm for which Scotch anatomists,
such as the earlier Monros, Goodsir, and Turner, have been so
famous. We look forward to further contributions from the pen of
Dr, Struthers. W. CoE

MISCELLANEOUS.

On Excavations made in Rocks by Sea- Urchins.
By J. Watrer Fewxes *.

Tue author has had an opportunity of observing excavations made
by Strongylocentrotus drdbachiensis on the coast of Grand Manan,
New Brunswick, where the reefs of hard mica-schist with veins of
harder quartzite are bare at low tide but covered at high water.
The cavities were so numerous that the rock was roughly honey-
combed with these shallow excavations, and, moreover, spreading
Algze (Lithothaumnion and Melobesia) sometimes covered the rock and
the cavities. The author, indeed, thinks the presence of the latter
may be necessary to the Sea-Urchins ‘for some reason.” It would
be as useful, however, to speculate on the relation of the same to the
boring Annelids, unless the Algze are eaten by the Echini—just as
the common British Echinus fills its intestine with fragments of the
stems of Laminarice, with perhaps a few fragments of the tubes of
Serpulew. He gives some interesting observations on the borings of
E. lividus in pot-holes at Biarritz by Prof. Jules Marcou. In regard
to the modus operandi of the borers Mr. Fewkes, after previous
observers, gives the chief weight to the dental apparatus, probably
assisted by the voluntary movements of the spines and the involun-
tary action caused by the waves moving the animal i situ. Two
interesting plates illustrate the paper. W..C. Me

* ‘American Naturalist,’ January 1890.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SIXTH SERIES. ]

No. 30. JUNE 1890.

LI.—On the Morphology and Phylogeny of the Organization
of the Cestoda. By C. Ciaus *.

For a number of years past I have represented in my lectures
a view of the nature of the Cestode body which differs mate-
rially from that propounded by Steenstrup and strengthened
by the researches of von Siebold, van Beneden, and Rudolph
Leuckart: nevertheless the ensemble of the facts and the
results of numerous later investigations prove it to be the only
true and satisfactory one. The main features of this altered
view of the case, which, moreover, in many respects does not
differ so very widely from Rud. Leuckart’s latest treatise on
the Helminthest, are to be found briefly indicated in the latest
editions of my text-books {; but, so far as I am aware, a
more precise explanation of my theory on a directly compara-
tive basis has not yet been attempted. The following brief
account is intended to supply this deficiency.

# Translated from the ‘Arbeiten aus dem Zoologischen Institute der
Universitat Wien und der Zoologischen Station in Triest,’ Bd. viii.
Heft iii.: Alfred Holder, Vienna, 1889,

+ Rud. Leuckart, ‘Die Parasiten des Menschen und die von ihnen
herriihrenden Krankheiten, Kin Hand- und Lehrbuch fiir Naturforscher
und Aerzte,’ Leipzig, 1879-1886, Bd. i.

¢ C. Claus, ‘Grundziige der Zoologie,’ Marburg, 1879, ITV. Aufl. Bd. i.
ii. Lieferung, p. 888 &c.; ‘Lehrbuch der Zoologie,’ Ilustrirte Ausgaben,
ii., iii., and iv. Aufl.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 30

418 Prof. C. Claus on the Morphology and

As is well known, it was the “ proglottis,” the segment
full of ova and embryos and liberated from the body of the
Cestode, which, in accordance with the doctrine of Alterna-
tion of Generations, was held to be the sexual individual and
furnished the starting-point for a comparison with the closely
allied but higher organized Trematodes. The proglottis was
regarded as the equivalent of the Trematode, which, arising
by means of terminal gemmation at the posterior end of an
individual belonging to another generation and functioning as
*‘ nurse-form ”’—the Cestode-head or “ scolex,” with the loss
of mouth, alimentary canal, and organs of adhesion, did
actually possess the latter, in common with all the other joints
of the chain, while it formed part of the chain of segments, in
the shape of the circlet of hooks and the suckers of the scolex.
The fact that there are Cestodes which are devoid of any
trace of segmentation (e. g. Caryophylleus), and in whose
simple Trematode-like body scolex and proglottis are not
differentiated, appeared to agree very well with this view, and
was explained as a secondary condition, inasmuch as it was
supposed that the forms which are spread over two genera-
tions in the case of the ordinary Cestode were, just as in other
cases of alternation of generations, as a result of simplified
and abbreviated development united together again in one
individual (Rud. Leuckart). But the ensemble of the pheno-
mena proves that in point of fact exactly the opposite con-
dition obtains, and that alternation of generations in the
Cestodes must be regarded not as a primary but as a secondary
developmental process.

The starting-point of a comparison with the organization
of the Trematodes, from which all authors agree that the
Cestodes have been derived, is to be furnished not by the.
proglottis but by the entire Cestode, and, moreover, not as a
chain of segments, but in its simplest form, as represented by
the genus Caryophylleus, as an unsegmented worm resembling |
the genera Amphilina and Amphiptyches, which are to be
regarded as connecting-links between the Trematodes and.
Cestodes. The unisegmental Cestode with a single set of.
genital organs was the primeval form, from which, by means,
of further and fuller adaptation to the favourable conditions of
nourishment and growth in the interior of the alimentary
canal, the segmental Cestodes, with progressive individualiza-
tion of the joints repeating themselves by growth in the lon-
gitudinal axis, have only secondarily been developed. Next
to the Caryophyllide come the Ligulide, in whose ribbon-
like body the generative organs indeed are metamerically
repeated, though there is no corresponding outward segmen-.

Phylogeny of the Organization of the Cestoda. 419

tation ; following these we have the Bothriocephalide, with
short but sharply defined joints, which, however, are not yet
set free as separate units, but are liberated from the body of
the Cestode in larger sections after the sexual organs have
arrived at maturity. A higher stage of individualization is
reached in the Teeniade, where the proglottids are set free
singly ; and, lastly, the highest stage of all is attained in the
case of many Phyllobothride, the joints of which undergo a
further development after separation, with considerable increase
in size, and are capable of independent existence for some
time (Echinobothrium).

In spite of the similarity which exists between the alterna-
tion of generations in the Cestodes and that in the Acalephe
(Scyphomedusz), a similarity so complete that the same term
“strobila”’ is applied to the segmented stage in both cases,
the origin of it in each case requires a very different explana-
tion. The alternation of generations in the Seyphomeduse,
which are asexually produced as sections of a polype which
segments and forms the strobila, appears, as compared with
the simple direct development of certain Medusa (Pelagia
noctiluca), to be a primeval developmental process of palin-
genetic importance. Accordingly the ephyra, which is set
free by fission at the distal end of the strobila, represents when
contrasted with the young polype the morphologically higher
and more perfectly organized form. The exceptional case of
direct development, which is found in Pelagia noctiluca owing
to omission of the strobila-stage, is to be regarded, on the
other hand, as an entirely secondary condition, derived from
the alternation of generations by a shortening of the develop-
mental process.

In contradistinction to the Medusa set free at the distal
end of the Acalephe-strobila, the proglottis liberated from the
Cestode-strobila represents, when compared with the ancestral
Trematode, a lower form, simplified and to a certain extent
retrograded by the disappearance of the organs of adhesion
and of the alimentary canal, though in point of fact the
reduction of the organs was a condition of its individualiza-
tion. While in the former instance the alternation of gene-
rations is the original and primary process, and the completion
of the metamorphosis in the same individual the later one,
secondarily produced by shortening and simplifying the deve-
lopment, in the Cestodes exactly the opposite is the case, and
the alternation of generations is the later form of develop-
ment, secondarily derived from the metamorphosis which was
formerly undergone by one and the same individual, in con-
nexion with the simplification of the organization and the

30*

420 Prof. C. Claus on the Morphology and

more favourable conditions of nourishment and growth owing
to intestinal parasitism. It follows that we have to define
the developinent of the Acalephe as alternation of genera-
tions *, which in certain cases can be simplified by shortening
into metamorphosis, while we must interpret the development
of the Cestodes, on the other hand, as metamorphosis, which,
owing to individualization of certain products of growth, can
give rise to variously complicated forms of alternation of gene-
rations.

However, we have not yet taken into account the first most
variable series of manifold and complicated developmental
stages, by which the embryo produced from the fertilized
ovum is transformed into the scolex. But it is precisely this
portion of the ontogeny which is of peculiar importance for
our problem, not only because by the appearance of a stage
capable of asexual reproduction, and therefore distinguished
as the primary nurse-form, the complication of the develop-
mental processes interpreted as an alternation of generations
is increased and the justice of such an interpretation thereby
strengthened, but also because it is just this section of the
development which is to be brought into direct comparison
with that of the Trematodes. And if we are right in tracing
the phylogeny of the Cestodes from the Trematodes, the
development of the latter, which for a long time was itself
considered as alternation of generations, must be repeated,
though in a modified form, in their descendants.

Every one is aware that the digenetic ‘Trematodes—and
these alone, and not the monogenetic forms, can be considered
in the comparison—as well as the Cestodes pass their imma-
ture stages in other hosts than those of the sexual animals,
whereby a change of hosts becomes a necessity. In the case
of the former it is usually a mollusk or other Invertebrate in
whose body the intermediate generations develop themselves
as the so-called “ sporocysts ”’ or ‘ redig,” according as they
do or do not possess a mouth and alimentary canal, together
with their progeny, the ‘“ Cercarie”’ or Distoma-larva. In
the case of the Cestoda, too, the part of first host is sometimes
played by an Invertebrate, but generally it is a Vertebrate in
which the young forms are to be found as ‘ Cysticercoids ”’ or

* It is owing to the astonishing similarity existing between the pheno-
mena of growth and fission in the Acalephe- and Cestode-strobilas, and
between the formation of ephyre and proglottids, that the phylogenetic
contrast has been overlooked and the morphological value of the sexual
generations in both cases identified, and that the mistake has then been
made (Gotte) of not admitting the eer of the Acalephe to he
an instance of alternation of generations, but interpreting it as a meta-
moyphosis,

Phylogeny of the Organization of the Cestoda. 421

*¢ Cysticerci’’—the latter usually encysting in parenchyma-
tous organs. There can therefore be no question but that we
must trace back Cysticercus as well as Cysticercoid either to
the Cercaria-producing redia or sporocyst, or else to the
Cercariz themselves, provided that we admit the origin of the
Cestodes from the Trematodes.

The choice between the two alternatives appears at first
sight to be by no means an easy one; but, taking into con-
sideration the analogy of the proliferation of the Cysticercus,
it would seem to rest with the redia or sporocyst as the
equivalent of the latter. However, a closer comparison shows
us that in this proliferation we have to deal merely with
analogous and not with homologous processes, since the germs
produced by the sporocysts and rediw, which were formerly
regarded as spores, or even as internal buds, cannot be placed
on the same level as the buds on the wall of the Cysticercus-
vesicle, but must be considered as formations of quite a diffe-
rent kind. It is true that for a long time (that is to say as
long as the theory that the Distoma-development was a case
of alternation of generations remained undisputed) these forma-
tions were regarded as products of an asexual reproduction,
that is as spores or buds, until the discovery of pedogenesis
in Diptera-larve, and the precocious separation of the first
sexual cells, which sometimes even takes place during the
segmentation of the oosperm *, led to an entirely different
view—a view which, supported by the consideration that
spore-formation in Metazoa is & priort highly improbable,
has now come to be the one which is generally accepted. In
accordance with this view the so-called germ-ceils in the
sporocysts and rediz are considered to be ovarian cells
separated early and developing in the body of the larva; that
is to say, they are held to be ova developing parthenogeneti-
cally +, and the development of a Distoma is no longer
explained as a case of alternation of generations, but asa form
otf heterogamy. ‘The sporocysts and rediz would then be
explained simply as larval forms which have undergone a
retrogressive metamorphosis or else have been checked in their
development for the purpose of aiding the rapid and extensive
reproduction of individuals ; they would correspond to larval

* Compare C. Grobben, “ Die Entwicklungsgeschichte der Mona
rectirostris,’ Arbeiten aus dem Zoologischen Institute in Wien und der
Zoologischen Station in Triest ; Vienna, 1879, Bd. ii.

+ This interpretation, first given by Grobben (loc. cit.), has since been
repeated by other investigators also in a precisely similar way, and may
be said to have met with pretty general acceptance at the present day. Cf.
also H. Schauinsland’s ‘ Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Embryonalentwicke-
lung der Trematoden,’ Jena, 1883.

422 Prof. C. Claus on the Morphology and

forms left behind at various stages of development, and from
a morphological standpoint would have to be regarded as
simplified progeny-bearing Cercarie. It follows that the
Cercaria alone would figure as the equivalent of Cysticercoid
or Cysticercus. Now, as a matter of fact, this larval form
does afford an immediate and natural comparison with those
developmental forms of the scolex which on a number of
other grounds we are compelled to regard as the primary and
original ones. These are the little Cysticercoids which
inhabit the bodies of Invertebrates, and which have only
become known comparatively lately. While authors were
formerly inclined to derive the Cysticercoid from a Cysti-
cercus, simplified and diminished in size, and so to regard it
as a Cysticercus whose vesicle, owing to unfavourable soil,
had shrunk up and degenerated into a little appendage
scarcely capable of containing the body of the scolex, they
will now, on the contrary, have to derive the Cysticercus-
vesicle from the enlarged caudal appendage of the Cysticercoid,
which has become inflated owing to the collection of an aqueous
fluid, and to consider it as a secondary modification which
has arisen from this and adapted itself to a parasitic existence
in the body of a Vertebrate. That this view is actually the
correct one, and that the Cysticercoid and not the Cysticercus
represents the primary form, from which the other must be
derived, is not only rendered probable at the outset by the
simpler structure and smaller size of the former, as well as
by its sojourn in the bodies of the phyletically older Inverte-
brates, but also by the surprising similarity of form existing
between certain Cysticercoids and Cercariz, which renders
possible, strengthens, and confirms a direct homology between
the two.

The Cysticercoid of Arion empiricorum, which was first
described by Stein, being divided by a constriction into a
body and a caudal appendage, at once reminds us of the
Trematode-Cercaria. ‘T’o a much greater extent is this agree-
ment seen in Archigetes Sieboldii; this is a Caryophyllid
allied to Caryophylleus and occurring in Naide in a sexual
scolex-stage. Leuckart* states that the creature consists
“like the Cercaria, of a flattened oval body and a cylindrical
tail, which is inserted in a pit-shaped depression at the pos-
terior end,” so that without closely examining it one would
suppose it to be a Cercaria. Not less striking is the resem-
blance of the Cysticercoid inhabiting the dog-louse and the

* Rud. Leuckart, “Archigetes Sieboldi’, eine geschlechtsreife Cesto-
denamme, Zeitschrift rir w. Zoologie, Supplementband, 1878, Bd. xxx.

Phylogeny of the Organization of the Cestoda. 423

flea, from which Tenia elliptica (=cucumerina) of the human
intestine is derived.

It is only recently that we have received full details
concerning this larval form and its caudal appendage,
through the observations of Grassi and Rovelli*. Both
of these authors recognized the soundness of the homo-
logy of body and tail-portion with the corresponding parts
of the Cercaria, though they perhaps went too far in inter-
preting the anterior invagination of the Cysticercoid as
the equivalent of the buccal cavity, the rostellum as the
everted pharyngeal bulb, and the body-cavity without suffi-
cient basis as the commencement of the mid-gut.

In correspondence with this comparison we also have the
apparent agreement between the development of the Cercaria-
tail and that of the caudal portion of the Cysticercoid, which,
moreover, with reference to the position of the embryonic
hooks, had been regarded as the enlarged body of the hexa-
eanth embryo, and accordingly styled “ head-maker ” (Kopf-
bildner), and explained as nurse of the presumably subse-
quently formed scolex. As a matter of fact, however, it by
no means represents the whole of the body of the embryo,
but only the smaller portion thereof, from which, just as in
the case of the cells budded off from the inner surface of the
Redia to form the Cerearia, a broader section is differentiated
as body and a narrower one as caudal appendage fT. But
this establishes beyond a doubt the value as individuals of
the Cysticercoid and of the Cysticercus which is to be derived
from it, in opposition to that view which would see in the
Cysticercus a colony composed of at least two individuals,
namely of the embryo, metamorphosed into the caudal appen-
dage, or, rather, vesicle-wall, of the Cysticercus, and of the
Cestode-head or scolex subsequently produced from this by
budding.

The changes experienced by the Trematode-larva in its
transition to the Cestode-larva also affect, in correlation to
the atrophy of the alimentary canal and the consequent

* “Kmbryologische Forschungen von Prof. Battista Grassi und Dr.
Giuseppe Rovelli,” Centralblatt fir Bacteriologie u. Parasitenkunde,
Cassel, 1889, v. Band, no. 11.

+ Grassi’s observations on the development of the Cysticercoids of
Tenia elliptica and murina have proved this deduction to be well founded ;
but in direct contrast thereto Villot regards the caudal appendage of the
Cysticercoids as a new formation which has arisen from the embryo by
budding. He does not, however, establish his contention, which is also
directly opposed to the older view of the caudal appendage as the body
of the embryo. Villot, “ Mémoire sur les Cysticerques des Ténias,”
Annales de Se, Nat. 18838, Tom. xy.

424 Prof. C. Claus on the Morphology and

simplification of the organization, the anterior section of the
body armed with its suckers and chitinous hooks, which was
at an early period invaginated into the posterior portion and
surrounded by this as by a protecting envelope. The evident
necessity for protection, which was to a certain extent satis-
fied by this process, may also have determined the change of
function of the tail, which from an organ for effecting the
change of locality was transformed into a larger or smaller
vesicle, accommodating the whole of the scolex inside itself ;
or again—and in all those cases in which the simple invagi-
nation of the scolex-head into the scolex-body gave a sufficient
protection—degenerated into an apparently functionless rudi-
ment, in order in the end to drop off entirely (Bothriocephalus).
In the first case, however, in which the tail became a large
vesicle filled with watery fluid, its great increase in size
enabled it to acquire yet another important function—prolife-
ration —and to produce by budding numerous scolices
(Cenurus), in some cases brood-capsules with scolices, either
directly or by means of a second and third generation of
vesicles (Echinococcus). While the metamorphosis was
simplified in one direction, in the case of degeneration and
shedding of the caudal appendage, into a more direct deve-
lopment, in the other it grew more complicated and assumed
various forms of alternation of generations. In the latter, to
a certain extent by way of compensation for diminished
productiveness, owing to the loss of pedogenesis, the neces-
sity for increasing the race was satisfied in a newly acquired
way, namely by means of budding on the enlarged surface of
the vesicle.

The power of proliferation, which has been only second-
arily acquired by certain Cysticerci (Canurt and Lchinococct) ,
was, like the process of proglottid-forming by the strobila,
wrongly used as a standpoint from which to interpret the
whole Cestode development. From this point of view the
scolex was regarded as the gemmation-product of the embryo,
the proglottis as that of the scolex, and, in accordance with
the interpretation of the individualized joints of the Cestode
as sexual animals, the complicated five-jointed scheme of the
Cestode-metagenesis was set up. In this arrangement the
embryo figured as primary nurse-form, the scolex as nurse,
and the proglottis as sexual individual, while the Cysticercus-
and Strobila-stages, which furnish the connexion between
primary nurse-form and nurse, and between nurse and sexual
individual, were regarded as polymorphic colonies.

Thus then the metamorphosis of the parasitic Platyhel-
minthes led in the case of the 'Trematodes, owing to the pedo-

Phylogeny of the Organization of the Cestoda. 425

genesis of the larval forms known as Sporocysts and Redia,
to a heterogamy which was for a long time believed to be
alternation of generations ; in the case of the Cestodes, on the
other hand, it produced, owing to individualization of gemma-
tion and fission-products of certain developmental stages,
various more or less complicated forms of alternation of gene-
rations, the modifications of which receive their natural
explanation and interpretation in the present résumé.

Both the budding on the wall of the Cysticercus-vesicle and
the constriction and liberation of segments of the strobila are
already foreshadowed in the development of the Distoma—
the former in the budding-power possessed by certain sporo-
cysts (Leucochloridium), and the latter in the regular separa-
tion between the body and tail of the Cercaria and in the
fission-phenomena presented by certain sporocysts (e. g. those
of Cercaria minuta) and rediz (those of Cercaria echinata
and fulvopunctata). ‘The caudal appendage also, the primary
function of which is that of a motile organ, is to be regarded
as a portion of the body which is capable of individualization.
This results from the surprising discovery made many years
ago by Alex. Pagenstecher * in the case of Bucephalus, and
only recently confirmed and also established in many other
cases by Ercolanit, that the tail is capable of transforming
itself into a brood-producing fragment—that is, as it were,
into a sporocyst. ‘This process also elucidates the contrast
between the caudal appendage of the Cysticercoid and the
Cysticercus-vesicle and the invaginated neck or body of the
scolex, exhibiting the latter in the light of a further section
of the body of the worm, which, before the formation of pro-
glottids sets in, perhaps regularly separates itself from the
foremost portion representing the true head, and morpho-
logically is by no means so very different from the tail.

Presuming it to be a legitimate and well-grounded assump-
tion, owing to the ensemble of the facts, that just as the
innumerable parasitic Copepoda, which present such manifold
variations and often such grotesque shapes, have been deve-
loped from free-swimming Crustacea, so also the intestinal
worms, through adaptation to a parasitic mode of life and the
conditions of existence modified thereby, have arisen from
free-living worm-forms; then, with regard to the Platy-
helminthes, no doubt can exist that it was the Planarians—
so closely allied to the Trematodes—to which they owe their

* Alex. Pagenstecher, “‘Trematodenlarven und Trematoden” (with
six plates), Helminthologischer Beitrag: Heidelberg, 1857. _ :

+ G.B. Ercolani, ‘ Nuove ricerche sulla storia genetica dei Trematodi,’
Tom. i. 1881, and Tom. ii. 1882.

426 Prof. C. Claus on the Morphology and

origin. As the Dendroccele Turbellaria of fresh and salt
water exchanged a free existence for a parasitic one and
adapted bodily form and structure to the new conditions of
life—losing the outer covering of cilia (with the exception of
the vestige still remaining during larval existence), while
they acquired suckers and organs of adhesion of various kinds
—they became Trematodes, which, in connexion with the
easier and more favourable nourishment in the body of a
host, acquired the power of producing a far more numerous
progeny.

The closer representation of these processes becomes more
complicated and difficult owing to the fact that in the case of
so large a number of ‘Trematodes, and practically universally
among the Distoma, with which we are especially concerned,
we have two different hosts between which the life-history of
the species is distributed. The one functions to a certain
extent as intermediate host, and brings the intruding parasite
only up to a certain stage of development ; it conceals in its
body the larval form, though even at this stage it may be
capable of reproduction. The second host receives the para-
site, which has reached it either actively or passively, and
brings it to full development and sexual maturity ; it
harbours the sexual form. Now are the intermediate hosts
—and this is a question which has already been sagaciously
propounded by Rud. Leuckart*—‘ merely later intruders into
the life-history of the Helminthes,” or are they “ the original
genuine hosts, which primitively brought their intestinal
worms to sexual maturity, but were subsequently degraded
to the position of intermediate hosts, owing to the fact that
the life-history of their parasites, through further development
and differentiation, has been spread over a larger number of
stages ?’’ The first case would, to make use of EK. Heckel’s
noteworthy expression, represent a canogenetic, the latter a
palingenetic condition. In the former redize and sporocysts
would be later developed forms (7. e. than the sexual stages),
secondarily and ccenogenetically modified through adaptation ;
in the latter, on the other hand, they would represent earlier-
existing, philetically older, and once sexual forms. Now
when Rudolph Leuckart very emphatically selects the second
alternative, pointing by way of justification to the fact that
at the present time nearly all Entozoa live during the sexual
stage in the bodies of Vertebrates, which are undoubtedly of
later origin, it seems to me that he has not hit the right nail
on the head. Apart from the fact that fish and other aquatic

* Rud. Leuckart, ‘ Die Parasiten des Menschen,’ part 2, Bd. i. p. 148.

Phylogeny of the Organization of the Cestoda. 427

Vertebrata were already in existence in Paleozoic times, and
that for this reason alone the argument adduced loses its
cogency, another circumstance seems to me sufficient to refute
his view, at any rate as far as the Platyhelminthes are con-
cerned. I refer to the remarkable agreement existing between
Trematodes and Dendroccele Turbellaria in the organization
of the fully developed sexual forms, an agreement which, if
the view in question were correct, could only be explained by
means of a convergence of development, which is highly
improbable, especially in view of the contrast between the
conditions of life in the two cases.

At the same time, however, it by no means follows that we
are bound to regard the intermediate hosts of the larval stages
as only later intruders into the life-history of the Helminthes ;
far rather may we well maintain the notion that the young
worms found their way into the bodies of Invertebrates at
the very beginning of the phylogenetic process, but were
there unable to arrive at full development and sexual maturity.
On the other hand, owing to the altered conditions of sub-
sistence, they underwent a necessary change of form, by virtue
of which they, either themselves or in the persons of their
pedogenetically-produced offspring, were enabled to leave
their intermediate host once more by means of active or
passive migration, and, being now transferred into the body
ot a Vertebrate under more favourable conditions of nourish-
ment, they underwent in their new host, as the definite carrier
of the sexual animal, their full morphological and digenetic-
sexual development. In this manner the regular occurrence
of an intermediate host in the life-history of the Helminthes
and the distribution of the developmental phases between two
(or more) hosts may find an unstrained explanation. It will
also appear quite comprehensible that in the case of nume-
rous intestinal worms not one single, but many *, generally

* Many of the intestinal worms appear to possess an especially great
adaptability to the conditions of nourishment in the bodies of their hosts,
which renders intelligible the occurrence of one and the same species of
Entozoon in different and even widely distant hosts. For instance,
Distomum echinatum, which is developed from the Cercaria echinata of
various species of mollusks, is found sexually mature not only in the
intestine of the duck and other waterfowl, but also in that of the dog, the
rat, and the mouse. The Cysticercus cellulose of Tenia solium lives not
only in the body of the pig, but also in the most dissimilar organs of the
human subject, and has also been found in the muscles of the roe, the
dog, and the cat. Tenia eliiptica occurs not only in the intestine of the
cat, but also (cwcumerina) in that of the domestic dog and of man. We
may further instance the distribution of Hehinococcus and of numerous
Nematodes, especially of T'richina spiralis, in the bodies of the most
widely different mammals,

428 Prof. C. Claus on the Morphology and

closely-allied species of animals are found as the intermediate
hosts of the same species of worm, and that the same thing
also recurs in the case of the hosts of the sexually mature
Helminthes.

Now if as early as in the case of the Trematodes, which are
phylogenetically to be derived from Dendroccele Turbellaria,
the intermediate hosts were not the original hosts of the
sexual worms, much less can this have been the fact with
regard to the Cestodes which have been developed from them ;
neither Cysticerci nor Cysticercoids in the bodies of their
victims will ever have represented the terminal stages with
digenetic reproduction in the life-history of these Helminthes.
Like the larve of the Trematodes the young stages also of
the oldest Cestodes, living in the intestines of fish and other
aquatic Vertebrata, penetrated the bodies of Invertebrates,
and there transformed themselves, instead of Redize and Cer-
cari, into Cysticercoids.

It was only later on, with the appearance of birds and
mammals, that the Teniade came into existence, the larval
stages of which remained only to a limited extent in Inverte-
brates, but in the majority of cases migrated into the bodies
of Vertebrata, in which from Cysticercoids they developed
into Cysticerci. ‘The reader will be reminded by these obser-
vations of the doctrine of von Siebold, who regarded the
Cysticerci as tapeworms gone astray into the wrong animals,
becoming in a strange abode dropsical and degener ate, , whereby
he for a long time denied the value of the Cysticerci as
normal larval stages of Cestodes. As a matter of fact we
might just as well speak of going astray in the case of phylo-
genetic development as in that of free-living animals, certain
individuals of which are cast away beyond the limits of
distribution of the species into domains far distant and sepa-
rated by mighty barriers, and there, as a result of the entirely
altered conditions of subsistence, give rise to the development
of new species and groups. And since in physiology no hard-
and-fast line is to be drawn between the normal and the patho-
logical, and only so far in theory, as the latter processes bring
with them disturbing results detrimental to the life of the indi-
vidual, we should even hold the conception of the dropsical
degeneration to be justified * » though certainly in a sense very
different from that of Siebold’s doctrine, which was entirely

opposed to the idea of transmutation, and, as compared with
the results of Kuchenmeister and R. Leuckart’s investigations,
merely defended an error, It is therefore a serious and

* C. Claus, ‘Grundziige der Zoologie,’ 4th edition, part ii. 1879, p. 3889.

Phylogeny of the Organization of the Cestoda. 429

scarcely intelligible exaggeration when E. Heckel *, who
criticises the phylogenetic relations of the Cestodes in a similar
manner, vindicates the merits of von Siebold in having been
the first to discover the true explanation and point out the
way by which we may be enabled to understand the causes
of the ontogenetic phenomena.

Up to the present only a single exceptional case has become
known of a Cestode already sexually mature in the Cysticer-
coid state. I allude to the parasite from the body-cavity of
the Naidz, described by its discoverer, Ratzel, as Caryo-
phylleus appendiculatus, but which was first shown by Rud.
Leuckart to be fully sexual and capable of reproduction, and
constituted by him the representative of a special genus
Archigetes. Although this exceptional case appeared to afford
a yet firmer basis to the hypothesis of the renowned helmin-
thologist, that the larval stages living in the intermediate
hosts were originally the sexual forms, it should nevertheless
be far more natural, in view of the relations which we have
discussed, to recognize in this case no exceptional survival of
a primitive condition, but to interpret it in the light of a
secondary transference of sexual maturity to the larval state,
just as encysted larval stages of Trematodes (Gasterostomum
gracilescens in cysts of Gadus and Distomum agamos of the
Gammarinez) may also become sexually mature.

The designation Archigetes (‘ancestor’) bestowed by
Rud. Leuckart on the parasite of Sewnurts as the result of his
interpretation of it, would apply to our divergent interpre-
tation also, in so far as we have in Archigetes a Caryophyllid
devoid of the power of proglottid-formation and with simple
sexual organs. In this sense, however, it would meet with
our approval the more unreservedly, as with it not only may
the view of the unsegmented Cestode —in contradistinction to
the proglottis—as the equivalent of the Trematode be con-
firmed, but also, as a further result, the attempted derivation
of the Cestode-body in the foregoing exposition may be com-
pletely justified. Moreover, in our at present imperfect
knowledge of the development of Archigetes the possibility
appears by no means excluded that this interesting parasite
also possesses its Caryophylleus-stage in the intestine of fish,
and only under certain conditions attains to degenetic maturity
in the body of Naide. We may have here a similar dimor-
phism to that with which Zeller’s excellent work has made us
acquainted in the case of Polystomum integerrimum, with its
two sexually mature forms—the one on the gills of the tad-
pole, the other in the urinary bladder of the frog.

* K, Heckel, ‘Metagenesis und Hypogenesis yon Auwrelia aurita,’
Jena, 1881, p. 33,

430 Mr. A. S. Woodward on some Ganoid Fishes

LII.—Notes on some Ganoid Fishes from the English Lower
Lias. By A. Smita Woopwarp, F.G.S8., F.Z.8., of the
British Museum (Natural History).

[Plate XVI.]'

THE accumulated discoveries of many years, preserved in
several Museums, afford the opportunity for a revision of our
knowledge of the Fish-fauna of the English Lower Lias, and
also make known a few interesting forms as yet unrecognized.
Having had frequent opportunities of pursuing the subject
during the last few years, the writer ventures to offer the
following remarks on some of these new and little-known
fishes—the result of observations chiefly based on specimens
in the British Museum.

I. Family Palezoniscide.

As already remarked by Traquair *, the Palzoniscide of
the Lias comprise the four fishes described by Egerton under
the names of Oxygnathus ornatus, Cosmolepis Egertont,
Thrissonotus Colei, and Centrolepis asper. A fifth genus
and species, Lissolepis serratus of Davis, is also described as
referable to the same family ; but there seems to be no justi-
fication for this determination, and the fish in question has
lately been removed to the Eugnathide f.

Genus CENTROLEPIS.

Of the undoubted Paleoniscide the genus Centrolepis is
the most striking and well characterized. It is, however,
very rare, there being only three specimens in the British
Museum ; and the caudal pedicle and fins still remain un-
known. The new examples show that the type species,
Centrolepis asper, is not so short and stout as supposed by
Egerton; the fin described as anal being truly one of the
pelvic pair, while the marginal rays ascribed to the lower
lobe of the caudal fin are undoubtedly those of the anal.
Moreover, the scales described and figured in the original
notice are all referable to the ventral aspect, those of the flank
(Pl. XVI. fig. 1) being somewhat deeper in proportion to their

* R. H. Traquair, “‘Ganoid Fishes of the British Carboniferous For-
mations,” pt. i. (Pal. Soc., 1877), p. 12.

+ Woodward and Sherborn, “ Catalogue of British Fossil Vertebrata ”
(1890), p. 77. Complete references to the literature of the subject under
consideration will be found in this work.

Srom the English Lower Lias, 431

width, and with less radiating markings. In short, the more
important known facts in the skeletal anatomy of this fish
may now be summarized as follows :—

Trunk fusiform, robust, and somewhat elongated. Man-
dibular suspensorium oblique; dentition consisting of an
inner series of large conical teeth, well spaced but numerous,
and an outer close series of smaller teeth, similar in form ;
head, opercular, and _branchiostegal bones externally tuber-
culated or rugose. Tins large, consisting of broad, flattened
rays, all articulated and distally bifurcating, more or less
coated with ganoine; anterior borders fringed with well-
developed fulera, Dorsal and anal fins triangular in shape,
elevated, the dorsal opposed to the space between the pelvic
fins and the ana]. Scales thick, of moderate size, and highly
ornamented ; not much deeper than broad upon the middle of
the flank, as deep as broad on the ventral aspect. Each
scale of the abdominal region marked in its hinder half by
coarse postero-inferiorly directed ridges and sharp denticula-
tions, in its anterior half by few, irregular, more or less
interrupted vertical ridges and furrows; the scales of the
caudal region coarsely serrated posteriorly, with a few short,
transverse sculpturings anteriorly.

Genus OXYGNATHUS.

The facts made known in Egerton’s description of Oxy-
gnathus sufce to demonstrate the right of the type species
to generic distinction, although the ‘ diagnosis ”’ is as unsatis-
factory as most of those in early paleichthyological writings.
The figure (Egerton’s pl. ix.), however, exhibits some inac-
curacies, the pectoral fin-rays being unarticulated except at
the extremities, as correctly noted in the description; the
striations upon the jaws not being regular parallel lines, but
short and wavy fine ridges, regularly anastomosing and
bifurcating ; while the supposed indications of “ ossified
vertebre ’’ are either small pleurocentra and hypocentra, or,
as seems more probable, merely the expanded bases of the
arches.

A new diagnosis of the genus, based upon the original
description and the examination of the large series of exam-
ples in the British Museum, may thus be enunciated in the
following terms :—

Trunk elegantly fusiform, more or less elongated. Mandi-
bular suspensorium oblique ; dentition consisting of a series
of large, well-spaced conical teeth, and numerous minute
teeth irregularly arranged and somewhat clustered; cranial
roof-bones finely tuberculated, sometimes rugose, the facial

432 Mr. A. S. Woodward on some Ganoid Fishes

bones and branchiostegal rays delicately striated, and the
opercular bones almost smooth. Fins of moderate size or
small, the rays broad, distally bifurcating, and more or less
covered with a very thin layer of ganoine ; the rays of the
pectoral fins, except the few short ones placed hindermost,
articulated only at the distal extremities, all others uniformly
articulated to the base ; fulcra minute or absent. Dorsal and
anal fins triangular in shape, somewhat longer than high,
and the hinder rays very short ; dorsal opposed to the space
between the pelvic and anal fins ; upper caudal lobe narrow
and much attenuated, with small ridge-scales, the fin deeply
forked and symmetrical. Scales thick, small, or of moderate
size, very narrow ventrally, and ornamented with delicate,
oblique lines of ganoine, in part bifurcating and branching,
becoming very faint upon the anterior dorso-lateral region
and partly subdivided into tubercles.

The only character of generic value in Oxygnathus ornatus
that still remains doubtful is the relative length of the anal
fin, no known specimen exhibiting this appendage so satis-
factorily as desirable. That it will prove to be elongated,
however, seems evident from the fact that in every other
generic character the so-called Cosmolepis Egertoni is identi-
cal with Oxygnathus, and the elongation of the anal fin is
distinct in the type specimen of that fish. Moreover, the so-
called Thrissonotus Colet is not separated from Oxygnathus
ornatus even by specific characters, and in this case the anal
fin is again distinctly elongated. This fish owes the pecu-
liarities of its squamation entirely to the fact that it occurs in
a very hard nodule, which has split in such a manner as to
destroy the superficial scale-ornament, and exhibit the struc-
tural lines of growth. All the ordinary specimens of Owy-
gnathus ornatus occur in the well-known soft Lias clay, and
thus exhibit the superficial ornamentation more or less
intact.

To the synonymy of Oxygnathus ornatus the present
writer would thus relegate the so-called Thrissonotus Colei,
the species being as yet known only from the Lower Lias of
Lyme Regis ; and the more deeply fusiform species, hitherto
named ‘‘ Cosmolepis,’ may be termed Oxygnathus Egertont,
this being at present peculiar to the Lower Lias of Barrow-
on-Soar.

Genus CoccoLeEPIs.

Three imperfectly preserved specimens in the British
Museum indicate the occurrence of a new small Paleoniscid

from the English Lower Lias. 433

fish in the Lower Lias of Lyme Regis; two of these speci-
mens being tolerably complete, but the third wanting the
head and the greater part of the abdominal region, ‘while
apparently shortened by accidental crushing. ‘The principal
characters of the genus and species are shown in the accom-
panying Pl. XVI. figs, 2-4.

The maximum depth of the trunk is contained about four
and a half times in the total length, which does not exceed
0:185. The head (Pl. XVI. figs. 2, 3) is longer than deep, it
and the opercular apparatus together being comprised about
four and a half times in the total length. The orbit is large
and far forwards, and the snout projects somewhat in advance
of the mouth. ‘The mandibular suspensorium is very oblique
and the jaws are slender, with a wide gape. ‘The mandible
is pointed at the symphysis and bears two rows of teeth, the
inner series consisting of large, regular, well-spaced, conical
teeth, somewhat curved, and the outer series comprising nume-
rous “closely arranged minute teeth. The dentition of the
upper jaw 1s smaller than that of the lower, though the inner
row is similar in character and the outer row is not clearly
recognizable. The cranial and facial bones are ornamented
with coarse rounded tuberculations, which are rarely elongated
and fused into short ruge; and these tuberculations become
Mone paise on the operculum and suboperculum. ‘The oper-
culum (fig. 3, op.) is much smaller than the suboperculum, and
the latter element is deeper than broad.

The vacant space occupied by the notochord is distinct in
the original of fig. 2, and there are no undoubted ossifications
in the notochordal sheath. In the abdominal region there
are not less than twenty-eight segments, represented by well-
developed neural arches and relatively minute hemal carti-
jages. Hach of the neural arches is robust, but elongated,
much expanded at its base, less expanded distally, and bearing
a long, slender, neural spine, which is merely apposed and
not in direct connexion ; the representatives of the hemal
arches are merely small expansions, each with a vertical
ridge. In the caudal region both the neural and hemal
arches are complete and apparently more ossified than those
of the abdominal region; the arches are all short and robust,
and in each case the spine is evidently directly fused with its
supporting pedicles. At the inferior lobe of the caudal fin
the hemal spines become expanded for the support of the
dermal rays, and at the base of the upper lobe there is a series
of interspmous bones supporting the large fuleral scales.

All the jins are made known in the : specimens under con-
sideration. ‘The pectoral fins are not excessively large, and

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 3:

434 Mr. A. S. Woodward on some Ganoid Fishes

all the rays are articulated at distant intervals. The pelvic
fins also consist of robust articulated rays, are situated nearer
to the anal than to the pectorals, and are not much inferior in
size to the latter; their height seems to be greater than the
length of their base-line. The more anterior rays of the
dorsal and anal fins and the lower lobe of the caudal are espe-
cially robust and covered with ganoine, and fulera are only
distinctly observed on the caudal. The dorsal fin arises at
the middle point of the back, opposite the hinder half of the
pelvic fins, and is elevated and triangular-acuminate in shape,
the length of its base-line not exceeding its height. The anal
fin is relatively small and low, its height equalling only half
that of the dorsal, and its length being only about three
quarters that of the latter. The caudal fin is deeply forked
and not quite symmetrical, the much attenuated upper lobe
being somewhat larger than the lower.

The scales are small and thin, and the proportions of those
of the abdominal region are well shown in the original of
Pl. XVI. fig. 2. They are not deepened upon the flank,
and, as shown by no. 39865 (Pl. XVI. figs. 4, 4a), the ex-
ternal ornament consists of numerous rounded tuberculations
of ganoine. They appear as if rounded posteriorly and over-
lapping. The fulcral scales of the upper caudal lobe are very
large, with slight longitudinal sculpturings.

Determination.—On selecting from the characters thus
detailed those that seem to be of generic value it will be
observed that the fish approaches most closely the small round-
scaled Paleoniscid Coccolepis *, from the Lithographic Stone
of Bavaria. Judging from the elaborate description of the
latter genus by Vetter T, the new Liassic species exhibits only
one essential difference from the typical form, namely the
articulation of the pectoral fin-rays. ‘These rays, however,
have only been partially seen in a single example of Cocco-
lepis Bucklandi; and, as it is sometimes difficult to reeog-
nize the delicate transverse sutural lines even in well-preserved
examples, we venture to place the Liassic fish in the same
genus until more satisfactory specimens of the type species
are discovered. The Rev. W. R. Andrews, F'.G.8., has
presented to the Museum of Practical Geology a species of
Coccolepis from the Purbeck Beds of the Vale of Wardour f,
but this has not yet been described; and C. Bucklandi thus
remains the sole representative of the genus bearing a defined

* L, Agassiz, Rech. Poiss. Foss. vol. ii. pt. 1. (1848), p. 800.

+ B. Vetter, ‘ Die Fische aus dem lithographischen Schiefer,” Mittheil.

k. min.-geol. Mus. Dresden, pt. iv. (1881), p. 87, pl. i. fig. 2.
¢ Woodward and Sherborn, op. cit. p. 37.

From the English Lower Lias. 435

specific name. From this the fish now made known is dis-
tinguished by the more remote situation and relatively smaller
size of the dorsal fin, and probably by less conspicuous cha-
racters at present imperfectly revealed. ‘The name of Cocco-
lepis liassicus is thus proposed for the new species, in refer-
ence to its stratigraphical position.

II. Family Colacanthide.

Genus UNDINA.

Well-preserved examples of a large Ccelacanth Ganoid
(Holophagus gulo) have already been described by Everton
and Huxley from the Lower Lias of Lyme Regis; but no
member of the same family has hitherto been detected in a
corresponding horizon elsewhere. The British Museum,
however, now furnishes evidence of a distinct species from
the Lower Lias of Barrow-on-Soar, Leicestershire; and,
although the specimen is not so satisfactorily preserved as
desirable, it exhibits several features specially worthy of note
in comparison with the Ccoelacanths both of earlier and later
date. The fossil occurs on counterpart slabs, and one is
shown, of the natural size, in Pl. XVI. fig. 5.

The head and the greater portion of the trunk are exhibited
from the lateral aspect, the anal and paired fins only being
entirely wanting. The head and opercular bones, so far as
preserved, do not exhibit any external ornamentation, though
some rounded pittings in an impression of the operculum
may possibly indicate the presence of a few large rounded
tubercles upon that bone. Above the orbit a series of small
quadrangular plates (w~) may be either parafrontals or scle-
rotics ; and one of the pterygo-quadrate elements (péq.) is
seen, with obscure traces of small conical teeth. ‘he im-
pression of the inner aspect of one of the jugular plates ( ju.)
is also distinct, proving that bone to have been narrow and
elongated, nearly four times as long as its maximum width.
The first dorsal fin (d') exhibits not less than seven very
long stout rays, articulated in the distal half, and the anterior
margin of the first ray is fringed by well-developed upwardly-
pointing denticles*. The second dorsal (d*), though much
broken, is evidently smaller than the first and consists of very
slender rays. The hinder half of the caudal region is dis-
placed, almost severed from the rest cf the fish, and partly
destroyed. Sixteen rays can be distinctly counted in the

* These denticles are scarcely seen on the slab figured, but are distinct
on the counterpart.
one

436 On some Ganoid Fishes from the English Lower Lias.

upper half of the principal caudal fin (c), these rays being
articulated, though not expanded, distally; and there are
remains of a well-developed supplementary caudal fin (se).
The squamation is only preserved in the anterior half of the
abdominal region and at the base of the supplementary caudal
fin, each scale being ornamented with four to six large elon-
gated tubercles, irregularly arranged in an antero-posterior
direction, and sometimes subdivided transversely (tig. 5 a).

Determination.—The fish thus described is closely similar
in proportions and in the character of its fin-rays to the
typical Celacanthus ; but it is generically distinguished by
the presence of denticles upon the first dorsal fin and by the
scale-ornament. With the Jurassic genus Undina*, how-
ever, it agrees in every essential particular except the non-
expansion and comparatively sparse articulation of the distal
half of the fin-rays; and as these characters are of doubtful
value, it seems advisable, at least provisionally, to place the
Barrow species in the well-known genus just mentioned. 'T’o
the present writer it appears that no sufficient generic differ-
ence has yet been pointed out between the so-called olo-
phagus and Undina; but the new fossil now described is
distinguished both from the Lyme Regis fish and the typical
species of the Bavarian Lithographic Stone by the characters
of the fin-rays and scales and by the comparative fewness of
the caudal fin-rays. The specimen may thus be regarded as
indicating a hitherto unknown species, for which the name of
Undina barroviensis will be appropriate.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI.
Fg. 1. Centrolepis asper, Egerton. Scales: of flank, twice nat. size.
Lower Lias, Lyme Regis. [B. M., no. P. 5594.
Fig. 2. Coccolepis hassicus, sp.noy. Lateral aspect of fish. bid. [B. M.,
no. P. 887. |

Fig. 3. Ditto. Head, lateral aspect, twice nat. size. Jbid. [B.M., no.
P. 6153.|] br., branchiostegal rays; md., mandible; ~- mz.,
maxilla ; 07b., orbit; op., operculum ; pet., pectoral fin.

Fig. 4. Ditto. Caudal region, lateral aspect. did. [B. M., no, 39865. |

ig. 4a. Seale of ditto, three times nat. size.

dig. 5, Undina barroviensis, sp. nov. Lateral aspect of fish. Lower
Lias, Barrow-on-Soar. [B. M., nos. 21585, P. 3343.) c, prin-
cipal caudal fin; d', d’, first and second dorsal fins; 7w., jugular
plate ; plg., pterygo-quadrate bone; sc, supplementary caudal
fin; v, parafrontal (? or sclerotic) plates.

Fig. 5a. Scales of ditto, three times nat. size.

[B. M.=British Museum, Unless otherwise stated the figures are of the
natural size. |

* G. von Miinster, Neues Jahrb. 1834, p. 539, and Beitr. Petrefakt.
pt. v. (1842), p. 57.

On a new Genus and Species of Mantodea. 437

LIII.—Deseription of anew Genus and Species (Parymenopus
Davisoni) of Mantodea from the Oriental Region. By J.
Woop-Mason, Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and
Professor of Comparative Anatomy in the Medical College
of Bengal, Calcutta,

[Plate XVII. A.]

A UNIQUE specimen of the interesting Orthopterous insect
described below is contained in a small collection of Man-
todea which has recently been sent to me for determination
by Mr. William Davison, Curator of the Raffles Museum,
Singapore, after whom I have much pleasure in naming the
species.

PARYMENOPUS®*, gen. nov.
78

?. Allied to Hymenopus, Serville. Eyes less produced
and devoid of non-faceted corneal spines, of which not a
vestige remains.

Median lobe of vertex not produced into a horn, its ante-
rior end terminating in a slightly excavated isosceles-trian-
gular vertical area, which answers to the fluted front face of
the frontal horn in the allied genus.

Pronotum oval, narrower, granulated on the disk, distinetly
toothed at the sides, with a moderate constriction near the
hinder end.

Organs of flight shorter. 'Tegmina with the first branch of
the anterior ulnar vein only 2-branched, the v. plicata 4-
branched. Wings with the outer half of the anterior margin
and of the veins of the anterior area distinctly arched.

Legs all identically the same in general form and struc-
ture; the fore legs exactly the same; the tour posterior legs
with the inferior foliaceous crests of the femora moderate, at
their widest part hardly exceeding the greatest width of the
joint, and with all the other crests simple and unexpanded.

Distribution. The Malayan subregion of the Oriental
Region.

“Lhe absence of a frontal horn and of non-faceted corneal
spines readily distinguishes the new genus from the old.

Parymenopus Davisont, sp. 0.
9. Head Indian-yellow, unmarked. Pronotum distinctly

* From mapa and Hymenopus, generic name=rapvpervorovs = Pary-
menopus.

438 Prof. J. Wood-Mason on a new

though rather sparsely granulated on the disk, not very
coarsely denticulated on the sides, the denticles increasing in
size and becoming truncated towards the constriction, where
they cease ; Indian-yellow, with the hinder border and a fine
line therefrom forwards to asemicircvlar blotch in the middle
of the hinder lobe, the bottom of the supra-coxal groove in
the middle, and a V-shaped mark on the anterior lobe con-
nected therewith, all dark brown; prosternum paler, with a
regular crescent-shaped black-brown mark, the concavity of
which is directed forwards, situated about midway between
the insertion of the fore legs and the hinder margin, and
extending right across the part so as to embrace the lower
edges of the pronotum.

Abdomen pale testaceous, concolorous with the ventral
surface of the thorax and the leg-bases, with a pair of fuscous
spots near the posterior angles of terga 2-6 inclusive, and on
sternum 7.

The organs of flight when closed extend by about one sixth
of their length beyond the extremity of the abdomen.

Tegmina three times as long as broad, rather acutely
pointed, oval ; the marginal field coriaceous, opaque, cinnabar-
red, the rest (except the membranous anal gusset, which is
yellowish milky) semiopaque, yellow, with three opaque
ereen radial spots, one small and roundish midway between
the base and the stigma, and two about thrice as large and
transversely elongated situated one at each end of the stigma ;
the stigma long, linear, concolorous with the wing-membrane,
and placed upon the posterior radial vein at a distance from
the base equal to twice its own length, apparently diffused
over the veinlets of the cell immediately behind it; both v.
dividens and 4-branched v. plicata anastomosed with the
posterior ulnar vein, as in L/ymenopus bicornis.

Wings somewhat more pointed even than the tegmina,
semiopaque, greenish cream-coloured, with the outer half of
the anterior margin and the apex semiopaque, reddish yellow,
and with the outer margin of the anal area narrowly and
decreasingly to the anal angle subhyaline, faintly tinged with
fuscous of a vinous tint; the anterior ulnar vein emits only
two branches, and its extremity is in correspondence with the
extremities of the veins in front of it and with the anterior
margin, distinctly arched.

Legs Indian-yellow, more or less flushed with red, but not
barred. ore tibiee armed on the outside with 23 and on the
inside with 17 teeth. Foliaceous lobes of the four posterior
femora moderate, not more than 1°5 millim. wide in their
widest part.

Genus and Species of Mantodea. 439

Total length 38 millim.; length of pronotum 8, breadth at
dilatation 4°75; length of abdomen without seg. med. 17,
breadth 8; length of tegmina 39, breadth 10:5, of marginal
field 3; length of fore coxa 95, femur 11:3, of intermediate
femur 7, tibia 5, of posterior femur 8, tibia 7.

&. Unknown.

Hab. Singapore.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII. A.

Parymenopus Davisoni. a, headand pronotum fromabove; b, head from
in front ; ¢, intermediate leg of the left side from above; all
x 5. Camera lucida reductions of drawings made under a
Ross’s 4-inch by the aid of a camera lucida.

LIV.—Description of 'Trienocorypha Dohertii, the type of a
new Genus and Species of Mantodea. By J. Woop-Mason,
Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of
Comparative Anatomy in the Medical College of Bengal,

Calcutta.
[Plate XVIL B.]

TRLENOCORYPHA, gen. nov.

Head armed with three slender conical horns, two paired,
arising posteriorly from the submedian lobes, and one unpaired,
anteriorly from the middle of the anterior end of the median
lobe of the vertex ; facial shield transverse. Pronotum armed
on each of its two lobes with a pair of spines similar to, but
taller than, those which form the cephalic horns; its supra-
coxal dilatation prominently triangular. — Postero-lateral
angles and sides of the seven basal abdominal terga produced
downwards and backwards into long, externally concave, and
slightly curved spines, the longest of which is about two
thirds, and the shortest about one third, as long as the fore
femur. Fore femora lamellar, oval, about twice as long as
broad, armed below on the outer edge with 4 spines, on the
inner with 5, exclusive in each case of the spine of the apical
lobe, and on the disk with 2 only, the first of which,
answering to the basal one of the series in Oxypilus and its
allies, is the larger, and the second, answering to the apical
one of the series in the same genus, is much the smaller, the
intermediate spines being absent; tibiee armed below on the
inner edge with 6 spines, and on the outer with 1 only—that

440 Miss EK. M. Sharpe on new

immediately opposite to the insertion of the tarsus —the
remainder of the series being represented by a just perceptible
undulation of the edge; posterior femora furnished with a
narrow, foliaccous, inferior carina; tibie broadly and shal-
lowly constricted near the apex ; first joint of the tarsi longer
than all the rest taken together.

Founded on a very young larva.

Allied to Oxypilus, Ceratomantis, Pachymantis, and
flestias.

Distribution. Mealayan subregion of the Oriental Region.

Tricnocorypha Dohertit, sp. n.

Young larva. Dark sepia-brown, with a greyish-white
stripe along the concave outer face of the 7+7 abdominal
spines ; two pairs of delicate filaments of uncertain nature at
the extremity of the abdomen whity brown; the fore legs
uniform pale clear vandyke-brown, and the posterior legs
greyish white, marbled with dark sepia-brown.

Total length about 5:25 millim.

Hab, Perak, Malay Peninsula.

Captured by Mr. William Doherty, of Cincinnati, U.S.A.,
who has already furnished me with much valuable material
for my ‘ Catalogue of the Mantodea,’ and after whom I have
hence much pleasure in naming this remarkable addition to
the fauna of the Oriental Region.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVIL.B.

a, head from in front; 4, pronotum from the left side; c¢, left fore leg
from the outside; d, abdomen from the left side: all x 18.

LV.— Further Descriptions of Butterflies and Moths collected
by Mr. . J. Jackson in Eastern Africa. By Emity Mary
SHARPE. |

I HAVE now finished the arrangement of Mr. Jackson’s first
collection, and add descriptions of some new species. Until
his return it will be impossible for me to give the exact
localities where the species were collected; but it is certain
that they were obtained en route from Mombasa to the Ulu
Mountains, the bulk being probably from the last-named
locality. I have again to acknowledge the kind assistance of
Mr. Butler in determining this collection,

East-African Butterflies and Moths. 441

Fam. Pieridae.
Teracolus eliza, sp. n.

Similar to 7. regina, Trimen, but differs in having a black
line commeneing from the first median nervule, which con-
tinues to spread up to the costal nervure, this black line en-
closing a large prismatic purple patch on the fore wing; the
nervules on the hind wing terminate in rather large black
spots on the hind margin; the black veins in 7’. eliza are
strongly indicated ; at the base of the wings there is a slight
dusting of grey. Diam. 65 millim.

The female of 7. e/’za is somewhat like that of 7. regina
figured in Mr. 'Trimen’s book (pl. xi. fig. 3), but differs in
having a very broad black scalloped border on the hind mar-
gin of the hind wing. 7’. eliza has one black spot at the end
of the discoidal cell; there is also another spot between the
median and submedian nervules.

The underside of the female is pale yellow, with a stronger
streak of dark yellow along the submedian nervure. There
is also a row of black spots between each nervure. ‘The basal

half of costa is deep orange. Diam. 63 millim.

Teracolus laura, sp. n.

Similar to 7. subvenosus, Butler, but differing in having a
black line commencing from the submedian nervure and pro-
ceeding up to the costa, enclosing a patch of fiery orange-red at
the apex of the fore wing. The black margin of the hind wing
is broad and inclined to spread a little way up the nervules.
T. laura has a black spot at the end of the discoidal cell on
the fore wing, and there is also a faint spot on the hind wing
at the end of the cell. ‘The bases of the wings are thickly
dusted with grey.

The nervules on the underside of 7. laura are strongly
marked with black, and there is also a faint border of a
yellowish-green colour along the hind margin of the hind
wing.

The female of 7. laura differs from that of 7. subveno-
sus in having no black spot at the end of the cell and also in
having the outer edge of the dark basal area of the fore wing
regularly angulated, like a flight of three steps. Diam. 47
millim.

442 Miss E. M. Sharpe on new

Fam. Acreide.
Telchinia alicia, sp. n.

Similar to 7. bonasta, Fabricius, of which Mr. Butler
considers 7. serena to be only the female. Both sexes are
represented in Mr. Jackson’s collection, and the male differs
in the black marking on the hinder margin of the fore wing,
which is continued from the basal area to nearly the middle
of the inner margin. In 7. bonasta the black basal area of
the hind wing joins the black basal area of the fore wing, as
in T. alicia, but it is continued upwards towards the disk of
the latter, so that the orange of the fore wing is much nar-
rowed towards the base of the wing.

The black border of the hind wing is much narrower in
T. alicia than it is in 7’, bonasia, and the hind wing is also
parti-coloured, the inner portion of the wing being ochreous
as far as the third median nervule, the rest of the hind wing
being deep orange, like the fore wing. The female differs in
the greater width of the yellow areas on both sides. Diam. 38
millim.

Alena johanna, sp. n.

Nearest to A. ¢nterposita, Butler. The wings above are
of a smoky blackish-grey colour, with a line of white in the
discoidal cell. ‘There is a half-circle of white spots on the fore
wing, placed between the subcostal nervules, commencing from
the costal margin, and leaving a very broad band of smoky
black along the hind margin, widening towards the apex;
there is also a white patch below each median nervure, these
white patches forming a continuous band with the subcostal
spots before mentioned. ‘The hind wing has a band of white
from the inner margin extending to the first subcostal nervure,
but narrowing somewhat as it approaches the latter. Fringe
white, but black at the end of each nervule. Diam. 26 millim.

LEPIDOPTERA HETEROCERA.

Fam. Anaphide.

HETERANAPHE, gen. nov.

Similar to Anaphe, but distinguished by its huge and
coarsely pectinated antenne and by the neuration of the hind
wing, the subcostal branches arising from the end of the
cell instead of from a foot-stalk.

East-African Butterflies and Moths. 443

ITeteranaphe Jacksont, sp. n.

General colour yellowish white, with a blackish-brown
border along the whole of the fore wing, this forming a broad
band along the hind margin and
widening towards the apex ; a second
band traverses the fore wing from
the inner margin up to the costa. At
a little distance from the marginal
band and between the two broad
bands of darkish brown is enclosed a
row of yellowish-white spots, sepa-
rated by the nervules, which are also
darkish brown. here is a narrow
bisinuated band across the basal third of the wing and a large
reniform spot at the end of the discoidal cell.

The coloration of the hind wing
is much more simple, being yel-
lowish white, with two brown bands
near the hind margin, one terminal
and the other subterminal, enclosing
a row of white spots forming a band,
which is rather broader than in the
fore wing.

Thorax black, with white hairs and a white patch on each
side of the collar. Body black, banded with white; base of
antenna, mouth, and centre of ventral surface of abdomen
tufted with orange; legs black; coxew varied with orange
hairs. Diam. 72 millim.

Fam. Liparide.

Leucoma macrocera, Sp. Nh.

Entirely white, with a pearly gloss. Allied to ZL. trans-
lucida, Oberthiir (Ann. Mus. Genov. vol. xv. p. 177, tav. 1.
fig. 6, 1880), but much larger, and distinguished by its large
antenne. Mr. Oberthiir, im his description, mentions that
his L. transluctda is absolutely without spots; but in the
figure there is a discoidal blackish spot. Diam. 44 millim.

444 On the Varieties of Chalcides ocellatus, Forsk.

LVI.—On the Varieties of Chalcides ocellatus, Yorsk.
By G. A. BOULENGER.

MateriAL recently added to the Collection of the Natural-
History Museum enables me to extend my remarks on the
forms of Chalcédes ocellatus. In this widely distributed
Scink the number of rows of scales varies from 24 to 40, an
amount of variation which is to be found in no other lizard.
Although a splitting up into several species appears to me
unwarranted, I think it, however, necessary to recognize the
several forms under special varietal names.

The following are the forms with which I am at present
acquainted :—

A. Var. Ragazztt.

24 scales round the body. Greyish above, with an indis-
tinct paler dorso-lateral band, but without spots except on the
sacral region, hind limbs, and tail, which are ocellated as in
the typical form ; confluent black spots form a lateral band
extending from the nostril to above the axilla, passing through
the eye and above the ear-opening. From snout to vent 83
millim.

The only specimen examined was obtained at Assab by
Dr. Ragazzi, and submitted to me for examination by the

Marquis G. Doria.

B. Forma typica.

28-30 scales round the body. Olive or brown above,
ocellated with black spots, sometimes confluent into irregular
transverse bands, bearing central white dots or longitudinal
shafts. Measures up to 140 millim. from snout to vent.

Ranges from the Algerian Sahara to Egypt, Syria, Cyprus,
Arabia, Persia, and, according to J. A. Murray, to Sind.

C. Var. tiligugu, Gmel.
98-34 scales round the body (usually 30-32). Above

olive or brown, with black and white ocelli, and a more or less
distinct lighter lateral band, sometimes edged with black
inferiorly. Stouter and larger than the preceding, reaching a
length of 170 millim. from snout to vent.

Inhabits Sardinia, Sicily, and South Italy *, Algeria and

* Dr. F. S. Monticelli informs me that it occurs at Portici, near
Naples.

Sa.

Dr. EK. A. Andrews on a new Species of Phoronis. 445

Tunis, north of the Sahara, and the intermediate islands; also
Tripoli, Egypt, North- west Arabia, and Abyssinia.

D. Var. vittatus.
30-34 scales round the body (usually 32). Bronzy brown

above, without ocelli; a light upper and a black lower lateral
band. Fromésnout to vent 115 millim,
Only known from Tangiers, where no other form occurs.

E. Var. polylepis.
34-40 scales round the body (usually 36-38). Dark brown

above, usually with a small round yellowish spot on each
scale ; sides of neck with vertical black and white bars, which
disappear in the adult. From snout to vert 150 millim.

Morocco. First noticed by Beettger from Casablanca,
Mogador, and the city of Morocco. Nine specimens from the
city of Morocco and four from Casablanca are now in the
Natural-History Museum.

LVIIl.—Ona new American Species of the remarkable animal
Piioroniss By E. A. ANDREws, Ph.D., Johns Hopkins
University, Baltimore, U.S. A.

Phoronis architecta, sp. 1.

The following manifestly imperfect notice of an American
form of the interesting genus Phoronis is published with the
desire of calling the attention of embryologists to its existence
in the hope that it may thus be the sooner known and perhaps
included in a needed monograph of the group rather than
from any desire of adding a new species to the present list of
five or six, some of which are also insufficiently described.

The animal was found at Beaufort, N.C., in June 1885,
inhabiting slender tubes standing upright in rather 1 impure
or muddy sand, both immediately in front of the building
then occupied by the Chesapeake Laboratory and also upon
Shark Shoal.”

The tubes are isolated and separate, each a clear, firm,
chitin-like membrane passing down many inches into the
sand and slightly projecting above its surface in regions laid
bare at low water. ‘’he upper part of this tube is covered
with a layer of sand, which seems as if selected, being com-
posed of rounded grains of clear silex with a few of milky
quartz, and no dark grains at all.

446 Dr. E. A. Andrews on a new Species of Phoronis.

The animal fits tightly in the tube and cannot be easily
removed ; its length (in imperfect specimens) is about 50

Fig. 1.—View of tube and branchial end of animal, The sand is removed
from part of the tube, from which the animal projects. The
branchiz are artificially separated, to show the two large spoon-
shaped organs and the papilla bearing the anal and nephridial
openings. Camera drawing, Zeiss 4a. The branchie should be
much shorter on the abanal or oral aspect !

millim. and greatest diameter about 1 millim., while the
branchizw have a length of perhaps 14 millim.
The tentacles are about sixty and arranged in a simple

Dr. E. A. Andrews on a new Species of Phoronis. 447

crescent, as in P. Kowalevskii, Cald., with which this species
has close affinities, rather than with P. australis, Hasw., or

P. Buskit, M‘Int.

v Ay \ ay <f o
YN Shs
RV BNN BA ea
aNAG PES AN SS

SS SS

Fig. 2.—Transverse section of anterior region ; the body-wall composed
of a thick epidermis, a supporting layer, longitudinal muscles
in definite pinnate ridges. In it is the left nerve-rod, N. R=
rectum or intestine ; Oe=cesophagus with special ridge next the
blood-vessel (Bl) in the posterior cavity (P); R.A. and L. A.
=right and left chambers of the body-cavity. Camera, Zeiss
5A.

The marked peculiarity of the lophophore is the presence,

y "Np. ee G:

Fig. 8.—Diagram of section of base of lophophore on to which are pro-
jected sections of the carpel-like organ (C), the sense-lobe (S),
and the anal and nephridial openings (A and Np). The mouth
(M) is provided with a transverse epistomial membrane. The
nerve-ring is indicated by a circumoral dotted line.

448 Dr. EK. A. Andrews on a new Species of Phoronis.

at each end of the crescentic base, of a large carpel-like or
spoon-shaped organ, opening by a wide longitudinal slit into
the extra-branchial or anal space, but facing towards the
mouth (from which these organs are separated by the row of
branchie between mouth and anus). The cavities of these
organs are ciliated and lined by a peculiar glandular epithe-
lium. At the base of each is situated a spherical “ sense-
lobe,” apparently corresponding to the “ glandular pit” of
P. Kowalevskit as described by Benham, and having its
ciliated cavity opening in common with the basal part of the
slit in the above carpel organ. The function of this large
carpel-shaped organ is unknown, but may be supposed to
have some connexion with the tube- building habit, possibly
as an organ for collecting or fixing sand-grains to the
secreted chitin-like tube.

The body-wall presents in close contact with the inner
aspect of its well-developed ‘ supporting-tissue”’ layer trans-
verse fibres (apparently muscular), internal to which is a very
well-marked system of longitudinal muscles. Anteriorly
these muscles form conspicuous ridges, a section of one of
which shows the fibres to be arranged in a markedly pinnate
group (each fibre is cylindrical, with abruptly pointed ends).

The branchiee are ciliated on the lateral sides as well as on
the oral side, and in the latter aspect have numerous uni-
cellular glands, which continue down in the walls of what
may be distinguished as the pharyngeal part of the digestive
tube. The cesophagus and first stomach are characterized by
the possession of a definite longitudinal ridge of ciliated
gland-cells, which in the stomach forms a groove similar to,
if not homologous with, the ciliated groove in the sipunculus.
The position of this ridge i is such as to lie close to the large
blood-vessel (afferent vessel of Caldwell) and facing the pos-
terior division of the body-cavity.

In the first stomach a peculiar process of intracellular
digestion takes place, irregular ridges of epithelium rising
up ) around one or more large diatoms, and enclosing them in
vacuoles within a syncytium-like multinucleated protoplasmic
mass.

The epithelium of the second stomach is histologically
different from that of the first. The intestine contains balls
or cylinders of broken diatom-shells.

In one apparently perfect specimen sections show only
spermatozoa in various stages of formation, while fragments
of other individuals contain’ ege’s in process of formation. As
far as can be told from the imperfect material at hand this
species of Phoronis is not hermaphrodite, or at least the two

Col. C. Swinhoe on new Species of Lycunide. 44

sexual products may not develop simultaneously in one indi-
vidual.

There is a very large “ nerve-rod ” on the left side, which
is a clear solid structure surrounded by the epidermal cells
and having a finely fibrillated or perhaps only coagulated
structure. ‘This rod extends through a considerable part of
the length of the animal and ends in the peculiar ring of
epidermal nerve-substance surrounding the mouth and espe-
cially well developed near the anus. At this point there are
two symmetrically placed and closely approximated nerve-
rods, of which, however, only the left one could be traced.
The right rod appears not to extend far and to be atrophied
as compared with the condition in P. australis.

Blood-vessels, septa, supporting framework, and nephridia
seem essentially like those of P. australis as far as was deter-
mined.

In live specimens the flow of blood in the branchix, the
contraction of the vessels and the cilia in the anterior region
of the trunk were observed.

The Actinotrocha taken at Beaufort resemble the “ species
B” described by Wilson from the Chesapeake Bay.

The distinctive characters of P. architecta are thus :—The
formation of isolated tubes covered by definite collections of
sand-grains ; the presence of special prostomial organs, possibly
of use in formation of these tubes; the great development of
the longitudinal muscles ; the presence of a ciliated groove in
the digestive tract ; the apparent separation of the sexes.

As far as observed the characters of this species favour a
nearer approach to the Sipunculid, and thence to the Annelid
type, rather than to the Polyzoa on the other hand.

Baltimore,
April 19, 1890.

LVIII.—Descriptions of three new Species of Lycenide.
By Colonel C. Swinuos, F.L.S., F.Z.5., &e.

Lycenide.

1. Arhopala viridissima, n. sp.

&. Upperside: fore wing glistening metallic green, veins,
costal line, and outer marginal band black, the latter com-
mencing very finely at the apex and gradually broadening on

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 32

450 Col. C. Swinhoe on new Species of Lycenide.

to the hinder margin ; hind wing also metallic green, with a
very broad black band, which occupies the greater portion of
the wing, including broadly the costal, marginal, and abdo-
minal portions; in reality the whole wing is black, with the
exception of the cell and small portions of the interspaces
around it, as in A. ewmolphus, Cram., but the green runs into
the black in sharper angles.

Underside paler than A. ewmolphus, the bands coarser and
composed of much larger and redder spots, but disposed
much in the same pattern; a patch of blue-green irrorations
at the anal angle of hind wings.

Expanse of wings 27’ inches.

Mandalay, Upper Burmah, 1889. Six examples.

Allied to A. ewmolphus, Cram. ; is of a bluer green colour,
and the difference in the size and shape of the marginal black
band on fore wings at once distinguishes it.

2. Rapala damona, n. sp.

g. Upperside dark coppery red, very similar in tint to the
colour of Deudorix epijarbas, Boisd. g. Fore wing with a
very broad blackish-brown marginal band, filling up the
whole costal space down to the median vein, by which it is
sharply defined, very broad at the apex, filling up very nearly
the whole of the first median interspace, nearly as broad on
the outer margin as on the costa, slightly curved in its centre,
and expanding on to the hinder margin, up which it runs,
narrowing towards the base in a diffused form; the base of
the wing is also suffused darkly with brown, the wing being
in point of fact black, with a red centre. Hind wing with
the abdominal area brown, the entire cell being filled, and
the first median branch limiting and sharply defining its lower
area; anal lobe brown, marked with red and white; tail
brown, with a white tip; veins on both wings brown, pro-
minent; cilia brown, interlined with white round the lobe
and up to the second median branch, and pure white on the
abdominal border of hind wing.

Underside ochreous fawn-colour ; a pale line across the end
of each cell; a transverse, discal, slightly sinuous, pale line
across both wings, inwardly lined with brownish, curved and
bent towards the anal angle of the hind wing (as is usual in
this genus), where it is pure white, with a fine black line
between the white and the brown; anal lobe black, with a
white spot above it; a black spot of the size of the lobe on
the margin in the first median interspace, with a small reddish
space above it, the space from the margin between the spots

Col. C. Swinhoe on new Species of Lycenide. 451

and the discal bent line brown, with bluish-grey speckles ;
cilia of both wings yellowish brown, cilia at the anal angle of
hind wing white, interlined with deep black, the inner white
line running in the cilia halfway up the wing.

Expanse of wings 1;°; inch.

South Andamans. ‘Two examples.

Allied to R. dieneces, Hewitson, which it much resembles,
but can easily be distinguished by the entire absence of the
broad costal band of the hind wing above.

3. Curetis nicobarica, n. sp.

&. Upperside bright dark coppery red, thickly suffused
with blackish brown at the base. Fore wing with a blackish-
brown marginal border, even on the costa to the end of the
cell, filling the costal space, spreading slightly over the sub-
costal vein, broad at the apex, its inner margin running
irregularly across from the top end of the cell towards the
margin on the third median branch a little beyond its middle,
from which the band runs down on to the hinder margin as
broadly as on the costa, slightly curved in its centre. Hind
wing with a broad costal and a narrower marginal uniform
brown border, the latter about half as broad as the marginal
border of the fore wing, its inner margin irregular.

Underside dull pure white, markings almost obsolete; costa
of hind wing pale flesh-colour.

@. Dark reddish brown. Upperside: fore wing with a
slight suffusion of pinkish colour in its centre; hind wing with
a curved, subapical, large whitish patch.

Underside dull pure white, markings nearly obsolete.

Expanse of wings, ¢ 1,5, 9 175 to 1,4 inch.

Nicobar Islands. Several pairs.

Allied to C. thetys, Drury, and to C. arcuata, Moore, but
differs from both in its broader and differently shaped blackish-
brown border in the male, and differs altogether in the colora-
tion and appearance in the female, being brown instead of
white.

Note-—The manuscript descriptions of these new species
have been ready for publication for some time, but were kept
back awaiting the publication of Mr. de Nicéville’s third
volume of the ‘ Butterflies of India ;’ but I find that none of
them are included in that excellent work.

32*

452 Rev. Canon Norman’s Pevision

LIX.—Revision of British Mollusca. By the Rev. Canon
A. M. Norman, M.A., D.C.L., F.L.S., &e.

More than twenty years have passed since my old friend
Dr. Gwyn Jeffreys’s work—‘ British Conchology ’—was
completed. In the decade which preceded that time we had
in company dredged extensively round the British Islands,
and especially in the sea east, west, and north of Shetland,
down to 170 fathoms, which was the greatest depth at which,
up to that time, the sea on our coast had been explored. The
new species discovered in these expeditions mainly constituted
the additions to our fauna for the first time to be found in the
work referred to.

In 1868 private dredgings began to be greatly surpassed
in importance by expeditions undertaken at the expense of
our government. The President and Council of the Royal
Society were successful in a request made to the Lords
of the Admiralty. A scheme for deep-sea dredging was
sanctioned, and the surveying-ship ‘ Lightning’ commis-
sioned for the work. In this steamer Drs. Carpenter and
Wyville-Thomson explored the sea between Scotland and the
Faroe Islands in depths down to 650 fathoms.

The results were most encouraging, and in the following
year (1869) the ‘ Porcupine’ was despatched for more extended
operations to the south and west of Ireland and north of Scot-
land. The work of this year was a complete success, and
discoveries were made, both physical and biological, of the
highest value. Dredgings were carried down to 2435 fathoms.
Drs. Carpenter, Jeffreys, and Wyville-Thomson were the
scientific men in charge during these cruises.

The next important work which threw light upon the
British marine fauna was that done by H.M.’s hired ship
‘ Knight Errant,’ under the direction of Dr. John Murray, in
the neighbourhood of the ‘ Wyville-Thomson Ridge” in
1880.

In 1882 the government ordered the ‘ Triton,’ a composite
steamship of 410 tons, to resurvey and more thoroughly
explore the remarkable geographical features connected with
the sea-bottom on either side of the ‘* Wyville-'Thomson
Ridge.” Dr. John Murray had again the scientific direction
in this expedition.

Last year (1889) a short dredging trip in deep water off
the south of Ireland by H.M.S. ‘ Research’ was superintended
by Mr. G. C. Bourne, the Director of the Marine Biological

of British Mollusca. 453

Association of the United Kingdom ; and there was also some
good trawling off the south-west of Ireland, conducted during
a week’s cruise in a hired steamer, the ‘F lying Fox,’ by the
Rev. W. Spotswood Green, the deepest trawl bet eing in 1000
fathoms,

In all these expeditions Mollusca have been found either
hitherto undeseribed or not before known to exist in the sea
around the British Islands.

Dr. Gwyn Jeffreys was at the time of his death engaged in
publishing a series of papers in the ‘ Proceedings of the
Zoological Society’ on the Mollusca obtained in “the more
important of these expeditions. He died before these papers
were finished, and we therefore still remain in ignorance of
what was found among many families of the Gastropoda. It
is to be hoped, however, that Mr. EK. A. Smith will before
long complete the work with the help of MS. left by Jeffreys
and such specimens as are in the British Museum.

ee ence is, however, made in various papers publishel by

r. Jeffreys to species of those families which were procured
in coe ‘Porcupine’ expedition. My friend, had his life been
prolonged, would have drawn up a fresh list of the Mollusca
which inhabit the British area. In attempting to do this now
I shall have to mainly rely in the earlier part of this revision
upon notes scattered through Dr. Jeffreys’s various papers,
while for the rest his account of “The Mollusca procured
during the ‘ Lightning’ and ea Kixpeditions ” will
supply the chief material as regards the deep-sea fauna.

It may be stated with respect to my purpose and revision
generally —

1. That there were many cases of nomenclature adopted in
‘ British Conchology ’ with which I felt unable to agree at the
time of its publication and am equally unable to acquiesce in
now.

2. Many works have since been published, and the light
which has been thrown from many sides on groups of Mol-
lusca necessitates numerous alterations in nomenclature and
arrangement.

3. Many recent malacological investigators of the Ptero-
poda (Boas, Pelseneer, Grobben, &c.) are agreed that these
Mollusca should not be maintained as a distinct Class, but
rather as an order or as families of the Gastropoda. ‘That
view is here followed.

4. Jeffreys not having studied the Nudibranchiate Mol-
lusca requested Mr. Alder to draw up the account of that
order, As Mr. Alder did not give the geographical distribu-

5
tion of the species, I have supplied this as tar as I am able.

454 Rev. Canon Norman’s Revision

5. The distribution of the testaceous species has been very
fully worked out by Jeffreys in ‘ British Conchology’ and
his subsequent papers. Distribution is for the most part only
given here for the additions to the British list; nor have I
thought it necessary to add further localities for well-known
British species, except in the case of those which are most
rare.

6. While the general arrangement of Fischer’s ‘ Manuel de
Conchyliologie ’ has in the main been adopted, it has in many
points been departed from. Perhaps the chief of these is that
Fischer has not been followed in dividing the Pelecypoda
into the orders Tetrabranchiata and Dibranchiata, since such
an arrangement in many cases widely divorces genera which
seem in most points to be nearly related. Ihave here adopted
the more recently expressed views of Dr. Dall.

7. Certain groups, such as the Pleurotomide, the Rissoide,
and the Gymnoglossa, present unusual difficulties in arrange-
ment by their shells, difficulties which can only be removed
when we have become much more fully acquainted with the
animals which form them. I have done the best I can with
these groups, but am far from satisfied with the results. My
endeavour has been to steer a middle course between those
conchologists who excessively multiply genera and the
arrangement of Jeffreys, who, in my opinion, made his genera
too large—a course which he, subsequently to the publication
of ‘ British Conchology,’ most markedly departed from.

The British Area.

The area regarded as Pritish is that which I have indicated
in a paper on the subject printed in last month’s number of
this Journal (‘ Annals,’ May 1890), where it is thus defined :—

South.—By lat. 49° 30’ N., which parallel passing east-
wards terminates at long. 5° 0’ W., or midway between the
Land’s lind and Brest. Thence mid-Channel is followed
until lat. 51° 50! N. is reached off the east coast.

East.—From lat. 51° 50’ N., long. 2° 30’ E. is taken as
the eastern boundary northwards.

North.—Lat. 60° 0' N., coming from the west as far as
long. 5° 0’ W., thence due north-east to long. 1° 0’ W.
thence due east to meet the eastern boundary at 2° 30/ E.

West.—Down to the base of the continent at 1500 fathoms.

of British Mollusca. 455

ASN} :
FAP OG */SLES

WARM AREA

Cape

wh?

& kerlentig
a2 CORK

The British Marine Area, showing its Southern, Eastern, and Northern Limits.

[The finely dotted line to the north indicates the boundaries of the
“cold area”’ or “ Faroe Channel.” |

456 Rev. Canon Norman’s Revision

The following dredgings of the British Government expe-
ditions were beyond the British area :—

1. ‘Lightning,’ 1868.—Stats. 2 to 11, 15, 16, which were
all too far north. ‘he only stations therefore of this expe-
dition which were within our area were 1, 12, 13, 14, 17.

2. ‘Porcupine,’ 1869.—St. 11, in too deep water, 1630
fathoms; Stats. 33 to 42 too far south ; Stats. 51, 52, 53, 54 to
64, 76, 77, 83, too far north. ‘Three other dredgings should
in my opinion, and in accordance with the views expressed in
last month’s ‘ Annals,’ be excluded. Stat. 54, lat. 59° 46’
N., long. 6° 27’ W., 490 fath., temp. 81°°4 Fahr., and Stat.
86, lat. 59° 48’ N., long. 6° 31’ W., 445 fath., temp. 307-1
Fahr., are slightly to the south of the northern boundary,
but at that particular spot the Faroe Deep crosses lat. 60°,
and the Faroe Ridge is to the south of it; consequently it is
thus part of the “ cold area” with the water below freezing-
point *, and this little southern projection of the cold area
should be rejected. Again, Stat. 65, lat. 61° 10’ N., long. 2°
21' W., 345 fath., temp. 30° Fahr., is exactly on the boundary
line which runs north-east, and the temperature being below
freezing-point, this dredging I also exclude.

‘Porcupine,’ 1870.—No dredgings of this year were within
our area.

3. ‘Knight Errant,’ 1880.—Stats. 1, 2, 8 were too far
north.

A, ‘Triton,’ 1882.—Stats. 3 to 9 and 12 were too far north.
The only dredgings in this expedition south of lat. 60° N.
were), 2, 10) di wand is:

Great caution must be used in reading Jeffreys’s notes of
species in his scattered records. He often uses such loose
expressions as “ north of the Butt of Lewis” or ‘ to the north
of Scotland,” when the shell was really found north of lat.
60° N. and in the “cold area” of the Faroe Channel.

The following is a list of papers by Dr. Jeffreys in which
allusion is more or less made to Mollusca procured in the
‘Porcupine’ and other expeditions :—

1870, Carpenter, Jirrreys, and WyvittE-Tmomson. “ Preliminary
Report of the Scientific Exploration of the Deep Sea in
H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine.’” Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. xviii. p. 397.

1870. Carpenter and Jrerrreys. ‘ Report Deep-Sea Researches,
July—Sept. 1870, by H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine.’” Proc. Roy.
Soc. 1870, vol. xix. p. 146.

* See my paper on “The British Marine Area” in ‘Annals’ for May
13890.

of British Mollusca. 457

1870. Jerrreys. ‘“ Norwegian Mollusca.” Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist. ser. 4, vol. v. p. 488.

1870. ——. “Mediterranean Mollusca.” Jbid. vol. vi. pp. 65, 457.
13872. * Mollusca of Europe compared with those of

Eastern North America,” Ibid. vol. x. p. 237.
1873. ——. Mollusca in Wyville-Thomson’s ‘ Depths of the Sea.’

1874. “Some Remarks on the Mollusca of the Mediter-
ranean.” Report Brit. Assoc. for 1873, p. 111.

1876. ——. “Preliminary Report Biological Results of Cruise of
H.M.S. ‘Valorous’ to Davis Strait.” Proc. Roy. Soc.
io a ella

1877. ** Post-Tertiary Fossils and some recent Mollusca of
Arctic Expedition.” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4,

vol. xx. p. 229.
1877.

Address Biological Seetion British Association. Re-
port Brit. Assoc. 1877.

Papers on the ‘ Mollusca of the ‘ Valorous ’
Expedition.” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vols. xviii.
and xix,

1876-77.

1878-85.

‘“‘ Mollusca procured during the ‘ Lightning’ and
‘ Porcupine’ Expeditions.” Proc. Zool. Soc. 1878-85.

1880. ——. ‘“ Deep-sea Mollusca of the Bay of Biscay.” Ann. &
Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol vi. (Two papers.)

1882. ** Mollusca of Italian Exploration of the Mediterra-
nean.” Ibid. vol. viii. p. 389.

1883. . Mediterranean Mollusca.” Jbd. vol. xi. p. 393.

1882 Mollusca in Murray’s (John) “ Exploration of Faroe
Channel, 1880, in ‘ Knight Errant.’” Proc. Roy. Soc.
Edinb. vol. xi.

1883 *¢ Mollusca procured during Cruise of H.M.S. ‘ Triton’
between the Hebrides and Faroes.” Proc. Zool. Soc. 1883,
p. 389.

1884. ——. ‘Concordance of Mollusca inhabiting both sides of

the Atlantic.” Report Brit. Assoc. 1884.

MOLLUSCA.
Class lI. CEPHALOPODA.

The Cephalopoda are divided into two orders, those which
have eight arms surrounding the mouth, and are therefore
termed Octopoda, and those which, in addition to these eight
arms, have two more of different structure, in which clubs

458 Rev. Canon Norman’s Revision

furnished with suckers surmount long stalks; these are the
Decapoda (or Decacera).

D’Orbigny arranged the Decapoda in two groups—

OIGOPSIDES, in which the eyes have the crystalline lens
unprotected by any special membrane, so that they are in
immediate contact with the water.

Myopstbes, in which the crystalline lens is protected from
immediate contact with the water, being covered by a trans-
parent membrane continuous with the orbital cartilages. An
eyelid below the eye.

Gray and Fisher arranged this order by means of the
differences of the shell—

Chondrophora.—Shell corneous, thin, gladius-shaped or
lanceolate, a ‘ pen.”

Sepiophora.—Shell calcareous, spongy, laminar, a ‘ cuttle-
bone.”

Phragmophora.—Shell calcareous, consisting of a number
of air-chambers connected by a siphonal tube.

D’Orbigny’s arrangement from the first was never received
with much favour. But when, in the early investigations on
hectocotylization, or the sexual modification of one of the arms
in the male Cephalopod, this hectocotylization had been
observed by Steenstrup in the various families of Myopsides,
but not at all in the Oigopsides, he was led in his admirable
paper on the subject * to regard that absence as proof of the
wisdom of d’Orbigny’s classification, and wrote ‘¢ This sum-
mary ”’ (of hectocotylization in the various genera) “ furnishes
a very striking evidence that there must be something natural
in @’Orbigny’s division of the Decapod Cephalopoda into the
two principal groups ‘ Myopsides’ and ‘ Oigopsides,’ although
no great inclination to adopt them has hitherto been shown.
The difference in the conditions of reproduction shows espe-
cially that the genus Ommatostrephes, d’Orb., is still more
entitled to be removed far from the genus Loligo, with which
even modern malacologists, such as Verany and Troschel,
persist in placing it.” But all this is changed. The male
of Ommatostrephes and its allies are described, and the males
of other species of the Oigopsides are known. As far as thus
known they closely conform in the hectocotylization of one
of the ventral arms to this character in the genus Loligo.
Moreover, it would now seem that the Oigopsid eye is not con-
fined to the group Oigopsides, for Verrill has described a genus
Stoloteuthis + which, though it is said in general characters to be
closely allied to Sepzola, has this peculiar feature. He writes :—

* See translation, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. xx. (1857), p. 81,
+ Verrill, Trans. Connect. Acad. Sci. v. (1881), p. 417,

of British Mollusca. 459

‘This species is the type of a very distinct genus, especially
remarkable for being the only known genus among Myopside
that has round pupils and the eyelids free all around. In
fact it shows quite conclusively that this division of the Deca-
cera into two groups, based on the presence or absence of free
eyelids, is purely artificial and of little or no systematic
value.” ‘The conclusion I arrive at is that the division of
the Decapoda into two primary groups by the character of
the eye should be regarded as of secondary importance. Thus
viewed the Oigopsida are a specialized and very natural
group which should be kept together near to Lolcgo, while
other considerations come in which appear to point to the
desirability of breaking up the group Myopsides, though
Steenstrup still maintains the Myopsides and Oigopsides as
primary divisions.

The arrangement by their shells was first put forward by
J. EK. Gray *. He divided the Decapoda—or Sephenia as he
called them—into three suborders, I. Chondrophora, II. Se-
piophora, III. Belemnophora. Dr. Paul Fischer + has, in
his recently published work, followed this arrangement, only
substitutg the preferable term Phragmophora for that of
Belemnophora. This appears as a whole a very natural
arrangement, and in it we seem to find the best guide to the
archaic history of the class. The Phragmophora have the
shell divided into air-chambers, as, for example, in the recent
genus Spirula, in which “ the multilocular shell corresponds
with the phragmocone of the Belemnite”” (Owen) ; and this
recent genus is at once distinguished from the Sepiophora not
only by the character of the shell, but by the absence or very
rudimentary condition of the fins. Next come the Sepiophora,
in which the septa are exchanged for a series of continuotis
calcareous deposits, forming an internal shell of considerable
size, but of such a spongeous character as still to be capable
of retaining air; while the animal, which bears the sepia
shell, differs from the Phragmophora and Chondrophora in
its wide depressed form and in its fins, which usually fringe the
whole length of the body. It agrees with both in having one
of the lower or ventral arms in the male sexually affected ;
but here the hectocotylization is usually at the base, in the
others at the extremity of, or rarely throughout, the arm.
Next we come to the Chondrophora, where we find that
“the primitive shell-gland and shell-sac have become fused ”’

* Brit. Mus. Cat., Cat. Mollusca in Coll. of B, M. pt. 1, Cephalopoda
antepedia (1849).

+ ‘Manuel de Conchyliologie et de Paléontologie conchyliologique ’
(1887).

460 Rev. Canon Norman’s Revision

(Hyatt), and the shell itself is reduced in importance, narrow,
lanceolate or spathulate, and its structure corneous, or some-
times altogether absent; and from these we pass to the
Octopoda, w where, as one of many wide differences of structure,
the shell is rudimentary or wholly absent *.

It must not be supposed that I have been intimating in the
preceding paragraph that the several groups of Decapoda have
been derived from each other. That, I take it, certainly is
not the case. ‘They appear all to be derivatives in different
directions from the ancient Belemnites.

No linear arrangement can ever adequately and fully demon-
strate the varied alliances of groups. Such groups have
diverged in many directions from earlier types, and while
differing more and more widely in the especial characters in
which their divergence is evidenced, will nevertheless be, so
to speak, laterally bound together by the retention of many
points in common during a shorter or longer period in their
onward course of successive modifications. — Again, the law of
recurrence must be supposed to be not unlikely to come in.
Organs which have been modified or to a greater or less extent
suppressed under certain conditions of lite and environment,
when those conditions are partially or wholly reversed may be
expected to revert more or less to their original condition
rather than that they should undergo change in a new direc-
tion, although such new direction might equally subserve the
same purpose, Again, the very same modifications which
have taken place in a line of divergence which we will call A,
may supervene at a much later period in another line of diver-
gence B; for B had at an earlier time been undergoing modi-
fication in other parts of its structure than those at that same
period followed by A, but when ultimately somewhat similar
modifications having taken place in the same organ, which
had long before diverged from the original type in A, the
distant descendants of B may in this respect appear to us
actually more nearly related to A than were its progenitors.

The Oigopsida preserve in their hooked acetabula (or
suckers), in the indications of a phragmocone at the extremity
of the internal shell (Ommatostrephes), and general form of
body more of the characters of the ancient elemnites than
any other existing group. In Belemnoteuthis antiqua, Pearce,
of the Oxford Clay, we seem to recognize a form which may
represent a connecting-link; the arms are furnished with

* The beautiful egg-case of the genus Argonauta is not a true shell.
It does not take its origin in a shell-gland, but is a secondary product of
the dorsal arms, w hich are greatly expanded and turned back over the
mantle.

of British Mollusea. 461

hooked acetabula, the shell has its phragmocone largely deve-
loped, while the mucro, which is so conspicuous in typical
Belemnites, is here almost evanescent. In the Solenhofen
beds of Bavaria, which are supposed to be of nearly similar
horizon to the Kimmeridge Clay, the genus Acanthoteuthis
appears to be a decided Chondrophore, with hooked acetabula,
and in Conoteuthis Dupinianus, d’Orb., from the Gault, we
find a shell which shows approach to that of Ommastrephes,
though the arms are unfortunately unknown.

Belemnites first appears, I believe, in the Jurassic forma-
tions. In the Lower Lias it is abundant, and with it is the
genus Geoteuthis, which is perhaps a Chondrophore. In the
Upper Lias occurs Yeuthopsis, which is certainly a Chondro-
phore, but the specimens in the British Museum show no
appendages to prove whether it is more likely to have been an
Oigopsid or Myopsid; but forms ascribed to the same genus
in the Oxford Clay have rather short and broad arms, which
show no sign of hooked acetabula, and must belong to an
animal allied either to the Ommastrephide or the Loliginide.

The Sepiophora first appear in the Kimmeridge Clay in
Coccoteuthis latipennis, Owen, but the bone only is known ;
and there is in the British Museum an unnamed species from
the Solenhofen deposits of Bavaria, the bone of which shows
a very near approach to the form of the cuttle-bone in existing
species of Sepra.

The origin of the Spirulide is most obscure. They are
possibly derivatives from one of the more simple forms of
Ammonite or from such a genus as Spirulirostra.

Classification by the shell is very valuable for that purpose
with respect to fossil forms, since it is always preserved if an
part of the animal is fossilized ; while, on the other hand, the
eyes are useless in the investigation of fossil forms, as their
structure is rarely (if it is ever) recognizable. But while fully
weighing this fact, and holding such classification to be a much
truer division according to our present knowledge than that of
d@Orbigny, it appears to me that our insight into the hecto-
cotylization in this class has now attained sufficient importance
to justify us in employing it as an important factor in classi-
fication. Steenstrup, in the paper to which I have alread
referred, insisted on its value. He wrote: —'The justifica-
tion of the mode here adopted of employing the hectocotylized
arm as a rule for the natural collocation of the forms lies in
its importance for the entire reproduction. It would be incon-
ceivable that the various occurrence of this metamorphosis,
sometimes in one sometimes in the other pair of arms, some-
times on the right and sometimes on the left side, some-

462 Rev. Canon Norman’s Revision

times at the apex and sometimes at the base of the arm, &c.,
should not give rise to the same number of differences in the
mode of fecundation, and in the positions and manner in which
the seminal mass is placed upon the female, inasmuch as it
appears that the semen is hardly involuntarily or mechani-
cally emitted or poured out upon the eggs, but that this is
effected by conscious movements. What is furnished us in
this respect by simple reflection is also confirmed by observa-
tion. The seminal mass is actually attached to very different
parts and under very different conditions.” Professor Steen-
strup, at the time he wrote that passage, was unacquainted
with any instances of hectocotylization among the Oigopsides,
and therefore thought that the discovery of hectocotylization
had given strength to d’Orbigny’s divisions; but, as has been
already pointed out, hectocotylization breaks down that classi-
fication.

The following arrangement is suggested as one based pri-
marily upon the sexual distinctions. At the same time it will
not dismember d’Orbigny’s natural group of Oigopsides,
which will, however, take a subordinate place, nor will it in
any way interfere with the arrangement by means of the shell,
but, indeed, proceed nearly part passu with it. It breaks up
the Myopsides.

Subclass DIBRANCHIATA.
Order EF OC MOO DE.
MESARSENIA *.
Hectocotylization takes place in the third arm of the male,
while some of the suckers of the other arms are in that sex

much larger than in the female in certain genera; in others
the tips of the arms under modification.

Order II. DECAPODA.
A. CHONDROPHORA.

Suborder I. OPISTHARSENLIA fF.

One of the first or dorsal arms generally hectocotylized.
Middle arms having some of the suckers in the male much
larger than in the female.

* weoos, middle, dponv, male,
} omio@os, at the back, dpony, male.

of British Mollusca. 463

The Opistharsenia show many approaches to the Octopoda.
Ist, the lateral arms of the male have enlarged suckers ; 2nd,
the body is short and ovate; 3rd, the fins almost invariably
hold quite a different position from that assumed by them
in the following suborders, being situated in the middle of
the sides as in some Octopods; 4th, the shell is usually thin,
corneous, narrow, and not more than half the length of the
body, but is wholly absent in certain genera *.

The tentacular arms are retractile into cavities. The
spermatophores are deposited at the orifice of the oviduct of
the female. The formula of the radula is 2—1.1.1—2.
Kiggs isolated, though deposited in many gelatinous masses,
each mass containing a large number of eggs.

Fam. Sepiolide.

Suborder Il. PROSTHARSENTA +.

Hectocotylization of one of the fourth, ¢. e. ventral arms.

Section 1. ANOPROSTHARSENTA f.

In this section the terminal portion of the arm is that
affected by hectocotylization, more rarely the entire arm
undergoes modification (genus Loliolus). Body much pro-
duced, more or less cylindrical; fins at more or less of the
hinder portion of the sides of the body and reaching its termi-
nation, or, if the body stretches beyond them, it is only as
a pointed extremity. Shell internal, horny, thin, gladius-
formed, or lanceolate.

Tribe 1. Oreorsrp sz.

Eyes with a wide opening, throngh which the crystalline
lens may project and be in immediate contact with the
water. Spermatophores (in Ommastrephide) deposited in the
branchial cavity of the female near the root of the gills.
Formula of the radula usually 1—2—1.1.1—2—1. The
middle and first laterals tricuspid, the outermost a very small
quadrangular plate (but in the genus Gonatus there are only
five teeth).

* Stauloteuthis and Inioteuthis, Vervill.

+ mpdcG.0s, in front, dponv, male, in reference to the male having the
fourth or front arm hectocotylized.

t dv, from above, having the distal portion of the arm sexually
affected.

464 Rev. Canon Norman’s Revision

Fam. Cranchiide.
Fam. Chiroteuthide.

Fam. Ommastrephidz.

Tribe 2. Mvopsrpa (restricted).

Eyes with a fibrose capsule attached to and continuous
with the orbital cartilage, and transparent over the crystalline
lens, which it covers. Spermatophores deposited under the
buccal membrane of the female, which is especially modified
for the purpose. Eggs in very numerous mucilaginous
elongated masses, each containing very numerous eggs, and
the whole attached together at one extremity. Formula of
the radula and character of teeth exactly as in the Oigopsida
of the genus Ommatostrephes.

Fam. Loliginide.

B. SEPIOPHORA.
Section 2. KATOPROSTHARSENTA *.

Hectocotylization on the basal portion of the fourth or ven-
tral arm of the male fT.

Body wide, depressed ; fins extending like a frill nearly the
whole length of the body ; shell calcareous, laminated, spongy,
a cuttle-bone. Spermatophores attached under the buccal
membrane of the female. HKges ovoid, mamillated distally,
and produced at the base into a stalk, by which they are
attached to weeds. Formula of the radula 1—2.1.2—1, the
central and two inner laterals are alike, triangular and simple,
the outermost laterals are falciform.

Fam. Sepiida.

Mantle supported by a cartilaginous, semilunar or conical
button, and a corresponding pit.

C. PHRAGMOPHORA.

Shell (in Spdruda) in the form of a number of air-chambers
connected with each other by means of a siphon. Hectocoty-
lization in both of the fourth or ventral arms.

* «ato, below, having the basal portion of the front arm hectocotylized.
+ Sepia andreanoides, Hoyle (‘Challenger’ Report), is exceptional in
having the arm sexually affected to its extremity.

of British Mollusca. 465

Fam. Spirulide.

Three genera which Steenstrup regards as allied to Spirula,
Sepiadarium, Sepioloidea, and Idiosepius, Steenstrup, have
no shell. Fischer places these genera in two families near
the Loliginide. The hectocotylization of Idvosepius very
closely accords with that of the male Spirula australis
described by Owen; both ventral arms are entirely or almost
entirely devoid of suckers, and one is of much larger size
than the other. Steenstrup places the two groups Sepiadarii
and Ideosepii in his family Sepio-Loliginei, and thus defines
them :—

Group Sepiadarit, Fins narrow, occupying only smaller
portion of the length. No internal shell. Mantle
united to neck on the back. One of the fourth or
ventral arms hectocotylized. Genera Sepiadartum and
Sepioloidea.,

Group Jdiosepii. Fins small, terminal. Mantle supported
by cartilaginous prominence or ridge and correspond-
ing pit or furrow. Both ventral arms hectocotylized.
Genera Jdiosepius, which has no internal shell, and

Spirula.

Being unacquainted with the foregoing interesting genera,
I abstain from any conjecture as to their alliances.

Class I. CEPHALOPODA.
Subclass DIBRANCHIATA.
A. MESARSENIA.
Order I. OC TOP ODA
Fam. 1. Octopide.

Genus 1. Ocropus, Lamarck.

Sars thus describes the radula in this genus :—“ Lamelle
radule mediane magne, acie in cuspidem recurvam longe
protractam exserta; laterales utrinque 2 valde inequales,
interior minima et rudimentaris, exterior magna, basi quad-
rangulari, acie unicuspidata ; cuncini utrinque singuli, falci-
formes, incurvi; lamine limbi magne, quadrangulares.
Formula radule 1—1—(1.1).1.(1.1)—1—1.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 33

466 Rey. Canon Norman’s Revision

1. Octopus vulgaris, Lamarck.

The males of Octopus vulgaris have one -or more of the
suckers (including generally the 14th to the 16th) of their
lateral arms of disproportionately large size; at the same time
the third right arm is much shorter than the left, distinctly
thinner in its outer half, and the fold of skin, which is
very white on the surface turned inwards, gives the arm an
appearance as if the side of the arm were divided into two
parts by a longitudinal cleft.

Guernsey and Herm (A. M. N.), Plymouth (Biolog. Lab.),
Weymouth (Hoyle, in litt.), Liverpool (Collingwood), Lam-
lash Bay, Firth of Clyde (Wyville Thomson), Firth of Forth
(Grantand Neill). It is pte that these more northern
habitats should be confirmed. Though stated to be “ not
uncommon”? in the Firth of Forth, all Mr. Hoyle’s endeavours
to procure it from that locality have failed, and possibly
Eledone cirrosa may have been mistaken for it.

2. Octopus arcticus, Prosch.

? Sepia grenlandica, Dewhurst, Nat. Hist. Cetacea, 1834, p. 263.

Octopus arcticus, Prosch, K. Dansk, Vidensk. Selsk. Skrif. ser. 5, 2:
(1849), p. 53, fies. 1-3.

Octopus arcticus, Steenstrup, Aun. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, xx. (1857),
p- 97, pl. i. fie, 2.

Octopus Bairdii, Verrill, Amer. Journ, Sci. 1873, v. p. 5; Trans.
Connect. Acad. Sci. v. (1881), p. 368, pl. xxxiii. figs. 1, 1 a, pl. xxxiv.
figs. 5, 6, pl. xxxvi. fig. 10, pl. xxxvil. fig. 8, pl. xlix. figs. 4, 4a,
pl li. figs. 1, 1a.

Octopus Bardi, G, O. Sars, Moll. Reg. Arct. Norv. p. 359, pl. xxxili.
figs. 1-10, and dentition, pl. xvii. fig. 8.

Octopus arcticus, Hoyle, Report ‘Challenger’ Cephalop. p. 91.

Body short and thick, broadly rounded posteriorly, sepa-
rated from head by only slight constriction at the sides. Late-
ral fold of the skin more or less distinct; lower portion of the
body below the fold smooth ; upper surface of body more or
less studded, sometimes even to the arms, with roughish warts
or tubercles of various size; often the largest of these is a
supraorbital cirrus, which occasionally (and especially in the
males) attains a considerable length, and is acutely conical
and itself studded with lesser tubercles. Arms rather short,
a connecting-web unites them for about one third of their
length; they taper to very fine points; suckers small, little
raised, those in each row separated from each other by a wide
space often equalling their own diameter. Colour above
dusky violet, below somewhat paler. In the male the right
arm of the third pair is remarkably modified; it has its
extremity greatly enlarged into a broadly elliptical spoon-like

of British Mollusca. 467

organ, of which the inner concave side is transversely divided
by a number (thirteen in my specimen) of ribs which slightly
incline forwards; anterior to these there is at the base a
V-shaped fold, the point of the fold being directed forwards.

The largest Irish specimen has a total dorsal length from
the extremity of the body to the end of a dorsal arm of 161
millim. ; of this the body and head occupy 47 millim., the
membrane connecting the arms 40 millim., and the free por-
tion of the arm 74 millim.; breadth of body 45 millim. The
animal was preserved in strong spirit.

“Tamellae radule mediane basi semielliptica, margine
antico leviter emarginato, postice convexo, acie acuminata,
marginibus levibus, non denticulatis. Segmenta radule 64.”
(G. 0. Sars.)

Mr. G. C. Bourne trawled two fine females of this species
last year in H.M.S. ‘ Research’ off the south of Ireland.
The smaller specimen is not so tuberculate as the larger,
and neither of them shows the more elevated supraorbital
process, though that portion of the animal is more covered
with prominent tubercles than the rest of the body. In
this respect it accords with an American male for which I
am indebted to the United States National Museum. Mr.
Hoyle has also examined the specimens, and agrees with me
that they belong to this species. I have also to thank that
friend for information on several points on which I have con-
sulted him in reference to the Cephalopoda.

Distribution. Octopus arcticus occurs off the whole north-
east American coast from Newfoundland and Nova Scotia to
South Carolina in 45-524 fathoms. G. O. Sars has found it
off West Norway, Lofoten, and East Finmark in 80-300
fathoms. In the ‘ Porcupine’ expedition it was twice met
with in the Faroe Channel in 345-632 fathoms, and in the
same Channel it was procured by the ‘ Knight Hrrant’ in
540 fathoms, and by the ‘Triton’ in 608 fathoms ; and if it
be Sepia grenlandica, Dewhurst, it also lives in the Green-
land Sea.

Fam, 2. Eledonide.
Genus 2. ELEDONE, Leach.

Radula having the central tooth very large and acute.
With two teeth on each margin towards the base ; two laterals
on each side, the inner small and rudimentary, the outer
unicuspidate and large (but much smaller than the great
central tooth) ; a single faleate uncinus on each side curving

33*

468 Rev. Canon Norman’s Revision

inwards, and exterior to this a very large oblong laminary

plate. Formula 1—1—(1.1.).1.(1.1.)—1—1.

3. Eledone cirrosa (Lamk.).

Outer Haaf, Shetland (A.M. N.), St. Andrews (M‘In-
tosh !), Firth of Forth (McBain, Hoyle, &c.), Lamlash Bay,
Arran, N.B. (Herdman), Tenby (C. Jefferys !), off S.W. Ire-
land, H.M.S. ‘Research,’ 1889 (G. C. Bourne!), Aberdeen
and North Wales (Hoyle, in litt.), off the Butt of Lewis in 40
fathoms, ‘Triton’ exped. (Hoyle).

Distribution. Mediterranean, West France, Denmark,
Sweden, West Norway, and Faroe Islands.

The males have the arms very long and greatly attenuated
and they are not usually coiled up as in the female. Their
extremities bear elongated and thin cutaneous lobes trans-
versely placed and closely crowded together; the ends of
these project in mature specimens beyond the margin of the
arm like so many filaments, while in the centre of each lobe
is a pore which represents the rudimentary sucker. In
younger males these cutaneous expansions of the suckers are
much smaller, and do not extend beyond the sides of the arms.
The third right arm is hectocotylized, much shorter than the
left, and very deep throughout. Along its lower margin there
runs a fleshy lobe, which is curved upwards along the inner
side of the arm, so as to form a channel throughout its length,
and extending beyond the extremity of the arm (@. e. the por-
tion bearing suckers), is there folded back and united to the
inner side of the extremity ; the termination of the channel is
thus at the furthest point.

It is the Sepia octopodia, Pennant, Octopus ventricosus,
Grant, and Eledone Pennantii, MacGillivray *.

Order II. DECAPODA.
A. CHONDROPHORA.
Suborder I. OPISTHARSENTA.
Fam. 1. Sepiolide.
Genus 1. Rossta, Owen.
Body short, subglobose or oblong ; anterior margin wholly

* Herr H. J. Posselt has recently (in “ Petersen, Del Videnskablige
Udbytte af Kanonbaaden ‘ Hauchs’ Togter i de Danske Have inden for
Skagen 1883-86” (1889), p. 189) pointed out distinctions between the
males of EL. Aldrovandi (Rafinesque) and of the present species. The
differences are very slight, and how are the females to be distinguished ?
No doubt Herr Posselt represents not only his own views but also those
of Professor Steenstrup ; and I have in deference to their opinions here
kept FE. cirrosa as distinct from E. Aldrovandt.

of British Mollusca. 469

free and unconnected by membrane dorsally with the head ;
Jins more or less ovate, situated nearly centrally on the sides ;
arms rather short, their suckers in two or four rows ; tentacles
with angular or rounded stalks, their apices slightly expanded,
with very numerous small suckers; gladius small, narrow.
Radula with seven teeth in each transverse row, teeth wnicus-
pidate, with “smooth edges, formula 2—1.1.1—2. Male
with some of the suckers of second and third arms much
larger than usual and more pedunculated ; one or both of the
first (dorsal) arms more or less hectocotylized.

4, Rossia macrosoma (delle Chiaje), Gerv. & van Ben.

Sepiola macrosoma, delle Chiaje, Mem. stor. anim. (1829), pl. Ixxi.
(fide Gery. and van Ben.).

Sepola macrosoma, Gery. et van Ben. Bull. Acad. Sci. Bruxelles, 1839,
p- 39, pl. vi.

Rossia macrosoma, VOrb, Céph. Acét. 1839, p. 245, Sépioles, pl. iv.
fis, 13-24.

Rossia Owenit, Ball, Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. ii. (1842), p. 193, ¢.

Rossia Jacobi, id. ibid. p. 193, 2.

Rossia Owenii, Lovén, Céfvers. k. Vetensk.-Akad. Forhand. 1845, p. 121.

Rossia Owenii, Forbes and Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll. 1853, iv. p. 228,

pl. SSS. fig. 1, ¢.

Rossia macrosoma, iid. ibid. p. 222, pl. MMM. fig. 1.

Rossia macrosoma, Jetireys, B. C. iv. 1869, p. 183, pl. vi. fig. 1.

Rossia Panceri, Targ.-Tozz. Cep. Mus. Firenze, 1869, p. 46, pl. vii.

Hes Cy Ge
Rossia ee Hoyle, Report ‘Challenger’ Ceph. 1886, p. 114, pl. xv.
figs. 1-9,

In the ‘ Challenger’ Report Mr. Hoyle doubtfully regarded
LR. macrosoma and f. Oweni as specifically distinct, and gave
five characters in which he then thought they differed. We
have now examined together the larger series of specimens in
our joint collections, and I have his authority for stating that
he no longer regards the first four points as tenable, though
he is disposed to consider the fifth, namely that the tentacular
suckers (on the margin of the club) are larger in 2. Owent
than in &. macrosoma, as sufficient to separate the species.
Now I grant that this seems to hold good when British and
Mediterranean examples are actually compared ; but the diffe-
rence of size is very slight and only relates to the suckers near
the base of the tentacular club, and I cannot think that such
a slight variation is of sufficient importance to retain even a
varietal name, much less specific. Some amount of variation
must be allowed. Almost any Mediterranean shell can be
distinguished by the practised eye from examples of the same
species from our own seas ; and in many cases if mixed lots
ot a shell were placed before me collected in the restricted

470 Rev. Canon Norman’s Revision

area of our own seas I could at once pick out with certainty
specimens of many forms which I could rightly, by differences
of form, sculpture, and colouring, assign to their special
habitats.

For description and good figures of the species I would
refer to the ‘Challenger’ Report.

The males are at once known from the females by the outer
rows of suckers of the arms, especially of the second and third
pair, being much more developed than those of the central
rows, while in the females the size of the suckers in all the
rows is subequal. The left dorsal arm of the male is also to
some extent hectocotylized.

This was formerly regarded as a very rare species on our
coast ; but the use of the trawl has shown it to be far from
uncommon in 40-90 fathoms in the Clyde district and off the
west of Scotland. It was also taken in the ‘ Porcupine’
expedition in the Minch and off the coast of Wexford, and
by the ‘ Triton ’ off the Butt of Lewis in 40 fathoms (Hoyle).
Other localities are Dublin Bay (Ball), Isle of Wight (forbes
and Hanley).

Distribution. Kattegat (Steenstrup), South Sweden (Lovén),
South and West Norway (G. O. Sars), Mediterranean (d’ Or-
bigny), Naples (Staz. Zool. !).

Subgenus FRANKLINIA *.

Suckers of the arms in two rows only throughout their
length. Besides the species here described the following will
fall into this subgenus:—&. megaptera, Verrill, and appa-
rently Heteroteuthis tenera, Vervill.

5. Rossia glaucopis, Lovén.

Rossia glaucopis, Lovén, Kong]. Vet.-Akad. Forh, 1846, p. 185,

Rossia papillifera, Jettreys, B. C. v. (1869), p. 134.

Rossia glaucopis, G.O. Sars, Moll. Reg. Arct, Norv. 1878, p. 837, pl. xxxii.

and pl. xviii. fig. 6.
' Rossia glaucopis, Hoyle, Report ‘Challenger’ Cephalopoda, 1886, p. 116;
id. Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edinb. 1886, p. 24.

‘Two specimens taken by Jeffreys in 60-100 fathoms off the
north of Shetland, and a specimen is in my collection which
I dredged on the Outer Haat, Shetiand, in 1867.

Professor Steenstrup and Mr. Hoyle have both examined a
specimen labelled in Jeftreys’s handwriting ‘Rossta paptlli-
fera, Shetland,” which appears to have been the type of &.
papillifera, and they have identified it with Lovén’s species.

* Named after Capt. Sir John Franklin, the Arctic voyager.

of British Mollusca. 471

Distribution. A specimen was taken by the ‘ Porcupine,’
1869, St. 65, lat. 61° 10’ N., long. 2° 21’ W., 345 fath., temp.
30°°O Fabr.* = Finmark (Lovén), whole coast of Norway
and Hast and West Finmark, 60-200 fath. (G. O. Sars).

The following is Sars’s description of this species :—

““Corpus breve et obesum, supine papillis minutis sparsis
obsitum, pallio ovato capite vix duplo longiore, margine an-
tico in medio angulum obtusum formante, pinnis semicircu-
laribus longe sejunctis ; brachiis robustis, lateralibus inferiori-
bus longioribus dimidium corporis longitudinem superantibus,
acetabulis magnis, biseriatis, regularibus; tentaculis corporis
longitudinem vix assequentibus, apice breviter dilatato, ace-
tabulis minutis, longe pedunculatis, multiserialibus obsito.
Color fusco-rufescens, chromotophoris numerosis minutis.
Long., brachiis exclusis, 85 mm. Segmenta radule: 40.

6. Rossia sublevis, Verrill.

pula

Mr. E. A. Smith records Rossia sublevis (Ann. & Mag.
Nat. Hist. ser. 6, iv. (1889), p. 420) as having been taken in
1889 by the ‘ Flying Fox’ in 250 fath. off the south of
Ireland.

Distribution. North-east American coast, in 42-372 fath.
(Verrill), and by the ‘ Blake’ exped., lat. 32° 33’ N., 233-260
tath. (Agassiz).

Is this distinct from R. glaucopis? I cannot think so.
Verrill’s description of 2. sublevis accurately accords with the
characters of the former species. With respect to distinctions
he writes :—‘ This species very closely resembles the Lossta
glaucopis, Lovén, of Northern Europe, as figured by G. O.
Sars. The latter is, however, more papillose and has smaller
eyes and head, if correctly figured.” But with respect to the
papillosity Verril says, “ Upper surface of the body and head

* This station is exactly on the line of demarcation of the British area,
but from the temperature ought not, I think, to be regarded as British. It
is impossible to define a more exact boundary than that I have given
at this particular spot (see introductory notes). The next station, 66, at
depth 267 fath., has temp. 45°7 Fahr. Had I gone one half degree
further east (7. e. 4° 30! W.) for N.E. line of boundary, it would have
fallen within the 100-fathom Shetland area in places.

AG? Rev. Canon Norman’s Revisioa

nearly smooth, but in the larger specimens, especially the
males, usually with a few whitish papille, most numerous
near the front edge of the mantle.” Now Verrill’s largest
specimens, which have the mantle 29-31 millim. long, are
just the size of that figured by Sars, while my smaller Shet-
land specimen of 2. glaucopis, length of mantle 13 millim.,
is nearly quite smooth. Again, as regards the form of the
head, Verrill’s two figures (pl. xxxi. fig. 3, and pl. xlvii.
fig. 2) exhibit marked differences in form both of head, body,
and of position of fins, as great as between one of those figures
and that given by Sars; while my specimen has the eyes
quite as prominent as they are represented in the latter figure
of Verrill just referred to.

I have not united the species only because it is perhaps
desirable that specimens of the two should be examined side
by side before that is done.

Genus 2. SEPIOLA (Rondeletius), Leach.

Head dorsally attached to the body by connecting mem-
brane. Body short, suboval or oblong. ins latero-dorsal,
rounded. ead almost as large as the body. yes promi-
nent, covered by an expansion of the skin. entacular arms
long, retractile, dilated at their extremities. Arms subulate,
suckers generally two-rowed, but at the extremity sometimes
many-rowed. ales have one of the first arms (left) hecto-
cotylized and the third pair stronger than in female, and
curiously forced down from their bases into the cavity of the
mouth. Gladius lancet-shaped or linear, small, about half
the Jength of the body. Radula as in Lossia.

7. Sepiola scandica, Steenstrup.

Sepiola Rondeletii, Leach, Zool. Miscell. iii. (1817), p. 140 (nec Gesuer) ;
Forbes and Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll. iv. (1853), p. 220 (partim),
pl. MMM. fig. 1.

Sepiola scandica, Steenstrup, Note “ Teuthologice, 6,’ Overs. Danske
Vidensk. Selsk. Forh. 1887, p. 65; Giard, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.
ser. 6, iv. 1889, p. 182; Posselt, in Petersen, Vidensk. Udbytte af
‘Hauchs’ Togter, 1889, p. 141.

Fins about equal to and not longer than half the entire
length of the mantle. Suckers of all the arms two-rowed to
their extremities. Valve of the funnel small in female, absent
in male. Ink-bag simple, that is pyriform. Gladius narrow,
linear or setiform.

of British Mollusca. 473

Off Little Cumbrae, Firth of Clyde, 50 fathoms (4. IZ N.) ;

mouth of Loch Fyne, 48 fathoms, and West of Scotland
(Hoyle).

Mr. Hoyle and myself have examined together the British
and Mediterranean specimens of this genus (including S. Hon-
deletii and S. Petersi of the Mediterranean) which are in our
two collections, and I only give those localities from which
we have determined specimens. It must for the present
remain in doubt whether the true S. Rondeletit, which is
characterized by an auriculate or triloved ink-sac, by fins
equalling more than half (about three fifths) of mantle, and
by having all the suckers of the arms two-rowed, occurs on
our coast. Griard records it from Roscoff.

Distribution. Roscott (Giard), Denmark, Sweden, South
and West Norway, and Faroe (Steenstrup and Posselt).

8. Sepiolu atlantica, d’Orbigny.

Sepiola atlantica, @Orbigny, Céph. Acét. ty 235, Sépioles, pl. iv. figs. 1-
12; Forbes and Hanley, Brit. Moll. p- 217, pl. MMM. fig. 2;
Steenstrup, Notve “ Teuthologice, G2 Geos Kongl. Danske Vidensk.
Selsk. Forh, 1887, p. 65; Hoyle, Fauna of Liverpool Bay, 1886,
p. 279; Giard, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, iv. (1889), p. 182;
Posselt, in Petersen, Vidensk. Udbytte af ‘Hauehs ’ Toster, 1889,
p. 141.

Fins equal to more than half (about three fifths) the length
of the mantle. Suckers of the arms two-rowed, but the
fourth (ventral) arms having the suckers near their tips sud-
denly becoming many-rowed, very minute, and crowded in
both sexes. ine! foaled with a valve, which in the
male is very much smaller than in the eral Ink-bag tri-
lobed or auriculate. Gladius lanceolate or cultriform. . In
the male the suckers of the arms are fewer and larger than in
the other sex. One of the first arms is largely developed,
swollen, and widened laterally, with a hollow about the middle
of its length. ‘The third arms of male in this and other
species of the genus are strongly forced down upon the oral
opening.

Bantry and Jersey (A. I. N.), Plymouth (Zool. Lab. !),
North Wales (Hoyle).

Distribution. Roscoff and Pas de Calais (Gard), Kattegat,
South Sweden, South and West Norway, and Faroe (Steen-
strup and Posselt).

Jeffreys united this species with the last as being its male !

474 Rev. Canon Norman’s Revision

Suborder II. PROSTHARSENTA.
Section 1. ANOPROSTHARSENTA.
Tribe I. Oregorpsirpa.

Fam. 2. Cranchiide.

Genus TAONIUS, Steenstrup.

9. Taontus hyperboreus, Steenstrup.

Leachia hyperborea, Steenstrup, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, xx,
(1857), p. 96, note.

Taonius hyperboreus, Steenstrup, Overs. K. D, Vid. Selsk. Forhand.
1861, p. 88.

? Desmoteuthis tenera, Verrill, Trans, Connect. Acad. Sci. v. (1881),
p- 412, pl. lv. fig. 2, pl. lvi. fig. 3.

Leachia ellipsoptera, Carpenter, Jeffreys, and Thomson, ‘ Porcupine’
Report, Proc. Roy. Soc. 1870, p. 423.

Taonius hyperboreus, Hoyle, Report ‘Challenger’ Ceph. 1886, p. 191,
pl. xxxii. fig. 12, and pl. xxiii. figs. 1-11.

‘Porcupine,’ 1869. Two specimens at the surface 140 miles
north-west of the coast of Ireland, lat. 56° 10’ N., long. 13°
16’ W. (vide Hoyle, ‘ Challenger’ Ceph. p. 209).

Distribution. An oceanic species, the known distribution of
which is North Greenland (Steenstrup), North-east America
(Verrill), off Halifax, Nova Scotia (‘Challenger’).

Fam. 3. Onychoteuthide.

Genus ONYCHOTEUTHIS, Lichtenstein, 1818.

Body long, subcylindrical ; fins terminal, large, triangular,
united dorsally, rhomboidal in their united form. yes large
and prominent. Arms having two rows of suckers, which
are furnished with horny but not denticulated rings. Tenta-
cular arms long and strong, their clubs furnished at the base
with a group of suckers, but the greater part of their length
armed with two rows of strong grasping hooks. adula very
like that of Loligo, formula 3—1—38; all the teeth unicuspi-
date and simple, central and innermost lateral smaller than
the others.

Pen with a long pointed dorso-posterior process.

I am not aware that the male of this genus has been
described; but in the allied genus Lnoploteuthis according to
Claus hectocotylization takes place in one of the fourth or
ventral arms, and the spermatophores are deposited in the
ventral branchial cavity of the females.

of British Mollusca. 47

10. Onychoteuthis Banksit (Leach).

Loligo Banksti, Leach, Zool. Miscell. iii. (1817), p. 141.

Onychoteuthis Bergii, Lichtenstein, Naturgesch, Brasiliens, 1818, p. 1592.

Onychia angulata, Lesueur, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. ii. (1821),

p- 99, pl. ix. fig. 8, and p. 296, pl. xvii.

Onychoteuthis Banks, VOrbigny, Céph. Acét. 1855, p. 386.

Dr. Rose (4 Zoologist,’ 1853, p. 3864) records the capture
of this species at Banff, Scotland. It is a species which was
most unlikely to be mistaken, and, moreover, the specimen
appears to have been examined by Arthur Adams; so that
there can be no doubt that this oceanic species has been
brought to our shores as others have been to the opposite con-
tinent.

Its distribution is very general in the Atlantic, Indian, and
Pacific Oceans. In Northern Europe it has been recorded
from South Sweden and Finmark (Lovén), Cattegat and
Baltic Sea (Posselt).

Fam. 4. Ommastrephide.
Genus 1. OMMASTREPHES, d’Orbigny.

Subgenus 1. OMMAsTREPHES, d’Orbigny (s. str.)
= Ommatostrephes, Steenstrup= Sthenoteuthis, Verrill,

Tentacular arms having the lower portion of their clubs
furnished with numerous small smooth-rimmed suckers,
alternating with tubercular processes (=‘ fixing cushions,”
Hoyle) for their mutual adhesion. Ordinary suckers of the
clubs in four rows. Arms provided with very broad thin
marginal membranes. Caudal fin very broad.

Steenstrup separated the genera or subgenera Illex and
Todarodes trom Ommastrephes of d’Orbigny tor certain species
included by d’Orbigny in his Mon. Céph. Acét., and retained
that author’s name, changed in spelling to Ommatostrephes,
for the remaining species with O. Bartramii, VOrb. (=O.
cylindricus, d’Orb.), as the type. Now the group thus restric-
ted is the very one for which Verrill had previously proposed
the name Sthenoteuthis: but both O. Bartramii and O. gigas
belong to this group, and, as these were the only species
originally placed in the genus by its author, Ommastrephes
must by the laws of nomenclature be retained for it. The
generic name cannot be applied to species subsequently inclu-
ded by him in the genus to the exclusion of those first embraced.
Moreover, O. Bartramiti had been taken by writers earlier
than Verrill as the type. I follow therefore the nomenclature
of Steenstrup and of Hoyle, except that I have treated Lllex
and Todarodes as subgenera,

476 Rev. Canon Norman’s Revision

11. Ommastiephes eblanee (Ball).
Loligo eblane, Ball, Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. vol. i. p. 463.
Ommastrephes eblane, Forbes and Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll. iv. p. 285,
pl. SSS. fig.2; Steenstrup, Ommat. Bleeckspr. p. 97.

Body proportionately short; suckers confined to the clubs
of the tentacles, minute and four-ranked at their extremities ;
fins occupying three sevenths of length of body. The arms
bear remarkably large pedunculate suckers, two-ranked and
set well apart.

‘These characters from Forbes and Hanley’s description do
not accord with any other British species. The four-ranked
suckers of the teutacular clubs separate it from O. Coindetit,
and the absence of suckers on the stems of the tentacular arms
distinguish it from O. sagittatus.

The localities given by Forbes and Hanley are Dublin
Bay (Warren and Ball) and Beltast (W. Thompson).

Subgenus 2, ILLEex, Steenstrup.

Distinguished from Ommastrephes (s. str.) by the absence
of all simple suckers and tubercles employed for mutual
cohesion on the tentacular clubs, and by the suckers of the
club being arranged at the extremity in eight rows. The
siphonal reception-groove is smooth at its commencement.

12. Ommastrephes Coindeti (Vérany).

Loligo Coindeti, Verany, Mem. Accad. Sci. Torino, vol. 1. (1837), p. 94,

ahve

Danie oohes sagittatus, VOrbigny, Céph. Acét. 1839, p. 545, Ommast.

pl. i. figs. 1-10 (partim) ; Forbes and Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll. iv.
(1853), p. 281, pl. RRR. fig. 1; Jeffreys, B. C. v. (1869), p. 129.
Loligo Pille (?), Verany, Céph. Méd. (1851), p. 112, pl. xxxvi. figs, d-g.
Illex Coindetii, Steenstrup, Ommat. Bleesp. Overs. D. K. Vid. Selks.
ee 1880, pp. 82, 90, &c.; Hoyle, Report ‘ Challenger’ Ceph, (1886),
p. ot.

Additional localities, Firth of Forth (Edinburgh Mus., fide
Herdman) ; Eastbourne (Roper).

Distribution. Mediterraneann (d’ Orbigny &c.), Naples (Zool.
Stat. !), West and South-west France (fischer).

A fine male in my collection from Naples shows that this
species has the right ventral arm hectocotylized. This arm
has its lower and outer margin, especially on the distal portion
of its length, thickened and widened out laterally, so that the
extremity is much broader than the corresponding part of the
left arm; at about 1 inch from the extremity the suckers
entirely cease, and what were the peduncles of the outer row

of British Mollusca. 477

are transformed into semielliptical vertical plates, which have
the faces turned backwards and their summits bent over in
that direction ; the corresponding peduncles of the inner row
are at first in the form of depressed simple tubercles, but quite
at the extremity they also become flattened and closely corre-
spond with those of the outer row opposite to them *.

Subgenus 3. Toparopgs, Steenstrup.

Tentacular arms having their stems furnished with suckers
some way down. ‘Tentacular clubs not furnished at their
base with simple suckers and fixing-cushions for their mutual
adhesion ; suckers arranged in only four rows quite to the
extremity. Lateral arms not having a membranous crest.
Siphonal reception-groove with small longitudinal grooves at
the anterior end.

13. Ommastrephes sagittatus (Lamarck).

Ommastrephes todarus, Forbes and Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll. iy. (1853),
p. 233, pl. RRR. fig. 2; Jeffreys, B. C. iv. (1869), p. 128.

Todarodes sagittatus, Steenstrup, Ommat. Bleksp. (1880), pp. 82, 90,
&e.; Hoyle, Report ‘Challenger’ Cephalopoda, 1886, p, 34.

(Non Ommastrephes sagittatus, d'Orb.)

Shetland (Pearcey!), St. Andrews (M‘Intosh!), Firth of
Forth (Forbes), Durham coast (A. W/. N.).

It has a range coextensive with Europe from the Mediter-
ranean to Finmark, Faroe, and Iceland.

The following is G. O. Sars’s description of the radula of
this species :— Lamelle radulz in series 7 disposit, medians
et laterales tricuspidate, cuspide centrali majore et longe pro-
tracta; uncini interiores basi intus acute producta, exteriores
simplices, falciformes ; laminz limbales distincte, minime,
quadrangulares. Formula radule 1—2—1.1.1—2—1.”
(sears, lc. pl. xvit. fig. 1.)

* Verrill has described the hectocotylization of the nearly allied Ameri-
can species Ommastrephes (Illea’) illecebrosus (Lesueur). In the ventral
arm of that species the suckers, especially of the outer row for some dis-
tance from the extremity, have their pedicels larger and longer, with
swollen bases; then the suckers themselves gradually become smaller, till
they nearly or quite disappear, and then close to the tip they may again
become normal. Steenstrup testifies to hectocotylization of the same
arm in Todarodes and Dosidicus, and in Ommastrephes (restricted),

478 Rey. Canon Norman’s Peviston

Genus 2. ARCHITEUTHUS, Steenstrup.

14. Architeuthus monachus (Steenstrup), Verrill.

Architeuthus monachus, Steeustrup, Skand. Naturf. Forhand. vii. Méde,
1856, p. 182 (name only).

Architeuthis dux, Harting, Verhandl. k. Akad. Weten. ix. p. 11, pl. 1.

Dinoteuthis proboscideus, A. G. More, Zoologist, 1875, p. 4526.

Architeuthis dux, A. G. More, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xvi.
1875, p. 125.

Architeuthis monachus, Verrill, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xvi.
1875, p. 268; Trans. Connect. Acad. Sci. v. 1880, p. 238; Amer.
Journ. Sci. and Arts, ix. 1875, p. 124, pls. u., iii., iv. figs, 9-13,

A species of Architeuthus has occurred several times on our
coasts, and the species is considered by Verrill, who has seen
more specimens of this genus than any other naturalist, to be
Architeuthus monachus, Steenstrup.

“he mutilated carcase of a huge Cephalopod, perhaps
belonging to Steenstrup’s species (Architeuthis monachus),
was stranded in 1860 or 1861 between Hillswick and Scallo-
way, on the west of Shetland. From a communication
received by Prof. Allman it appears that the tentacles were
16 feet long, the pedal arms about half that length, and the
mantle-sac 7 feet; the mantle was terminated by fins ; one of
the suckers examined by Prof. Allman was three quarters of
an inch in diameter.” (Jeffreys, Brit. Conch. v. p. 124.)

In the ‘ Zoologist’ for July 1875, p. 4526, Mr. A. G. More
called attention to a gigantic Cephalopod which was cast
ashore at Dingle, in Kerry, 200 years ago. It was described
as 19 feet in total length ; the long arms were mutilated, the
remaining part being 11 feet long and as thick as a man’s
arm; the short arms varied from 6 to 8 feet in length and
were as thick as a man’s leg, and had _ two rows of large ser-
rated suckers ; the proboscis or buccal mass with beak was
capable of projection and of the “ size of a man’s hand,” the
beak was like an eagle’s, but broader. The whole animal is
said to have been as large as a large horse. Mr. More named
this specimen Déinoteuthis proboscideus ; but Verrill writes :—
“There is no reason to suppose, from the published accounts,
that this specimen differed in any way from Architeuthis
dux.”

“On the 26th April, 1875, a very large calamary was met
with on the north-west of Boffin Island, Connemara. The
crew of a ‘curragh’ (a boat made like a ‘coracle’ with
wooden ribs covered with tarred canvas) observed to seaward
a large floating mass surrounded by gulls. They pulled out
to it, believing it to be a wreck, but to their astonishment
found it was an enormous cuttle-fish, lying perfectly still, as

of British Mollusca. 479

if basking on the surface of the water. Paddling up with
caution, they lopped off one of its arms. The animal imme-
diately ‘set out to sea, rushing through the water at a tremen-
dous pace. ‘The men gave chase, and after a hard pull in their
frail canvas craft came up with it 5 miles out in the open
Atlantic and severed another of its arms and head. These
portions are now in the Dublin Museum. The shorter arms
measure each 8 feet in length and 15 inches round the base ;
the tentacular arms are said to have been 30 feet long. The
body sank.” (Ser geant Thomas Conner, of the Royal Irish
Constabulary, in the ‘ Zoologist,’ June 1875. )

This specimen was described as follows by Mr. A. G. More
under Ue name of Architeuthis dux, Steenstrup, in the
‘ Annals’

ss Tene 30 feet long when fresh (14 and 17 feet can
still be made up from the pickled pieces). A few distant,
small, and nearly sessile suckers occur at long intervals along
the inner surface of the peduncle. The club, measuring 3
feet 9 inches in its present shrunken state, is occupied in the
centre of the palm by two rows of large stalked suckers
nearly 1 inch in diameter, fourteen in each row; an alternating
row of fourteen smaller suckers (half an inch in diameter)
occupies the margin on each side of the palm; thus there are
twenty-eight large one-inch suckers in the middle, and the
same number of half-inch suckers along the cuter edge. ‘These
outer suckers are each armed with a denticulated bony ring of
some twenty-eight teeth pointing inwards ; and no doubt “the
large inner suckers were similarly furnished, but their rings
had fallen out or had been removed before the specimens were
examined, Just beneath where the large suckers end there
occurs a cluster of small suckers, two tenths of an inch in
diameter; and these are arranged closely in six transverse
rows for about 5 inches along the now narrowing wrist of
the club ; only a few of the uppermost of these are furnished
with denticulate rings; the greater number, like the few
small suckers of the peduncle, are sustained by rings with an
entire or smooth edge. Above the large suckers of the palm
the club tapers upwards, and is again clothed with a great
number of small and apparently smooth-ringed suckers.

‘The short arm is quite spoiled for examination: all the
horny rings are gone; and the suckers themselves are scarcel
represented. ‘This arm measured 8 feet in length, and 15
inches round the base, when fresh.

“The beak has a strong wide tooth above the middle of the
edge of the inner mandible, and a much narrower notch on

480 Rey. Canon Norman’s Revision

the outer mandible, on each side. The head and eyes were
unfortunately lost.”

Steenstrup states that Plectoteuth’s, Owen (1881), is the
hectocotylized arm of a male Architeuthus.

Tribe Il. WZyorsropa (restricted).
Fam. 5. Loliginide.

Genus Lorico, Lamarck.

Hectocotylization takes place in this genus on one of the lower
or ventral arms, on the basal portion of which the suckers are
normal, after which the size of the sucking-disks gradually
diminishes, while that of their peduncles increases in length,
till ultimately the disks entirely disappear and papille alone
remain, which give the extremity of the arm a fringed-like
appearance when viewed from the side. In certain exotic
species only one side of the arm is thus affected; but in the
European forms both rows of suckers are similarly aborted.

[Loligo vulgaris, Lamarck (but not L. vulgaris of British
authors) .

Anterior part of sides of body and ventral surface spotted ;
some of the spots often take a ring-like form, but the body is
not painted with long dark markings. Tentacular arms having
the central rows of suckers large, the lateral very much
smaller, so that the diameter of the latter is only half that of
the former and their height one third. Disks of central rows
of tentacular arms two to three times as large as largest
suckers of third arms, their horny rings having only half
their circumference finely toothed, whilst the other half is
toothless or only bears a group of four or five small blunt
teeth (in the northern form, says Steenstrup, these are indeed
the only teeth in the horny ring) ; suckers of lateral rows
with high pointed teeth on the upper half, while the lower
half is almost toothless.

Mediterranean, Adriatic, Denmark (Steenstrup).

This more southern form will probably be found on our
coast; but all the specimens which both Mr. Hoyle and
myself have examined belong to the next species. ]

15. Loligo Forbesti, Steenstrup.

Loliga vulgaris, Forbes and Hanley, Brit. Moll. iv. (1853), p, 226,
pl. LLL.

Loligo Forbesti, Steenstrup, K. D. Vid. Sells. Skr. ser. 4, iv. (1856),
p. 189, pl. i. fig. 2; Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, xx. (1857), p. 84.

of British Mollusca. 481

Loligo magna, Adams, Gen, Ree. Moll. (1858), pl. iv. fig. 3,

Loligo vulgaris, Jeffreys, B.C. vy. (1869), p. 130, pl. v. fig. 2.

Lohgo Forbest, Lenz, Jahresh. Comm. Kiel, Jahrb. i. (1871), p. 135;

Hoyle, Proc. Phys. Soc. Edinb. viii. (1835), p. 459.

Anterior part of sides of body and ventral surface painted
with long dark markings. ‘Tentacular arms having the
suckers of the central rows scarcely exceeding in size those of
the lateral rows either in diameter or height, so that the club
looks as if it bore four series of subequal suckers. 'The disks
of the central rows of the tentacular arms are scarcely one
third larger than those of the central rows of the third arms ;
their horny rings bear numerous pointed teeth all round,
usually larger and smaller alternately; suckers of lateral
rows completely set with teeth of equal size. Length of
ordinary specimens 2 feet.

St. Andrews (M‘Jntosh!), Plymouth (A. JZ, W.), Durham
and Northumberland coasts (J. Alder!); a pen from the
Northumberland coast in the Newcastle Museum measures 22
inches in length. Firth of Forth (/oyle).

Jeffreys reunited Steenstrup’s species with L. vulgaris on
the ground that the differences might be sexual, quite over-
looking the fact that Steenstrup expressly states, respecting
Danish examples, ‘‘ Of both species I have only been able to
examine the males on our coast.”

16. Loligo marmore, Verany.

Loligo marmore, Verany, Céph, Médit. 1851, p. 95, pl. xxxvil.; Forbes
and Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll. iv. (1853), p. 280, pl. QQQ. fig. 2.

Off Youghal (Dr. Ball, fide F. &@ H.). I have not seen
any British specimens of this species.

Mediterranean examples are in my collection from Naples
(Staz. Zool.) and Nice (Gal.).

A mere glance at once distinguishes the form from that of
the next species, for while the latter exhibits variation in the
proportion of parts of the body, still the body as a whole, as
tar as I have seen, never assumes the appearance of L. mar-
more, which is distinguished by the much broader fins,
generally situated further back, and which, reaching quite to
the extremity, give an altogether different look to the animal
from that of L. media. The following are measurements of
four specimens :—

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Volixe 34

482 Rey. Canon Norman’s Revision

Total length of Length from front
mantle on the margin of fin tothe Greatest breadth

back. extremity of body. of fin.
millim. millim, millim.
Naples, 9 ~... 69 35 25
af hag Sn OU 30 25
Nice #9; Sane 105 66 46
Oy cuibagistevee nee 93 55 4]

The difference between this and ZL. media is certainly not
sexual,

17. Loligo media (Linné).
Loliyo subulata, Lamarck, Mém. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris (1799), vol. i.
p, 16. heres, :
Loligo spiralis, Férussac, Dict. Class. Hist. Nat. iii. (1853), p. 67, no. 6.
Loligo parva, VOrbigny, Céph, Acét. 1848, p. 130, Calmars, pls. xvii.
and xxiii. figs. 19-21].
Loligo media, Forbes and Hanley, Brit. Moll. iv. 1853, p. 228, pl. QQQ.
fiz. 1; Hoyle, Fauna of Liverpool Bay, 1886, p. 279.
I give the following measurements for comparison with
those of the preceding species. The first specimen is a male
remarkable for its extremely produced form.

Total dorsal Length from front

length of margin of fin to Greatest breadth
mantle, extremity of body. of fin.
millim. millim. millim.
PeBlymouth, ga. 22 Cit 28
Oeste | SP SON othten 49 30
3, 5 See aKOO 49 3
4. " Ee, aoe as) 27
5, +3 tare: Ad 28
6. 1 a a a 42 26
ie Lenya? eis cee 82 52 30
Sham pees ies 7) 47 28
eas ecru 81 52 26
10. Jersey, QS... 76 47 29
Nike SEE 63 36 21

These measurements of the two species will show that there
is great variation in proportion of parts in each, but that at
the same time first that in LZ. marmore the portion of the
body behind the commencement of the fin is less in proportion
to the total length, and secondly that the breadth of the fin
is greater in proportion to the distance between its commence-
ment and the termination of the body, so that the triangle thus
formed is much less produced. Moreover in L. marmore the
fin is continued to the extremity, whereas in L. media it runs
out at some distance from it; in specimen 1 of that species (a

male remarkably elongated) it disappears at 45 millim. from
the much-produced extremity.

of British Mollusca. 483

The left ventral arm of the male is hectocotylized as
described under the genus; but in this species a further modi-
fication takes place in the fact that the normal suckers at the
base of the arm are smaller in size than the corresponding
suckers of the right ventral arm.

Specimens in my collection are from Jersey (stne/), Tenby
(C. Jeffery), Plymouth (Biol. Lab.). I have also found it
in Lamlash Bay, Firth of Clyde. North Wales (Hoyle). It
has been found in many other places on our southern coasts,
but it becomes scarce northwards.

Distribution. In consequence of this species being so fre-
quently confounded with the preceding | hesitate to quote
records of its occurrence. It is not without much doubt that
I have kept them distinct; but judging from the specimens
I here record they appear to be so.

B. SEPIOPHORA.
Section 2. KATOPROSTHARSENIA,
Fam. 6. Sepiide.
Genus Serra, Linné.
18. Sepda officinalis, Linn.

The distribution of this species is West Africa, Mediter-
ranean, Spain, France, British Islands (chiefly southern coasts),
Sweden (Norway ?)*.

Hectocotylization takes place in Sepa on the lower portion
of the fourth or ventral arm. In S. vulgaris it is the left arm
which is thus affected. It is widened out near the base, only
two or three suckers in each row are at the origin of the
arm normally developed, whilst the seven or eight following
suckers in each row become very small or almost evanescent ;
the arm, widened much at this part, has the muscles
developed in a peculiar manner, “ becoming elevated, lying
like oblique beams across the arm, and partially crossing
amongst themselves, by which means a number of pits are
formed, which are especially deep towards the upper margin,
Lastly, in these pits and on the portions which separate them
the skin is everywhere folded into elevated, thin, membranous
lamin, which run together into a reticulated form and give
the whole surface of this part of the arm a certain resem-
blance to the inside of a calf’s stomach.” (Steenstrup.)

* Fischer makes the Mediterranean form a distinct species from the
northern, and names it S. Filiowai (see Journ, Conch. xviil., xx., xxi.,
xxii.). If that be so, the more southern localities here quoted probably
belong to that species.

484 Revision of British Mollusca.

The radula has seven teeth in each transverse row ; all the
teeth are simple and of nearly equal size, except the outer
laterals, which are longer.

The eggs are ovoid, with a mamillary distal extremity, and
narrowed at their base into a stalk, with which the seaweed
to which they are attached is grasped.

Besides the hectocotylization of the arm in the male, the
cuttle-bone is smaller and less hollowed than in the other sex.

19. Sepia rupellaria, d’Orb.
cre rupellaria, VOrb. & Férussac, Céph. Acét. (1839), p. 275, pl. 111.
figs, 10-13.
Sema biserialis, Verany, Céph. Médit. (1851), p. 73, pl. xxvi. figs. F, K;
Forbes and Hanley, ‘Hist. Brit. Moll. iv. (1858), p. 241, pl. PPP.
fig. 2; Jeffreys, B. C. v. (1869), p. 141.

Magilligan, north of Ireland (Hyndman), Northumberland
coast (Alder, the specimen now in the Newcastle is
Polperro (Loughrin), Oxwich Bay, Swansea (Jeffreys).

Distribution. Naples (Zool, Stat.!), Nice (Gal.!), Noir-
moutiers and La Rochelle (a Orbigny).

20. Sepia elegans, VOrbigny.

Sepia elegans, d’Orbigny, Seiches (1826), pl. viii. figs. 1-5 ; d’Orbigny
& Feérussac, Céph. Acét. 1839, p. 275, Seiches, pl. vii. figs. 1-5,
pl. xxvii. figs, 3-6; Jetireys, B. C. iv. 1869, p. 140.

Jersey (4. VM. N.), Polperro, Cornwall (J. Couch, in Alder’s
Coll. in Newcastle Museum), Guernsey (Lukis), Oxwich Bay,
near Swansea (Jeffreys).

Distribution. Messina, Adriatic, coast of Algiers, and
Malaga (d@’ Orbigny), Naples (Zool. Stat. !), Nice (Gal. !).

[(C. PHRAGMOPHORA.

Shell in the form of a series of air-cells, connected us
each other by means of a siphon.

Fam. 7. Spirulide.
Genus SprruLa, Lamarck.
Spirula Peroni?, Lamarck.
Spirula Peronit, Forbes and Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll. iv. (1858), p. 242.

Dead shells occasionally washed to the western shores of
Great Britain as well as of the rest of Europe, but never
taken alive so far north. ]

(To be continued. }

Miscellaneous. 485

LX.—On a new Sparrow-Hawk from Madeira.
By R. Bowp er SuHarpr, F.L.S. &e.

My colleague Mr, W.R. Ogilvie Grant has just returned from
a three weeks? trip to Madeira, and amongst many interesting
species of birds obtained during his residence on the island was
a female Sparrow-Hawk which turns out to be a most inter-
esting insular form of A. nisus, quite sufficiently charac-
terized to deserve a specific name. I therefore call it after my
energetic friend and colleague

Accipiter Grantt, sp. n.

@ ad. similis A, nisi 2, sed ubique saturatior, supra schistaceo-
nigricans ; subtus late et regulariter nigro fasciatus ; tibiis, subala-
ribus et axillaribus late nigro fasciatis.

Long. tot. 15:5, culm. 0°75, alee 8°7, caudee 6°9, tarsi 2°3.
Although the comparative diagnosis given above would

make it appear that the similarity of this new Sparrow- Hawk

to the common species of Kurope is very marked, the differ-
ences between them are really very pronounced, and when, as

I hope it will do shortly, a figure of the Madeira species

appears in the ‘Ibis,’ it will be seen that a very interesting

Accipitrine bird has been added to our list of species of the

Western Palearctic Region. ‘The Madeira bird is in fact

very closely allied to Accipiter madagascariensis, but it

possesses a well-marked chestnut tuft of plumes on the flanks,
which shows that its real affinities are with A. nisus, as this
character is always wanting in the Madagascar bird.

MISCELLANEOUS.
British Fossil Crinoids. By F. A. Barner, M.A., F.G.S.

Il. The Classification of the Inadunata Fistulata
(continued from p. 383).

CorRRIGENDA,

THere are a few unfortunate errors and obscurities in the earlicr
portion of this paper; though they do not affeet the argument, it is
best to correct them without delay. Andatthe same time lmust thank
Dr. P. H. Carpenter for having kindly called my attention to them.

P. 311, last line, for “excretion” read “the discharge of excrement.”
« Excretion ” in scientific language means “ the dise harge of a secre-
tion; excrement is not a secretion.

P, 313, last line, for ‘¢ Miller” read “ Miller.”

iP. 315, line 3, for “Band C as Right, D and Eas Left” read “ Band C
as Left, D and Eas Right ;” T must apologize to Dr. Carpenter, and
indeed +0 my readers gener ally, for this very bothering slip.

iz 319, second line after Table, instead of “ Chamb red Organ” read

“plane separating the Stem from the Calyx,” This plane i is chosen

486 Miscellaneous.

because of its nearness to the Chambered Organ, the capsule of which
is the Goyerning Organ of the animal’s movements; the Chambered
Organ, however, is, as a rule, actually above the Infrabasals.

122, Bille line 10, for a basals and infrabasals ” read “ intrabasals (as well as
basa ls).” ‘The quotation from Wachsmuth and Springer, in inverted
commas, refers only to infrabasals ; the application of it to basals was
inaccurate and at the same time weakened my argument. Never-
theless a mere correction would not be quite fair, for it is a fact, as
Mr. Wachsmuth has elsewhere pointed out, that ‘the basals also are
proportionately large in the young.

Pp. 820 et seqg. The sign R-+ is of course the same as RX of p. 333 and
of Plate XIV.; but R/ is an intentional difference, An unfortunate
though biemte mistake in sending out the proofs prevented me
from correcting them quite as closely as I could have wished.

P, 323, 2nd and 8rd lines from bottom, Some may think that they see a
misrepresentation here. I have represented Messrs. Wachsmuth and
Springer as saying that the azygos plate is as much radial as inter-

radial. A correct quotation would have been “the azygous plate in

Baerocrinus is &e.” But since they consider this plate in 1 Baerocrinus
to be homologous with the radianal (which I do not), and since they
in the very next sentence imply that it is in an ancestral stage, it is
clear that a simple and exact quotation would not have given their
complete meaning but would have tended to confuse the issues.
Accuracy, even pedantic accuracy, is not to be despised; but to one
summarizing an argument, the spirit usually seems more worthy of
retention than does the letter.

On a few Californian Meduse. By J. Waurer Fewxes.

The author gives the results of his investigations on the Medusz
of the coast of southern California-—chiefly of the Santa Barbara
Channel, into which the vast waters of the Pacific carry many strange
organisms. He describes a new Pelagia (P. panopyra), a new
Aurelia (A. labiata), which, however, closely resembles A. flavidula
of the Atlantic shores, and Polyorchis penicillata, A. Agassiz, a form
having intermediate characters (resembling both Anthomeduse and
Leptomedusze), for no otocysts occur on the margin of the umbrella
as in the former, while the reproductive organs are on the radial
canals, as in the latter. Another form, Dipurena, has an umbrella
like Sarsia, but with nine short, clavate, marginal tentacles.
The reproductive organs occur in the manubrium, as in the -genus
mentioned. Microcampa, n. g., again, has six radial canals instead
of four, and a single, club-shaped, inflexible tentacle. It is pro-
bably animmature form, Another Medusoid is Hyhocodon—pro-
bably near Steenstrupia—in which the buds arise near the long solitary
tentacle bristling with rings of nematocysts. Each bud has a single
tentacle. The interest in connexion with this form is the more vivid
since a very similar form is found in St. Andrews Bay, though in the
latter case the much larger buds present two tentacles, while in the
adult two shorter tentacles occur near the long one, each springing
from a similarly enlarged base. Mr. Fewkes figures these two ten-
tacles, but is of opinion they arise from the buds. As at St. An-
drews the buds showed two tentacles, further investigation on this
pomt would be satisfactory. The author concludes his very inter-

Miscellaneous. 487

esting paper, which is illustrated by six beautiful plates, with a
notice of Sarsia rosaria, probably from a Syncoryne abounding on

the piers of a wharf, and with notes also on a Campanularian, on
| Willa, Athorybia, and Velella. We OC. Mi:

Chemical Researches on the Fossil Tests of Foraminifera, Mollusea,
and Crustacea. By M. Srantstas Meunter.

M. de Folin having obtained a flocculent residue by the treatment
of Nummulitic rocks from Biarritz with acids, came to the conclu-
sion that this was of organic nature, and regarded it as sarcodic
material, He called the author’s attention to the subject, who care-
fully repeated the experiments upon Nummulitie rocks from the
neighbourhood of Paris. Examples of Mumimutlites levigatus were
partially dissolved in dilute hydrochloric acid until they were quite
cleared and milk-white ; they were then dissolved in fresh acid, and
the residue, amounting to 2°233 per cent. of the Nummulites, was
examined,

This residue had the appearance of very fine clay, but on heating
to redness some portions on platinum foil they became brown, then
carbonized, and after combustion left a reddish residue. On
heating the substance in a tube with some soda-lime a strong eyo-
lution of ammonia took place. It is therefore a nitrogenous
substance.

This supposed animal substance, however, forms only 16-66 per
cent. of the flocculent mass, and the mineral material associated
with it renders analysis difficult. The results of analysis, given with
some reserve, are as follows :—

Carbomy ei wiews eta ary Bean ets 64
Elydrogen so... Staci ereledarerateta: 5
INGETO SOME Teas «cern ss Wee waey Le
Oxygen (difference)...... setaneee lcd

100

The author has repeated the experiments with similar results in
the case of other Freach Foraminiferal rocks.

By the advice of M. Milne-Edwards he extended his researches to
the fossilized tests of various Mollusca and Crustacea, among which
he cites Psammocarcinus Hericartii and Cytherea splendida, and in
all cases obtained the organic compound with the same composition
and properties. As in the case of the Nummulites the substance is
light grey, with a peculiar silky lustre, and it is mixed with a very
considerable amount of mineral elements, consisting especially of
small acicular crystals of carbonate of lime.

The author believes that in the organic compounds obtained we
have a residue of the fossil animals which may be compared with
the carbonaceous combustibles of vegetable origin, and that it is to
their presence that we must ascribe the discovery of nitrogen so
frequently repeated by Delesse.in his analyses of sedimentary rocks.
—Comptes Rendus, March 17, 1890, p. 597,

488

INDEX to VOL. V.

ACANTHOCYSTIS, notes on species of,
147.

Accipiter, new species of, 485.

Acraea, new species of, 167.

Actzea, new species of, 74.

Actinophrys, on some species of,
148.

gir, on the Actinian genus, 261.

gus, new species of, 36.

Agaue, new species of, 189.

Aino, new species of, 112.

Aleena, new species of, 442.

Amphipoda, on the generic names
of some, 192; of the Boulonnais,
on the, 263.

Andrews, Dr. E. A., on a new species
of Phoronis, 445.

Angamiana, characters of the new
genus, 254.

Annelida and Mollusca, on the rela-
tionship of the, 257.

Antherozoids, on the formation of
the, in Eudorina elegans, 543.

Apatelodes, new species of, 217.

Appias, new species of, 358.

Arachnactis, note on, 306.

Arhopala, new species of, 449.

Aysenura, new species of, 215.

Asthipa, new species of, 170. :

Atlanta, on the occurrence of, at St.
Andrews, 47.

Baoris, new species of, 362.

Bather, F. A., on the British Fossil
Crinoids, 306, 375, 485.

Batocera, new species of, 55.

Batrachia, new, 145.

Batrachians of Amoorland, list of
the, 137.

Birds, new, 80, 103, 485.

Blattidz, on the constitution of the
body in the, 227.

Bombinator, new species of, 143.

3onnier, J., on a new Entoniscian

parasitic on Pinnotheres, 122; on
Unciola crenatipalmata, 263.

Books, new :—Prince Rudolf's Notes
on Sport and Ornithology, 118;
Day’s Fishes of British India, 115 ;
Bergens Museums Aarsberetning
for 1888, 117; Proceedings of the
Bristol Naturalists’ Society, 119;
Hind’s Flora of Suffolk, 194;
Oates’s Birds of British India, 197 ;
Distant’s Monograph of the Ori-
ental Cicadidee, 252; Wood-Ma-
son’s Catalogue of the Mantodea,
253; Woodward ‘and Sherborn’s
Catalogue of British fossil Verte-
brata, 337; Miller’s North-Ameri-
can Geology and Paleontology,
339 ; Vogdes’s Catalogue of North-
American Palseozoic Crustacea,
340; Struthers’s Memoir on the
Anatomy of the Humpback Whale,
413.

Boulenger, G. A., on Reptiles and
Batrachians from Amoorland, 157 ;
on the varieties of Chalcides ocel-
latus, 4465.

British area in marine zoology, on
the, 345, 454. 2

Bucephalus Haimeanus, 541.

Bugula, new species of, 18.

Butterflies, on seasonal dimorphism
in Japanese, 200.

Cacia, new species of, 56.

Callosune, new species of, 356.

Catenaria, new species of, 17.

Centipedes from Madras, on a collec-
tion of, 256.

Centrolepis asper, remarks on, 450.

Ceresium, new species of, 169.

Cestoda, on the morphology and
phylogeny of the, 417.

Chalcides ocellatus, on the varieties

* of, 445,

INDEX.

Chameleon, new species of, 71.

Chorilia, new species of, 76.

Chrysochroa, new species of, 169.

Cicadidie, on a new genus of, 254.

Claus, Prof. C., on the morphology
and phylogeny of the Cestoda,
417,

Clausilia, on the nomenclature of the
oral folds in the shells of, 209.

Coccolepis, new species of, 452.

Coccosteus decipiens, on the struc-
ture of, 125,

Coleoptera, new, 33, 48, 169, 218,
365, 409.

Coloboceras, characters of the new
genus, 178.

Coptops, new species of, 57.

Cribrilina annulata, new variety of,
18.

Crick, G. C., on muscular impres-
sions of Carboniferous and Jurassic
Nautiloids, 220; on new and im-
perfectly-defined Jurassic, Creta-
ceous, and Tertiary Nautili, 265,
388.

Crinoids, on the British fossil, 306,
373, 485.

Crocidura, new species of, 31, 225.

Crustacea, chemical researches on
the fossil tests of, 487; new, 72,
236, 250.

Ctenophores, on the occurrence of
the, throughout the year, 43.

Curetis, new species of, 451.

Cylindrepomus, new species of, 61.

Cynopterus, new species of, 255.

Dangeard, P. A., on the formation of
the antherozoids in Eudorina ele-
gans, 345,

Danielssen, Dr. D. C., on the Actinian
genera gir and Fenja, 261.

Darwinian theory, on divergent evo-
lution and the, 156,

Davis, J. W., on the dentition of
Pleuroplax, 291.

Deudorix, new species of, 28.

Dimorphism in Japanese butterflies,
on seasonal, 200.

Dinosaurian bone, on a peculiar
horn-like, 255.

Dinosaurs of the Wealden, on the,
120; on remains of small Sauro-
podous, 255.

Dipurena, characters of the new
genus, 486.

Distant, W. L., on new genera of
Cicadidie, 166, 234.

489

Dixon, G. Y. and A. F., on Tealia
tuberculata and T. crassicornis, 66.

Dobson, G. E., on new species of
Crocidura, 31, 225; on a new
species of Sorex, 155.

Doleschallia, new species of, 171.

Druce, H. H., on new Lycznide,
24.

Druce, H., on new Lepidoptera, 213.

Enispia, new species of, 63.

Hpitola, new species of, 24.

EKudorina elegans, on the formation
of the antherozoids in, 343.

Eudule, new species of, 215.

Kuhalisidota, new species of, 214.

Kunidia, new species of, 64.

Kuthalia, new species of, 354.

Evolution and the Darwinian
theory, on divergent, 156.

Fenja, on the Actinian genus, 261.

Fewkes, J. W., on excavations made
in rocks by sea-urchins, 416; notes
on a few Californian Meduse,
486.

Fish, new, 294, 450.

Fish-remains, on some British Ju-
rassic, 341,

Fishes, on some Ganoid, from the
English Lower Lias, 430.

Flustrella, new species of, 25.

Foord, A. H., on muscular impres-
sions of Carboniferous and Juras-
sic Nautiloids, 220; on new and
imperfectly-defined Jurassic, Cre-
taceous, and Tertiary Nautili, 265,
338.

Foraminifera from the S.W. coast of
Ireland, 124; chemical researches
on the fossil tests of, 487.

Fritze, Dr. A., on seasonal dimor-
phism in Japanese butterflies, 200.

Gahan, C. J., on new Longicornia,
48; on a new species of Ceresium,
169.

Gasina, new species of, 216.

Geological Society, proceedings of
the, 120, 253, 341.

Giard, A., on a new Entoniscian
parasitic on Pinnotheres, 122; on
the relationship of the Annelida
and Mollusea, 257.

Girvanella, on the occurrence of the
genus, 206.

Gnatholea, new species of, 53.

Grant, W. R. O., on Rallus pusillus
and its allies, 80.

Gulick, Rev. J. T., on divergent

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. v. 35

490

evolution and the Darwinian
theory, 156.

Giinther, Dr. A., on the fauna of
Madagascar, 69.

(zymnopleurus, new species of, 367,
410.

Haase, E., on abdominal appen-
dages in Hexapoda, 201; on the
constitution of the body in the
Blattidee, 227.

Halacaride, synoptical revision of
the, 172.

Halacarus, new species of, 180.

Halisidota, new species of, 214.

Heliozoa, on some, 144.

Hemicentetes, new species of, 69.

Hercoglossa, new species of, 397.

Heteranaphe, characters of the new
genus, 442.

Hexapoda, on abdominal appendages
in, 201.

Himantarium, new species of, 248.

Hincks, Rev. T., critical notes on
the Polyzoa, 83.

Hinde, Dr. G. J., on a new genus of
Siliceous Sponges, 254.

Holt, E. W. L., on a young specimen
of Zoarces viviparus, 256,

Homoptera, new, 166, 254.

Hormurus, new species of, 288.

Huet, L., on Bucephalus Haimeanus,
341.

Huphina, new species of, 361.

Hyena striata in the Tertiary of the
‘Val d’Arno, on the occurrence of,
253.

Hyastenus, new species of, 76.

Hybocodon, characters of the new
genus, 486.

Hydrias, new species of, 217.

Hydromedusee, on abnormal, 40; on
the occurrence of some, 296.

Hydrozoa from the China Sea, on,
11

Hypolyceena, new species of, 27.

Idmonea, new species of, 22.

Tolaus, new species of, 29.

Ives, J. E., on mimicry of the en-
vironment in Pterophryne histrio,
198.

Ixias, new species of, 357.

Jones, Prof. T. R., on some Paleo-
zoic Ostracoda, 121.

Kirby, W. F., on a new species of
Dragon-fly, 112.

Kirkpatrick, R., on Hydrozoa and
Polyzoa from the China Sea, 11.

INDEX.

Larinopoda, new species of, 25.

Lepidoptera, new, 24, 167, 170, 218,
224, 335, 353, 440, 449.

Lepralia, new species of, 20.

Leucoma, new species of, 443.

Lichenopora, new species of, 22.

Liophis, new species of, 71.

Lucanus, new species of, 33.

Lyczenesthes, new species of, 24.

Lyceenide, new, 24, 449.

Lydekker, R., on the Dinosaurs of
the Wealden and the Sauroptery-
cians of the Purbeck and Oxford
Clay, 120; on the occurrence of
the Striped Hyzena in the Tertiary
of the Val d’Arno, 253; on re-
mains of small Sauropodous Dino-
saurs, and on a peculiar horn-like
Dinosaurian bone, from the Weal-
den, 255.

M‘Intosh, Prof., on abnormal Hydro-
medusze, 40; on the occurrence of
the Ctenophores throughout the
year, 43; on a Heteropod (At-
lanta) in British waters, 47; on
the occurrence of Hydromedusee
and Scyphomeduse, 296; on
Ayrachnactis, 306.

Mammals, new, 31, 69, 155, 225, 235.

Mantodea, on new genera and
species of, 457, 439.

Marine zoology, on the “ British
Area ” in, 345, 464.

Meade-Waldo, E. G., on a new Tit,
103.

Medusee, on some Californian, 486.

Megathopa, new species of, 412.

Meinert, Dr. Fr., on the Ugimyia-
larva, 103.

Melanitis, new species of, 353.

Membranipora, new species of, 18.

Metopodontus, new species of, 35.

Meunier, S., chemical researches on
the fossil tests of Foraminifera,
Mollusca, and Crustacea, 487.

Microcampa, characters of the new
genus, 486.

Microporella coscinophora, variety of,

Mispila, new species of, 62.

Mollusca, new, 222, 265, 388; on the
relationship of the, with the Anne-
lida, 257 ; chemical researches on
the fossil tests of, 487 ; revision of
the British, 452.

Mountain-lakes, on the fauna of, 259.

Nautiloids, on muscular impressions

INDEX.

of some Carboniferous and Jurassic,
220.

Nautilus, new species of, 222; on
new and imperfectly-defined Ju-
rassic, Cretaceous, and Tertiary
species of, 265, 388.

Naxia, new species of, 77.

Nestler, K., on the anatomy and
developmental history of Petro-
myzon Planeri, 262.

Neuroptera, new, 112.

Nigidius, new species of, 38.

Norman, Rey. Canon, on the “ British
Area” in marine zoology, 845 ; re-
vision of the British Mollusca,
452.

Nyphasia, new species of, 53.

Orthoptera, new, 437, 459.

Oryba, new species of, 215,

Ostracoda, on some Paleozoic, 121.

Otostigma, new species of, 245,

Oxygnathus, notes on the genus,
451,

Pachydissus, new species of, 52.

Papilio, new species of, 224.

Parnara, new species of, 363.

Parus, new species of, 103.

Parymenopus, characters of the new
genus, 437,

Pemptolasius, characters of the new
genus, 64,

Penard, E., on some Heliozoa, 144.

Perola, new species of, 218.

Petromyzon Planeri, remarks on the
anatomy of, 262.

Pharsalia, new species of, 55.

Phoronis, new species of, 445.

Phylactella, new species of, 20.

Pinacopteryx, new species of, 336,

Pinnotheres, on a new Entoniscian
parasitic on, 122.

Pinnotherion, characters of the new
genus, 122,

Pithecops, new species of, 25.

Planema, new species of, 335.

Pleuroplax, on the dentition of, 291.

Plocederus, new species of, 51.

Pocock, R. I., on Crustacea from the
China Sea, 72; on Scorpions and
Centipedes from Madras, 236; on
anew genus and species of Scor-
pion, 250.

Polyzoa from the China Sea, on, 16 ;
critical notes on the, 83.

Porzana pusilla, remarks on, 80.

Prinobius, new species of, 50.

Prosopoccelus, new species of, 34,

491

Pterophryne histrio, on mimicry of
the environment in, 198.

Rallus pusillus and its allies, on, 80.

Reptiles, new, 71; of Amoorland,
list of the, 137,

Retepora, new species of, 21.

Rhapala, new species of, 450.

Rhaphipodus, new species of, 48.

Rhaxella, characters of the new
genus, 254.

Rhodopis, new species of, 59.

Rhombognathus magnirostris, new
variety of, 177.

Sallzea, new species of, 215.

Sauropterygians of the Purbeck and
Oxford Clay, 120.

Scaptognathus, characters of the new
genus, 190,

Scarabzeus, new species of, 365.

Schulze, Prof. F. E., on the Actinian
genera Aigir and Fenja, 261.

Scorpio Swammerdami, remarks on,
237.

Scorpion, on a new genus and species
of, 250.

Seyphomedusz, on the occurrence of
the, 305,

Sea-Urching, on excavations made in
rocks by, 416.

Sebasteos, new species of, 367,

Semyra, new species of, 218.

Sharpe, Miss EK. M., on new East-
African Lepidoptera, 335, 440.

Sharpe, R. B., on a new sparrow-
hawk from Madeira, 485.

Smith, E. A., on the nomenclature of
the oral folds in the shells of
Clausilia, 209.

Smith, H. G., on new Lepidoptera,
167, 170, 224.

Sorex, new species of, 155.

Spalgis, new species of, 26.

Sponges, on a new genus of siliceous,
254.

Stebbing, Rey. T. R. R., on the
generic namesof some Amphipoda,
192.

Stephanoceros Hichhornii, on the
anatomy of, 1; on a parasite of, 9,

Stephanoscyphus, new species of, 18.

Sthenias, new species of, 61.

Stibara, new species of, 65.

Strongylocentrus drébachiensis, on
excavations made in rocks by, 416,

Suastus, new species of, 364,

Swinhoe, Co]. C., on new Indian
butterflies, 353, 449,

492

Talainga, characters of the new ge-
nus, 166,

Tealia tuberculata and T. crassicornis,
remarks on, 66.

Telchinia, new species of, 442.

Teligonus, new species of, 365.

Teracolus, new species of, 336, 441.

Thaumantias melanops, on abnormal
specimens of, 40.

, new species of, 300.

Thomas, O., on a new Cynopterus,
235.

Thrincopyge, new species of, 218.

Thylactus, new species of, 58.

Thynnus, new fossil species of, 294.

Tima Bairdii, on abnormal specimens
of, 40.

Traquair, Dr. R. H., on the structure
of Coccosteus decipiens, 125.

Triznocorypha, characters of the new
genus, 439.

Trouessart, Dr. E. L., synoptical
revision of the Halacaridee, 172.

Trypanidius, new species of, 219.

Trypanococeus, on a species of, para-
sitic on Stephanoceros Hichhornii,
9

Ugimyia-larva, notes on the, 103.

Unciola, synopsis of the genus, 263.

Undina, new species of, 435,

Uromachus, characters of the new
genus, 250.

Vallentin, R., on the anatomy of
Stephanoceros Hichhornii, 1.

INDEX.

Vampyrella spirogyre, remarks on,
153.

Vanessa levana, on the seasonal di-
morphism of, 200,

Waterhouse, C. O., on new Lucanide,
33; on a new species of Chryso-
chroa, 169; on two new Bupres-
tide, 218; on new Scarabeida,
365, 409.

Wethered, E., on the occurrence of
the genus Girvanella, 256.

Wood-Mason, Prof. J., on new
genera and species of Mantodea,
437, 439,

Woodward, A. §., on a fossil Tunny
from the Coralline Crag, 294; on
British Jurassic fish-remains refer-
able to Hurycormus and Hypso-
cormus, 341; on some Ganoid
fishes from the English Lower
Lias, 430.

Woodward, B. B., on the nomen-
clature of the oral folds in the
shells of Clausilia, 209.

Wright, J., on Foraminifera from
the S.W. coast of Ireland, 124.

Xoanodera, new species of, 52.

Xylotrechus, new species of, 54.

Zoarces viviparus, on @ young speci-
men of, 256.

Zschokke, Dr. F., on the fauna of
mountain-lakes, 259.

Zygophylax, new species of, 12.

END OF THE FIFTH VOLUME,

PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS,
RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

Wa { (Pa

Mintern Bros. hth.

PUI.

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. §. 6. Vol.V
Mintern Bros . hth, -

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hust. 5. 6. Vol. 5. PUM.

é a ip

Mantern Bros. imp.

eae

y, aay e
MRS, Sie Th
OMe Dy

eat Ly
iy

SME ay Le
i

Datars
fein,

Ww tl

ne’

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. §. 6. Vol. 5. PUI.

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. 8. 6. Vol. 5. PUV.

ate
—

Dla Boye lad

>
)

St ea

ag. Nat. fh

Aniv.d

Mintern Br

ees
dith_.

del. et

Mintern Bros.

Ana. & Mag. Nat. Mist .S. 6. Vol.5. Pb. IX.

Mintern Bros .imp.

R Mnternm del.et hth
1. Reava emuurensts 2. Bombinator orientalis.

M‘Farlane & Erskine, Lith"? Edin?

Ann. & Mey Nut. Hist. S.6 Vol. 5, PL.

eePELLEEAEEL ALGER AARC } 1:3
eco EEN AOAC WGWK 13a
Yep pssannnny Sonne DSS

WAY
WEE EOEE

CEL

R.H.Traquaar, del

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. 5.6. Vol. 5. Pl. XI.

Mintern Bros. hth

ait
are:

wisn et,

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist.5.6. Vol. 3. PL XIE

Mintern Bros. ith.

bid

my ay A i
ic ,
re); At

‘ i

;
, ' : *

: . oT

, a 7 y 7 i i”
> 4 ; 2

~~ i f :
> : i

Anr.& Mag. Nat. Hist.5.6. Vol. 3. Pt. Ml.

W.H. Crowther del. et lith Mintern Bros. mp.

DENTITION OF PLEURODUS

Ann. (a Mag. Nat. Hist. S. 6. Vol. Dis ke ALY.

WS. PHCW.aS. FAB.

1879 1882 1886 1890

Oncecrinus Gucephalus

‘oR ths
oS

ao a
BPO, Sw we

Lupackycrinus
B4 “4
ORS Gal (On
ONS
irr &&

le Phialocrinus
SE
Cercoerinus
Bg

Erisocrinus

all

GENERA OF FISTULATE CRINOIDS. Ann. § Mag, Nat. Hist. 8. 6. Vol. 5. Pl. XIV.

Ws S. P.HCOW.«S. ; P.HCW.S. :
1879 1882 1886 1890 1882 1886 1890

ae .«S. FAB &
Y B SLE -
PTTL Gis CROOK MS | KOKOKS NOR

AER aAcpertas (Eye) Monoere Rus a athocrinus Lee eryecnin us
(Q
Mires ee 8 oe ER) moe ie
MUD POO Ee fois oay WME Ft
ip adipentas (var) & Gee ee Kawi clings Beas Oncoerine a RS.
UseSUNSIGIGIon: aaa DP eee OO per
MOOI eae ae ae a @IOD I bo Cine
aad tumidus | Cmte perenes radocrinus v A rosus piletan vw
R sowmae yiheaserah resting (| (4
TL on the <3;
CSeRe OE: Ro ¢ wRVE, Peer mince @ QO>D a oS 1OD eh ew
E See us ee Gearing — Pedi oe a oiacrinus ae ee
oA D EN a, any fa cy Oa
SSeS Se TED (KTR? (xR (ee AR usage EL) EY
OO oI Hee BAe veaee pyre Hiss ie
for TZ2UuS ee allt , Cro Stace = ;
Gnes ca ae
a Ory CRY Gay Gay BARA Ge
PSI Be a ee BOOLOO,
Heterocrinus bellevillensis Be Ee arisocrinus
ee ey) asgsse Baa
een fgg nse! an ama i a] 2 Be sen SS BIO ‘aren
ERD BORG told we
RY Oy Og oe a) eye nee AY eae 5 Phialocrinus

pa ou)

oe SROSY PAP eee it BAe

C
ROMA bee A CACTINUS oe TinUuS
r 19
OY 69 ia ~ Oss oo) “omnes UY
=
Age R 1 OB. Wi, 2. TEMA CORR RAR RAR
Oe
B® BV rs ~ av aN ra
Castocrinus ee rt ee. Rings eg 7 “ae ea y; Wes. ke i oe Mycocrinus Catillocrinus Erisocrinus

ni)

eV,

Nat. Hist. S. 6. Vol. 5. Pl

Ann. & Mag.

IN FISTULATA.

STRUCTURE

LEZLG

o
Dadocrints

17
a

772ULS

Bo tryocre

272US
Ww
720LS

=~-

-o CrYOCT
Vv
Pa rycre

72a S

Decadecrinus L7cré

2722

Hotlocr
Belem r20CT2rrus

CVCLUS

Woodocrzius

us Graphio
16

\
\
Zé.

SN
= SSS7
Sr

\
S \
Sera, \

Sw
: LR N
ane
+)
N,
AAA R:
8
we

LOCK E72US

Ca jah

Ann. § Mag. Nat. Hist. 8. 6. Vol. 5. Pl. XV.

IN FISTULATA

STRUCTURE

TYPES OF ARM

P°LILMS

fleteroc

Hybocrinedae

72S

Belemnocrznus

CHUM US

oO
VWALOCK ETE

i
WZ
H Z
(J
omatocrizus Cra
Wocdlocrzvtus

Decad.

SCAPhALOCrTzZRus

il
» y f
f

My)

(4 y
Cl4
Y

“Ss

a me

? 272

Lic@e710c?

ZOCY772ULS

CSOCTL7IZAS

O?/2
7

rei
Lar

locrinus
LDendrorinus

*STSUAIAIALD wurpuys) G SURDVUS SAVE sada ODIO) © ede s
1 1 1 Y) Gs: d as ty AOASY) Ss oy VU) *
~ duat *soig uszsyuyy . ; = G : ss le! !
‘aT } yep AaTysy, w neelteyg

gE II TON: Poy *

MONEE I

Année Mag. Nat. Hist. §.6. Vol. 5. PL. XVI,

Mintern Bros . lth.

. Pi?

_—

iv a

ox Ea fer ree cea Flin ecg een a A
w S — w _ 188]
zw \. “RS 2) 5 ,,
a = E °3
2 \S = a ~ a
(ep) —_ w =

| ES SMITHSONIAN ON Cee eee a 1YV!
< are = p, = <

% 3 : 2 OS: :

\ 2 : s : Z,

Sb = >” Ss >
= 75) Zz o z

LSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS S3I¥YVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
= io Zz a S
122) ss ” nn
= oc = w ie.
c as Cc a ba
= oO a, =
O i 5 rt rs
a ey Zz es ae

IES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS SJ3IYV:
g : : : g
= es = = ie
= = = ae =
Ss a =
ky = = F

‘Mig : o z ys oe

ILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
z 22) = ee n rae
as = yc i: <

=7 ~ iy a 4 z

y= 2 Uy = 2 E
s > = ie =
wo” Ps m2 ba z= Ww

RIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLIWS
= 4 : RS Sy =
< = r= = x =
a = a = Y ca
5 oz ay 2 + es

S3!1YWYNGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
a ra a Si " ie
w — — df ow
: és : 5 $42
*u - 2 - OL?
: P eh
an ene 0 z O

RI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNT _ NVINOSH OS,
< or = , = =

\ Z = N = aS z

N @ a ~~ NG nw pf a @

WV 2 E Av 2Z. F Z.

rote Fae : :

JLSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS SAlYVYGI1 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _

Ure a & Ww Aa A <29.NO th Uy tf

Py reo < ‘\ 3a \o) e tify, A
m= We c AM!) = Kemp = GG =

INSTITU

hs)

INSTITU

S31uyv

INSTITL

BS HP =f

INSTITU

Erk:

is
E

sie SV EEC VERE wae 8 me Uw) ws 6 8

.
>

ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNILILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31YV

x :
N
X
RA
S31yvugit

On pc
S3aiyu¥vugliy
Pie
INSTITUTION
S3iu¥VvVudlii
INSTITUTION
Ss SS

Na
~

ve"

i
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIA

NVINOSHLINS
NVINOSHLIWS

SNI_NVINOSHLINS SA3I1YVYEIT LIBRARIES INSTITUT

NN DCU
NOILNLILSNI

NOLLNLILSNI
NOLLNLILSNI

ES SMITHSONIAN_INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVY

S3IUVHYSIT LIBRARIES

INSTITUTION

INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION

SN SMITHSONIAN

SSIdaVealt LIBRARIES

SMITHSONIAN

NVINOSHLINS S31uvual LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN

NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
Ye
la
SMITHSONIAN

ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVY
RSS

* Lp Wg

Wyss
“iy

SNI_NVINOSHLIWS

LIBRARIES
LIBRARIES

S3IYVYdIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN_INSTITU

ON Cy

saruvugi
/
SJINVUGII LIBRARIES

INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI

salavegii

ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31uV

+ te

> Y VINOSHLINS S3IYVYE!I1 LIBRARIES

STITY
> %

4
)
=
z=

| GY

INWINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
NVINOSHLIWS

SMITHSONIAN INSTITU

MW,
5.

ARIES SMITHSONIAN

z
op)
a
=
| @ug

VLILSNI
STITUS
ie

mARIES
Solan

SAT tenths min

N LIBRARIES

fe)

iil

INSTITU

SMITHSONIAN |

0131 lt

3 9088

TAS TSE RY

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "The Annals and magazine of natural history; zoology, botany, and geology"

See other formats